Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Zeiger Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research 2ed 1999
Zeiger Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research 2ed 1999
Editors
NOTICE
Preface
Credits
TABLE OF CONTENTS ↑
Chapter 6 Results
Chapter 7 Discussion
Chapter 9 References
BACK OF BOOK ↑
Appendix
Back
Editor
Mimi Ze ige r M. A.
LECTU RER IN SCIEN TIFIC WRITIN G
CARDIOVASCU LAR RESEARCH IN STITU TE, U N IVERSITY OF CALIFORN IA, SAN FRAN CISCO,
SAN FRAN CISCO, CALIFORN IA
Secondary Editors
Ste phe n Zollo
Edi tor
Muza Na vrozov
Edi tor
Ca the rine H. Sa gge s e
Pr oducti on Super v i sor
Je rry Ra lya
Index
Ma lloy Lithogra phing, Inc . w a s P rinte r a nd Binde r.
Back
NOTICE
Medi ci ne i s an ever changi ng sci ence. As new r esear ch and cl i ni cal ex per i ence br oaden
our k now l edge, changes i n tr eatm ent and dr ug therapy ar e r equi r ed. The author and the
publ i sher of thi s w or k have checked w i th sour ces bel i eved to be r el i abl e i n thei r ef f or ts
to pr ov i de i nf or m ati on that i s com pl ete and general l y i n accor d w i th the standar ds
accepted at the ti m e of publ i cati on. How ever, i n v i ew of the possi bi l i ty of hum an er r or or
changes i n m edi cal sci ences, nei ther the author nor the publ i sher nor any other par ty
w ho has been i nvol ved i n the pr eparati on or publ i cati on of thi s w or k war rants that the
i nf or m ati on contai ned her ei n i s i n ever y r espect accurate or com pl ete. Reader s ar e
encouraged to conf i r m the i nf or m ati on contai ned her ei n w i th other sour ces. For ex am pl e
and i n par ti cul ar, r eader s ar e adv i sed to check the pr oduct i nf or m ati on sheet i ncl uded i n
the pack age of each dr ug they pl an to adm i ni ster to be cer tai n that the i nf or m ati on
contai ned i n thi s book i s accurate and that changes have not been m ade i n the
r ecom m ended dose or i n the contrai ndi cati ons f or adm i ni strati on. Thi s r ecom m endati on i s
of par ti cul ar i m por tance i n connecti on w i th new or i nf r equentl y used dr ugs.
Back
Preface
A speci al f eatur e of thi s book i s i ts em phasi s on str uctur e and stor y tel l i ng. The
book ex pl ai ns how to constr uct both i ndi v i dual paragraphs and each secti on of a
r esear ch paper so that each paragraph, each secti on, and f i nal l y the paper as a
w hol e tel l a cl ear stor y.
Other speci al f eatur es of thi s book ar e num er ous speci f i c pr i nci pl es of cl ear
bi om edi cal w r i ti ng (sum m ar i zed as check l i sts at the end of each chapter ),
num er ous ex am pl es of uncl ear w r i ti ng f ol l ow ed by cl ear er r ev i si ons, and
num er ous exer ci ses coupl ed w i th one or m or e r ev i si ons. The ex am pl es and
exer ci ses ar e taken m ai nl y f r om draf ts and al so f r om som e publ i shed
bi om edi cal r esear ch paper s. The r ev i si ons ar e m odel s that students can i m i tate
i n thei r ow n paper s.
Several i nstr uctor s have used thi s book successf ul l y i n cour ses on bi om edi cal
w r i ti ng gi ven to graduate students, postdoctoral f el l ow s, and juni or f acul ty al l
over the w or l d. Because the students have l i m i ted ti m e avai l abl e, the cour se i s
usual l y br i ef and i ntensi ve, r unni ng about 24 hour s f or 4, 6, or 12 w eek s or
about 35 hour s f or one w eek .
In pr epar i ng thi s book over the past several year s, I have r ecei ved hel p f r om
m any peopl e. Fi r st, I am i ndebted to Dr. Com r oe. The sy l l abus f or hi s w r i ti ng
cour se gave m e a sol i d jum pi ngof f poi nt, and hi s dedi cated teachi ng was
i nspi rati onal . Second, I am i ndebted to the num er ous postdoctoral f el l ow s w ho
w or ked on thei r paper s w i th m e to the poi nt of near per f ecti on necessar y f or
use as teachi ng ex am pl es. Wi thout thei r w i l l i ngness to pur sue per f ecti on and
thei r gener osi ty i n al l ow i ng m e to publ i sh thei r or i gi nal and r ev i sed draf ts as
ex am pl es and exer ci ses, thi s book w oul d not have been possi bl e. Si m i l ar l y, I
am i ndebted to the author s of publ i shed paper s and to thei r publ i sher s, w ho
have graci ousl y al l ow ed m e to use par ts of thei r paper s as ex am pl es and
exer ci ses. These paper s pr ov i ded som e of the m ost usef ul and sti m ul ati ng
ex am pl es and exer ci ses i n thi s book . In addi ti on, I am gratef ul to the m any
par ti ci pants i n the w r i ti ng cl asses w hose i nsi ghtf ul r ev i si ons have enr i ched thi s
book . I am al so gratef ul to the m any sci enti sts w ho pr evented m e f r om m ak i ng
gr uesom e er r or s i n sci ence. N o doubt som e er r or s r em ai n, but I hope r eader s
w i l l be abl e to see past sci enti f i c pr obl em s to under stand the w r i ti ng pr i nci pl es
bei ng i l l ustrated. Fi nal l y, I especi al l y want to thank seven peopl e: Bobbi Angel l ,
an i l l ustrator af f i l i ated w i th the N ew Yor k Botani cal Gar den, w ho m ade the
handdraw n f i gur es i n thi s book , and Paul Sagan, an edi tor i n the
Car di ovascul ar Resear ch Insti tute, U ni ver si ty of Cal i f or ni a, San Franci sco, w ho
pr epar ed the com puter draw n f i gur es, f or thei r f i ne w or k and cheer f ul spi r i t
thr oughout m any r ev i si ons; Dav i d F. Tei tel , M. D., Associ ate Pr of essor of
Pedi atr i cs, U ni ver si ty of Cal i f or ni a, San Franci sco, Har ol d Schul tz, Ph. D.,
Associ ate Pr of essor of Phy si ol ogy, U ni ver si ty of N ebrask a Medi cal Center,
Om aha, and Thom as Pi sar r i , Ph. D., Assi stant Resear ch Phy si ol ogi st,
Car di ovascul ar Resear ch Insti tute, U ni ver si ty of Cal i f or ni a, San Franci sco, w ho
k i ndl y and ef f i ci entl y hel ped m e w r i te and r ew r i te r ev i si ons f or a f ew
chal l engi ng exer ci ses; and Stanton A. Gl antz, Ph. D., Pr of essor of Medi ci ne,
U ni ver si ty of Cal i f or ni a, San Franci sco, and Br yan K. Sl i nker, D. V. M., Ph. D.,
Assi stant Pr of essor of Medi ci ne and of Phy si ol ogy and Bi ophy si cs, U ni ver si ty of
Ver m ont, w ho ti r el essl y and graci ousl y adv i sed m e on sci enti f i c and stati sti cal
questi ons thr oughout the devel opm ent of thi s book . They ar e the speci al sor t of
consul tant that ever y Engl i sh i nstr uctor w or k i ng i n sci ence needs—
k now l edgeabl e, sensi bl e, and gener ous.
In thi s second edi ti on, I have added a num ber of ex am pl es and exer ci ses on
m ol ecul ar bi ol ogy. I have al so f i netuned al l the chapter s and have r eor gani zed
and ex panded Chapter 3, Paragraph Str uctur e, w hi ch pr esents the m ai n w r i ti ng
pr i nci pl es on w hi ch the r est of the book i s based. In m ak i ng these addi ti ons and
changes, I have had hel p f r om seven m or e peopl e. I am gratef ul to Jam es
McKer r ow, M. D., Ph. D., Pr of essor, Depar tm ent of Pathol ogy, and Evangel i ne
Leash, Pr i nci pal Edi tor, Depar tm ent of Stom atol ogy, both of the U ni ver si ty of
Cal i f or ni a, San Franci sco, f or enl i ghteni ng ex pl anati ons of m ol ecul ar bi ol ogy
and of cur r ent tr ends i n the my ster i es of w r i ti ng m ol ecul ar bi ol ogy paper s. I
am al so i ndebted to Henr y Bour ne, M. D., and Har l an Ives, M. D., Ph. D., both
Pr of essor s of Medi ci ne and of Cel l ul ar and Mol ecul ar Phar m acol ogy, Joseph
Ki tter m an, M. D., Pr of essor of Pedi atr i cs, and Zena Wer b, Ph. D., Pr of essor of
Anatomy, al l f r om the U ni ver si ty of Cal i f or ni a, San Franci sco, f or k i ndl y
ex pl ai ni ng the sci ence i n par ts of paper s to m e and hel pi ng m e tur n these par ts
of paper s i nto exer ci ses. Speci al thank s to Stanl ey D'Souza, Ph. D., Assi stant
Staf f, Center f or Thr om bosi s and Vascul ar Bi ol ogy, Depar tm ent of Mol ecul ar
Car di ol ogy, The Cl evel and Cl i ni c Foundati on, f or graci ousl y and m eti cul ousl y
hel pi ng m e r ew r i te a par t of hi s al r eady f i ne paper to use as a good ex am pl e.
Wi thout the gener ous hel p of these seven peopl e, several usef ul ex am pl es and
exer ci ses i n thi s edi ti on w oul d not have been possi bl e.
Credits
The goal of thi s book i s to show you how to m ar shal the detai l s of a bi om edi cal
r esear ch paper i nto a com pr ehensi bl e stor y that has a cl ear m essage. To
achi eve thi s goal , the book pr esents num er ous speci f i c pr i nci pl es of cl ear
w r i ti ng and i l l ustrates each pr i nci pl e w i th ex am pl es of m ur k y w r i ti ng f ol l ow ed
by r ev i si ons show i ng how the i deas can be w r i tten m or e cl ear l y. The num er ous
speci f i c pr i nci pl es and the ex am pl es f ol l ow ed by r ev i si ons ar e tw o speci al
f eatur es of thi s book . Another speci al f eatur e i s the exer ci ses i n each chapter,
coupl ed w i th one or m or e r ev i si ons at the end of the book . The exer ci ses
pr ov i de oppor tuni ti es both to r ecogni ze appr opr i ate and i nappr opr i ate
appl i cati on of the w r i ti ng pr i nci pl es (r eadi ng exer ci ses) and to put the
pr i nci pl es i nto practi ce (w r i ti ng exer ci ses). The r ev i si ons of ex am pl es and of
the w r i ti ng exer ci ses can be used as m odel s f or your ow n w r i ti ng.
The r eason f or doi ng exer ci ses i s that appl i cati on of the pr i nci pl es of w r i ti ng
r equi r es judgm ent. Ther e ar e f ew i f any “r i ghts” and “w r ongs” i n w r i ti ng.
Rather ther e ar e better and w or se choi ces. The poi nt, then, i s to devel op your
judgm ent so that you can m ake better choi ces. To hel p devel op your judgm ent
i n m ak i ng these choi ces, you can com par e your cr i ti ques of the r eadi ng
exer ci ses and your r ev i sed ver si ons of the w r i ti ng exer ci ses w i th those gi ven at
the end of thi s book . Many of these r ev i si ons have been sy nthesi zed f r om a
num ber of draf ts and com m ents by students over several year s. Bear i n m i nd,
how ever, that ther e i s no such thi ng as a per f ect paper. In f act, you m ay
di sagr ee w i th som e choi ces m ade i n the r ev i si ons. That i s OK. The pr ocess of
r ev i si on i s endl ess. The r ev i si ons of the exer ci ses i n thi s book ar e ther ef or e
i ntended onl y as i m pr ovem ents, not as ul ti m ate per f ecti on.
P. 2
Most ex am pl es and exer ci ses i n thi s book ar e taken f r om pr epubl i cati on draf ts
w r i tten by juni or r esear cher s w ho w er e i n postdoctoral trai ni ng posi ti ons i n
car di ovascul ar r esear ch. These ex am pl es ar e not i ntended to show the ul ti m ate
l evel of excel l ent w r i ti ng but rather a r easonabl e l evel of cl ar i ty achi evabl e by
young r esear cher s ear l y i n thei r car eer s. Peopl e i nter ested i n w r i ti ng m ay want
to tr y to m ake thei r w r i ti ng l i vel y as w el l as cl ear. In f act, that i s the ul ti m ate
goal . But the goal of thi s book i s onl y cl ar i ty.
Who ar e these r eader s? Cer tai nl y they i ncl ude sci enti sts w ho do r esear ch i n
your f i el d. But thi s i s just the cor e of the audi ence. The com pl ete spectr um of
potenti al r eader s ranges f r om graduate students to N obel l aur eates and
i ncl udes m any r eader s w hose nati ve l anguage i s not Engl i sh. Fur ther m or e,
m any of your r eader s m ay not be i n your f i el d. Eventual l y al l sci enti sts begi n
to r ead outsi de thei r f i el ds: you can di g your tr ench onl y so deep; sooner or
l ater you star t f i ndi ng l i nk s w i th other speci al ti es. These l i nk s of ten l ead to
exci ti ng sci enti f i c di scover i es. So i t i s i m por tant that sci enti sts f r om outsi de
your f i el d can r ead your paper. Fi nal l y, and per haps m ost i m por tantl y, m ost
r eader s ar e onl y hal f awake w hen they ar e r eadi ng your paper, per haps l ate at
ni ght or on a bus or pl ane som ew her e. Because of thi s w i de range of
back gr ounds of potenti al r eader s and because of thei r sem i consci ous state
w hi l e they ar e r eadi ng, the bur den of cl ar i ty r ests on you, the author. The
r eader 's job i s to f ol l ow the author 's thi nk i ng and to agr ee or di sagr ee; i t i s not
to decode and r econstr uct the paper. Thus, i f you want your r eader s to get your
m essage, you w i l l have to m ake i t abundantl y cl ear to them .
The standar d of cl ar i ty that w e w i l l use goes back to Qui nti l i an, a Rom an
r hetor i ci an w ho l i ved i n the f i r st centur y A. D. : cl ear w r i ti ng i s w r i ti ng that i s
i ncapabl e of bei ng m i sunder stood. N ote that thi s i s a m uch tougher standar d
than say i ng that cl ear w r i ti ng i s w r i ti ng that can be under stood.
Speci f i cal l y, thi s book deal s w i th the choi ce of w or ds and the ar rangem ent of
w or ds i nto l ar ger and l ar ger str uctur es that tel l a stor y. The em phasi s on
str uctur e and stor y tel l i ng i s the f our th speci al f eatur e of thi s book .
Thi s book i s devel opm ental . The l ater chapter s bui l d on w r i ti ng pr i nci pl es
pr esented i n the ear l i er chapter s. In par ti cul ar, the chapter s on the par ts of the
r esear ch paper (Chaps. 4, 5, 6 and 7) and the chapter on the bi g pi ctur e (Chap.
12) bui l d on pr i nci pl es of paragraph str uctur e. Thus, the book star ts w i th the
sm al l est uni t of w r i ti ng (w or ds) and w or k s up to the l ar gest uni t (the enti r e
paper ).
P. 4
Introduction
The Intr oducti on f ol l ow s a standar d str uctur e: the f unnel . A f unnel star ts
br oadl y and then nar r ow s. Thus, i n a hy pothesi stesti ng paper, the Intr oducti on
f unnel s f r om som ethi ng k now n, to som ethi ng unk now n, to the questi on the
paper i s ask i ng. The Intr oducti on m ay end w i th the questi on or m ay go on to
state the ex per i m ental appr oach to answ er i ng the questi on. An ex am pl e of an
Intr oducti on that has a f unnel shape i s gi ven i n Ex am pl e 1 bel ow.
AIt i s k now n that several general anestheti cs, i ncl udi ng bar bi tur ates, depr ess
the br onchom otor r esponse to v agus ner ve sti m ul ati on (1, 7, 9). BHow ever, the
si te of thi s depr essi on has not been deter m i ned. CTo deter m i ne w hi ch si te i n
the v agal m otor pathway to the br onchi ol es i s m ost sensi ti ve to depr essi on by
bar bi tur ates, Dw e di d ex per i m ents i n i sol ated r i ngs of f er r et trachea i n w hi ch
w e sti m ul ated thi s pathway at f our di f f er ent si tes bef or e and af ter ex posur e to
bar bi turates.
An i m por tant detai l to noti ce i n thi s Intr oducti on i s that the key ter m s i n the
questi on (i tal i ci zed) r epeat w or ds i n the statem ents of w hat i s k now n and
unk now n. Repeati ng key ter m s i s i m por tant because the r epeti ti on m akes i t
obv i ous that the questi on f ol l ow s i nev i tabl y f r om w hat i s k now n and unk now n.
It i s i m por tant that the questi on f ol l ow s i nev i tabl y and i s stated cl ear l y because
the r est of the paper depends on the questi on. Speci f i cal l y, Methods tel l s w hat
ex per i m ents you di d to answ er the questi on, Resul ts tel l s w hat r esul ts you
f ound that answ er the questi on, and the Di scussi on states and ex pl ai ns the
answ er to the questi on. To avoi d l osi ng the f or est f or the tr ees i n a bi om edi cal
r esear ch paper, the tr i ck i s to use the questi on as the touchstone f or sel ecti ng
and or gani zi ng i deas i n each secti on of the paper.
Materials and Methods
The str uctur e of the Mater i al s and Methods secti on i s essenti al l y chr onol ogi cal .
You star t by descr i bi ng w hat you di d f i r st to answ er your questi on and end by
descr i bi ng w hat you di d l ast. In addi ti on, because Mater i al s and Methods i s
usual l y a l ong secti on, i t i s di v i ded i nto subsecti ons accor di ng to the ty pe of
i nf or m ati on. For ex am pl e, i n a study that tests a hy pothesi s and desi gns al l the
ex per i m ents i n advance, one possi bl e str uctur e i s as f ol l ow s:
Pr eparati on
Study Desi gn
Anal y si s of Data
P. 5
In the Methods secti on of thi s ty pe of paper, the subsecti on that pr esents the
f or est i s the study desi gn. The study desi gn gi ves an over v i ew of the
ex per i m ents you di d to answ er the questi on and thus i s the f ram ew or k agai nst
w hi ch the detai l s of m ethods m ake sense.
Thr ee com ponents need to be pul l ed together i n the study desi gn:
The i ndependent var i abl e (the var i abl e you m ani pul ated)
The dependent var i abl e (the var i abl e you m easur ed)
Al l contr ol s
ETo deter m i ne w hether sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y Cf i ber s r ef l ex i vel y evokes
i ncr eased secr eti on f r om tracheal subm ucosal gl ands, w e sti m ul ated pul m onar y
Cf i ber endi ngs i n each of the 9 dogs by i njecti ng capsai ci n (10–20 µg/k g) i nto
the r i ght atr i um .
FAt 10s i nter val s f or 60 s bef or e (basel i ne) and 60 s af ter each i njecti on, w e
m easur ed secr eti ons f r om tracheal subm ucosal gl ands.
GAs a contr ol , i n the sam e 9 dogs w e m easur ed secr eti on i n r esponse to
i njecti on of vehi cl e (0. 5–1. 0 m l ) i nto the r i ght atr i um .
Results
In the Resul ts secti on, the overal l str uctur e i s nor m al l y chr onol ogi cal . In the
Resul ts secti on of a hy pothesi stesti ng study that desi gns al l ex per i m ents i n
advance, the str uctur e m ay al so be i n the or der of m ost to l east i m por tant to
the questi on (f or ex am pl e, w hen the ex per i m ents w er e done si m ul taneousl y ).
In addi ti on, w i thi n each paragraph of the Resul ts secti on, the i deas can be
or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant. Thus, an i m por tant r esul t i s stated i n
the f i r st sentence, and l ess i m por tant r esul ts and suppor ti ng detai l s ar e stated
i n l ater sentences, as i n Ex am pl e 3.
Ex a mple 3 Resul ts
JThi s i ncr ease was bl ocked w hen the r i ngs w er e i ncubated i n arachi doni c aci d i n
the pr esence of i ndom ethaci n.
KIn the contr ol ser i es of ex per i m ents, pr ostagl andi n E 2 pr oducti on m easur ed at
the sam e 90m i n i nter val s di d not change.
Discussion
For the Di scussi on secti on ther e i s no pr escr i bed str uctur e. How ever, ther e ar e
som e general gui del i nes. The f i r st and m ost i m por tant gui del i ne i s to state the
answ er to the questi on at the begi nni ng of the Di scussi on. The r eason f or
stati ng the answ er at the begi nni ng i s that the answ er i s the m ost i m por tant
statem ent i n the paper, so i t shoul d appear i n the m ost pr om i nent posi ti on:
f i r st. Im m edi atel y af ter stati ng the answ er, gi ve suppor ti ng ev i dence. An
ex am pl e of the f i r st paragraph of a Di scussi on i n w hi ch the f i r st sentence
states the answ er to the questi on and the r est of the paragraph gi ves
suppor ti ng ev i dence i s gi ven i n Ex am pl e 4.
Ex a mple 4 Begi nni ng of a Di scussi on
P. 6
1 LIn thi s study, w e have show n that a 42day cour se of dex am ethasone l eads
to sustai ned i m pr ovem ent i n pul m onar y f uncti on and i m pr oves
neur odevel opm ental outcom e i n ver y l ow bi r th w ei ght i nf ants w ho ar e at hi gh
r i sk of devel opi ng br onchopul m onar y dy spl asi a. MEv i dence of i m pr oved
pul m onar y f uncti on i s that af ter a 42day cour se of dex am ethasone gi ven to our
pr eter m i nf ants w ho w er e venti l ator and ox ygen dependent at 2 w eek s of age,
the durati ons of posi ti ve pr essur e venti l ati on, of suppl em ental ox ygen, and of
hospi tal i zati on w er e l ess than those i n contr ol i nf ants, w ho r ecei ved sal i ne
pl acebo. N Ev i dence of i m pr oved neur odevel opm ental outcom e i s that the i nf ants
w ho r ecei ved the 42day cour se of dex am ethasone had a l ow er i nci dence of
neur ol ogi c handi cap and si gni f i cantl y hi gher scor es on the Bay l ey Scal es of
Inf ant Devel opm ent than di d i nf ants i n the contr ol gr oup.
Af ter stati ng and suppor ti ng the answ er, or gani ze the r em ai ni ng topi cs ei ther
accor di ng to the l ogi c of the sci ence or el se i n the or der of m ost to l east
i m por tant. Indi cate the or gani zati on by usi ng topi c sentences to state the poi nt
of each paragraph. The r eader shoul d be abl e to r ead the f i r st sentence of
ever y paragraph i n the Di scussi on secti on and f ol l ow the stor y of the
Di scussi on, as i n Ex am pl e 5, w hi ch conti nues the Di scussi on begun i n Ex am pl e
4.
2 Im por tantl y, w e di d not obser ve any of the ser i ous com pl i cati ons of
dex am ethasone adm i ni strati on suggested by pr ev i ous, uncontr ol l ed tr i al s
(14, 15, 17). (etc. )
3 How ever, som e i nf ants m ay have had adr enocor ti cal suppr essi on, si nce
m ean ser um cor ti sol l evel s w er e si gni f i cantl y l ow er i n i nf ants w ho
r ecei ved the 42day cour se of dex am ethasone than i n contr ol i nf ants.
(etc. )
5 Tw o poi nts r egar di ng the cl i ni cal cour ses of i nf ants i n our study ar e
w or th noti ng. Fi r st, the onl y tw o i nf ants w ho devel oped pneum othoraces
dur i ng the study per i od w er e r ecei v i ng dex am ethasone. (etc. )
The m i ddl e of thi s Di scussi on m oves f r om m ost to l east i m por tant topi cs. Af ter
the answ er to the questi on i s stated at the begi nni ng of the Di scussi on (that the
therapy i s benef i ci al , see Ex am pl e 4), the m i ddl e of the Di scussi on goes on
f i r st to com m ent on ser i ous com pl i cati ons, w hi ch, i f pr esent, w oul d under m i ne
the therapy, then to ex pl ai n w hy a l ong tr eatm ent (42 day s) i s needed, and
f i nal l y to ex pl ai n poi nts not asked i n the questi on that ar e i nter esti ng but l ess
i m por tant (other com pl i cati ons). Thi s stor y l i ne i s cl ear f r om r eadi ng the topi c
sentences.
The Di scussi on cannot just stop. It m ust cl ear l y com e to an end. Tw o standar d
way s of endi ng ar e to r estate the answ er s and to i ndi cate the i m por tance of the
answ er s, or you can do both. For the Di scussi on i n Ex am pl es 4 and 5, the
author r estated the answ er s and al so the poi nt about com pl i cati ons, thus
pul l i ng the m essage of the paper together (Ex am pl e 6).
P. 7
7 OIn sum m ar y, w e have show n that dex am ethasone therapy f or 42 day s l eads
to sustai ned i m pr ovem ent i n pul m onar y f uncti on and i m pr oves
neur odevel opm ental outcom e i n ver y l ow bi r th w ei ght i nf ants w ho ar e venti l ator
and ox ygen dependent at 2 w eek s of age and ther ef or e ar e at hi gh r i sk of
devel opi ng br onchopul m onar y dy spl asi a.
PAl though dex am ethasone use m ay be associ ated w i th adr enocor ti cal
suppr essi on, i t i s not associ ated w i th an i ncr eased i nci dence of m ajor
com pl i cati ons, i ncl udi ng i nf ecti on, hy per tensi on, and gr ow th f ai l ur e.
Thi s endi ng r ei nf or ces the m essage of the paper and f eel s concl usi ve.
N ote that the answ er i n the f i nal paragraph i n the Di scussi on i s v i r tual l y
i denti cal to the answ er i n the f i r st paragraph. Thi s ex act r epeti ti on of answ er s
i s i m por tant. If the answ er s w er e di f f er ent, w e w oul d not k now w hi ch one to
bel i eve.
Fi nal l y, i t i s i m por tant that the answ er answ er s the questi on asked. The
questi on f ocuses the enti r e paper f or the r eader. If the answ er does not answ er
the questi on asked, the r eader w i l l be conf used, as i n Ex am pl e 7.
Answ er : We concl ude that l i qui d l eak s acr oss the v i sceral pl eura.
In thi s ex am pl e, the answ er actual l y does answ er the questi on, but that i s not
obv i ous because the key ter m s ar e di f f er ent. To m ake cl ear that the answ er
answ er s the questi on asked, and thus to m ake the m essage of the paper cl ear,
use the sam e key ter m s i n the questi on and answ er, as i n the r ev i si on of
Ex am pl e 7.
Re vis ion
Questi on: We asked w hether l ung edem a l eak s i nto the pl eural
space.
Answ er : We concl ude that l ung edem a l eak s i nto the pl eural
space.
The r est of thi s book ex pl ai ns i n gr eater detai l how to f ol l ow these gui del i nes
so that you w i l l be abl e to w r i te a bi om edi cal r esear ch paper i n w hi ch both the
tr ees and the f or est ar e cl ear.
P. 8
Som e of the exer ci ses ar e rather di f f i cul t. Tr y to spend the ti m e needed to
under stand these exer ci ses, and tr y not to get stuck i n the sci enti f i c detai l s.
Al so, the ex am pl es and exer ci ses com e al m ost excl usi vel y f r om car di ovascul ar
r esear ch, an ar ea that m ay be unf am i l i ar to som e r eader s. Agai n, tr y to thi nk
about the w r i ti ng, not the sci ence. For som e r eader s i t m ay actual l y be easi er
to under stand w r i ti ng pr obl em s i n a f i el d outsi de thei r ow n.
Introduction
Wor ds, sentences, and paragraphs ar e the bui l di ng bl ock s of w r i ti ng. In l ater
chapter s of thi s book , the pr i nci pl es of w or d choi ce, sentence str uctur e, and
paragraph str uctur e w i l l be ex panded to appl y to the secti ons of a bi om edi cal
r esear ch paper and to the r esear ch paper as a w hol e.
Back
Chapter 1
Word Choice
The second exer ci se addr esses a di f f er ent i ssue—di sti ngui shi ng betw een w or ds
w hose m eani ngs ar e si m i l ar but not ex actl y the sam e. One r eason that
di sti ngui shi ng betw een w or ds i s di f f i cul t i n Engl i sh i s that Engl i sh i s a
par ti cul ar l y r i ch l anguage, i ncor porati ng som e hal f a m i l l i on w or ds and hav i ng
an abundance of sy nony m s and near sy nony m s. Another r eason that di sti ncti ons
ar e di f f i cul t i s that Engl i sh, l i ke al l other l anguages, i s constantl y changi ng.
For tunatel y, the m eani ngs of m ost w or ds r em ai n essenti al l y the sam e over the
centur i es. “Lungs” ar e sti l l l ungs and “to i ncr ease” i s sti l l to i ncr ease (but see
Exer ci se 1. 2). How ever, over ti m e, the m eani ngs of som e w or ds change to
ser ve the needs of the peopl e w ho speak the l anguage. One way that w or ds
change i s by tak i ng on ex tra m eani ngs. Som e w or ds even com e to m ean thei r
opposi te. For ex am pl e, “scan” m eans both “to gl ance at qui ck l y ” (as i n “to scan
a l i st of ti tl es”) and “to scr uti ni ze cl osel y.” Fur ther m or e, i n the l ast 25 or 30
year s, “scan” has taken on a new m eani ng i n m edi ci ne: “to ex am i ne the hum an
body f or the pr esence or l ocal i zati on of radi oacti ve m ater i al .” In addi ti on,
“scan,” w hi ch was onl y a ver b bef or e, i s now al so a noun, m eani ng a pi ctur e of
the di str i buti on of radi oacti ve m ater i al i n som e par t of the body. Thus, at any
gi ven m om ent, som e w or ds i n the l anguage ar e i n f l ux . Exer ci se 1. 2 f ocuses on
several sets of w or ds that bi om edi cal r esear cher s tend to conf use. Tw enty
year s f r om now, di f f er ent w or ds m i ght be i ncl uded i n thi s exer ci se.
Ther e i s no f i nal author i ty on the use of w or ds i n Engl i sh. The standar d used i n
schol ar l y w r i ti ng (i ncl udi ng bi om edi cal r esear ch paper s) i s the practi ce of
educated w r i ter s. For speci f i c gui dance on the m eani ngs and ex i stence of
i ndi v i dual w or ds, Am er i cans use unabr i dged di cti onar i es such as Webster 's
Thi r d N ew Inter nati onal Di cti onar y of the Engl i sh Language U nabr i dged
(Webster 's Thi r d). For speci f i c gui dance on cur r ent usage of w or ds, see the
usage notes i n The Am er i can Her i tage Di cti onar y of the Engl i sh Language.
P. 12
3. W rite a lis t of guide line s for the us e of a bbre via tions in biome dic a l
re s e a rc h pa pe rs . Tel l
Pl ease Gi v e ex am pl es.
I.
_____________________________________________________________________
Hi de Answ er
1. gr eatl y decr eased; r educed by 80%.
Hi de Answ er
2. 5? 7? 9?
POIN T: “Sev er al ” i s i m pr eci se. How l ong i s sev er al hour s? State the
m ean or a r ange.
Hi de Answ er
3. i ncr ease.
Hi de Answ er
4. i ncubated i n, gr ow n i n, bathed i n.
POIN T: “Ex posed to” i s i m pr eci se. How w er e the cel l s ex posed? U se a
pr eci se ter m . “Put i n” does not w or k her e because the cel l s pr obabl y
w er e not added f or 48 h.
Hi de Answ er
5. l am bs.
POIN T: Keep the nam e of the ani m al i n the r eader 's m i nd.
6. In Xe nopus , mic roinje c tion of mRNA on the dors a l s ide ve ntra lize d the
e mbryo. This ve ntra lizing e ffe c t w a s re s c ue d by βc a te nin or Sia mois .
Hi de Answ er
6. pr evented, bl ocked.
Hi de Answ er
7. of f set.
Hi de Answ er
8. pr evented, i nhi bi ted, r epr essed.
P. 13
9. In is ola te d, pe rfus e d dog lungs , infus ion of s e rotonin w a s a s s oc ia te d
w ith a n inc re a s e in mic rova s c ula r pre s s ure .
Hi de Answ er
9. caused OR r esul ted i n OR l ed to an i ncr ease i n m i cr ovascul ar
pr essur e, OR i ncr eased m i cr ovascul ar pr essur e.
POIN T: “Was associ ated w i th” i s i m pr eci se. It i ndi cates onl y that
som e connecti on ex i sts. If y ou can speci f y w hat the connecti on i s,
y ou shoul d do so.
Hi de Answ er
10. and OR accom pani ed by.
Hi de Answ er
11. dur i ng.
12. Ma x ima l c orona ry va s odila ta tion w ith c a rboc hrome n ha d othe r e ffe c ts .
Hi de Answ er
12. i nduced by.
13. The s a lic yla te s a re ra pidly a bs orbe d w ith a pe a k pla s ma s a lic yla te
c onc e ntra tion w ithin 2 h.
Hi de Answ er
13. , r eachi ng OR, as ev i denced by.
14. The os motic pre s s ure of pla s ma w a s s ubtra c te d from the os motic
pre s s ure of pla s ma w ith he pa rin.
Hi de Answ er
14. pl asm a that contai ned hepar i n, OR hepar i ni zed pl asm a, OR
hepar i ncontai ni ng pl asm a.
II.
____________________________________________________________________
Hi de Answ er
15. gi r l s, boy s, af ter, begi nni ng.
POIN T: In Ex am pl es 15–17, the techni cal ter m s (di al y si s, r epl i cati on,
chr om osom es, DN A pol y m er ases, transacti ng f actor , GCr i ch
sequences) ar e heav y and m ak e r eadi ng sl ow . To k eep the sentence
l i ght and r eadabl e, m ak e the other w or ds as si m pl e as possi bl e.
(N ote that “f em al e, ” “m al e, ” “f ol l ow i ng, ” “i ni ti ati on, ” “i ni ti ate, ” and
“i ni ti al ” ar e not “bad w or ds”; they ar e just unnecessar i l y f ancy i n
these sentences. )
16. The ra pid re plic a tion of c hromos ome s re lie s on DNA polyme ra s e s tha t
initia te re plic a tion in re s pons e to re gula tory s igna ls , a c hie ve high
proc e s s ivity w ithout dis s oc ia tion from the te mpla te , a nd the n dis e nga ge
ra pidly a nd re s ta rt re plic a tion e ls e w he re a s ne e de d.
Hi de Answ er
16. star t.
POIN T: If pol y m er ases “r estar t” r epl i cati on el sew her e (end of the
sentence), they pr esum abl y “star t” r epl i cati on her e.
Hi de Answ er
17. a f i r st.
18. The e x pre s s ion of the s e ge ne s by motor ne urons is e vide nt prior to the
forma tion of dis tinc t motor a x on pa thw a ys a nd be fore the s e gre ga tion of
motor ne urons into c olumns .
Hi de Answ er
18. bef or e.
19. The s e multiple doc k ing s ite s guide the s a lta tory move me nt of
k a ryophe rinNLS prote in c omple x e s from the c ytopla s mic to the
nuc le opla s mic s ide of the nuc le a r pore c omple x by a s e rie s of doc k ing a nd
undoc k ing re a c tions .
Hi de Answ er
19. di sconti nuous, l eapi ng, jum pi ng.
Hi de Answ er
20. i ncr ease pai n.
POIN T: If the author i s w i l l i ng to say “r educe pai n” at the end of the
sentence, he or she shoul d be w i l l i ng to say “i ncr ease pai n, ” the
si m pl e opposi te, at the begi nni ng of the sentence. “Enhance” i s a
buzz w or d. Its m eani ng i s v ague. Li k e “w i th, ” “enhance” i s used f or a
v ar i ety of m eani ngs and thus has al m ost no m eani ng i tsel f (see
Exer ci se 1. 2).
21. In the s oma tos e ns ory s ys te m, for e x a mple , the diffe re nt s oma tic
s e ns ory s ubmoda litie s (touc h, proprioc e ption, noc ic e ption, a nd
the rmore gula tion) re s ult from the a c tiva tion of dis tinc t s e ns ory
P . 14
c e lls tha t proje c t to s pe c ific re gions of the bra in via topogra phic a lly
s e gre ga te d pa thw a ys .
Hi de Answ er
21. subty pes, f uncti ons, senses; pai n; heat.
Hi de Answ er
22. cel l bodi es.
23. The Dopple r s igna l dis pla ye d c ontinuous , low fre que nc y blood flow tha t
w a s dire c te d he pa tope ta lly.
Hi de Answ er
23. towar d the l i ver.
III.
___________________________________________________________________
Hi de Answ er
24. Af ter 4 h, w e abr uptl y ended the hem odi al y si s pr ocedur e.
Hi de Answ er
25. Ox ygen uptake i n r esponse to dr ugs var i ed consi derabl y.
Hi de Answ er
26. Thi s i nhi bi ti on l eads to accum ul ati on of βcateni n i n the
cy topl asm . OR Thi s i nhi bi ti on l eads to a pool of βcateni n i n the
cy topl asm .
Hi de Answ er
27. Both of these changes w er e gr eater w hen the per i car di um was
cl osed.
IV.
___________________________________________________________________
28. A Thi s study m easur ed the r esponses of f or ear m bl ood f l ow (FBF) and
f or ear m vascul ar r esi stance (FVR) af ter i som etr i c handgr i p exer ci se (IHE)
and r el ated them to pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne (N E) and epi nephr i ne (E) i n 12
nor m otensi ves (N ) and 14 pr i m ar y hy per tensi ves (PH). B IHE was
per f or m ed at 30% of m ax i m um vol untar y contracti on usi ng a cal i brated
dy nam om eter. C Sy stol i c bl ood pr essur e (SBP), di astol i c bl ood pr essur e
(DBP), hear t rate (HR), FBF, FVR, N E, and E w er e m easur ed i n the r esti ng
ar m bef or e and af ter IHE. D Pr eexer ci se SBP and DBP w er e hi gher i n PH
than i n N . E FVR was si m i l ar i n PH and N . FNE was hi gher i n PH com par ed
to other m atched nor m otensi ves. G Af ter IHE, SBP and DBP w er e i ncr eased
18% and 19%, r especti vel y, i n PH and 16% and 25% i n N . H HR, N E and E
w er e i ncr eased i n PH and N . I Gr oup di f f er ences w er e not si gni f i cant. J Pr e
and post IHE FBF was si m i l ar i n both gr oups. K FVR i ncr eased
P. 15
i n both gr oups. L The f i ndi ngs i ndi cate that sk i n and m uscl e ar ter i ol ar
r esi stance at r est and dur i ng str ess i n PH w i th enhanced sy m patheti c tone
ar e not di f f er ent f r om N , and suggest that other hem ody nam i c
abnor m al i ti es, per haps i ncr eased car di ac output and spl anchni c r esi stance,
m edi ate the excessi ve neural tone and rai se bl ood pr essur e.
Pl ease gi v e ex am pl es.
P. 16
Hi de Answ er
1. af f ected.
2. The digox in (a mount, c onc e ntra tion, c onte nt, le ve l) w a s inc re a s e d from
0. 5 to 2. 5 ng/ml.
Hi de Answ er
2. concentrati on.
Hi de Answ er
3. consi sted of. (Om i t “no other dr ugs w er e used.”)
5. Inc re a s e d k now le dge of c a rdia c mus c le func tion ha s gre a tly (e nha nc e d,
improve d) our a bility to de te c t a nd qua ntify dis orde rs of myoc a rdia l
c ontra c tion.
Hi de Answ er
5. i m pr oved.
6. Tre a tme nt w ith me thylpre dnis olone a fte r the le s ion is e s ta blis he d
s ignific a ntly (e nha nc e s , s pe e ds ) re c ove ry.
Hi de Answ er
6. speeds.
Hi de Answ er
7. i nter val s, per i od.
Hi de Answ er
8. var i abl es.
Hi de Answ er
9. i s.
P. 17
DEFINITION EXAMP LE
ABILITY, CAPACITY
Accur acy . The The accur acy of the pol ygraphi c m ethod f or
degr ee of esti m ati ng the ef f i ci ency of ox i dati ve
conf or m i ty of a phosphor y l ati on was checked by the conventi onal
m easur em ent to m anom etr i c techni que.
the k now n or
tr ue val ue of the
quanti ty
m easur ed.
AFFECT, EFFECT
AMON G, BETWEEN
Am ong. In the We f ound one i ntact test tube am ong the br oken
m i dst of. ones.
“Am ong” i s used
to ex pr ess the
r el ati on of one
thi ng to a gr oup
of m any
sur r oundi ng
thi ngs. It i s not
used to ex pr ess
the r el ati on of
tw o thi ngs.
CAN , MAY
Can. Denotes the Hom ogeneous cel l l i nes of shor t durati on can be
pow er, or abi l i ty, achi eved w i th cl oni ng techni ques.
to do som ethi ng.
Incl ude. To have Condi ti ons that i ncr ease i ntraabdom i nal
as a par t or pr essur e al so i ncr ease the l i kel i hood of
m em ber ; to be si gni f i cant r ef l ux . These condi ti ons i ncl ude
m ade up of, at obesi ty, asci tes, and pr egnancy.
l east i n par t; to
contai n. “Incl ude”
of ten i m pl i es an
i ncom pl ete
l i sti ng.
IN TERVAL, PERIOD
LOCATE, LOCALIZE
Local i ze. (Wi th Hot appl i cati ons hel ped to l ocal i ze the i nf ecti on.
an object) To
conf i ne or f i x i n
a par ti cul ar ar ea
or par t. (Wi thout
an object) To
col l ect or Iodi ne tends to l ocal i ze i n the thy r oi d.
accum ul ate i n or
be r estr i cted to a
speci f i c or
l i m i ted ar ea.
Mi l l i m ol e(m m ol ).
An am ount, not a
concentrati on. A 0. 5 m i l l i m ol ar sol uti on contai ns 0. 5 m i l l i m ol e
of a sol ute i n 1 l i ter of sol uti on (or , a 0. 5 m M
sol uti on contai ns 0. 5 m m ol /l i ter of sol uti on. ) The
Mi l l i m ol ar (m M). f i nal vol um e i s 1 l i ter.
A concentr ati on,
not an am ount.
MU CU S, MU COU S
OPTIMAL, OPTIMU M
Opti m al . The An or gani sm w i l l gr ow best under opti m al
adjecti ve; never condi ti ons.
used as a noun.
PRON E, SU PIN E
REPRESEN T, BE
Repr esent. To Each data poi nt r epr esents one m easur em ent of
ser ve as a si gn ai r way r esi stance.
or sy m bol of ; to
take the pl ace of.
Chapter 2
Sentence Structure
Engl i sh sentences ar e cl ear est, m ost f or cef ul , and easi est to under stand i f they
ar e si m pl e and di r ect. If i nstead sentences ar e com pl i cated and i ndi r ect, the
r eader i s sl ow ed dow n and even conf used. Fi ve techni ques that hel p keep
sentences si m pl e and di r ect ar e
Ex pr essi ng the cor e of the m essage i n the subject, ver b, and com pl eter
Wr i ti ng shor t sentences
U si ng cl ear pr onouns
In thi s sentence, the subject and ver b ar e chi l dr en ha d. But the topi c of thi s
sentence i s not chi l dr en, and the m essage i s not about chi l dr en hav i ng
som ethi ng (as i t w oul d be, f or ex am pl e, i n the sentence, “The chi l dr en had
di abetes m el l i tus”). Thi s sentence has thr ee topi cs—shunts, hepar i n, and the
si des of the shunt—and the m essage of the sentence i s about w hat happened to
them . Ther ef or e, these ter m s shoul d be the subjects of the sentence.
Re vis ion In the chi l dr en w ho had ar ter i ovenous shunts, the shunts
w e re ope ne d, hepar i n w a s inje c te d, and the ar ter i al
and venous si des of the shunt w e re c la mpe d.
P. 23
In thi s r ev i si on, the topi cs ar e the subjects of the sentence, and the subjects
and ver bs convey the m essage of the sentence.
Many nouns that ex pr ess acti on ar e m ade by addi ng a noun endi ng to a ver b, as
i n the l i st bel ow. In addi ti on, the ver bs “i ncr ease” and “decr ease” ar e used as
nouns.
Ending Ve rb Noun
In thi s ex am pl e, the ver b (oc c urre d) does not ex pr ess the acti on of the
sentence. Instead, the subject of the sentence (i ncr ease) ex pr esses the acti on.
As a r esul t, the gram m ar does not coor di nate w i th the m eani ng, and the
sentence i s com pl i cated and i ndi r ect.
Om i t the subject and the pr eposi ti on that f ol l ow s i t (her e “i ncr ease i n”).
Repl ace the vague ver b (her e “occur r ed”) w i th the acti on f r om the om i tted
subject (her e “i ncr ease” becom es “i ncr eased”).
In addi ti on, the r ev i sed sentence has f ew er w or ds than the or i gi nal sentence
and hence i s m or e ef f i ci ent.
N ote al so that the vague ver b of the or i gi nal sentence, oc c urre d, does not
contr i bute to the m eani ng of the sentence (the m eani ng i s i n the subject) but
si m pl y per f or m s the f uncti on of a ver b. It coul d be r epl aced by another vague
ver b, such as “was seen” or “was noted,” w i thout appr eci abl y al ter i ng the
m eani ng of the sentence.
Fi nal l y, i f w e com par e the subjects and ver bs of the tw o sentences, w e see that
the subject and ver b of the r ev i sed sentence (hear t rate inc re a s e d) ex pr ess
the cor e of the m essage, w her eas the subject and ver b of the or i gi nal sentence
(i ncr ease oc c urre d) ex pr ess onl y par t of the cor e—the acti on but not the topi c.
Thus, w hen the acti on i s i n the ver b, the sentence i s si m pl er, m or e di r ect, and
m or e ef f i ci ent than w hen the acti on i s i n the subject.
Another r eason thi s pr eposi ti onal phrase i s di f f i cul t to r ead i s that ther e i s no
ver b. To m ake thi s sentence easi er to r ead, add a conjuncti on f ol l ow ed by a
subject and a ver b, thus cr eati ng a cl ause. Speci f i cal l y, si nce the pr eposi ti on
P. 25
“w i th” m eans “dur i ng,” change “w i th” to the conjuncti on “w hen” or “w hi l e” or
“as.” Then m ake “vessel ” the subject, and change the noun “congesti on” to the
ver b i t was m ade f r om (“w er e congested”).
Re vis ion WHEN THE VESSELS IN BOTH LEGS W ERE CONG ESTED,
the com pl i ance of f or ear m vessel s i ncr eased si gni f i cantl y.
N ote that i n the r ev i si on, the f ancy ter m “bi l ateral ” can be om i tted.
In the nex t ex am pl e, the suppr essed ver bs ar e not so obv i ous as i n the f i r st
ex am pl e.
Re vis ion WHEN HYPOXIA LASTS LON GER OR IS MORE SEVERE, the
shor teni ng phase m ay get pr ogr essi vel y br i ef er.
Re vis ion These r esul ts dem onstrate that the D1 r eceptor pla ys an
B essenti al r ol e i n the l ocom otor sti m ul ant ef f ects of
cocai ne.
P. 26
Rev i si on A of Ex am pl e 2. 7 i l l ustrates that som eti m es the acti on ex pr essed by
the ver b i s m er el y state of bei ng (her e, “i s”). When the ver b i s “i s,” an
adjecti ve (her e, “essenti al ”) or a noun af ter the ver b i s needed to com pl ete the
m essage. Rev i si on B show s a way of r ev i si ng thi s sentence usi ng an acti ve ver b
(“pl ay s”) f ol l ow ed by an object (“r ol e”) and i ts adjecti ve (“essenti al ”). In both
r ev i si ons, the acti on i s i n the ver b, and the ver b and the adjecti ve (“i s
essenti al ” or “pl ay s an essenti al r ol e”) ex pr ess the m essage of the sentence.
Action Inappropriately in a Noun instead of in a
Participle
Som eti m es acti on can be put i n a par t of a ver b—the pr esent par ti ci pl e (ver b +
“i ng”) or the past par ti ci pl e (usual l y, ver b + “ed”). Just l i ke putti ng the acti on
i n a ver b, putti ng the acti on i n a par ti ci pl e rather than i n a noun m akes the
w r i ti ng l i vel i er and easi er to r ead.
Ver bs ar e the l i f ebl ood of an Engl i sh sentence. Om i tti ng them (by putti ng the
acti on i n a pr eposi ti onal phrase) or w eakeni ng them (by putti ng the acti on i n
the subject or object and addi ng a vague ver b) saps the sentence of i ts
l i f ebl ood and m akes the sentence dense and di f f i cul t to r ead.
Dram ati c r ever sal s i n the ver bnoun rati o, such as the r ever sal i l l ustrated i n
the l ast pai r of sentences above, em phasi ze the advantage of putti ng the acti on
i n the ver b.
To check your w r i ti ng, ask your sel f w hat acti on you want each sentence to
ex pr ess, and then m ake sur e that you ex pr ess thi s acti on i n a ver b.
P. 27
1. The a dults e nde d dia lys is w ith a pla s ma a c e ta te c onc e ntra tion a lmos t
double tha t of the c hildre n.
Hi de Answ er
1. At the end of di al y si s, the pl asm a acetate concentrati on i n the
adul ts w a s al m ost doubl e that i n the chi l dr en.
COMMEN T: N ote that the subject, v er b, and com pl eter i n the r ev i sed
sentence gi v e m or e of the m essage than do the subject, v er b, and
com pl eter of the or i gi nal sentence: “concentr ati on w as al m ost
doubl e” v er sus “adul ts ended di al y si s. ” Al so note that the sam e
pr eposi ti on (“i n”) i s used bef or e “adul ts” and “chi l dr en”; “of ” coul d be
used i nstead of “i n. ” Fi nal l y , i f both the adul ts and the chi l dr en
under w ent di al y si s, that f act i s cl ear est i f “at the end of di al y si s”
com es at the begi nni ng of the sentence, because a condi ti on hol ds
unti l y ou change i t (see Chap. 3, “The Durati on of a Si gnal ” under
“Si gnal i ng the Subtopi cs of a Paragraph”).
Hi de Answ er
2. The pati ent's sy m ptom s did not c ha nge .
Hi de Answ er
3. Af ter the pati ent be ga n tak i ng 0. 6 g of aspi r i n dai l y, hi s ar thr i ti s
re s olve d.
Hi de Answ er
4. The death rate de c re a s e d pr ogr essi vel y OR pr ogr essi vel y
de c re a s e d.
5. Eva pora tion of e tha nol from the mix ture ta k e s pla c e ra pidly.
Hi de Answ er
5. Ethanol e va pora te s f r om the m i x tur e rapi dl y.
Hi de Answ er
6. Potassi um per chl orate w a s re move d by centr i f ugati on of the
super natant l i qui d at 1400 × g f or 10 m i n. (passi v e)
Hi de Answ er
7. Bl ood pH w a s me a s ure d by OR w i th a Radi om eter capi l l ar y
el ectr ode.
8. P rolonga tion of life for ure mic pa tie nts ha s be e n ma de pos s ible by
improve d c ons e rva tive tre a tme nt a nd he modia lys is .
Hi de Answ er
8. The l i ves of ur em i c pati ents ha ve be e n prolonge d by i m pr oved
conser vati ve tr eatm ent and hem odi al y si s.
Hi de Answ er
9. Mi nute venti l ati on and r espi rator y f r equency inc re a s e d abr uptl y i n
al l dogs as exer ci se began.
P. 28
10. Light ina c tiva tion of COP 1 w a s a c hie ve d prior to its nuc le a r de ple tion.
Hi de Answ er
10. COP1 w a s ina c tiva te d by l i ght bef or e i t w a s de ple te d f r om the
nucl eus.
11. W he n immunopre c ipita tions of a pa rtia lly purifie d TFIIH fra c tion w ith
AbERCC2 unde r me dium high s a lt c onditions (0. 5 M KCl) w e re pe rforme d,
a triple t c ons is ting of MO15, p34, a nd p32, in a ddition to the k now n TFIIH
s ubunits , w a s vis ua lize d on s ilve rs ta ine d polya c ryla mide ge ls .
Hi de Answ er
11. When a par ti al l y pur i f i ed TFIIH f racti on w a s
immunopre c ipita te d w i th AbERCC2 under m edi um hi gh sal t
condi ti ons (0. 5 M KCl ), a tr i pl et…
Hi de Answ er
12. If m i sm atches a re not c orre c te d, base pai r s a re s e gre ga te d
af ter m ei osi s.
Hi de Answ er
13. We a na lyze d each speci m en at l east tw i ce.
14. Infus ion of tyra mine produc e d a de c re a s e in c uta ne ous blood flow .
Hi de Answ er
14. Inf usi on of ty ram i ne de c re a s e d cutaneous bl ood f l ow.
Hi de Answ er
15. The m utati on k ills the em br yos.
Hi de Answ er
16. Hom ozygous p53k nockout m i ce w e re re s is ta nt to neur onal
apoptosi s i nduced by a var i ety of neur onal tox i ns.
Hi de Answ er
17. D1l i ke r eceptor s pe rmit r egul ati on of D2l i ke r eceptor s.
Hi de Answ er
18. These agents a c t by inhibiting the sy nthesi s of chol ester ol by
the l i ver.
Hi de Answ er
19. Thi s net di f f er ence i n osm ol ar i ty forc e s (OR drive s , s hifts ,
dra w s ) water i nto the cer ebr ospi nal f l ui d, thus inc re a s ing pr essur e.
Because of thi s net di f f er ence i n osm ol ar i ty, water flow s i nto the
cer ebr ospi nal f l ui d, thus inc re a s ing pr essur e.
P. 29
20. Re c e ntly, e vide nc e for light c ontrol ove r the nuc le a r import of a
pote ntia l tra ns c ription fa c tor ha s be e n provide d.
Hi de Answ er
20. Recentl y, ev i dence that l i ght c ontrols the i m por t of a potenti al
transcr i pti on f actor i nto the nucl eus has been pr ov i ded.
Hi de Answ er
21. A capsul e of amy l ni tr i te was cr ushed and hel d i n f r ont of the
nose f or 20 s w hi l e the pati ent bre a the d nor m al l y.
22. Ca lc ium is tra ns loc a te d a c ros s the me mbra ne a long w ith the forma tion
of a phos phoryla te d e nzyme inte rme dia te . Ca lc ium is the n re le a s e d into
the lume n w ith the s imulta ne ous de c ompos ition of the phos phoryla te d
inte rme dia te e nzyme into the unphos phoryla te d e nzyme a nd ADP plus
phos pha te .
Hi de Answ er
22. Cal ci um i s transl ocated acr oss the m em brane as a
phosphor y l ated enzy m e i nter m edi ate is forme d. Then cal ci um i s
r el eased i nto the l um en as the phosphor y l ated enzy m e i nter m edi ate
is de c ompos e d i nto the unphosphor y l ated enzy m e and ADP pl us
phosphate.
24. G e ne tic w ork in C. e le ga ns unc ove re d the c e ntra l re gula tory func tion of
its BCL2 homolog in the a ppa ra tus of c e ll de a th c ontrol.
Hi de Answ er
24. Geneti c w or k i n C. el egans show ed that i ts BCL2 hom ol og
re gula te s cel l death.
P. 30
But addi ng another noun (or nouns) onto an al r eady ex i sti ng noun pai r i s
conf usi ng. (For a detai l ed tr eatm ent of thi s topi c, see Woodf or d, Sci enti f i c
Wr i ti ng f or Gr aduate Students, p. 52. )
At f i r st gl ance, i t i s not easy to see w hat these ter m s m ean. The ter m s ar e
cl ear er i f they ar e not com pacted i nto cl uster s.
The r eason the untangl ed f or m s ar e cl ear er than the noun cl uster s i s that the
pr eposi ti ons i ndi cate how the nouns ar e r el ated to each other. N ote that the
pr eposi ti on used to transl ate a cl uster i nto under standabl e Engl i sh i s not al way s
the sam e. Her e “of ” and “i n” ar e used. Al so note that the r ev i sed ver si ons ar e
al l l onger than the or i gi nal ver si ons. Thi s i s OK. The goal i s cl ar i ty, not br ev i ty.
What i s chr oni c—the sheep or the ex per i m ents? What i s per i pheral — the
chem or eceptor s or the sti m ul ati on? To m ake the answ er cl ear, f i r st untangl e
P. 31
the noun cl uster com pl etel y, so that no cl uster s ar e l ef t. Then pl ace the
adjecti ve i n f r ont of the appr opr i ate noun. Onl y one noun shoul d be pl aced af ter
the adjecti ve so that the r eader can tel l w hi ch noun the adjecti ve m odi f i es.
Re vis ions chr oni c e x pe rime nts i n sheep
sti m ul ati on of the pe riphe ra l c he more c e ptors
N ote that “chr oni c” m odi f i es the l ast noun i n i ts cl uster (“ex per i m ents”) but
“per i pheral ” m odi f i es the f i r st noun i n i ts cl uster (“chem or eceptor ”). Si nce
ther e i s no pr edi ctabl e patter n f or deter m i ni ng w hi ch noun the adjecti ve
m odi f i es, the cl ear est practi ce i s to w r i te the i dea the l ong way, not as a
cl uster.
U l ti m ate conf usi on ar i ses w hen the noun that the adjecti ve m odi f i es i s om i tted
f r om the noun cl uster al together.
Re c omme nda tion: Tr eat noun cl uster s l i ke abbr ev i ati ons. Do not use them i f
you can possi bl y avoi d them . If you ar e f or ced to use one, w r i te i t the l ong way
the f i r st ti m e you use i t; then use the cl uster.
P. 32
Noun + Noun
1. Shunt blood c lotting oc c urre d a fte r 5 da ys .
Hi de Answ er
1. Bl ood cl otti ng i n the shunt occur r ed af ter 5 day s.
2. DNAa s e I nic k ing inte rfe re nc e pa tte rns c orre s pond pre c is e ly to
e thyla tion inte rfe re nc e pa tte rns w ith both 10 bp s e que nc e s .
Hi de Answ er
2. Inter f er ence patter ns i nduced by DN Aase I ni ck i ng cor r espond
pr eci sel y to i nter f er ence patter ns i nduced by ethy l ati on f or both of
the 10bp sequences.
Hi de Answ er
3. The pr eci pi tate was f ur ther pur i f i ed by bei ng centr i f uged on
sucr ose densi ty gradi ents (OR on densi ty gradi ents m ade of sucr ose).
Hi de Answ er
4. “Regul ati on of Cer ebr ospi nal Fl ui d pH by the Bl oodBrai n Bar r i er ”
COMMEN T: N ot “pH Regul ati on” because thi s cl uster coul d m ean
ei ther r egul ati on of the pH or r egul ati on by the pH.
Hi de Answ er
5. The anti gen was pr epar ed f r om w hol e homoge na te s of rat l i ver.
OR cr ude homoge na te s .
Hi de Answ er
6. T 4 sti m ul ated i ncor porati on of chol i ne i nto pr i m ar y c ulture s of
f etal l ung cel l s.
COMMEN T: N ot “pr i m ar y cel l cul tur es” because then ei ther the cel l s
or the cul tur es coul d be pr i m ar y . “Fetal l ung cel l s” i s OK because i f
the l ungs ar e f etal , the cel l s m ust be f etal , and v i ce v er sa.
7. P KCa c tiva tioninduc e d RACK1 tra ns loc a tion is s pe c ific for the βIIP KC
is ozyme .
Hi de Answ er
7. P KCa c tiva tioninduc e d tra ns loc a tion of RACK1 i s speci f i c… .
Adjective + () + Noun
U ntangl e the noun cl uster and add the noun that the adjecti v e shoul d m odi f y .
Put the adjecti v e i n f r ont of the noun y ou added.
Hi de Answ er
8. Ser um sam pl es f r om heal thy s ubje c ts and f r om pa tie nts w ho had
ul cerati ve col i ti s w er e studi ed by (OR w i th) paper el ectr ophor esi s.
Hi de Answ er
9. Ther e was no si gni f i cant di f f er ence betw een l actate
c onc e ntra tions i n r esti ng s ubje c ts and i n ex er ci si ng s ubje c ts .
P. 33
In thi s ex am pl e, the f i r st i dea ends bef or e “w her eas.” The second i dea bel ongs
i n a separate sentence.
Revision A
In one pati ent w ho had num er ous l esi ons, the echocar di ogram cor r ectl y
detected a l ar ge l esi on (15 m m ) attached to the r i ght cor onar y cusp but f ai l ed
to detect the 4 to 5m m l esi ons f ound at sur ger y on the r em ai ni ng tw o cusps.
How ever, i n another pati ent, the echocar di ogram cor r ectl y detected l esi ons on
al l thr ee cusps.
Revision B
In one pati ent w ho had num er ous l esi ons, the echocar di ogram cor r ectl y
detected a l ar ge l esi on (15 m m ) attached to the r i ght cor onar y cusp. It f ai l ed
to detect the 4 to 5m m l esi ons f ound at sur ger y on the r em ai ni ng tw o cusps.
How ever, i n another pati ent, the echocar di ogram cor r ectl y detected l esi ons on
al l thr ee cusps.
P. 34
Revision
The el uti on or der of these tw o i soenzy m es, l i ght chai n 3 f ol l ow ed by l i ght chai n
1, i s the r ev er se of that achi eved by DEAEcel l ul ose chr om atography of α
chy m otr y pti cdi gested S1. Si m i l ar l y, the ex tent of separati on i s r ev er sed, the
peak of l i ght chai n 1 bei ng m uch better r esol v ed than the peak of l i ght chai n 3.
N ote that putti ng the i deas i n separate sentences al so al l ow s pr eci se statem ent
of w hat the di f f er ences i n el uti on or der and ex tent of separati on ar e
(i tal i ci zed).
In the nex t ex am pl e, thr ee i deas ar e pr esented i n one sentence: the pur pose of
the ex per i m ent, how the ex per i m ent was done, and a descr i pti on of the
pati ents. Fur ther m or e, the descr i pti on of the pati ents i s nested i nsi de the
ex pl anati on of how the ex per i m ent was done.
Revision B
Our ai m was to assess the m echani sm s i nvol ved i n the benef i ci al ef f ects of
hydral azi ne on ventr i cul ar f uncti on i n pati ents w ho have chr oni c aor ti c
i nsuf f i ci ency. For thi s assessm ent, w e di d a radi onucl i de study of ventr i cul ar
f uncti on i n 15 pati ents at r est and dur i ng supi ne exer ci se. Al l pati ents had pur e
aor ti c i nsuf f i ci ency and w er e i n f uncti onal capaci ty I or II.
In Rev i si on B, the pur pose i s separated f r om the statem ent of w hat was done.
In addi ti on, the descr i pti on of the pati ents i s put i n a separate sentence. Thus,
each sentence tal k s about one i dea, so the i deas ar e easi er to under stand.
Keep sentences as shor t as possi bl e. A num er i cal gui del i ne you can use i s to
have a m ean sentence l ength of no m or e than 22 w or ds per sentence. N ote that
thi s i s a m ean val ue. If you have tw o or thr ee l ong sentences, bal ance them by
w r i ti ng a shor t sentence. The shor t sentence w i l l have a str ong i m pact, as you
can see i n Rev i si on A of Ex am pl es 2. 14 and 2. 16. To m ake thi s i m pact w or k to
your advantage, put an i m por tant i dea i n the shor t sentence.
In paper s that have especi al l y di f f i cul t sci enti f i c content, shor t sentences ar e
par ti cul ar l y i m por tant. The har der the sci ence, the si m pl er the w r i ti ng m ust be.
P. 35
Ex a mple 1
Muta ge ne s is of s e ve ra l MADS box prote ins inc luding MEF2 ha s s how n tha t
DNA binding re quire s the 56a minoa c id MADS box , in a ddition to a n
e x te ns ion of a bout 30 a mino a c ids on the c a rbox ylte rmina l s ide of the
MADS box , w hic h is unique to e a c h s ubc la s s of MADS box prote ins .
(49 w ords )
Hi de Answ er
Ex a mple 1
Mutagenesi s studi es of several MADS box pr otei ns, i ncl udi ng MEF2,
have show n that the 56am i noaci d MADS box i s r equi r ed f or DN A
bi ndi ng. A 30am i noaci d ex tensi on on the car box y l ter m i nal si de of
the MADS box i s al so r equi r ed. Thi s car box y l ter m i nal ex tensi on i s
uni que to each subcl ass of MADS box pr otei ns.
Ex a mple 2
(46 w ords )
Hi de Answ er
Ex a mple 2
Ex a mple 3
(70 w ords )
Hi de Answ er
Ex a mple 3
A tem poral and spati al r el ati onshi p betw een l i pi d per ox i dati on and
ty pe I col l agen ex pr essi on has been descr i bed i n stel l ate cel l s. Thi s
r el ati onshi p has been cor r el ated w i th an i n v i tr o m odel of cocul tur e
betw een stel l ate cel l s and hepatocy tes. In thi s m odel , af ter addi ti on
of LCL 4 , col l agen i s ex pr essed i n stel l ate cel l s l ocated near the
stel l ate cel l hepatocy te boundar y but not i n di stant cel l s or i n stel l ate
cel l s cul tur ed al one.
P. 36
If the noun that a pr onoun r ef er s to i s uncl ear, the r eader m ay have tr oubl e
under standi ng the sentence. The noun that a pr onoun r ef er s to can be uncl ear
f or at l east tw o r easons.
Another sol uti on i s to change the sentence str uctur e. The advantage of changi ng
the sentence str uctur e i n thi s case i s that the i nel egant r epeti ti on of “these
di seases” can be avoi ded.
P. 37
No Possible Nouns
A second r eason a pr onoun can be uncl ear i s that ther e i s no noun f or the
pr onoun to r ef er to. Thi s si tuati on occur s w hen the w or d “thi s” i s used al one at
or near the begi nni ng of a sentence to r ef er to a concept i m pl i ed i n the
pr ev i ous sentence.
Ex a mple Ty son et al . abr uptl y occl uded the venae cavae bef or e
2. 20 anal y zi ng the hear t beats. As a r esul t of thi s, the vol um e
of the r i ght hear t rapi dl y decr eased.
Re vis ion Ty son et al . abr uptl y occl uded the venae cavae bef or e
anal y zi ng the hear t beats. As a r esul t of thi s occl usi on,
the vol um e of the r i ght hear t rapi dl y decr eased.
Som eti m es no w or d i n the pr ev i ous sentence can be r epeated, as i n Ex am pl e
2. 21 (Ex am pl e 27 i n Exer ci se 1. 1).
In thi s ex am pl e, “both” r ef er s to a decr ease i n one var i abl e and an i ncr ease i n
another var i abl e. To avoi d r epeati ng so m any w or ds, w e can use a categor y
ter m . The categor y shoul d be the sm al l est one that encom passes the speci f i c
ter m s. In thi s case, the sm al l est categor y i s “changes.” (In the r ev i si on,
“changes” i s pr eceded by “of these” to i ndi cate that the changes w er e
m enti oned i n the pr ev i ous sentence. )
In sum m ar y, pr onouns can be uncl ear ei ther i f ther e ar e too m any possi bl e
nouns f or the pr onoun to r ef er to or i f ther e i s none. The sol uti ons f or the f i r st
pr obl em ar e ei ther to r estate the appr opr i ate noun or to change the sentence
str uctur e. The sol uti ons f or the second pr obl em ar e to r epeat a w or d f r om the
pr ev i ous sentence af ter the pr onoun or to add a categor y ter m af ter the
pr onoun.
One other poi nt w or th noti ng i s that the nouns that pr onouns r ef er to shoul d be
par t of the tex t. Subheadi ngs ar e not par t of the tex t.
P. 38
Item s i n par entheses, i ncl udi ng r ef er ences, ar e not par t of the tex t.
Who ar e “they ”?
The poi nt i s that the tex t shoul d m ake sense even i f al l subheadi ngs and al l
i tem s i n par entheses ar e om i tted.
P. 39
Hi de Answ er
1. To decr ease bl ood vol um e by about 10% i n a f ew m i nutes, bl ood
was pool ed i n the subjects' l egs by pl aci ng w i de congesti ng cuf f s
ar ound the thi ghs and i nf l ati ng the cuf f s to di astol i c brachi al ar ter i al
pr essur e.
No Possible Noun
In the sentences bel ow , the pr onoun (under l i ned) has no noun to r ef er to.
Rev i se these sentences to m ak e the m eani ng cl ear by r epeati ng one or m or e
w or ds f r om the pr ev i ous sentence.
Hi de Answ er
2. Thi s di f f er ence i n r ecover y suggests that… .
Thi s sel ecti ve r educti on of apol i popr otei n AI suggests that … .
Hi de Answ er
3. The si ze of the bol us i s l i m i ted … .
P. 40
Pairs
Pai r s of i deas—tw o i deas joi ned by “and,” “or,” or “but”—shoul d be w r i tten i n
paral l el f or m , as i n Ex am pl es 2. 24–2. 26.
In Ex am pl e 2. 24, the gr oup of w or ds af ter “but” i s i n the sam e gram m ati cal
str uctur e as the gr oup of w or ds bef or e “but”: subject, ver b, pr eposi ti onal
phrase.
In dogs, about 20% of pl asm a gl ucose car bon i s r ecycl ed v i a tr i car bon
com pounds
ei ther in c old
or at ne utra l a mbie nt te mpe ra ture .
pr eposi ti on obje c t
In thi s ex am pl e, note that “i n col d” and “at neutral am bi ent tem peratur e” ar e i n
paral l el f or m even though the speci f i c pr eposi ti ons (“i n,” “at”) ar e di f f er ent. Al l
that m atter s f or paral l el f or m i s that both i tem s ar e pr eposi ti onal phrases.
r enal bl ood f l ow .
noun
pr eposi ti on obje c t
P. 41
If paral l el i deas ar e not w r i tten i n paral l el f or m , the l ogi cal r el ati on of the
i deas (si m i l ar i ty, al ter nati ves, contrast, com par i son) i s obscur ed.
Ex a mple Thi s l ack of r esponse coul d have been due to dam age of a
2. 29 cel l sur f ace r eceptor by the i sol ati on pr ocedur e, but i t
coul d al so be that i sol ated cel l s do not r espond nor m al l y
because the cel l s ar e i sol ated.
In thi s sentence, the gr oups of w or ds bef or e and af ter “but” ar e not paral l el , so
i t i s not i m m edi atel y obv i ous that the second hal f of the sentence i s gi v i ng
another possi bl e r eason f or the l ack of r esponse. (N ote that “i t” does not r ef er
to “thi s l ack of r esponse.”)
Re vis ion Thi s l ack of r esponse coul d have been due to dam age of a
A cel l sur f ace r eceptor by the i sol ati on pr ocedur e, but i t
coul d al so have been due to the f act that i sol ated cel l s do
not r espond nor m al l y because they ar e i sol ated.
In thi s r ev i si on, the i deas bef or e and af ter “but” ar e i n paral l el f or m , and “i t”
r ef er s appr opr i atel y to “thi s l ack of r esponse.” How ever, thi s sentence can be
w r i tten m or e si m pl y, as f ol l ow s:
Re vis ion Thi s l ack of r esponse coul d have been due to dam age of a
B cel l sur f ace r eceptor by the i sol ati on pr ocedur e or si m pl y
to the f act of i sol ati on, w hi ch coul d al ter nor m al cel l
r esponses.
In thi s r ev i si on, the i deas ar e easi er to under stand because the r epeti ti on of
“coul d have been due to” and one r epeti ti on of “i sol ated” have been om i tted. In
both r ev i si ons, the author 's i ntenti on of pr esenti ng al ter nati ve r easons i s cl ear
because the i deas ar e w r i tten i n paral l el f or m .
P. 42
N ote the r epeti ti on of “at” i n the r ev i si on f or the paral l el f or m .
“Com par ed to” shoul d not be used w i th “decr eased” or “i ncr eased” because the
m eani ng i s am bi guous.
Di d al veol ar phosphol i pi d decr ease (A) i n both ex per i m ental and contr ol
rabbi ts? (B) onl y i n ex per i m ental rabbi ts? (C) i n nei ther gr oup?
Rev i si on A Ex per i m ental rabbi ts had a 28% gr eater decr ease i n al veol ar
phosphol i pi d than di d contr ol rabbi ts… .
Rev i si on B Ex per i m ental rabbi ts had a 28% decr ease i n al veol ar phosphol i pi d
but contr ol rabbi ts had no decr ease… .
Rev i si on C Ex per i m ental rabbi ts had 28% l ess al veol ar phosphol i pi d than di d
contr ol rabbi ts… .
Because “decr ease com par ed to” has at l east thr ee possi bl e i nter pr etati ons,
“com par ed to” shoul d not be used w i th “decr eased” (or w i th “i ncr eased”).
Comparison of Unlike Things
Al though ever yone i s awar e that “you cannot com par e appl es and oranges,”
such com par i sons ar e com m on i n sci enti f i c r esear ch paper s.
N ote that a pr onoun (“that” or “those”) can of ten be used to avoi d r epeati ng the
noun:
Ex a mple 2. 34
P. 43
Actual l y, thi s m edi um contai ns about 4–5 m M phosphate r egar dl ess of the
concentrati on of phosphate i n Schnei der 's m edi um . The concentrati on i s an
absol ute val ue and does not depend on any other concentrati on.
Re vis ion Thi s m edi um contai ns 4–5 m M phosphate; Schnei der 's
m edi um contai ns 9–10 m M phosphate.
Series
In al l the pr ecedi ng ex am pl es, tw o i deas ar e i n paral l el f or m , but m or e than
tw o i deas can be i n paral l el f or m , as i n the f ol l ow i ng ex am pl es of paral l el
ser i es.
to the me dium, a nd
r em ove this proc e dure unti l al m ost al l the f l oati ng cel l s
to r epeat w er e r em oved.
In a ser i es, as i n a pai r, the f or m of al l the paral l el i tem s m ust be the sam e. In
Ex am pl es 2. 36 and 2. 37, the paral l el i tem s ar e al l ver bs (“washed,”
P. 44
“i nsti l l ed,” “i ncubated”) f ol l ow ed by objects and other com pl eter s, and
i nf i ni ti ves (“to ti p,” “to f l ood,” “to r em ove,” “to r epeat”) f ol l ow ed by objects and
other com pl eter s.
How ever, hav i ng tw o “ands” joi ni ng di f f er ent l evel s of paral l el i tem s i n one
sentence i s i nel egant. To avoi d thi s i nel egance, a sem i col on can be used i n
pl ace of the second “and.”
Re vis ion The D225 m odi f i cati on contai ns 12. 5 m g of cy stei ne HCl
B and 50 m g of m ethi oni ne; i ts f i nal vol um e i s 115 m l .
Paired Conjunctions
Another pr obl em of paral l el i sm i s the pr oper use of pai r ed conjuncti ons. Pai r ed
conjuncti ons ar e “both… and… ,” “ei ther… or… ,” “nei ther… nor… ,” and “not onl y… but
al so… .”
Rev i si on
For paral l el f or m , the gr oup of w or ds betw een “both” and “and” m ust be i n
ex actl y the sam e f or m as the gr oup of w or ds af ter “and.” In the r ev i si on, both
gr oups of w or ds ar e pr eposi ti onal phrases (“on the absol ute osm ol al i ncr ease,”
“on the speci es studi ed”).
P. 45
Another way to check that the sentence i s i n paral l el f or m w hen pai r ed
conjuncti ons ar e used i s to l ook just at the r el ati ve posi ti ons of the
conjuncti ons and the pr eposi ti ons. If the f i r st conjuncti on (her e “both”) com es
af ter the pr eposi ti on (“on”) and the second conjuncti on (her e “and”) com es
bef or e the pr eposi ti on (“on”), that i s,
on both x
on both x
and y.
Re vis ion The young subjects coul d r eadi l y accom m odate bl ood
vol um e changes i n other com par tm ents, but the m i ddl e
aged subjects coul d not.
P. 46
Pairs
1. Ca rdia c output w a s le s s in the E. c oli group tha n the P s e udomona s
group.
Hi de Answ er
1. Car di ac output was l ess i n the E. col i gr oup than i n the
Pseudom onas gr oup.
2. Le ft ve ntric ula r func tion w a s impa ire d in the dogs tha t re c e ive d
e ndotox in a nd the c ontrol dogs .
Hi de Answ er
2. Lef t ventr i cul ar f uncti on was i m pai r ed i n the dogs that r ecei ved
endotox i n and i n the contr ol dogs.
Hi de Answ er
3. Pul sati on of the cel l s or cel l m asses can be qui ck and er rati c or
sl ow and r egul ar.
Hi de Answ er
4. Wher eas epi dural adm i ni strati on of f entany l at a rate of 20 µg/h
r educed the r equi r em ent f or pati entcontr ol l ed bupi vacai ne,
i ntravenous adm i ni strati on of f entany l (20 µg/h) or pl acebo di d not.
Series
5. The tube s w e re s pun on a Vorte x mix e r for 10 s , s tore d a t 4° C for 2 h,
a nd the n the y w e re c e ntrifuge d a t 500 × g for 10 min.
Hi de Answ er
5. The tubes w er e spun on a Vor tex m i xer f or 10 s, stor ed at 4°C f or
2 h, and then centr i f uged at 500 × g f or 10 m i n.
Hi de Answ er
6. Tracheal gangl i on cel l s have been cl assi f i ed on the basi s of thei r
spontaneous di schar ge (12), thei r el ectr i cal pr oper ti es (5), and the
pr esence or absence of vasoacti ve i ntesti nal pepti de (8).
Hybrids
7. P he nyle phrine inc re a s e d the ra te of muc us s e c re tion, the output of non
dia lyza ble 35 S a nd c a us e d a ne t tra ns e pithe lia l move me nt of Na tow a rds
the muc os a .
Hi de Answ er
7. Pheny l ephr i ne i ncr eased the rate of m ucus secr eti on and the
output of nondi al y zabl e 3 5 S; i t al so caused a net transepi thel i al
m ovem ent of N a towar ds the m ucosa.
Pheny l ephr i ne i ncr eased the rate of m ucus secr eti on, i ncr eased the
output of nondi al y zabl e 3 5 S, and caused a net transepi thel i al
m ovem ent of N a towar ds the m ucosa.
Hi de Answ er
8. The f racti ons w er e centr i f uged, the pel l ets w er e r esuspended i n a
sm al l vol um e of buf f er, and a sam pl e of cel l s was counted i n an
el ectr oni c cel l counter.
Paired Conjunctions
In y our r ev i si on, do not om i t the pai r ed conjuncti ons, under l i ned.
Hi de Answ er
9. Even the hi ghest dose of atr opi ne had no ef f ect ei ther on basel i ne
pul se rate or on the vagal l y sti m ul ated pul se rate.
Even the hi ghest dose of atr opi ne had no ef f ect on pul se rate ei ther
dur i ng basel i ne or dur i ng vagal sti m ul ati on.
10. An impuls e from the va gus ne rve to the mus c le ha s to tra ve l both
through ga nglia a nd pos tga nglionic pa thw a ys .
Hi de Answ er
10. An i m pul se f r om the vagus ner ve to the m uscl e has to travel both
thr ough gangl i a and and thr ough postgangl i oni c pathway s.
11. The inte rna l pre s s ure mus t not only de pe nd on volume but a ls o the
ra te of filling.
Hi de Answ er
11. The i nter nal pr essur e m ust depend not onl y on vol um e but al so
on the rate of f i l l i ng.
P. 47
1. The gre a te r s ta bility in this s tudy c ompa re d to the pre vious s tudy
re s ulte d from more a c c ura te ma rk e r digitiza tion.
Hi de Answ er
1. The gr eater stabi l i ty i n thi s study than i n the pr ev i ous study
r esul ted f r om m or e accurate m ar ker di gi ti zati on.
2. Tota l mic ros phe re los s e s w e re gre a te r a t 34, 64, a nd 124 min w he n
c ompa re d to 4 min.
Hi de Answ er
2. Total m i cr ospher e l osses w er e gr eater at 34, 64, and 124 m i n than
at4 m i n.
3. W e fre que ntly obs e rve d a de c re a s e in me a n c orona ry a rte ria l pre s s ure
c ompa re d to me a n a ortic pre s s ure a fte r c a rboc hrome n inje c tion.
Hi de Answ er
3. We f r equentl y obser ved that m ean cor onar y ar ter i al pr essur e was
l ow er than m ean aor ti c pr essur e af ter car bochr om en i njecti on.
(m ay be nei ther decr eased)
We f r equentl y obser ved a gr eater decr ease i n m ean cor onar y ar ter i al
pr essur e than i n m ean aor ti c pr essur e af ter car bochr om en i njecti on.
(both decr eased)
Rev i se sentences 4–6 so that they com par e com par abl e thi ngs. (Rul e: Add
“that” or “those” or r epeat the noun w hen the com par ati v e ter m i s al l together
i n one spot, but not w hen the com par ati v e ter m i s spl i t. )
4. The los s of a polipoprote in AI from highde ns ity lipoprote ins during
ultra c e ntrifuga tiona l is ola tion w a s gre a te r tha n during othe r is ola tion
me thods .
Hi de Answ er
4. The l oss of apol i popr otei n AI f r om hi ghdensi ty l i popr otei ns
dur i ng ul tracentr i f ugati onal i sol ati on w a s gre a te r tha n the l osses
dur i ng other i sol ati on m ethods.
Hi de Answ er
5. Losses of apol i popr otei n AI dur i ng other i sol ati on m ethods w e re
s ma lle r tha n l osses dur i ng ul tracentr i f ugati on.
Hi de Answ er
6. The pr otei n com posi ti on of heav y m er omyosi n, lik e that of
subf ragm ent 1, was hom ogeneous.
Lik e the pr otei n com posi ti on of subf ragm ent 1, the pr otei n
com posi ti on of heav y m er omyosi n was hom ogeneous.
P. 48
Re vis ion The am ount (OR concentrati on, rate of appearance, rate
A of secr eti on) of nondi al y zabl e 35S i n the l um i nal bath
w a s me a s ure d.
Re vis ion The appearance of nondi al y zabl e 35S i n the l um i nal bath
B w a s note d.
Be Sure That the Subject and Verb Agree
(See Str unk and Whi te, 1. 9. )
Re vis ion The esophagus, stom ach, and duodenum of each rabbi t
w e re ex am i ned.
“Ti ssue” i s si ngul ar, so “was m i nced” i s the cor r ect ver b. But “sam pl es” i s
pl ural , so car r y i ng over the “was” i s not gram m ati cal l y cor r ect.
In thi s sentence, bl ood f l ow seem s to be pr oceedi ng w i th the nex t occl usi on.
The r eason i s that the f i r st par t of the sentence i s passi ve, w her eas the second
par t i s acti ve. Thus, “pr oceedi ng” dangl es; that i s, i t has no noun to m odi f y.
The sol uti ons ar e ei ther to m ake both par ts of the sentence acti ve or to m ake
both par ts passi ve. In the acti ve sentence, “pr oceedi ng” m odi f i es “w e.” In the
passi ve sentence, “pr oceedi ng” i s changed to “was begun.”
Re vis ion We a llow e d bl ood f l ow to r etur n to basel i ne bef or e
A proc e e d (Acti ve) ing w i th the nex t occl usi on.
P. 50
Wr i te shor t sentences.
U se cl ear pr onouns.
For a pr onoun that has too m any possi bl e nouns to r ef er to, ei ther r estate
the noun i nstead of usi ng a pr onoun or change the sentence str uctur e.
For a pr onoun (usual l y “thi s”) that has no noun to add r ef er to, add the
sm al l est categor y ter m af ter the pr onoun.
When the com parati ve ter m i s al l together i n one spot, add “that” or
“those.”
When the com parati ve ter m i s spl i t, do not add “that” or “those.”
Avoi d w r i ti ng f l aw s.
Chapter 3
Paragraph Structure
Even i f a paper has per f ect w or d choi ce and per f ect sentence str uctur e, i t can
be di f f i cul t to under stand i f the paragraphs ar e not cl ear l y constr ucted. Each
paragraph m ust be constr ucted to tel l a stor y. Reader s shoul d be abl e to
r ecogni ze the m essage and f ol l ow the stor y of each paragraph w hether or not
they under stand the sci ence.
The conti nui ty, that i s, the r el ati onshi p betw een i deas, m ust be cl ear.
ORGANIZATION
The r ever se strategy i s f r equentl y used i n sci enti f i c paper s: her e ar e som e
detai l s; her e i s w hat they m ean. In the hands of a m aster stor y tel l er, thi s
strategy w or k s ver y w el l . How ever, i n l ess ex per t hands, the detai l s tend to
take over. The tr ees over shadow the f or est. The way to avoi d thi s pr obl em i s to
use a si m pl e, strai ghtf or war d appr oach: over v i ew f i r st, then detai l s.
It i s cl ear est to have onl y one m essage per paragraph. Incl udi ng m or e than one
m essage i n a paragraph m akes the paragraph com pl ex and m or e di f f i cul t to
under stand.
P. 52
Detai l s that suppor t the topi c sentence ar e w r i tten i n the r em ai ni ng sentences
of the paragraph—the suppor ti ng sentences. The suppor ti ng sentences shoul d be
or gani zed i n a l ogi cal way that ex pl ai ns the m essage of the paragraph.
Ex am pl es 3. 1–3. 3 bel ow al l begi n w i th a topi c sentence. Each topi c sentence
nam es a topi c and states a m essage that m akes one (and onl y one) cl ear poi nt.
In addi ti on, the suppor ti ng sentences ar e or gani zed l ogi cal l y to ex pl ai n the
m essage stated i n the topi c sentence, thus f ul f i l l i ng the ex pectati on that the
topi c sentence cr eates.
Example 3.1
ATher e ar e thr ee di f f er ent theor i es put f or war d f or the ver y sl ow r el ax ati on of
catch m uscl es of m ol l uscs. BOne theor y hol ds that catch i s due to som e unusual
pr oper ty of myosi n i n these m uscl es that pr oduces a sl ow rate of detachm ent
(12). CIn thi s theor y, paramyosi n w oul d have no speci al r ol e beyond that of
pr ov i di ng the l ong scaf f ol di ng on w hi ch the myosi n i s posi ti oned as w el l as the
m echani cal str ength f or the l ar ge tensi ons devel oped. DThe second theor y hol ds
that tensi on i s devel oped by acti nmyosi n i nteracti on but i s m ai ntai ned by
paramyosi n i nteracti ons (13, 14). EBecause the thi ck f i l am ents ar e of l i m i ted
l ength, i nteracti on w oul d have to occur thr ough f usi on of thi ck f i l am ents (15).
FA thi r d theor y, to w hi ch I subscr i be, pi ctur es a str uctural change i n the
paramyosi n cor e af f ecti ng the rate of br eak i ng of myosi nacti n l i nk s at the
f i l am ent sur f ace (5, 16).
The r ever se or gani zati on—f r om m ost to l east i m por tant—i s another com m on
patter n of or gani zati on f or suppor ti ng sentences.
Example 3.2
ATo assess the di str i buti on, si ze, and shape of gangl i on cel l bodi es i n the
tracheal neural pl ex us, w e ex am i ned i ndi v i dual cel l bodi es i n thei r enti r ety at
100–400 × w i th a com pound l i ght m i cr oscope. B 1 For the assessm ent of
di str i buti on, f i r st each gangl i on cel l body that was stai ned by the
acety l chol i nesterase r eacti on pr oduct or that was bor der ed by
acety l chol i nesteraseposi ti ve gangl i on cel l bodi es was cl assi f i ed accor di ng to i ts
l ocati on i n the tracheal neural pl ex us; B 2 then the num ber of cel l bodi es i n each
gangl i on was counted. CFor the assessm ent of the si ze and shape of each
gangl i on cel l body, the m ajor (a) and m i nor (b) ax i s of the cel l body w er e
m easur ed w i th a cal i brated r eti cl e i n the eyepi ece of the m i cr oscope, and,
based on these di m ensi ons, the m ean cal i per
P. 53
di am eter, the vol um e (πab 2 /6), and the aspect rati o (a/b) w er e cal cul ated.
DMean cal i per di am eter was cal cul ated by the f or m ul a f or a pr ol ate el l i psoi d of
r otati on as descr i bed by El i as and Hyde (1983).
To suppor t thi s topi c sentence, the suppor ti ng sentences ar e agai n or gani zed i n
a l i st. The or der of thi s l i st i s the sam e as the or der of the var i abl es nam ed i n
the topi c sentence. That i s, the patter n of or gani zati on i s l i sti ng detai l s i n the
announced or der .
Example 3.3
APul m onar y ner ve endi ngs w er e r el ati vel y i nsensi ti ve to pheny l di guani de
(tabl e 1, f i g. 3B). BOf 25 pul m onar y ner ve endi ngs tested, onl y 10 w er e
sti m ul ated w hen thi s dr ug was i njected i nto the r i ght atr i um , and i n onl y one of
these di d f i r i ng exceed 2. 2 i m pul ses/s. CIf the l atter endi ng i s excl uded, the
average peak f r equency of the endi ngs sti m ul ated was onl y 1. 7 i m pul ses/s.
DThe excepti on, w hi ch f i r ed w i th an average f r equency of 17. 4 i m pul ses/s at
the peak of the r esponse, was encounter ed i n the onl y dog i n w hi ch r i ght atr i al
i njecti on of pheny l di guani de evoked r ef l ex bradycar di a w i thi n the pul m onar y
ci r cul ati on ti m e (l atency 2. 2 s). EMor eover, i n thi s dog ar ter i al pr essur e f el l ,
w her eas i n al l other dogs i t r ose, but onl y af ter suf f i ci ent ti m e had el apsed f or
the dr ug to r each the sy stem i c ci r cul ati on.
P. 54
Why, then, does the paragraph conti nue? The r eason i s that som e data do not
suppor t the m essage “r el ati vel y i nsensi ti ve,” and these data cannot be i gnor ed.
Thus, the suppor ti ng sentences ar e or gani zed accor di ng to the ty pe of ev i dence:
f i r st, ev i dence that suppor ts i nsensi ti v i ty ; second, contradi ctor y ev i dence,
w hi ch does not suppor t i nsensi ti v i ty.
The contradi ctor y ev i dence i s not m er el y stated, l eav i ng the r eader to deci de
w hether the suppor ti ng or the contradi ctor y ev i dence i s str onger and thus
w hether the pul m onar y ner ve endi ngs ar e i ndeed r el ati vel y i nsensi ti ve. Instead,
the author ar gues agai nst the contradi ctor y ev i dence by poi nti ng out that the
dog was aty pi cal . Thi s ar gum ent agai nst the contradi ctor y ev i dence m akes i t
cl ear that the suppor ti ng ev i dence outw ei ghs the contradi ctor y ev i dence and
thus that the pul m onar y ner ve endi ngs ar e i ndeed r el ati vel y i nsensi ti ve.
Example 3.4
ALi ke Kar oum et al . (21), w e esti m ated the hal fl i f e of gangl i oni c dopam i ne to
be consi derabl y l ess than 1 h, w hi ch i ndi cates a ver y rapi d rate of tur nover.
BAl though m easur es of total dopam i ne tur nover cannot di sti ngui sh betw een the
rates of tur nover associ ated w i th SIF cel l s and pr i nci pal neur ons, f r om our
r esul ts w e suspect that thi s rapi d rate of tur nover i s accounted f or pr i m ar i l y by
pr ecur sor dopam i ne i n pr i nci pal neur ons. CWe based thi s suspi ci on on our
f i ndi ng that w i thi n 1 h af ter i njecti on of the sy nthesi s i nhi bi tor αMT, and 40
m i n af ter i njecti on of the sy nthesi s i nhi bi tor N SD1015, the gangl i oni c
dopam i ne content had dr opped by about 60%, l eav i ng som e 7 pm ol of dopam i ne
that was r esi stant to f ur ther si gni f i cant depl eti on f or at l east 3 h. DTo i nter pr et
these data, w e used Kosl ow 's f i ndi ng that appr ox i m atel y 40% of the dopam i ne
i n the rat super i or cer v i cal gangl i on i s stor ed i n SIF cel l s (26). EAppl y i ng thi s
f i gur e to our m easur e of gangl i oni c dopam i ne (18 pm ol /gangl i on) w oul d m ean
that about 7 pm ol of dopam i ne i s contai ned i n SIF cel l s. FTher ef or e, w e
specul ate that the 7 pm ol of dopam i ne r em ai ni ng 1 h af ter sy nthesi s was
i nhi bi ted r epr esents SIF cel l dopam i ne that i s sl ow l y tur ni ng over, w her eas the
60% that i s rapi dl y depl eted r epr esents pr ecur sor dopam i ne i n pr i nci pal
neur ons that i s rapi dl y tur ni ng over. GThi s noti on i s consi stent w i th r epor ts
w hi ch have show n that SIF cel l catechol am i nes have a ver y sl ow tur nover i n the
rat super i or cer v i cal gangl i on (32, 41).
Other com m on patter ns of or gani zati on ar e f unnel (used i n the i ntr oducti on
secti on), chr onol ogi cal or der (used ex tensi vel y i n m ethods and r esul ts),
pr obl em sol uti on, and sol uti onpr obl em (used i n m ethods paper s).
P. 56
2. Re orga nize the de ta ils in the s upporting s e nte nc e s (B–C, not D) to fulfill
the e x pe c ta tion c re a te d by your ne w topic s e nte nc e . (Do w e e x pe c t to
he a r a bout a ne s the s ia a fte r the topic s e nte nc e ?)
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion 1
Re vis ion 2
The m essage, not the topi c, i s the subject; the acti on i s i n the
v er b.
Re vis ion 3
P. 57
No Missing Steps
Whether the paragraph has a si m pl e patter n of or gani zati on or a com pl ex one,
al l steps i n the l ogi c m ust be pr esented. If a step i s m i ssi ng, the r eader cannot
f ol l ow the stor y. In Ex am pl e 3. 5, a step i s m i ssi ng betw een sentences B and C,
so the stor y i s di f f i cul t to f ol l ow.
Example 3.5
AAs ex pected, ser um gl ucose decr eased to about 800 m g/dl by the si x th hour of
i nsul i n i nf usi on. BIt was el ected to stabi l i ze ser um gl ucose at thi s l evel to al l ow
f or osm oti c equi l i brati on. CAn esti m ate of net l oss of total body gl ucose was
m ade as f ol l ow s:…
Revision
AAs ex pected, ser um gl ucose decr eased to about 800 m g/dl by the si x th hour of
i nsul i n i nf usi on. BTo al l ow f or osm oti c equi l i brati on, w e stabi l i zed ser um
gl ucose at thi s l evel by addi ng to the f l ui d i nf usi on an am ount of gl ucose
equi val ent to the net l oss of total body gl ucose. CWe esti m ated net l oss of total
body gl ucose as f ol l ow s:…
In thi s r ev i si on, the m i ssi ng step (under l i ned) that r el ates ser um gl ucose to
total body gl ucose has been pr ov i ded, thus m ak i ng the stor y easy to f ol l ow.
An om i tted step i n the stor y i s one of the gr eatest bl ock s f or the r eader to
over com e. Of ten steps ar e om i tted i nadver tentl y because the w r i ter i s ver y
f am i l i ar w i th the topi c and can suppl y the m i ssi ng step. Because w r i ter s, and
ver y k now l edgeabl e r eader s, have the sci enti f i c f ram ew or k i n thei r heads, they
can easi l y suppl y a m i ssi ng step. But r eader s w ho ar e l ess f am i l i ar w i th the
topi c do not have thi s f ram ew or k i n thei r heads and cannot suppl y m i ssi ng
steps i n the l ogi c. Thus, to m ake the stor y cl ear to al l r eader s, the w r i ter m ust
suppl y al l the steps i n the stor y. To i denti f y m i ssi ng steps i n your ow n w r i ti ng,
ei ther r ead the m anuscr i pt af ter a f ew w eek s, w hen you no l onger have the
m anuscr i pt m em or i zed, or have a col l eague f r om outsi de your f i el d r ead your
m anuscr i pt.
P. 58
CONTINUITY
Even i f a paragraph i s w el l or gani zed—that i s, has a topi c sentence and
l ogi cal l y or gani zed suppor ti ng sentences and i s not m i ssi ng any steps i n the
l ogi c, the stor y of the paragraph can be di f f i cul t to f ol l ow i f the paragraph does
not have conti nui ty. Conti nui ty i s the sm ooth f l ow of i deas f r om sentence to
sentence (and f r om paragraph to paragraph).
The essence of conti nui ty i s a cl ear r el ati onshi p betw een ever y sentence and
the sentence bef or e i t. To cr eate conti nui ty, speci al techni ques can be used. Si x
i m por tant techni ques f or cr eati ng conti nui ty ar e
The f i r st tw o of these techni ques ar e the m ost f r equentl y used and thus ar e the
m ost i m por tant.
For Clarity
The best adv i ce f or cl ear conti nui ty i s to r epeat key ter m s ex actl y. If a key
ter m i s not r epeated ex actl y and i nstead another ter m i s used, a m ental
m ani pul ati on i s needed to see the r el ati onshi p betw een the tw o ter m s. Reader s
f am i l i ar w i th the f i el d can usual l y see the r el ati onshi p; those l ess f am i l i ar m ay
not.
Example 3.6
Di gi tal i s i ncr eases the contracti l i ty of the m am m al i an hear t. Thi s change i n
i notr opi c state i s a r esul t of changes i n cal ci um f l ux thr ough the m uscl e cel l
m em brane.
What i s “i notr opi c state”? How does i t r el ate to the pr ev i ous sentence? The
answ er i s that “contracti l i ty ” and “i notr opi c state” m ean the sam e thi ng. If no
di f f er ence i n m eani ng i s i ntended, w hy use tw o di f f er ent ter m s and r i sk
conf usi ng som e r eader s?
Revision
Di gi tal i s i ncr eases the contracti l i ty of the m am m al i an hear t. Thi s i ncr eased
contracti l i ty i s a r esul t of changes i n cal ci um f l ux thr ough the m uscl e cel l
m em brane.
P. 59
In thi s r ev i si on, the conti nui ty i s cl ear to al l r eader s because the key ter m
“contracti l i ty ” i s r epeated ex actl y. In addi ti on, the key ter m “i ncr eases” i s
r epeated, rather than bei ng general i zed to “change.” Repeti ti on of tw o key
ter m s m akes the conti nui ty even str onger.
In Ex am pl e 3. 7, the author jum ps f r om the key ter m s “di gesti on” and “l i ver ” at
the end of one paragraph to the key ter m s “i sol ati on” and “hepatocy tes” at the
begi nni ng of the nex t paragraph. The r el ati onshi p betw een the tw o paragraphs
i s not i m m edi atel y obv i ous.
Example 3.7
1. AThe ex tent of di gesti on of the l i ver was deter m i ned em pi r i cal l y, on the
basi s of the sof tness of the l i ver i n r esponse to gentl e scratches appl i ed
w i th ster i l e tw eezer s. BWhen these scratches br oke the sur f ace of the
l i ver , di gesti on was consi der ed com pl ete.
2. CThe key enzy m e i n hepatocy te i sol ati on i s col l agenase, but ther e i s
sur pr i si ngl y l i ttl e def i ni ti ve i nf or m ati on about w hat consti tutes a good
enzy m e pr eparati on f or ef f i cacy of cel l y i el d and v i abi l i ty.
Repeati ng the key ter m s “di gesti on” and “l i ver ” i n sentence C m akes the
r el ati onshi p betw een the paragraphs cl ear.
Revision
1. AThe ex tent of di gesti on of the l i ver was deter m i ned em pi r i cal l y, on the
basi s of the sof tness of the l i ver i n r esponse to gentl e scratches appl i ed
w i th ster i l e tw eezer s. BWhen these scratches br oke the sur f ace of the
l i ver, di gesti on was consi der ed com pl ete.
2. CThe key enzy m e used to di gest l i ver i s col l agenase, but ther e i s
sur pr i si ngl y l i ttl e def i ni ti ve i nf or m ati on about w hat consti tutes a good
enzy m e pr eparati on f or ef f i cacy of cel l y i el d and v i abi l i ty.
If the author wants to i ncl ude “i sol ati on” i n paragraph 2, that i s al so possi bl e.
Si m pl y w r i te “The key enzy m e used to di gest l i ver f or i sol ati on of hepatocy tes
i s col l agenase… .” In that case, the key ter m “cel l ” l ater i n sentence C shoul d be
changed to the key ter m “hepatocy te,” si nce hepatocy tes ar e the cel l s of
i nter est.
For Accuracy
Som eti m es changi ng key ter m s can m ake the m eani ng sci enti f i cal l y i naccurate,
as i n Ex am pl e 3. 8.
Example 3.8
ATo deter m i ne w hi ch col l agenase concentrati on i s the m ost appr opr i ate f or our
pur poses, w e tested col l agenase B (Boehr i nger Mannhei m , Indi anapol i s, IN )
di ssol ved at di f f er ent concentrati ons i n the per f usi on m edi um . CFi r st w e
per f used m ouse l i ver w i th a m edi um contai ni ng the sam e quanti ty of
col l agenase B as the m edi um used to per f use rat l i ver (70 m g enzy m e per l i ter
of per f usi on m edi um ).
P. 60
Revision
ATo deter m i ne w hi ch col l agenase concentrati on i s the m ost appr opr i ate f or our
pur poses, w e tested col l agenase B (Boehr i nger Mannhei m , Indi anapol i s, IN )
di ssol ved at di f f er ent concentrati ons i n the per f usi on m edi um . CFi r st w e
per f used m ouse l i ver w i th a m edi um contai ni ng the sam e concentrati on of
col l agenase B as the m edi um used to per f use rat l i ver (70 m g enzy m e per l i ter
of per f usi on m edi um ).
Example 3.9
Si nce RACK1 and βIIPKC ar e transl ocated together and bi nd each other, w e nex t
wanted to deter m i ne the ti m i ng of associ ati on… . Thi s m er gi ng of i m ages at a
si te di f f er ent f r om the Gol gi apparatus i ndi cates that RACK1 and βIIPKC bi nd
each other bef or e they ar e transl ocated together to the Gol gi apparatus.
“Associ ati on” i s a m or e general ter m than “bi ndi ng.” If you ar e tal k i ng about
bi ndi ng, i t i s cl ear est to use that ter m .
Revision
Si nce RACK1 and βIIPKC ar e transl ocated together and bi nd each other, w e nex t
wanted to deter m i ne the ti m i ng of bi ndi ng… . Thi s m er gi ng of i m ages at a si te
di f f er ent f r om the Gol gi apparatus i ndi cates that RACK1 and βIIPKC bi nd each
other bef or e they ar e transl ocated together to the Gol gi apparatus.
To Avoid “Noise.”
Som eti m es changi ng key ter m s m ay not be uncl ear or i naccurate, but just
cr eates “noi se,” as i n Ex am pl e 3. 10.
Example 3.10
In hum ans, apoB100, m ai nl y sy nthesi zed i n the l i ver, and apoB48, m ai nl y
sy nthesi zed i n the i ntesti ne, ar e the pr oducts of a si ngl e apoB gene (r ef ). The
pr oducti on of apoB48 i n the hum an i ntesti ne i s the r esul t of an RN Aedi ti ng
pr ocess that changes a gl utam i ne codon (CAA) of the m RN A f or apoB100 i nto a
transl ati onal stop codon (U AA). Thi s apoB m RN Aedi ti ng pr ocess does not
occur i n hum an l i ver s, so apoB48 i s not sy nthesi zed i n hum an l i ver s. How ever,
the m RN Aedi ti ng pr ocess, and thus apoB48 f or m ati on, occur s i n m ouse and
rat l i ver s.
If “pr oducti on” and “f or m ati on” m ean “sy nthesi s,” w hy not use “sy nthesi s” each
ti m e?
The r eason usual l y gi ven f or not r epeati ng a w or d i s that al m ost ever yone
r em em ber s bei ng taught not to r epeat the sam e w or d tw i ce i n a sentence, a
paragraph, or som e other l i m i t. The goal of not r epeati ng the sam e w or d i s to
have an el egant rather than a bor i ng sty l e. Indeed, w hen w el l handl ed, not
r epeati ng the sam e w or ds can cr eate an el egant sty l e. We saw an ex am pl e of
el egant sty l e f r om not r epeati ng the sam e w or d (but not f r om usi ng di f f er ent
w or ds) i n the second r ev i si on of Ex am pl e 1 i n Exer ci se 2. 4, w hi ch avoi ds
r epeti ti on of “congesti ng cuf f s.” How ever, i n Ex am pl e 3. 10 the sty l e i s not
par ti cul ar l y el egant. The m or e l i kel y ef f ect of not r epeati ng key ter m s ex actl y
i n Ex am pl e 3. 10 i s that cl ar i ty i s i n jeopar dy. The best that can be sai d i s that
not r epeati ng key ter m s ex actl y cr eates “noi se.”
P. 61
When you ar e tem pted not to r epeat key ter m s, consi der thr ee poi nts. One i s
that, unl i ke author s, w ho ar e usual l y keenl y awar e of each w or d they ar e
w r i ti ng, m ost r eader s ar e sem i consci ous w hen they ar e r eadi ng the sci enti f i c
l i teratur e. Thus, they do not begi n to noti ce a w or d unti l the thi r d ti m e they
r ead i t. So you do not have to star t w or r y i ng about r epeti ti on bei ng bor i ng unti l
the f i f th or si x th ti m e you use a w or d.
Fi nal l y, w hether the r eader i s sem i consci ous or consci ous, the r eadi ng job i s
easi est i f you use one and onl y one ter m to m ean one thi ng, and r epeat i t
ex actl y thr oughout a paper. Thi s ex act r epeti ti on of key ter m s i s especi al l y
i m por tant i n sci ence, si nce so m uch can be goi ng on sci enti f i cal l y i n each
paragraph and so m any key ter m s can be i n pl ay. Thus, the best adv i ce f or
cl ear conti nui ty i s to r epeat key ter m s ex actl y.
Example 3.11
… r educti on of r educed gl utathi one…
What does thi s phrase m ean? “Reduced gl utathi one” m ust m ean gl utathi one that
has been deox i di zed. Pr esum abl y “r educti on” does not al so m ean “deox i di zed”
but “decr eased.” It i s cl ear est to w r i te “decr ease i n r educed gl utathi one” i f that
i s w hat you m ean.
Example 3.12
Di gi tal i s i ncr eases the contracti l i ty of the m am m al i an hear t. Changes i n the
cal ci um f l ux thr ough the m uscl e cel l m em brane cause thi s i ncr eased
contracti l i ty .
Revision
Di gi tal i s i ncr eases the contracti l i ty of the m am m al i an hear t. Thi s i ncr eased
contracti l i ty r esul ts f r om changes i n cal ci um f l ux thr ough the m uscl e cel l
m em brane.
In the r ev i si on, the subject (“changes…”) and the com pl eter (“thi s i ncr eased
contracti l i ty ”) ar e sw i tched, thus m ov i ng the r epeated key ter m to the
begi nni ng of the second sentence as the subject of the sentence.
The m or e del ayed the r epeti ti on of the key ter m , the l ess obv i ous the
conti nui ty. The r eason i s that m or e and m or e new key ter m s ar e added bef or e
the r el ati onshi p betw een the tw o sentences i s cl ear. Her e i s an ex am pl e.
P. 62
Example 3.13
ACel l ul ar oncogenes ar e cr eated w hen nor m al cel l ul ar genes that have l atent
transf or m i ng potenti al , that i s, pr otooncogenes, ar e acti vated and key
r egul ator y pathway s that contr ol cel l pr ol i f erati on ar e subver ted. BSeveral
subf am i l i es of Gpr otei ncoupl ed r eceptor s, f or ex am pl e, the ser otoni n (1c) and
m uscar i ni c chol i ner gi c (m 1, m 3, m 5) r eceptor s, have been show n to r esul t i n
condi ti onal , agoni stdependent acti vati on of pr otooncogenes (r ef s).
In Ex am pl e 3. 13 the conti nui ty betw een the tw o sentences i s not cl ear because
several new key ter m s ar e i ntr oduced bef or e the key ter m s f r om sentence A
(“acti vated,” “pr otooncogenes”) ar e r epeated—at the end of the sentence.
Revision
ACel l ul ar oncogenes ar e cr eated w hen nor m al cel l ul ar genes that have l atent
transf or m i ng potenti al , that i s, pr otooncogenes ar e acti vated and key
r egul ator y pathway s that contr ol cel l pr ol i f erati on ar e subver ted. BPr oto
oncogenes can be acti vated condi ti onal l y by var i ous agents, i ncl udi ng several
subf am i l i es of Gpr otei ncoupl ed r eceptor s, f or ex am pl e, the ser otoni n (1c)
r eceptor s and m uscar i ni c chol i ner gi c (m l , m 3, m 5) r eceptor s (r ef s).
In the r ev i si on, “pr otooncogenes” (the l ast w or d i n the or i gi nal com pl eter of
sentence B) becom es the subject of the sentence and “several subf am i l i es…”
(the or i gi nal subject) becom es the com pl eter. In addi ti on, putti ng the acti on i n
the ver b (“can be acti vated”) m akes the sentence m or e di r ect and m or e si m i l ar
to sentence A.
Example 3.14
Si gnal s that conf er l ocal i zati on to the endopl asm i c r eti cul um (ER) have been
character i zed i n the cy topl asm i c dom ai n of m any m am m al i an ty pe I
transm em brane pr otei ns that r esi de i n the ER and i n the ERGol gi i nter m edi ate
com par tm ent. One com m on f eatur e of these si gnal s i s the pr esence of tw o
l y si ne r esi dues at posi ti ons 3 and 4 f r om the Cter m i nal end of the
cy topl asm i c dom ai n (r ef s).
In Ex am pl e 3. 14, the r epeated key ter m , “si gnal ,” i s not the subject of the
second sentence. Instead, an aspect of “si gnal ”—“one com m on f eatur e”—i s the
subject, and the key ter m (“si gnal ”) i s r epeated af ter the subject. The stor y i n
thi s paragraph thus m oves f r om si gnal s to a com m on f eatur e of the si gnal s.
Because the key ter m f r om sentence A i s r epeated ear l y i n sentence B, the
r eader can f ol l ow the stor y easi l y.
Whether the key ter m i s r epeated ear l y as the subject of the sentence or
i m m edi atel y af ter the subject, the cr uci al poi nt i s that the r el ati onshi p betw een
the new sentence and the pr ev i ous sentence i s cl ear at the begi nni ng of the
new sentence.
P. 63
Bidirectional Continuity
Repeati ng the key ter m ear l y not onl y cr eates conti nui ty w i th the pr ev i ous
sentence but can al so cr eate conti nui ty w i th the nex t sentence.
In Ex am pl e 3. 15, each sentence star ts w i th a new key ter m . The ol d key ter m s
ar e r epeated l ate—at the ends of sentences B and C. In addi ti on, the r epeti ti on
i s i nex act. As a r esul t, the stor y i n thi s paragraph i s di f f i cul t to f ol l ow.
Example 3.15
AThe abi l i ty to per f or m hi ghr esol uti on genoty pi ng f or the pur poses of geneti c
m appi ng depends on the avai l abi l i ty of pol y m or phi c m ar ker s at ver y hi gh
densi ty. BSi ngl ebase var i ati ons, r epor ted on average at ever y 1 k b of the
hum an genom e, pr ov i de an attracti ve r eser voi r of pol y m or phi sm s. CMi sm atch
r epai r detecti on i s an i n v i vo m ethod f or the detecti on of DN A sequence
var i ati ons.
Revision
AThe abi l i ty to per f or m hi ghr esol uti on genoty pi ng f or the pur poses of geneti c
m appi ng depends on the avai l abi l i ty of pol y m or phi c m ar ker s at ver y hi gh
densi ty. BAn attracti ve r eser voi r of pol y m or phi c m ar ker s i s si ngl ebase
var i ati ons, r epor ted on average at ever y 1 k b of the hum an genom e. CAn i n
v i vo m ethod f or detecti ng si ngl ebase var i ati ons i s m i sm atch r epai r detecti on.
In the r ev i si on, r epeati ng “pol y m or phi c m ar ker s” ear l y i n sentence B m akes the
conti nui ty betw een sentences A and B i m m edi atel y cl ear. Thi s ear l y r epeti ti on
al so puts the key ter m “si ngl ebase var i ati ons” l ater i n the sentence and thus
m akes the conti nui ty betw een sentences B and C cl ear er —but onl y af ter
“var i ati ons” i s m oved cl oser to the begi nni ng of sentence C.
The r ev i si on al so r epeats key ter m s ex actl y : “pol y m or phi c m ar ker s,” not
“pol y m or phi sm s,” and “si ngl ebase var i ati ons,” not “DN A sequence var i ati ons.”
Al though each sentence sti l l star ts w i th a new key ter m , the new key ter m i s an
aspect of a r epeated key ter m , so the stor y i n thi s paragraph i s now easy to
f ol l ow.
P. 64
Introduc tion
AThe dyna mic binding c a pa c ity of a prote in on c hroma togra phic re s ins
de pe nds on line a r ve loc ity, be d le ngth, binding k ine tic s , a nd the phys ic a l
a nd c he mic a l prope rtie s of the re s in. BBre a k through c urve s a t diffe re nt
be d le ngths a nd ve loc itie s provide a n e x c e lle nt me thod of me a s uring this
dyna mic binding c a pa c ity. CFor la rge mole c ule s s uc h a s prote ins , the
s ha pe of the bre a k through c urve ma y va ry c ons ide ra bly a s line a r ve loc ity
a nd c olumn le ngth a re c ha nge d.
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion 1
Re vis ion 2
COMMEN TS
Re pe a t Ke y Te rms Ex a c tly
Re pe a t Ke y Te rms Ea rly
In the or i gi nal par agr aph, the conti nui ty betw een sentences A and B
i s uncl ear unti l the end of sentence B. The r eason i s that a new k ey
ter m , “br eak thr ough, ” i s i ntr oduced bef or e w e k now how i t r el ates to
the pr ev i ous sentence. In the r ev i si ons, “dy nam i c bi ndi ng capaci ty ” i s
r epeated ear l y i n sentence B, bef or e “br eak thr ough” i s m enti oned, so
the conti nui ty i s cl ear er , and the stor y l i ne i s easi er to f ol l ow .
In Rev i si on 2, the conti nui ty betw een sentences A and B i s str onger
than i n Rev i si on 1 because “dy nam i c bi ndi ng capaci ty ” i s r epeated at
the begi nni ng of sentence B, as the subject of the sentence. In
Rev i si on 1, an aspect of “dy nam i c bi ndi ng capaci ty ” (“m ethod of
m easur i ng”) i s at the begi nni ng of the sentence.
For str onger conti nui ty betw een sentences B and C, the k ey ter m
“shape” i s added to sentence B i n both r ev i si ons. In addi ti on, i n the
second r ev i si on, the k ey ter m s “shape of the br eak thr ough cur v e” ar e
r epeated at the begi nni ng of sentence C.
P. 65
Ex a mple 2
In the a bs tra c t be low , the s tory line bre a k s be fore five s e nte nc e s : B, C, E,
H, a nd I. Re vis e this a bs tra c t to ma k e the s tory c le a r by re pe a ting k e y
te rms e x a c tly a nd e a rly. Cons ide r the follow ing que s tions :
Hi de Answ er
EXAMP LE 2
Re vis ion 1
Re vis ion 3
A, BIn the yeast Sacchar om y ces cer ev i si ae, tra ns c ription of the aci d
phosphatase PHO5 i s r egul ated by ex tracel l ul ar phosphate l evel s
thr ough the transcr i pti on f actor PHO4. CWhen yeast cel l s ar e gr ow n
i n m edi um contai ni ng hi gh phosphate l evel s, PHO4 enter s the
cy topl asm and PHO5 i s not transcr i bed. DWhen yeast cel l s ar e gr ow n
i n m edi um w i thout phosphate, PHO4 i s re ta ine d i n the nucl eus. D '
Ther e, i n conjuncti on w i th a second transcr i pti on f actor, PHO2, i t
acti vates transcr i pti on of PHO5. ETher e ar e tw o hy potheses f or how
PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus under l ow phosphate condi ti ons. FOne
hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 bi nds to the nucl ear pr otei n PHO2. H To test
thi s hy pothesi s, w e studi ed nucl ear r etenti on of PHO4 i n a strai n that
l ack s PHO2. I Pr el i m i nar y r esul ts suggest that bi ndi ng of PHO4 to
PHO2 i s not r equi r ed f or the nucl ear r etenti on of PHO4 under l ow
phosphate condi ti ons. J The second hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 bi ndi ng to
DN A thr ough i ts DN A bi ndi ng dom ai n i s r esponsi bl e f or r etai ni ng PHO4
i n the nucl eus. K To test thi s hypothesi s, w e pl an to study the nucl ear
r etenti on of a PHO4 m utant f r om w hi ch the DN A bi ndi ng dom ai n has
been del eted.
Re vis ion 4
To l i nk key ter m s:
Pl ace the def i ni ti on ei ther r i ght af ter or r i ght bef or e the ter m to be
def i ned.
Check that the def i ni ti on r epeats a key ter m f r om the pr ev i ous sentence
or pr epar es f or a key ter m i n the nex t sentence.
Revision A
AThe ver bB gene, an oncogene of the av i an er y thr obl astosi s v i r us, i s r el ated
to the neu oncogene. BBoth oncogenes have…
In Rev i si on A, i t i s cl ear that the other oncogene i s the ver bB gene because
the ver bB gene i s def i ned as an oncogene. The def i ni ti on, w hi ch i ncl udes the
categor y ter m “oncogene,” i s pl aced r i ght af ter the speci f i c ter m (“ver bB
gene”) and i s set of f by com m as. The ter m “oncogene” i n the def i ni ti on i n
sentence A becom es a r epeated key ter m i n sentence B.
The def i ni ti on shoul d not be w r i tten as a separate sentence: “The ver bB gene
i s r el ated to the neu oncogene. The ver bB gene i s an oncogene of the av i an
er y thr obl astosi s v i r us. Both oncogenes have… .” Putti ng the def i ni ti on i n a
separate sentence br eak s the conti nui ty. To m ai ntai n conti nui ty, i t i s i m por tant
to i ncl ude the def i ni ti on as a par t of an ex i sti ng sentence, not as a separate
sentence.
Som eti m es a si m pl er sol uti on i s possi bl e: the speci f i c ter m can be used as an
adjecti ve m odi f y i ng the categor y ter m , as i n Rev i si on B.
P. 67
Revision B
The ver bB oncogene i s r el ated to the neu oncogene. Both oncogenes have… .
How ever, usi ng the speci f i c ter m to m odi f y the categor y ter m i s not al way s
possi bl e. For ex am pl e, w e do not say “the m ouse r odent” or “the endonucl ease
enzy m e.”
The def i ned ter m (Dr osophi l a Decapentapl egi c) i s a suppr essed “nam el y ”
phrase. “N am el y ” coul d be i ncl uded: “One m em ber of thi s f am i l y, nam el y
Dr osophi l a Decapentapl egi c… .” But the def i ni ti on i s cl ear w i thout “nam el y,” so
“nam el y ” i s om i tted.
In thi s ex am pl e, the def i ni ti on coul d al so com e af ter the ter m to be def i ned:
“The f am i l y of TGFsi gnal i ng m ol ecul es pl ay i nducti ve r ol es i n var i ous
devel opm ental contex ts. 1 Dr osophi l a Decapentapl egi c (Dpp) 2 one m em ber of
thi s f am i l y , ser ves as a m or phogen… .” How ever, conti nui ty i s str onger i f the ol d
key ter m i s r epeated ear l y, bef or e the new key ter m i s i ntr oduced.
Example 3.18
ATo ex am i ne w hether tr i gl ycer i del ow er i ng tr eatm ent w i th etof i brate f or 6
w eek s af f ects f asti ng and postprandi al hem ostasi s posi ti vel y and r ever ses the
potenti al negati ve ef f ects of a f atty m eal on postprandi al hem ostasi s, w e
r epeated the oral tol erance test af ter tr eatm ent w i th etof i brate or pl acebo f or 6
w eek s. BIn each sam pl e w e m easur ed the concentrati ons of f XII, f XIIa, PAP,
PAI1, pl asm i nogen, pr otei n C, pr othr om bi n acti vati on f ragm ent 1 + 2 , and D
di m er.
Revision
ATo ex am i ne w hether tr i gl ycer i del ow er i ng tr eatm ent w i th etof i brate f or 6
w eek s af f ects f asti ng and postprandi al hem ostasi s posi ti vel y and r ever ses the
potenti al negati ve ef f ects of a f atty m eal on postprandi al hem ostasi s, w e
r epeated the oral tol erance test af ter tr eatm ent w i th etof i brate or pl acebo f or 6
w eek s. BIn each sam pl e w e m easur ed the concentrati ons of ei ght m ar ker s of
hem ostasi s: f XII, f XIIa, PAP, PAI1, pl asm i nogen, pr otei n C, pr othr om bi n
acti vati on f ragm ent 1 + 2 , and Ddi m er.
P. 68
In the r ev i si on, the r el ati on of f XII, etc., to sentence A i s m ade cl ear by the
def i ni ti on “ei ght m ar ker s of hem ostasi s” pl aced bef or e “f XII… .” The r epeated
key ter m “hem ostasi s” i n the def i ni ti on l i nk s sentences A and B.
Note on Punctuation
In thi s r ev i si on, the speci f i c key ter m s ar e not set of f by com m as or
par entheses, as i s usual l y done. Instead, they ar e set of f by a col on (:). A
col on can be used her e because the speci f i c key ter m s com e at the end of the
sentence and the categor y ter m i ncl udes a num ber (“ei ght”).
How ever, “nam el y ” can be used, because “nam el y ” i m pl i es that you ar e nam i ng
onl y the ei ght m ar ker s: “In each sam pl e w e m easur ed the concentrati ons of
ei ght m ar ker s of hem ostasi s, nam el y , f XII,” etc.
When can “such as” or “i ncl udi ng” be used? The answ er i s w hen you want to
i ndi cate that you ar e sel ecti ng one or a f ew ex am pl es out of a l onger l i st. For
ex am pl e, “Angi ogenesi s i s cr i ti cal f or nor m al phy si ol ogi cal pr ocesses such as
em br yoni c devel opm ent and w ound r epai r (1, 2).” In thi s ex am pl e, “such as”
i ntr oduces tw o phy si ol ogi cal pr ocesses and i m pl i es that angi ogenesi s i s al so
cr i ti cal f or other nor m al phy si ol ogi cal pr ocesses, w hi ch w e k now i s tr ue.
SUMMARY
In sum m ar y, r epeati ng key ter m s i s one of the m ost i m por tant techni ques of
conti nui ty. For cl ear conti nui ty,
P. 69
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion 1
AMedi cati ons, di etar y def i ci enci es, i nf l am m ator y m edi ator s, abnor m al
cal ci um m etabol i sm , and decr eased phy si cal exer ci se have al l been
i m pl i cated i n the pathogenesi s of decr eased bone m i neral densi ty i n
chi l dr en w i th juveni l e r heum atoi d ar thr i ti s (r ef s). BRecent ev i dence
now i ndi cates that one ty pe of m edi cati on, gl ucocor ti coi ds, decr eases
bone m i neral densi ty and degrades m uscl e i n these chi l dr en (r ef s);… .
Re vis ion 2
Re vis ion 3
BRecent ev i dence now i ndi cates that gl ucocor ti coi d m edi cati on
decr eases bone m i neral densi ty and degrades m uscl e i n these
chi l dr en (r ef s);… .
P. 70
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion 1
COMMEN TS
Re pe a t Ke y Te rms Ex a c tly
Re pe a t Ke y Te rms Ea rly
Link Ke y Te rms
Re vis ion 2
P. 71
Example 3.19
N eur i ti c pl aques and neur of i br i l l ar y tangl es i n brai n ti ssue ar e m ajor f eatur es
of the pathol ogy of Al zhei m er 's di sease. N eur i ti c pl aques ar e r i ch i n an amy l oi d
that consi sts l ar gel y of the 39 to 43r esi due amy l oi d βpepti de (A4), a
pr oteol y si s pr oduct of the βamy l oi d pr ecur sor pr otei n (βAPP) (r ef ).
If the r eason f or putti ng one sentence af ter another i s not obv i ous, you need to
i ndi cate how the sentences ar e r el ated. The techni que f or i ndi cati ng how
sentences (or par ts of sentences) ar e r el ated i s transi ti ons.
Transition Words
Transi ti on w or ds ar e standar d ter m s that i ndi cate standar d l ogi cal r el ati onshi ps
betw een i deas. Ex am pl es i ncl ude “ther ef or e” and “thus” (concl usi ons), “f or
ex am pl e” (ex am pl e), “f i r st” (sequence), “i n addi ti on” (addi ti on), “i n contrast”
(contrast), and “how ever ” (di f f er ence). Thus, transi ti on “w or ds” can be
phrases, such as “f or ex am pl e,” “i n addi ti on,” “i n contrast,” and even “on the
other hand.”
Example 3.20
Al though i ndi v i dual r esi dues i n the r epeatedsequence bl ock s i n the cor e have
di ver ged, the patter ns of am i no aci ds ar e i denti cal .
P. 72
Thus, pr ev i ousl y r epor ted gangl i a al ong the l ongi tudi nal ner ve tr unk that
contai n 10–20 gangl i on cel l bodi es ar e not ty pi cal of m ost tracheal gangl i a.
P. 73
Ve rs ion 1
The mic ros phe re s w e re pre pa re d for inje c tion a s pre vious ly de s c ribe d (2).
The y w e re the n s us pe nde d in 1 ml of de x tra n s olution in a gla s s inje c tion
via l tha t w a s c onne c te d to the a ppropria te c a the te r a nd to a s yringe
c onta ining 4 ml of s a line .
Re la tions hip:
How Y ou Know :
P. 74
Ve rs ion 2
The mic ros phe re s w e re pre pa re d for inje c tion a s pre vious ly de s c ribe d (2).
In brie f, the y w e re s us pe nde d in 1 ml of de x tra n s olution in a gla s s
inje c tion via l tha t w a s c onne c te d to the a ppropria te c a the te r a nd to a
s yringe c onta ining 4 ml of s a line .
Re la tions hip:
How Y ou Know :
Ve rs ion 3
The mic ros phe re s w e re pre pa re d for inje c tion a s pre vious ly de s c ribe d (2).
The y w e re s us pe nde d in 1 ml of de x tra n s olution in a gla s s inje c tion via l
tha t w a s c onne c te d to the a ppropria te c a the te r a nd to a s yringe
c onta ining 4 ml of s a line .
Re la tions hip:
How Y ou Know :
Hi de Answ er
Transition Phrases
Som eti m es no transi ti on w or d ex i sts to m ake a transi ti on that the author
wants. For ex am pl e, i n Ex am pl e 3. 21 (= begi nni ng of Ex am pl e 3. 1), no
transi ti on w or d ex i sts that can i ndi cate the l ogi cal r el ati onshi p betw een
sentences B and C. We cannot use “For ex am pl e” or “Fi r st” or “In addi ti on” or
“Ther ef or e” or “In br i ef ” or “Accor di ngl y ” i n pl ace of “In thi s theor y.” (Tr y
substi tuti ng these w or ds i n Ex am pl e 3. 21. )
Example 3.21:
Transi ti on Phrase Begi nni ng w i th a Pr eposi ti on
Prepositional Phrase
A pr eposi ti onal phrase used as a transi ti on phrase connects sentences i n thr ee
way s. Fi r st, the pr eposi ti on i tsel f (her e, “i n”) i ndi cates a l ogi cal r el ati onshi p
(goi ng i nto detai l ). Second, the object of the pr eposi ti on (“thi s theor y ”)
com pl etes the l ogi c (In w hat? In thi s theor y ). Fi nal l y, the object of the
pr eposi ti on al so r epeats a key ter m , thus f ur ther connecti ng the tw o sentences.
The i m pl i cati on of “In thi s theor y ” i s that the author i s goi ng to gi ve m or e
detai l s about the theor y m enti oned i n sentences A and B.
Example 3.22:
Transi ti on Phrase Begi nni ng w i th a Pr eposi ti on
AOur ai m was to assess the m echani sm s i nvol ved i n the benef i ci al ef f ects of
hydral azi ne on ventr i cul ar f uncti on i n pati ents w ho have chr oni c aor ti c
i nsuf f i ci ency. BFor thi s assessm ent, w e di d a radi onucl i de study of ventr i cul ar
f uncti on i n 15 pati ents at r est and dur i ng supi ne exer ci se.
Example 3.23:
Transi ti on Phrase Begi nni ng w i th a Pr eposi ti on
Ty son et al . abr uptl y occl uded the venae cavae bef or e anal y zi ng the hear t
beats. As a r esul t of thi s occl usi on, the vol um e of the r i ght hear t rapi dl y
i ncr eased.
P. 75
In Ex am pl e 3. 23, the f i r st pr eposi ti onal phrase i s “As a r esul t” and the second
one i s “of thi s occl usi on.” (We coul d al so r ead “As a r esul t of ” as a si ngl e
pr eposi ti on and “thi s occl usi on” as i ts object. )
Infinitive Phrase
A transi ti on phrase can al so be an i nf i ni ti ve phrase, as i n Ex am pl e 3. 24. Li ke
transi ti on phrases begi nni ng w i th the pr eposi ti on “f or,” transi ti on phrases
begi nni ng w i th an i nf i ni ti ve i ndi cate pur pose.
Example 3.24:
Transi ti on Phrase Begi nni ng w i th an Inf i ni ti ve
In Ex am pl e 3. 24, the i nf i ni ti ve i s “to obtai n,” w hi ch i ndi cates pur pose. The
object of the i nf i ni ti ve (“each pr essur ef l ow poi nt”) com pl etes the l ogi c (To
obtai n w hat?) and f ur ther connects the tw o sentences by r epeati ng the key ter m
“pr essur ef l ow.”
P. 76
Hi de Answ er
AHepatocy tes cul tur ed i n ti ssue sl i ces, w her e cel l contacts and ti ssue
or gani zati on ar e l ar gel y r etai ned, conti nue ti ssuespeci f i c
transcr i pti on at near l y nor m al l evel s i n cul tur e m edi a. BHow ever,
hepatocy tes gr ow n i n cel l cul tur e, w her e cel l contacts and ti ssue
or gani zati on ar e di sr upted, have sever el y al ter ed l evel s of
transcr i pti on. CTo avoi d al ter ed l evel s of transcr i pti on, one appr oach
has been to com bi ne ex tracel l ul ar m atr i x w i th pur e hepatocy tes i n
cul tur e.
P. 77
Transition Clauses
Transi ti on cl auses, l i ke transi ti on phrases, keep the stor y of a paragraph goi ng
by stati ng the l ogi cal r el ati onshi p betw een tw o sentences. The onl y di f f er ence
i s i n the f or m : a transi ti on cl ause uses a subject and ver b to i ndi cate the
l ogi cal r el ati onshi p betw een i deas, w her eas a transi ti on phrase uses a
pr eposi ti on or an i nf i ni ti ve and an object. The subject i n the transi ti on cl ause,
l i ke the object i n a transi ti on phrase, i s usual l y a r epeated key ter m .
In Ex am pl e 3. 25, the r el ati onshi p betw een sentences A and B i s not cl ear. Why
ar e w e hear i ng about l i gands acti vati ng G pr otei n–coupl ed r eceptor s?
Example 3.25
AConsi derabl e ev i dence i ndi cates that heter otr i m er i c (α, β, γ ) G pr otei ns ar e
i nvol ved i n si gnal i ng pathway s that sti m ul ate m i togenesi s and thus contr i bute
to neopl asti c gr ow th (1–3). BMany l i gands that acti vate G pr otei n–coupl ed
r eceptor s, i ncl udi ng bom besi n (4), l y sophosphati di c aci d (LPA) (5),
acety l chol i ne (6), and ser otoni n (5HT) (7), have m i togeni c ef f ects. CMor eover,
per tussi s tox i n bl ock s the m i togeni c ef f ects of thr ee of these l i gands [bom besi n
(8), LPA (9), and 5HT (10)] and al so of thr om bi n (11) and phosphati di c aci d
(12).
Revision
AConsi derabl e ev i dence i ndi cates that heter otr i m er i c (α, β, γ ) G pr otei ns ar e
i nvol ved i n si gnal i ng pathway s that sti m ul ate m i togenesi s and thus contr i bute
to neopl asti c gr ow th (1–3). BEvide nc e for s timula tion of mitoge ne s is is tha t
m any l i gands that acti vate G pr otei n–coupl ed r eceptor s, i ncl udi ng bom besi n (4),
l y sophosphati di c aci d (LPA) (5), acety l chol i ne (6), and ser otoni n (5HT) (7),
have m i togeni c ef f ects. CMor eover, per tussi s tox i n bl ock s the m i togeni c ef f ects
of thr ee of these l i gands [bom besi n (8), LPA (9), and 5HT (10)] and al so of
thr om bi n (11) and phosphati di c aci d (12).
Her e i s another ex am pl e.
Example 3.26
AOur f i ndi ngs dem onstrate that i n pati ents w i th cl i ni cal l y m oderate to sever e
congesti ve hear t f ai l ur e and l ef t ventr i cul ar dy sf uncti on, the ar ter i ol ar
vasodi l ator hydral azi ne pr oduces si gni f i cant hem ody nam i c benef i ts i ndependent
of the pr esence or absence of m i tral r egur gi tati on. B We f ound si gni f i cant
i ncr eases i n car di ac i ndex , str oke vol um e i ndex , and str oke w or k i ndex , and
si gni f i cant decr eases i n sy stem i c vascul ar r esi stance i n al l pati ents. C These
benef i ci al ef f ects w er e gr eatest i n pati ents w ho had docum ented sever e to
m oderate m i tral r egur gi tati on, i nter m edi ate i n those w ho had m i l d to no
appar ent m i tral r egur gi tati on, and sm al l est i n pati ents w ho had com petent
m i tral val ve pr ostheses and ther ef or e no m i tral r egur gi tati on.
P. 78
The pr obl em i n f ol l ow i ng the stor y i n Ex am pl e 3. 26 i s si m i l ar to the pr obl em i n
Ex am pl e 3. 25: w e do not k now w hy w e ar e hear i ng the l i st of i ncr eases and
decr eases.
Revision
AOur f i ndi ngs dem onstrate that i n pati ents w i th cl i ni cal l y m oderate to sever e
congesti ve hear t f ai l ur e and l ef t ventr i cul ar dy sf uncti on, the ar ter i ol ar
vasodi l ator hydral azi ne pr oduces si gni f i cant hem ody nam i c benef i ts i ndependent
of the pr esence or absence of m i tral r egur gi tati on. BThe be ne fits w e f ound
w e re si gni f i cant i ncr eases i n car di ac i ndex , str oke vol um e i ndex , and str oke
w or k i ndex , and si gni f i cant decr eases i n sy stem i c vascul ar r esi stance i n al l
pati ents. CThese be ne fits w er e gr eatest i n pati ents w ho had docum ented
sever e to m oderate m i tral r egur gi tati on, i nter m edi ate i n those w ho had m i l d to
no appar ent m i tral r egur gi tati on, and sm al l est i n pati ents w ho had com petent
m i tral val ve pr ostheses and ther ef or e no m i tral r egur gi tati on.
In the transi ti on cl auses i n Ex am pl es 3. 25 and 3. 26, the ver b i s a “to be” ver b
(“i s” or “w er e”). How ever, the ver b i n a transi ti on cl ause does not have to be a
“to be” ver b. For ex am pl es of transi ti on cl auses that use other ver bs, pl ease
see Ex am pl e 3. 4 above (sentences B, C, E, F).
P. 79
P. 80
AXe noge ne ic tra ns pla nta tion, or the tra ns pla nta tion of orga ns be tw e e n
s pe c ie s , is a pote ntia l s olution to the s e ve re s horta ge of donor orga ns for
c linic a l tra ns pla nta tion [1, 2]. BChronic immunologic re je c tion of
x e nogra fts is me dia te d by a numbe r of diffe re nt pa thw a ys , inc luding both
c e llula r a nd humora l pa thw a ys [3]. CHow e ve r, the prima ry limita tion to
x e nogra ft tra ns pla nta tion be tw e e n w ide ly dis pa ra te s pe c ie s is hype ra c ute
re je c tion, w hic h is trigge re d by the re c ipie nt's na tura l a ntibodie s dire c te d
a ga ins t the donor's e ndothe lia l c e lls [4].
Hi de Answ er
EXAMP LE 1
The patter n of or gani zati on of thi s par agr aph i s “sol uti on–pr obl em . ”
Sentence A states a potenti al sol uti on. Sentences B and C descr i be
l i m i tati ons of (pr obl em s w i th) thi s sol uti on. So the tr ansi ti on cl ause
at the begi nni ng of sentence B shoul d state that sentence B descr i bes
a l i m i tati on.
OR: BA limita tion of x e noge ne ic tra ns pla nta tion tha t pre ve nts
e x te ns ive us e i s
AAnothe r que s tion tha t fre que ntly a ris e s w he n w e try to inc re a s e a poB
s e c re tion by he pa toc yte s grow n in c ulture is w he the r or not a lbumin
s hould be inc lude d in the c ulture me dium. BIt ha s pre vious ly be e n re porte d
tha t a lbumin a ppe a rs to be a n e ffe c tive s ink for tox ic produc ts re le a s e d
into the me dium by da ma ge d c e lls (re f). CAls o, a lbumin s olubilize s w a te r
ins oluble longc ha in fa tty a c ids by c omple x ing w ith the m (re f), thus
ra is ing the lipid le ve l in the c ulture me dium. DThe re fore , a lbumin c ould
inc re a s e a poB s e c re tion, w hic h de pe nds on lipid le ve ls in the me dium.
EW e the re fore te s te d the e ffe c t of diffe re nt c onc e ntra tions of fe ta l bovine
s e rum a lbumin (from 0 to 15% v/v) on the le ve l of a poB s e c re te d in the
c ulture me dium a nd de te rmine d tha t 6. 5% (v/v) is the ide a l c onc e ntra tion
for our purpos e s .
Hi de Answ er
The patter n of or gani zati on of thi s par agr aph i s “pr o. ” So the
tr ansi ti on cl ause at the begi nni ng of sentence B shoul d state that the
suppor ti ng sentences gi v e ar gum ents i n f av or of i ncl udi ng al bum i n i n
the cul tur e m edi um .
Re vis ion 1
Re vis ion 2
Re vis ion 3
P. 82
Ex a mple 3
In Ex a mple 3, a fte r re a ding s e nte nc e A, w e e x pe c t to find out w he the r LDL
a nd HDL re gula te the phos phoinos itide /c a lc ium c a s c a de a nd e x oc ytos is .
But in s e nte nc e s B a nd C, it is not e a s y to te ll if this que s tion ha s be e n
a ns w e re d.
Note s :
1. P hos phoinos itide c a ta bolis m, c a lc ium mobiliza tion, a nd tra ns loc a tion
of prote in k ina s e C from c ytos olic to me mbra ne c ompa rtme nts a re
thre e s te ps in the phos phoinos itide /c a lc ium c a s c a de .
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion 1
Re vis ion 2
AWe asked w hether l owdensi ty l i popr otei ns (LDL) and hi ghdensi ty
l i popr otei ns (HDL) f r om ser um r egul ate the phosphoi nosi ti de/cal ci um
cascade and exocy tosi s. BW e found tha t, i n pr i m ar y cul tur es of ty pe
II cel l s, both LDL a nd HDL s timula te d the
phos phoinos itide /c a lc ium c a s c a de , a s indic a te d by the ir
a c tiva tion of phosphoi nosi ti de catabol i sm , cal ci um m obi l i zati on, and
transl ocati on of pr otei n k i nase C f r om cy tosol i c to m em brane
com par tm ents. CIn addi ti on, both LDL and HDL sti m ul ated
e x oc ytos is , a s indic a te d by s e c re tion of phosphati dy l chol i ne (PC),
the m ajor phosphol i pi d com ponent of pul m onar y sur f actant. DThe
LDLi nduced ef f ects on the phos phoinos itide /c a lc ium c a s c a de a nd
e x oc ytos is , but not the HDLi nduced ef f ects, w er e i nhi bi ted by
hepar i n, w hi ch bl ock s bi ndi ng of l i gands to the LDL r eceptor.
Re vis ion 3
P. 83
To ensur e that the r eader k now s you ar e tal k i ng about the sam e thi ngs i n the
suppor ti ng sentences as i n the topi c sentence, r epeat k ey ter m s ex actl y .
Example 3.27
ASam pl es of ins pire d, e ndtida l, and mix e de x pire d gases w er e taken dur i ng
the 2h washi n per i od. BIns pire d gas sam pl es w er e col l ected pr ox i m al to the
nonr ebr eathi ng val ve. CEndtida l gas sam pl es w er e col l ected thr ough a
catheter, the ti p of w hi ch was pl aced near the tracheal end of the endotracheal
tube. DThe endotracheal tube was connected to the non r ebr eathi ng val ve w i th
f l ex i bl e Tef l on® tubi ng w hose i nter nal vol um e was appr ox i m atel y 100 m l .
ETef l on® was used to avoi d the absor pti on and r el ease of anestheti c that occur
w i th pl asti cs such as pol yethy l ene, and the added 100 m l of dead space was
used to pr event contam i nati on of endti dal sam pl es w i th i nspi r ed gas. F Ex pi r ed
gases w er e conducted v i a a f l ex i bl e Tef l on® tube to an al um i num m i x i ng
cham ber. G Mix e de x pire d gas sam pl es w er e col l ected di stal to the al um i num
m i x i ng cham ber. H All gas sam pl es w er e col l ected i n 50m l gl ass sy r i nges that
w er e stor ed upr i ght (to pr oduce a sl i ght posi ti ve pr essur e) unti l anal y zed.
Fr om Car penter RL, Eger EI II, Johnson BH, U nadk at JD, Shei ner LB. The ex tent
of m etabol i sm of i nhal ed anestheti cs i n hum ans. Anesthesi ol ogy 1986; 65(2):
201–5. Catal ogo U Por to Requi si cao de Docum entos Li nk s
Bi bl i ograf i cos Recur sos da Inter net Tex to Com pl eto Li v r e Ov i d
P. 84
Speci f i cal l y, the poi nt of v i ew i s consi stent w hen the sam e ter m , or the sam e
categor y of ter m , i s the subject of successi ve sentences that deal w i th the
sam e topi c. The poi nt of v i ew i s i nconsi stent w hen the topi c i s the sam e but the
subjects of the sentences ar e di f f er ent. An i nconsi stent poi nt of v i ew i s
di sor i enti ng to the r eader, m ak i ng si m i l ar i ti es and di f f er ences di f f i cul t to see.
Same Term
Som eti m es the sam e ter m shoul d be the subject of successi ve sentences, as
shoul d be done i n Ex am pl e 3. 28.
Example 3.28
APr opranol ol had var i abl e ef f ects on the hy poxem i ai nduced changes i n r egi onal
bl ood f l ow. BIn the cer ebr um , the i ncr ease i n bl ood f l ow caused by hy poxem i a
was not si gni f i cantl y al ter ed by pr opranol ol . CHow ever, i n other or gans, such as
the gut and the k i dney s, and i n the per i pheral ci r cul ati on, pr opranol ol caused a
m or e sever e decr ease i n bl ood f l ow than di d hy poxem i a al one.
Revision
APr opranol ol had var i abl e ef f ects on the hy poxem i ai nduced changes i n r egi onal
bl ood f l ow. BIn the cer ebr um , pr opranol ol di d not si gni f i cantl y al ter the
i ncr ease i n bl ood f l ow caused by hy poxem i a. CHow ever, i n other or gans, such
as the gut and the k i dney s, and i n the per i pheral ci r cul ati on, pr opranol ol
caused a m or e sever e decr ease i n bl ood f l ow than di d hy poxem i a al one.
P. 85
Example 3.29
The contr ol i njecti on of nal oxone pr oduced no si gni f i cant changes i n ar ter i al
bl ood pr essur e or hear t rate. The ar ter i al bl ood pr essur es and hear t rates
m easur ed af ter 24 h of m or phi ne i nf usi on di d not change si gni f i cantl y.
In Ex am pl e 3. 29, both sentences descr i be a cause and i ts ef f ect, but the subject
of the f i r st sentence i s the cause (contr ol i njecti on) w her eas the subject of the
second sentence i s the var i abl es af f ected (ar ter i al bl ood pr essur es and hear t
rates). Thus, the poi nt of v i ew i s i nconsi stent and the si m i l ar i ty i s not easy to
see. Both sentences shoul d begi n w i th the sam e categor y of ter m —the cause.
Revision A
The contr ol i njecti on of nal oxone pr oduced no si gni f i cant changes i n ar ter i al
bl ood pr essur e or hear t rate. Tw entyf our hour s of m or phi ne i nf usi on pr oduced
no si gni f i cant changes i n ar ter i al bl ood pr essur e or hear t rate.
In the r ev i si on, the categor y of each subject i s the sam e—the cause. Thus, the
poi nt of v i ew i s consi stent and the si m i l ar i ty i s easy to see. In addi ti on, now
that the poi nt of v i ew i s consi stent, i t i s easy to com bi ne the tw o sentences:
Revision B
N ei ther the contr ol i njecti on of nal oxone nor the 24h m or phi ne i nf usi on
si gni f i cantl y al ter ed ar ter i al bl ood pr essur e or hear t rate.
Example 3.30
Ol sen et al . (22) concl uded that ser i es i nteracti on was m or e i m por tant than
di r ect i nteracti on; Vi sner et al . (23), usi ng a near l y i denti cal pr eparati on and
pr otocol , concl uded the opposi te. We f ound that di r ect i nteracti on was about
onehal f as i m por tant as ser i es i nteracti on i n deter m i ni ng l ef t ventr i cul ar
vol um e at end di astol e w hen the per i car di um was on, and that the di r ect
i nteracti on ef f ect decr eased w hen the per i car di um was r em oved.
Revision
Ol sen et al . (22) concl uded that di r ect i nteracti on was l ess i m por tant than
ser i es i nteracti on; Vi sner et al . (23), usi ng a near l y i denti cal pr eparati on and
pr otocol , concl uded the opposi te. We f ound that di r ect i nteracti on was about
onehal f as i m por tant as ser i es i nteracti on i n deter m i ni ng l ef t ventr i cul ar
vol um e at end di astol e w hen the per i car di um was on, and that the di r ect
i nteracti on ef f ect decr eased w hen the per i car di um was r em oved.
To m ake the si m i l ar i ty ex pl i ci t, and thus even easi er to see, the author s coul d
add a transi ti on phrase such as “Li ke Ol sen et al .,” or a topi c sentence
P. 86
such as “Our r esul ts suppor t the concl usi on of Ol sen et al .” bef or e the l ast
sentence. But note that addi ng a transi ti on phrase or a topi c sentence w i thout
keepi ng a consi stent poi nt of v i ew w oul d not w or k as w el l : “Ol sen et al . (22)
concl uded that ser i es i nteracti on was m or e i m por tant than di r ect i nteracti on;…
Li ke Ol sen et al ., w e f ound that di r ect i nteracti on was about onehal f as
i m por tant as ser i es i nteracti on… .” Even though the si m i l ar i ty i s announced, i t i s
di f f i cul t to see because the poi nt of v i ew i s not consi stent.
Example 3.31
To deter m i ne the m echani sm f or the di r ect ef f ect of contrast m edi a on hear t
m uscl e m echani cs, thi s study on hear t m uscl es i sol ated f r om cats was car r i ed
out.
Thi s sentence f r om an Intr oducti on w oul d be m or e accurate and m or e v i gor ous
i f “w e” w er e used.
Revision
To deter m i ne the m echani sm f or the di r ect ef f ect of contrast m edi a on hear t
m uscl e m echani cs, w e car r i ed out thi s study on hear t m uscl es i sol ated f r om
cats.
Example 3.32
A nosocom i al i nf ecti on was def i ned as one that was cl ear l y not pr esent i n the
cul tur e of any body f l ui d w hen the i nf ant was adm i tted, al though i t was
r ecogni zed that v i r tual l y al l i nf ant col oni zati on, and ther ef or e al l i nf ecti ons, ar e
nosocom i al .
In thi s sentence f r om a Methods secti on, tw o acts of judgm ent ar e descr i bed:
def i ni ng and r ecogni zi ng. But w ho was m ak i ng these judgm ents i s not stated.
Mor eover, the author has gone out of hi s way to w r i te the second poi nt i n a
sti f f, aw k war d, i nel egant way : “i t was r ecogni zed that.” In contrast, “We
r ecogni zed that” i s di r ect, v i gor ous, and natural , and com pl etel y i nf or m ati ve.
Revision
We def i ned a nosocom i al i nf ecti on as one that was cl ear l y not pr esent i n the
cul tur e of any body f l ui d w hen the i nf ant was adm i tted, al though w e r ecogni ze
that v i r tual l y al l i nf ant col oni zati on, and ther ef or e al l i nf ecti ons, ar e
nosocom i al .
P. 87
Example 3.33
AAcety l chol i nesterase acti v i ty has been f ound i n m ost gangl i on cel l s of the
myenter i c and subm ucosal pl ex uses of the enter i c ner vous sy stem , but
di f f er ences have been f ound i n the i ntensi ty of the acety l chol i nesterase
r eacti on, and gangl i a have been cl assi f i ed accor di ngl y (5). BLi kew i se,
di f f er ences i n the i ntensi ty of the acety l chol i nesterase r eacti on w er e f ound i n
the f er r et trachea. CHow ever, the i ntensi ty of the r eacti on appear ed to depend
m or e on the gangl i on cel l 's posi ti on and on the pr esence of over l y i ng
connecti ve ti ssue than on acety l chol i nesterase content. DTher ef or e, no attem pt
was m ade i n thi s study to cl assi f y gangl i on cel l s accor di ng to the am ount of
thei r acety l chol i nesterase acti v i ty.
Revision
AAcety l chol i nesterase acti v i ty has been f ound i n m ost gangl i on cel l s of the
myenter i c and subm ucosal pl ex uses of the enter i c ner vous sy stem , but
di f f er ences have been f ound i n the i ntensi ty of the acety l chol i nesterase
r eacti on, and gangl i a have been cl assi f i ed accor di ngl y (5). BLi kew i se, w e f ound
di f f er ences i n the r eacti v i ty i n the f er r et trachea. CHow ever, the i ntensi ty of
the r eacti on appear ed to depend m or e on the gangl i on cel l 's posi ti on and on the
pr esence of over l y i ng connecti ve ti ssue than on acety l chol i nesterase content.
DTher ef or e, i n thi s study w e m ade no attem pt to cl assi f y gangl i on cel l s
accor di ng to the am ount of thei r acety l chol i nesterase acti v i ty.
Example 3.34
It i s concl uded that thi s m ethod i s a sensi ti ve quanti tati ve m easur e of l ung
i nter sti ti al f l ui d and can detect pul m onar y edem a and congesti on i n the dog
l ung bef or e al veol ar f l oodi ng occur s.
Revision
We concl ude that thi s m ethod i s a sensi ti ve quanti tati ve m easur e of l ung
i nter sti ti al f l ui d and can detect pul m onar y edem a and congesti on i n the dog
l ung bef or e al veol ar f l oodi ng occur s.
The m ost contr over si al use of “w e” i s i n the Methods secti on. The use of “w e”
i n statem ents of judgm ent, as i l l ustrated above, shoul d not be contr over si al ,
but the use of “w e” i n the Methods secti on def i ni tel y i s. The advantage of usi ng
“w e” i n Methods i s that i t m akes f or v i gor ous, r eadabl e w r i ti ng because usi ng
“w e” general l y f or ces the author to use the acti ve voi ce, w hi ch i s i nher entl y
l i vel y. The di sadvantage of usi ng “w e” i s that “w e” i s not usual l y the topi c i n
Methods; rather, the var i abl e or the techni que i s usual l y the topi c. You cannot
si m ul taneousl y have the advantage of “w e” and avoi d the di sadvantage, so
ei ther usi ng “w e” or avoi di ng “w e” i n Methods i s def ensi bl e. For an ex pl anati on
and ex am pl es, see Chapter 5: Mater i al s and Methods.
P. 88
Hi de Answ er
OR: The m or tal i ty of 46% r epor ted by Bol ey (2) i s the onl y excepti on.
AMor tal i ty i n thi s ser i es of pati ents was 90%. B Mor tal i ty i n other
cl i ni cal ser i es has been gr eater than 80%, except f or the m or tal i ty of
46% r epor ted by Bol ey (2).
AMor tal i ty i n thi s ser i es of pati ents was 90%. BGeneral l y, m or tal i ty
i n cl i ni cal ser i es has been about the sam e (gr eater than 80%). CThe
onl y excepti on i s the m or tal i ty of 46% r epor ted by Bol ey (2).
Ex a mple 2
Hi de Answ er
Ex a mple 3
Hi de Answ er
The topi c i n sentence B i s the subject (“ser um concentr ati ons”) and
the acti on i s i n the v er bs (“w er e”).
P. 89
Example 3.35
AThe l og 1 0 f uncti on el i m i nated som e waves. BThe f actor that deter m i ned
w hether a wave was el i m i nated or am pl i f i ed was the di v i sor. CWhen the di v i sor
was gr eater than the absol ute val ue of the peak of a wave, the wave was
el i m i nated. DWhen the di v i sor was l ess than the absol ute val ue of the peak of a
wave, the wave was am pl i f i ed.
Example 3.36
AAf ter f etal i njecti on of nal oxone, f etal ar ter i al bl ood pH and PO 2 both
decr eased (f r om 7. 39 ± 0. 01 (SD) to 7. 35 ± 0. 02 and f r om 23. 0 ± 0. 5 to 20. 8
± 0. 8 m m Hg, r especti vel y ). BTher e was no change i n ar ter i al bl ood PCO 2 .
CAf ter m ater nal i njecti on of nal oxone, onl y f etal ar ter i al bl ood PO 2 decr eased
(f r om 24. 4 ± 0. 8 to 22. 2 ± 1. 0 m m Hg). DTher e w er e no si gni f i cant changes i n
f etal ar ter i al bl ood pH or PCO 2 .
Example 3.37
To de te rmine w hether chol i ner gi c or adr ener gi c ner ves m edi ate secr eti on of
f l ui ds f r om tracheal subm ucosal gl ands, w e di d ex per i m ents on gl ands exci sed
f r om f er r ets. To induc e secr eti on, w e sti m ul ated the ti ssue both el ectr i cal l y
and phar m acol ogi cal l y. To inhibit secr eti on, w e added XXXX to the bathi ng
sol uti on.
Revision A
To deter m i ne w hether chol i ner gi c or adr ener gi c ner ves m edi ate secr eti on of
f l ui ds f r om tracheal subm ucosal gl ands, w e di d ex per i m ents on gl ands exci sed
f r om f er r ets. We i nduced secr eti on by sti m ul ati ng the ti ssue both el ectr i cal l y
and phar m acol ogi cal l y. We i nhi bi ted secr eti on by addi ng XXXX to the bathi ng
sol uti on.
Revision B
We wanted to deter m i ne w hether chol i ner gi c or adr ener gi c ner ves m edi ate
secr eti on of f l ui ds f r om tracheal subm ucosal gl ands. For thi s pur pose, w e
studi ed the secr etor y r esponses to el ectr i cal and phar m acol ogi cal sti m ul ati on of
segm ents of f er r et trachea i n v i tr o i n the pr esence and i n the absence of a
speci f i c ner ve bl ocker and autonom i c antagoni sts.
In Rev i si on B, paral l el f or m i s used onl y w i thi n one sentence (see under l i ned
w or ds), not betw een sentences. Thi s i s f i ne. The i m por tant poi nt i s that the tw o
sentences i n Rev i si on B, w hi ch do not gi ve paral l el i nf or m ati on, ar e not i n
paral l el f or m .
P. 91
ASam pl es of i nspi r ed, endti dal , and m i xedex pi r ed gases w er e taken dur i ng
the 2h washi n per i od. BInspi r ed gas sam pl es w er e col l ected pr ox i m al to the
nonr ebr eathi ng val ve. CEndti dal gas sam pl es w er e col l ected thr ough a
catheter, the ti p of w hi ch was pl aced near the tracheal end of the endotracheal
tube. DThe endotracheal tube was connected to the nonr ebr eathi ng val ve w i th
f l ex i bl e Tef l on® tubi ng w hose i nter nal vol um e was appr ox i m atel y 100 m l .
ETef l on® was used to avoi d the absor pti on and r el ease of anestheti c that occur
w i th pl asti cs such as pol yethy l ene, and the added 100 m l of dead space was
used to pr event contam i nati on of endti dal sam pl es w i th i nspi r ed gas. F Ex pi r ed
gases w er e conducted v i a a f l ex i bl e Tef l on® tube to an al um i num m i x i ng
cham ber. G Mi xedex pi r ed gas sam pl es w er e col l ected di stal to the al um i num
m i x i ng cham ber. H Al lgas sam pl es w er e col l ected i n 50m l gl ass sy r i nges that
w er e stor ed upr i ght (to pr oduce a sl i ght posi ti ve pr essur e) unti l anal y zed.
APr opranol ol had var i abl e ef f ects on the hy poxem i ai nduced changes i n r egi onal
bl ood f l ow. BIn the cer ebr um , pr opranol ol di d not si gni f i cantl y al ter the
i ncr ease i n bl ood f l ow caused by hy poxem i a. CHow ever, i n other or gans, such
as the gut and the k i dney s, and i n the per i pheral ci r cul ati on, pr opranol ol
caused a m or e sever e decr ease i n bl ood f l ow than di d hy poxem i a al one.
Example 3.41
ABlood flow to the s e rumins tille d lung decr eased i n the contr ol ex per i m ents
to 20% of basel i ne val ues and di d not change over 4 h (f i gur e 3). BIn contrast,
af ter betaadr ener gi c agoni sts , bl ood f l ow decr eased l ess (to about 75% of
basel i ne). CFur ther m or e, the bl ood f l ow r ecover ed to basel i ne l evel s by 2 h,
and at 4 h was even sl i ghtl y above basel i ne. DAf ter i ntravenous ni tr opr ussi de,
bl ood f l ow to the ser um i nsti l l ed l ung was si m i l ar to bl ood f l ow af ter beta
adr ener gi c agoni sts.
If you m ust choose betw een si gnal i ng the topi c of a paragraph and si gnal i ng the
f i r st subtopi c, i t i s better to si gnal the topi c (the hi gher l evel of or gani zati on).
If you want to si gnal both the topi c and the f i r st subtopi c, the sol uti on i s to add
a topi c sentence.
Revision
AThe de c re a s e in pulmona ry blood flow tha t oc c urre d a fte r ins tilla tion of
s e rum w a s inhibite d by both be ta a dre ne rgic a gonis ts a nd nitroprus s ide .
BAfte r s e rum a lone (c ontrol), bl ood f l ow to the ser um i nsti l l ed l ung
decr eased to 20% of basel i ne val ues and di d not change over 4 h (f i gur e 3).
CIn contrast, af ter betaadr ener gi c agoni sts , bl ood f l ow decr eased l ess (to
about 75% of basel i ne). DFur ther m or e, the bl ood f l ow r ecover ed to basel i ne
l evel s by 2 h, and at 4 h was even sl i ghtl y above basel i ne. EAf ter i ntravenous
ni tr opr ussi de, bl ood f l ow to the ser um i nsti l l ed l ung was si m i l ar to bl ood f l ow
af ter betaadr ener gi c agoni sts.
N ow that a topi c sentence has been added, the topi c sentence si gnal s the topi c
of the paragraph and the transi ti on phrases at the begi nni ng of sentences B, C,
and E si gnal the subtopi cs.
P. 94
SUMMARY
The topi c of a paragraph can be si gnal ed v i sual l y by begi nni ng a new
paragraph and ver bal l y by stati ng the topi c or the m essage i n a topi c
sentence at the begi nni ng of the paragraph.
P. 95
ADire c t a mino a c id s e que nc e a na lys is of both the 57 a nd 47k D prote ins
on P VDF s how e d tha t the s e prote ins w e re bloc k e d a t the Nte rminus .
BThe re fore , inte rna l a mino a c id s e que nc e a na lys is w a s pe rforme d on the
prote ins from the SDSP AG E ge l. CNte rmina l s e que nc e a na lys is of a
mix ture of tw o c le a va ge fra gme nts obta ine d a fte r tryps in dige s tion a nd
pre pa ra tive HP LC yie lde d tw o a mino a c id re s idue s for e a c h of 11 c yc le s :
(Va l/Ala )–(P he /Trp)–(Tyr/P ro)–(Va l/His )–(As n/Lys )–(Va l/As p)–
(Le u/Tyr)–(As n/P ro?)–(G lu/Le u?)–(G lu/Ile ?)–(G ln/P ro?). DFor the 47k D
prote in, Nte rmina l s e que nc e a na lys is of a n inte rna l fra gme nt obta ine d
a fte r tryps in dige s tion a nd pre pa ra tive HP LC yie lde d 13 a mino a c id
re s idue s , c orre s ponding w ith a mino a c id re s idue s 203 to 215 of huma n
a lpha e nola s e (re f): As p–Ala –Thr–As n–Va l–G ly–As p–G lu–G ly–G ly–P he –
Ala –P ro.
Hi de Answ er
ADi r ect am i no aci d sequence anal y si s of both the 57 and the 47 k D
pr otei ns on PVDF show ed that the pr otei ns w er e bl ocked at the N
ter m i nus. BTo ove rc ome this bloc k , i nter nal am i no aci d sequence
anal y si s was per f or m ed on the pr otei ns f r om the SDSPAGE gel . CFor
the 57 k D prote in, N ter m i nal sequence anal y si s of a m i x tur e of tw o
cl eavage f ragm ents obtai ned af ter tr y psi n di gesti on and pr eparati ve
HPLC y i el ded tw o am i no aci d r esi dues f or each of 11 cycl es:
(Val /Al a)–(Phe/Tr p)–(Ty r /Pr o)–(Val /Hi s)–(Asn/Ly s)–(Val /Asp)–
(Leu/Ty r )–(Asn/Pr o?)–(Gl u/Leu?)–(Gl u/Il e?)–(Gl n/Pr o?). DFor the 47
k D pr otei n, N ter m i nal sequence anal y si s of an i nter nal f ragm ent
obtai ned af ter tr y psi n di gesti on and pr eparati ve HPLC y i el ded 13
am i no aci d r esi dues, cor r espondi ng w i th am i no aci d r esi dues 203 to
215 of hum an al phaenol ase (r ef ): Asp–Al a–Thr –Asn–Val –Gl y–Asp–
Gl u–Gl y–Gl y–Phe–Al a–Pr o.
“To ov er com e thi s bl ock ” at the begi nni ng of sentence B str engthens
the conti nui ty because thi s tr ansi ti on phr ase i s m or e pr eci se than the
tr ansi ti on w or d “ther ef or e. ”
P. 96
Note s :
AIn ra t pa pilla ry mus c le , c a ffe ine (3 mM) c onve rte d loa ds e ns itive
re la x a tion (Fig. 1A, B) to loa dins e ns itive re la x a tion (Fig. 1C, Fig. 1D). BIn
c a t pa pilla ry mus c le , unde r c ontrol c onditions (Fig. 2A B), re la x a tion w a s
s e ns itive to loa d. CIn c ontra s t to the re s pons e in ra t pa pilla ry mus c le , the
a ddition of 3 mM c a ffe ine to c a t pa pilla ry mus c le (Fig. 2C. D), e ve n a t
c onc e ntra tions of 5 mM (Fig. 3A, B) or 10 mM, fa ile d to e limina te the loa d
s e ns itivity of re la x a tion.
Hi de Answ er
Or gani zed by the ani m al studi ed; ther ef or e, the si gnal of the
subtopi cs nam es the ani m al : “i n r at papi l l ar y m uscl e, ” “i n cat
papi l l ar y m uscl e. ”
Re vis ion (A ver si on that i ncl udes the contr ol r esul ts and
3 om i ts the noti on of “conver si on”)
U nde r c ontrol c onditions , the r el ax ati on of rat and cat papi l l ar y
m uscl es was l oad sensi ti ve (Fi gs. 1, 2). Afte r 3 mM c a ffe ine , the
r el ax ati on of ra t papi l l ar y m uscl e becam e l oad i nsensi ti ve (Fi g. 1)
but the r el ax ati on of c a t papi l l ar y m uscl e was sti l l l oad sensi ti ve
(Fi g. 2) and r em ai ned so even af ter 5 (Fi g. 3) or 10 m M caf f ei ne.
P. 97
ATra c he a l s e gme nts w e re pla c e d e ithe r in Bouin's fix a tive for 24 h a t room
te mpe ra ture or in 0. 2% gluta ra lde hyde in 0. 08 M c a c odyla te buffe r (pH
7. 5) for 1 h a t 4° C. BTra c he a l s e gme nts fix e d in Bouin's fix a tive w e re
de hydra te d in gra de d e tha nol s olutions , c le a re d in a lpha te rpine ol, a nd
e mbe dde d in pa ra ffin. CP a ra ffine mbe dde d tis s ue s w e re s e c tione d a t 7 µm
w ith a rota ry mic rotome (Ame ric a n Optic a l). DTra c he a l s e gme nts fix e d in
0. 2% gluta ra lde hyde w e re de hydra te d in gra de d a c e tone s olutions a nd
e mbe dde d in a ra ldite (P olys c ie nc e s ). EThic k s e c tions (1 µm) w e re c ut w ith
a n ultra mic rotome (P orte rBlum MT1).
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion 1
Re vis ion 2
The pa ra gra ph be low is the s a me a s Ex a mple 3. 36. The a uthor now w a nts
to inc lude a s ta te me nt a bout the ma te rna l re s pons e s to na lox one . The
ma te rna l re s pons e s w e re tha t none of the va ria ble s c ha nge d a fte r e ithe r
fe ta l or ma te rna l inje c tions of na lox one . Re vis e this pa ra gra ph, a dding the
ma te rna l re s pons e s w ithout de s troying the pa ra lle l form or the s igna ls of
the topic s .
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion
Injecti on of nal oxone al ter ed the ar ter i al bl ood gas and pH r esponses
of the f etuses but not those of the m other s. The f etal r esponses
depended on the si te of i njecti on. Af ter f etal i njecti on of nal oxone,
f etal ar ter i al bl ood pH and PO 2 both decr eased [f r om 7. 39 ± 0. 01
(SD) to 7. 35 ± 0. 02 and f r om 23. 0 ± 0. 5 to 20. 8 ± 0. 8 m m Hg,
r especti vel y ]. Ther e was no change i n f etal ar ter i al bl ood PCO 2 . Af ter
m ater nal i njecti on of nal oxone, onl y f etal ar ter i al bl ood PO 2
decr eased (f r om 24. 4 ± 0. 8 to 22. 2 ± 1. 0 m m Hg). Ther e w er e no
si gni f i cant changes i n f etal ar ter i al bl ood pH or PCO 2 .
P. 98
EMPHASIS
So f ar i n thi s chapter, w e have been concentrati ng on or gani zi ng paragraphs
and pr ov i di ng conti nui ty so that the r eader can f i nd the m essage of the
paragraph and can f ol l ow the stor y. In addi ti on, the r eader needs to k now w hat
i s i m por tant. N ot al l the i nf or m ati on i n a paragraph, or i n a paper, i s equal l y
i m por tant. To hel p the r eader f i nd the i m por tant i nf or m ati on, em phasi ze the
i m por tant i nf or m ati on and deem phasi ze l ess i m por tant i nf or m ati on.
Condensing or Omitting
Possi bl y the m ost i m por tant techni que f or em phasi zi ng i m por tant i nf or m ati on i s
to deem phasi ze l ess i m por tant i nf or m ati on by condensi ng or om i tti ng i t. In
m any publ i shed paper s, the uni m por tant i nf or m ati on outw ei ghs the i m por tant
i nf or m ati on, so w e cannot see the f or est f or the tr ees. The sol uti on i s to f i nd a
bal ance betw een tw o ex tr em es: tel l i ng ever y thi ng you k now and getti ng a
m essage acr oss. Keep i n m i nd, “The m or e noi se, the l ess m essage.”
Subordinating
A second techni que f or deem phasi zi ng i m por tant i nf or m ati on i s to subor di nate
i t, f or ex am pl e by pl aci ng i t i n a subor di nate cl ause. In Ex am pl e 3. 42, sentence
B has too m uch em phasi s. It i nter r upts the stor y l i ne.
Example 3.42
AWe chose a per i od equal to thr ee ti m es the ti m e constant because 95% of the
change i n anestheti c concentrati on w i thi n a com par tm ent, and l i kew i se 95% of
the r ecover y f r om a com par tm ent, shoul d occur dur i ng thi s per i od.
P. 99
BThese per centages ar e r ough esti m ates of the am ount di str i buted to and
subsequentl y r ecover ed f r om each com par tm ent. CHow ever, the di sti nct
separati on of these com par tm ents m eans that m ost anestheti c el i m i nated f r om
each com par tm ent shoul d occur dur i ng the per i ods w e chose.
To m ake the stor y l i ne cl ear, sentence B, w hi ch i nter r upts the contrast stated i n
sentences A and C, can be deem phasi zed by bei ng pl aced i n a subor di nate
cl ause attached to sentence C and by bei ng condensed.
Revision
AWe chose a per i od equal to thr ee ti m es the ti m e constant because 95% of the
change i n anestheti c concentrati on w i thi n a com par tm ent, and l i kew i se 95% of
the r ecover y f r om a com par tm ent, shoul d occur dur i ng thi s per i od. BAl though
these per centages ar e r ough esti m ates, Cthe di sti nct separati on of these
com par tm ents m eans that m ost anestheti c el i m i nated f r om each com par tm ent
shoul d occur dur i ng the per i ods w e chose.
Power Position
Al though deem phasi zi ng l ess i m por tant i nf or m ati on by condensi ng, om i tti ng,
and subor di nati ng i t cl ear s away the under br ush, the author shoul d al so
em phasi ze i m por tant i nf or m ati on. One way to em phasi ze i m por tant i nf or m ati on
i s to put i t i n a pow er posi ti on. The pow er posi ti ons ar e f i r st and l ast. Fi r st i s
m ost pow er f ul . Reader s begi n r eadi ng sentences, paragraphs, and secti ons of a
paper at the begi nni ng, so you have thei r attenti on. That i s w hy, i f ther e i s onl y
one topi c sentence i n a paragraph, i t shoul d be pl aced f i r st. Si m i l ar l y, i f the
f i r st noun of the topi c sentence i s the subject and i denti f i es the topi c of the
paragraph, as i n Ex am pl e 3. 3 (“pul m onar y ner ve endi ngs”), that i s ver y
pow er f ul .
The m i ddl e posi ti on i s the bur i al gr ound. Thus, an i m por tant poi nt ex pr essed i n
the m i ddl e of a sentence or an i m por tant r esul t pl aced i n the m i ddl e of several
sentences of r esul ts i s al m ost i nv i si bl e.
P ow e r P os itions
W e a k P os itions
Example 3.43
AMean pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e and car di ac output di d not change af ter
i nsti l l ati on of ser um al one or ser um w i th epi nephr i ne or ter butal i ne (tabl e 1).
BLef t atr i al pr essur e f el l sl i ghtl y bel ow the basel i ne af ter al l thr ee tr eatm ents,
but the decr ease was stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant onl y af ter epi nephr i ne (tabl e 1).
CPeak ai r way pr essur e i ncr eased sl i ghtl y af ter al l thr ee tr eatm ents, but the
i ncr ease was stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant onl y f or epi nephr i ne and ter butal i ne (tabl e
1). DTher e was a si gni f i cant i ncr ease i n l ung l y m ph f l ow and a si gni f i cant
decr ease i n the l y m phtopl asm a pr otei n concentrati on rati o af ter al l thr ee
tr eatm ents. EBoth the r i se i n l y m ph f l ow and the decr ease i n the l y m phto
pl asm a pr otei n concentrati on rati o w er e gr eater af ter ter butal i ne and
epi nephr i ne than af ter ser um al one (tabl e 2). F Ar ter i al ox ygen tensi on
decr eased af ter al l thr ee tr eatm ents, al though i t was al way s gr eater than 85
m m Hg.
The m ost i m por tant r esul t—sentence D—i s bur i ed i n the m i ddl e. To m ake the
i m por tant r esul t easi er to f i nd, i t shoul d be f i r st i n the paragraph.
P. 100
Revision
AAf ter ser um was i nsti l l ed ei ther al one or w i th one of the tw o betaadr ener gi c
agoni sts, l ung l y m ph f l ow i ncr eased and the l y m phtopl asm a pr otei n
concentrati on rati o decr eased. BBoth of these changes w er e gr eater af ter
ter butal i ne and epi nephr i ne than af ter ser um al one (tabl e 2). CAr ter i al ox ygen
tensi on decr eased, al though i t was al way s gr eater than 85 m m Hg. DTher e w er e
no i m por tant changes i n hem ody nam i cs or peak ai r way pr essur e (tabl e 1).
In the r ev i si on, the m ost i m por tant r esul t i s f i r st. The thr ee sentences of l east
i m por tant r esul ts ar e condensed to one sentence and pl aced l ast (sentence D).
In addi ti on, tw o other techni ques of condensi ng ar e used: The tr eatm ents ar e
nam ed at the begi nni ng of the paragraph, so they do not need to be r epeated i n
ever y sentence (as they ar e i n the or i gi nal paragraph). A categor y ter m
(“changes”) i s used i n sentence B to avoi d r epeati ng the detai l s of w hat
i ncr eased and w hat decr eased.
N ow that the i m por tant r esul t i s i n a pow er posi ti on (f i r st) and the noi seto
m essage rati o i s decr eased, the r esul ts i n thi s paragraph ar e cl ear.
Labeling
Another usef ul way to em phasi ze i m por tant i nf or m ati on i s to l abel i t as
i m por tant. For ex am pl e, a di scussi on secti on of a paper can begi n by say i ng,
“The m ost i m por tant f i ndi ng of thi s study i s… .” Si m i l ar l y, i ndi v i dual paragraphs
w i thi n a di scussi on can begi n by say i ng “One of the m ost str i k i ng f i ndi ngs of
our i nvesti gati ons was…” or “The m ost unusual aspect of the Odr 7 sequence
i s… .” Si m i l ar l y, l ess i m por tant i nf or m ati on can be l abel ed, as i n sentence D of
the r ev i si on of Ex am pl e 3. 43 above (“Ther e w er e no i m por tant changes i n…”).
Repeating
A f i f th way to em phasi ze i m por tant i nf or m ati on i s to r epeat i t. The m ost
i m por tant i nf or m ati on i n a paper i s the m essage. The m essage shoul d be stated
m or e than once—cer tai nl y i n the abstract and i n the Di scussi on. The m essage
can be r epeated i n the Di scussi on by bei ng stated both at the begi nni ng and at
the end. It can al so be stated i n the ti tl e.
Som eti m es the author gets so i nvol ved i n uni m por tant detai l s that the m essage
goes unstated, as i n Ex am pl e 3. 44, f r om a di scussi on secti on.
Example 3.44
AThe f i nal var i abl e that can shi f t the pr essur edi m ensi on cur ve acutel y i s a
change i n tem peratur e. BRectal tem peratur e was m oni tor ed i n m any dogs
P. 101
and tended to dr i f t dow nwar d f r om 38 to 36°C. CThe gr eatest dr i f t i n
tem peratur e (to 36°C) occur r ed dur i ng the thoracotomy and then the
tem peratur e usual l y r em ai ned stabl e. DTem pl eton et al . (38) r epor ted gr eater
car di ac m uscl e sti f f ness and gr eater di astol i c pr essur e consi stent w i th a
l ef twar d shi f t i n the pr essur edi m ensi on cur ve at 33°C (P LVE D , 6. 6 m m Hg) than
at 37°C (P LVE D , 1. 8 m m Hg). EThe m ajor i ncr ease i n di astol i c pr essur e cam e at
tem peratur es bel ow 35°C. F The author s bel i eved that the el evati on i n di astol i c
pr essur e was m edi ated by changes i n v i scous rather than el asti c pr oper ti es.
G How ever, 1 al l r ecor ded tem peratur es i n the pr esent study w er e gr eater than
35°C, 2 tem peratur e was usual l y stabl e dur i ng the ex per i m ental pr otocol at 37°C,
and 3 ther e was no ev i dence that v i scous f actor s changed dur i ng m ax i m al
cor onar y bl ood f l ow.
When w e get to sentence D, our eyes begi n to gl aze over. Al though w e can
under stand w hat sentences D–G ar e say i ng, w e do not k now w hy w e ar e hear i ng
them . The i m pl i cati on i s not cl ear. What i s the m essage of al l thi s detai l ?
Revision
AThe f i nal var i abl e that can shi f t the pr essur edi m ensi on cur ve acutel y i s a
change i n tem peratur e. BIn our ex per i m ents, r ectal tem peratur e tended to dr i f t
dow nwar d f r om 38 to 36°C. CThe gr eatest dr i f t i n tem peratur e (to 36°C)
occur r ed dur i ng the thoracotomy and then tem peratur e usual l y r em ai ned stabl e.
X Thi schange i n tem peratur e pr obabl y di d not shi f t the pr essur edi m ensi on
cur ve, si nce a l ef twar d shi f t has been r epor ted onl y at tem peratur es bel ow
35°C (38).
The r ev i si on m akes the m essage cl ear, because the author states the m essage
(sentence X, under l i ned). The detai l s ar e unnecessar y, so they have been
om i tted.
Thus, deem phasi zi ng l ess i m por tant i nf or m ati on, by condensi ng, om i tti ng, or
subor di nati ng i t, al ong w i th em phasi zi ng i m por tant i nf or m ati on, by pl aci ng i t i n
a pow er posi ti on, l abel i ng i t, r epeati ng i t, and stati ng rather than i m pl y i ng i t,
m ake the m essage and the stor y of a paragraph cl ear.
P. 102
Ke e p s e nte nc e s s hort.
Note s :
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion 1
AEx travasati on of Evans bl ue dye Bwas i ncr eased both i n the trachea
and Ci n the m ai n br onchi 45 and 60 m i n af ter ex posur e to ozone,
Dbut not 15 or 30 m i n af ter ex posur e.
(32 w or ds)
B. Acti on i n the v er b.
C. Par al l el f or m used.
Ex travasati on of Evans bl ue dye was i ncr eased i n the trachea and the
m ai n br onchi onl y at 45 and 60 m i n af ter ex posur e to ozone.
(24 w or ds)
(33 w or ds)
P. 103
GENERAL
To send a cl ear m essage and tel l a cl ear stor y, paragraphs shoul d be or gani zed,
shoul d have conti nui ty, and shoul d em phasi ze i m por tant i nf or m ati on.
SPECIFIC
Organization
Gi ve over v i ew f i r st, i n a topi c sentence. Then gi ve detai l s, i n l ogi cal l y
or gani zed suppor ti ng sentences.
Continuity
Repeat key ter m s.
Repeat ex actl y.
Repeat ear l y.
U se transi ti on w or ds, phrases, or cl auses to i ndi cate l ogi cal r el ati onshi ps
betw een i deas.
Emphasis
To deem phasi ze l ess i m por tant i nf or m ati on, condense, om i t, or
subor di nate i t.
To em phasi ze i m por tant i nf or m ati on, pl ace i t i n a pow er posi ti on, l abel i t,
r epeat i t, and state i t rather than just i m pl y i ng i t.
Back
Introduction
Bef or e tur ni ng to the pr i nci pl es f or w r i ti ng i ndi v i dual secti ons of the r esear ch
paper, w e need to under stand the stor y l i ne that r uns thr ough the paper. The
stor y l i ne r ef l ects the sci enti f i c m ethod. Si nce m ost paper s i n bi om edi cal f i el ds
test hy potheses, w e w i l l f ocus on hy pothesi stesti ng paper s. The basi c stor y
l i ne i n hy pothesi stesti ng paper s has f our par ts:
A descr i pti v e paper i s a paper that descr i bes a new l y di scover ed object, such
as a str uctur e. The basi c stor y l i ne i n a descr i pti ve paper i s as f ol l ow s:
P. 106
A m ethods paper i s a paper that descr i bes a new or i m pr oved m ethod,
m ater i al , or apparatus. The basi c stor y l i ne i n a m ethods paper i s as f ol l ow s:
Each of the stor y l i nes i s pr esented i n a paper that has f our m ai n secti ons:
Intr oducti on, Mater i al s and Methods, Resul ts, and Di scussi on. In addi ti on, the
stor y l i nes ar e suppl em ented by the other par ts of a r esear ch paper : f i gur es
and tabl es, ti tl e, abstract, and r ef er ences. Wher e i n the paper each step i n the
stor y l i ne i s pr esented i s show n i n the tabl e bel ow :
As w e go thr ough the f our secti ons of the paper, and the other par ts of the
paper, w e w i l l see how to w r i te these stor y l i nes so that they ar e cl ear f r om
the f i r st w or d of the Intr oducti on to the l ast w or d of the Di scussi on.
Back
Chapter 4
The Introduction
FUNCTIONS
The Intr oducti on has tw o f uncti ons. One i s to awaken the r eader 's i nter est. The
other i s to be i nf or m ati ve enough to pr epar e r eader s, w hether or not they ar e
speci al i sts i n your f i el d, to under stand the paper.
To awaken i nter est, an Intr oducti on shoul d be di r ect and to the poi nt, and i t
shoul d be as shor t as possi bl e consi stent w i th cl ar i ty and i nf or m ati veness. In
addi ti on, i t shoul d be w r i tten i n a r eadabl e sty l e (see Chaps. 1 and 2).
To be i nf or m ati ve, an Intr oducti on shoul d f ol l ow the gui del i nes gi ven bel ow.
STORY LINE
The Intr oducti on secti on of a paper pr esents the f i r st step i n the stor y l i ne.
What the f i r st step i s depends on the ty pe of r esear ch. In a hy pothesi stesti ng
paper, the f i r st step i s the questi on. In a descr i pti ve paper, i t i s the m essage—
f or ex am pl e, the key f eatur es of a new str uctur e. In a m ethods paper, i t i s the
new or i m pr oved m ethod, m ater i al , or apparatus. How thi s f i r st step i s
pr esented f or the var i ous ty pes of paper s i s ex pl ai ned bel ow.
References
The statem ents about w hat i s k now n m ust i ncl ude r ef er ences (see Ex am pl es 4. 1
and 4. 2 on p. 110). The r ef er ences shoul d be chosen to r ef l ect the key w or k
that l ed to the questi on of your paper.
Newness, Importance
Bi om edi cal jour nal s l i ke to publ i sh paper s descr i bi ng w or k that i s “new, tr ue,
i m por tant, and com pr ehensi bl e” (DeBakey, 1976). The Intr oducti on i s the pl ace
to m ake cl ear that the w or k i s new (by stati ng the “unk now n”). The Intr oducti on
can al so i ndi cate w hy the w or k i s i m por tant, i f the i m por tance i s not obv i ous.
The i m por tance of the w or k can al so, or i nstead, be stated, and ex pl ai ned, i n
the Di scussi on.
Funnel Shape
Known, Unknown, Question
The Intr oducti on f ol l ow s a standar d patter n of or gani zati on—the f unnel . The
i dea of a f unnel i s to star t br oadl y and then to nar r ow step by step to a f ocal
poi nt. In the Intr oducti on to a hy pothesi stesti ng paper, the f unnel has a
m i ni m um of thr ee steps: w hat i s k now n about the topi c, w hat i s not k now n, and
the questi on. The questi on i s the f ocal poi nt. Thi s stepbystep nar r ow i ng i s the
gener i c stor y that al l i ntr oducti ons of hy pothesi stesti ng paper s tel l : “her e
P. 109
i s w hat i s k now n now, her e i s w hat i s not yet k now n, her e i s w hat our questi on
was.” Wi thi n thi s gener i c f ram ew or k , a vast ar ray of speci f i c stor i es can be
tol d. The r eader shoul d be abl e to see thi s gener i c f ram ew or k i n ever y
Intr oducti on, and shoul d al so be abl e to f ol l ow the speci f i c l ogi cal steps that
l ead to the questi on of the i ndi v i dual paper.
Known
AThe k now n i s the f i r st step i n the f unnel . The k now n of ten i ncl udes m any
sentences, w hi ch nar r ow by appr opr i ate sci enti f i c l ogi c to the unk now n.
Unknown
BThe unk now n i s usual l y just one sentence. Though br i ef, the statem ent of the
unk now n i s i m por tant f or tw o r easons. One r eason i s that the unk now n
i ndi cates that the w or k i s new. The other r eason i s that the unk now n i s the step
that l i nk s the k now n and the questi on, cr eati ng a stor y l i ne.
A cr uci al f eatur e of the unk now n i s that i t i s v i r tual l y the sam e as the questi on.
For ex am pl e, i n Ex am pl e 4. 1 (p. 110), the si te i s unk now n. The questi on i s,
“w hat i s the si te?” Thus, once the unk now n i s stated, the questi on i s
deter m i ned.
Question
The questi on i s the speci f i c topi c of the paper and the end of the f unnel . (The
general topi c of the paper i s nam ed i n the f i r st sentence of w hat i s k now n. )
Experimental Approach
The Intr oducti on can end w i th the statem ent of the questi on or can go on to
state the ex per i m ental appr oach. If the ex per i m ental appr oach i s i ncl uded, the
l ogi cal pl ace f or i t i s af ter the questi on. Putti ng the ex per i m ental appr oach
bef or e the questi on (tr eati ng the ex per i m ental appr oach as “back gr ound”) does
not w or k . The back gr ound (k now n, unk now n) i s w hat l eads to the questi on. The
ex per i m ental appr oach does not l ead to the questi on; i t f ol l ow s f r om the
questi on: “Her e i s our questi on; her e i s how w e w ent about answ er i ng our
questi on.”
Importance
Ther e i s no par ti cul ar spot i n the f unnel f or i ndi cati ng the i m por tance of the
w or k . Som eti m es the i m por tance i s not i ndi cated, as i n Ex am pl e 4. 1. In
Ex am pl e 4. 2, the i m por tance i s i m pl i ed by sentence K, near the end of the
Intr oducti on. In Ex am pl es 4. 3 and 4. 4, the i m por tance i s stated rather than
i m pl i ed, and i n var i ous pl aces i n the Intr oducti on: i n the m i ddl e (Ex am pl e 4. 3,
sentence D) and at the begi nni ng (Ex am pl e 4. 4, sentence A). In other
Intr oducti ons, the i m por tance m ay be stated i n other sentences.
P. 110
AIt i s k now n that several general anestheti cs, i ncl udi ng bar bi turates, depr ess
the br onchom otor r esponse to vagus ner ve sti m ul ati on (1, 7, 9). BHow ever, the
si te of thi s depr essi on has not been deter m i ned. CTo deter m i ne w hi ch si te i n
the vagal m otor pathway to the br onchi ol es i s m ost sensi ti ve to depr essi on by
bar bi turates, Dw e di d ex per i m ents i n i sol ated r i ngs of f er r et trachea i n w hi ch
w e sti m ul ated thi s pathway at f our di f f er ent si tes bef or e and af ter ex posur e to
bar bi turates.
Longer i ntr oducti ons al so f ol l ow thi s f unnel shape but ex pand i t. One way to
ex pand the f unnel i s to ex tend w hat i s k now n, as i n Ex am pl e 4. 2. In thi s
Intr oducti on, tw o paragraphs state w hat i s k now n. Paragraph 3 f i ni shes the
f unnel : J i m pl i es an unk now n; K i m pl i es another unk now n and al so i m pl i es the
i m por tance of the w or k (that w e ar e f i ndi ng an overar chi ng m echani sm f or a
var i ety of si m i l ar f uncti ons i n di sparate speci es); L states the hy pothesi s; M
states the ex per i m ental appr oach.
2 E U nl i ke i nsects and ver tebrates, nem atodes have no hear t or def i ned
ci r cul ator y sy stem . F How ever, ev i dence suggests that the nem atode phar y nx , a
r hy thm i cal l y contracti ng or gan i nvol ved i n f eedi ng, shar es f uncti onal and
m ol ecul ar si m i l ar i ti es w i th the hear t i n other speci es. G At the f uncti onal l evel ,
phar y ngeal m uscl e contracti on, l i ke the contracti on of ver tebrate car di ac
m uscl e, does not r equi r e ner vous sy stem i nput (11). H At the m ol ecul ar l evel ,
phar y ngeal m uscl e devel opm ent i nvol ves not the MyoD f am i l y of myogeni c
r egul ator y f actor s (12, 13) but the hom eobox gene ceh22, w hi ch i s r el ated to
ti nm an and nk x 2. 5. I ceh22 i s ex pr essed excl usi vel y i n phar y ngeal m uscl e,
w her e i t bi nds the enhancer of the phar y ngeal m uscl especi f i c m y o2 gene, and
a ceh22 m utant di spl ay s def ects i n phar y ngeal m or phol ogy and f uncti on (13,
14).
3 JThese f uncti onal and m ol ecul ar si m i l ar i ti es suggest that these genes per f or m
si m i l ar f uncti ons. KThi s suggesti on i n tur n i m pl i es that the m echani sm that
contr ol s hear t devel opm ent i n i nsects and ver tebrates m ay al so contr ol
phar y ngeal devel opm ent i n nem atodes. LWe ther ef or e hy pothesi zed that the
nem atode gene ceh22 and the ver tebrate gene nk x 2. 5 per f or m si m i l ar
f uncti ons. MTo test thi s hy pothesi s, w e ex am i ned the abi l i ty of the zebraf i sh
nk x 2. 5 gene (8, 9) to substi tute f or the nem atode ceh22 gene i n transgeni c
Caenor habdi ti s el egans.
Continuity
In ver y shor t i ntr oducti ons, the stor y l i ne i s easy to f ol l ow because each
sentence, or par t of a sentence, i s a step i n the stor y. How ever, i n l onger
i ntr oducti ons, the stor y l i ne can be di f f i cul t to f ol l ow. The r eason i s that l onger
i ntr oducti ons tel l stor i es on tw o l evel s: the overal l stor y (k now n, unk now n,
questi on),
P. 111
w hi ch r uns thr oughout the Intr oducti on, and m i ni stor i es, w hi ch r un w i thi n
paragraphs or par ts of paragraphs.
How can w e ensur e that the overal l stor y i s cl ear w hen w e i nter sper se m i ni
stor i es al ong the way ? In other w or ds, how do w e keep an overal l stor y goi ng
af ter i t i s i nter r upted? The answ er i s that w e use al l of our techni ques of
conti nui ty and topi c sentences.
In addi ti on, to m ove cl ear l y f r om step 1 (the f i r st k now n) to step 2 (the second
k now n) af ter an i nter veni ng m i ni stor y (B–D), a transi ti on phrase (“U nl i ke
i nsects and ver tebrates”) i s used at the begi nni ng of step 2 (sentence E) to l i nk
step 2 to step 1. Thi s transi ti on phrase i ncl udes the r epeated key ter m s
“i nsects” and “ver tebrates,” and the transi ti on w or d “unl i ke,” w hi ch i ndi cates a
di f f er ence betw een the ani m al s i n paragraph 1 and those i n paragraph 2. Thi s
di f f er ence i s speci f i ed i n sentence E and i s f ol l ow ed by si m i l ar i ti es, w hi ch ar e
the i m por tant i ssue, i n sentence F. Al so hel pf ul i s the def i ni ti on of “phar y nx ” i n
sentence F, because thi s def i ni ti on speci f i es the i m por tant si m i l ar i ty betw een
the phar y nx and the hear t—r hy thm i c contracti on.
To m ove f r om step 2 (k now n) to step 3 (unk now n) af ter another i nter veni ng
m i ni stor y (G–I), the thi r d step (sentence J) begi ns by r estati ng step 2 (the
f uncti onal and m ol ecul ar si m i l ar i ti es of the hear t and the phar y nx ) as the
subject of the sentence and then states the thi r d step i n the ver b and com pl eter
(the possi bi l i ty of si m i l ar gene f uncti ons). The r estated second step uses
ex actl y the sam e key ter m s that w er e used w hen step 2 was stated the f i r st
ti m e (F). Repeati ng an ear l i er step as the subject of the sentence that states
the nex t step i s an ef f ecti ve way to use r epeated key ter m s to cr eate
conti nui ty, especi al l y af ter a m i ni stor y that i nter r upts the tw o steps.
P. 112
The r est of the overal l stor y then f ol l ow s i n the f i nal thr ee sentences (K, L, M).
The second unk now n (K), w hi ch i ndi cates the i m por tance of the w or k , connects
to the f i r st unk now n (J) by a r epeated key ter m (“suggesti on”) and a transi ti on
w or d (“i n tur n”). The questi on (L) connects to the unk now ns by a transi ti on
w or d (“ther ef or e”) and by r epeated key ter m s (“gene,” “f uncti ons”). The
ex per i m ental appr oach (M) connects to the questi on by a transi ti on phrase that
contai ns a r epeated key ter m (“To test thi s hy pothesi s”) and by other r epeated
key ter m s (“nk x 2. 5 gene,” “nem atode ceh22 gene”).
The MiniStories
The m i ni stor i es i n paragraphs 1 and 2 f l esh out the overal l stor y. Thus, i n
paragraph 1, sentences B and C pr ov i de detai l s about speci f i c genes and thei r
ef f ects on hear t devel opm ent. Sentence D states an i m pl i cati on of B and C. Thi s
i m pl i cati on (a com m on m echani sm f or hear t devel opm ent) pr epar es f or the
m or e gl obal i m pl i cati on i n sentence K (a com m on m echani sm f or hear t and
phar y nx devel opm ent).
Topic Sentences
In addi ti on to the steps of the overal l stor y l i ne bei ng i n pr om i nent posi ti ons
and al l the techni ques of conti nui ty bei ng used, topi c sentences hel p ensur e
that the stor y l i ne i s cl ear i n l onger i ntr oducti ons.
Shor t i ntr oducti ons m ay not have any topi c sentences. In Ex am pl e 4. 1, ever y
sentence, or par t of a sentence, i s a step i n the stor y. N o separate sentences of
suppor ti ng detai l s ar e pr ov i ded, so w e have no topi c sentences. How ever,
l onger i ntr oducti ons have separate sentences of suppor ti ng detai l s. Ther ef or e,
the sentences i n the overal l stor y that the suppor ti ng sentences suppor t becom e
topi c sentences. In Ex am pl e 4. 2, sentences A (suppor ted by B–D) and F
(suppor ted by G–I) ar e topi c sentences.
WRITING
The Unknown
The unk now n i s cl ear est i f i t i s stated outr i ght, as i n Ex am pl e 4. 1, sentence B:
“the si te… has not been deter m i ned.” Other way s of stati ng the unk now n outr i ght
ar e “has not been establ i shed,” “i s uncl ear,” “i s unk now n,” etc.
The unk now n m ay al so be i m pl i ed rather than stated. One way to i m pl y an
unk now n i s to state a suggesti on or a possi bi l i ty, as i n Ex am pl e 4. 2, paragraph
3, sentence J. By say i ng that f uncti onal and m ol ecul ar si m i l ar i ti es suggest that
the genes per f or m si m i l ar f uncti ons, Ex am pl e 4. 2 i m pl i es that w hether the
genes actual l y do per f or m si m i l ar f uncti ons i s not yet k now n. Si m i l ar l y, i f you
say som ethi ng i s possi bl e, that i m pl i es that i s i t not yet k now n.
AMetabol i c al k al osi s dur i ng exer ci se i ncr eases bl ood l actate concentrati ons
substanti al l y beyond the concentrati ons obser ved dur i ng exer ci se i n the
absence of m etabol i c al k al osi s (8, 10, 16). BConver sel y, m etabol i c aci dosi s
decr eases bl ood l actate concentrati ons. CHow ever, f or these i nvesti gati ons,
al k al i was i ngested or i nf used, w hi ch i s an ar ti f i ci al si tuati on. DMor e i m por tant
cl i ni cal l y i s the ef f ect of r espi rator y al k al osi s, w hi ch occur s dur i ng exer ci se i n
a var i ety of ci r cum stances that i nvol ve i ncr eased r espi rator y dr i ve. EThese
ci r cum stances i ncl ude i nter sti ti al l ung di sease and congesti ve hear t f ai l ur e.
FTher ef or e, i n thi s study w e asked w hether r espi rator y al k al osi s dur i ng
exer ci se, l i ke m etabol i c al k al osi s dur i ng exer ci se, i ncr eases bl ood l actate
concentrati ons m or e than exer ci se al one does. GWe used a new bi of eedback
m ethod by w hi ch venti l ati on, and thus ar ter i al PCO 2 and pH, can be pr eci sel y
adjusted i ndependentl y of m etabol i c rate.
The Question
Precision
The m ost sci enti f i c way of stati ng the questi on of hy pothesi stesti ng r esear ch i s
as a hy pothesi s, al though thi s i s not com m onl y done. An advantage of stati ng
the questi on as a hy pothesi s i s that the questi on i s pr eci se. As a r esul t, the
r eader can easi l y anti ci pate the answ er. For ex am pl e, “To test the hy pothesi s
that al terati ons i n chandel i er neur on axon car tr i dges contr i bute to pr ef r ontal
cor tex dy sf uncti on i n schi zophr eni a, w e ex am i ned… .” The answ er m ust be
P. 114
ei ther “yes, these al terati ons contr i bute to pr ef r ontal cor tex dy sf uncti on i n
schi zophr eni a,” or “no, they do not.”
Inevitability
The questi on shoul d f ol l ow i nev i tabl y f r om the pr ev i ous statem ents of w hat i s
k now n or bel i eved and w hat i s sti l l unk now n or pr obl em ati c. Thus, the topi c of
the questi on shoul d be the sam e as the topi c i n the statem ent of w hat is
k now n, and the questi on shoul d be the questi on w e w oul d ex pect af ter r eadi ng
the statem ent of w hat i s unk now n or pr obl em ati c.
ASi nce 1975 pr ostagl andi ns E 1 and E 2 (PGE 1 , PGE 2 ) have been used to m ai ntai n
the patency of the ductus ar ter i osus i n i nf ants w ho have congeni tal hear t
di sease (1–6). BAl though the f etal ductus i s sensi ti ve to the di l ati ng acti on of
PGE 1 and PGE 2 (7), the r esponse of the ductus i n the new bor n to speci f i c doses
of these pr ostagl andi ns i s var i abl e (8). CThe f actor s that r egul ate
P. 115
the r esponsi veness of the ductus to PGE 1 and PGE 2 ar e unk now n. DOne
r egul ati ng f actor that has been suggested i s the i nf ant's age (8); how ever, thi s
f actor i s unl i kel y because the ductus i s r esponsi ve to PGE 1 and PGE 2 even af ter
m any m onths of therapy (9, 10). EAnother possi bl e r egul ati ng f actor m ay be
the degr ee of constr i cti on of the ductus ar ter i osus. FSuppor t f or thi s f actor i s
that the ductus no l onger di l ates i n r esponse to PGE 1 and PGE 2 w hen i t i s f ul l y
cl osed (8, 9) but does di l ate w hen i t i s onl y par ti al l y constr i cted at angi ography
(11). GTher ef or e, w e tested the hy pothesi s that the degr ee of constr i cti on of
the ductus ar ter i osus r egul ates the r esponsi veness of the ductus to PGE 1 and
PGE 2 by doi ng ex per i m ents i n new bor n l am bs.
In thi s Intr oducti on, the k now n i s stated i n A and B, and the unk now n i s stated
i n C. D states a possi bl e answ er and r ejects i t. E pr oposes a di f f er ent answ er. F
gi ves suggesti ve ev i dence that suppor ts the pr oposed answ er. G then states a
hy pothesi s (questi on) based on the unk now n and on the suggesti ve ev i dence.
We can tel l that the hy pothesi s i s based on the ear l i er statem ents because key
ter m s f r om the k now n (“pr ostagl andi n E 1 and E 2 ”), f r om the unk now n
(“r egul ate the r esponsi veness”), and f r om the suggesti ve ev i dence (“degr ee of
constr i cti on of the ductus ar ter i osus”) al l appear i n the hy pothesi s.
Two Questions
In a paper that has tw o questi ons, both questi ons m ust f ol l ow i nev i tabl y f r om
the pr ev i ous statem ents. If the back gr ound i nf or m ati on l eadi ng to the second
questi on i s om i tted, as f r equentl y happens, the r eader does not k now w her e the
second questi on com es f r om .
In thi s ex am pl e, the r eader does not k now w hy the author s com par ed por tal
venous and sy stem i c venous i nf usi ons of pr ostagl andi n E 1 . In the r ev i si on, the
necessar y back gr ound i nf or m ati on l eadi ng to thi s second questi on i s added
(sentence D, w hi ch descr i bes another possi bl e tr eatm ent). In addi ti on, the tw o
questi ons ar e condensed i nto a si ngl e statem ent (E).
Linked Questions
In paper s that ask m or e than one questi on, the second questi on som eti m es
depends on the answ er to the f i r st one. In thi s si tuati on, the questi ons can be
l i nked by “i f so” or a si m i l ar phrase, as i n Ex am pl e 4. 6, and no back gr ound
i nf or m ati on needs to be added to l ead to the second questi on.
Thi s r epor t descr i bes ex per i m ents desi gned to deter m i ne w hether exogenous
arachi doni c aci d i ncr eases the r el ease of pr ostagl andi n E 2 f r om the ductus
ar ter i osus, and, i f so, w hether the exogenous arachi doni c aci d i s the sour ce of
the pr ostagl andi n E 2 r el eased.
Experimental Approach
Som eti m es the Intr oducti on can end af ter a statem ent of the questi on.
How ever, of ten i t i s hel pf ul f or the r eader to k now the ex per i m ental appr oach
to answ er i ng the questi on, especi al l y i f the appr oach i s new, unusual , or
com pl i cated, i f the questi on al one does not gi ve a cl ear i dea of w hat the
ex per i m ents w i l l be, or i f the study needs to be i denti f i ed as hav i ng been done
i n v i tr o, r etr ospecti vel y, or w hatever.
In general , the ex per i m ental appr oach i s shor t—usual l y one sentence; at m ost,
tw o or thr ee sentences. The ex per i m ental appr oach can be as br i ef as nam i ng
the ani m al studi ed, as i n Ex am pl e 4. 4. U sual l y, the ex per i m ental appr oach
descr i bes one of the var i abl es (i ndependent or dependent) i n addi ti on to nam i ng
the ani m al , as i n Ex am pl e 4. 1. Her e the ani m al i s nam ed (f er r et), the
i ndependent var i abl e i s descr i bed (“w e sti m ul ated thi s pathway… bef or e and
af ter ex posur e to bar bi turates”), the num ber of dependent var i abl es i s stated
(“f our di f f er ent si tes”), and the f act that the ex per i m ents w er e done i n v i tr o i s
m ade cl ear (“i n i sol ated r i ngs of f er r et trachea”).
In one ty pe of paper, i ncl udi ng a com pl ete over v i ew of the ex per i m ents at the
end of the Intr oducti on i s cr uci al : paper s that have no “Study Desi gn”
subsecti on i n the Methods secti on but i nstead r un the stor y of the ex per i m ents
done to answ er the questi on thr ough the Resul ts secti on (see Chap. 6). In these
paper s, the ex per i m ental appr oach at the end of the Intr oducti on i s the onl y
over v i ew w e get of the ex per i m ents done to answ er the questi on. In the Resul ts
secti on, the stor y i s f racti onated, one or tw o sentences per paragraph. The
r eader shoul d not have to pul l the over v i ew of the ex per i m ents together ; i t
shoul d be stated com pactl y i n one spot—at the end of the Intr oducti on.
Signals of the Question and the Experimental
Approach
Si gnal s ar e needed to i denti f y the questi on and the ex per i m ental appr oach. The
si gnal s var y dependi ng on w hether the questi on i s stated as a hy pothesi s or as
a questi on, and on w hether the questi on and the ex per i m ental appr oach ar e i n
the sam e sentence or i n separate sentences.
When the questi on and the ex per i m ental appr oach ar e i n the sam e sentence,
onl y the questi on needs a si gnal . The si gnal of the questi on i s w r i tten as a
pur pose (f or ex am pl e, “To deter m i ne w hether…”), and the ex per i m ental
appr oach f ol l ow s natural l y as a descr i pti on of the ex per i m ents done. When the
questi on and ex per i m ental appr oach ar e i n separate sentences, the cl osest
conti nui ty com es f r om r epeati ng a key ter m f r om the si gnal of the questi on i n
the si gnal of the ex per i m ental appr oach. If no key ter m can be r epeated, you
can use “For thi s study ” to si gnal the ex per i m ental appr oach.
Com m onl y used si gnal s of questi ons and the accom pany i ng si gnal of the
ex per i m ental appr oach ar e l i sted bel ow. N um er ous var i ati ons on these si gnal s
ar e possi bl e.
“Thi s r epor t descr i bes ex per i m ents “For thi s study, w e…”
desi gned to deter m i ne w hether…”
P. 118
If the questi on i s not l i m i ted to the ani m al studi ed, usual l y because the ani m al
i s ser v i ng as a m odel of a hum an condi ti on, nam e the ani m al i n the
ex per i m ental appr oach, as i n Ex am pl es 4. 1, 4. 2, and 4. 5. If the m odel i s a new
one, al so establ i sh i ts val i di ty.
For studi es of hum an subjects, hum ans ar e f r equentl y not m enti oned i n the
questi on. In these cases, ter m s used i n the Intr oducti on usual l y suggest that
the w or k was done on hum ans. For ex am pl e, i n Ex am pl e 4. 3, suggesti ons that
the study was on hum ans ar e “dur i ng exer ci se” (sentence A), “i m por tant
cl i ni cal l y ” (D), and “i nter sti ti al l ung di sease and congesti ve hear t f ai l ur e” (E).
How ever, f or m ax i m al cl ar i ty, hum ans shoul d be m enti oned i n the questi on i f
hum ans w er e the study subjects.
For studi es of speci f i c hum an popul ati ons, the popul ati on i s al way s stated i n the
questi on, as i n Ex am pl e 4. 9.
P. 119
Stati ng the answ er i nstead of the questi on i s not adv i sabl e i n paper s r epor ti ng
hy pothesi stesti ng studi es, because i f you had a hy pothesi s, the onl y
strai ghtf or war d way to w r i te the paper i s by stati ng the hy pothesi s i n the
Intr oducti on. Hi di ng the f act that you w er e testi ng a hy pothesi s obscur es the
sci ence.
LENGTH
The Intr oducti on shoul d be as shor t as possi bl e consi stent w i th cl ar i ty and
i nf or m ati veness. General l y, shor ter i s better. The am ount of back gr ound
i nf or m ati on needed f or com pl ete i nf or m ati veness depends on how m uch the
i ntended audi ence can be ex pected to k now about the topi c. For a ty pi cal
jour nal ar ti cl e, one doubl espaced page (about 250–300 w or ds) i s of ten
suf f i ci ent. When a l onger Intr oducti on i s needed, tr y to keep i t to tw o doubl e
spaced pages (500–600 w or ds).
Example 4.10
1 AThr ee cl asses of G pr otei n–coupl ed r eceptor s i n the nose have been
r epor ted. BOne l ar ge cl ass, w hose m em ber s ar e di f f er enti al l y ex pr essed i n
cel l s of m am m al i an ol f actor y sensor y epi thel i um , detects vol ati l e odorants (1).
CAnother cl ass, f ound i n a subset of m am m al i an vom er onasal or gan neur ons,
detects pher om ones (2). DRecentl y, a thi r d cl ass of G pr otei n–coupl ed r eceptor s
f r om a di f f er ent gr oup of vom er onasal or gan neur ons unr el ated to both
pr ev i ousl y f ound cl asses has been character i zed (3–5). EThese G pr otei n–
coupl ed r eceptor s, r epor ted i n m i ce, rats, and f r ogs, have l ar ge ex tracel l ul ar
dom ai ns and r esem bl e the m etabotr opi c gl utam ate r eceptor s and the Ca 2 +
sensi ng r eceptor.
P. 120
In thi s Intr oducti on, paragraph 1 pr esents w hat i s k now n—the ex i stence of
thr ee cl asses of G pr otei n–coupl ed r eceptor s i n the nose. The m essage—the
di scover y of a hom ol og of the thi r d cl ass—i s stated i n paragraph 2. In addi ti on,
i n thi s ex am pl e, bef or e stati ng the m essage, the author s descr i be how thei r
di scover y was m ade.
AVar i ous ty pes of phy si ol ogi cal r esear ch r equi r e pl aci ng ani m al s i n a m etabol i c
cham ber f or ex posur e to gases, col l ecti on of ex pi r ed ai r, ex posur e to unusual
atm ospher i c condi ti ons such as hy pox i a or hy pobar i c env i r onm ents (6, 9), or
m easur em ent of ox ygen consum pti on (1, 8). BAl though equi pm ent f or such
studi es i s com m er ci al l y avai l abl e, i t i s usual l y ex pensi ve, speci al i zed f or a
si ngl e f uncti on, and appl i cabl e onl y f or shor tter m studi es w i th one ani m al .
CIm pr ov i si ng w i th avai l abl e l aborator y equi pm ent m eets w i th var i abl e success
and of ten r equi r es constant attenti on and r epai r. DWe now r epor t a r el ati vel y
i nex pensi ve, r el i abl e cl osedci r cui t m etabol i c cham ber that has pr oven usef ul
f or several r esear ch appl i cati ons i nvol v i ng one or m or e ani m al s housed f or
per i ods of hour s or day s.
In thi s Intr oducti on, sentence A states the r easons a cham ber i s needed,
sentences B and C state pr obl em s w i th avai l abl e and i m pr ov i sed cham ber s, and
sentence D i ntr oduces a new cham ber that sol ves al l of the pr obl em s of the
pr ev i ous cham ber s.
DETAILS
Verb Tense
Ver b tenses i n the Intr oducti on, l i ke ver b tenses ever y w her e i n the paper,
depend par tl y on the ty pe of statem ent and par tl y on the m eani ng of the ver b.
Most i m por tantl y, the ver b i n the questi on m ust be i n pr esent tense, because
the questi on ask s i f som ethi ng i s tr ue i n general and not just i n your
ex per i m ents. Appr opr i ate uses of ver b tenses and al so of ver bs that m ake
hy potheti cal statem ents ar e l i sted bel ow :
Ve rb Te ns e Sta te me nt Ex a mple
Pr esent or U nk now n “X is
pr esent unk now n.”
per f ect “X ha s not
be e n
de te rmine d. ”
P. 121
P. 122
In Intr oducti ons of hy pothesi stesti ng paper s, tel l the stor y of w her e
the questi on cam e f r om .
U se the techni ques of conti nui ty and topi c sentences as needed to tel l
the stor y.
State (or str ongl y i m pl y ) the unk now n, so that w hat i s new about the
w or k i s ev i dent.
If necessar y, state the ex per i m ental appr oach af ter the questi on.
Do not state the answ er to the questi on i n the Intr oducti on.
Make sur e the questi on i ncl udes both the i ndependent var i abl e and
the dependent var i abl e, w her e appr opr i ate.
Put a si gnal of the questi on at the begi nni ng of the sentence.
If the study desi gn was r etr ospecti ve, use the w or d “r etr ospecti ve” i n
the ex per i m ental appr oach or i n the si gnal of the questi on.
In the ex per i m ental appr oach i f the questi on i s not l i m i ted to the
ani m al studi ed.
In Intr oducti ons of descr i pti ve paper s, the stor y can have onl y tw o steps:
k now n, m essage.
The r el ati on betw een the k now n and the m essage, and thus w hat i s new about
the w or k , shoul d be cl ear, f or ex am pl e, that the m essage ex tends or contrasts
w i th w hat i s k now n.
P. 123
Introduc tion 1
Hi de Answ er
Introduc tion 1
Stre ngths
The outstandi ng str ength of thi s Intr oducti on i s i ts Law r ence of Arabi a
openi ng. Thi s openi ng awakens i nter est by usi ng concr ete w or ds that
evoke pow er f ul m ental i m ages: cam el s, gazel l es, hot deser ts,
bur r ow, deser t sun.
W e a k ne s s e s
I. The l ogi cal r el ati on betw een sentences H and I i s not stated.
At m i ni m um , H and I shoul d be i n one sentence begi nni ng w i th
“Because.” For f ul l er di spl ay s of l ogi c, see sentence F of
Rev i si on 1 and sentence E of Rev i si on 2.
Re vis ion 1
AThe ex i stence of cam el s, antel ope, and other ungul ates i n hot
deser ts has l ong f asci nated phy si ol ogi sts, because, unl i ke r odents,
ungul ates ar e too l ar ge to escape the sun by bur r ow i ng or by f i ndi ng
shade. BThus, ex ter nal heat l oads pose m ajor pr obl em s of
tem peratur e r egul ati on f or them (f or a r ev i ew, see r ef. 1).
CHow ever, i nter nal heat l oads m ay pose even gr eater pr obl em s of
tem peratur e r egul ati on. DFor ex am pl e, a ty pi cal deser t antel ope, the
gazel l e, r unni ng at 70 k m /h pr oduces heat at 40 ti m es i ts basi c
m etabol i c rate (2). EHow antel ope cope w i th thi s ex tra heat i s
unk now n. FBecause the hi gh speeds ar e usual l y of shor t durati on, i t
i s possi bl e that antel ope m i ght stor e heat w hi l e r unni ng and then
di ssi pate i t dur i ng per i ods of r el ati ve i nacti v i ty . GHeat storage,
though, w oul d r equi r e phy si ol ogi c m echani sm s f or copi ng w i th hi gh
body tem peratur e, such as pr ef er enti al pr otecti on of nor m al brai n
tem peratur e.
The ex per i m ental appr oach f or each questi on i s stated (H, I).
Re vis ion 2
AIn or der f or cam el s, antel opes, and other ungul ates to sur v i ve i n hot
deser ts, they m ust be abl e to r egul ate thei r body tem peratur es.
BAl though m ost w or k on the r egul ati on of body tem peratur e i n deser t
ungul ates has been concer ned w i th ex ter nal heat l oads (see r ef. 1 f or
a r ev i ew ), i nter nal heat l oads m ay al so pose pr obl em s f or
tem peratur e r egul ati on. CFor ex am pl e, one ty pe of deser t antel ope,
the gazel l e, r unni ng at hi gh speed (70 k m /h) pr oduces heat at 40
ti m es i ts basi c m etabol i c rate (2). DIt i s not cl ear how antel ope deal
w i th thi s heat l oad. EBecause hi ghspeed r unni ng usual l y occur s i n
shor t bur sts, and because di ssi pati on of thi s i nter nal l y pr oduced heat
i s l i m i ted by the hi gh am bi ent tem peratur e, i t seem s possi bl e that
the antel ope m i ght al l ow i ts body tem peratur e to r i se rather than
di ssi pate thi s heat. FIf body tem peratur e does r i se, m ai ntenance of
the brai n at a l ow er tem peratur e than the r est of the body w oul d be
i m por tant si nce the brai n i s k now n to be m or e sensi ti ve to hi gh
tem peratur es than ar e the other or gans. GTo deter m i ne w hether body
tem peratur e r i ses i n r unni ng antel opes and, i f so, w hether brai n
tem peratur e r i ses equal l y, w e m easur ed both brai n and body
tem peratur es i n antel opes r unni ng at hi gh am bi ent tem peratur es.
COMMEN TS ON REVISION 2
Al though both of the r ev i si ons f unnel to the questi ons cl ear l y and
state the questi ons and the ex per i m ental appr oach cl ear l y , nei ther i s
as l i v el y as the or i gi nal v er si on, so ther e i s sti l l r oom f or
i m pr ov em ent. Rev i si on 1 has shor t sentences and k eeps som e of the
concr ete i m ages of the or i gi nal v er si on (cam el s, hot deser ts,
bur r ow i ng, sun), but om i ts other s (or y x es, gazel l es, bur sts) and adds
som e heav y abstr act w or ds (per i ods of r el ati v e i nacti v i ty , phy si ol ogi c
m echani sm s, pr ef er enti al pr otecti on). Rev i si on 2 cl ear l y di spl ay s the
thi nk i ng l eadi ng to the questi ons but i s dul l because of abstr act w or ds
(ungul ates, hi gh am bi ent tem per atur e, m ai ntenance) and l ong
sentences (f our of the si x sentences hav e m or e than 30 w or ds). Thus,
al though the r ev i si ons ar e m or e r i gor ous than the or i gi nal v er si on,
they do not r ef l ect the ex ci tem ent of sci enti sts f asci nated by thei r
w or k that i s so appeal i ng i n the or i gi nal v er si on.
P. 124
Introduc tion 2
3. FAc c umula ting e vide nc e de mons tra te s tha t the a poE4 a lle le (ε 4) is
s pe c ific a lly a s s oc ia te d w ith s pora dic a nd fa milia l la te ons e t
Alzhe ime r's dis e a s e a nd is a ma jor ris k fa c tor for the dis e a s e (13–
16). G In a c c ord w ith the s e findings , a poE immunore a c tivity is
a s s oc ia te d w ith both the a myloid pla que s a nd the intra c e llula r
ne urofibrilla ry ta ngle s s e e n in pos tmorte m e x a mina tions of bra ins
from Alzhe ime r's dis e a s e pa tie nts (17, 18). H The me c ha nis m by w hic h
a poE4 might c ontribute to Alzhe ime r's dis e a s e is unk now n. I How e ve r,
our re c e nt da ta de mons tra ting tha t a poE4 s tunts the outgrow th of
ne urite s from dors a l root ga nglion (DRG ) ne urons s ugge s t tha t a poE
ma y ha ve a dire c t e ffe c t on ne urona l de ve lopme nt or re mode ling (19,
20). J In a n e x te ns ion of the s e pre vious s tudie s , w e ha ve now
e x a mine d the e ffe c ts of the a poE is oforms on ne urite outgrow th a nd
on the c ytos k e le ton of Ne uro2a c e lls , a murine ne urobla s toma c e ll
line . K Apolipoprote in E4 inhibits ne urite outgrow th from the s e c e lls ,
a nd this is oforms pe c ific e ffe c t is a s s oc ia te d w ith de polyme riza tion of
mic rotubule s .
Hi de Answ er
Stre ngths
W e a k ne s s e s
Re vis ion
has cy stei ne at both of these posi ti ons (1, 12). E” ApoE4 has
ar gi ni ne at both (1, 12).
COMMEN TS
Other changes:
HA new par agr aph em phasi zes the nex t step i n the stor y
(an unk now n).
J The si gnal of the questi on i ndi cates that thi s study tak es a
step tow ar d i denti f y i ng the m echani sm of Al zhei m er 's
di sease, w hi ch i s the ul ti m ate questi on. A pr eci se
statem ent of the i m m edi ate questi on addr essed i n thi s
study r epl aces the statem ent of w hat ex per i m ent w as done.
The questi on l i nk s r em odel i ng w i th i nhi bi ti ng r ather than
m ak i ng these poi nts par al l el .
P. 125
Introduc tion 3
Hi de Answ er
Stre ngths
The f unnel to the questi ons i s cl ear (f unnel , para. 1; questi ons,
para. 3).
The general questi on i ncl udes both the i ndependent var i abl e
(al k al osi s) and the dependent var i abl e (constr i cti on of the
pul m onar y ci r cul ati on).
The ani m al (new bor n rabbi ts) and the m ater i al (i sol ated,
per f used l ungs) ar e stated i n the ex per i m ental appr oach (K).
W e a k ne s s e s
Thi s Intr oducti on i s too l ong. The detai l s (tr ees) over shadow the
stor y (f or est).
In par agr aph 2, G and H say about the sam e thi ng, so G or H
can be om i tted.
In par agr aph 3, the f i r st thr ee speci f i c questi ons (J) ar e r eal l y
ex per i m ental appr oach (see K–L) and ther ef or e can be om i tted.
The answ er (N ) does not answ er the questi on asked. In the answ er,
the sequence of ex posur es to the sti m ul i (al k al osi s and hy pox i a) i s
the i ndependent var i abl e, but i n the questi on onl y al k al osi s i s the
i ndependent var i abl e. Al so, the questi on does not m atch the ti tl e,
though the answ er does. Si nce i t i s not cl ear w hat the questi on i s,
the Intr oducti on does not pr epar e the r eader adequatel y to
under stand the r est of the paper.
The statem ent of the i m por tance (para. 2) i nter r upts the f l ow of
thought betw een the f unnel (para. 1) and the questi ons (para. 3).
Re vis ion
COMMEN TS
The r ev i si on has been r eor gani zed to begi n w i th the i m por tance.
Thus, the questi ons com e di r ectl y af ter the f unnel .
Chapter 5
Materials and Methods
FUNCTION
For hy pothesi stesti ng paper s, the f uncti on of the Mater i al s and Methods secti on
(of ten r ef er r ed to as the Methods secti on) i s to tel l the r eader w hat
ex per i m ents you di d to answ er the questi on posed i n the Intr oducti on.
Si m i l ar l y, f or descr i pti ve studi es, the Methods secti on tel l s w hat ex per i m ents
you di d to obtai n the m essage stated i n the Intr oducti on. For m ethods paper s,
the Methods secti on has tw o f uncti ons: i t descr i bes the new m ethod i n com pl ete
detai l and al so tel l s w hat ex per i m ents you di d to test the new m ethod. For al l
ty pes of paper, the Methods secti on shoul d i ncl ude suf f i ci ent detai l and
r ef er ences to per m i t a trai ned sci enti st to eval uate your w or k f ul l y or to r epeat
the ex per i m ents ex actl y as you di d them .
STORY LINE
HypothesisTesting and Descriptive Papers
We saw that the f i r st step i n the stor y l i ne of a hy pothesi stesti ng or a
descr i pti ve paper i s pr esented i n the Intr oducti on. Thi s f i r st step i s ei ther the
questi on bei ng asked or the str uctur e bei ng descr i bed. In ei ther case, the
second step i n the stor y l i ne i s an over v i ew of the ex per i m ents you di d. Thi s
over v i ew of the ex per i m ents gi ves the strategy of the ex per i m ents, the pl an
that connects the m ethods to each other and to the questi on or the m essage.
P. 128
Methods Papers
For a Methods paper, the f i r st step i n the stor y l i ne i s a statem ent that you ar e
pr esenti ng a new or i m pr oved m ater i al , m ethod, or apparatus. The second step
i n the stor y l i ne has tw o par ts: a com pl ete descr i pti on of the new m ethod,
m ater i al , or apparatus; and a descr i pti on of how thi s new m ethod, m ater i al , or
apparatus was tested. These tw o steps ar e descr i bed i n the Methods secti on.
In thi s chapter, w e w i l l consi der onl y Methods secti ons f or hy pothesi stesti ng
and descr i pti ve paper s.
CONTENT
The Mater i al s and Methods secti on of a hy pothesi stesti ng paper i s essenti al l y a
cook book . Thus, the m ai n content of the Mater i al s and Methods secti on i s a
detai l ed descr i pti on of the m ater i al s and m ethods you used. In addi ti on, i n
hy pothesi stesti ng paper s i n w hi ch al l the ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance,
the Mater i al s and Methods shoul d al so i ncl ude an over v i ew of the ex per i m ents
done to answ er the questi on. Thi s over v i ew i s k now n as the study desi gn.
The pr i m ar y content of the Mater i al s and Methods secti on consi sts of the
f ol l ow i ng i nf or m ati on:
Materials
Chem i cal s (dr ugs, cul tur e m edi a, buf f er s, gases)
What was ex am i ned (ex per i m ental m ater i al s, ex per i m ental ani m al s, or
hum an subjects)
Methods
Essenti al i nf or m ati on:
In w hat or der
How you di d i t
Why you di d i t
Pr eparati on
The Methods secti on does not i ncl ude r esul ts. How ever, i nter m edi ate r esul ts,
that i s, r esul ts used i n cal cul ati ons done to obtai n r esul ts that answ er the
questi on, can be i ncl uded i n the Methods secti on. Putti ng i nter m edi ate r esul ts
i n Methods i s a better choi ce than putti ng them i n Resul ts because i nter m edi ate
r esul ts ar e m or e r el evant to m ethods than to r esul ts.
P. 129
Materials
Drugs
For dr ugs, state the gener i c nam e, m anuf actur er, pur i ty, and concentrati on. If
the dr ug i s i n sol uti on, gi ve the sol vent, pH, tem peratur e, total vol um e i nf used,
and rate of i nf usi on, i f appr opr i ate. State the am ount of dr ug adm i ni ster ed per
k i l ogram of body w ei ght and the durati on of the i njecti on. If the dr ug i s pl aced
i n an or gan bath or r eser voi r, cal cul ate i ts concentrati on i n f l ui d.
Gases
For gases, state the com ponents and thei r concentrati ons. Al so state the f l ow
rate, i f appr opr i ate.
Experimental Materials
If you studi ed a m ol ecul e, cel l l i ne, ti ssue, etc., speci f y i t.
Animals
For ani m al s, state the speci es and w ei ght, and al so the strai n, sex , and age, i f
they ar e i m por tant. Gi ve detai l s of sedati on and anesthesi a: agent used,
am ount, r oute, adm i ni strati on (si ngl e, r epeated, or conti nuous), depth of
anesthesi a and how i t was assessed. If anestheti cs w er e not used, state the
r easons. State that the r esear ch was appr oved by the appr opr i ate com m i ttee at
your i nsti tuti on.
Human Subjects
For hum an subjects, gi ve enough i nf or m ati on about age, sex , race, hei ght,
w ei ght, state of heal th or di sease, and speci f i c m edi cal and sur gi cal
m anagem ent to be of use to r esear cher s w ho want to com par e your data w i th
thei r s or other peopl e's, or to cl i ni ci ans w ho want to see i f your f i ndi ngs ar e
appl i cabl e to thei r pati ents. Much of thi s i nf or m ati on can be pr esented i n
tabl es. These tabl es shoul d be ci ted i n the Methods secti on, not i n the Resul ts
secti on. Tel l how the subjects w er e sel ected. State that the r esear ch was
appr oved by the appr opr i ate com m i ttee at your i nsti tuti on.
Methods
What You Did
Study Design
For hy pothesi stesti ng r esear ch i n w hi ch al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n
advance, i ncl udi ng phy si ol ogy studi es, cl i ni cal studi es, and som e bi ochem i str y
studi es, the over v i ew of the ex per i m ents shoul d be gi ven i n a separate
subsecti on of Methods, cal l ed “Study Desi gn.” (The Study Desi gn
P. 130
subsecti on i s al so cal l ed “Pr otocol ,” “Ex per i m ental Pr otocol ,” “Ex per i m ental ,”
and “Ex per i m ental Desi gn.” “Pr otocol ” i s an unf or tunate headi ng because to
m ost r eader s “pr otocol ” i m pl i es cook book , and that i s ex actl y w hat the
over v i ew of the ex per i m ent you di d to answ er your questi on i s not. )
Orde r
Dura tion
Sa mple s ize (n) (unl ess stated i n a di f f er ent subsecti on of the Methods
secti on, such as Ani m al s, Subjects, Data Anal y si s)
P. 131
2. IAf ter com pl eti on of the ex per i m ent, the ew e and f etus w er e k i l l ed w i th
separate i njecti ons of bar bi turate. JAt postm or tem ex am i nati on, each f etus
was car ef ul l y w ei ghed and ex am i ned f or pr oper pl acem ent of the
el ectr om agneti c f l ow transducer and catheter s and patency of the l ef t
pul m onar y ar ter y. KIn addi ti on, the f l ow transducer and the tracheal and
vascul ar catheter s w er e conf i r m ed to be i n pr oper posi ti on i n al l f etuses.
LTher e was no f i br osi s or constr i cti on of the pul m onar y ar ter y pr esent at
the postm or tem ex am i nati on f or any f etal sheep.
Questi on (sentence A)
Indi cates the or der of the m easur em ents (m ost si m ul taneous; som e ever y
30 m i n) (E–G).
Indi cates the durati on of the i nter venti ons and the m easur em ents (C, E–
G).
Of ten the ex per i m ental appr oach i s br i ef—just nam i ng the ani m al studi ed
(Chapter 4, Ex am pl e 4. 4), or nam i ng the ty pe of ex per i m ents, such as
substi tuti ng one gene f or another (Ex am pl e 4. 2), or nam i ng a speci al techni que,
such as a new bi of eedback m ethod (Ex am pl e 4. 3). In these cases, over l ap
betw een the Study Desi gn and the ex per i m ental appr oach i s m i ni m al . Other
ti m es the ex per i m ental appr oach gi ves a m or e com pl ete over v i ew of the
ex per i m ents, i ncl udi ng the i ndependent var i abl e, the dependent var i abl e, and
the contr ol s of the i ndependent var i abl e. In these cases, the Study Desi gn and
the ex per i m ental appr oach over l ap a l ot. How ever, the Study Desi gn i s al way s
m or e ex tensi ve than even the m ost com pl ete ex per i m ental appr oach, because
the Study Desi gn i ncl udes speci f i c detai l s (f or ex am pl e, of ti m i ng and doses),
w hi ch ar e not i ncl uded i n the ex per i m ental appr oach. Thus, a Study Desi gn
subsecti on i n Methods i s al way s necessar y i n hy pothesi stesti ng paper s i n w hi ch
al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance, so that the r eader has a com pl ete
pi ctur e of the strategy you used to answ er your questi on.
P. 132
For a l ess w el l k now n m ethod or apparatus, state the essenti al f eatur es and
gi ve the r ef er ence, as i n Ex am pl e 5. 3.
In Ex am pl e 5. 4, the m odi f i cati on i s “usi ng 1% sodi um dodecy l sul f ate” and the
pur pose of the m odi f i cati on i s “to r educe i nter f er ence by l i pi ds.”
For a new m ethod or apparatus, pr esent a com pl ete descr i pti on so that the
r eader can eval uate or use the m ethod or apparatus w i th f ul l under standi ng of
how i t w or k s.
Analysis of Data
State how you cal cul ated der i ved var i abl es (such as pul m onar y vascul ar
r esi stance) ei ther i n Methods of Measur em ent and Cal cul ati on or i n Anal y si s of
Data.
State how you sum m ar i zed your data. For thi s statem ent, pr ov i de the r eader
w i th i nf or m ati on about both the m agni tude of the data (w hat stati sti ci ans cal l a
m easur e of central tendency ) and the var i abi l i ty. What i nf or m ati on you gi ve to
sum m ar i ze the m agni tude and the var i abi l i ty of your data depends on w hether
the data com e f r om a nor m al di str i buti on or a skew ed di str i buti on.
When the data seem to have been draw n f r om a nor m al di str i buti on (or, at
l east, ar e di str i buted sy m m etr i cal l y about the m ean), i t i s r easonabl e to use
the
P. 133
m ean and standar d dev i ati on (SD) to sum m ar i ze the data. The m ean pr ov i des a
descr i pti on of the overal l m agni tude of the data. The standar d dev i ati on
pr ov i des a m easur e of the var i abi l i ty i n the sam pl e. Peopl e of ten use the m ean
and the standar d er r or of the m ean (SEM) (w hi ch equal s the standar d dev i ati on
di v i ded by the squar e r oot of the sam pl e si ze) to sum m ar i ze data. But usi ng the
m ean and the standar d er r or of the m ean i s general l y not a good way to
sum m ar i ze data f or tw o r easons. One r eason i s that the standar d er r or of the
m ean does not i ndi cate the var i abi l i ty i n the sam pl e (as an esti m ate of the
var i abi l i ty i n the under l y i ng popul ati on); rather, the standar d er r or of the m ean
quanti f i es the uncer tai nty i n the esti m ate of the tr ue m ean (that i s, the m ean
of the under l y i ng popul ati on). Another r eason not to use the standar d er r or of
the m ean to sum m ar i ze data i s that m any r eader s do not k now the di f f er ence
betw een the standar d er r or of the m ean and the standar d dev i ati on. When
these r eader s see a standar d er r or of the m ean, they m i si nter pr et i t as
i ndi cati ng the var i abi l i ty i n the sam pl e. To avoi d the chance of thi s
m i si nter pr etati on, i t i s cl ear est to use the m ean and standar d dev i ati on (w hi ch
does i ndi cate the var i abi l i ty i n the sam pl e) to sum m ar i ze data.
For stati sti cal anal y si s, state the stati sti cal tests that you used and, f or tests
that ar e not w el l k now n, al so gi ve a r ef er ence to the r epor t or book that
descr i bes the tests as you used them . Wel l k now n tests that do not need to be
r ef er enced i ncl ude Student's t test, chi squar e, standar d f or m s of anal y si s of
var i ance, l i near r egr essi on, cor r el ati on, and w i del y used nonparam etr i c tests
such as the Wi l coxon si gnedrank test.
Except w hen usi ng the si m pl est of stati sti cal m ethods (such as the t test), i f
you used a com puter pr ogram to anal y ze your data, state w hi ch pr ogram
(i ncl udi ng ver si on or r el ease num ber ) and w hi ch nondef aul t opti ons you used.
Pr ov i de a r ef er ence.
State w hi ch m easur em ents the stati sti cal tests you used com par e w i th each
other.
If the si ze of the sam pl e anal y zed f or each com par i son (n) i s not obv i ous f r om
the Study Desi gn, state the sam pl e si ze i n the Anal y si s of Data subsecti on.
State the P val ue at w hi ch you consi der ed di f f er ences stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant.
In addi ti on, gi ve speci f i c P val ues i n f i gur e l egends, f ootnotes to tabl es, or the
Resul ts secti on, w her e each P val ue can be l i nked w i th the r el evant data.
Data ar e sum m ar i zed as m ean ± SD. 1 To anal y ze the data stati sti cal l y, w e
per f or m ed a oneway anal y si s of var i ance 2 f or r epeated m easur em ents of the
sam e var i abl e. 3 We then used Dunnett's m ul ti pl e range t test (10) 4 to
deter m i ne w hi ch m eans w er e si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent f r om the m ean of the
contr ol per i ods. 3 We consi der ed di f f er ences si gni f i cant at P < 0. 05. 5
P. 134
Footnotes
1 How the data w er e sum m ar i zed
Preparation
Pr eparati on consi sts of pr ocedur es done bef or e the ex per i m ents can be done. In
phy si ol ogy ex per i m ents, f or ex am pl e, pr eparati on of ten i ncl udes anesthesi a and
i nser ti on of catheter s. For ex am pl es, see Ex am pl e 5. 16 and Exer ci ses 5. 1 and
5. 2 at the end of thi s chapter.
Assumptions
If your ex per i m ental desi gn i s based on assum pti ons, state the assum pti ons and
your r easons f or bel i ev i ng that they ar e val i d. If your r easons ar e l engthy, they
can be pr esented i n the Di scussi on (see Chap. 7, Ex am pl e 7. 10).
Indicators
If you assessed an i ndi cator of a var i abl e, m ake cl ear w hat var i abl e i t i s an
i ndi cator of. For ex am pl e, “We i nf used bl ood i nto the super i or and i nf er i or
venae cavae at about 25 m l /k g over 2 m i n unti l m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e, our
i ndi cator of pr el oad, i ncr eased by about 100%.” Then i n the r est of the Methods
secti on, tal k about m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e, not about pr el oad. If you
i denti f i ed the i ndi cator i n the Intr oducti on, you do not have to i denti f y i t agai n
i n Methods.
Example 5.6
The m ater i al was el uted i n 5 m M Tr i s HCl /100 m M N aCl , pH 7. 40, to s e pa ra te
col l agenaser esi stant f ragm ents f r om i ntact sur f actant pr otei n A.
Example 5.7
For pr i m ar y cul tur e, the cel l s w er e r esuspended i n Dul becco's m odi f i ed Eagl e's
m edi um contai ni ng 10% (vol /vol ) f etal bov i ne ser um and gentam i ci n (50
µg/m l ).
Example 5.8
Bov i ne ser um al bum i n (0. 1%, f racti on V) was i ncl uded i n the bi ndi ng m edi um
be c a us e al bum i n r educed adher ence of sur f actant pr otei n A to m i cr ocentr i f uge
tubes and ti ssue cul tur e pl asti c war e but di d not al ter the bi ndi ng of sur f actant
pr otei n A to l ung cel l s.
P. 135
Example 5.9
Radi ol abel ed sur f actant pr otei n A was used w i thi n 2–3 w eek s af ter the
i odi nati on; storage f or l onger per i ods of ti m e r educed bi ndi ng of pr otei n to
cel l s.
ORGANIZATION
Overall Organization
The natural or gani zati on of the Mater i al s and Methods secti on i s chr onol ogi cal
or der. In addi ti on, because Mater i al s and Methods i s a l ong secti on that
pr esents several di f f er ent ty pes of i nf or m ati on, Mater i al s and Methods i s
di v i ded i nto subsecti ons based on the ty pe of i nf or m ati on. These subsecti ons
ar e i n chr onol ogi cal or der. Each subsecti on has i ts ow n subheadi ng. For
hy pothesi stesti ng paper s that desi gn al l ex per i m ents i n advance, these
subheadi ngs ar e gener i c:
For any gi ven ani m al study or cl i ni cal study, som e subsecti ons i n Methods m ay
not be needed, so those subsecti ons, and thei r subheadi ngs, ar e om i tted. For
ex am pl e, the Mater i al s and the Ani m al s subsecti ons ar e om i tted i f ther e ar e not
enough detai l s to war rant a separate subsecti on. Instead, the detai l s ar e
i ncl uded i n Methods of Measur em ent and Sur gi cal Pr eparati on, r especti vel y. If
no pr eparati on (such as sur gi cal pl acem ent of catheter s) was done, the
Pr eparati on subsecti on and i ts subheadi ng ar e om i tted. Si m i l ar l y, i nter venti ons
m ay not need to be descr i bed i n m or e detai l than gi ven i n the Study Desi gn, so
the i nter venti ons subsecti on can be om i tted. Som eti m es, i ncl usi on and
excl usi on cr i ter i a can be com bi ned i nto a si ngl e subsecti on hav i ng a si ngl e
subheadi ng, or i ncl usi on and excl usi on cr i ter i a m ay be br i ef enough to i ncl ude
i n the Study Subjects subsecti on.
For hy pothesi stesti ng paper s i n w hi ch the r esul ts of one ex per i m ent deter m i ne
w hat the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l be, the subheadi ngs of the subsecti ons
P. 136
ar e speci f i c. The subheadi ngs nam e the speci f i c m ater i al or var i abl e w or ked on
or the speci f i c pr ocedur e done. Her e ar e tw o ex am pl es:
One P a pe r Anothe r P a pe r
P. 137
Subheadings
Subheadi ngs si gnal topi cs of subsecti ons, w hi ch can i ncl ude one or m or e
paragraphs.
Topic Sentences
Topi c sentences can be used to si gnal the topi c of a paragraph, especi al l y w hen
a subsecti on has m or e than one paragraph (Ex am pl e 5. 11).
Som eti m es none of these si gnal s i s used to i denti f y the topi c of a paragraph.
The topi c becom es appar ent f r om the subject and ver b. For ex am pl e, i n a
paragraph i n Pr eparati on begi nni ng “Dogs w er e anestheti zed,” the topi c of the
paragraph i s anesthesi a.
P. 138
Relationship of Parts
The ef f ect of hi ghf r equency venti l ati on on the di schar ge of the thr ee k now n
ty pes of pul m onar y r eceptor s was ascer tai ned as f ol l ow s. Af ter a si ngl e
af f er ent ner ve f i ber f r om a sl ow l y adapti ng pul m onar y str etch r eceptor, a
rapi dl y adapti ng pul m onar y r eceptor, or a pul m onar y Cf i ber was i denti f i ed,
r ecor di ngs w er e m ade f or 1–2 m i n dur i ng nor m al contr ol l ed venti l ati on w i th the
Har var d venti l ator. The dog was then venti l ated w i th the hi ghf r equency
venti l ator and af f er ent ner ve acti v i ty was r ecor ded sequenti al l y at thr ee m ean
ai r way pr essur es—l ow, i nter m edi ate, and hi gh (appr ox i m atel y 0. 5, 1. 0, and 1. 5
k Pa, r especti vel y )—unti l a steady state was r eached, usual l y 1–2 m i n.
To deter m i ne the ef f ect of betaadr ener gi c agoni sts on cl earance of l i qui d and
pr otei n f r om the l ungs, w e i nsti l l ed i nto one l ow er l obe ei ther ser um al one (si x
sheep), ser um m i xed w i th ter butal i ne (10 5 M, Gei gy, Sum m i t N J) (si x sheep),
or ser um m i xed w i th epi nephr i ne (5. 5 × 10 6 M, Am Qui ni ne, Shi r l ey N Y) (si x
sheep), and then m easur ed the var i abl es descr i bed i n the general pr otocol .
When ther e i s m or e than one questi on, r estate the appr opr i ate questi on at the
begi nni ng of each study desi gn, so that the r eader k now s w hi ch study desi gn
r el ates to w hi ch questi on. When r estati ng the questi on, be sur e to use the sam e
key ter m s, the sam e ver b, and the sam e poi nt of v i ew as i n the or i gi nal
questi on, so that the r eader can easi l y r ecogni ze that thi s questi on i s the sam e
questi on asked i n the Intr oducti on.
LENGTH
The Methods secti on shoul d be as l ong as necessar y to descr i be f ul l y and
accuratel y w hat was done and how i t was done. How ever, Methods shoul d be
w r i tten i n the f ew est w or ds possi bl e and shoul d not contai n f ussy detai l . What
consti tutes f ussy detai l depends on w hat the r eader s of the jour nal to w hi ch
you subm i t your paper can be ex pected to k now.
DETAILS
Animals
To ensur e that the r eader k now s w hat ani m al you studi ed, use the ani m al 's
nam e (f or ex am pl e, dog, cat) ever y ti m e, not the general ter m “ani m al .”
P. 139
Verb Tense
Methods ar e r epor ted i n past tense, f or ex am pl e, “w e m easur ed,” “catheter s
w er e i nser ted.” (Al so see ex am pl es above. )
How ever, to descr i be how data ar e pr esented i n the paper, use pr esent tense,
because thi s i nf or m ati on i s sti l l tr ue. For ex am pl e, “Data ar e sum m ar i zed as
m ean ± SD.”
Sample Size
When you have several di f f er ent sam pl e si zes (f or ex am pl e, f or subgr oups
w i thi n a gr oup), be sur e that the num ber s add up cor r ectl y thr oughout the
Methods secti on (and thr oughout the paper ). For ex am pl e, i f the Methods
secti on begi ns by say i ng that ex per i m ents w er e done on 39 rabbi ts and l ater
say s that 25 rabbi ts w er e tr eated w i th one dr ug and 13 rabbi ts w er e tr eated
w i th another dr ug, the r eader w onder s w hether one rabbi t was l ef t untr eated.
Or i f the Methods secti on say s that 11 rabbi ts w er e pr epar ed and then r epor ts
that 5 rabbi ts w er e used i n the f i r st ex per i m ent, 4 i n the second ex per i m ent,
and 6 i n the thi r d ex per i m ent, the r eader w onder s w hy 4 of the 15 w er e not
pr epar ed. If the author m eant that 5 of the 11 w er e used i n the f i r st
ex per i m ent, 4 of the 11 i n the second ex per i m ent, and 6 of the 11 i n the thi r d
ex per i m ent, that i s the way to descr i be them : “4 of the 11,” not “4.”
Information in Parentheses
In the Methods secti on, detai l s ar e of ten pl aced i n par entheses so that the f l ow
of i deas i n the sentence w i l l not be i nter r upted. Som e detai l s that ar e
com m onl y pl aced i n par entheses ar e w ei ghts of ani m al s or hum an subjects,
concentrati ons, doses, m anuf actur er s' nam es, and m odel num ber s. For
ex am pl e, “Hor se r ed bl ood cel l s (Col orado Ser um Com pany, Boul der ) w er e
washed thr ee ti m es i n 7 m l of 0. 9% N aCl bef or e use to r em ove pr eser vati ves.”
See al so Ex am pl e 5. 14, above. If i nstead detai l s ar e w r i tten bef or e the noun,
no par entheses ar e used. Com par e “10 m g ni tr ogl ycer i n” and “ni tr ogl ycer i n (10
m g).”
One paper i s equi val ent to one study, but i t can r epor t m any ex per i m ents,
ser i es of ex per i m ents, and gr oups of ani m al s or subjects, as show n i n Ex am pl e
5. 15.
Example 5.15
In thi s study , the ex per i m ents w er e or gani zed i nto tw o ser i es. In the f i r st
ser i es, w e m easur ed the l oss of 9µm di am eter m i cr ospher es f r om the l ungs;
i n the second ser i es, w e m easur ed the l oss of 9µm di am eter m i cr ospher es
f r om the l ef t ventr i cul ar myocar di um . Each ser i es of ex per i m ents was
per f or m ed on tw o gr oups of dogs, one gr oup anestheti zed w i th Innovar Vet and
a 75:25 m i x tur e of ni tr ous ox i de and ox ygen and the other gr oup anestheti zed
w i th hal othane.
Point of View
In the Methods secti on, the poi nt of v i ew can be ei ther that of the ex per i m ent
or that of the ex per i m enter.
If you choose the poi nt of v i ew of the ex per i m enter rather than the poi nt of
v i ew of the ex per i m ent, m any of your sentences w i l l begi n w i th “w e.” Begi nni ng
m any sentences w i th “w e” i s obnox i ous. Ther ef or e, i f you choose thi s poi nt of
v i ew, keep the num ber of “w e's” to a m i ni m um and var y the begi nni ngs of
sentences so that ver y f ew begi n w i th “w e.” To keep the num ber of “w e's” to a
m i ni m um , put al l the steps of a si ngl e pr ocedur e i n one sentence.
To m ake the “w e's” l ess pr om i nent, var y the begi nni ngs of the sentences. Begi n
som e sentences w i th a transi ti on w or d or phrase i ndi cati ng ti m e sequence:
P. 141
At a hi gher l evel of sophi sti cati on, you can w r i te som e subsecti ons f r om one
poi nt of v i ew and other subsecti ons f r om another poi nt of v i ew. For ex am pl e,
you can use “w e” i n the Study Desi gn, as i n the f i r st paragraph of Ex am pl e 5. 1
above, but not i n the Methods of Measur em ent, as i n Ex am pl e 5. 4. An
advantage of thi s choi ce i s that subsecti ons that ar e di f f i cul t to w r i te f r om one
poi nt of v i ew can be w r i tten f r om the other.
At the hi ghest l evel of sophi sti cati on, you can choose one poi nt of v i ew f or a
gi ven subsecti on but w r i te som e sentences f r om another poi nt of v i ew w hen you
have a speci f i c and obv i ous r eason. For ex am pl e, you can use the poi nt of v i ew
of the ex per i m enter (“w e”) f or sentences that m ove the stor y f or war d and the
poi nt of v i ew of the ex per i m ent f or sentences that do not m ove the stor y
f or war d, as i n Ex am pl e 5. 16. The advantage i s that the w r i ti ng i s sm ooth and
cl ear.
catheter and the bal l oon w er e used to m easur e per i car di al pr essur e. F The
catheter was al so used to i nject f l ui d i nto the per i car di al cav i ty. G We sutur ed
the i nci si on i n the per i car di um water ti ght and pl aced a second f l at bal l oon at
the l evel of the f i r st bal l oon on the outsi de of the per i car di um i n or der to
m easur e pl eural pr essur e. H We l ed al l thr ee tubes thr ough the thoracotomy
i nci si on. I Then w e i nser ted a chest tube thr ough a separate i nci si on and
advanced i t behi nd the ster num about 20 cm towar ds the di aphragm . J We
sutur ed both i nci si ons and connected the chest tube to a sucti on l i ne to r em ove
the ai r f r om the chest.
P. 142
Thi s paragraph i s w r i tten f r om the poi nt of v i ew of the ex per i m enter except f or
tw o pl aces: the f i r st sentence (to avoi d star ti ng w i th “w e”) and the tw o
sentences descr i bi ng the pur poses of the catheter and the bal l oon (E, F), w hi ch,
unl i ke the other sentences i n thi s paragraph, do not m ove the stor y f or war d.
The author has m ade an ef f or t to avoi d star ti ng ever y sentence w i th “w e”: of
the 10 sentences, 3 star t w i th nouns (under l i ned), 4 star t w i th “w e,” and 3
avoi d star ti ng w i th “w e” (under l i ned, i tal i cs). Thi s paragraph coul d easi l y have
been w r i tten w i thout any “w e's,” but i t w oul d have been l ess l i vel y.
Units of Measurement
The Inter nati onal Sy stem of U ni ts (Sy stèm e Inter nati onal d'U ni tés) (SI uni ts)
shoul d be used. For a l i st of SI uni ts and thei r abbr ev i ati ons, see r ef er ence
book s, such as the CBE Sty l e Manual (pp. 147–150), and ar ti cl es i n jour nal s,
such as Young's ar ti cl e i n Annal s of Inter nal Medi ci ne (1987).
P. 143
STORY LINE
In hy pothesi stesti ng paper s i n w hi ch al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance,
the Study Desi gn subsecti on of Methods gi ves an over v i ew of the second step of
the stor y of the paper : the ex per i m ents done to answ er the questi on.
CONTENT
Materials
Chem i cal s (dr ugs, cul tur e m edi a, buf f er s, gases).
Methods
Over v i ew of the ex per i m ents
For descr i pti ve r esear ch, the over v i ew of the ex per i m ents i s gi ven i n the
ex per i m ental appr oach at the end of the Intr oducti on.
For hy pothesi stesti ng r esear ch i n w hi ch one ex per i m ent deter m i nes w hat
the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l be, the over v i ew of the ex per i m ents i s gi ven i n
the ex per i m ental appr oach at the end of the Intr oducti on and then the
steps of the over v i ew ar e thr eaded thr ough the Resul ts secti on.
Incl ude:
Questi on
Al l contr ol s
Make cl ear :
Or der
Durati on
of the i nter venti ons
Anal y si s of data
P. 144
Pr eparati on
Indi cator s
In addi ti on, pur poses and r easons shoul d be i ncl uded f or any pr ocedur e w hose
r el ati on to the questi on of the paper i s not cl ear.
ORGANIZATION
Overal l
Subheadi ngs
Topi c sentences
LENGTH
Make the Methods secti on as l ong as necessar y to descr i be w hat you di d but do
not i ncl ude unnecessar y w or ds or f ussy detai l .
DETAILS
U se the nam e of the ani m al you studi ed (f or ex am pl e, dog, cat) thr oughout the
Methods secti on. Do not use the general ter m “ani m al .”
Make r el ati onshi ps betw een sam pl e si zes cl ear, f or ex am pl e by w r i ti ng, “In 4 of
the 11 rabbi ts” or “In 30 other subjects.”
P. 145
Di sti ngui sh betw een “m easur ed,” “cal cul ated,” and “esti m ated.” U se
“deter m i ned” w hen you need to descr i be tw o or m or e of these pr ocedur es
together.
Di sti ngui sh betw een “study ” and “ex per i m ent” and betw een “ser i es” and
“gr oup.”
P. 146
c. a ll c ontrols *
a. topic s e nte nc e
a. re pe a te d k e y te rm
c. c ons is te nt orde r
e. pa ra lle l form
6. In this Me thods s e c tion, ide ntify one e x a mple of orga niza tion of a
s ubs e c tion from mos t to le a s t importa nt.
P. 147
Topic
Te c hnique s of Continuity
P re pa ra tion
1 A Nine dogs (14–25 k g) w e re a ne s the tize d w ith thiope nta l s odium (25
mg/k g i. v. ) follow e d by c hlora los e (80 mg/k g i. v. ). B Supple me nta l dos e s
of c hlora los e (10 mg/k g i. v. ) w e re give n hourly to ma inta in a ne s the s ia .
C Thedogs w e re pa ra lyze d w ith de c a me thonium bromide (0. 1 mg/k g) 10
min be fore me a s ure me nts of tra c he a l s e c re tion.
Study De s ign
7 V Fina lly, to ve rify tha t s timula tion of pulmona ry Cfibe rs w a s re s pons ible
for the s e c re tions , w e me a s ure d s e c re tion in re s pons e to c a ps a ic in (10–20
µg/k g into the right a trium) in the 9 dogs
P . 149
be fore a nd a fte r bloc k ing c onduc tion in both of the c e rvic a l va gus ne rve s ,
w hic h c a rry the pulmona ry Cfibe rs . W W e bloc k e d c onduc tion e ithe r by
c ooling the ne rve s to 0° C a s de s c ribe d e ls e w he re (8) (4 dogs ) or by
c utting the ne rve s (5 dogs ). X Be fore the firs t bloc k ing e x pe rime nt on e a c h
dog, w e c ut the re c urre nt a nd pa ra re c urre nt ne rve s s o tha t the tra c he a l
s e gme nt re c e ive d its motor s upply s ole ly from the s upe rior la rynge a l
ne rve s (14). Y Cons e que ntly, w he n w e c oole d or c ut the midc e rvic a l va gus
ne rve s during a n e x pe rime nt, w e c ould be c e rta in tha t the c ha nge s in the
tra c he a l re s pons e s w e re c a us e d by inte rruption of the a ffe re nt va ga l C
fibe rs .
Me thods of Me a s ure me nt
Hi de Answ er
TOP IC + Signa l of the Topic
Te c hnique s of Continuity
Me thods
P re pa ra tion
N o topi c sentences.
2 DThe trachea was cannul ated l ow i n the neck , and the l ungs w er e
venti l ated w i th 50% ox ygen i n ai r by a Har var d r espi rator (m odel
613), w hose ex pi rator y outl et was pl aced under 3–5 cm of water.
EPer cent CO 2 i n the r espi r ed gas was m oni tor ed by a Beck m an LB1
gas anal y zer, and end ex pi rator y CO 2 concentrati on was kept at
about 5% by adjusti ng the venti l ator y rate. FAr ter i al bl ood sam pl es
w er e w i thdraw n per i odi cal l y and thei r PO 2 , PCO 2 , and pH w er e
deter m i ned by a bl ood gas/pH anal y zer (Cor ni ng 175). GSodi um
bi car bonate (0. 33 m eq/m l ) was i nf used i . v. (1–3 m l /m i n) w hen
necessar y to m i ni m i ze a base def i ci t i n the bl ood.
3 HThe chest was opened i n the m i dster nal l i ne and a c a the te r was
i nser ted i nto the l ef t atr i um v i a the l ef t atr i al appendage. ICa the te rs
w er e al so i nser ted i nto the r i ght atr i um v i a the r i ght jugul ar vei n and
i nto the abdom i nal aor ta v i a a f em oral ar ter y.
Study De s ign
Or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant (par as. 5–8) and
chr onol ogi cal l y (par as. 5–7).
6 TAl though c a ps a ic in sel ecti vel y sti m ul ates pul m onar y Cf i ber s f r om
w i thi n the pul m onar y ci r cul ati on, i t i s l i kel y to sti m ul ate other
af f er ent pathway s, i ncl udi ng br onchi al Cf i ber s, once i t passes i nto
the s ys te mic ci r cul ati on (2, 5). U To ver i f y that secr eti on i n our
ex per i m ents was not caused by s ys te mic ef f ects of c a ps a ic in, w e
nex t m easur ed secr eti on af ter i njecti ng c a ps a ic in (10–20 µg/k g) i nto
the l ef t atr i um and agai n, 30 m i n l ater, i nto the r i ght atr i um of al l 9
dogs.
7 VFi nal l y , to ver i f y that sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y Cfibe rs was
r esponsi bl e f or the secr eti ons, w e m easur ed secr eti on i n r esponse to
capsai ci n (10–20 µg/k g i nto the r i ght atr i um ) i n the 9 dogs bef or e
and af ter bloc k ing c onduc tion i n both of the cer v i cal va gus ne rve s ,
w hi ch car r y the pul m onar y Cf i ber s. WWe bloc k e d c onduc tion ei ther
by c ooling the ner ves to 0°C as descr i bed el sew her e (8) (4 dogs ) or
by c utting the ner ves (5 dogs ). XBef or e the f i r st bloc k ing
e x pe rime nt on each dog, w e cut the r ecur r ent and parar ecur r ent
ner ves so that the tracheal segm ent r ecei ved i ts m otor suppl y sol el y
f r om the super i or l ar y ngeal ner ves (14). YConsequentl y , w hen w e
c oole d or c ut the m i dcer v i cal va gus ne rve s dur i ng an e x pe rime nt,
w e coul d be cer tai n that the changes i n the tracheal r esponses w er e
caused by i nter r upti on of the af f er ent vagal Cfibe rs .
8 ZAs a f ur ther check on the ef f ects of sti m ul ati ng (and bl ock i ng)
pul m onar y Cf i ber s, i n each of these ex per i m ents, w e al so m easur ed
hear t rate, m ean ar ter i al pr essur e, and i som etr i c sm ooth m uscl e
tensi on of the tracheal segm ent, w hi ch ar e k now n to be al ter ed
r ef l ex i vel y by sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y Cf i ber s (3).
Me thods of Me a s ure me nt
10 GGHe a rt ra te , m ean a rte ria l pre s s ure , and is ome tric s mooth
mus c le te ns ion of the tracheal segm ent w er e r ecor ded conti nuousl y
thr oughout each ex per i m ent by a Grass pol ygraph. HHHe a rt ra te was
m easur ed by a car di otachom eter tr i gger ed by an el ectr ocar di ogram
(l ead II). IIArte ria l pre s s ure was m easur ed by a Statham P25Db
strai n gauge connected to the catheter pl aced i n a f em oral ar ter y.
JJIs ome tric s mooth mus c le te ns ion i n the segm ent was m easur ed
by a Grass FT03 f or ce di spl acem ent transducer attached to the l ateral
edge of the r etracted segm ent, as descr i bed el sew her e (1, 14).
N o topi c sentences.
11 KK Data ar e r epor ted as m eans ± SD. LLTo deter m i ne i f ther e w er e
s ignific a nt diffe re nc e s i n secr eti on bef or e and af ter sti m ul ati on
w i thi n each ex per i m ent, or si gni f i cant di f f er ences i n secr eti on
betw een the ex per i m ents, w e per f or m ed tw oway r epeatedm easur es
anal y si s of var i ance. MMWhen w e f ound a s ignific a nt diffe re nc e
betw een ex per i m ents, w e per f or m ed the Student N eum anKeul s test
to i denti f y pai r w i se di f f er ences. N N We consi der ed diffe re nc e s
s ignific a nt a t P < 0. 05.
Thi s Methods secti on i s di v i ded i nto f our subsecti ons, each si gnal ed
by a subheadi ng (Pr epar ati on, Study Desi gn, Methods of
Measur em ent, and Stati sti cal Anal y si s). Wi thi n each subsecti on,
topi cs ar e si gnal ed both v i sual l y (by new par agr aphs) and v er bal l y ,
and conti nui ty i s str ong. Topi c sentences ar e used i n onl y thr ee
par agr aphs: 7, 9, and 10. Sentence A i n par agr aph 1, f or ex am pl e, i s
not a topi c sentence. It i s the f i r st step of anesthesi a. A topi c
sentence w oul d hav e to say som ethi ng l i k e “Dogs w er e anestheti zed
accor di ng to our usual pr ocedur e. ”
The ex per i m ent done to answ er the questi on (par a. 5) i ncl udes f i v e
contr ol s: basel i ne (sentence Q) and sham (sentence R), and thr ee
v er i f i cati on contr ol s: v er i f i cati on that secr eti on w as not caused by
sy stem i c ef f ects of capsai ci n (par a. 6), v er i f i cati on that sti m ul ati on
of pul m onar y Cf i ber s w as r esponsi bl e f or secr eti ons (par a. 7), and
v er i f i cati on that sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y Cf i ber s af f ected other
v ar i abl es as ex pected (par a. 8). Som e r eader s m i ght not noti ce the
basel i ne contr ol because i t i s not i denti f i ed. To m ak e the basel i ne
contr ol m or e noti ceabl e, “(basel i ne)” coul d be added af ter “f or 60 s
bef or e” i n sentence Q.
N ote that the num ber of dogs i s stated f or the ex per i m ent and f or
each contr ol (sentences O, R, U , V).
Thus, w e can see that to k eep the stor y l i ne of the paper goi ng, thi s
Methods secti on f ocuses i n tw o w ay s on the m ethods that answ er the
questi on. One w ay i s by the or gani zati on of topi cs f r om m ost to l east
i m por tant: the ex per i m ent done to answ er the questi on com es bef or e
the contr ol s, and the m ethods f or dependent v ar i abl es that answ er
the questi on ar e descr i bed bef or e m ethods f or other dependent
v ar i abl es. The other w ay that thi s Methods secti on k eeps the stor y
l i ne goi ng i s by si gnal i ng the or gani zati on so that i t i s appar ent. The
v i sual si gnal s used ar e subheadi ngs and new par agr aphs. The v er bal
si gnal s used ar e tr ansi ti on phr ases (par as. 5–8 of the Study Desi gn
and par a. 11 of the Stati sti cal Anal y si s) and topi c sentences (par as. 9
and 10 of Methods of Measur em ent).
P. 151
a. Study De s ign
II. Inc lude both the inde pe nde nt a nd the de pe nde nt va ria ble s
in the ove rvie w .
b. Ca lc ula tions
Note s :
If you w a nt a n e x tra c ha lle nge , us e “ w e ” in your re vis ion. Try not to put
“ w e ” a t the be ginning of a s e nte nc e .
Be low is the pa rt of the Me thods s e c tion tha t a ddre s s e s this que s tion. A
dia gra m of the s tudy de s ign is a s follow s :
Ex pe rime nt
buf f er AA AA + i ndo
90 m i n 90 m i n 30 m i n 90 m i n
Sha m Control
90 m i n 90 m i n 30 m i n 90 m i n
P. 152
Topic
1 A Afte r the pre gna nt e w e s w e re give n s pina l a ne s the tic s , bre e dda te d
fe ta l la mbs be tw e e n 122 a nd 145 da ys of ge s ta tiona l a ge (te rm is 150
da ys ) w e re de live re d by c e s a re a n s e c tion a nd e x s a nguina te d. B The duc tus
a rte rios us w a s re move d from the la mb, dis s e c te d fre e of a dve ntitia l
tis s ue , a nd divide d into 1mmthic k rings . C The rings w e re pla c e d in gla s s
via ls c onta ining 4 ml of buffe r (50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7. 39, c onta ining 127 mM
Na Cl, 5 mM KCl, 2. 5 mM Ca Cl 2 , 1. 3 mM MgCl 2 • 6 H 2 O, a nd 6 mM gluc os e ) a t
in fre s h buffe r a nd inc uba te d a t 37° C for 90 min. F Afte r this , the buffe r
s olution w a s c olle c te d for me a s ure me nt of ba s e line pros ta gla ndin E 2
rings w e re w a s he d w ith fre s h buffe r for 30 min. I Fina lly, the rings w e re
pla c e d in fre s h buffe r c onta ining 0. 2 µg/ml a ra c hidonic a c id a nd 2 µg/ml
indome tha c in (Sigma ) (5. 6 µM) a nd inc uba te d for 90 min. J Afte r this
inc uba tion, the buffe r s olution w a s c olle c te d a ga in for me a s ure me nt of
pros ta gla ndin E 2 . K The rings of duc tus a rte rios us w e re blotte d dry a nd
w e ighe d (w e t w e ight). L The me a n w e ight w a s 22. 1 ± 8. 3 (SD) mg tis s ue
pe r e x pe rime nt.
pros ta gla ndin E 2 ra nge d from 50 to 70% . T P ros ta gla ndin E 2 produc tion is
re porte d a s pg/mg w e t w e ight pe r 90 min inc uba tion.
Hi de Answ er
The subheadi ngs shoul d be
Ma te ria ls
C Onthe day of each ex per i m ent, w e pr epar ed stock sol uti ons of
arachi doni c aci d (0. 33 m g/m l ) and i ndom ethaci n (16 m g/m l ) i n
ethanol . D To r ul e out any ef f ect of ethanol on pr ostagl andi n E 2
pr oducti on, w e i ncubated N r i ngs of ductus ar ter i osus i n f r esh buf f er
contai ni ng the m ax i m um concentrati on of ethanol . E Af ter a 90m i n
i ncubati on at 37°C, w e col l ected the buf f er and m easur ed
pr ostagl andi n E 2 . F Ethanol had no ef f ect on pr ostagl andi n E 2
pr oducti on (data not show n).
P re pa ra tion
Re vis ion 1
sol uti ons w i th ox ygen. E Bef or e begi nni ng the ex per i m ents, w e
al l ow ed the pr eparati on to stabi l i ze f or 45 m i n.
Re vis ion 2
Study De s ign
II. Both the i ndependent and the dependent v ar i abl es ar e i ncl uded
i n the ov er v i ew . The dependent v ar i abl e (pr oducti on of
pr ostagl andi n E 2 ) i s i denti f i ed as a cal cul ated v ar i abl e (C). The
m easur ed dependent v ar i abl e (pr ostagl andi n E 2 content) i s al so
i ncl uded i n the ov er v i ew (B).
III. Both contr ol s ar e i ncl uded i n the study desi gn. The basel i ne
contr ol i s m enti oned i n sentence D, w hi ch nam es the buf f er s.
The contr ol ser i es, w hi ch w as i n a separ ate par agr aph i n the
or i gi nal v er si on, i s i n sentence H.
IV. The pur pose of addi ng i ndom ethaci n (to bl ock endogenous
pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 2 ) i s added (sentence D).
Ca lc ula tions
cal cul ate per cent r ecover y (the am ount of pr ostagl andi n E 2 content
r etai ned dur i ng the pur i f i cati on pr ocess), w e added a k now n am ount
of 3 Hpr ostagl andi n E 2 to each buf f er sol uti on bef or e the pur i f i cati on
pr ocess and then com par ed the radi oacti v i ty m easur ed bef or e and
af ter pur i f i cati on. E Recover y of pr ostagl andi n E 2 ranged f r om 50 to
II. The detai l s ar e r eor gani zed i n chr onol ogi cal or der : f i r st a
pr el i m i nar y step (pur i f i cati on) (B); then deter m i nati on of the
tw o com ponents of the cal cul ati on: m easur em ent of content (C)
and cal cul ati on of r ecov er y (D), the sam e or der as i n the topi c
sentence. The l ast tw o sentences (per cent r ecov er y of
pr ostagl andi n E 2 and how pr ostagl andi n E 2 pr oducti on i s
r epor ted) ar e i n the or i gi nal or der .
III. Per cent r ecov er y i s def i ned i n sentence D. In addi ti on, the
detai l s of each step ar e pul l ed together i nto one sentence, and
the step i s i denti f i ed at the begi nni ng of the sentence (B–D).
Fi nal l y , “a k now n am ount” i s added i n sentence D to cl ar i f y the
cal cul ati on of r ecov er y .
Chapter 6
Results
FUNCTIONS
The f uncti on of the Resul ts secti on i s to state the r esul ts of the ex per i m ents
descr i bed i n the Mater i al s and Methods secti on. In addi ti on, the Resul ts secti on
di r ects the r eader to f i gur es or tabl es that pr esent suppor ti ng data.
STORY LINE
The Resul ts secti on conti nues the stor y l i ne i n di f f er ent way s i n the tw o ty pes
of hy pothesi stesti ng study. For hy pothesi stesti ng studi es i n w hi ch al l the
ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance, the Resul ts secti on descr i bes the thi r d
step i n the stor y l i ne: the r esul ts. For hy pothesi stesti ng studi es i n w hi ch the
r esul ts of one ex per i m ent deter m i ne w hat the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l be, the
Resul ts secti on descr i bes both the second and the thi r d steps i n the stor y l i ne:
the ex per i m ents done and the r esul ts f ound. For these studi es, ther e i s no
Study Desi gn subsecti on i n Methods. Thus, the second step i n the stor y l i ne
appear s i n di f f er ent secti ons of the paper f or these tw o ty pes of hy pothesi s
testi ng study :
Se c tion of the P a pe r
One Ex pe rime nt
Ste p in the Story All Ex pe rime nts De te rmine s the
Line De s igne d in Adva nc e Ne x t
The Resul ts secti ons of descr i pti ve studi es and of m ethods paper s ar e si m i l ar to
the Resul ts secti on of hy pothesi stesti ng studi es i n w hi ch al l the ex per i m ents
ar e desi gned i n advance. For descr i pti ve studi es, the Resul ts secti on states the
r esul ts of the ex per i m ents done to obtai n the descr i pti on of a par ti cul ar
str uctur e. Si m i l ar l y, f or m ethods paper s, the Resul ts secti on states the r esul ts
of the tests done to deter m i ne how w el l the new m ethod w or k s. The new
m ethod i tsel f i s descr i bed i n the Methods secti on.
In thi s chapter, w e w i l l consi der the Resul ts secti ons f or the tw o ty pes of
hy pothesi stesti ng studi es.
P. 155
CONTENT
What to Include in the Results Section
The pr i m ar y i nf or m ati on i n the Resul ts secti on i s r esul ts. How ever, not ever y
r esul t that you obtai ned f r om your ex per i m ents or obser vati ons needs to be
r epor ted i n the Resul ts secti on. The Resul ts secti on shoul d r epor t onl y r esul ts
per ti nent to the questi on posed i n the Intr oducti on. Resul ts shoul d be i ncl uded
w hether or not they suppor t your hy pothesi s. Both ex per i m ental and contr ol
r esul ts shoul d be i ncl uded.
In addi ti on to pr esenti ng r esul ts, the Resul ts secti on can i ncl ude a f ew data.
How ever, m ost data, and i n par ti cul ar the m ost i m por tant data, shoul d be
pr esented i n f i gur es or tabl es, w her e the data ar e hi ghl y v i si bl e and easy to
r ead.
N or m al l y, the Resul ts secti on does not i ncl ude statem ents that need to be
r ef er enced, such as com par i sons w i th other s' r esul ts. How ever, i f a br i ef
com par i son (one or tw o sentences) w oul d not f i t sm oothl y i nto the Di scussi on,
i t can be i ncl uded i n the Resul ts secti on.
Data can rar el y stand al one. The r esul t (= the m eani ng of the data) m ust be
stated. For ex am pl e, w hat i s the r eader supposed to thi nk af ter r eadi ng the tw o
sentences of data i n Ex am pl e 6. 1?
Ar e the data si m i l ar ? Di f f er ent? What i s the poi nt? The pur pose of the Resul ts
secti on i s to m ake the poi nt cl ear. To m ake the poi nt cl ear, state the r esul t f i r st
and then pr esent the data, as i n Rev i si on A bel ow, or (better ) ci te a f i gur e or a
tabl e.
The m ean r esti ng bl ood pr essur e was hi gher i n the 30 tenni s pl ayer s than i n the
20 contr ol subjects [94 ± 3 (SD) v s. 85 ± 5 m m Hg, P < 0. 02].
In Rev i si on A the poi nt i s cl ear : “was hi gher.” The sentence now states a r esul t.
The data ar e gi ven i n par entheses af ter the r esul t. (A P val ue f or
P. 156
stati sti cal si gni f i cance i s added to pr ov i de ev i dence that the di f f er ence was not
l i kel y to have occur r ed by chance. ) How ever, i n m ost cases, the data shoul d be
pr esented i n a f i gur e or a tabl e, as i n Ex am pl e 6. 7 bel ow, rather than i n the
tex t.
In addi ti on to si m pl y say i ng “was l ess than,” “was gr eater than,” “decr eased,”
or “i ncr eased,” you can, w hen appr opr i ate, gi ve a general i dea of the
m agni tude of a di f f er ence or a change by usi ng a per centage, as i n Rev i si on B.
Thi s statem ent of the r esul t (“was 10% hi gher ”) gi ves a si m pl er and ther ef or e
cl ear er i dea of the m agni tude of the di f f er ence than do the data al one (94 ± 3
v s. 85 ± 5 m m Hg).
Statistical Analysis
For nor m al l y di str i buted data that have been anal y zed stati sti cal l y, r epor t the
m ean and a stati sti c that esti m ates the var i ati on f r om the m ean [f or ex am pl e,
the standar d dev i ati on (SD) or the range], and speci f y w hi ch stati sti c you ar e
r epor ti ng. Al so gi ve the sam pl e si ze (n) and the pr obabi l i ty val ues f or tests of
stati sti cal si gni f i cance. (See the r ev i si ons of Ex am pl e 6. 1 above. )
For nonnor m al l y di str i buted data that have been anal y zed stati sti cal l y, r epor t
the m edi an and the i nter quar ti l e range (that i s, the range betw een the 25th and
the 75th per centi l es).
When r epor ti ng r esul ts of stati sti cal hy pothesi s tests, i t i s of ten usef ul to
r epor t 95% conf i dence i nter val s i n addi ti on to P val ues so that the r eader i s
better abl e to judge the bi ol ogi cal or cl i ni cal si gni f i cance of the r esul ts (see
Gl antz, Chap. 7, and Gar dner and Al tm an).
ORGANIZATION
The Resul ts secti on i s nor m al l y or gani zed chr onol ogi cal l y, i n the or der i n w hi ch
the ex per i m ents w er e done.
P. 157
Results
1. P ulmona ry Arte ry P re s s ure . A The pr eval ence of pul m onar y hy per tensi on
i n the sy stem i c l upus er y them atosus pati ents i ncr eased f r om 14% (5 of 36
pati ents) i n the f i r st study to 43% (12 of 28 pati ents) i n the second study,
done 5 year s l ater. B Si m i l ar l y, our i ndi cator of pul m onar y hy per tensi on,
m ean sy stol i c pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e, i ncr eased f r om a m ean of 23. 4
m m Hg i n the f i r st study to a m ean of 27. 5 m m Hg i n the second study (Fi g.
1). C In the second study, m ean sy stol i c pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e was
hi gher i n the l upus pati ents than i n the contr ol s (27. 5 v s. 22. 5 m m Hg, p <
0. 005). D Ri ght atr i al pr essur e, esti m ated f r om obser vati on of the vena
cava, was nor m al i n al l 28 l upus pati ents and al l 20 contr ol s.
2. E Ofthe 5 pati ents w ho had pul m onar y hy per tensi on at the f i r st study, 2
had di ed at the ti m e of the second study, 1 had per si stent pul m onar y
hy per tensi on, and 2 had nor m al i zed sy stol i c pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e.
F Of the 12 pati ents w ho had pul m onar y hy per tensi on at the second study,
11 had had nor m al pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e at the f i r st study. G The
m ean i ncr ease i n pul m onar y ar ter y sy stol i c pr essur e f or these 11 pati ents
was 9. 4m m Hg.
Thi s Resul ts secti on, f or w hi ch the enti r e ex per i m ent was desi gned i n
advance, i s or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant: f i r st the i ndi cator f or
the dependent var i abl e i n the questi on (paragraphs 1 and 2); then another
dependent var i abl e (paragraph 3).
Questi on
Resul ts
The questi on i n the f i r st paragraph of the Resul ts secti on i s the questi on of the
paper. The questi ons i n succeedi ng paragraphs ar e questi ons asked as steps
towar d answ er i ng the questi on of the paper.
The sequence of over v i ew s of the ex per i m ents r unni ng f r om the f i r st to the l ast
paragraph of the Resul ts secti on consti tutes the Study Desi gn.
The answ er stated af ter each r esul t l eads to the nex t questi on, thus tr i gger i ng
the nex t f our par t patter n (that i s, the nex t paragraph) of the Resul ts secti on.
An answ er at or near the end of the Resul ts i s the answ er to the questi on asked
i n the paper.
Thi s f our par t patter n i s a m i ni atur e ver si on of the stor y l i ne that r uns thr ough
the paper.
Questi on: Whether the nem atode gene ceh22 and the
ver tebrate gene nk x 2. 5 per f or m si m i l ar f uncti ons.
Ex per i m ental Ex am i nati on of the abi l i ty of the zebraf i sh nk x 2. 5
Appr oach: gene to substi tute f or the nem atode ceh22 gene i n
transgeni c Caenor habdi ti s el egans.
P. 159
Results
1. Ze bra fis h nk x 2. 5 Ca n Ac tiva te myo2 Ex pr essi on When Ex pr essed i n C.
el egans Body Wal l Muscl e. ATo deter m i ne w hether zebraf i sh nk x 2. 5 can
f uncti on si m i l ar l y to ceh22, w e ex pr essed nk x 2. 5 i n C. el egans body wal l
m uscl e and ex am i ned ex pr essi on of the endogenous m y o2 gene by
anti body stai ni ng. BThe rati onal e f or thi s appr oach was as f ol l ow s. CIn
w i l dty pe C. el egans, ceh22 i s ex pr essed excl usi vel y i n phar y ngeal
m uscl e, w her e i t acti vates ex pr essi on of the phar y ngeal m uscl especi f i c
myosi n heav y chai n gene m y o2 (14). DHow ever, ectopi c ex pr essi on of
ceh22 i n body wal l m uscl e can acti vate ex pr essi on of m y o2 (15).
EBecause m y o2 i s nor m al l y never ex pr essed i n body wal l m uscl e, thi s
ectopi c ex pr essi on assay pr ov i des a sensi ti ve test f or ceh22 f uncti on.
FWe generated tw o transgeni c l i nes ex pr essi ng an nk x 2. 5 cDN A under the
contr ol of the unc54 body wal l m uscl especi f i c pr om oter. GIn both l i nes,
w e detected m y o2 ex pr essi on i n the body wal l m uscl es (Fi g. 1A and B).
HThese r esul ts show that nk x . 2. 5 can f uncti on l i ke ceh22 to i nduce m y o
2 ex pr essi on.
In addi ti on, w i thi n each paragraph, other i nf or m ati on i s i ncl uded to m ake
the stor y l i ne cl ear : i n paragraphs 1 and 2, r easons f or the desi gn of the
ex per i m ent; i n paragraph 2 the pur pose of the contr ol ex per i m ent; i n
paragraph 3, back gr ound l eadi ng to the nex t questi on.
P. 160
EMPHASIS
In the Resul ts secti on, r esul ts shoul d be em phasi zed. Ver y di f f er ent techni ques
of em phasi s ar e used i n Resul ts secti ons of studi es i n w hi ch one ex per i m ent
deter m i nes w hat the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l be and Resul ts secti ons of studi es i n
w hi ch al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance.
In Ex am pl e 6. 3, the author s use these si gnal s, though not at the begi nni ng of
the sentence, so the si gnal s ar e not str ong: “In both l i nes, w e detected m y o2
ex pr essi on…” (sentence G); “In a transgeni c strai n bear i ng the unc54::nk x 2. 5
ex pr essi on constr uct, w e f ound a si gni f i cant i ncr ease i n the num ber of ani m al s
ex pr essi ng βgal actosi dase…” (sentence M).
Gr oup 1: Ser i al Dev el opm ent of Al v eol ar Hy pox i a Fol l ow ed by Al k al osi s. The
pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e i ncr eased to 65 ± 21 (SD) % above basel i ne dur i ng
hy pox i a but then decr eased to 37 ± 16% above basel i ne w hen al k al i was
i nf used i nto the l ungs of 12 rabbi ts. Si m i l ar l y, the pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e
i ncr eased to 41 ± 17% above basel i ne dur i ng hy pox i a but then decr eased to 21
± 13% above basel i ne w hen PICO 2 was decr eased (Fi g. 2). Thus, both m etabol i c
and r espi rator y al k al osi s decr eased the pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance af ter i t
had i ncr eased i n r esponse to hy pox i a.
P. 161
Gr oup 2: Ser i al Dev el opm ent of Al k al osi s Fol l ow ed by Al v eol ar Hy pox i a. The
basel i ne pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e decr eased f r om 9. 4 ± 1. 8 to 8. 4 ± 1. 5 cm
H 2 O w hen N aHCO 3 was i nf used and f r om 9. 0 ± 2. 1 to 7. 9 ± 1. 5 cm H 2 O w hen
PICO 2 was decr eased i n the l ungs of 20 rabbi ts. The pul m onar y ar ter y r esponse
to al veol ar hy pox i a at a pH of 7. 35–7. 42 was no di f f er ent f r om the r esponse to
al veol ar hy pox i a at a pH of 7. 50–7. 65 (Fi g. 3). These r esul ts w er e the sam e
r egar dl ess of w hether al k al osi s was i nduced by decr easi ng PICO 2 or by i nf usi ng
N aHCO 3 (Fi g. 3). Thus, al though both m etabol i c and r espi rator y al k al osi s
decr eased basel i ne pul m onar y r esi stance, they di d not decr ease constr i cti on of
the pul m onar y ar ter y i n r esponse to subsequent al veol ar hy pox i a.
Gr oup 3: Si m ul taneous Dev el opm ent of Al k al osi s and Al v eol ar Hy pox i a. The
pul m onar y ar ter y r esponse to al veol ar hy pox i a was si gni f i cantl y l ow er at a pH
of 7. 50–7. 65 than at a pH of 7. 35–7. 42 i n the l ungs of 8 rabbi ts (Fi g. 4). Thus,
si m ul taneous al veol ar hy pox i a and r espi rator y al k al osi s decr eased constr i cti on
of the pul m onar y ar ter y.
In thi s ex am pl e, onl y the l ast sentence of each paragraph r epor ts r esul ts. The
ear l i er sentences r epor t data that ar e show n i n f i gur es and can ther ef or e be
om i tted, except f or one sentence of basel i ne r esul ts and data. These data
shoul d be i n par entheses, as show n i n Rev i si on A.
Revision A
When m etabol i c or r espi rator y al k al osi s was i nduced af ter hy pox i a (12 rabbi ts),
pul m onar y ar ter y constr i cti on i n r esponse to hy pox i a was r educed (Fi g. 2). In
contrast, w hen m etabol i c or r espi rator y al k al osi s was i nduced bef or e hy pox i a
(20 rabbi ts), pul m onar y ar ter y constr i cti on i n r esponse to hy pox i a was not
r educed (Fi g. 3). How ever, basel i ne pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e decr eased
[f r om 9. 4 ± 1. 8 to 8. 4 ± 1. 5 (SD) cm H 2 O f or m etabol i c al k al osi s and f r om 9. 0
± 2. 1 to 7. 0 ± 1. 5 cm H 2 O f or r espi rator y al k al osi s]. When r espi rator y
al k al osi s and hy pox i a w er e i nduced si m ul taneousl y (8 rabbi ts), pul m onar y
ar ter y constr i cti on i n r esponse to hy pox i a was agai n r educed (Fi g. 4).
In the r ev i si on, r esul ts ar e pr om i nent. How ever, the over v i ew w oul d be cl ear er
i f r epeti ti on w er e avoi ded and si m i l ar r esul ts w er e r epor ted together, as i n
Rev i si on B. (For thi s r ev i si on to w or k , m etabol i c and r espi rator y al k al osi s
w oul d have to be i denti f i ed i n the f i gur es. )
Revision B
Pul m onar y ar ter y constr i cti on i n the rabbi ts was r educed w hen al k al osi s was
i nduced ei ther af ter (Fi g. 2) or dur i ng (Fi g. 4) hy pox i a, but not w hen al k al osi s
was i nduced bef or e hy pox i a (Fi g. 3). Basel i ne pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur e was
al ter ed onl y w hen al k al osi s was i nduced bef or e hy pox i a, decr easi ng f r om 9. 4 ±
1. 8 to 8. 4 ± 1. 5 (SD) cm H 2 O f or m etabol i c al k al osi s and f r om 9. 0 ± 2. 1 to 7. 0
± 1. 5 cm H 2 O f or r espi rator y al k al osi s.
P. 162
A sum m ar y of r enal f uncti on data i s pr esented i n Fi g. 2. Conti nuous posi ti ve
ai r way pr essur e (7. 5 cm H 2 O) i n new bor n goats decr eased ur i ne f l ow, sodi um
excr eti on, and the gl om er ul ar f i l trati on rate.
Revision
Conti nuous posi ti ve ai r way pr essur e (7. 5 cm H 2 O) i n new bor n goats decr eased
ur i ne f l ow, sodi um excr eti on, and the gl om er ul ar f i l trati on rate (Fi g. 2).
Fur ther m or e, to use an enti r e sentence to di r ect the r eader to the f i gur e i s
wastef ul . Al l that i s necessar y i s to ci te the f i gur e i n par entheses at the end of
the sentence that states the r esul t, as i n the r ev i si on.
P. 163
When ei ther ter butal i ne or epi nephr i ne was i nsti l l ed al ong w i th ser um i nto the
ai r spaces, the excess l ung water was si gni f i cantl y l ess than w hen ser um al one
was i nsti l l ed (Fi g. 1).
In thi s ex am pl e, the contr ol ser i es i s descr i bed by “w hen ser um al one was
i nsti l l ed,” and the contr ol data ar e gi ven al ong w i th the ex per i m ental data i n a
f i gur e.
Al ter nati vel y, r esul ts f or a contr ol ser i es can som eti m es be r epor ted af ter the
r esul ts f or the ex per i m ental ser i es.
Subordinate Methods
In the Resul ts secti on of studi es i n w hi ch al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n
advance, do not use a m ethods statem ent as a topi c sentence. The topi c
sentences i n these Resul ts secti ons shoul d state r esul ts. In Ex am pl e 6. 8, the
f i r st sentence (topi c sentence) states m ethods and the second sentence states
r esul ts.
Revision
Injecti on of 1 µg of i sopr oter enol i nto thr ee cats evoked a di f f er enti al i nhi bi tor y
r esponse, r el ax ati on bei ng gr eater w hen tensi on was i nduced by chol i ner gi c
neur otransm i ssi on or exogenous 5hydr ox y tr y ptam i ne than by exogenous
acety l chol i ne (Fi g. 5).
At l east tw o techni ques of sentence str uctur e ar e avai l abl e f or i ncl udi ng
m ethods i n sentences that state r esul ts. One techni que i s to m ake the m ethod
the subject of the sentence, as i n the r ev i si on of Ex am pl e 6. 8 above and i n
Ex am pl e 6. 9B bel ow. Other techni ques ar e to state the m ethod i n a transi ti on
phrase or cl ause and the r esul t i n the m ai n cl ause, as i n Ex am pl es 6. 9C and
6. 9D.
We a dminis te re d pr opranol ol dur i ng nor m al venti l ati on. Thi s betabl ocker
de c re a s e d phosphol i pi d (Fi g. 1).
P. 164
B. Me thod Subordina te d a s the Subje c t; Re s ult in the Ve rb + Obje c t
When pr opranol ol was adm i ni ster ed dur i ng nor m al venti l ati on,
phosphol i pi d de c re a s e d (Fi g. 1).
The poi nt i s that i n the Resul ts secti on, the m ai n ver bs (bol df aced i n the
ex am pl es above) shoul d descr i be r esul ts, not m ethods, so avoi d sentences that
state m ethods onl y, such as the f i r st sentence i n Ex am pl e 6. 9A. Hav i ng the
m ai n ver b descr i be r esul ts i s par ti cul ar l y i m por tant i n the topi c sentence.
N ote that thi s sam e strategy—stati ng the m essage and then gi v i ng the detai l s—
can be used i n the l ast sentence, to i ndi cate how the tw o patter ns di f f er.
Revision
ATw o di f f er ent patter ns of phosphol i pi d di str i buti on w er e obtai ned dependi ng on
the bi l e sam pl es. B The f i r st patter n, w hi ch was the one m ost f r equentl y
obser ved, had a m ai n peak of phosphol i pi ds i n the range of
P. 165
10 6 dal tons and a shoul der i n the range of 5 × 10 5 dal tons. C The second patter n
was the r ever se, hav i ng a m ai n peak of phosphol i pi ds i n the range of 5 × 10 5
dal tons and a shoul der i n the range of 10 6 dal tons.
The i dea i s to state the m essage so that the r eader cannot m i ss i t. In other
w or ds, i f you want the r eader to k now som ethi ng (her e, that the second patter n
i s the r ever se of the f i r st patter n), state i t; do not m ake the r eader guess.
LENGTH
Many author s thi nk of the Resul ts secti on as the hear t of the paper, so they tr y
to put the w hol e paper i nto the Resul ts secti on—m ethods, f i gur e l egends, tabl e
ti tl es, r esul ts, data, com par i sons w i th the l i teratur e—i n f act, ever y thi ng except
the Intr oducti on. Thi s tem ptati on shoul d be r esi sted. The Resul ts secti on shoul d
be as br i ef and uncl utter ed as possi bl e so that the r eader can see the f or est f or
the tr ees.
DETAILS
Subjects, Animals, and Material
The study subjects or the ani m al and the m ater i al (ti ssue, cel l l i ne, etc. ) used
i n the ex per i m ents shoul d be m enti oned at l east once i n the Resul ts secti on,
pr ef erabl y i n the f i r st sentence.
Verb Tense
Resul ts of hy pothesi stesti ng studi es and of tests of new m ethods i n m ethods
paper s ar e r epor ted i n past tense, because they ar e di scr ete events that
occur r ed i n the past. Ex am pl es ar e “Pul m onar y ar ter y constr i cti on w a s
re duc e d” and “Im i dazol e inhibite d the i ncr ease i n pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e
i nduced by l i pi d i nf usi on.”
Resul ts of descr i pti ve studi es ar e r epor ted i n pr esent tense, because the
descr i pti on conti nues to be tr ue. Ex am pl es ar e “In m ost ti ssues, the l epti n
r eceptor m RN A a ppe a rs as a si ngl e band sl i ghtl y l ar ger than 5 k b” and “Ty pe
III and IV r eceptor genes ha ve ex tra i ntr ons i n the ex tracel l ul ar dom ai n.”
P. 166
Comparisons
When com par i ng r esul ts, use “than,” not “com par ed w i th.” In par ti cul ar, avoi d
am bi guous statem ents such as “X was i ncr eased com par ed w i th Y.” Instead
w r i te “X was gr eater than Y,” “X i ncr eased m or e than Y,” “X i ncr eased but Y was
unchanged,” or w hatever you m ean (see Chap. 2, “Put Paral l el Ideas i n Paral l el
For m ”).
“Coul d not dem onstrate” i m pl i es that bi ndi ng si tes m ay have been ther e, but
the techni que was not sensi ti ve enough to detect them . “Ther e w er e no” i m pl i es
that no bi ndi ng si tes ex i st (so no m ethod w oul d be abl e to detect them ). Know
w hether you ar e tal k i ng about abi l i ty or actual i ty, and choose your ver b
accor di ngl y.
N ote the di f f er ence betw een “di d not i ncr ease” and “f ai l ed to i ncr ease.” “Fai l ed”
i m pl i es an a pr i or i ex pectati on that the val ue shoul d have i ncr eased. “Di d not”
i m pl i es no a pr i or i ex pectati on. General l y, you shoul d use the neutral
descr i pti on, “di d not i ncr ease,” w hen r epor ti ng r esul ts.
Qual i tati ve w or ds that descr i be m agni tude ar e i m pr eci se and ther ef or e of l i ttl e
val ue w hen used al one. For ex am pl e, w hat does “m ar kedl y ” m ean i n “Hear t rate
i ncr eased m ar kedl y ”? We need the data to be sur e how bi g the i ncr ease was. If
you use a qual i tati ve w or d such as “m ar kedl y,” go on to quanti f y i t, ei ther by
ci ti ng a f i gur e or a tabl e or by r epor ti ng the data (pr ef erabl y as per cent
change) i n the tex t. Actual l y, the best pol i cy i s to avoi d qual i tati ve w or ds
al together i n the Resul ts secti on. Save qual i tati ve w or ds f or the Di scussi on, f or
occasi ons w hen you need to em phasi ze the m agni tude of a change or a
di f f er ence.
“Si gni f i cant” has becom e a code w or d f or “stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant.” Thus,
“si gni f i cantl y ” can no l onger be used as a sy nony m f or “m ar kedl y.” If you say,
f or ex am pl e, “Hear t rate i ncr eased si gni f i cantl y,” the r eader ex pects stati sti cal
detai l s to suppor t that statem ent.
Statistical Details
Stati sti cs bel ong w i th data. Most data shoul d be di spl ayed i n f i gur es or tabl es.
Ther ef or e, m ost stati sti cal detai l s shoul d be i n f i gur es and tabl es. When data
ar e i ncl uded i n the tex t, the accom pany i ng stati sti cal detai l s shoul d be w r i tten
as show n her e.
The conventi onal way to w r i te a m ean and standar d dev i ati on or a m ean and
standar d er r or of the m ean i s show n i n Ex am pl e 6. 12.
48. 7 ± 1. 3 (SD) m l .
The standar d way to w r i te data that ar e bei ng com par ed stati sti cal l y i s show n
i n Ex am pl e 6. 13.
P. 167
Bl ood f l ow was r edi str i buted m or e towar d the r i ght ventr i cl e than towar d the
l ef t ventr i cl e [26. 3 ± 2. 9 (SD) v s. 19. 5 ± 1. 5% i n 6 l am bs, P < 0. 01].
N ote that f i ve ty pes of stati sti cal i nf or m ati on ar e pr esented: the m ean (“26. 3”
and “19. 5%”), the standar d dev i ati on (“2. 9” and “1. 5%”), i denti f i cati on of the
stati sti c [“(SD)”], the sam pl e si ze (n) (“i n 6 l am bs”), and the pr obabi l i ty val ue
of si gni f i cance (“P < 0. 01”). General l y, you shoul d gi ve al l f i ve ty pes of
stati sti cal i nf or m ati on. How ever, i f a si ngl e stati sti c (f or ex am pl e, the standar d
dev i ati on) and a si ngl e sam pl e si ze (n) appl y to al l the data, then you can
i denti f y the stati sti c and the sam pl e si ze the f i r st ti m e you gi ve data, as i n
Ex am pl e 6. 13, and om i t these detai l s af ter that, as i n Ex am pl e 6. 14.
Ex a mple 6. 14 “(SD)” and n Om i tted
Bl ood f l ow was r edi str i buted m or e towar d the r i ght ventr i cl e than towar d the
l ef t ventr i cl e (26. 3 ± 2. 9 v s. 19. 5 ± 1. 5%, P < 0. 01).
The stati sti c and the sam pl e si ze shoul d al so be i denti f i ed i n the Methods
secti on. For ex am pl e, “Data ar e ex pr essed as m ean ± SD”; “The study pr otocol
was per f or m ed on the r em ai ni ng 6 l am bs.”
If i n addi ti on you r epor t the conf i dence i nter val , Ex am pl e 6. 13 can be r ew r i tten
as f ol l ow s:
Bl ood f l ow was r edi str i buted m or e towar d the r i ght ventr i cl e than towar d the
l ef t ventr i cl e [26. 3 ± 2. 9 (SD) v s. 19. 5 ± 1. 5% i n 6 l am bs; 95% conf i dence
i nter val f or the di f f er ence = 3. 8–9. 8%, P < 0. 01].
When P val ues ar e gi ven af ter data, as i n Ex am pl e 6. 13, actual P val ues shoul d
be used both f or di f f er ences consi der ed si gni f i cant (f or ex am pl e, P < 0. 01) and
f or di f f er ences consi der ed not si gni f i cant (f or ex am pl e, P > 0. 75). Wr i ti ng “P >
0. 05” or “P = N S” i s not hel pf ul . Pr eci se val ues al l ow the r eader to i nter pr et
the data accuratel y. For ex am pl e, a P val ue of 0. 75 str ongl y i m pl i es absence of
a stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ence, but a P val ue of 0. 06 pr obabl y does not.
Contrar y to popul ar bel i ef, P = 0. 05 i s not a har dandf ast cutof f poi nt.
Fi nal l y, note that the sam pl e si ze i s not w r i tten “n = 6.” The r eason i s that “n =
6” i s uncl ear. Is i t 6 l am bs? Si x ex per i m ents i n one l am b? Si x ex per i m ents i n 4
l am bs? So w hen descr i bi ng the sam pl e si ze, state not onl y the si ze of the
sam pl e (her e, 6) but al so w hat the sam pl e i s (her e, l am bs).
P. 168
FUNCTIONS
To state the r esul ts of the ex per i m ents descr i bed i n Mater i al s and Methods. To
ci te f i gur es or tabl es that pr esent suppor ti ng data.
STORY LINE
For hy pothesi stesti ng studi es i n w hi ch al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n
advance, and al so f or descr i pti ve studi es and m ethods paper s, the Resul ts
secti on pr esents the thi r d step i n the stor y l i ne: the r esul ts.
For hy pothesi stesti ng studi es i n w hi ch one ex per i m ent deter m i nes w hat
the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l be, the Resul ts secti on descr i bes both the second
and the thi r d steps of the stor y l i ne: the ex per i m ents done and the r esul ts
f ound.
CONTENT
Repor t onl y r esul ts per ti nent to the questi on.
Pr esent data af ter stati ng the r esul t they suppor t, not i nstead of stati ng
the r esul t.
For nor m al l y di str i buted data that have been anal y zed stati sti cal l y, r epor t
the m ean and a stati sti c that esti m ates the var i ati on f r om the m ean (f or
ex am pl e, the standar d dev i ati on) and speci f y w hi ch stati sti c you ar e
r epor ti ng. Al so gi ve the sam pl e si ze (n) and pr obabi l i ty val ues f or tests of
stati sti cal si gni f i cance. For nonnor m al l y di str i buted data that have been
anal y zed stati sti cal l y, r epor t the m edi an and the i nter quar ti l e range.
ORGANIZATION
For hy pothesi stesti ng studi es i n w hi ch al l the ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n
advance, or gani ze the Resul ts secti on ei ther chr onol ogi cal l y or f r om m ost
to l east i m por tant. For m ost to l east i m por tant, put r esul ts that answ er
the questi on(s) at the begi nni ng of the Resul ts secti on or at the begi nni ng
of paragraph 1 and successi ve paragraphs.
For hy pothesi stesti ng studi es i n w hi ch one ex per i m ent deter m i nes w hat
the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l be, the Resul ts secti on i s or gani zed i n a
r epeati ng f our par t patter n: questi on, over v i ew of the ex per i m ents,
r esul ts, answ er to the questi on. If necessar y, back gr ound i ndi cati ng w hy
the questi on was asked and pur poses and r easons ex pl ai ni ng w hy the
ex per i m ent was done ar e al so i ncl uded.
EMPHASIS
In the Resul ts secti on, em phasi ze r esul ts.
LENGTH
Keep the Resul ts secti on br i ef and uncl utter ed so that the r eader can see
the f or est f or the tr ees.
DETAILS
Menti on the study subjects or the ani m al s and the m ater i al studi ed at l east
once i n the Resul ts secti on, pr ef erabl y i n the f i r st sentence.
When com par i ng r esul ts, do not use “com par ed w i th.” In par ti cul ar, avoi d
am bi guous com par i sons such as “X was i ncr eased com par ed w i th Y.”
Di sti ngui sh betw een “coul d not” and “di d not” and betw een “di d not” and
“f ai l ed to.”
U se “si gni f i cant” and “si gni f i cantl y ” f or stati sti cal si gni f i cance.
For stati sti cal com par i sons, i f a si ngl e stati sti c (f or ex am pl e, standar d
dev i ati on) and a si ngl e sam pl e si ze (n) appl y to al l the data and ar e
i denti f i ed cl ear l y i n the Methods secti on, do not r epeat these detai l s each
ti m e you gi ve data; m enti on them onl y the f i r st ti m e.
If pr obabi l i ty val ues ar e gi ven i n f i gur es or tabl es, do not gi ve them i n the
tex t.
Gi ve actual P val ues both f or si gni f i cant and f or nonsi gni f i cant di f f er ences.
P. 170
De c ide how to de s c ribe the re s ults —the w hole time c ours e , only the
la s t da y, or both.
2. Cons ide ring the princ iple s of w riting Re s ults a nd princ iple s of
pa ra gra ph s truc ture (s e e Cha p. 3), w hic h is the be s t pa ra gra ph in this
Re s ults s e c tion a nd w hy?
The que s tion this pa pe r a s k s is , “ Are nitroge n a nd s odium ba la nc e a nd
s ympa the tic ne rvous a c tivity (a s s e s s e d by me a s uring blood pre s s ure a nd
nore pine phrine c onc e ntra tion a fte r pos tura l c ha nge s ) improve d w he n
obe s e s ubje c ts e a t a pure prote in die t ra the r tha n a mix e d c a rbohydra te
a nd prote in die t?” Ea c h of the s e ve n s ubje c ts w a s on e a c h die t for 21
da ys .
Re s ults
OFigure 4 c ompa re s the tota l c umula tive s odium ba la nc e obs e rve d for e a c h
s ubje c t during the mix e ddie t a nd prote indie t pe riods . P The me a n
c umula tive s odium los s during prote in c ons umption, 382 ± 117 mmol, w a s
s ignific a ntly gre a te r tha n tha t obs e rve d w ith the mix e d die t, 25 ± 105
mmol (P < 0. 02). QIn c ontra s t, the re w e re no s ignific a nt diffe re nc e s in
othe r mine ra l ba la nc e s be tw e e n the tw o die ts (prote in die t vs . mix e d die t:
pota s s ium, 21 ± 51 mmol vs . 13 ± 33 mmol; c a lc ium, 159. 5 ± 9. 5 mmol vs .
136 ± 9 mmol; ma gne s ium, 14 ± 3. 5 mmol vs . 7 ± 2. 5 mmol;
phos phorus , 145 ± 50 mmol vs . 127 ± 26 mmol).
4 W e ight Los s
5 Blood P re s s ure
U Bloodpre s s ure va lue s me a s ure d w ith the pa tie nt s upine did not c ha nge
s ignific a ntly from c ontrol (pre die t) le ve ls w ith e ithe r the pure prote in die t
(119 ± 5 / 72 ± 4 vs . 114 ± 2 / 69 ± 2 mmHg) or the mix e d die t (114 ± 3 /
71 ± 3 vs . 114 ± 2 / 69 ± 3). V How e ve r, w ith the pure prote in die t the
me a n ma x ima l fa ll in s ys tolic blood pre s s ure a fte r s ta nding, 28 ± 3 mmHg,
w a s s ignific a ntly gre a te r tha n tha t w ith the mix e d die t, 18 ± 3 mmHg (P <
0. 02). W The e x a gge ra te d pos tura l de c line in s ys tolic blood pre s s ure during
pure prote in c ons umption w a s a c c ompa nie d by a n inc re a s e in a dve rs e
s ymptoms a s de te rmine d from the
P . 173
da ily que s tionna ire . X Although only one of the s e ve n s ubje c ts re porte d
s ymptoms of pos tura l hypote ns ion w hile re c e iving the mix e d die t, a ll
s e ve n s ubje c ts note d s uc h s ymptoms w hile on the pure prote in die t.
Figure 5.
P la s ma
nore pine phrine
le ve ls in the
ba s a l, s upine
s ta te a nd a fte r
2, 5, a nd 10
minute s of
s ta nding in
obe s e s ubje c ts
in the pre die t
(c ontrol) s tudy
a nd a fte r 21
da ys of the
mix e d die t a nd
the prote in
die t. The
pla s ma
nore pine phrine
le ve ls
me a s ure d w ith
the pa tie nt
s upine a nd
s ta nding w e re
virtua lly
ide ntic a l in the
pre die t
(c ontrol) s tudy
pe rforme d
be fore e a c h of
the tw o te s t
die ts a nd a re
c ons e que ntly
c ombine d in
this figure . * P
< 0. 05 a s
c ompa re d w ith
the pre die t
va lue s (pa ire d
tte s t).
Hi de Answ er
Re s ults
P a ra gra ph 1
(56 w or ds)
Af ter the 21day pr otei n di et, bl ood and ur i ne ketone aci ds i ncr eased
m or e and pl asm a i nsul i n and gl ucose decr eased m or e than af ter the
21day m i xed di et i n the seven obese subjects (Fi g. 1). Pl asm a
gl ucagon l evel s w er e no di f f er ent.
(40 w or ds)
Re vis ion (Ef f ects and com par i sons separated; poi nt of
3 v i ew : i ndependent var i abl e)
Both di ets i ncr eased bl ood and ur i ne ketone aci ds i n the seven obese
subjects af ter 21 day s, but the pur e pr otei n di et caused l ar ger
i ncr eases than the m i xed di et di d (Fi g. 1). Both di ets decr eased
pl asm a i nsul i n and pl asm a gl ucose; agai n, the pur e pr otei n di et had a
gr eater ef f ect. N ei ther di et changed pl asm a gl ucagon.
(53 w or ds)
(71 w or ds)
(27 w or ds)
om i tti ng the f i gur e l egend at the begi nni ng of the par agr aph and
ci ti ng the f i gur e at the end of the f i r st r esul t.
“Pr otei n di et, ” not “w hen car bohy dr ate w as el i m i nated” (or i gi nal
sentence E).
The or der of com par i sons i s consi stent: al l com par i sons ar e
f r om the pr otei n di et to the m i x ed di et. (In the or i gi nal v er si on,
the com par i son f or gl ucose i s f r om the m i x ed di et to the pr otei n
di et. Som e r eader s pr obabl y m i sr ead thi s com par i son as say i ng
that pl asm a gl ucose w as gr eater af ter the pr otei n di et than af ter
the m i x ed di et. )
Par agr aphs 3 and 4 ar e pr obabl y the best par agr aphs i n thi s Resul ts
secti on. How ev er , m ost r eader s thi nk par agr aphs 4 and 5 ar e the
best, pr obabl y because these ar e the onl y tw o par agr aphs that do not
begi n w i th a f i gur e l egend.
Par agr aph 4 has m any str engths. It i s shor t, i t begi ns w i th a r esul t
(not a f i gur e l egend), data and stati sti cal detai l s ar e subor di nated
(though the data shoul d be separ ated f r om the r esul ts by
par entheses, not by com m as), and an i dea of the m agni tude of a
di f f er ence i s gi v en (“20% gr eater ”). In addi ti on, k ey ter m s nam i ng
the di ets ar e consi stent, the poi nt of v i ew i n the thr ee sentences i s
consi stent, the thr ee sentences ar e appr opr i atel y i n par al l el f or m , the
topi c of each sentence i s si gnal ed by the k ey ter m at the begi nni ng,
and tr ansi ti on w or ds ar e used to i ndi cate the l ogi cal r el ati onshi ps
betw een the sentences. How ev er , the l ogi c i s not r i gor ous. The
“how ev er ” at the begi nni ng of the second sentence r eal l y appl i es to
the i dea i n the thi r d sentence. Thus, the l ast tw o sentences shoul d
r ead, “How ev er , because the cal cul ated w ei ght l oss attr i butabl e to
f l ui d l osses af ter the pr otei n di et w as al so gr eater than that af ter the
m i x ed di et, the esti m ated nonf l ui d w ei ght l oss af ter the pr otei n di et
w as no di f f er ent f r om that af ter the m i x ed di et. ”
Par agr aph 5 i s not as cl ear as par agr aph 4. Par agr aph 5 has som e of
the sam e str engths as par agr aph 4. It begi ns w i th a r esul t, i t
subor di nates data, and i t k eeps the nam es of the di ets consi stent.
How ev er , par agr aph 5 has a conf usi ng l ack of si gnal s of the topi c at
the begi nni ng of the f i r st tw o sentences, w hi ch m ak es the contr ast
di f f i cul t to see. In addi ti on, the poi nt of v i ew i n the tw o sentences i s
di f f er ent: sentence U , bl ood pr essur e v al ues; sentence V, f al l i n
sy stol i c bl ood pr essur e. Fi nal l y , “ex agger ated postur al decl i ne” i s
unnecessar i l y f ancy and changes the k ey ter m . Thi s par agr aph can be
w r i tten m or e cl ear l y and si m pl y as f ol l ow s:
Reader s r ar el y choose par agr aph 3 as the best par agr aph i n thi s
Resul ts secti on, pr obabl y because i t begi ns w i th a f i gur e l egend and
contai ns a l ot of data. How ev er , i f the f i r st sentence (f i gur e l egend)
i s om i tted, par agr aph 3 i s qui te cl ear . The i m por tant r esul t—the
m i ner al bal ance that changed—i s gi v en f i r st (sentence P). Then the
m i ner al bal ances that di d not change ar e gr ouped i n a si ngl e
statem ent (sentence Q). Al though the data ar e num er ous, they ar e
l i sted at the end of the par agr aph, so r eader s can stop r eadi ng i f
they ar e not i nter ested. A separ ate tabl e f or these data i s not
adv i sabl e because these data do not hel p answ er the questi on.
Par agr aph 2 i s not the best par agr aph because i t contai ns a f ai r
am ount of i nf or m ati on that can be om i tted or condensed. The f i r st
sentence i s a f i gur e l egend, w hi ch i s unnecessar y . Sentences I–K can
be condensed by about onethi r d. For ex am pl e, “N ei ther m ean dai l y
ni tr ogen bal ance nor the ni tr ogen bal ance dur i ng the f i r st or l ast
w eek of the pr otei n di et w as si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent f r om the
cor r espondi ng v al ues f or the m i x ed di et (m ean, 2. 1 ± 0. 9 v s. 2. 6
± 0. 4 g per day ; f i r st w eek , 4. 9 ± 0. 5 v s. 4. 6 ± 0. 3 g per day ; and
l ast w eek , 1. 0 ± 0. 6 v s. 1. 6 ± 0. 3 g per day , P > 0. 1). How ev er ,
ni tr ogen bal ance w as m or e negati v e dur i ng the f i r st w eek than dur i ng
the l ast w eek . ” Sentence L states a m ethod. The m ethod shoul d be
subor di nated to the r esul t i n the nex t sentence. For ex am pl e, “In the
subject gi v en each di et f or 5½ w eek s, dai l y ni tr ogen bal ance w as
si m i l ar af ter the tw o di ets (Fi g. 3). ”
P a ra gra ph 6
Pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne concentrati ons, one of our i ndi cator s of
sy m patheti c ner vous acti v i ty, f el l bel ow pr edi et val ues af ter the
pr otei n di et but not af ter the m i xed di et. How ever, the l ow er
concentrati ons occur r ed onl y w hen the subjects l ay supi ne or af ter
the subjects stood f or 2 m i n (Fi g. 5). Af ter the subjects stood f or 5 or
10 m i n, the pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne concentrati ons w er e no di f f er ent
f r om those bef or e the di et.
(67 w or ds)
Onl y the pr otei n di et had an ef f ect on pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne. Af ter
the pr otei n di et, pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne concentrati ons, one of our
i ndi cator s of sy m patheti c ner vous acti v i ty, w er e l ow er than bef or e
the di et both w hen subjects w er e supi ne and af ter they stood f or 2
m i n (Fi g. 5). How ever, af ter the subjects stood f or 5 or 10 m i n, the
concentrati ons w er e equal to those bef or e the pr otei n di et.
(65 w or ds)
In both r ev i si ons, the f i gur e coul d be ci ted af ter the topi c sentence,
si nce the topi c sentence gi v es a speci f i c r esul t. But si nce the second
sentence r ef i nes the poi nt m ade i n the topi c sentence, by l i m i ti ng the
change to tw o ti m e per i ods, ci ti ng the f i gur e af ter the second
sentence gi v es the r eader a better i dea of w hat to l ook f or i n the
f i gur e.
W ord Choic e
P. 174
The proble m in this Re s ults s e c tion is tha t the s tory line is not c le a r;
c ontinuity be tw e e n pa ra gra phs ge ts w e a k e r a nd w e a k e r a s the re s ults
s e c tion progre s s e s . The c ontinuity be tw e e n pa ra gra phs 1 a nd 2 is
tole ra ble , be tw e e n 2 a nd 3 is w e a k , be tw e e n 3 a nd 4 is w e a k e r, a nd
be tw e e n 4 a nd 5 is none x is te nt.
The re a s on for the w e a k c ontinuity is tha t, in e a c h pa ra gra ph, the que s tion
is mis s ing or not s ta te d pre c is e ly, the a ns w e r is mis s ing, or both. In
a ddition, s ome time s ba c k ground or a purpos e or a re a s on is mis s ing.
1. In your re vis ion, s upply the mis s ing informa tion (que s tion,
ba c k ground, purpos e , re a s on) a t the be ginning of a pa ra gra ph or the
mis s ing a ns w e r a t the e nd of a pa ra gra ph, or both, s o tha t the s tory
line is c le a r throughout this Re s ults s e c tion.
Als o notic e the que s tion of the pa pe r (s e e be low ). The que s tions
a nd a ns w e rs in e a c h pa ra gra ph s hould re la te to the que s tion of
the pa pe r.
Que s tion: Are the s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis ms for a c tiva tion of
phos pholipa s e C by the pote nt mitoge ns thrombin a nd P DG F in va s c ula r
s mooth muc s c le c e lls diffe re nt from e a c h othe r?
Re s ults
2. FTo s tudy the s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis m for the tw o mitoge ns ,
w e us e d pe rtus s is tox in, w hic h modifie s the func tion of s ome G
prote ins . G P e rtus s is tox in s ignific a ntly blunte d the thrombininduc e d
inc re a s e s in IP 3 (Fig. 1)
P . 175
a nd intra c e llula r[Ca 2+ ]
(Fig. 2), indic a ting a role for a G prote in in
thrombininduc e d c e llula r re s pons e s . HIn c ontra s t, pe rtus s is tox in did
not a ffe c t the P DG Finduc e d inc re a s e s in e ithe r IP 3 (Fig. 1) or
6. U Sinc e
P MA ha s be e n s ugge s te d to a c t on s e ve ra l ta rge ts , inc luding
the binding of a hormone to its re c e ptor, w e pe rforme d re c e ptor
binding s tudie s us ing 125 Ithrombin to s e e if thrombin re c e ptors a re
the ta rge t of P MA. V Ac ute P MA tre a tme nt did not a ffe c t e ithe r the
dis s oc ia tion c ons ta nt (K D ) for thrombin or the ma x ima l binding (B ma x )
for thrombin (Fig. 7). W Thus , P MA mus t a c t by inte rfe ring w ith one or
more e ve nts dis ta l to the binding of thrombin to its re c e ptor.
7. X Anothe r pos s ible ta rge t for P MA a c tion is the G prote in its e lf. Y To
inve s tiga te this pos s ibility, w e e x a mine d the e ffe c t of P MA on G TP γS
induc e d inos itol phos pha te re le a s e . Z G TP γS c a us e d a progre s s ive
re le a s e of inos itol phos pha te , w hic h w a s inhibite d by 55% by P MA
tre a tme nt (Fig. 8), s ugge s ting tha t P MA inhibits thrombininduc e d
c e llula r re s pons e s by a ffe c ting the func tion of the G prote in dire c tly.
Hi de Answ er
Re s ults
Re vis ion
[Ca 2 + ] (Fi g. 2), i ndi cati ng that a per tussi s tox i n–sensi ti v e G
pr otei n i s i nv ol v ed i n the si gnal tr ansducti on m echani sm f or
thr om bi n. HIn contrast, per tussi s tox i n di d not af f ect the PDGF
i nduced i ncr eases i n ei ther the pr oducti on of IP 3 (Fi g. 1) or
thr om bi ni nduced, but not PDGFi nduced, Ca 2 + m obi l i zati on (Fi g.
6). T Thi s ef f ect of PMA r equi r es f uncti onal pr otei n k i nase C,
si nce PMA di d not i nhi bi t thr om bi ni nduced Ca 2 + m obi l i zati on i n
cel l s that w er e m ade def i ci ent i n pr otei n k i nase C acti v i ty (data
not show n). T'Thus, w her eas the si gnal transducti on m echani sm
f or thr om bi n i s inhibite d by pr otei n k i nase C, the si gnal
tr ansducti on m echani sm f or PDGF i s not.
3–4 ITo a s k w he the r the s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis m for
a c tiva tion of phos pholipa s e C by P DG F might involve a pe rtus s is
tox in–ins e ns itive G prote in, w e e x a mine d the e ffe c t of G TP γS, a
s ta ble G TP a na log, on IP 3 produc tion in s a poninpe rme a bilize d
va s c ula r s mooth mus c le c e lls . JG TP γS ha s be e n s how n to
pote ntia te ma ny G prote in–me dia te d re s pons e s by dire c t
a c tiva tion of the G prote in (15–17). KWe f ound that i n
per m eabi l i zed vascul ar sm ooth m uscl e cel l s, GTPγ S i ncr eased IP 3
pr oducti on sy ner gi sti cal l y w i th both thr om bi n and PDGF (Fi g. 3). MTo
c onfirm the e ffe c t of G TP γS, w e te s te d gua nos ine 5′ O(2
thiodiphos pha te ) (G DP βS), a n a na log of G DP . M'G DP βS blunts G
prote in–me dia te d c e llula r re s pons e s by c ompe ting w ith G TP for
binding (18). N We f ound that GDPβS bl unted PDGFi nduced IP 3
pr oducti on i n per m eabi l i zed cel l s (Fi g. 4). OThus, w her eas thr om bi n
uses a per tussi s tox i n–sensi ti v e G pr otei n as a si gnal tr ansducer to
acti v ate phosphol i pase C i n v ascul ar sm ooth m uscl e cel l s, PDGF
appear s to use a per tussi s tox i n–i nsensi ti v e G pr otei n.
Par a. 1
Par a. 2
Par a. 3
Par a. 4
¶3 and 4. putti ng the contr ol i n the sam e par agr aph as the
ex per i m ent.
Par a. 5
T'. Addi ng the m i ssi ng answ er at the end of the par agr aph.
Back
Introduction
So f ar w e have l ooked onl y at the w r i tten tex t of a bi om edi cal jour nal ar ti cl e.
We tur n now to tw o ty pes of cr uci al suppor ti ng i nf or m ati on—f i r st f i gur es and
tabl es, w hi ch i l l ustrate and pr ov i de ev i dence f or statem ents i n the tex t, and
then r ef er ences, w hi ch di r ect r eader s to publ i shed w or k s that suppor t
statem ents i n the tex t.
Back
Chapter 8
Figures and Tables
In Secti on II, The Tex t of the Bi om edi cal Resear ch Paper, w e saw how to w r i te each secti on of the
tex t to tel l a cl ear stor y. How ever, m any r eader s do not r ead the tex t, or r ead onl y par t of i t.
Instead these r eader s l ook at the f i gur es and tabl es. Ther ef or e i t i s i m por tant that the f i gur es and
tabl es ar e cl ear and tel l the stor y of the paper.
Cl ear f i gur es and tabl es r esul t f r om car ef ul desi gn and f r om i nf or m ati ve l egends f or f i gur es and
i nf or m ati ve ti tl es and f ootnotes f or tabl es. Car ef ul desi gn i s i m por tant because f i gur es and tabl es
ar e v i sual m eans of convey i ng i nf or m ati on and ther ef or e shoul d have str ong v i sual i m pact.
Inf or m ati ve l egends, ti tl es, and f ootnotes ar e i m por tant to ensur e that the topi c of each f i gur e and
tabl e i s cl ear.
Fi gur es and tabl es that tel l the stor y of the paper r esul t f r om desi gni ng the f i gur es and tabl es to
f or m a cl ear sequence that r el ates cl ear l y to the tex t.
Chapter 8 pr esents gui del i nes f or desi gni ng cl ear f i gur es and tabl es, f or w r i ti ng i nf or m ati ve l egends
f or f i gur es and i nf or m ati ve ti tl es and f ootnotes f or tabl es, and f or desi gni ng f i gur es and tabl es to tel l
the stor y of the paper.
FIGURES
In sci enti f i c r esear ch paper s, m ost f i gur es ar e used i n the Methods and Resul ts secti ons, though
f i gur es can al so be used i n the Intr oducti on and the Di scussi on. In Methods, the m ai n use of f i gur es
i s to cl ar i f y or am pl i f y the m ethods. For ex am pl e, f i gur es can be used to show apparatus or anatom i c
r el ati ons. In Resul ts, the m ai n use of f i gur es i s to pr esent ev i dence that suppor ts the r esul ts. Fi gur es
pr esent ei ther pr i m ar y ev i dence (f or ex am pl e, el ectr on m i cr ographs) or num er i cal data (i n graphs).
For ani m al s and apparatus, draw i ngs ar e pr ef erabl e to photographs, because draw i ngs can el i m i nate
unnecessar y detai l and em phasi ze i m por tant f eatur es (Fi g. 2).
Figure 1. A
di agram
draw n both
r eal i sti cal l y
(l ef t) and
schem ati cal l y
(r i ght). The
schem ati c
di agram i s
si m pl er, but
the r eal i sti c
di agram m ay
have m or e
i m pact f or
som e
r eader s. The
draw i ng i s
bl ack on
w hi te, and
the l abel s
ar e
upper case
and
l ow er case
l etter s i n a
ver ti cal ,
uncr ow ded,
sans ser i f
ty pef ace of
m edi um
w ei ght.
P. 224
Draw i ngs and di agram s shoul d be bl ack on w hi te and shoul d be kept si m pl e. Label s shoul d be l ar ge
enough to be v i si bl e but not over w hel m i ng. The l etter s used f or l abel s shoul d be upper case and
l ow er case i n a ver ti cal , uncr ow ded, sans ser i f ty pef ace of m edi um w ei ght (Fi g. 1).
Primary Evidence
Pr i m ar y ev i dence i ncl udes photographs of pati ents and ti ssues, radi ographs, m i cr ographs, and
ex per i m ental r ecor ds (f or ex am pl e, gel el ectr ophor etogram s, chr om atogram s, spectr ophotom eter
cur ves, pol ygraph r ecor di ngs).
Show pr i m ar y ev i dence w hen that i s the ty pe of data you have (f or ex am pl e, el ectr on m i cr ographs,
gel el ectr ophor etogram s). Al so show pr i m ar y ev i dence to i ndi cate the qual i ty of your data w hen
appr opr i ate. For ex am pl e, f or a study of var i ous pr essur es, i n addi ti on to pr esenti ng sum m ar i zed
data i n graphs, al so show a r epr esentati ve pol ygraph r ecor di ng. Sel ect your best qual i ty r ecor di ng
f or publ i cati on.
Figure 2.
Photograph
(l ef t) and
draw i ng (r i ght)
of an apparatus
f or m easur i ng
i ntrapl eural
pr essur e. The
draw i ng show s
the apparatus
m or e cl ear l y
and si m pl y
than the
photograph
does.
P. 225
Photographs of Patients
U se photographs of pati ents onl y i f the pati ent gave w r i tten, i nf or m ed consent bef or e the photograph
was taken. Cover f aci al f eatur es w henever possi bl e to pr event i denti f i cati on of the pati ent. If you
need to r ef er to pati ents, use A, B, etc., not the pati ent's i ni ti al s.
Micrographs
Clarity
Make gl ossy pr i nts of m i cr ographs and ensur e that the pr i nts have suf f i ci ent contrast to m ake the
f eatur es of i nter est cl ear.
Size
Make the m i cr ograph l ar ge enough to show the i m por tant f eatur es cl ear l y (Fi gs. 3, 4). The i m por tant
f eatur es shoul d near l y f i l l the space. The m i cr ograph shoul d be just enough l ar ger than the f eatur es
of i nter est to gi ve a sense of w her e they ar e i n thei r contex t.
To obtai n m i cr ographs of opti m al si ze, deci de bef or e pr i nti ng the negati ve w hat di m ensi ons you need
so that the f eatur es of i nter est w i l l near l y f i l l the photograph and the photograph w i l l f i l l the col um n
or page of the jour nal . Then pr i nt the photograph the appr opr i ate si ze and cr op (tr i m ) the photograph
to f i t the col um n or page. Subm i t photographs or m i cr ographs the si ze they w i l l appear i n the
jour nal , not l ar ger.
Labeling
Label s used on m i cr ographs i ncl ude ar r ow s and ar r ow heads, l etter s and num ber s, and sy m bol s such
as *.
The am ount of l abel i ng needed depends on the audi ence. Mor e l abel s ar e needed f or a general
audi ence (f or ex am pl e, f or m i cr ographs i n general jour nal s or i n, say, phy si ol ogy jour nal s). Few er
l abel s ar e needed f or a speci al ty audi ence.
P. 226
Si nce l abel s cover up and detract f r om the data on the m i cr ograph, m ake l abel s br i ef and f ew and
just bi g enough to be r eadi l y v i si bl e (Fi gs. 3, 4). Def i ne the l abel s i n the f i gur e l egend.
To show m agni f i cati on, a scal e bar can be pl aced on the m i cr ograph, i n the l ow er r i ght cor ner (Fi g.
4). The scal e bar shoul d be a thi n, hor i zontal l i ne w i thout cr oss bar s at the end so that the di stance
i s cl ear. (Cr oss bar s cr eate the am bi gui ty of i nner di stance ver sus outer di stance. ) In the f i gur e
l egend, i denti f y the di stance that the bar r epr esents by w r i ti ng, f or ex am pl e, “Scal e bar = 75 nm .”
For speci al ty audi ences, m agni f i cati on can be i ndi cated by a num ber (f or ex am pl e, “× 32, 000”) i n the
l egend rather than by a bar on the m i cr ograph.
Plates
Mi cr ographs bei ng di scussed together i n the tex t can be gr ouped i nto pl ates. Gr oup m i cr ographs to
al l ow com par i sons and to avoi d wasti ng space. The best ar rangem ents ar e acr oss the top or bottom
of a page, dow n a col um n, or f i l l i ng a page. Make al l the m i cr ographs i n a pl ate the sam e l ength or
w i dth, or both, so that ther e ar e no r ectangl es of w hi te space betw een photographs. When m ounti ng
m i cr ographs i n pl ates, l eave uni f or m , thi n (1–2 m m ) w hi te l i nes betw een m i cr ographs (Fi gs. 3, 4).
The r easons f or avoi di ng l ar ge w hi te spaces ar e that they pul l the eye away f r om the m i cr ographs
and di stract the eye f r om the gray tones of the m i cr ographs.
If the m agni f i cati on i s the sam e i n al l m i cr ographs, one scal e bar i s suf f i ci ent (as i n Fi gs. 3, 4).
Numbering
It i s conventi onal to gi ve each m i cr ograph a separate num ber, even w hen several m i cr ographs ar e
gr ouped i nto a pl ate. Pl ace the num ber i n the l ow er l ef t cor ner. [In contrast, w hen graphs ar e
gr ouped i nto com posi te f i gur es, the w hol e com posi te i s gi ven a si ngl e num ber and the par ts ar e
i denti f i ed by capi tal l etter s or br i ef l abel s (see Fi g. 12 bel ow ). ]
P. 227
N um ber s shoul d be the sam e sty l e on al l m i cr ographs (Fi gs. 3, 4), not som e w hi te and other s bl ack .
The si m pl est and cl ear est num ber i ng m ethod i s to put a bl ack num ber i nsi de a w hi te ci r cl e outl i ned
by a bl ack l i ne. Thi s num ber w i l l show up agai nst al l back gr ounds—bl ack , w hi te, and gray.
Gel Electrophoretograms
Gel el ectr ophor etogram s ar e hal f tone f i gur es. Make the photograph of the gel s shar p and cl ear (Fi g.
5).
Identi f y m ater i al i n each gel by addi ng capi tal l etter s or l abel s al ong the top or bottom of the
photograph (Fi g. 5). Identi f y i m por tant f racti ons by addi ng l abel s al ong the si de. U se l eader l i nes to
joi n l abel s to thei r f racti ons. Label s and l etter s shoul d not over w hel m the data.
Polygraph Recordings
Pol ygraph r ecor di ngs ar e m ade as bl ack l i nes on a gr i d. If the gr i d l i nes ar e not needed, they can be
el i m i nated by f i l ter photography. To be abl e to el i m i nate gr i d l i nes, use r ecor di ng i nk that di f f er s i n
col or f r om the pr i nted gr i d l i nes on the r ecor di ng paper.
Af ter r em ov i ng gr i d l i nes, add ver ti cal scal es and ei ther hor i zontal scal es or hor i zontal scal e
m ar ker s (f or ex am pl e, tem peratur e i n °C, ti m e i n m i nutes) (Fi g. 6). Check that the scal es and scal e
m ar ker s you add ar e per f ectl y accurate.
Figure 6. Wel l
pr epar ed
pol ygraph
r ecor di ngs.
Gr i d l i nes have
been
el i m i nated, and
ver ti cal scal es
and a
hor i zontal ti m e
m ar ker have
been added. Y
ax i s l abel s ar e
al i gned al ong
the l ef t and do
not pr otr ude
i nto the col um n
of scal e
num ber s. The
l abel s do not
over w hel m the
data.
P. 228
Label each ax i s w i th the nam e of the var i abl e f ol l ow ed by the uni t of m easur em ent i n par entheses
(Fi g. 6). U se upper case and l ow er case l etter s f or the nam e of the var i abl e; use Inter nati onal Sy stem
abbr ev i ati ons f or uni ts of m easur em ent. Label each scal e m ar ker w i th the uni t i t r epr esents.
Hor i zontal l y or i ented ax i s l abel s shoul d al i gn on the l ef t and shoul d not pr otr ude i nto the col um n of
scal e num ber s (Fi g. 6). Scal e num ber s shoul d be sl i ghtl y sm al l er than the capi tal l etter s i n the ax i s
l abel s. Scal e num ber s and axes shoul d be thi nner than l etter s i n l abel s. Label s shoul d not over w hel m
the data.
Graphs
U se the appr opr i ate ty pe of graph to di spl ay the ty pe of data you have. Som e com m onl y used ty pes
of graphs ar e descr i bed bel ow.
Line Graphs
A l i ne graph i s a tw oax i s graph on w hi ch cur ves, data poi nts, or both show the r el ati on betw een tw o
var i abl es such as w ei ght, vol um e, pr essur e, ti m e, concentrati on. Conventi onal l y, the i ndependent
var i abl e i s on the X ax i s, and the dependent var i abl e i s on the Y ax i s. If the scal e of an ax i s i s
l i near, i t m ust l ook l i near : ti ck m ar k s m ust be spaced at equal di stances and scal e num ber s m ust be
pl aced at equal i nter val s, star ti ng w her e the axes m eet (Fi g. 7).
Scattergrams
A scatter gram i s a tw oax i s graph that pl ots i ndi v i dual data poi nts and f i ts a m athem ati cal f uncti on
to the poi nts to show how str ongl y tw o var i abl es ar e cor r el ated. For ex am pl e, a strai ght r egr essi on
l i ne show s a l i near cor r el ati on (Fi g. 8).
Bar Graphs
A bar graph i s a oneax i s graph that com par es am ounts or f r equenci es f or cl asses of a di sconti nuous
var i abl e (f or ex am pl e, ty pes of bacter i a) or a “r el ati vescal e var i abl e” (f or ex am pl e, r esponses
graded f r om l east to m ost). A bar graph m ay be hor i zontal (Fi g. 9) or ver ti cal (Fi g. 10). In a bar
graph, the ax i s m ust i ncl ude zer o to avoi d f al si f y i ng the di f f er ences betw een bar s. Bar s shoul d al l be
the sam e w i dth, and bar s shoul d be as w i de as or w i der than the spaces betw een them . The ex act
am ount of space depends on the num ber and w i dth of the bar s. N o ti ck m ar k s shoul d appear al ong
the basel i ne, and the basel i ne need not be draw n; the basel i ne i s not an ax i s.
Histograms
A hi stogram i s a tw oax i s graph that show s a si ngl e f r equency di str i buti on by m eans of a ser i es of
conti guous r ectangl es (Fi g. 13). The r ectangl es shoul d be of equal w i dths so that the hei ght, and not
just the ar ea, of each r ectangl e r epr esents the f r equency of i ts cl ass. The ar ea of the hi stogram
r epr esents the di str i buti on. The outl i nes of i ndi v i dual r ectangl es m ay be draw n, as i n Fi g. 13, or
om i tted, to em phasi ze the shape of the di str i buti on.
Figure 11. An i ndi v i dual val ue bar graph. Data poi nts
show the i ndi v i dual val ues. Means ar e show n by
hor i zontal l i nes. The aster i sk (*) i ndi cates a
stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ence betw een the m eans.
N ote that w hen m or e than one data poi nt occur s at
one val ue, the data poi nts ar e ar ranged hor i zontal l y.
P. 230
P. 231
Frequency Polygons
A f r equency pol ygon i s a tw oax i s graph that uses data poi nts joi ned by l i nes to show tw o or m or e
over l appi ng f r equency di str i buti ons (Fi g. 14) or a si ngl e di str i buti on. Data poi nts ar e pl otted at the
m i dpoi nt of each cl ass, and the l i nes joi ni ng the data poi nts ar e ex tended to the basel i ne to com pl ete
the di str i buti on.
P. 232
For f ur ther detai l s about these ty pes of f i gur es, see Il l ustr ati ng Sci ence: Standar ds f or Publ i cati on,
Chapter 4, Graphs and Maps. For f ur ther detai l s about these and other k i nds of f i gur es, see Br i scoe,
Pr epar i ng Sci enti f i c Il l ustr ati ons.
Emphasis
Make each f i gur e em phasi ze the i m por tant i nf or m ati on (the data) by usi ng di f f er ent l i ne w ei ghts. For
ex am pl e, i n l i ne graphs, cur ves shoul d be the dar kest l i nes, l etter s i n ax i s l abel s shoul d be l ess
dar k , and axes, ti ck m ar k s, er r or bar s, key s, and cur ve l abel s shoul d be l east dar k , as i n Fi g. 7.
Point
Ensur e that each f i gur e m akes a cl ear poi nt. For ex am pl e, a decr ease shoul d l ook l i ke a decr ease. In
Fi g. 7, the poi nt that m onok i ne i njecti on decr eased the num ber s of ci r cul ati ng granul ocy tes i n rabbi ts
f or 2. 5 hour s i s cl ear.
Figure Legends
A f i gur e l egend i s a descr i pti ve statem ent that i s pr i nted bel ow or nex t to a f i gur e i n a publ i shed
ar ti cl e. A l egend i s needed so that the f i gur e w i l l be i ntel l i gi bl e w i thout r ef er ence to the tex t.
A f i gur e l egend ty pi cal l y has f our par ts: a br i ef ti tl e; ex per i m ental detai l s; def i ni ti ons of sy m bol s,
l i ne or bar patter ns, and abbr ev i ati ons not def i ned ear l i er i n the l egend; and, f or graphs, stati sti cal
i nf or m ati on.
Som e jour nal s do not f ol l ow thi s f or m at. For ex am pl e, som e jour nal s r equest onl y a ti tl e. Other
jour nal s r equest com pl ete ex per i m ental detai l s i n the l egend and none i n the Methods secti on of the
paper. When the jour nal gi ves ex pl i ci t i nstr ucti ons, f ol l ow them .
The Title
The ti tl e i s the f i r st i tem i n the f i gur e l egend; i t does not appear on the f i gur e i tsel f. The ti tl e
i denti f i es the speci f i c topi c or the poi nt of the f i gur e. The ti tl e shoul d be br i ef. It shoul d use the
sam e key ter m s as used on the graph and i n the tex t of the paper. It shoul d not contai n
abbr ev i ati ons. The detai l s i ncl uded i n the ti tl e depend on the ty pe of f i gur e.
P. 233
Ex a mple 8. 1 Ti tl e f or a Draw i ng
In thi s ti tl e f or a draw i ng, onl y the speci f i c apparatus show n i s i denti f i ed.
Ex a mple 8. 2 Ti tl e f or a Di agram
Fi g. 1. Schem ati c di agram of the r el ati onshi p of the r etur n cycl e dur i ng r esetti ng of ventr i cul ar
tachycar di a to the absence or pr esence of el ectr ocar di ographi c f usi on.
In thi s ti tl e, “schem ati c di agram ” i denti f i es the ty pe of f i gur e show n and the r em ai ni ng w or ds
i denti f y the concept show n.
Ex a mple 8. 3 Ti tl e f or Pr i m ar y Ev i dence
Fi g. 1. Br i ghtf i el d l i ght m i cr ograph of a segm ent of a bacter i al f i l am ent show i ng i ntracel l ul ar sul f ur
i ncl usi ons.
In thi s ti tl e, “br i ghtf i el d l i ght m i cr ograph” i denti f i es the ty pe of f i gur e show n and the r em ai ni ng
w or ds i denti f y the bi ol ogi cal speci m en show n (a segm ent of a bacter i al f i l am ent) and an i m por tant
f eatur e (i ntracel l ul ar sul f ur i ncl usi ons).
Ef f ect of X on Y i n Z,
w her e X i s the i ndependent var i abl e, Y i s the dependent var i abl e, and Z i s the ani m al or popul ati on
and m ater i al studi ed (Ex am pl e 8. 4). In graphs f or studi es i n hum ans, the ter m “hum ans” i s of ten
om i tted f r om the ti tl e (as i n Ex am pl e 8. 14 bel ow ) unl ess the data ar e f or a speci f i c subpopul ati on.
Ex a mple 8. 4 Ef f ect of X on Y i n Z
Fi g. 1. Ef f ect of i ncr easi ng concentrati ons of doxor ubi ci n on r el ease of hi stam i ne and l actate
dehydr ogenase f r om dog m astocy tom a cel l s.
Al ter nati vel y, the dependent var i abl e can com e f i r st i n the standar d ti tl e. In thi s case, the ti tl e i s i n
a f or m such as
Y i n r esponse to X i n Z
Y dur i ng X i n Z.
P. 234
Ex a mple 8. 5 Y i n r esponse to X i n Z
Fi g. 1. Rel ease of 1 4 Cl abel ed l i pi d and l actate dehydr ogenase i n r esponse to i ncr easi ng
concentrati ons of the i onophor e A23187 i n al veol ar ty pe II cel l s f r om rats.
Ex a mple 8. 6 Y dur i ng X i n Z
Fi g. 1. Mean ar ter i al pr essur e bef or e, dur i ng, and af ter sti m ul ati on of the car oti d ner ve i n young and
ol d pi gl ets.
For graphs of data f r om ex per i m ents that have no i ndependent var i abl e, the ti tl e states the
dependent var i abl e (Y) and the ani m al or m ater i al , or both (Z). The f or m i s
Y i n Z.
Ex a mple 8. 7 Y i n Z
Som eti m es the ty pe of f i gur e show n i s al so stated i n the ti tl e of a graph, usual l y f or hi stogram s and
f r equency pol ygons, w hi ch show f r equency di str i buti ons, and al so f or speci al ty pes of graphs, such
as Scatchar d pl ots (see Ex am pl e 8. 10 bel ow ).
Fi g. 1. Inhi bi ti on of Y by X i n Z,
Fi g. 1. Ef f ect of X on Y i n Z,
Fi g. 1. Inhi bi ti on of anti v i ral r esponse i n MDAMB231 (hum an br east car ci nom a) cel l s by
ox y phenbutazone.
Fi g. 1. El evati on of acutephase r eactants af ter a si ngl e 3hour ex posur e to ul trav i ol et radi ati on.
Overloaded Titles
Do not over l oad the ti tl e w i th detai l s. Instead gi ve detai l s i n the r est of the l egend.
Abbreviations in Titles
Avoi d usi ng abbr ev i ati ons i n the ti tl e so that the r eader does not have to sear ch thr ough the tex t of
the paper to f i nd the m eani ng.
P. 235
Fi g. 1. Repr esentati ve Scatchar d pl ots of the doser esponse of [ 1 2 5 I] T 3 bi ndi ng to l ung nucl ei f r om
(A) adul t and (B) 28dayol d f etal rabbi ts.
In thi s ex am pl e, the par ts of the com posi te ar e i denti f i ed by the w or ds “(A) adul t” and “(B) 28day
ol d” i n the ti tl e. The r est of the ti tl e i denti f i es the topi c show n i n both graphs.
Fi g. 1. Repr esentati ve cor onar y angi ogram s i n a pati ent w i th or gani c stabl e obstr ucti on w i thout
thr om bus. Insets show the el ectr ocar di ogram (l ead V 4 ) obtai ned dur i ng each angi ographi c
assessm ent. A. The i ni ti al appearance of the l ef t cor onar y ar ter i es dur i ng chest pai n. N ote the
eccentr i c segm ental nar r ow i ng (ar r ow ) i n the pr ox i m al l ef t anter i or descendi ng cor onar y ar ter y and
the del ayed di stal f i l l i ng. B. The unchanged appearance of the cor onar y ar ter i es af ter a 60m i n
i nf usi on of ur ok i nase (960, 000 U ). C. The unchanged appearance of the cor onar y ar ter i es 4 w eek s
af ter the i ni ti al angi ogram s.
In thi s ex am pl e, the ti tl e states the topi c show n i n al l thr ee par ts of the com posi te, and the topi c of
each par t i s i denti f i ed by a separate subti tl e (under l i ned). N ote that subti tl es B and C m ake a poi nt:
“unchanged appearance.”
Experimental Details
Gi ve just enough ex per i m ental detai l s to per m i t the r eader to under stand the f i gur e. If no
ex per i m ental detai l s ar e needed, do not gi ve any. In l egends f or graphs, do not si m pl y r epeat the
i nf or m ati on i n the ax i s l abel s. Wr i te ex per i m ental detai l s i n sentences.
Definitions
Sy m bol s, l i ne or bar patter ns, and abbr ev i ati ons that ar e not def i ned i n the f i gur e or ear l i er i n the
l egend shoul d be def i ned af ter ex per i m ental detai l s ar e gi ven.
For def i ni ti ons of sy m bol s or l i ne patter ns, draw the sy m bol or l i ne patter n i n the l egend. For
ex am pl e, ○, contr ol ” (rather than “open ci r cl es, contr ol ,” w hi ch i s not v i sual l y ef f ecti ve). Onl y one
sy m bol i s needed, not tw o sy m bol s connected by a l i ne. For bar patter ns, be car ef ul that the patter ns
i n the
P. 236
l egend m atch the patter ns i n the graph. For ex am pl e, i f the bar patter n i s
, not
If the sam e sy m bol s, l i ne or bar patter ns, or abbr ev i ati ons ar e used i n m or e than one f i gur e, def i ne
them i n the l egend f or the f i r st r el evant f i gur e onl y. In succeedi ng l egends, r ef er the r eader to that
l egend.
Fi g. 3. Autor egul ati on of cor onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng bal l oon pum pi ng. Abbr ev i ati ons as i n Fi g. 1.
Statistical Information
The ex pl anati on of stati sti cal i nf or m ati on i n graphs shoul d i ncl ude the f ol l ow i ng detai l s: w hether the
data poi nts or bar s r epr esent i ndi v i dual , m ean, or m edi an val ues; w hether er r or bar s r epr esent
standar d dev i ati ons (SD), standar d er r or s of the m ean (SEM), conf i dence i nter val s (CI), or ranges;
and the sam pl e si ze (n).
Avoi d w r i ti ng “n = 12.” It i s m uch cl ear er to be speci f i c—f or ex am pl e, “12 sam pl es,” “12
m easur em ents,” “12 dogs.” What does “n = 12” m ean i n thi s ex am pl e? “Fi g. 1. Resul ts of gl ucose
absor pti on i n m i l l i gram s (m eans ± SD) obtai ned by the segm ental per f usi on techni que (n = 12).”
Tw el ve pati ents? Tw el ve sam pl es f r om one pati ent? Tw el ve sam pl es f r om f our pati ents?
For data i n bar graphs that have been anal y zed by a stati sti cal test, state w hi ch val ues w er e
com par ed by stati sti cal anal y si s and the si gni f i cance val ue (f or ex am pl e, the P val ue). It i s al so
hel pf ul to nam e the stati sti cal test used. Tw o way s to state w hi ch val ues w er e com par ed and to
i denti f y the P val ue ar e show n i n Ex am pl es 8. 15 and 8. 16.
Fi g. 2. Ef f ect of dopam i ne on the m ajor deter m i nants of l ef tventr i cul ar ci r cum f er enti al endsy stol i c
wal l str ess. *, ** si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent f r om contr ol , *P < 0. 05, **P < 0. 01, by AN OVA.
In thi s l egend, the ti tl e i s f ol l ow ed by an ex pl anati on of the stati sti cal anal y si s. Fi r st the val ues
bei ng com par ed ar e stated (“si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent f r om contr ol ”), then the P val ues ar e i denti f i ed,
and l ast the stati sti cal test used i s nam ed.
A shor ter way of pr esenti ng the sam e stati sti cal i nf or m ati on i s “v s. contr ol .”
Fi g. 2. Ef f ect of dopam i ne on the m ajor deter m i nants of l ef tventr i cul ar ci r cum f er enti al endsy stol i c
wal l str ess. *P < 0. 05, **P < 0. 01 v s. contr ol by AN OVA.
P. 237
Other Information
In addi ti on to these standar d par ts of a f i gur e l egend, a l egend m ay al so i ncl ude other i nf or m ati on,
such as statem ents poi nti ng out an unusual or an i nter esti ng f eatur e.
Fi g. 6. Ef f ects of hy per ther m i a (43°C) on i m m une cy tol y si s by cy totox i c l y m phocy tes and on sur v i val
of P815 m astocy tom a cel l s. The cur ves w er e pl otted f r om the data i n Fi gs. 3 and 5.
In thi s l egend, the l ast sentence cal l s the r eader 's attenti on to the r el ati onshi p betw een thi s f i gur e
and pr ev i ous f i gur es.
Fi g. 1. Enddi astol i c angi ographi c appearance of (A) the r i ght ventr i cl e i n the dog pl aced i n the r i ght
l ateral decubi tus posi ti on (35m m f ram e) and (B) the l ef t ventr i cl e of the sam e dog. N ote how the
anter i or bor der of the l ef t ventr i cul ar cav i ty appr oaches the anter i or bor der of the hear t, w hi ch has
been r etouched f or cl ar i ty .
In thi s l egend, the l ast sentence poi nts out a f eatur e of par ti cul ar i nter est and al so cal l s the r eader 's
attenti on to the r etouchi ng of the photograph. N ote that w hen descr i bi ng w hat the f i gur e show s, you
use pr esent tense (“appr oaches the anter i or bor der ”).
Indicating Results
Resul ts as such ar e not nor m al l y gi ven i n f i gur e l egends, si nce that w oul d r epeat the Resul ts secti on.
How ever, r esul ts can be i ndi cated. To i ndi cate r esul ts i n graphs, i ncl ude the poi nt the graph m akes
(that i s, the r esul t show n by the graph) i n the ti tl e (as i n Ex am pl es 8. 8 and 8. 9 above: “Inhi bi ti on of
anti v i ral r esponse… ,” “El evati on of acutephase r eactants…”). To i ndi cate r esul ts i n f i gur es show i ng
pr i m ar y ev i dence, poi nt out a f eatur e i n the f i gur e by w r i ti ng “N ote…” (as i n Ex am pl es 8. 11 and 8. 18
above) or “… show i ng…” (as i n Ex am pl e 8. 3 above).
Republishing Figures
To r epubl i sh a f i gur e that has al r eady been publ i shed, f i r st obtai n per m i ssi on f r om the copy r i ght
hol der (usual l y the publ i sher ); thi s i s a l egal r equi r em ent. Al so obtai n per m i ssi on f r om the author
(unl ess you ar e the author ); thi s i s com m on cour tesy. Standar d per m i ssi on f or m s ar e avai l abl e f r om
your publ i sher.
In your paper, gi ve f ul l cr edi t to the sour ce and the publ i sher by ci ti ng the r ef er ence i n the f i gur e
l egend and stati ng that you have per m i ssi on to r epubl i sh the f i gur e. Tw o possi bl e way s of gi v i ng
cr edi t ar e show n i n Ex am pl es 8. 19 and 8. 20. If the copy r i ght hol der speci f i es another way, use i t.
Cr edi t i s al way s gi ven as the l ast i tem i n the f i gur e l egend. The com pl ete r ef er ence i s i ncl uded i n the
l i st of r ef er ences at the end of the tex t.
P. 238
Fr om r ef. 7, w i th per m i ssi on f r om the Am er i can Rev i ew of Respi rator y Di sease.
You m ust obtai n per m i ssi on w hether you use al l of the or i gi nal l y publ i shed f i gur e, use par t of the
or i gi nal l y publ i shed f i gur e, or use a m odi f i ed v er si on of the or i gi nal l y publ i shed f i gur e. For m odi f i ed
ver si ons, one possi bl e cr edi t l i ne i s i l l ustrated i n Ex am pl e 8. 21.
TABLES
In sci enti f i c r esear ch paper s, tabl es ar e com m onl y used f or tw o pur poses: to pr esent back gr ound
i nf or m ati on r el ated to m ethods (f or ex am pl e, the character i sti cs of pati ents i n a study, Tabl e 1) and
to pr esent data that suppor t r esul ts (Tabl es 2, 3, 4 and 5). Tabl es that pr esent data, i n tur n, have tw o
pur poses: to pr esent i ndi v i dual data f or al l the subjects, ani m al s, or speci m ens studi ed or to m ake a
poi nt. Tabl es that pr esent i ndi v i dual data can get rather l ar ge. How ever, thei r advantage i s that other
w or ker s, anal y zi ng the data f or other pur poses or com par i ng the tabl e w i th other si m i l ar tabl es,
m i ght see tr ends or r el ati onshi ps the author di d not noti ce.
Birth Age a t P os t
W e ight G e s ta tiona l Study c onc e ptua l
Infa nt Se x (g) Age (w k ) (w k ) Age (w k ) Dia gnos is
P. 239
Al l tabl es, w hatever thei r pur pose, have the sam e par ts and ar e ar ranged i n the sam e way. Si nce
tabl es ar e a v i sual m edi um , i t i s i m por tant to ar range tabl es cl ear l y, f or m ax i m al v i sual i m pact, so
that the r eader can f i nd the speci f i c data or see the poi nt easi l y.
Tabl es have f our m ai n par ts: the ti tl e, col um n headi ngs, the body, and f ootnotes.
The Title
The ti tl e of a tabl e, l i ke the ti tl e of a f i gur e, states the topi c or the poi nt of the tabl e. The ti tl e
shoul d be br i ef. The detai l s i ncl uded i n a ti tl e depend on the ty pe of tabl e.
For tabl es that gi ve back gr ound i nf or m ati on, the ti tl e shoul d state the topi c of the i nf or m ati on l i sted
i n the body of the tabl e (that i s, the var i abl es) and al so the ani m al or popul ati on, the m ater i al
descr i bed, or both. The f or m i s
Y in Z or Y of Z.
For ex am pl e, i n the ti tl e of Tabl e 1 (above), “Cl i ni cal Character i sti cs of the Inf ants,” “cl i ni cal
character i sti cs” i s the topi c (Y) and “the i nf ants” (that i s, the
P. 240
i nf ants i n the study ) i s the popul ati on descr i bed (Z). In the ti tl e “Phosphol i pi d Com posi ti on of Car di ac
Ly m ph f r om N or m al Dogs,” “phosphol i pi d com posi ti on” i s the topi c (Y), “car di ac l y m ph” i s the
m ater i al descr i bed (Z), and “nor m al dogs” ar e the ani m al s (Z).
Me a n Me a n
P ulmona ry s ys te mic
a rte ria l P ulmona ry va s c ula r a rte ria l
Ve ntila tion pre s s ure re s is ta nc e pre s s ure He a rt ra te Ca rdia c output
c ondition (mmHg) (mmHg/lite r/min/k g) (mmHg) (be a ts /min) (lite r/min/k g)
N or m ox i c
Hy pox i c
For tabl es that pr esent data f r om ex per i m ents that have both i ndependent and dependent var i abl es,
the ti tl e shoul d state the i ndependent var i abl e(s) (X), the dependent var i abl e(s) (Y), and the ani m al
or popul ati on, the m ater i al
P. 241
descr i bed, or both (Z). It i s not necessar y to m enti on the contr ol s i n the ti tl e. Tw o standar d f or m s
f or these ti tl es ar e
Me a n Me a n
P ulmona ry s ys te mic
a rte ria l P ulmona ry va s c ula r a rte ria l
Ve ntila tion pre s s ure re s is ta nc e pre s s ure He a rt ra te Ca rdia c output
c ondition (mmHg) (mmHg/lite r/min/k g) (mmHg) (be a ts /min) (lite r/min/k g)
N or m ox i c
Hy pox i c
Ef f ect of X on Y i n Z
Y dur i ng X i n Z.
For ex am pl e, i n the ti tl e “Ef f ects of Methachol i ne on El ectr i cal Pr oper ti es and Ion Fl uxes i n Tracheal
Epi thel i um Fr om Cats and Fer r ets,” “m ethachol i ne” i s the i ndependent var i abl e, “el ectr i cal pr oper ti es
and i on f l uxes” ar e the dependent var i abl es, “tracheal epi thel i um ” i s the m ater i al , and “cats and
f er r ets” ar e the ani m al s. (See al so the ti tl e f or Tabl e 2. ) In the ti tl e “Pl asm a Var i abl es Bef or e and
Af ter Pr otei n Loss i n Lam bs,” “pl asm a var i abl es” ar e the dependent var i abl es, “bef or e and af ter ” i s
used i nstead of “dur i ng,” “pr otei n l oss” i s the i ndependent var i abl e, and “l am bs” ar e the ani m al s.
(See al so Tabl e 3. )
Even better than stati ng the topi c i n the ti tl e of the tabl e i s stati ng the poi nt. When the ti tl e states
the poi nt, the r eader k now s ex actl y w hat to l ook
P. 242
f or i n the tabl e. For ex am pl e, i n the ti tl e “Incr ease i n Hel i ci ty of Abor ti f aci ent Pr otei ns i n the
Pr esence of Sodi um Dodecy l Sul f ate,” “i ncr ease i n hel i ci ty ” i s the poi nt.
To keep ti tl es br i ef, use a categor y ter m i nstead of l i sti ng al l the dependent var i abl es. For ex am pl e,
i n Tabl e 3, “hem ody nam i c var i abl es” i s the categor y ter m f or al l the dependent var i abl es i n the
tabl e.
To ensur e that the ti tl e r el ates cl ear l y to the tabl e, use the sam e key ter m s i n the ti tl e as i n the
col um n headi ngs, or use a categor y ter m i n the ti tl e i nstead of tw o or m or e col um n headi ngs. (The
key ter m s and categor y ter m shoul d be the sam e as those used i n the tex t. ) For ex am pl e, i n Tabl e 1,
“i nf ants” i n the ti tl e cor r esponds w i th “i nf ant” i n the f i r st col um n headi ng, and “cl i ni cal
character i sti cs” i s a categor y ter m f or the r em ai ni ng col um n headi ngs (sex , bi r th w ei ght, gestati onal
age, age at study, postconceptual age, di agnosi s).
Column Headings
Col um n headi ngs consi st of headi ngs that i denti f y the i tem s l i sted i n the col um ns bel ow them ,
subheadi ngs as necessar y, and uni ts of m easur em ent as necessar y. Col um n headi ngs shoul d be br i ef.
Headings
Ther e ar e tw o m ai n gr oups of headi ngs, cor r espondi ng to the tw o m ai n gr oups of i nf or m ati on i n the
body of the tabl e: the i tem s f or w hi ch data ar e gi ven, i n one or m or e col um ns on the l ef t si de of the
tabl e, and the data, i n one or m or e col um ns on the r i ght. In tabl es f or ex per i m ents that have both
i ndependent and dependent var i abl es, the i ndependent var i abl e(s) ar e i n the col um n(s) on the l ef t
and the dependent var i abl e(s) ar e i n the col um n(s) on the r i ght, as i n Tabl es 2, 3, 4 and 5. For
ex am pl e, i n Tabl e 3, the col um n l abel ed “Venti l ator y condi ti on” i s the i ndependent var i abl e and the
r em ai ni ng col um ns ar e the dependent var i abl es. In Tabl e 4, the col um ns l abel ed “Incubati on
condi ti ons” and “Sam pl e” descr i be the i ndependent var i abl e and the r em ai ni ng col um ns ar e the
dependent var i abl e.
Each ty pe of i nf or m ati on shoul d have i ts ow n ver ti cal col um n, and each col um n shoul d have i ts ow n
headi ng. Do not com bi ne tw o ty pes of i nf or m ati on i n one col um n. For ex am pl e, under a col um n
headed “Dr ug,” onl y the nam es of the dr ugs shoul d appear, not both the dr ugs and the doses.
Do not om i t the headi ng that states the nam e of the f i r st col um n on the l ef t. For ex am pl e, i n Tabl e 3,
the f i r st col um n on the l ef t (the i ndependent var i abl e) needs a headi ng (“Venti l ati on condi ti on”) just
as the other col um ns (the dependent var i abl es) do.
Do not om i t the col um n headi ng that states the nam e of the dependent var i abl e [f or ex am pl e,
“Recover y (%)” i n Tabl e 5], even i n si m pl e tabl es that have onl y one dependent var i abl e that i s
nam ed i n the ti tl e. It i s cl ear est f or the r eader i f the dependent var i abl e i s nam ed both i n the ti tl e
and i n the col um n headi ngs. For ex am pl e, i n a tabl e ti tl ed “Ef f ects of Enzy m es on Anti body
Reacti v i ty,” the col um n headi ngs shoul d not be m er el y “Enzy m e,” “4E4,” “3F11,” “4D4,” “4D8.” The
l ast f our headi ngs, w hi ch ar e nam es of anti bodi es, shoul d be subheadi ngs under “Anti body Reacti v i ty
(% of contr ol ),” because the data i n the col um ns ar e anti body r eacti v i ty, not ty pes of anti bodi es.
In addi ti on to the col um n headi ngs and col um ns f or the i ndependent and dependent var i abl es, a thi r d
col um n headi ng and col um n can be gi ven: sam pl e si ze (n) (see Tabl e 2, “N um ber of ex pl ants”).
LP C PC FA
Te mpe ra ture Time Sa mple re gion re gion re gion
°C min % % %
4 30 [ 1 4 C]PC 1 98 1
+ buf f er
[ 1 4 C]PC 1 97 1
+ l y m ph
[ 1 4 C]LPC 99 ND ND
+ buf f er
[ 1 4 C]LPC 99 ND ND
+ l y m ph
37 90 [ 1 4 C]PC 1 97 1
+ buf f er
[ 1 4 C]PC 2 94 2
+ l y m ph
[ 1 4 C]LPC 80 1 19
+ buf f er
[ 1 4 C]LPC 96 1 2
+ l y m ph
Di si ntegrati ons per m i nute (dpm ) w er e obtai ned f r om m easur ed counts per m i nute af ter
cor r ecti on f or quenchi ng usi ng a 1 4 C l abel as an i nter nal standar d. Val ues ar e m eans of
thr ee ex per i m ents. TLC, thi nl ayer chr om atography ; LPC, l y sophosphati dy l chol i ne; PC,
phosphati dy l chol i ne; FA, f atty aci d; N D, not detectabl e.
Tabl e 4 pr esents data that m ake the poi nts that ther e was v i r tual l y no hydr ol y si s of
l y sophosphati dy l chol i ne or phosphati dy l chol i ne i n car di ac l y m ph f r om dogs af ter i ncubati on
at 4°C f or 30 m i n and that ther e was ver y l i ttl e hydr ol y si s af ter i ncubati on at 37°C f or 90
m i n. In thi s tabl e, the i ndependent var i abl e i s descr i bed i n the thr ee col um ns on the l ef t and
the dependent var i abl e i n the thr ee col um ns on the r i ght. The uni ts of m easur em ent (°C,
m i n, and %) ar e pl aced or r epeated bel ow the col um n headi ngs and thus ar e easy to see.
Tr ends i n thi s tabl e r ead acr oss the r ow s. Abbr ev i ati ons ar e used to keep the ti tl e, col um n
headi ngs, and col um ns com pact. The abbr ev i ati ons ar e def i ned i n f ootnotes. “N D” i s used to
i ndi cate m i ssi ng data and i s def i ned i n a f ootnote.
P. 243
Subheadings
When necessar y, subheadi ngs can be used to subdi v i de a headi ng i nto tw o or m or e categor i es. For
ex am pl e, i n the col um n headi ng
the dependent var i abl e and the uni t of m easur em ent ar e i n the m ai n headi ng and tw o si tes i n w hi ch
thi s var i abl e was m easur ed ar e i n the subheadi ngs. (See al so Tabl es 2, 4, and 5. )
N ote that ter m s i n col um n headi ngs and subheadi ngs ar e si ngul ar, not pl ural (f or ex am pl e,
“Recover y,” not “Recover i es”).
Units of Measurement
U ni ts of m easur em ent ar e gi ven (usual l y i n par entheses) af ter or bel ow the nam e of the var i abl e i n
the col um n headi ng. Repeati ng the uni t of m easur em ent
P. 244
af ter each val ue i s i nef f i ci ent. For ex am pl e, i n Tabl e 4, the second col um n i s appr opr i atel y
Re c ove ry (% of tota l)
Me dium 1. 063 1. 21 1. 212 1. 21 Tota l 1. 063 1. 21 1. 21 1. 21
T 1B B T T 1B 2B T
Tr y to choose uni ts of m easur em ent that el i m i nate unnecessar y zer os. For ex am pl e, i f the uni t i s
gram s and the val ues i n the col um n ar e 120, 000, 98, 000, etc., change the uni t to k i l ogram s and
r epor t the val ues as 120, 98, etc. Make the sam e change i n the tex t.
The contr ol i s conventi onal l y the f i r st i tem i n the l i st of i ndependent var i abl es. Thus, contr ol data
ar e gi ven i n the top r ow of the tabl e (Tabl e 2). In Tabl e 3, contr ol data ar e gi ven i n the top r ow i n
each gr oup (N or m ox i c, Hy pox i c).
When the i ndependent var i abl e i n the col um n on the l ef t contai ns tw o or thr ee gr oups, one cl ear way
to show the gr oups i s to pl ace the gr oup nam e at the f ar l ef t of the tabl e and i ndent the i tem s i n the
f i r st col um n under them , as i n Tabl e 3 (the tw o gr oups of i ndependent var i abl es ar e N or m ox i c and
Hy pox i c). Another possi bi l i ty i s to pl ace gr oup nam es at the center of the tabl e rather than at the f ar
l ef t (see Tabl e 4 i n Woodf or d, Chap. 10, Desi gn of Tabl es and Fi gur es).
Presentation of Data
In the col um ns on the r i ght, the data ar e usual l y pr esented i n num ber s, but data m ay al so be i n
w or ds (see Tabl e 1, l ast col um n), l etter s (Tabl e 1, second col um n), or sy m bol s such as + .
Arrangement of Data
Ar range the col um ns and r ow s of data to r eveal tr ends or to per m i t easy com par i son. Tr ends can be
r ead ei ther dow n a col um n (Tabl es 3, 5) or acr oss a r ow (Tabl e 4). Com par i sons can be m ade
betw een adjacent col um ns (Tabl e 2) or betw een adjacent r ow s (Tabl e 3, top tw o r ow s; Tabl e 4).
Com par i son acr oss i nter veni ng col um ns or r ow s i s m or e di f f i cul t (Tabl e 2, al l f our r ow s; Tabl e 3,
bottom f our r ow s).
Placement of SDs
A pr obl em ar i ses w hen data ar e pr esented as (f or ex am pl e) m ean and standar d dev i ati on (SD). If the
SDs ar e pl aced to the r i ght of the m eans, i t i s di f f i cul t to r ead acr oss the r ow s or to com par e tw o
adjacent col um ns. If the SDs ar e pl aced bel ow the m eans, i t i s di f f i cul t to r ead dow n the col um ns or
to com par e tw o adjacent r ow s. To deci de w her e to pl ace the SDs, consi der w hether you want r eader s
to r ead acr oss the r ow s (i f so, pl ace SDs bel ow the m eans, as i n Tabl e 3A) or to r ead dow n the
col um ns (i f so, pl ace SDs to the r i ght of the m eans, as i n Tabl e 3). If r eader s need to r ead both
acr oss and dow n, tr y both pl acem ents of the SDs and see w hi ch you pr ef er. Another poi nt to consi der
i s that pl aci ng the SDs bel ow the m eans can hel p keep the tabl e f r om getti ng too w i de. Fi nal l y, a
tr i ck f or hel pi ng the r eader sk i p over the SDs i s to pl ace the SDs i n par entheses (as i n Tabl e 3A)
i nstead of usi ng ± .
Alignment of Data
In each col um n, the data shoul d al i gn on the deci m al poi nt, w hether or not a deci m al poi nt i s pr esent
(Tabl es 4, 5). For data that ar e gi ven as (f or ex am pl e) m ean ± SD, the data shoul d al so al i gn on the
± (Tabl es 2, 3). In Tabl es 2, 3, 4 and 5, because the i ndependent var i abl e i s on the l ef t and the
dependent var i abl es ar e on the r i ght, the val ues i n each col um n al i gn neatl y on the deci m al poi nt,
thus m ak i ng di f f er ences betw een num ber s easy to see.
LV SF (m m ) 50. 7 ± 7. 1 49. 4 ± 7. 5*
LV AP (m m ) 56. 7 ± 5. 2 56. 0 ± 5. 5
RV SF (m m ) 36. 5 ± 5. 2 36. 7 ± 4. 9
LV SF (m m ) 43. 0 ± 5. 2 42. 0 ± 6. 0
LV AP (m m ) 53. 5 ± 4. 4 53. 3 ± 5. 3
RV SF (m m ) 36. 3 ± 3. 3 37. 6 ± 2. 8
RV 13 ± 5 10 ± 7
PA 14 ± 4 24 ± 9*
LV 113 ± 23 105 ± 28
RV 31 ± 9 38 ± 15 ‡
PA 29 ± 7 38 ± 13 §
Val ues ar e m eans ± SD. LV, l ef t ventr i cl e; RV, r i ght ventr i cl e; PA, pul m onar y ar ter y ; SF,
septal f r ee wal l ; AP, anter oposter i or. * P < 0. 01, † P < 0. 05, ‡ P < 0. 06, § P < 0. 02 v s. the
“bef or e” val ue, by ttest.
Tabl e 6 pr esents data that m ake the poi nt that pul m onar y m i cr ovascul ar i njur y caused
si gni f i cant decr eases i n the l ef t ventr i cul ar septal f r ee wal l di m ensi on, l ef t ventr i cul ar ar ea,
and l ef t ventr i cul ar enddi astol i c pr essur e. In thi s tabl e, the dependent var i abl es ar e l i sted
dow n the f i r st col um n on the l ef t rather than acr oss the top to save space. Because data ar e
not al i gned on the deci m al poi nt but onl y on the ± , the di f f er ent m agni tudes ar e not easy to
see at f i r st gl ance.
P. 246
LV SF (m m ) 50. 7 ± 7. 1 49. 4 ± 7. 5 0. 01
LV AP (m m ) 56. 7 ± 5. 2 56. 0 ± 5. 5 NS
LV ar ea (m m 2 ) 2730 ± 630 2640 ± 670 0. 05
RV SF (m m ) 36. 5 ± 5. 2 36. 7 ± 4. 9 NS
LV SF (m m ) 43. 0 ± 5. 2 42. 0 ± 6. 0 NS
LV AP (m m ) 53. 5 ± 4. 4 53. 3 ± 5. 3 NS
RV SF (m m ) 36. 3 ± 3. 3 37. 6 ± 2. 8 NS
LV 13 ± 8 8 ± 6 0. 05
RV 13 ± 5 10 ± 7 NS
PA 14 ± 4 24 ± 9 0. 01
LV 113 ± 23 105 ± 28 NS
RV 31 ± 9 38 ± 15 0. 06
PA 29 ± 7 38 ± 13 0. 02
Val ues ar e m eans ± SD. LV, l ef t ventr i cl e; RV, r i ght ventr i cl e; PA, pul m onar y ar ter y ; SF,
septal f r ee wal l ; AP, anter oposter i or. N S, not si gni f i cant, by ttest.
Tabl e 6A i l l ustrates how usi ng a col um n of P val ues to show stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant
di f f er ences, rather than usi ng sy m bol s as i n Tabl e 6, has l ess v i sual i m pact than sy m bol s do
and adds unnecessar y bul k to the tabl e.
It i s unnecessar y to i denti f y di f f er ences that ar e not stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant. Keep i n m i nd that tabl es
ar e a v i sual m edi um . A * pr otr udi ng f r om a col um n of al i gned num ber s i s a cl ear v i sual si gn of a
stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ence (Tabl e 2). The absence of a * i s a cl ear v i sual si gn of no si gni f i cant
P. 248
di f f er ence. Addi ng i n other sy m bol s, or N S (f or “not si gni f i cant”), just cr eates cl utter (Tabl e 6A). In
addi ti on, N S i s uni nf or m ati ve: was the P val ue sm al l (0. 07, f or ex am pl e) or l ar ge (0. 7)?
Footnotes
Footnotes ar e phrases or sentences pl aced bel ow the body of the tabl e that ex pl ai n i tem s i n the ti tl e,
col um n headi ngs, or body of the tabl e. The i tem s ex pl ai ned ar e usual l y ex per i m ental m ethods
(Tabl es 2 and 4), the m eani ng of abbr ev i ati ons or sy m bol s (Tabl e 4), and stati sti cal i nf or m ati on
(Tabl es 2, 3, and 6).
In addi ti on, f ootnotes can be used to substi tute f or a col um n of val ues that ar e al l the sam e. For
ex am pl e, i f al l data ar e f or 11 di al y si s pr ocedur es, a col um n f or sam pl e si ze i s not necessar y.
Instead, the val ue can be m enti oned i n a f ootnote, pr ef erabl y i n the sam e f ootnote that def i nes the
data as m eans ± SD: “Data ar e m eans ± SD f or 11 di al y si s pr ocedur es” (not “Data ar e m eans ± SD,
n = 11”). General l y, “n” by i tsel f i s not a cl ear abbr ev i ati on ei ther i n a col um n headi ng or i n a
f ootnote. It i s al way s cl ear er to w r i te “N um ber of Sam pl es,” “N um ber of Rabbi ts,” or w hatever f or a
col um n headi ng (see Tabl e 2), or “i n 25 sam pl es,” “f or 16 rabbi ts,” or w hatever i n a f ootnote (see
Tabl e 3).
To ex pl ai n stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ences betw een data, the usual practi ce i s to put a f ootnote
sy m bol , such as *, af ter each val ue that i s di f f er ent and then i n the f ootnote to state the stati sti c,
w hat val ues you ar e com par i ng, and the test used. Tw o phrases com m onl y used f or ex pl ai ni ng
si gni f i cant di f f er ences ar e “*si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent f r om the contr ol val ue, P < 0. 01 by (nam e of the
stati sti cal test)” and “*P < 0. 01 v s. contr ol by (nam e of the stati sti cal test)” (or 0. 02, or w hatever ;
or v s. another tr eatm ent gr oup, etc. ). The i m por tant thi ng i s not to w r i te si m pl y “*P < 0. 05,”
because then the r eader has to guess w hi ch val ues you ar e com par i ng. Al though com par i sons ar e
of ten w i th contr ol data, they can al so be w i th val ues obtai ned af ter other tr eatm ents, so i t i s
cl ear est al way s to state w hi ch val ues ar e bei ng com par ed (see Tabl es 2, 3, 6).
The or der of i nf or m ati on i n f ootnotes i s the sam e as the or der of i nf or m ati on i n a f i gur e l egend: f i r st
ex per i m ental detai l s (i n sentences), then def i ni ti ons of abbr ev i ati ons and sy m bol s not def i ned ear l i er
i n the f ootnotes, and f i nal l y stati sti cal detai l s. One excepti on i s that the statem ent of how data ar e
sum m ar i zed (f or ex am pl e, “Val ues ar e m ean ± SD”) f r equentl y appear s bef or e def i ni ti ons of
abbr ev i ati ons (see Tabl es 4 and 6).
Footnotes shoul d be br i ef and f ew. They shoul d not over bal ance the body of the tabl e.
Footnotes ar e usual l y i denti f i ed by super scr i pt sy m bol s or super scr i pt l etter s. One standar d ser i es of
f ootnote sy m bol s i s *, †, ‡, §, ||, ¶, # , **, ††, etc. (Tabl e 5). Letter s used to i denti f y f ootnotes ar e
i n l ow er case: a, b, c, etc. (Tabl e 1). When f ootnotes ar e used onl y to show stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant
di f f er ences,
P. 249
som eti m es the f ol l ow i ng ser i es of sy m bol s i s used: *P < 0. 05, **P < 0. 01, ***P < 0. 001. Som e
jour nal s do not use f ootnote sy m bol s or l etter s f or f ootnotes that appl y to the enti r e tabl e but onl y
f or f ootnotes that appl y to a si ngl e i tem i n the tabl e.
Footnote sy m bol s or l etter s ar e pl aced i n sequence f r om l ef t to r i ght and then dow n, the sam e as the
di r ecti on i n w hi ch w e r ead (Tabl e 5).
N ever thel ess, i n general , a tabl e shoul d have enough data to be m or e ef f i ci ent than pr esenti ng the
data i n the tex t, shoul d be sm al l enough to be r eadabl e, and shoul d be as com pact as possi bl e
w i thout sacr i f i ci ng cl ar i ty. The sol uti on to a tabl e that has ver y f ew data i s usual l y to om i t the tabl e
and to w r i te the val ues i n the tex t. Som e sol uti ons to a tabl e that i s too l ar ge ar e to om i t
unnecessar y col um ns or r ow s of i nf or m ati on; to keep the ti tl e, col um n headi ngs, and f ootnotes br i ef ;
and, i f necessar y, to br eak the tabl e i nto tw o sm al l er tabl es. (For an excel l ent ex am pl e of one cl ear
tabl e cr eated f r om tw o excessi vel y l ar ge tabl es by om i tti ng unnecessar y r ow s of data and
r edesi gni ng the r em ai ni ng i nf or m ati on, see “Tabl es w i th Several Si m ul taneous Faul ts” i n Woodf or d,
Chap. 10, Desi gn of Tabl es and Fi gur es. ) In par ti cul ar, i f the pur pose of the tabl e i s to m ake a poi nt,
do ever y thi ng i n your pow er to m ake the tabl e as sm al l as possi bl e so that the poi nt i s appar ent, not
bur i ed i n al l the num ber s.
Om i t a col um n of easi l y cal cul ated data that ar e not central to the poi nt of the stor y. For
ex am pl e, i f you r epor t str oke vol um e, hear t rate, and m i nute vol um e (w hi ch equal s str oke
vol um e ti m es hear t rate), one of those var i abl es coul d pr obabl y be om i tted.
Om i t a col um n that contai ns onl y one val ue; r epor t that val ue i n the tex t.
Om i t a col um n i n w hi ch al l or m ost val ues ar e the sam e; put the i nf or m ati on i n a shor t f ootnote
or i n the tex t.
Om i t a col um n of P val ues; put sy m bol s af ter the val ues that ar e di f f er ent.
To keep col um n headi ngs br i ef and thus save space i n the tabl e, use shor t ter m s or abbr ev i ati ons i n
the col um n headi ngs and subheadi ngs, and ex pl ai n the abbr ev i ati ons i n f ootnotes i f necessar y.
Because of the need to save space, m or e abbr ev i ati ons ar e used i n tabl es than i n the tex t. For
ex am pl e, i n the col um n headi ng “Cycl i c GMP Concn,” “concn” i s used i nstead of “concentrati on” and
GMP i s used i nstead of “guani di ne m onophosphate.” Another possi bi l i ty i s “[Cycl i c GMP].” In the
col um n headi ng “Recover y (% of total ),” “%” i s used i nstead of “per cent.” “Concn” and “%” do not
need to be def i ned. But i f an abbr ev i ati on, even a standar d abbr ev i ati on, such as “FRC,” i s used as a
col um n headi ng, def i ne i t i n a f ootnote (“FRC, f uncti onal r esi dual capaci ty ”). If the abbr ev i ati on i s
not def i ned i n a f ootnote, r eader s w ho do not k now the m eani ng (and ther e ar e al way s som e r eader s
i n thi s categor y ) have to sear ch
P. 250
thr ough the tex t to f i nd the def i ni ti on, w hi ch i s i nconveni ent. [Ex cepti on: Abbr ev i ati ons that ar e m or e
f am i l i ar than the w or ds they stand f or do not need to be def i ned; f or ex am pl e, DN A
(deox y r i bonucl ei c aci d). GMP m ay be another ex am pl e. ] Def i ni ti ons ar e needed onl y i n the f i r st tabl e
i n w hi ch the abbr ev i ati ons appear. In l ater tabl es, use a f ootnote to r ef er r eader s to the tabl e w her e
the abbr ev i ati ons ar e def i ned, f or ex am pl e, “Abbr ev i ati ons as i n Tabl e II.”
Al though col um n headi ngs shoul d be br i ef, they do not necessar i l y have to be w r i tten as
abbr ev i ati ons. If space per m i ts w r i ti ng out the nam e of a var i abl e i n a col um n headi ng, do so. For
ex am pl e, “hear t rate” pr obabl y never needs to be abbr ev i ated.
Al so, tr y to use the shor test and the f ew est f ootnotes possi bl e. An excess of f ootnotes i s not an
i m pr ovem ent over l ong headi ngs. Thus, i n Tabl e 3, the col um n headi ngs ar e l ong and the f ootnotes
ar e br i ef and f ew.
In addi ti on to om i tti ng unnecessar y data and keepi ng col um n headi ngs and f ootnotes br i ef, avoi d
r epeti ti on of i nf or m ati on w i thi n a tabl e. For ex am pl e, i f the ti tl e say s “i n 10 Lam bs,” you do not need
a col um n l abel ed “N um ber of Lam bs” or a f ootnote say i ng “Data ar e f or 10 l am bs.”
If af ter tr y i ng al l these way s of shor teni ng a tabl e you sti l l have an excessi vel y l ar ge tabl e, consi der
di v i di ng the l ar ge tabl e i nto tw o sm al l er tabl es. Be car ef ul to keep data that ar e to be com par ed i n
one tabl e.
Format of Tables
A var i ety of f or m ats i s used f or tabl es, dependi ng on the jour nal . One detai l that i s standar d i s that
thr ee hor i zontal l i nes ar e used to separate the par ts of a tabl e: one above the col um n headi ngs, one
bel ow the col um n headi ngs, and one bel ow the data (Tabl es 1, 3, 6). If ther e ar e any subheadi ngs,
shor t hor i zontal l i nes ar e used to gr oup the subheadi ngs under the appr opr i ate headi ngs (Tabl es 2, 4,
5).
In addi ti on, som e jour nal s use hor i zontal l i nes betw een r ow s of data; other jour nal s use ver ti cal
l i nes betw een col um ns of data; sti l l other jour nal s use both hor i zontal and ver ti cal l i nes betw een
r ow s and col um ns. These ex tra l i nes gi ve the tabl e a cl utter ed l ook ; usual l y r ow s and col um ns can
be cl ear l y separated by adequate spaci ng. N ever thel ess, f ol l ow the practi ce of the jour nal to w hi ch
you ar e subm i tti ng your paper.
Most other detai l s of f or m at f or tabl es var y f r om jour nal to jour nal . Som e of these detai l s ar e the
use of a r om an or an arabi c tabl e num ber ; center i ng or f l ush l ef t pl acem ent of the tabl e num ber,
ti tl e, col um n headi ngs, and data; the use of capi tal l etter s and i tal i cs; the pl acem ent of f ootnotes;
and the ty pe of f ootnote sy m bol s used. The var i ety of f or m at detai l s i s i l l ustrated i n par t i n the
tabl es i n thi s chapter. For your paper s, f ol l ow the practi ce of the jour nal you ar e subm i tti ng your
paper to.
TELLING A STORY
Creating a Sequence of Figures and Tables
In addi ti on to each f i gur e and tabl e bei ng cl ear l y desi gned and the l egends f or f i gur es and the ti tl es
and f ootnotes f or tabl es bei ng cl ear l y w r i tten, the f i gur es and tabl es taken together shoul d f or m a
cl ear sequence that tel l s the stor y of the paper. To cr eate a cl ear sequence, desi gn the f i gur es to be
as paral l el
P. 251
as possi bl e, desi gn the tabl es to be as paral l el as possi bl e, w r i te f i gur e l egends of paral l el f i gur es i n
paral l el f or m , and w r i te ti tl es and f ootnotes of paral l el tabl es i n paral l el f or m . Thus, each f i gur e and
tabl e w i l l pr epar e the r eader f or the nex t f i gur e or tabl e.
For ex am pl e, i n a paper show i ng that pul m onar y venous bl ood f l ow (but not m i tral i nf l ow ) as
assessed by transesophageal pul sed Doppl er echocar di ography accuratel y esti m ates m ean l ef t atr i al
pr essur e as an i ndi cator of l ef t ventr i cul ar per f or m ance, thr ee tabl es and f i ve f i gur es w er e used.
One tabl e and one f i gur e w er e used f or m ethods. The tabl e l i sted the character i sti cs of the pati ents
i n the study. The f i gur e, the vel oci tyti m e pr of i l es of pul m onar y venous f l ow and m i tral i nf l ow,
show ed how the vel oci tyti m e i ntegral s w er e m easur ed.
The r em ai ni ng tabl es and f i gur es pr esented data f or thr ee l i nes of ev i dence. For the f i r st l i ne of
ev i dence, Tabl e 2 l i sted the data show i ng the cor r el ati ons betw een m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e and al l
the Doppl er var i abl es f or both pul m onar y venous f l ow and m i tral i nf l ow. In addi ti on, Fi g. 2, a
scatter gram , show ed the cor r el ati on betw een m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e and the m ost str ongl y
cor r el ated pul m onar y venous f l ow var i abl e. For the second l i ne of ev i dence, Fi g. 3, tw o
scatter gram s, show ed the cor r el ati ons betw een changes i n m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e and changes i n
the m ost str ongl y cor r el ated pul m onar y f l ow var i abl e and i n the m ost str ongl y cor r el ated m i tral
i nf l ow var i abl e. For the thi r d l i ne of ev i dence, Tabl e 3 l i sted val ues f or al l the var i abl es m easur ed at
both nor m al and el evated m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur es, show i ng that val ues w er e di f f er ent at el evated
m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur es. In addi ti on, Fi gur es 4 and 5, vel oci tyti m e pr of i l es, show ed pr i m ar y
ev i dence of changes i n pul m onar y venous f l ow patter ns (Fi g. 4) and m i tral i nf l ow patter ns (Fi g. 5) at
el evated m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur es, agai n i ndi cati ng the r el ati on betw een m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e
and pul m onar y venous f l ow.
In these thr ee tabl es and f i ve f i gur es, paral l el desi gn and paral l el ti tl es w er e used w henever
possi bl e. For ex am pl e, i n the tw o r esul ts tabl es, the var i abl es ar e l i sted i n the f i r st col um n on the
l ef t and the appr opr i ate data ar e i n the col um ns on the r i ght. In addi ti on, f or the tw o cor r el ati on
f i gur es and f or the tw o vel oci tyti m e pr of i l es show i ng the ef f ect of i ncr easi ng m ean l ef t atr i al
pr essur e, the l egends ar e paral l el :
Fi g. 2. Cor r el ati on of the sy stol i c f racti on of pul m onar y venous f l ow w i th m ean l ef t atr i al
pr essur e. r , cor r el ati on coef f i ci ent; SEE, standar d er r or of the esti m ate; n, num ber of study
per i ods. The cur ved l i nes ar e 95% conf i dence i nter val s f or the m ean val ue of sy stol i c f racti on.
Fi g. 3. Cor r el ati on of changes i n the sy stol i c f racti on of pul m onar y venous f l ow (top) and
changes i n the rati o of peak ear l y to peak l ate di astol i c m i tral i nf l ow (Δ peak ear l y /l ate)
(bottom ) w i th changes i n m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e (Δ m ean LAP). Abbr ev i ati ons as i n Fi g. 2.
Fi g. 4. Ef f ect of i ncr eased m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e on pul m onar y venous f l ow patter ns. (etc. )
Fi g. 5. Ef f ect of i ncr eased m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e, esti m ated by pul m onar y capi l l ar y w edge
pr essur e (PCWP), on m i tral i nf l ow patter ns. (etc. )
Because of the paral l el desi gns of the f i gur es and of the tabl es and the paral l el f or m of the f i gur e
l egends, the stor y of the paper i s cl ear f r om l ook i ng at the f i gur es and tabl es. For another ex am pl e
of f i gur es and tabl es that tel l the stor y of the paper, see Chapter 12, The Bi g Pi ctur e, Exer ci se 12. 1.
P. 252
Do not pr esent the sam e data i n both a f i gur e and a tabl e. How ever, i t i s OK, f or ex am pl e, to have a
tabl e or a f i gur e sum m ar i zi ng data f or al l the ex per i m ents i n a ser i es and a f i gur e show i ng pr i m ar y
ev i dence, such as a pol ygraph r ecor di ng, f or a si ngl e ex per i m ent.
P. 253
Design
Draw draw i ngs and di agram s i n bl ack on w hi te and keep them si m pl e.
For hal f tone f i gur es (f or ex am pl e, m i cr ographs), m ake the photograph shar p and cl ear.
For photographs of pati ents, cover f aci al f eatur es to pr event i denti f i cati on w hen possi bl e, and
use A, B, etc., to r ef er to pati ents, not the pati ents' i ni ti al s.
For m i cr ographs:
Ensur e that contrast i s suf f i ci ent to m ake the f eatur es of i nter est cl ear.
Make the photograph just enough l ar ger than the f eatur es of i nter est to gi ve a sense of
w her e they ar e i n thei r contex t.
To show m agni f i cati on, use ei ther a scal e bar on the f i gur e (f or a general jour nal ) or a
num ber i n the l egend (f or a speci al ty jour nal ).
N um ber each m i cr ograph i n the l ow er l ef t cor ner. U se a bl ack num ber i nsi de a w hi te ci r cl e
outl i ned by a bl ack l i ne.
For gel el ectr ophor etogram s, l abel the gel s and the i m por tant f racti ons. Label s shoul d not
over w hel m the data.
If you r em ove gr i d l i nes, add ver ti cal scal es and hor i zontal scal es or scal e m ar ker s. Be
sur e the scal es and scal e m ar ker s ar e accurate.
Label each ax i s w i th the nam e of the var i abl e f ol l ow ed by the uni t of m easur em ent i n
par entheses. U se upper case and l ow er case l etter s f or the nam e of the var i abl e; use
Inter nati onal Sy stem (SI) abbr ev i ati ons f or the uni ts of m easur em ent.
Al i gn hor i zontal ax i s l abel s on the l ef t. Do not l et ax i s l abel s pr otr ude i nto the col um n of
scal e num ber s.
U se the appr opr i ate ty pe of graph to di spl ay the ty pe of data you have.
A l i ne graph i s a tw oax i s graph on w hi ch cur ves, data poi nts, or both show the r el ati on
betw een tw o var i abl es. Scal e each ax i s accuratel y.
A scatter gram i s a tw oax i s graph that pl ots i ndi v i dual data poi nts and f i ts a m athem ati cal
f uncti on to the poi nts to show how str ongl y tw o var i abl es ar e cor r el ated.
An i ndi v i dual val ue bar graph i s a var i ati on on ver ti cal bar graphs i n w hi ch i ndi v i dual data
poi nts ar e show n ei ther i n addi ti on to or i nstead of the m ean. For pai r ed data, l i nes can be
draw n to show the di r ecti on of change.
A hi stogram i s a tw oax i s graph that show s a si ngl e f r equency di str i buti on by m eans of a ser i es
of conti guous r ectangl es. The r ectangl es i n a hi stogram shoul d be of equal w i dths.
P. 254
A f r equency pol ygon i s a tw oax i s graph that uses data poi nts joi ned by l i nes to show tw o or
m or e over l appi ng f r equency di str i buti ons or a si ngl e di str i buti on. Data poi nts ar e pl otted at the
m i dpoi nt of each cl ass and the l i nes joi ni ng the data poi nts ar e ex tended to the basel i ne to
com pl ete the di str i buti on.
Af ter the graph i s r educed to f i t the jour nal 's col um n, l etter s shoul d be l ar ge enough (at l east
1. 5 m m hi gh) to be l egi bl e.
Sy m bol s shoul d be l ar ge enough to be seen and easy to di sti ngui sh. The easi est data poi nt
sy m bol s to di sti ngui sh ar e • and ○; then [bl ack uppoi nti ng tr i angl e], [bl ack uppoi nti ng
tr i angl e].
Make axes, ti ck m ar k s, er r or bar s, key s, and cur ve l abel s the l east dar k .
Figure Legends
A f i gur e l egend has f our par ts:
Title
The ti tl e i s the f i r st i tem i n the f i gur e l egend; i t does not appear i n the f i gur e.
The ti tl e shoul d br i ef l y i denti f y the speci f i c topi c or the poi nt of the f i gur e. The ti tl e shoul d
contai n no excess detai l s and no abbr ev i ati ons.
For draw i ngs, di agram s, and pr i m ar y ev i dence, the ti tl e shoul d i denti f y the ty pe of f i gur e i f
necessar y and the apparatus, concept, or bi ol ogi cal speci m en show n. For ex am pl e, “Fi g. 1.
Br i ghtf i el d l i ght m i cr ograph of a segm ent of a bacter i al f i l am ent.”
For com posi tes, pr ov i de a ti tl e f or the enti r e f i gur e and i denti f y the par ts of the com posi te
ei ther w i thi n the ti tl e or i n separate subti tl es.
Experimental Details
Gi ve just enough ex per i m ental detai l s to per m i t the r eader to under stand the f i gur e. In l egends
f or graphs, do not si m pl y r epeat the i nf or m ati on i n the ax i s l abel s.
Wr i te ex per i m ental detai l s i n sentences.
Definitions
Sy m bol s, l i ne or bar patter ns, and abbr ev i ati ons that ar e not def i ned i n the f i gur e or ear l i er i n
the l egend shoul d be def i ned af ter ex per i m ental detai l s ar e gi ven. Keep def i ni ti ons br i ef. For
ex am pl e, “○, contr ol .”
If the sam e sy m bol s, l i ne or bar patter ns, or abbr ev i ati ons ar e used i n m or e than one f i gur e,
def i ne them i n the l egend f or the f i r st r el evant f i gur e onl y. In succeedi ng l egends, r ef er the
r eader to that l egend. For ex am pl e, “Abbr ev i ati ons as i n Fi g. 1.”
P. 255
Statistical Information
State w hether data poi nts or bar s r epr esent i ndi v i dual , m ean, or m edi an val ues and w hether
er r or bar s r epr esent standar d dev i ati ons, standar d er r or s of the m ean, conf i dence i nter val s, or
ranges.
For data i n graphs that have been anal y zed by a stati sti cal test, state the stati sti c (f or
ex am pl e, the P val ue), w hi ch val ues w er e com par ed, and the stati sti cal test used. For ex am pl e,
“*P < 0. 01 v s. contr ol by AN OVA.”
Other Information
Other i nf or m ati on m ay be i ncl uded i n a f i gur e l egend.
A f i gur e l egend m ay i ncl ude statem ents poi nti ng out an unusual or an i nter esti ng f eatur e.
A f i gur e l egend shoul d not i ncl ude r esul ts as such. How ever, f or graphs, r esul ts can be i ndi cated
by stati ng the poi nt i n the ti tl e (“Inhi bi ti on of Y by X i n Z”). For f i gur es that show pr i m ar y
ev i dence, r esul ts can be i ndi cated by poi nti ng out a f eatur e on the f i gur e (“N ote…”).
If you r epubl i sh f i gur es that have al r eady been publ i shed, you m ust f i r st obtai n per m i ssi on f r om the
copy r i ght hol der (usual l y the publ i sher ) and f r om the author. Gi ve cr edi t to the sour ce by ci ti ng the
r ef er ence at the end of the f i gur e l egend. For ex am pl e, “Fr om Fraser (1975), w i th per m i ssi on.” Gi ve
the com pl ete r ef er ence i n the r ef er ence l i st. You m ust obtai n per m i ssi on w hether you use al l of the
or i gi nal f i gur e, par t of the f i gur e, or a m odi f i ed ver si on of the f i gur e.
TABLES
Tabl es ar e usual l y used to pr esent back gr ound i nf or m ati on r el ated to m ethods or to pr esent data.
Tabl es of data ei ther pr esent i ndi v i dual data f or al l subjects, ani m al s, or speci m ens studi ed or m ake
a poi nt.
The Title
The ti tl e shoul d i denti f y the speci f i c topi c or the poi nt of the tabl e.
For ti tl es of tabl es that gi ve back gr ound i nf or m ati on or that pr esent data f or ex per i m ents that have
onl y dependent var i abl es, use the f or m “Y i n Z.”
For ti tl es of tabl es that pr esent data f or ex per i m ents that have both i ndependent and dependent
var i abl es, use the f or m “Ef f ect of X on Y i n Z” or “Y dur i ng X i n Z.”
Keep ti tl es br i ef by usi ng a categor y ter m i n pl ace of the nam es of tw o or m or e var i abl es.
U se the sam e key ter m s i n the ti tl e, the col um n headi ngs, and the tex t of the paper.
Column Headings
Gi ve each ty pe of i nf or m ati on i ts ow n col um n and i ts ow n col um n headi ng.
To subdi v i de a col um n headi ng i nto tw o or m or e categor i es, use subheadi ngs.
Put the uni t of m easur em ent (usual l y i n par entheses) af ter or bel ow the nam e of the var i abl e i n the
col um n headi ng.
P. 256
U se Inter nati onal Sy stem (SI) abbr ev i ati ons.
If sam pl e si zes (n) ar e di f f er ent, l i st them i n a col um n betw een the i ndependent and the dependent
var i abl es.
Ar range data to r eveal tr ends dow n a col um n or acr oss a r ow or to per m i t easy com par i son betw een
adjacent col um ns or r ow s. Put standar d dev i ati ons (SD), standar d er r or s of the m ean (SEM),
conf i dence i nter val s (CI), or ranges ei ther to the r i ght of or bel ow the m eans or m edi ans, dependi ng
on w hether r eader s need to r ead dow n the col um ns or acr oss the r ow s, r especti vel y.
Pr esent data to the f ew est possi bl e deci m al pl aces; have the sam e num ber of deci m al pl aces i n al l
val ues f or one var i abl e; have the sam e num ber of deci m al pl aces i n the SD as i n the m ean.
Al i gn al l val ues i n each col um n on the deci m al poi nt, and i f you gi ve SDs or SEMs af ter a ± to the
r i ght of the m eans, al so al i gn al l val ues on the ± so that the data w i l l be easy to com par e.
For excessi vel y w i de tabl es, ei ther pl ace SDs bel ow m eans, sw i tch the i ndependent and dependent
var i abl es (r un the dependent var i abl es dow n the f i r st col um n on the l ef t), see i f the jour nal w i l l r un
the tabl e acr oss tw o pages, or r un the tabl e the l ength of the page rather than the w i dth of the page.
The di sadvantage of sw i tchi ng the i ndependent and dependent var i abl es i s that the val ues w i l l not
al i gn neatl y on the deci m al poi nt, so the m agni tude of i ndi v i dual num ber s w i l l not be i m m edi atel y
obv i ous.
To i ndi cate stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ences betw een data, use a sy m bol (such as *) af ter the
val ue that i s di f f er ent and def i ne the sy m bol i n a f ootnote.
To i ndi cate m i ssi ng data, use a dash f ol l ow ed by a f ootnote sy m bol (f or ex am pl e, “— a ”), and i n a
f ootnote w r i te “ a N ot deter m i ned,” “ a N ot detectabl e,” or w hatever, or w r i te “N D” i n pl ace of the
m i ssi ng data and def i ne N D i n a f ootnote. A dash i s v i sual l y m or e ef f ecti ve than N D i s. Do not l eave
a bl ank space w hen data ar e m i ssi ng because a bl ank space i s am bi guous.
Footnotes
U se f ootnotes to ex pl ai n i tem s i n the ti tl e, col um n headi ngs, or body of a tabl e, such as
ex per i m ental detai l s or abbr ev i ati ons, and to substi tute f or a col um n of val ues that ar e al l the sam e,
such as n. For ex am pl e, “Data ar e m ean ± SD f or 11 di al y si s pr ocedur es. ”
U se f ootnotes to ex pl ai n stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ences. For ex am pl e, “*P < 0. 01 v s. contr ol by
AN OVA.” Do not w r i te onl y “P < 0. 01” because that does not i ndi cate w hi ch val ues ar e bei ng
com par ed.
Put i nf or m ati on i n f ootnotes i n the sam e or der as i nf or m ati on i n a f i gur e l egend: f i r st ex per i m ental
detai l s (i n sentences), then def i ni ti ons of abbr ev i ati ons and sy m bol s, and f i nal l y stati sti cal detai l s
(except put “Val ues ar e m ean ± SD” bef or e def i ni ti ons of abbr ev i ati ons).
P. 257
Keep f ootnotes br i ef and f ew.
U se super scr i pt sy m bol s or super scr i pt l ow er case l etter s to i denti f y f ootnotes. One standar d ser i es
of f ootnote sy m bol s i s *, †, ‡, §, ||, ¶, # , **, ††, etc. A ser i es of sy m bol s som eti m es used to show
stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ences i s *P < 0. 05, **P < 0. 01, ***P < 0. 001.
If the pur pose of the tabl e i s to m ake a poi nt, keep the tabl e as condensed as possi bl e. To condense
a l ar ge tabl e, om i t unnecessar y col um ns or r ow s of i nf or m ati on and keep the ti tl e, col um n headi ngs,
and f ootnotes br i ef. If necessar y, br eak a l ar ge tabl e i nto tw o sm al l er tabl es, keepi ng data that ar e
to be com par ed i n the sam e tabl e.
Format of Tables
U se thr ee hor i zontal l i nes: one above the col um n headi ngs, one bel ow the col um n headi ngs, and one
bel ow the data.
If the jour nal al so uses other hor i zontal or ver ti cal l i nes, add them .
Fol l ow jour nal sty l e f or detai l s such as r om an or arabi c tabl e num ber ; center ed or f l ush l ef t tabl e
num ber, ti tl e, col um n headi ngs, and data; capi tal l etter s and i tal i cs; the pl acem ent of f ootnotes; the
ty pe of f ootnote sy m bol s.
Telling a Story
To cr eate a cl ear sequence of f i gur es and tabl es that tel l s the stor y of the paper, m ake the f i gur es
and thei r l egends as paral l el as possi bl e, and m ake the tabl es and thei r ti tl es and f ootnotes as
paral l el as possi bl e.
Check that each f i gur e and each tabl e cl ear l y and accuratel y show s w hat the tex t states.
Do not pr esent the sam e data i n both a f i gur e and a tabl e. How ever, pr i m ar y ev i dence (f or ex am pl e,
a pol ygraph r ecor di ng) m ay be show n i n addi ti on to a f i gur e or a tabl e of sum m ar i zed data.
P. 258
3. Re de s ign the figure a nd the ta ble , a nd re vis e the le ge nd, ta ble title , a nd te x t a s
ne c e s s a ry.
The firs t que s tion this pa pe r a s k s is , “ How s e ve re is c iga re tte s mok e induc e d
bronc hoc ons tric tion?”
Re s ults ?
Inha la tion of c iga re tte s mok e into the lungs of a ne s the tize d dogs c a us e d tw o to e ightfold
inc re a s e s in a irflow re s is ta nc e of the tota l re s pira tory s ys te m de pe nding on the dos e of s mok e
inha le d (Fig. 2). Airflow re s is ta nc e inc re a s e d ra pidly a fte r the s ta rt of s mok e inha la tion; the
ma x imum w a s re a c he d w ithin 1 min. Airflow re s is ta nc e re ma ine d inc re a s e d tra ns ie ntly,
de c re a s e d to one ha lf the ma x ima l va lue w ithin 4 min (Ta ble I), a nd re turne d to ba s e line
be fore the ne x t dos e 20 min la te r (Fig. 2).
Airflow Re s is ta nc e (% of ba s e line )
Hi de Answ er
COMMENTS
In thi s Resul ts secti on, the f i gur e and tabl e ar e not cl ear l y desi gned and do not r el ate w el l
to the tex t.
Figure 2
Type of G ra ph. A bar gr aph w oul d show the i ncr eases i n ai r f l ow r esi stance and the bef or e
and af ter v al ues m or e cl ear l y than a l i ne gr aph does.
Mor e ti ck m ar k s coul d be added to m ak e the tw of ol d and ei ghtf ol d i ncr eases easi er to see.
Figure Le ge nd. To state the poi nt, “i ncr eases i n ai r f l ow r esi stance” shoul d be used i nstead
of “br onchoconstr i cti on. ”
The f i gur e l egend coul d be r ev i sed to gi v e m ost ex per i m ental detai l s bef or e the stati sti cal
detai l s. In addi ti on, the ti m es of m easur em ent coul d be added.
To show the v ar i abi l i ty of the data, r ather than how cl ose the m easur ed m ean i s to the
tr ue m ean, SD coul d be show n (as i n Tabl e 1) i nstead of SE.
Ta ble I
Re la tion to the Te x t.
The tex t say s that the m ax i m um w as r eached w i thi n 1 m i n, but the m eans show that the
m ax i m um w as r eached w i thi n ½ m i n. If i nstead y ou l ook at i ndi v i dual data, y ou w oul d
hav e to say that the m ean w as r eached w i thi n 2 m i n (dogs 2–4, ½ m i n; dog 1, 1 m i n; dog
5, 2 m i n). Si m i l ar l y , ai r f l ow r esi stance decr eased to onehal f the m ax i m al v al ue w i thi n 2
m i n (the m ean of 188% at 2 m i n i s not di f f er ent f r om 190% at 4 m i n).
In the ti tl e, “br onchoconstr i cti on” shoul d be changed to “ai r f l ow r esi stance. ”
Re vis ion
Re s ults
Inhal ati on of ci gar ette sm oke i nto the l ungs of anestheti zed dogs caused tw o to sevenf ol d
i ncr eases i n ai r f l ow r esi stance of the total r espi rator y sy stem dependi ng on the num ber of
ti dal vol um es of sm oke i nhal ed (Fi g. 2). Ai r f l ow r esi stance i ncr eased rapi dl y af ter the star t
of sm oke i nhal ati on; on average, the m ax i m um was r eached w i thi n ½ m i n (Fi g. 3). Ai r f l ow
r esi stance r em ai ned i ncr eased transi entl y, decr eased to onehal f the m ax i m al val ue w i thi n
2 m i n (Fi g. 3), and r etur ned to basel i ne bef or e the nex t dose 20 m i n l ater [f i gur e ci tati on
om i tted].
P. 259
The que s tion this pa pe r a s k s is , “ Do pe ritone a l dia lys is a nd he modia lys is ha ve s imila r e ffe c ts
on pla s ma c hole s te rol me ta bolis m in pa tie nts w ith e nds ta ge re na l dis e a s e ?” The a ns w e r is
“ no. ”
Re s ults
1. The c onc e ntra tions of pla s ma tota l a nd fre e c hole s te rol a nd the phos pholipid c onte nt
w e re s ignific a ntly low e r in the he modia lys is pa tie nts tha n in the pe ritone a l dia lys is
pa tie nts or the c ontrol group (Ta ble I). The s e low e r va lue s w e re pa rtly re fle c te d by the
low e r c onc e ntra tions of highde ns ity lipoprote in (HDL) a nd the low e r HDL c hole s te rol in
the he modia lys is pa tie nts .
2. Cons is te nt w ith the low e r HDL c onc e ntra tions , the ma jor HDL a polipoprote in, a po AI,
w a s muc h low e r in the he modia lys is pa tie nts tha n in the c ontrol group, w he re a s the va lue
for the pe ritone a l dia lys is pa tie nts w a s inte rme dia te (Ta ble II). Apo AII c onc e ntra tions
w e re ve ry s imila r in a ll thre e groups . Apo B a nd a po E w e re in the norma l ra nge in both
groups of pa tie nts . Apo D w a s s lightly highe r in the tw o groups of pa tie nts tha n in the
c ontrols .
3. The ra tio of highde ns ity lipoprote in a nd low de ns ity lipoprote in (e x pre s s e d he re a s the
ra tio be tw e e n the ir ma jor a polipoprote ins , a po AI a nd a po B, re s pe c tive ly) w a s
s ignific a ntly low e r in the he modia lys is pa tie nts tha n in the c ontrols (Ta ble II). Va lue s
w e re inte rme dia te in the pe ritone a l dia lys is pa tie nts .
(P < 0. 0005)
Apo B (m g/dl ) 89 ± 14 98 ± 94
32 ± 8
Apo D (m g/dl ) 6. 7 ± 1. 3 5. 6 ± 9. 5
1. 2 ±
1. 0
(P < 0. 0005)
Apo E (m g/dl ) 6. 8 ± 0. 8 7. 3 ± 7. 5
1. 6 ±
0. 9
Apo AI/Apo B 1. 15 ± 0. 18 1. 7 ± 1. 3
0. 6 ±
0. 2
Hi de Answ er
Re vis ion
P la s ma Apoprote in (mg/dl)
Apo AI/Apo B Tre a tme nt Apo AI Apo Apo B Apo D Apo E
AII
Contr ol 163 ± 23 36. 4 ± 98 ± 5. 6 ± 7. 3 ± 1. 7 ±
2. 0 32 1. 2 1. 6 0. 6
COMMENTS
In the r ev i si on, to m ak e the ti tl e com pl ete, the i ndependent v ar i abl es (per i toneal di al y si s
and hem odi al y si s) hav e been added and the contr ol subjects hav e been om i tted. As a
r esul t, the k ey ter m s i n the ti tl e cor r el ate w i th the k ey ter m s i n the f i r st col um n on the
l ef t (per i toneal di al y si s, hem odi al y si s).
In addi ti on, the col um n headi ng “Pl asm a Apopr otei n” has been added, cor r el ati ng w i th that
ter m i n the ti tl e, and the uni t of m easur em ent (m g/dl ) i s i ncl uded af ter thi s gener al
headi ng r ather than bei ng stated af ter each i ndi v i dual apopr otei n.
Pl asm a Apopr otei ns Af ter Per i toneal Di al y si s or Hem odi al y si s i n Pati ents Who Hav e End
Stage Renal Di sease
Changes i n Pl asm a Apopr otei ns Af ter Per i toneal Di al y si s or Hem odi al y si s i n Pati ents Who
Hav e EndStage Renal Di sease
Gr eater Changes i n Pl asm a Apopr otei ns Af ter Hem odi al y si s than Af ter Per i toneal Di al y si s i n
Pati ents Who Hav e EndStage Renal Di sease.
To m ak e the tabl e show the decr eases i n apo AI and i n apo AI/apo B descr i bed i n the
tex t, the contr ol v al ues hav e been m ov ed to the f i r st r ow (as i s conv enti onal ), per i toneal
di al y si s v al ues ar e i n the m i ddl e (“i nter m edi ate”), and the hem odi al y si s v al ues ar e l ast
(“m uch l ow er ”).
In addi ti on, the pati ents ar e descr i bed f ul l y i n the ti tl e, as i n the questi on (“pati ents w ho
hav e endstage r enal di sease”).
To show stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ences, sy m bol s (*, † ) hav e been pl aced af ter the
v al ues that ar e di f f er ent, and f ootnotes hav e been added to state the P v al ues and w hat
num ber s ar e bei ng com par ed.
To m ak e the num ber s al i gn neatl y on the deci m al poi nt and on the ± , the col um ns and
r ow s of the tabl e hav e been sw i tched: i ndependent v ar i abl e i n the f i r st col um n on the l ef t,
dependent v ar i abl es acr oss the col um ns on the r i ght.
Once the data ar e al i gned i n col um ns, i t i s easi er to see that data f or apo AII and f or apo
AI/apo B hav e di f f er ent num ber s of deci m al pl aces. In the r ev i sed tabl e, al l v al ues i n
each col um n hav e the sam e num ber of deci m al pl aces.
Back
Chapter 9
References
PURPOSES
The pur poses of i ncl udi ng r ef er ences i n sci enti f i c r esear ch paper s ar e to gi ve
cr edi t to the i deas and f i ndi ngs of other s and to di r ect r eader s to sour ces of
f ur ther i nf or m ati on.
SELECTING REFERENCES
Wher eas r ev i ew ar ti cl es, w hi ch pul l together and i nter pr et a l ar ge body of
i nf or m ati on, ci te a l ar ge num ber of r ef er ences, a r esear ch r epor t ci tes onl y
i m m edi atel y r el evant r ef er ences. When deci di ng w hi ch r ef er ences to i ncl ude i n
a r esear ch paper, sel ect the m ost val i d, the m ost avai l abl e, and the f ew est
r ef er ences.
Valid
The r ef er ences general l y consi der ed m ost val i d ar e jour nal ar ti cl es, because
jour nal ar ti cl es under go a r ev i ew pr ocess bef or e bei ng accepted f or publ i cati on,
al though the val i di ty of the r ev i ew pr ocess has yet to be establ i shed (Lock , A
Di f f i cul t Bal ance). Other val i d r ef er ences i ncl ude book s, Ph. D. theses, and
som e conf er ences pr oceedi ngs (those f or w hi ch paper s ar e r ev i ew ed).
Ref er ences consi der ed l ess val i d i ncl ude abstracts f or m eeti ngs, because
abstracts do not contai n enough i nf or m ati on to per m i t assessm ent of the w or k ,
and som e conf er ence pr oceedi ngs (those f or w hi ch paper s ar e not r ev i ew ed).
These l ess val i d r ef er ences shoul d be used pr i m ar i l y to cr edi t the sour ce of an
i dea, not to suppor t a concl usi on or an ar gum ent. Si m i l ar l y, per sonal
com m uni cati ons and unpubl i shed data or unpubl i shed obser vati ons shoul d be
used onl y f or such pur poses as suppor ti ng the r esul ts of pr el i m i nar y studi es or
ci ti ng paral l el r esul ts i n another study popul ati on. Because these “r ef er ences”
cannot be obtai ned and assessed, they do not consti tute str ong ev i dence and
ther ef or e shoul d not be used to suppor t concl usi ons or ar gum ents.
Available
The m ost avai l abl e r ef er ences f or m ost r eader s ar e jour nal ar ti cl es. Book s ar e
al so general l y avai l abl e. Ph. D. theses and pr oceedi ngs of m eeti ngs take m or e
tr oubl e to f i nd. When Ph. D. w or k i s publ i shed i n jour nal s, ci te the jour nal
ar ti cl e rather than the thesi s.
P. 261
Jour nal ar ti cl es that have not yet been publ i shed but that have been accepted
f or publ i cati on ar e r ef er r ed to as bei ng “i n pr ess” (Am er i can) or “i n the pr ess”
(Br i ti sh). These ar ti cl es can be l ocated f ai r l y easi l y by sear chi ng the
appr opr i ate jour nal begi nni ng about the ti m e the paper i n w hi ch the “i n pr ess”
r ef er ence i s ci ted was accepted. When ci ti ng an “i n pr ess” paper, i ncl ude the
ti tl e of the jour nal f ol l ow ed by the w or ds “i n pr ess.”
Ar ti cl es that have not yet been accepted ar e not avai l abl e and ther ef or e shoul d
not be i ncl uded i n the r ef er ence l i st. Even i f the jour nal per m i ts r ef er ences
such as “subm i tted” and “i n pr eparati on” i n the r ef er ence l i st, w or k that has not
yet been accepted shoul d not be i ncl uded i n the r ef er ence l i st. Instead, i t
shoul d be r ef er r ed to i n the tex t ei ther as a per sonal com m uni cati on (f or w or k
done by other s) or as an unpubl i shed obser vati on (f or w or k done by one or
m or e of the author s). The year of the per sonal com m uni cati on or obser vati on
shoul d be i ncl uded. Bef or e ci ti ng a per sonal com m uni cati on, check w i th the
author. The i nf or m ati on you thought you hear d m ay not be w hat the author
thought he or she sai d, or the r esul ts m ay not have been r epeatabl e. Som e
jour nal s r equi r e w r i tten conf i r m ati on of al l per sonal com m uni cati ons.
Few
To keep your r ef er ences to the f ew est necessar y, sel ect, as appr opr i ate, the
f i r st, the m ost i m por tant, the m ost el egant, and the m ost r ecent. Ci te r ev i ew
ar ti cl es w her e possi bl e. Al so, keep i n m i nd that r ef er ences ci ted i n the paper s
i n your r ef er ence l i st can l ead r eader s to ar ti cl es that you do not ci te i n your
paper.
ACCURACY
Accuracy of the References
The r ef er ences i n the r ef er ence l i st m ust be accurate. To ensur e that the
r ef er ences i n your l i sts ar e accurate, bui l d up a data base of r ef er ences that
you i m por t f r om Medl i ne.
You shoul d not ci te a r ef er ence that you have not r ead, at l east i n par t.
How ever, i f you m ust ci te an i dea f r om an ar ti cl e you cannot f i nd, m ake cl ear
that you di d not see the or i gi nal ar ti cl e by usi ng the f ol l ow i ng f or m of ci tati on:
Pow el l JA. Ti tl e. Pl uger s Ar chi v 1972;XX: x x–x x (ci ted by Jones RE. Ti tl e. J Appl
Phy si ol 1977;XX: x x–x x ).
Fi nal l y, to do your par t to keep i ndexes of the bi om edi cal l i teratur e cl ear, use
the sam e nam e and i ni ti al s thr oughout your car eer. If you change your nam e i n
your pr i vate l i f e, do not change i t i n your pr of essi onal l i f e. Si m i l ar l y, do not
add or dr op i ni ti al s. For ex am pl e, i f your nam e i s R. J. Gor don but your f r i ends
cal l you John, do not change your publ i shi ng nam e to J. Gor don par t way
thr ough your car eer.
P. 262
Author s' nam es ar e not transi ti on w or ds. It i s usual l y easi er to keep the stor y
goi ng i n a paragraph i f you do not begi n a sentence w i th author s' nam es. Al so,
avoi d m i x i ng the tw o ty pes of ci tati on i n one paragraph unl ess you have a
par ti cul ar r eason f or doi ng so.
The appr opr i ate pr onoun f or Jack son et al . i s “they,” not “he.” Thus, “Jack son et
al . r epor ted… . He al so f ound…” i s not possi bl e. The appr opr i ate w or di ng i s
“Jack son et al . r epor ted… . They al so f ound… .”
Revision
In the rat, the concentrati on of nucl ear r eceptor s i n the brai n decr eases dur i ng
the f i r st 2 w eek s af ter bi r th (30), w her eas the r eceptor concentrati on i n l i ver
nucl ei i ncr eases dur i ng thi s per i od (29). In addi ti on, a tem poral cor r el ati on has
been r epor ted betw een the T 3 bi ndi ng capaci ty of nucl ei and the acti v i ty of
f atty aci d sy nthetase i n f etal rabbi t l ung (16).
Pl aci ng r ef er ence ci tati ons af ter i deas does not necessar i l y m ean that
r ef er ences w i l l com e at the end of the sentence. For ex am pl e, i t i s i m por tant to
di sti ngui sh betw een your i deas and the w or k of other s. Thus, i f you draw a
concl usi on based on another author 's f i ndi ngs, put the ci tati on af ter the
author 's f i ndi ng, not af ter your concl usi on (Ex am pl e 9. 5).
Revision
The potenti al f or m al i gnant transf or m ati on i n l i chen pl anus (12) r equi r es that
cauti on be exer ci sed i n the l ongter m use of ster oi ds.
Si m i l ar l y, w hen you have several r ef er ences f or several poi nts i n one sentence,
i t i s m or e usef ul to ci te each r ef er ence af ter the appr opr i ate poi nt than to
gr oup al l the r ef er ences together at the end of the sentence, especi al l y w hen
the r ef er ence l i st does not i ncl ude ti tl es of ar ti cl es.
P. 264
Revision
Lef t atr i al pr essur e dy nam i cs have been show n to be i nver sel y r el ated to
pul m onar y venous bl ood f l ow i n dogs (8–10) and hum ans (8, 11) and al so to
i nf l uence m i tral i nf l ow (12).
Pow el l JA. Ti tl e. Avai l abl e f r om : ur l : http://Inter net addr ess or Wor l d Wi de Web
addr ess.
P. 265
A si ngl e sty l e f or r ef er ences has been adopted by a l ar ge num ber of jour nal s.
Thi s sty l e i s som eti m es r ef er r ed to as the Vancouver sty l e because the m eeti ng
at w hi ch the sty l e was adopted was hel d i n Vancouver, Br i ti sh Col um bi a. The
sty l e i s descr i bed i n a docum ent cal l ed “U ni f or m Requi r em ents f or Manuscr i pts
Subm i tted to Bi om edi cal Jour nal s” and i s avai l abl e on the Inter net:
http://w w w. hsr. i t/bi bl i o/uni f or m . htm l . The docum ent i s updated per i odi cal l y.
Com puter pr ogram s that put r ef er ences i n the Vancouver sty l e ar e avai l abl e.
You CH, Lee KY, Chey RY, Menguy R. El ectr ogastr ographi c study of pati ents w i th
unex pl ai ned nausea, bl oati ng and vom i ti ng. Gastr oenter ol ogy 1980; 79:311–4.
The pur pose of hav i ng a si ngl e sty l e i s f or the conveni ence of author s. The
jour nal s that have adopted the U ni f or m Requi r em ents w i l l al l accept paper s i n
w hi ch the r ef er ences ar e ty ped i n the sty l e pr escr i bed. How ever, som e jour nal s
change the r ef er ences to a di f f er ent sty l e f or publ i cati on.
P. 266
Sel ect the m ost val i d, the m ost avai l abl e, and the f ew est r ef er ences.
Less val i d: abstracts f or m eeti ngs, unr ev i ew ed conf er ence pr oceedi ngs.
For the f ew est r ef er ences, sel ect the f i r st, m ost i m por tant, m ost el egant,
and m ost r ecent paper s. U se r ev i ew ar ti cl es w hen possi bl e.
Ref er ences m ust be accurate i n ever y detai l : author s' nam es, author s' i ni ti al s,
ti tl e of the paper, ti tl e of the jour nal , year of publ i cati on, vol um e num ber, f i r st
and l ast page num ber s.
Ever y r ef er ence i n the tex t m ust be i n the r ef er ence l i st, and v i ce ver sa.
When nam i ng the author s of a paper i n the tex t, i ncl ude al l author s. For paper s
by thr ee or m or e author s, use the f or m “Jack son et al .” and the pr onoun “they ”
(not “he”).
Put r ef er ence ci tati ons af ter the i dea you ar e ci ti ng or af ter the author s' nam es
i f nam es ar e i ncl uded.
If you draw a concl usi on based on another author 's f i ndi ngs, put the ci tati on
af ter the author 's f i ndi ng, not af ter your concl usi on.
U se ei ther author s and year s or num ber s to i denti f y r ef er ences i n the tex t,
w hi chever the jour nal r equests.
For m or e than one r ef er ence f or one poi nt, ci te r ef er ences i n chr onol ogi cal
or der.
In the r ef er ence l i st, use al phabeti cal or der w hen author s and year s ar e ci ted
i n the tex t. U se num er i cal or der accor di ng to f i r st ci tati on i n the tex t w hen
num ber s ar e used f or ci tati ons, unl ess the jour nal pr ef er s al phabeti cal or der.
Fol l ow the jour nal 's sty l e f or detai l s i n the r ef er ence l i st. If the jour nal has
adopted the Vancouver sty l e, use i t.
Back
Introduction
In Secti ons I–III, w e saw how to choose w or ds and ar range them i n cl ear
sentences and paragraphs (Secti on I), how to w r i te each secti on of a
bi om edi cal r esear ch paper to tel l a cl ear stor y (Secti on II), and how to desi gn
f i gur es and tabl es and pr esent r ef er ences cl ear l y (Secti on III). In Secti on IV,
w e tur n our attenti on to pr ov i di ng a cl ear over v i ew of the stor y. In Chapter 10
(The Abstract) and Chapter 11 (The Ti tl e), our central concer n w i l l be to
pr ov i de the over v i ew al one, w i th a bar e m i ni m um of detai l s. In Chapter 12 (The
Bi g Pi ctur e), w e w i l l consi der how to pr ov i de the over v i ew together w i th al l the
necessar y detai l s.
In the paper as a w hol e, both the over v i ew and the detai l s need to be cl ear.
Chapter 12 i l l ustrates how to pr ov i de a cl ear over v i ew i n addi ti on to pr esenti ng
al l the necessar y detai l s.
Back
Chapter 10
The Abstract
FUNCTION
The f uncti on of the abstract of a sci enti f i c r esear ch paper i s to pr ov i de an over v i ew of
the paper. The over v i ew shoul d pr esent the m ai n stor y and a f ew essenti al detai l s of the
paper f or r eader s w ho r ead onl y the abstract and shoul d ser ve as a cl ear pr ev i ew of the
m ai n stor y f or r eader s w ho r ead the paper. Thus, the abstract shoul d m ake sense both
w hen r ead al one and w hen r ead w i th the paper.
The abstract shoul d be nei ther vague and general on the one hand nor f ussi l y detai l ed
on the other. Rather, i t shoul d be speci f i c and sel ecti ve. As i ts nam e suggests, an
abstract (ab, out + tr aher e, to pul l ) shoul d sel ect (pul l out) the hi ghl i ghts f r om each
secti on of the paper.
Som eti m es the over v i ew i n the abstract i s cl ear er than the over v i ew i n the tex t. The
r eason i s usual l y ei ther that par t of the over v i ew i s om i tted i n the tex t or that the
detai l s i n the tex t obscur e the over v i ew. Al though the author shoul d m ake ever y ef f or t
to w eave a cl ear over v i ew i nto the tex t so that the tex t does not becom e al l tr ees and
no f or est, an advantage of hav i ng a cl ear, conci se over v i ew i n the abstract i s that i t can
com pensate f or som e l apses i n the over v i ew i n the tex t.
Question
State the questi on you asked ei ther as a questi on or as a hy pothesi s.
P. 270
State the ex per i m ental appr oach or the study desi gn, i ncl udi ng both the i ndependent and
the dependent var i abl es. Menti on onl y i m por tant detai l s of m ater i al s and m ethods.
Background
If r eader s w oul d w onder w hy you ar e ask i ng your questi on, begi n the abstract w i th a
sentence or tw o of back gr ound i nf or m ati on. The back gr ound i nf or m ati on shoul d be the
sam e as that gi ven at the begi nni ng of the Intr oducti on, onl y br i ef er.
Example 10.1
ADevel opm ent of phar y ngeal m uscl e i n nem atodes and hear t m uscl e i n ver tebrates and
i nsects i nvol ves the r el ated hom eobox genes ceh22, nk x 2. 5, and ti nm an, r especti vel y.
B1To deter m i ne w hether the nem atode gene ceh22 and the ver tebrate gene nk x 2. 5
per f or m si m i l ar f uncti ons, B2w e ex am i ned the acti v i ty of the zebraf i sh nk x 2. 5 gene i n
transgeni c Caenor habdi ti s el egans. CWe f ound that ectopi c ex pr essi on of nk x 2. 5 i n C.
el egans body wal l m uscl e di r ectl y acti vated ex pr essi on both of the endogenous m y o2
gene, a ceh22 tar get nor m al l y ex pr essed onl y i n phar y ngeal m uscl e, and of a sy ntheti c
r epor ter constr uct contr ol l ed by a m ul ti m er i zed CEH22 bi ndi ng si te. Dnk x 2. 5 al so
ef f i ci entl y pr evented ceh22 gr ow th def ects w hen ex pr essed i n phar y ngeal m uscl e.
EThese r esul ts i ndi cate that ceh22 and nk x 2. 5 per f or m si m i l ar f uncti ons. FFur ther,
these r esul ts suggest that an evol uti onar i l y conser ved m echani sm under l i es phar y ngeal
devel opm ent i n nem atodes and hear t devel opm ent i n ver tebrates and i nsects. In thi s
abstract, sentence A gi ves back gr ound i nf or m ati on, B 1 states the questi on, and B 2
states the ex per i m ent done to answ er the questi on. Sentences C and D state w hat
r esul ts w er e f ound. N o data ar e gi ven. The answ er,
P. 271
stated i n the secondtol ast sentence (E), answ er s the questi on asked i n B 1 . An
i m pl i cati on that r el ates to the back gr ound gi ven at the begi nni ng of the abstract i s
stated at the end of the abstract (F).
Organization
Overall Organization
As show n i n Ex am pl e 10. 1, the overal l or gani zati on of the abstract i s the sam e as the
or gani zati on of the tex t: back gr ound (i f any ), questi on, the ex per i m ents done, the
r esul ts f ound, answ er, and i m pl i cati on, specul ati on, or r ecom m endati on (i f any ).
How ever, the abstract i s of ten str eam l i ned i n one way : of ten the detai l s of the
ex per i m ents done—speci f i c i ndependent and dependent var i abl es, doses, m ethods—ar e
gi ven i n the sentences that state the r esul ts f ound. Thi s or gani zati onal strategy avoi ds
r epeti ti on. For ex am pl e, i n Ex am pl e 10. 1, “Ectopi c ex pr essi on of nk x 2. 5 i n C. el egans
body wal l m uscl e” i s m enti oned onl y i n sentence C, w hi ch descr i bes the r esul ts f ound.
Si m i l ar l y, “w hen ex pr essed i n phar y ngeal m uscl e” i s m enti oned onl y i n sentence D.
(Al so see Ex am pl e 10. 2 bel ow. )
Al though the overal l or gani zati on of the abstract f ol l ow s the or gani zati on of the paper,
the abstract does not gi ve equal w ei ght to al l secti ons of the paper. The abstract
i ncl udes m uch of the Intr oducti on (back gr ound, the questi on, ex per i m ental appr oach,
ani m al or popul ati on studi ed, thei r condi ti on, m ater i al ) but onl y a f ew detai l s f r om
m ethods (speci f i c i ndependent and dependent var i abl es, doses, m ethods), onl y key
r esul ts and key data f r om Resul ts, f i gur es, and tabl es, and onl y the answ er and m ay be
an i m pl i cati on or a specul ati on f r om the Di scussi on.
Organization of Results
If you i ncl ude tw o or m or e r esul ts i n your abstract, ar range them i n a l ogi cal or der,
such as chr onol ogi cal or der, m ost to l east i m por tant, or l east to m ost i m por tant. When
or gani zi ng f r om m ost to l east i m por tant, descr i be contr ol r esul ts l ast, i f you i ncl ude
them at al l . In Ex am pl e 10. 1 above, the or der of the r esul ts i s chr onol ogi cal
(ex pr essi on, f uncti on).
Example 10.2
A1To deter m i ne w hether l esi ons of the nucl eus tractus sol i tar i um al ter pul m onar y ar ter y
pr essur es and pul m onar y l y m ph f l ow w i thout al ter i ng the sy stem i c ci r cul ati on, A2w e
m easur ed pr essur es and l y m ph f l ow i n 6 hal othaneanestheti zed sheep i n w hi ch w e
cr eated l esi ons of the nucl eus by bi l ateral ther m ocoagul ati on. BWe f ound that pul m onar y
ar ter y pr essur e r ose to 150% of basel i ne and r em ai ned el evated f or the 3h durati on of
the ex per i m ent. CPul m onar y l y m ph f l ow doubl ed w i thi n 2 h. DSy stem i c and l ef t atr i al
pr essur es di d not change. ESham nucl eus tractus sol i tar i um l esi ons and l esi ons l ateral
to the nucl eus pr oduced no changes. FThese ex per i m ents dem onstrate that l esi ons of the
nucl eus tractus sol i tar i um al ter pul m onar y ar ter y pr essur es and pul m onar y l y m ph f l ow
i ndependentl y of the ef f ects on the sy stem i c ci r cul ati on.
In thi s abstract, r esul ts ar e r epor ted i n a l ogi cal or der (m ost to l east i m por tant):
ex per i m ental r esul ts f i r st (B–D) and contr ol r esul ts l ast (E). In addi ti on, var i abl es that
changed (B, C) ar e r epor ted bef or e var i abl es that di d not change (D)—al so a l ogi cal
or der. N ote al so that the detai l s of the r esul ts
P. 272
f ound ar e i n the sam e or der as the detai l s i n the questi on: f i r st pul m onar y ar ter y
pr essur es, nex t pul m onar y l y m ph f l ow, and l ast sy stem i c ci r cul ator y var i abl es.
To str eam l i ne the abstract, detai l s of the ex per i m ent done ar e i ncl uded i n the
statem ents of the r esul ts f ound. Thus, the durati on of the ex per i m ent (3 h) and the
speci f i c dependent var i abl es of the sy stem i c ci r cul ati on (sy stem i c and l ef t atr i al
pr essur es) ar e m enti oned onl y w hen the r esul ts ar e gi ven (sentences B and D).
Si m i l ar l y, the contr ol m aneuver s ar e m enti oned onl y at the begi nni ng of the sentence
stati ng contr ol r esul ts (E). In addi ti on, data ar e gi ven as a per centage [“150% of
basel i ne” (B)] and as a pr opor ti on [“doubl ed” (C)] rather than as ex act val ues.
The answ er i s stated i n the l ast sentence (F) and answ er s the questi on as i t was asked
(usi ng the sam e key ter m s, the sam e ver b, and the sam e poi nt of v i ew ).
Writing
Continuity
To pr ov i de cl ear conti nui ty thr oughout the abstract, r epeat key ter m s, use consi stent
or der f or detai l s, keep the sam e poi nt of v i ew i n the questi on and the answ er, and use
ei ther paral l el f or m or consi stent poi nt of v i ew f or com par i sons and other paral l el i deas
(see Ex am pl e 10. 3 bel ow ).
Signaling Topics
Abstracts ar e conventi onal l y w r i tten as one paragraph. (For excepti ons, see “Var i ati ons”
bel ow. ) Ther ef or e, i t hel ps the r eader i f you si gnal the par ts of an abstract both
v i sual l y, by star ti ng a new sentence, and ver bal l y, by si gnal i ng the topi c at the
begi nni ng of the sentence. Begi n a new sentence f or the questi on, the r esul ts f ound, and
the answ er. The questi on and the ex per i m ent done ar e f r equentl y i n the sam e sentence,
so then onl y the questi on needs to be si gnal ed. How ever, i f the sentence w oul d be too
l ong, the questi on and ex per i m ent can be i n separate sentences, each hav i ng i ts ow n
si gnal . The questi on can be si gnal ed by an i nf i ni ti ve f ol l ow ed by a questi on w or d or as a
hy pothesi s (see the tabl e bel ow ). The r esul ts f ound can be si gnal ed by “We f ound.” The
answ er to the questi on can be si gnal ed by “We concl ude that” or “Ther ef or e” or
som ethi ng si m i l ar.
Topic Signa l
Resul ts We f ound… .
If the abstract i ncl udes an i m pl i cati on, be car ef ul to di sti ngui sh the i m pl i cati on f r om the
answ er by usi ng a cauti ous si gnal , such as “These r esul ts suggest that… .” The ver b i n
the suggesti on can al so be cauti ous, “m ay i nhi bi t,”
P. 273
“m ay pl ay a r ol e i n,” etc. For the cl ear est di sti ncti on betw een answ er s and i m pl i cati ons,
al so put them i n separate sentences (as i n Ex am pl e 10. 1)
Verb Tense
Ver b tenses i n the abstract shoul d be the sam e as those i n the paper : pr esent tense f or
the questi on and the answ er ; past tense f or the ex per i m ent done and the r esul ts f ound.
Sentence Structure
Wr i te shor t sentences. Avoi d noun cl uster s. If your techni cal ter m s ar e com posed of
several w or ds, as i n Ex am pl e 10. 3 bel ow, w r i ti ng shor t sentences m ay be di f f i cul t.
Word Choice
U se si m pl e w or ds. For the sake of f or ei gn r eader s and r eader s w ho w or k i n other f i el ds,
avoi d jar gon.
Abbreviations
Avoi d abbr ev i ati ons w her ever possi bl e. You shoul d use standar d abbr ev i ati ons f or uni ts
of m easur em ent (Inter nati onal Sy stem abbr ev i ati ons), and you can use standar d, w i del y
accepted abbr ev i ati ons such as DN A. But sem i standar d and nonstandar d abbr ev i ati ons
m ake r eadi ng a chor e and shoul d ther ef or e be avoi ded. If you m ust use a nonstandar d
abbr ev i ati on that i s not w i del y accepted, def i ne i t the f i r st ti m e you use i t i n the
abstract, f or ex am pl e, “gl utam ate py r uvate transf erase (GPT).” Som e speci al ty jour nal s
per m i t abbr ev i ati ons that ar e standar d i n thei r speci al ty to be used w i thout def i ni ti on i n
the abstract and i n the paper. Thi s practi ce m akes r eadi ng di f f i cul t f or new com er s to the
speci al ty.
For those w ho l i ke num er i cal gui del i nes, one abbr ev i ati on (other than a uni t of
m easur em ent) i s no pr obl em , tw o abbr ev i ati ons ar e OK, thr ee ar e bor der l i ne. Readi ng
becom es geom etr i cal l y m or e di f f i cul t af ter that. If you cannot avoi d abbr ev i ati ons
al together, tr y to have onl y one abbr ev i ati on i n an abstract and cer tai nl y no m or e than
thr ee.
Length
Most jour nal s l i m i t the l ength of the abstract (usual l y to 250 w or ds or l ess). “U ni f or m
Requi r em ents f or Manuscr i pts Subm i tted to Bi om edi cal Jour nal s” (see Li teratur e Ci ted)
speci f i es 150 w or ds or l ess. If no l i m i t i s stated, m ake your abstract no l onger than the
abstracts i n r ecent i ssues of the jour nal .
Do not i ncl ude uni m por tant detai l s or unnecessar y w or ds just to f i l l up space. If you can
sum m ar i ze your paper i n f ew er w or ds than the m ax i m um al l ow ed, do so.
If you ar e tem pted to add m or e and m or e detai l , keep i n m i nd that the abstract w i l l
becom e m or e and m or e unr eadabl e; the tr ees w i l l over shadow the f or est. That i s the
ex act opposi te of w hat you want. The over v i ew i s easi est to see i n a shor t abstract, so
keep your abstract shor t. In no case shoul d your abstract be m or e than 250 w or ds, even
i f the jour nal publ i shes l onger abstracts.
In your ef f or t to keep the abstract shor t, do not w r i te i n the sty l e of a tel egram ; that i s,
do not om i t necessar y “a's,” “an's,” and “the's.”
P. 274
Example 10.3
A1To deter m i ne w hether 4 dr ugs used i n the tr eatm ent of asthm a i nhi bi t the tol uene
di i socyanatei nduced l ate asthm ati c r eacti on and the associ ated i ncr ease i n ai r way
r esponsi veness to m ethachol i ne, A2w e assessed these var i abl es i n 24 sensi ti zed
subjects di v i ded i nto 4 gr oups of 6 subjects each. BEi ther sl owr el ease verapam i l (120
m g tw i ce a day ), cr om ol y n (20 m g 4 ti m es a day v i a spi nhal er ), sl owr el ease
theophy l l i ne (6. 5 m g/k g tw i ce a day ), or becl om ethasone aer osol (1 m g tw i ce a day )
was adm i ni ster ed f or 7 day s, each to one of the 4 gr oups, accor di ng to a doubl ebl i nd,
cr ossover, pl acebocontr ol l ed study desi gn. CWe f ound that nei ther pl acebo, verapam i l ,
nor cr om ol y n i nhi bi ted the l ar ge i ncr ease i n f or ced ex pi rator y vol um e i n the f i r st second
(FEV 1 ) or the i ncr ease i n ai r way r esponsi veness to m ethachol i ne af ter ex posur e to
tol uene. DSl owr el ease theophy l l i ne par ti al l y i nhi bi ted the i ncr ease i n FEV 1 but had no
ef f ect on ai r way r esponsi veness to m ethachol i ne. EBecl om ethasone i nhi bi ted both
var i abl es. FThus, onl y the hi ghdose i nhal ed ster oi d becl om ethasone ef f ecti vel y i nhi bi ts
tol uene di i socyanatei nduced l ate asthm ati c r eacti ons and the associ ated i ncr eases i n
ai r way r esponsi veness to m ethachol i ne.
Thi s abstract f ol l ow s the gui del i nes f or content and or gani zati on of abstracts. N ote that
r esul ts (C–E) ar e pr esented i n the or der of l east to m ost ef f ecti ve (l east to m ost
i m por tant).
Thi s abstract al so f ol l ow s m ost of the gui del i nes f or w r i ti ng. Conti nui ty i s str ong
because of r epeti ti on of key ter m s (i nhi bi t, verapam i l , cr om ol y n, theophy l l i ne,
becl om ethasone, tol uene, l ate asthm ati c r eacti on, i ncr ease i n ai r way r esponsi veness to
m ethachol i ne, FEV 1 ), consi stent or der of the dr ugs i n the ex per i m ent done (B) and the
r esul ts f ound (C–E), and consi stent poi nt of v i ew f or r esul ts f ound (C–E).
The r esul ts f ound ar e si gnal ed by “We f ound that” at the begi nni ng of a new sentence.
The answ er i s si gnal ed by “Thus” at the begi nni ng of a new sentence.
Ver b tenses ar e appr opr i ate: pr esent tense f or the questi on (“i nhi bi t”) and the answ er
(“i nhi bi ts”); past tense f or the ex per i m ent done (“assessed,” “was adm i ni ster ed”) and
the r esul ts f ound (“i nhi bi ted,” “i nhi bi ted,” “had,” “i nhi bi ted”).
Wor d choi ce i s as si m pl e as possi bl e. Onl y one abbr ev i ati on i s used (FEV 1 ). Al though i t
i s a standar d abbr ev i ati on i n r espi rator y phy si ol ogy, i t i s def i ned.
The abstract i s r easonabl y shor t (181 w or ds) and the over v i ew i s cl ear.
How ever, the sentences, especi al l y sentences A and B, ar e rather l ong (A, 44 w or ds; B,
57 w or ds; m ean, 30 w or ds per sentence). One way to shor ten the sentences (and the
abstract) sl i ghtl y w i thout om i tti ng any i nf or m ati on i s to condense the sentence that
descr i bes the ex per i m ent done (B) and nam e the dr ugs and the doses onl y i n the
sentences that state r esul ts, as i n the r ev i si on.
Revision
A1To deter m i ne w hether 4 dr ugs used i n the tr eatm ent of asthm a i nhi bi t the tol uene
di i socyanatei nduced l ate asthm ati c r eacti on and the associ ated i ncr ease i n ai r way
r esponsi veness to m ethachol i ne, A2w e assessed these var i abl es i n 24 sensi ti zed
subjects di v i ded i nto 4 gr oups of 6 subjects each. BSubjects i n each gr oup r ecei ved one
dr ug f or 7 day s accor di ng to a doubl ebl i nd, cr ossover, pl acebocontr ol l ed study desi gn.
CWe f ound that nei ther pl acebo, sl owr el ease verapam i l (120 m g tw i ce a day ), nor
cr om ol y n (20 m g 4 ti m es a day v i a spi nhal er ) i nhi bi ted the l ar ge i ncr ease i n f or ced
ex pi rator y vol um e i n the f i r st second (FEV 1 ) or the i ncr ease i n ai r way r esponsi veness to
m ethachol i ne af ter ex posur e to tol uene. DSl owr el ease theophy l l i ne (6. 5 m g/k g tw i ce a
day ) par ti al l y i nhi bi ted the i ncr ease i n FEV 1 but had no ef f ect on ai r way r esponsi veness
to m ethachol i ne.
P. 275
EBecl om ethasone aer osol (1 m g tw i ce a day ) i nhi bi ted both var i abl es. FThus, onl y the
hi ghdose i nhal ed ster oi d becl om ethasone ef f ecti vel y i nhi bi ts tol uene di i socyanate
i nduced l ate asthm ati c r eacti ons and the associ ated i ncr eases i n ai r way r esponsi veness
to m ethachol i ne.
Putti ng the detai l s of the ex per i m ent done i n the statem ent of the r esul ts f ound shor tens
the abstract by 10 w or ds (171 v s. 181). It al so shor tens sentence B consi derabl y (20 v s.
57 w or ds) and thus m akes the over v i ew of w hat was done cl ear er. Al though sentence C
i s now l onger (48 v s. 33 w or ds), m ean sentence l ength i s shor ter (28. 5 v s. 30 w or ds per
sentence).
Because ther e i s no hy pothesi s i n descr i pti ve paper s, the m essage i s stated at the
begi nni ng of the abstract. The r esul ts that suppor t the m essage com e i m m edi atel y af ter
the m essage, to conv i nce the r eader that the m essage i s tr ue. The i m pl i cati on i s stated
at the end. Methods, i f any, ar e i ncl uded i n the sentences that state the r esul ts.
P. 276
In thi s descr i pti ve abstract, sentences A–C pr ov i de back gr ound i nf or m ati on i ndi cati ng
the r eason f or the study and the i m por tance of the m essage. Sentence D states the
m essage. Sentences E–H state the r esul ts, w hi ch descr i be str uctural detai l s. Sentence I
states an i m pl i cati on, w hi ch i s a possi bl e f uncti on of the enzy m e i denti f i ed i n thi s study.
Writing
Signaling Topics
In a descr i pti ve abstract, onl y the m essage and the i m pl i cati on ar e si gnal ed. The si gnal
of the m essage i s “Her e w e r epor t” or som e var i ati on on thi s si gnal , such as “We her e
r epor t,” “Her e w e descr i be,” or “We r epor t.” Si gnal s of the i m pl i cati on ar e “These
f i ndi ngs suggest that,” “We pr opose that,” or som ethi ng si m i l ar.
Verb Tense
Ver b tenses ar e a l i ttl e tr i ck i er i n descr i pti ve abstracts than i n hy pothesi stesti ng
abstracts. The basi c gui del i ne i s that i f a statem ent i s sti l l tr ue, use pr esent tense; i f
the statem ent i s about som ethi ng done or f ound i n the past, use past tense. Thus, w hen
you ar e descr i bi ng a str uctur e, use pr esent tense, as i n sentences E and F of Ex am pl e
10. 4 (“bel ong,” “show ”) and sentences B, C, and D of Ex am pl e 10. 5, (“ar e,” “l ocal i zes,”
“cor r espond,” “r equi r es”) because these statem ents ar e sti l l tr ue. But w hen you descr i be
the r esul t of an ex per i m ent, use past tense, as i n sentences E, G, and H of Ex am pl e
10. 4 (“r eveal ed,” “was i denti f i ed,” “pr ecl uded”) and sentence E of Ex am pl e 10. 5
(“col ocal i zed”), because those events ar e f i ni shed. For i m pl i cati ons, the ver bs used can
be cauti ous, as i n Ex am pl e 10. 4 (“m ay f aci l i tate”) or not, as i n Ex am pl e 10. 5
(“pr om otes,” “ensur es”).
Ex am pl e 10. 5 i ncl udes onl y the thr ee basi c par ts of a descr i pti ve abstract: the m essage
(sentence A), the r esul ts that suppor t the m essage (B–E), and an i m pl i cati on (F).
P. 277
Length
Keep the abstract as shor t as possi bl e, never m or e than 250 w or ds.
Question Omitted
If the questi on i s om i tted, w e r ead the abstract bl i ndl y, w i th l i ttl e or no under standi ng
of the pur pose of the m aneuver s and the m easur em ents or of the possi bl e m eani ng of
the r esul ts. We under stand the abstract onl y at the end and then have to r er ead i t to f i t
the detai l s i nto the pi ctur e.
In thi s abstract, w e hear w hat ex per i m ent was done, w hat r esul ts w er e f ound, w hat the
answ er i s, and w hat the i m pl i cati ons ar e. But w e do not hear w hat the questi on was.
Ther ef or e, w e do not k now w hy the FGFR2 gene was di sr upted. N ot unti l the answ er
(sentence F) do w e see the poi nt of the ex per i m ent done and the r esul ts f ound. If the
questi on w er e stated at the begi nni ng of the abstract, our r eadi ng job w oul d be easi er,
because w e w oul d under stand w hy these ex per i m ents w er e done, w her e these r esul ts
ar e l eadi ng, and w hat k i nd of answ er to ex pect.
Thi s abstract al so i l l ustrates several other pr obl em s that com m onl y appear i n abstracts:
the ani m al the w or k was done on i s not m enti oned; the over v i ew of the ex per i m ent
done to answ er the questi on i s i ncom pl ete (onl y the i ndependent var i abl e i s m enti oned),
so w e do not k now w hat to ex pect i n the r esul ts; the r esul ts ar e not si gnal ed (and the
way the f i r st r esul t, i n sentence B, i s
P. 278
stated m akes i t uncl ear w hether i t i s a r esul t); and how the r esul ts ar e or gani zed i s not
m ade cl ear. In addi ti on, a vague statem ent i s m ade at the end (“The r ol e… i s
di scussed.”) Stati ng that som ethi ng “i s di scussed” i s not a usef ul statem ent i n an
abstract; ei ther the poi nt (an i m pl i cati on) shoul d be stated or the sentence shoul d be
om i tted. The r ev i si on sol ves al l of these pr obl em s.
Revision
AWe hy pothesi zed that f i br obl ast gr ow th f actor r eceptor 2 (FGFR2) i s r equi r ed f or ear l y
posti m pl antati on devel opm ent of m am m al i an em br yos. A′ To test thi s hy pothesi s, w e
di sr upted the FGFR2 gene i n tw o strai ns of m i ce and assessed sur v i val and em br yoni c
devel opm ent i n v i v o, i n si tu, and i n v i tr o. A″To di sr upt the gene, w e i ntr oduced a neo
cassette i nto the IIIC l i gand bi ndi ng exon and del eted a genom i c DN A f ragm ent encodi ng
i ts transm em brane dom ai n and par t of i ts k i nase I dom ai n. BIn i n v i v o studi es, w e f ound
that the hom ozygous of f spr i ng of FGFR2 heter ozygotes w er e dead at bi r th. CIn i n si tu
studi es, bef or e i m pl antati on, the hom ozygous m utant em br yos devel oped nor m al l y unti l
the bl astocy st stage. DHow ever , the m utant em br yos di ed a f ew hour s af ter
i m pl antati on at a random posi ti on i n the uter i ne cr y pt, w i th a col l apsed yol k cav i ty. EIn
i n v i tr o studi es, the m utant bl astocy sts hatched, adher ed, and f or m ed a l ayer of
tr ophobl ast gi ant cel l s; but af ter pr ol onged cul tur e, the gr ow th of the i nner cel l m ass
stopped, no v i sceral endoder m f or m ed, and f i nal l y the egg cy l i nder di si ntegrated.
FThese f i ndi ngs i ndi cate that FGFR2 i s r equi r ed f or ear l y posti m pl antati on devel opm ent
betw een i m pl antati on and the f or m ati on of the egg cy l i nder. GWe suggest that FGFR2
contr i butes to the outgr ow th, di f f er enti ati on, and m ai ntenance of the i nner cel l m ass
and that thi s acti v i ty m ay be m edi ated by FGF4 si gnal s transm i tted by FGFR2. HWe
f ur ther suggest that FGF si gnal i ng i n pr egastr ul ati on devel opm ent m ay be an adaptati on
to m am m al i an (am ni ote) em br yogenesi s.
In the r ev i si on, the questi on, stated as a hy pothesi s at the begi nni ng of the abstract,
pr epar es the r eader f or the ex per i m ent done, the r esul ts f ound, and the answ er. The
com pl ete descr i pti on of the ex per i m ent i n the nex t sentence i ncl udes the ani m al studi ed
(m i ce) and pr epar es us f or the or gani zati on of the r esul ts. We k now w her e the r esul ts
star t because the f i r st r esul t i s si gnal ed by “In i n v i v o studi es, w e f ound that.” In
addi ti on, the r esul t i s w r i tten m or e cl ear l y, w i th the acti on i n the ver b. The si gnal s “In
i n si tu studi es” and “In i n v i tr o studi es” hel p us f ol l ow the ex pected or gani zati on of the
r esul ts. Fi nal l y, the i m pl i cati ons ar e w r i tten i n si m i l ar f or m and have paral l el si gnal s,
m ak i ng i t cl ear that both sentences G and H state i m pl i cati ons. To shor ten thi s abstract,
the l ast i m pl i cati on coul d be om i tted.
P. 279
Example 10.7
A1Pl asm a chol ester ol m etabol i sm was studi ed A2i n young, nonobese, nor m ol i pi dem i c
m en w ho sm oked m oderatel y [24 ± 5 (SD) ci gar ettes/day ] and i n a m atched nonsm ok i ng
nor m al contr ol gr oup. BIn the sm oker s, both net transpor t of chol ester ol f r om cel l
m em branes i nto pl asm a (P > 0. 001) and the rati o of the rate of chol ester y l ester
transf er to the am ount of l ow and ver y l owdensi ty l i popr otei n (P > 0. 05) w er e
decr eased. CIn addi ti on, apopr otei n E was i ncr eased i n sm oker s' pl asm a (P > 0. 05),
w her eas apopr otei n AI, the m ajor apopr otei n of hi ghdensi ty l i popr otei n, was decr eased
(P > 0. 05). DThi s patter n of abnor m al i ti es has pr ev i ousl y been obser ved i n several
other gr oups of subjects at i ncr eased r i sk f or ather oscl er oti c vascul ar di sease
(di abeti cs, dy sbetal i popr otei nem i cs, and hy per betal i popr otei nem i cs). E1These data
i ndi cate that ci gar ette sm ok i ng causes abnor m al m etabol i sm of pl asm a chol ester ol i n
young m en, E2w hi ch coul d par tl y ex pl ai n the hi gh i nci dence of ather oscl er oti c vascul ar
di sease i n ol der m al e sm oker s.
Li ke Ex am pl e 10. 6, thi s abstract i s easy to r ead, and w e have a cl ear i dea of w hat
ex per i m ent was done, w hat r esul ts w er e f ound, and w hat the answ er was. But even
though a questi on appear s to be stated, w e do not have a cl ear over v i ew f r om the
begi nni ng. The r eason i s that the questi on (A 1 ) i s stated vaguel y. Onl y the dependent
var i abl e (pl asm a chol ester ol m etabol i sm ) i s nam ed. The i ndependent var i abl e (ci gar ette
sm ok i ng) i s hi dden i n the descr i pti on of the study subjects (A 2 ). The i ndependent and
dependent var i abl es ar e not joi ned by a ver b. Fur ther m or e, the speci f i c topi c—abnor m al
m etabol i sm —i s m i ssi ng. To have a speci f i c questi on that anti ci pates the answ er
(“ci gar ette sm ok i ng causes abnor m al m etabol i sm of pl asm a chol ester ol i n young m en”),
the questi on w oul d have to be “to deter m i ne w hether ci gar ette sm ok i ng by young m en
causes abnor m al m etabol i sm of pl asm a chol ester ol ,” not “pl asm a chol ester ol
m etabol i sm was studi ed.” Stati ng the questi on speci f i cal l y, as i n the r ev i si on bel ow,
pr epar es f or the answ er m or e cl ear l y. Si m i l ar l y, the f i r st sentence shoul d pr epar e the
r eader to hear the i m pl i cati on about ather oscl er oti c vascul ar di sease i n the l ast
sentence.
Tw o other com m on f l aw s al so appear i n thi s abstract. One i s that P val ues ar e i ncl uded
but no data ar e gi ven. P val ues al one ar e not usef ul . If you want to gi ve a quanti tati ve
i dea of the data w i thout pr esenti ng actual val ues such as m ean and standar d dev i ati on,
gi ve per cent change. If you do gi ve a P val ue, al so gi ve the m ean, standar d dev i ati on,
and sam pl e si ze (n) (see Ex am pl e 10. 11 bel ow ).
In addi ti on, i n the l ast sentence, the ter m “data” i s used, but, as w e have just seen, no
data ar e gi ven. “Data” i n sentence E shoul d be changed to “r esul ts” or “f i ndi ngs,” w hi ch
ar e general i zati ons based on data. (See Chap. 6: “Resul ts and Data” under “Content.”)
Revision
A1To deter m i ne w hether ci gar ette sm ok i ng by young m en causes abnor m al m etabol i sm
of pl asm a chol ester ol A2i ndi cati ve of ather oscl er oti c vascul ar di sease, A3w e com par ed
pl asm a chol ester ol m etabol i sm i n young, nonobese, nor m ol i pi dem i c m en w ho sm oked
m oderatel y [24 ± 5 (SD) ci gar ettes/day ] w i th chol ester ol m etabol i sm i n a m atched
nonsm ok i ng nor m al contr ol gr oup. BWe f ound that i n the sm oker s, both net transpor t of
chol ester ol f r om cel l m em branes i nto pl asm a and the rati o of the rate of chol ester y l
ester transf er to the am ount of l ow and ver y l owdensi ty l i popr otei n w er e decr eased.
CIn addi ti on, apopr otei n E was i ncr eased i n sm oker s' pl asm a, w her eas apopr otei n AI,
the
P. 280
m ajor apopr otei n of hi ghdensi ty l i popr otei n, was decr eased. DThi s patter n of
abnor m al i ti es has pr ev i ousl y been obser ved i n several other gr oups of subjects at
i ncr eased r i sk f or ather oscl er oti c vascul ar di sease (di abeti cs, dy sbetal i popr otei nem i cs,
and hy per betal i popr otei nem i cs). E1These r esul ts i ndi cate that ci gar ette sm ok i ng causes
abnor m al m etabol i sm of pl asm a chol ester ol i n young m en, E2w hi ch coul d par tl y ex pl ai n
the hi gh i nci dence of ather oscl er oti c vascul ar di sease i n ol der m al e sm oker s.
In thi s r ev i si on, the questi on i s m ade speci f i c by addi ng the i ndependent var i abl e
(“ci gar ette sm ok i ng”), the speci f i c topi c (“abnor m al m etabol i sm of pl asm a chol ester ol ”),
and the ver b “causes.” In addi ti on to these speci f i c detai l s, the f i r st sentence i ncl udes
“i ndi cati ve of ather oscl er oti c vascul ar di sease,” w hi ch i m pl i es the ul ti m ate questi on
behi nd the questi on asked i n thi s paper and thus pr epar es f or the i m pl i cati on stated
af ter the answ er (sentence E 2 ). Fi nal l y, P val ues ar e om i tted and “data” i s changed to
“r esul ts” (E 1 ).
Som e peopl e m ay pr ef er to state the questi on m or e general l y (“To deter m i ne the ef f ect
of ci gar ette sm ok i ng by young m en on the m etabol i sm of pl asm a chol ester ol ”) because
i t i s m or e objecti ve soundi ng. But i f you r eal l y suspected that ci gar ette sm ok i ng m i ght
cause abnor m al m etabol i sm of chol ester ol , i n other w or ds, i f you r eal l y had a
hy pothesi s, you shoul d state the questi on speci f i cal l y. Al though a general questi on i s
better than a vague questi on, a speci f i c questi on i s best, because a speci f i c questi on
pr epar es the r eader f or the speci f i c answ er.
Example 10.8
ADi gesti on of l owdensi ty l i popr otei n i n v i tr o by the speci f i c endopr otease k al l i k r ei n
pr oduces tw o f ragm ents f r om B100: K 1 and K 2 . B1To deter m i ne w hether these
f ragm ents ar i se f r om the sam e poi nt of cl eavage as the natural l y occur r i ng f ragm ents of
B100, B74 and B26, B2w e used k al l i k r ei n to di gest l owdensi ty l i popr otei n f r om
hum an pl asm a and com par ed the r esul ti ng f ragm ents, K 1 and K 2 , w i th B74 and B26.
CWe f ound that not onl y the m ol ecul ar w ei ght and the stoi chi om etr y but al so the am i no
ter m i nal am i no aci d sequence i n K 1 and K 2 pr eci sel y m atched those i n B74 and B26.
DThese f i ndi ngs str ongl y suggest that k al l i k r ei n i s the agent r esponsi bl e f or the
f or m ati on of B74 and B26 i n hum an l owdensi ty l i popr otei n.
In thi s abstract, w e see the over v i ew f r om the begi nni ng and can easi l y f ol l ow the stor y
unti l the l ast sentence. Al though the abstract ends by stati ng a cl osel y r el ated
i m pl i cati on of the f i ndi ngs, that i s not w hat w e w er e ex pecti ng. We w er e ex pecti ng the
answ er to the questi on. The i m pl i cati on can be added af ter the answ er, but i t shoul d not
be stated i nstead of the answ er.
Revision
ADi gesti on of l owdensi ty l i popr otei n i n v i tr o by the speci f i c endopr otease k al l i k r ei n
pr oduces tw o f ragm ents f r om B100: K 1 and K 2 . B1To deter m i ne
P. 281
w hether these f ragm ents ar i se f r om the sam e poi nt of cl eavage as the natural l y
occur r i ng f ragm ents of B100, B74 and B26, B2w e used k al l i k r ei n to di gest l owdensi ty
l i popr otei n f r om hum an pl asm a and com par ed the r esul ti ng f ragm ents, K 1 and K 2 , w i th
B74 and B26. CWe f ound that not onl y the m ol ecul ar w ei ght and the stoi chi om etr y but
al so the am i no ter m i nal am i no aci d sequence i n K 1 and K 2 pr eci sel y m atched those i n B
74 and B26. DWe concl ude that f ragm ents K 1 and K 2 ar i se f r om the sam e poi nt of
cl eavage as the natural l y occur r i ng f ragm ents B74 and B26. EThese f i ndi ngs str ongl y
suggest that k al l i k r ei n i s the agent r esponsi bl e f or the f or m ati on of B74 and B26 i n
hum an l owdensi ty l i popr otei n.
In the r ev i si on, the answ er has been added (D), thus m ak i ng the stor y com pl ete and
cl ear. In addi ti on, because the answ er uses the sam e key ter m s, the sam e poi nt of
v i ew, and the sam e ver b as i n the questi on, i t i s easy to see that the answ er answ er s
the questi on asked. Fur ther m or e, the answ er i s a m i ssi ng step i n the l ogi c. Once the
answ er i s stated, i t i s easi er to under stand the i m pl i cati on.
To i l l ustrate the pr obl em of the substi tuti on of descr i pti ve abstracts f or hy pothesi s
testi ng abstracts, her e ar e abstracts f or tw o paper s that appear ed back to back i n one
i ssue of the jour nal Cel l . The paper s descr i be ver y si m i l ar f i ndi ngs f or ver y si m i l ar
enzy m es. Both paper s tested hy potheses, as stated i n thei r i ntr oducti ons. How ever, the
f i r st abstract (Ex am pl e l 0. 9) was w r i tten essenti al l y as a descr i pti ve abstract and the
second one (Ex am pl e 10. 10) was w r i tten as a hy pothesi stesti ng abstract.
Example 10.9
AHer e w e r epor t the generati on of m i ce l ack i ng the ubi qui tousl y ex pr essed Janus
k i nase, Jak 1. BJak 1 / m i ce ar e r unted at bi r th, f ai l to nur se, and di e per i natal l y.
CAl though Jak 1/ cel l s ar e r esponsi ve to m any cy tok i nes, they f ai l to m ani f est bi ol ogi c
r esponses to cy tok i nes that bi nd to thr ee di sti nct f am i l i es of cy tok i ne r eceptor s. DThese
i ncl ude al l cl ass II cy tok i ne r eceptor s, cy tok i ne r eceptor s that uti l i ze the γ c subuni t f or
si gnal i ng, and the f am i l y of cy tok i ne r eceptor s that depend on the gp130 subuni t f or
si gnal i ng. EOur r esul ts thus dem onstrate that Jak 1 pl ay s an essenti al and nonr edundant
r ol e i n pr om oti ng bi ol ogi c r esponses i nduced by a sel ect subset of cy tok i ne r eceptor s,
i ncl udi ng those i n w hi ch Jak uti l i zati on was thought to be nonspeci f i c.
P. 282
Example 10.10
AA var i ety of cy tok i nes acti vate r eceptor associ ated m em ber s of the Janus f am i l y of
pr otei n ty r osi ne k i nases (Jak s). BTo assess the r ol e of Jak 2, w e have der i ved Jak 2
def i ci ent m i ce. CThe m utati on causes an em br yoni c l ethal i ty due to the absence of
def i ni ti ve er y thr opoi esi s. DFetal l i ver myel oi d pr ogeni tor s, al though pr esent based on
the ex pr essi on of l i neage speci f i c m ar ker s, f ai l to r espond to er y thr opoi eti n,
thr om bopoi eti n, i nter l euk i n3 (IL–3), or granul ocy te/ m acr ophage col onysti m ul ati ng
f actor. EIn contrast, the r esponse to granul ocy tespeci f i c col onysti m ul ati ng f actor i s
unaf f ected. FJak 2def i ci ent f i br obl asts f ai l ed to r espond to i nter f er on γ (IFN γ ), al though
the r esponses to IFN α/β and IL6 w er e unaf f ected. GLastl y, r econsti tuti on ex per i m ents
dem onstrate that Jak 2 i s not r equi r ed f or the generati on of l y m phoi d pr ogeni tor s, thei r
am pl i f i cati on, or f uncti onal di f f er enti ati on. HTher ef or e, Jak 2 pl ay s a cr i ti cal ,
nonr edundant r ol e i n the f uncti on of a speci f i c gr oup of cy tok i ne r eceptor s.
Revision
AA var i ety of cy tok i nes acti vate r eceptor associ ated m em ber s of the Janus f am i l y of
pr otei n ty r osi ne k i nases (Jak s). B To de te rmine w he the r Ja k 2 is e s s e ntia l for
s igna ling through the re c e ptors of the s e c ytok ine s , w e der i ved Jak 2def i ci ent m i ce
and assessed thei r overal l phenoty pe and cel l ul ar r esponses to a var i ety of cy tok i nes.
C We f ound that the Jak 2 def i ci ency k i l l ed the em br yos due to the absence of def i ni ti ve
er y thr opoi esi s. D In addi ti on, f etal l i ver myel oi d pr ogeni tor s, al though pr esent, as
i ndi cated by the ex pr essi on of l i neagespeci f i c m ar ker s, di d not r espond to
er y thr opoi eti n, thr om bopoi eti n, i nter l euk i n3 (IL3), or granul ocy te/m acr ophage col ony
sti m ul ati ng f actor. E In contrast, the r esponse to granul ocy tespeci f i c col onysti m ul ati ng
f actor was unaf f ected. F Jak 2def i ci ent f i br obl asts di d not r espond to i nter f er on γ (IFN γ ),
al though the r esponses to IFN α/β and IL6 w er e unaf f ected. G Lastl y, r econsti tuti on
ex per i m ents dem onstrateD that Jak 2 i s not r equi r ed f or the generati on of l y m phoi d
pr ogeni tor s, thei r am pl i f i cati on, or f uncti onal di f f er enti ati on. H Thus, Jak 2 i s essenti al
f or si gnal i ng thr ough a var i ety of cy tok i ne r eceptor s.
In addi ti on to the pr obl em of substi tuti ng a descr i pti ve abstract f or a hy pothesi s–testi ng
abstract, as i l l ustrated above, num er ous var i ati ons on thi s pr obl em ex i st. For ex am pl e,
som e abstracts tr y to have the best of both w or l ds, so they star t by stati ng the
back gr ound and a m essage si gnal ed by “Her e w e r epor t” and then add a questi on, the
ex per i m ent done, the r esul ts f ound, and an i m pl i cati on (but no answ er ). These strange
hy br i ds shoul d be avoi ded.
P. 283
The advantages of hav i ng standar d f or m s f or abstracts ar e that the sci ence i s r ef l ected
accuratel y, the r eader s k now w hat to ex pect, and the author s do not have to r ei nvent
the w heel . Know w hat ty pe of sci ence you ar e doi ng and use the standar d f or m to r epor t
i t, unl ess you have a ver y good r eason to m odi f y the f or m . These ver y good r easons
occur rar el y i f ever, not r outi nel y.
In sum m ar y, to ensur e that your abstract pr ov i des a cl ear over v i ew (1) state the
questi on you asked, (2) m ake the statem ent of the questi on speci f i c rather than vague
or general (nam e both the i ndependent and the dependent var i abl es, usi ng the sam e key
ter m s and the sam e poi nt of v i ew as i n the answ er, and, to anti ci pate the answ er, use a
ver b i n the questi on—the sam e ver b as i n the answ er ), (3) state the answ er to the
questi on, m ak i ng sur e that the answ er answ er s the questi on asked, and (4) w r i te a
hy pothesi stesti ng abstract, not a descr i pti ve abstract, w hen you tested a hy pothesi s.
Excessive Length
Another com m on pr obl em i n abstracts f or r esul ts paper s i s excessi ve l ength. Al though
m any jour nal s r equest abstracts no l onger than 250 w or ds, and other jour nal s have
shor ter l i m i ts, m any publ i shed abstracts ar e w el l over 250 w or ds. Even those that ar e
l ess than 250 w or ds m ay be l onger than necessar y. Ex am pl e 10. 11 i s a cl ear l y w r i tten
abstract, but at 271 w or ds i t i s 121 w or ds l onger than w hat the jour nal r equested.
The tw o sentences of back gr ound (A and B of the or i gi nal ver si on) ar e condensed i nto a
si ngl e sentence (A of the r ev i si on).
P. 284
Ex per i m ental pr eparati on f or the i ndependent var i abl e (C 2 , D) i s om i tted and sentences
C–E ar e com bi ned i nto a si ngl e sentence that states the questi on and the ex per i m ental
appr oach f or the i ndependent and dependent var i abl es (B).
The negati ve concl usi on and the com par i son w i th pr em atur e l am bs (I) ar e om i tted.
Even though the or i gi nal , l onger abstract i s qui te r eadabl e, the shor ter r ev i si on gets the
over v i ew acr oss m or e cl ear l y. Thus, f or the cl ear est over v i ew, condense l ong abstracts.
To condense a l ong abstract, i n addi ti on to om i tti ng unnecessar y w or ds, condense
back gr ound and om i t l ess i m por tant i nf or m ati on, such as def i ni ti ons, ex per i m ental
pr eparati on, detai l s of m ethods, ex act data, conf i r m ator y r esul ts, and com par i sons w i th
pr ev i ous r esul ts.
To condense thi s abstract f ur ther, to the r equested l ength of 150 w or ds, you have to
om i t som e i m por tant i nf or m ati on. Rev i si on B om i ts the back gr ound statem ent (A)
enti r el y, thus l osi ng the r el ati on of the study to hum an i l l ness, and al so om i ts the l ength
of ter m (B 2 ). In addi ti on, Rev i si on B changes “r i ngs of ductus ar ter i osus” to “ductal
r i ngs” i n the statem ents descr i bi ng the ex per i m ent done and the r esul ts f ound, m akes
sentence D acti ve, changes “sensi ti v i ty of the r i ngs” to “r i ngs' sensi ti v i ty,” changes “w e
concl ude that” to “thus,” and uses “r esul ts f r om ” i nstead of “i s caused by ” i n the
questi on and answ er.
Example 10.12
AThe ex i stence of spontaneous neural acti v i ty i n m am m al i an r eti nal gangl i on cel l s
dur i ng pr enatal l i f e has l ong been suspected. BThi s acti v i ty coul d pl ay a key r ol e i n the
r ef i nem ent of r eti nal pr ojecti ons dur i ng devel opm ent. C1Recor di ngs i n v i vo f r om the
r eti nas of rat f etuses betw een em br yoni c day s 17 and 21 C2f ound acti on potenti al s i n
spontaneousl y acti ve gangl i on cel l s at al l the ages studi ed.
Repr i nted w i th per m i ssi on f r om Gal l i L, Maf f ei L. Spontaneous i m pul se acti v i ty of rat
r eti nal gangl i on cel l s i n pr enatal l i f e. Sci ence 1988, Oct 7; 242:90–91. Copy r i ght 1988
Am er i can Associ ati on f or the Advancem ent of Sci ence.
Cl i ni cal jour nal s such as Annal s of Inter nal Medi ci ne r equest a speci f i c f or m , k now n as
str uctur ed abstracts. Rather than hav i ng a si ngl e paragraph, these abstracts contai n a
sequence of shor t paragraphs, each pr eceded by a subheadi ng. Ex am pl e 10. 13 i l l ustrates
one sequence of subheadi ngs. If thi s study had had an i ndependent var i abl e, another
subheadi ng, “Inter venti ons,” w oul d have been i ncl uded af ter “Pati ents.” Som e
paragraphs contai n phrases rather than sentences (see “Study Objecti ve,” “Desi gn,” and
“Setti ng” i n Ex am pl e 10. 13). Al though these abstracts tend to be l onger than si ngl e
paragraph abstracts, they ar e cl ear, and each ty pe of i nf or m ati on i s easy to f i nd.
Som e basi c sci ence jour nal s i m i tate the str uctur ed abstract by addi ng subheadi ngs to
the standar d abstract (f or ex am pl e, “Back gr ound,” “Methods,” “Resul ts,” “Concl usi ons”).
Example 10.13
Study Objecti v e: To deter m i ne the associ ati on betw een cur r ent use of nonaspi r i n
nonster oi dal anti i nf l am m ator y dr ugs and f atal pepti c ul cer s or upper gastr oi ntesti nal
hem or r hage i n the el der l y.
P. 286
Desi gn: N ested case contr ol study usi ng a l i nked Medi cai ddeath cer ti f i cate database.
Setti ng: Tennessee Medi cai d enr ol l ees aged 60 and gr eater f r om 1976 to 1984.
Pati ents: One hundr ed tw entytw o pati ents (“the cases”) had a ter m i nal hospi tal i zati on
and a pepti c ul cer or upper gastr oi ntesti nal hem or r hage conf i r m ed by hospi tal char t
r ev i ew. Popul ati on contr ol s (n = 3897) w er e m atched to potenti al cases by age, sex ,
race, cal endar year, and nur si ng hom e status.
Measur em ents and Mai n Resul ts: The 122 pati ents (“cases”) m or e f r equentl y f i l l ed a
pr escr i pti on f or a nonaspi r i n nonster oi dal anti i nf l am m ator y dr ug w i thi n 30 day s bef or e
onset of i l l ness than di d contr ol s (34% v s. 11%; adjusted odds rati o, 4. 7; 95% CI, 3. 1
to 7. 2). Thi s associ ati on betw een cur r ent use of nonaspi r i n nonster oi dal anti
i nf l am m ator y dr ugs and f atal pepti c ul cer di sease was consi stent i n thr ee age gr oups,
w om en and m en, w hi tes and nonw hi tes, and com m uni ty and nur si ng hom e dw el l er s.
Ther e was no si gni f i cant associ ati on betw een case status and pr ev i ous use of nonaspi r i n
nonster oi dal anti i nf l am m ator y dr ugs (adjusted odds rati o, 1. 9; 95% CI, 0. 7 to 4. 7).
Concl usi ons: The f i ndi ngs of thi s study add to the gr ow i ng ev i dence that nonaspi r i n
nonster oi dal anti i nf l am m ator y dr ugs can i ncr ease the r i sk f or cl i ni cal l y ser i ous pepti c
ul cer di sease i n the el der l y.
ABSTRACTS OF METHODS PAPERS
Content
Methods paper s ar e paper s that descr i be new or i m pr oved m ethods, apparatus, or
m ater i al s.
The abstract of a m ethods paper shoul d i ncl ude the f ol l ow i ng i nf or m ati on: the nam e or
the categor y ter m of the m ethod, apparatus, or m ater i al ; the pur pose; the ani m al or
popul ati on; the key f eatur es of the apparatus or m ater i al or how the m ethod or
apparatus w or k s, or both; the advantages; how the m ethod, apparatus, or m ater i al was
tested; and how w el l i t w or k s.
Name
If the m ethod, apparatus, or m ater i al has a nam e, use the nam e i n the abstract.
Other w i se, use a categor y ter m such as “m ethod” or “apparatus,” or, i f possi bl e, add an
adjecti ve that states a key f eatur e of the m ethod bef or e the categor y ter m . For
ex am pl e, i nstead of “a sy stem f or m easur i ng ox ygen consum pti on conti nuousl y i n f etal
sheep has been devel oped” (“sy stem ” i s a categor y ter m ), the author s w r ote “a
m i cr ocom puter based sy stem f or m easur i ng ox ygen consum pti on conti nuousl y i n f etal
sheep has been devel oped.” The adjecti ve “m i cr ocom puter based” i ndi cates a key
f eatur e of the sy stem , thus gi v i ng a cl ear er i dea of w hat the sy stem i s than w oul d the
categor y ter m “sy stem ” al one.
In addi ti on to nam i ng the m ethod or stati ng i ts categor y, you can i ndi cate that a m ethod
i s an i m pr oved ver si on of an ex i sti ng m ethod by addi ng “i m pr oved” bef or e the nam e or
the categor y ter m . It i s not usual l y necessar y to i ndi cate that a m ethod i s new, but i t i s
OK to do so.
P. 287
Purpose
The pur pose i s usual l y stated i n the ver b f or m “f or doi ng X,” though “to do X” m ay al so
be used. In the ex am pl e above, the pur pose i s stated i n the f or m “f or doi ng X”: “a
m i cr ocom puter based sy stem f or m easur i ng ox ygen consum pti on conti nuousl y i n f etal
sheep.”
Animal or Population
The ani m al or popul ati on that the m ethod, apparatus, or m ater i al appl i es to shoul d be
i ncl uded unl ess the popul ati on studi ed was al l hum ans. In the ex am pl e above, the
ani m al i s stated—f etal sheep.
Advantages
Advantages ar e i ncl uded to conv i nce the r eader that a new m ethod i s a good one or that
an i m pr oved m ethod i s better than ex i sti ng m ethods. The advantages of an i m pr oved
m ethod shoul d sol ve the pr obl em s of the ex i sti ng m ethods. Stati ng the advantages i s
i m por tant so that the r eader k now s w hy the m ethod i s needed.
Organization
The i nf or m ati on i n an abstract f or a m ethods paper shoul d be or gani zed essenti al l y i n
the or der just stated (see Ex am pl e 10. 15 bel ow ). Speci f i cal l y, the abstract shoul d
al way s begi n w i th the nam e of the m ethod f ol l ow ed by i ts pur pose and the ani m al or
popul ati on and then by i ts key f eatur es or how i t w or k s. Ei ther the advantages or how
the m ethod was tested and how w el l i t w or k s can com e at the end (see Ex am pl e 10. 14).
Mor e than one k i nd of i nf or m ati on can be i ncl uded i n one sentence. Speci f i cal l y, the
nam e of the m ethod, i ts pur pose, and the ani m al or popul ati on ar e v i r tual l y al way s i n
one sentence, and how the m ethod was tested and how w el l i t w or k s ar e of ten i n one
sentence (see Ex am pl es 10. 14 and 10. 15).
Verb Tense
In the sentence that nam es the m ethod, the ver b i s i n past tense (actual l y, pr esent
per f ect tense) or pr esent tense, dependi ng on the ver b used. For ex am pl e, “An i m pr oved
m ethod has been dev el oped” (done i n the past, so past tense) or “An i m pr oved m ethod
i s descr i bed” (sti l l tr ue, so pr esent tense). Ver bs i n sentences that descr i be the m ethod
and i ts advantages ar e i n pr esent tense. For ex am pl e, “The sy stem i ncl udes…”; “The
m ethod cuts shor t
P. 288
and si m pl i f i es the conventi onal pr ocedur e…”; “Addi ti onal advantages of the m ethod
ar e…” Ver bs i n sentences tel l i ng how the m ethod was tested and how w el l i t w or k s ar e
i n past tense. For ex am pl e, “the f l ow m eter accuratel y m easur ed a w i de range of ti dal
vol um es.”
Writing
Pr i nci pl es f or conti nui ty, sentence str uctur e, w or d choi ce, abbr ev i ati ons, and l ength i n
abstracts f or m ethods paper s ar e the sam e as those f or abstracts of hy pothesi stesti ng
paper s and descr i pti ve paper s.
Example 10.14
A1An i m pr oved m ethod has been devel oped A2f or i sol ati ng al veol ar ty pe II cel l s A3by
di gesti ng l ung ti ssue w i th el astase and “panni ng” the r esul tant cel l suspensi on on pl ates
coated w i th IgG. BThi s m ethod pr ov i des both hi gh y i el d and hi gh pur i ty of ty pe II cel l s.
C1In 50 ex per i m ents i n rats, C2w e obtai ned 35 ± 11 (SD) × 10 6 cel l s/rat, 89 ± 4% of
w hi ch w er e ty pe II cel l s. DIn addi ti on, ty pe II cel l s i sol ated by “panni ng” adher e m or e
rapi dl y and com pl etel y i n ti ssue cul tur e than do cel l s i sol ated by centr i f ugati on over
di sconti nuous densi ty gradi ents of m etr i zam i de. EFi nal l y, the m ethod i s r epr oduci bl e and
easi l y adapted to i sol ati ng ty pe II cel l s f r om speci es other than rats.
Thi s abstract begi ns by usi ng a categor y ter m (“m ethod”) to i denti f y the m ethod and
descr i bes i t as i m pr oved (A 1 ). N ex t the pur pose i s stated (A 2 ) f ol l ow ed by a conci se
descr i pti on of how the m ethod w or k s (A 3 ). Al l of thi s i nf or m ati on i s i n one sentence.
The ani m al i s not stated because al though the study was done i n rats (see sentence C),
the m ethod al so appl i es to hum ans and other ani m al s (see sentence E). Sentence B
states tw o advantages of thi s m ethod (hi gh y i el d and hi gh pur i ty ). Sentence C tel l s how
the m ethod was tested (C 1 ) and then gi ves data that suppor t the hi gh y i el d and the hi gh
pur i ty, thus i ndi cati ng how w el l the m ethod w or k s (C 2 ). Sentence D states tw o
advantages over another m ethod, thus suppor ti ng the cl ai m that the m ethod i s an
i m pr ovem ent (A 1 ). Sentence E states tw o f i nal advantages.
Conti nui ty i s cl ear because key ter m s ar e r epeated (“m ethod” i n A, B, and E; “panni ng”
i n A and D; “ty pe II cel l s” i n A, B, C, D, and E) and because transi ti on w or ds ar e used
(“i n addi ti on,” “f i nal l y ”). The sentences ar e shor t (m ean, 22 w or ds per sentence). Wor ds
ar e as si m pl e as possi bl e, and onl y one abbr ev i ati on i s used—IgG (i m m unogl obul i n G).
It i s not def i ned because i t i s consi der ed a standar d abbr ev i ati on. The abstract i s shor t
(110 w or ds) and the over v i ew i s cl ear.
Example 10.15
A1We have desi gned a new endotracheal f l ow m eter A2to m easur e ti dal vol um e, phasi c
and m ean ai r way pr essur e, i nspi rator y ti m e, and endti dal PCO 2 and PO 2 A3i n i ntubated
i nf ants. BThe f l ow m eter i s l i ght (11 g) and adds m i ni m al dead space (1. 0 m l ) and
m i ni m al r esi stance (2 cm H 2 O/110 m l per s) to the i nf ant's ai r way. CThe vol um e si gnal
(≤ 10 m l ) i s l i near to 7 Hz, and endti dal gases can be m easur ed at r espi rator y rates of
90 br eaths/m i n. DThi s f l ow m eter i s par ti cul ar l y val uabl e f or eval uati ng rapi d m echani cal
venti l ati on of ver yl owbi r thw ei ght i nf ants. E1In 125 studi es i n 50 i nf ants w ei ghi ng
740–1500 g, E2the f l ow m eter accuratel y m easur ed a w i de range of ti dal vol um es.
P. 289
Thi s abstract descr i bes a new apparatus. The f i r st sentence states the nam e of the
apparatus (endotracheal f l ow m eter ) (A 1 ), i denti f i es i t as new (A 1 ), states i ts pur pose
(A 2 ), and nam es the popul ati on the apparatus appl i es to (A 3 ). The nex t tw o sentences
(B, C) descr i be key f eatur es of the f l ow m eter and i ncl ude a num ber of speci f i c detai l s.
Sentence D states an advantage. The l ast sentence tel l s how the f l ow m eter was tested
(E 1 ) and how w el l i t w or k s (E 2 ).
Conti nui ty i s cl ear f r om r epeti ti on of the key ter m “f l ow m eter ” (i n A, B, D, and E) and
consi stent poi nt of v i ew (“f l ow m eter,” i n B, D, and E). The sentences ar e shor t (m ean,
22. 6 w or ds/sentence). Wor ds ar e as si m pl e as possi bl e. Tw o standar d abbr ev i ati ons ar e
used (PCO 2 , par ti al pr essur e of car bon di ox i de; PO 2 , par ti al pr essur e of ox ygen). The
abstract i s br i ef (113 w or ds) and the over v i ew i s cl ear.
INDEXING TERMS
When sel ecti ng i ndex i ng ter m s, use cur r ent ter m s. Som e jour nal s r equest that author s
sel ect i ndex i ng ter m s f r om the m edi cal subject headi ngs (MeSH) l i sted i n the Januar y
i ssue of Index Medi cus. How ever, MeSH ter m s usual l y l ag behi nd ter m s used i n the m ost
r ecent r esear ch, so you m ay need to use i ndex i ng ter m s that ar e not yet i ncl uded i n
MeSH. For ex am pl e, the ter m “acqui r ed i m m unodef i ci ency sy ndr om e” was needed f or at
l east a year bef or e i t appear ed i n MeSH.
In addi ti on, w hen sel ecti ng i ndex i ng ter m s, use the m ost speci f i c ter m s possi bl e. For
ex am pl e, i n a paper about er y thr omyci n, “er y thr omyci n” shoul d be gi ven as an i ndex i ng
ter m , not the m or e general ter m “anti bi oti cs.” Indexer s can easi l y ex trapol ate f r om the
speci f i c (“er y thr omyci n”) to the general (“anti bi oti cs”) i f necessar y, but they cannot
easi l y ex trapol ate f r om the general to the speci f i c.
N ote that i ndex i ng ter m s can be phrases as w el l as si ngl e w or ds. Thus, a phrase such as
“bl ood coagul ati on di sor der s” i s a possi bl e i ndex i ng ter m .
N ote al so that because i ndexer s can easi l y pi ck i ndex i ng ter m s out of the ti tl e of the
paper, som e jour nal s ask author s to suppl y onl y i ndex i ng ter m s that ar e not i n the ti tl e.
P. 290
Content
To f ul f i l l these f uncti ons, abstracts f or m eeti ngs shoul d f ol l ow the sam e gui del i nes as
abstracts of paper s except that abstracts f or m eeti ngs ar e l i kel y to i ncl ude m or e detai l s
of m ethods and to di spl ay data i n a tabl e or a graph. The r eason f or i ncl udi ng m or e
m ethods detai l s and data i s that thi s ex tra i nf or m ati on hel ps the sel ecti on com m i ttee
and the peopl e attendi ng the m eeti ng eval uate the val i di ty of the w or k . In addi ti on,
abstracts f or m eeti ngs ar e m or e l i kel y to i ncl ude i m pl i cati ons than ar e abstracts of
paper s, to i ndi cate the i m por tance of the w or k .
Al so r esi st the tem ptati on to use abbr ev i ati ons so that you can add m or e detai l s. U si ng
a l ot of abbr ev i ati ons m akes the abstract unr eadabl e because the r eader has to
concentrate on br eak i ng the code.
Fi nal l y, keep i n m i nd that even a detai l ed abstract f or a m eeti ng cannot r epl ace the
paper. For al l practi cal pur poses, abstracts f or m eeti ngs sel fdestr uct af ter a year. If the
paper i s not publ i shed eventual l y, the detai l s and data (as w el l as the concl usi ons) i n
the abstract cannot be used because ther e i s no way of val i dati ng them .
Thus, the judi ci ous use of detai l s and abbr ev i ati ons, not the m ax i m al use, show s that
your contr i buti on i s val uabl e and l ur es an audi ence to your tal k .
When you i ncl ude a tabl e or a graph i n an abstract f or a m eeti ng, be car ef ul not to om i t
the statem ent of the r esul ts that the data suppor t. Om i tti ng the r esul ts obscur es the
over v i ew (see Ex am pl e 10. 16). For gr eatest cl ar i ty, the tabl e or graph shoul d be pl aced
af ter the sentence that states the r esul ts that the data suppor t, not i nstead of the
r esul ts sentence.
Example 10.16
Fi gur e.
No
Capti on
Avai l abl e.
P. 291
P. 292
Tw o m ajor pr obl em s i n the way thi s abstract i s w r i tten m ake the over v i ew uncl ear :
1. The questi on i s not stated at the begi nni ng. Instead the answ er i s gi ven (thi r d
sentence). Substi tuti ng the answ er f or the questi on i s di sor i enti ng because the
answ er can be m i sr ead as back gr ound i nf or m ati on.
2. The r esul ts ar e not stated. Onl y data ar e show n (i n the tabl e). Thus, w hen w e
r ead the sentence bel ow the tabl e (“Cr om ol y n sodi um at 5 m g/k g/m i n, i n 2 l am bs,
pr oduced si m i l ar r esul ts”), w e do not k now w hat the r esul ts ar e, unl ess w e have
f i gur ed them out f or our sel ves. The r eader shoul d not have to f i gur e out the
r esul ts. The author shoul d state them .
In addi ti on, the om i ssi on of som e i m por tant detai l s f ur ther obscur es the cl ar i ty of
thi s abstract.
3. Onl y one of the tw o doses tested i s m enti oned i n the descr i pti on of the
ex per i m ent, so w e do not ex pect r esul ts f or a second dose.
4. The sam pl e si ze and the dose ar e m i ssi ng f r om the f ootnote of the tabl e.
5. The i m pl i cati on at the end of the l ast sentence say s nothi ng about l eukotr i enes.
Thus, the ex pectati on rai sed by the f i r st w or d of the abstract (a ver y pow er f ul
posi ti on) and em phasi zed by the l ast w or d of the second sentence i s not f ul f i l l ed.
Fi nal l y, the i ncl usi on of som e secondar y detai l s par tl y obscur es the m essage of the
abstract by draw i ng attenti on away f r om the i m por tant detai l s.
6. The stati sti cal com par i sons i n the tabl e ar e not di r ectl y r el evant to the r esul ts
that answ er the questi on. These com par i sons show that hy pox i a i ndeed i nduced
pul m onar y vasoconstr i cti on, as r ef l ected by i ncr eases i n pul m onar y ar ter i al
pr essur e. How ever, the cr uci al com par i son i s betw een pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur es
f or hy pox i a al one and f or cr om ol y n pl us hy pox i a. The poi nt i s that the val ues w er e
not si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent.
7. Sy stem i c ar ter i al pr essur e and car di ac output ar e not str i ctl y necessar y f or
answ er i ng the questi on, but they ar e i ncl uded i n the tabl e to show that the changes
i n pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e di d not r esul t f r om changes i n sy stem i c ar ter i al
pr essur e or f r om changes i n car di ac output.
In the r ev i si on, the questi on i s stated and the r esul ts ar e stated. In addi ti on, the second
dose tested i s m enti oned i n the descr i pti on of the ex per i m ent, the sam pl e si ze and the
dose ar e added to the f ootnote of the tabl e, and “l eukotr i ene r el ease” i s added to the
l ast sentence. These changes m ake the abstract cl ear er. The stati sti cal com par i sons and
the data f or sy stem i c ar ter i al pr essur e and car di ac output, though of secondar y
i m por tance, ar e r etai ned to show the val i di ty of the r esul ts. Fi nal l y, to keep the abstract
the sam e l ength as the or i gi nal ver si on, “w hi ch ar e f ound i n,” “a var i ety of,” and “have
been suggested to” i n the f i r st sentence have been shor tened to “r el eased by,”
“var i ous,” and “m ay.” In the second sentence, “a stabi l i zer of m ast cel l m em branes” has
been changed to the noun cl uster “a m ast cel l m em brane stabi l i zer.” In the statem ent of
the r esul ts, “w e” i s used i nstead of passi ve voi ce, and “si x ” at the begi nni ng of the
sentence becom es “6” w i thi n the sentence. In the sentence bef or e the tabl e, “the” has
been om i tted bef or e “pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e r esponses.” In the l ast sentence,
“these” has been changed to “our ” and “pr ev i ous” bef or e “r epor ts” has been om i tted.
P. 293
Revision
Fi gur e.
No
Capti on
Avai l abl e.
P. 294
FUNCTION
The abstract shoul d pr ov i de an over v i ew of the m ai n stor y and a f ew essenti al detai l s.
The abstract shoul d be cl ear both to r eader s w ho r ead the paper and to r eader s w ho do
not r ead the paper.
the m ater i al studi ed (m ol ecul e, cel l l i ne, ti ssue, or gan) and the
or gani sm f r om w hi ch i t cam e, or the ani m al or hum an popul ati on
studi ed.
the ex per i m ental appr oach or the study desi gn, i ncl udi ng both the
i ndependent and the dependent var i abl es.
the r esul ts you f ound that answ er the questi on, i ncl udi ng
onl y the m ost i m por tant r esul ts, i n a l ogi cal or der.
a m i ni m um of data.
the answ er to the questi on. Be sur e the answ er answ er s the questi on asked.
an i m pl i cati on, a specul ati on, or a r ecom m endati on at the end of the abstract.
Writing
For abstracts w r i tten as one paragraph,
Si gnal the questi on (“To deter m i ne w hether,” “To test the hy pothesi s that”) or
the questi on and the ex per i m ent done (“We asked w hether… . To answ er thi s
questi on, w e… ,” “We hy pothesi zed that… . To test thi s hy pothesi s, w e…”).
U se past tense ver bs to state the ex per i m ent done and the r esul ts f ound.
Be car ef ul not to om i t the questi on, not to state the questi on vaguel y, not to state
an i m pl i cati on i nstead of the answ er, and not to w r i te a descr i pti ve abstract i f you
tested a hy pothesi s.
Variations
If the jour nal to w hi ch you ar e subm i tti ng a paper r equests a di f f er ent f or m f or the
abstract, f ol l ow the r equested f or m .
P. 295
Writing
Si gnal the m essage (“Her e w e r epor t”).
how w el l i t w or k s.
Al way s begi n w i th the f i r st f our i tem s. The or der of the l ast thr ee i tem s m ay be
changed i f necessar y.
To i ndi cate that the m ethod i s an i m pr oved ver si on of an ex i sti ng m ethod, add
“i m pr oved” bef or e the nam e of the m ethod. It i s not usual l y necessar y to i ndi cate
that a m ethod i s new, but i t i s OK to do so.
Incl ude the nam e, pur pose, and ani m al or popul ati on i n one sentence.
U sual l y i ncl ude how the m ethod was tested and how w el l i t w or k s i n one sentence.
U se past tense (pr esent per f ect tense) or pr esent tense to nam e the m ethod,
dependi ng on the ver b used (f or ex am pl e, “An i m pr oved m ethod has been
dev el oped” or “An i m pr oved m ethod i s descr i bed”). U se pr esent tense to descr i be
the m ethod and i ts advantages. U se past tense to state how the m ethod was tested
and how w el l i t w or k s.
INDEXING TERMS
Sel ect ter m s that you w oul d l ook up to f i nd your ow n paper and that w oul d attract
the r eader s you hope to r each.
Sel ect cur r ent, speci f i c ter m s, pr ef erabl y m edi cal subject headi ngs (MeSH), that
nam e i m por tant topi cs i n your paper.
If the jour nal ask s you to suppl y onl y ter m s that ar e not i n the ti tl e of the paper,
do so.
If necessar y, i ncl ude a ter m as an i ndex i ng ter m even i f the ter m does not appear
i n your paper.
P. 296
To f ul f i l l these f uncti ons, i n general , abstracts f or m eeti ngs shoul d f ol l ow the sam e
gui del i nes as abstracts of paper s.
Excepti ons:
How ever,
Do not add excessi ve detai l , or the tr ees w i l l over shadow the f or est.
Desi gn the tabl e or graph car ef ul l y, but om i t the ti tl e of the tabl e and the
l egend f or the graph.
Do not om i t the statem ent of the r esul ts that the data i n the tabl e or the
graph suppor t; i nstead, pl ace the tabl e or graph af ter the statem ent of the
r esul ts.
P. 297
3. In addi ti on,
In Ex am pl e 1 (m ol ecul ar bi ol ogy ),
In Ex am pl e 2 (m ol ecul ar bi ol ogy ),
re pe a t k e y te rms so that w e under stand w hat “posi ti ve” and “negati ve” i n
sentence G m ean. U se the m ost pr eci se key ter m s i n your r ev i si on.
In Ex am pl em 3 (phy si ol ogy ),
In Ex am pl e 4 (phy si ol ogy ),
Abstract 1
Note : The que s tion a s s ta te d—va gue ly—in the Introduc tion w a s “ To inve s tiga te the
func tion of p300 during mous e de ve lopme nt. ”
G ENE DOSAG EDEP ENDENT EMBRY ONIC DEVELOP MENT AND P ROLIFERATION
DEFECTS IN MICE LACKING THE TRANSCRIP TIONAL INTEG RATOR P 300
A The tra ns c riptiona l c oa c tiva tor a nd inte gra tor p300 a nd its c los e ly re la te d fa mily
me mbe r CBP me dia te multiple , s igna lde pe nde nt tra ns c riptiona l e ve nts . BWe ha ve
ge ne ra te d mic e la c k ing a func tiona l p300 ge ne . C Anima ls nullizygous for p300 die d
be tw e e n da ys 9 a nd 11. 5 of ge s ta tion, e x hibiting de fe c ts in ne urula tion, c e ll
prolife ra tion, a nd he a rt de ve lopme nt. D Ce lls de rive d from p300de fic ie nt e mbryos
dis pla ye d s pe c ific tra ns c riptiona l de fe c ts a nd prolife ra te d poorly. E Surpris ingly,
p300 he te rozygote s a ls o ma nife s te d c ons ide ra ble e mbryonic le tha lity. F More ove r,
double he te rozygos ity for p300 a nd c bp w a s inva ria bly a s s oc ia te d w ith e mbryonic
de a th. G Thus , mous e de ve lopme nt is e x quis ite ly s e ns itive to the ove ra ll ge ne
dos a ge of p300 a nd c bp. H Our re s ults provide ge ne tic e vide nc e tha t a c oa c tiva tor
e ndow e d w ith his tone a c e tyltra ns fe ra s e a c tivity is e s s e ntia l for ma mma lia n c e ll
prolife ra tion a nd de ve lopme nt.
G ra de :_____
Re a s ons :
Hi de Answ er
Abs tra c t 1
G ra de : C
Bigge s t P roble ms :
The answ er shoul d be l i m i ted to the ani m al studi ed and the gene studi ed
(H).
“Hi stone acety l tr ansf er ase acti v i ty ” i s not m enti oned ear l i er i n the
abstr act.
“A coacti v ator endow ed w i th hi stone acety l tr ansf er ase acti v i ty ”
shoul d be r epl aced by “p300. ”
Othe r P roble ms :
State the unex pected answ er af ter stati ng the answ er to the questi on.
U se si m pl e w or ds, m ak e the topi c the subject, and put the acti on i n the
v er b (E, F: di ed).
Re vis ion
AThe transcr i pti onal coacti vator and i ntegrator p300 and i ts cl osel y r el ated
f am i l y m em ber CBP ar e bel i eved to m edi ate num er ous si gnal dependent
transcr i pti onal events, i ncl udi ng those i nvol ved i n em br yo devel opm ent. B
1 To
deter m i ne w hether the p300 gene i s necessar y f or m ouse em br yo devel opm ent
and cel l pr ol i f erati on, B
2w e assessed these var i abl es i n m i ce w e generated
l ack i ng a f uncti onal p300 gene. CWe f ound that m ouse em br yos nul l i zygous f or
p300 di ed betw een day s 9 and 11. 5 of gestati on, ex hi bi ti ng def ects i n
neur ul ati on, cel l pr ol i f erati on, and hear t devel opm ent. DCel l s der i ved f r om
p300def i ci ent em br yos di spl ayed speci f i c transcr i pti onal def ects and
pr ol i f erated poor l y. ESur pr i si ngl y, m ost of the p300 heter ozygous em br yos
al so di ed. FMor eover, al l em br yos doubl y heter ozygous f or p300 and cbp di ed.
HThus, the p300 gene i s essenti al f or m ouse em br yo devel opm ent and cel l
pr ol i f erati on. GOur f i ndi ngs al so show that nor m al m ouse em br yo devel opm ent
i s ex qui si tel y sensi ti ve to under dosage and over dosage of p300 and cbp
genes. 144 w or ds, 18 w or ds/sentence
P. 298
Abstract 2
Note : The hypothe s is s ta te d (but not ide ntifie d) in the Introduc tion w a s “ tha t
va rious fa c tors w ith diffe re nt func tions inte ra c t w ith the s a me or s imila r
s e que nc e s to c ontrol ge ne e x pre s s ion. ” The a ns w e r s ta te d in the Dis c us s ion w a s
“ both pos itive a nd ne ga tive fa c tors c a n inte ra c t w ith the s a me DNA s e que nc e in
orde r to re gula te ge ne e x pre s s ion. ”
G ra de :_____
Re a s ons :
Hi de Answ er
Abs tra c t 2
G ra de : D
Bigge s t P roble ms :
The abstr act i s w r i tten as a descr i pti v e abstr act, r ather than as a
hy pothesi stesti ng abstr act. Thi s f or m i s v er y m i sl eadi ng because the
m essage (sentence B) i s a r easonabl e one f or a descr i pti v e paper .
“r epr esses” (ti tl e, E, F); “posi ti v el y r egul ate” (A), “posi ti v e and
negati v e f actor s” (G).
“tr anscr i pti on” (ti tl e, F, G), “ex pr essi on” (E)
Othe r P roble ms :
The end of the l ast sentence sounds l i k e the pur pose of the i nter acti on
(“to account f or ”). Pr obabl y thi s par t of the sentence i s a specul ati on
(“and thus m ay account f or ”).
Re vis ion
Abstract 3
EFFECTS OF EXP OSU RE TO OZONE ON DEFENSIVE MECHANISMS OF THE LU NG
G ra de :______
Re a s ons :
Hi de Answ er
Abs tra c t 3
G ra de : C
Stre ngths
Easy to r ead.
Has cl ear or gani zati on i ndi cated by new sentences f or the ex per i m ents
done, the r esul ts, and the answ er to the questi on.
P roble ms
The ov er v i ew of the ex per i m ent (A) i s not cl ear : How w as one l ung
ex posed—sur gi cal l y ? What w as i t ex posed to?
The w r i ti ng i s gener al l y cl ear but contai ns som e jar gon (“uni l ater al
l ung ex posur e techni que, ” “bacter i al chal l enge”) and uncl ear w or d
choi ce (w hat does “depr ess v ar i ous i ntr acel l ul ar hy dr ol y ti c
enzy m es” m ean: decr ease the num ber s of enzy m es? decr ease
enzy m e acti v i ty ?). Al so the si gnal of the r esul ts w oul d be cl ear er i f
i t w er e at the begi nni ng of the sentence. In the ti tl e, “def ensi v e
m echani sm ” shoul d be “def ense m echani sm . ”
A
1 To deter m i ne how l ow concentrati ons of ozone af f ect the endogenous
COMMENTS
In Rev i si on 1, the i ndependent var i abl e i s added to the questi on (A 1 ), and the
ani m al (A 1 ), m ethods detai l s (A 2 B), and the answ er (D) ar e al so added. In A 2
the over v i ew of the ex per i m ent i s now com pl ete, and pr eci se w or d choi ce
m akes cl ear how the l ungs w er e ex posed and w hat each l ung was ex posed to.
In A 2 and B, the f ol l ow i ng detai l s of m ethods ar e now i ncl uded: the condi ti on
of the rabbi ts (l i ghtl y anestheti zed), the concentrati on of ozone (0. 5–3. 0
ppm ), the durati on of ex posur e to ozone (3 h), and the ty pe of cel l s studi ed
(al veol ar m acr ophages). The answ er (D) answ er s the questi on asked: the key
ter m s f or the i ndependent and dependent var i abl es ar e the sam e i n the
questi on and the answ er, and the poi nt of v i ew i s the sam e. Al so, the si gnal of
the r esul ts (“We f ound that”) i s m oved to the begi nni ng of the sentence (B),
and the r esul t f or hydr ol y ti c enzy m es i s descr i bed m or e pr eci sel y (“decr eased
the acti v i ty of i ntracel l ul ar hydr ol y ti c enzy m es”). Fi nal l y, i n the i m pl i cati on
(E), w or d choi ce i s si m pl i f i ed (“hi gh death rate” i nstead of “i ncr eased
m or tal i ty ”), jar gon i s avoi ded (“i nf ected w i th bacter i a” i nstead of “gi ven a
bacter i al chal l enge”), and an appr opr i ate si gnal i s used (“We suggest that”).
AIn rabbi ts ex posed to ozone and then gi ven an i njecti on of bacter i a, m or tal i ty
i s i ncr eased. BThe i ncr eased m or tal i ty m ay r esul t f r om ozonei nduced
i m pai r m ent of the l ungs' def ense m echani sm s. C
1 We ther ef or e asked w hether
ozone ex posur e i m pai r s endogenous def ense m echani sm s i n rabbi ts' l ungs
and, C
2i f so, w hether the i m pai r m ent i s caused by di r ect tox i ci ty of ozone or
COMMENTS
Abstract 4
P U LMONARY MECHANICS AND G AS EXCHANG E IN SEATED NORMAL MEN W ITH
CHEST RESTRICTION
A Lung volume s , s ta tic pre s s ure volume c urve s , ma x ima l e x pira tory flow volume
c urve s , righttole ft intra pulmona ry s hunts ([Q w ith dot a bove ] s /[Q w ith dot
a bove ] t ), a nd pe rfus ion re la tive to the a lve ola r ve ntila tion a nd pe rfus ion ra tio ([V
w ith dot a bove ] a /[Q w ith dot a bove ]) w e re de te rmine d in s e a te d norma l me n
be fore c he s t s tra pping w hile bre a thing a ir (C a i r ) a nd during c he s t s tra pping w hile
w a s re duc e d by 44% from c ontrol. C Ela s tic re c oil pre s s ure [P s t(L)] of the lung a t
50% c ontrol tota l lung c a pa c ity (TLC) inc re a s e d s ignific a ntly (P > 0. 05) from 4. 64
± 0. 39 c m H 2 O (me a n ± SE) to 7. 00 ± 0. 47 c m H 2 O w ith S a i r a nd to 7. 24 ± 0. 70 c m
dot a bove ] s /[Q w ith dot a bove ] t from c ontrol w a s obs e rve d. F W ith SO 2 , me a n [Q
w ith dot a bove ] s /[Q w ith dot a bove ] t inc re a s e d s ignific a ntly (P > 0. 05) from 0 to
G ra de :______
Re a s ons :
Hi de Answ er
Abs tra c t 4
G ra de : F
P roble ms
Too m uch detai l . You cannot see the f or est f or the tr ees.
In the descr i pti on of the ex per i m ent (A), gi v e the gener al appr oach,
not ev er y v ar i abl e, and i ndi cate the r el ati onshi p betw een v ar i abl es.
In the statem ent of the r esul ts (B–F), gi v e data f or onl y the m ost
i m por tant f i ndi ngs, gi v e per centages i nstead of m eans and SE, or
om i t data al together . Om i t P v al ues. Om i t al l “si gni f i cantl y 's. ” State
“m ean ± SE” (i f used) onl y once.
Too m any abbr ev i ati ons. [Q w i th dot abov e]s/[Q w i th dot abov e]t can be
r epl aced by “shunt f r acti on. ” [V w i th dot abov e]/[Q w i th dot abov e] and
C ai r ar e nev er m enti oned agai n, and Pst(L) and TLC ar e used onl y once
each, so they ar e unnecessar y . S ai r and SO 2 ar e bi zar r e.
Re vis ion
AEl asti c r ecoi l pr essur e of the l ungs i ncr eases w hen total l ung capaci ty
decr eases. B
1 To deter m i ne w hether thi s i ncr eased pr essur e i s due to
atel ectasi s, B
1w e m easur ed el asti c r ecoi l pr essur e and the r i ghttol ef t
i ntrapul m onar y shunt f racti on (an i ndex of atel ectasi s) bef or e and dur i ng
chest strappi ng (a condi ti on that decr eases l ung capaci ty ) i n heal thy m en.
CEx per i m ents w er e done w hi l e the m en br eathed r oom ai r (basel i ne) or 100%
ox ygen (to i nduce atel ectasi s). DWe f ound that al though el asti c r ecoi l
pr essur e i ncr eased by 50% dur i ng chest strappi ng, shunt f racti on was
unchanged w hi l e the m en br eathed r oom ai r and i ncr eased m i ni m al l y w hi l e
they br eathed 100% ox ygen. EWe concl ude that i ncr eased el asti c r ecoi l
pr essur e i n the l ungs dur i ng condi ti ons of decr eased total l ung capaci ty i s not
due to atel ectasi s.
COMMENTS
The r ev i si on i s m uch easi er to r ead because the questi on i s stated (B 1 ), the
ex per i m ental appr oach gi v es an ov er v i ew (B 2 , C), i ndi cator s ar e i denti f i ed
(B 2 , C), and unnecessar y detai l s (l ess i m por tant v ar i abl es, data, stati sti cal
i nf or m ati on, the i m pl i cati on at the end) and al l abbr ev i ati ons ar e om i tted.
Back
Chapter 11
The Title
FUNCTIONS
Ti tl es of bi om edi cal jour nal ar ti cl es have tw o f uncti ons: to i denti f y the m ai n
topi c or the m essage of the paper and to attract r eader s.
Ef f ect of X on Y i n Z.
Example 11.1
Ef f ect of βEndor phi n on Br eathi ng Movem ents i n Fetal Sheep
N ote that i n thi s standar d f or m , the ani m al , popul ati on, or m ater i al studi ed
com es at the end of the ti tl e.
P. 301
Example 11.2
Ef f ect of Mem brane Spl i tti ng on Transm em brane Pol y pepti des
How ever, w hen a subpopul ati on of hum ans was studi ed, the subpopul ati on i s
al way s i ncl uded i n the ti tl e.
Example 11.3
Ef f ects of Esm ol ol on Ai r way Functi on i n Pati ents Who Have Asthm a
For the negati ve i m pl i cati on to w or k (no popul ati on i n the ti tl e i m pl i es that the
popul ati on i s hum ans), the ani m al m ust al way s be i ncl uded i n the ti tl e w hen the
w or k was done on ani m al s.
Y i n Z,
w her e Y i s the dependent var i abl e(s)—that i s, the var i abl e(s) obser ved or
m easur ed—and Z i s the ani m al or popul ati on and the m ater i al on w hi ch the
w or k was done. For ex am pl es, see the r ev i si ons of Ex am pl es 11. 25 and 11. 27
bel ow. Al so see Ex am pl e 11. 36 bel ow.
Example 11.4
Ef f ect of Hy popr otei nem i a on Fl ui d Bal ance i n the Lungs of Awake N ew bor n
Lam bs
Example 11.5
Mi cr ovascul ar Pr essur es Measur ed by Mi cr opunctur e i n Lungs of N ew bor n
Rabbi ts
Example 11.6
Reduced Metabol i c Rate dur i ng Radi oFr equency Ir radi ati on i n Rats
In Ex am pl e 11. 7 bel ow, the m essage i s ex pr essed by the noun “al terati on”
bef or e the dependent var i abl e. The questi on was to “deter m i ne w hether
pr otei ncal or i e m al nutr i ti on al ter s l ung m echani cs.”
Example 11.7
Al terati on of Lung Mechani cs by Pr otei nCal or i e Mal nutr i ti on i n Weaned Rats
Som eti m es both an adjecti ve and a noun ar e used to state the m essage, as i n
Ex am pl e 11. 8.
Example 11.8
Hy pox i aInduced Al terati ons of Vascul ar Reacti v i ty to N or epi nephr i ne i n Isol ated
Per f used Lung f r om Cats
Example 11.9
Verapam i l and Di et Hal t the Pr ogr essi on of Ather oscl er osi s i n Chol ester ol Fed
Rabbi ts
P. 303
Hi p, a N ovel Cochaper one Invol ved i n the Euk ar yoti c Hsc70/Hsp40 Reacti on
Cycl e
In Ex am pl e 11. 10, the str uctur e (“Hi p”) i s the f i r st w or d of the ti tl e. The
f uncti on i s nam ed as an apposi ti ve, af ter a com m a, i n a categor y ter m
(“cochaper one”). The f uncti on i s f ur ther def i ned by a past par ti ci pl e of a ver b
(“i nvol ved”) and a com pl eter. The apposi ti ve f or m ul a (str uctur e, categor y
nam i ng the f uncti on f ol l ow ed by a par ti ci pl e and com pl eter f ur ther def i ni ng the
f uncti on) i s a ver y cl ear ti tl e f or a paper descr i bi ng a str uctur e. Thi s techni que
i s the sam e as l i nk i ng key ter m s.
In Ex am pl e 11. 12, the ti tl e i s a sentence. The str uctur e i s nam ed as the subject
of the sentence (“Ich1”) and the f uncti on i s nam ed i n the ver b (“encodes”) and
the com pl eter.
The categor y f or Ich1 (“an Ice/ced3Rel ated Gene”) i s i ncl uded i n the subject
of the sentence af ter the str uctur e. How ever, the categor y ter m does not state
the f uncti on.
Name
To i ndi cate w hether the paper descr i bes a m ethod, an apparatus, or a m ater i al ,
use the nam e i n the ti tl e i f the m ethod, apparatus, or m ater i al has a nam e.
Example 11.13
Endotracheal Fl ow m eter f or Measur i ng Ti dal Vol um e, Ai r way Pr essur e, and End
Ti dal Gas i n N ew bor ns
P. 304
Example 11.14
Monocl onal Anti bodi es as Pr obes f or Di sti ngui shi ng U ni que Anti gens i n
Secr etor y Cel l s of Heter ogeneous Exocr i ne Or gans
If the m ethod does not have a nam e, use a categor y ter m such as “m ethod” or
“apparatus” i n the ti tl e.
Example 11.15
A Method f or Pur i f y i ng the Gl ycopr otei n IIbIIIa Com pl ex i n Pl atel et Mem brane
Purpose
To state the pur pose, the ver b f or m “f or doi ng X” i s used. Thus, i n Ex am pl es
11. 13 and 11. 15 above, “f or m easur i ng” and “f or pur i f y i ng” ar e the ver b f or m s
used to state the pur pose. Ex am pl e 11. 14 uses a sl i ghtl y m odi f i ed f or m —“as
pr obes f or di sti ngui shi ng.” Both f or m s ar e cl ear i ndi cator s of pur pose.
How ever, usi ng “f or ” w i thout an “i ng” ver b af ter i t m akes the ti tl e uncl ear.
Example 11.16
A Doubl eCatheter Techni que f or Caudal l y Mi sdi r ected Catheter s i n the U m bi l i cal
Ar ter y
Revision
A Doubl eCatheter Techni que f or Avoi di ng Caudal l y Mi sdi r ected Catheter s i n the
U m bi l i cal Ar ter y
Addi ng the “i ng” ver b m akes the pur pose cl ear : “f or avoi di ng.”
Animal or Population
As i n ti tl es of hy pothesi stesti ng and descr i pti ve paper s, the popul ati on that the
m ethod i s used f or i s of ten om i tted w hen the m ethod i s f or hum ans (Ex am pl es
11. 14–11. 16) or hum ans and other ani m al s (Ex am pl e 11. 18 bel ow ). How ever,
the ani m al or popul ati on i s al way s stated w hen the m ethod i s f or ani m al s or f or
a speci f i c subpopul ati on of hum ans (Ex am pl es 11. 13 above and 11. 17 bel ow ).
New or Improved
If a paper descr i bes a new m ethod, the ti tl e usual l y does not need to i ncl ude
the w or d “new ” (see ex am pl es above) or i ts f ancy al ter nati ve “novel .” How ever,
the ti tl e m ay i ncl ude the m ost i m por tant f eatur e or the m ost i m por tant
advantage of the m ethod. In Ex am pl e 11. 16 above, “doubl ecatheter ” i s the
m ost i m por tant f eatur e of the new m ethod.
P. 305
Example 11.17
N oni nvasi ve Method f or Moni tor i ng Bl ood Gases i n the N ew bor n
If the m ost i m por tant f eatur e or advantage cannot be nam ed easi l y, the ti tl e
shoul d use the general ter m “i m pr oved.”
Example 11.18
An Im pr oved Method f or Isol ati ng Ty pe II Cel l s i n Hi gh Yi el d and Pur i ty
Accurate
For a hy pothesi stesti ng paper, check that your ti tl e i s accurate by com par i ng i t
w i th the questi on and answ er. The i ndependent var i abl e, the dependent
var i abl e, the ani m al or popul ati on, the m ater i al , the condi ti on (i f necessar y ),
the ex per i m ental appr oach (i f necessar y ), and the m essage (i f stated) shoul d
be the sam e i n the ti tl e as i n the questi on and answ er stated i n the
Intr oducti on, Di scussi on, and abstract.
Example 11.19
Title : N eutr ophi l Induced Injur y of Epi thel i al Cel l s i n the
Pul m onar y Al veol i of Rats?
Que s tion: To deter m i ne w hether the i njur y of epi thel i al cel l s i n the
pul m onar y al veol i that occur s i n m any i nf l am m ator y
condi ti ons i s i nduced i n par t by sti m ul ated neutr ophi l s,
w e ex posed m onol ayer s of pur i f i ed al veol ar epi thel i al
cel l s f r om rats to sti m ul ated hum an neutr ophi l s and
m easur ed cy totox i ci ty usi ng a 5 1 Cr r el ease assay.
Ans w e r: We concl ude that sti m ul ated neutr ophi l s i nduce i njur y i n
epi thel i al cel l s i n the pul m onar y al veol i .
For a descr i pti ve paper, the ter m s used f or the str uctur e and the f uncti on i n the
ti tl e shoul d be the sam e as those i n the m essage (or the m essage and the
i m pl i cati on) stated i n the Intr oducti on and the Di scussi on.
Example 11.20
P. 306
For a m ethods paper, the nam e of the m ethod, i ts pur pose, and the ani m al or
popul ati on (i f i ncl uded) shoul d be the sam e i n the ti tl e as i n the Intr oducti on,
Di scussi on, and abstract.
Example 11.21
Abs tra c t: We have devel oped a m ethod f or the rapi d pur i f i cati on of
the gl ycopr otei n IIbIIIa com pl ex i n pl atel et m em brane .
Complete
In a paper that has tw o m essages, i t m ay be di f f i cul t to m ake the ti tl e
com pl ete. If you cannot cr eate a ti tl e that r ef l ects both m essages, sel ect the
m ost i m por tant m essage f or the ti tl e. Si m i l ar l y, i f a study m ani pul ated several
i ndependent var i abl es or assessed several dependent var i abl es and no categor y
ter m s ar e avai l abl e that i ncl ude them al l , sel ect the m ost i m por tant
i ndependent and dependent var i abl e f or the ti tl e. Keep i n m i nd that, just as the
abstract cannot r epl ace the paper, so the ti tl e cannot r epl ace the abstract.
Announci ng the m ai n var i abl es of the paper i s str onger than tr y i ng to f i t al l the
var i abl es i nto the ti tl e.
Specific
Tw o w or ds that of ten m ake a ti tl e unspeci f i c ar e “and” and “w i th.” “And” i s not
a pr obl em w hen i t i s used to joi n paral l el ter m s, such as “Car di ov ascul ar and
Metabol i c Ef f ects of Hal othane i n N or m ox i c and Hy pox i c N ew bor n Lam bs.” But
“and” i s a pr obl em w hen i t i s used to joi n the i ndependent and the dependent
var i abl es i n the f or m “X and Y i n Z” i nstead of the standar d f or m “Ef f ect of X
on Y i n Z.” The pr obl em i s that “and” does not i ndi cate any r el ati onshi p betw een
X and Y.
Example 11.22
Ai r way Cal i ber and the Wor k of Br eathi ng i n Hum ans
Thi s ti tl e i s not speci f i c. What i s the r el ati onshi p betw een ai r way cal i ber and
the w or k of br eathi ng i n hum ans? The ti tl e becom es speci f i c w hen r ew r i tten i n
the standar d f or m “Ef f ect of X on Y i n Z.”
Revision
Ef f ect of Ai r way Cal i ber on the Wor k of Br eathi ng i n Hum ans
“Wi th,” as w e saw i n Chapter 1: Wor d Choi ce, i s ver y of ten uncl ear because i t
i s not speci f i c. Ther ef or e, avoi d “w i th” w her ever possi bl e, except i n i ts
standar d uses af ter cer tai n ver bs, such as “com par ed w i th,” “m easur ed w i th,”
“suppl em ented w i th,” etc.
P. 307
Example 11.23
Br onchoconstr i cti on, Gas Trappi ng, and Hy pox i a w i th Methachol i ne i n Dogs
Revision
Br onchoconstr i cti on, Gas Trappi ng, and Hy pox i a Induced by Methachol i ne i n
Dogs
Unambiguous
To m ake a ti tl e unam bi guous, f ol l ow the pr i nci pl es of sentence str uctur e and
w or d choi ce. In par ti cul ar, avoi d noun cl uster s (see Exer ci se 2. 2, Ex am pl e 4)
and do not use abbr ev i ati ons. The r eason f or not usi ng abbr ev i ati ons i n ti tl es i s
that ti tl es ar e of ten r ead out of contex t, f or ex am pl e, i n Index Medi cus. Thus,
even i f an abbr ev i ati on i s w el l k now n i n one speci al ty, i t coul d be conf usi ng to
r eader s f r om other speci al ti es.
Example 11.24
Quanti f i cati on of the Ef f ect of the Per i car di um on the LV Di astol i c PV Rel ati on i n
Dogs
Revision
Quanti f i cati on of the Per i car di um 's Ef f ect on the Lef t Ventr i cul ar Di astol i c
Pr essur eVol um e Rel ati on i n Dogs
In the r ev i si on, to accom m odate the w or ds that LV and PV abbr ev i ate, “ef f ect of
the per i car di um ” i s condensed to “per i car di um 's ef f ect.” The r ev i sed ti tl e,
contai ni ng no abbr ev i ati ons, i s cl ear to al l r eader s. The or i gi nal ti tl e i s cl ear
onl y to those w ho w or k i n thi s f i el d.
Concise
Shor t ti tl es have m or e i m pact than l ong ti tl es do, so m ake your ti tl e as shor t
as possi bl e w i thout sacr i f i ci ng accuracy, com pl eteness, speci f i ci ty, or cl ar i ty.
That i s, m ake the ti tl e conci se. Som eti m es, just to i ncl ude al l the necessar y
detai l s a ti tl e w i l l need to be rather l ong. N ever thel ess, tr y to keep your ti tl e
shor ter than 100 character s and spaces (120 character s and spaces i s pr obabl y
the outer l i m i t). Longer ti tl es begi n to f al l apar t under thei r ow n w ei ght. Som e
jour nal s have even shor ter l i m i ts. Whatever the jour nal 's l i m i t, keep i n m i nd
that the ai m i s not to f i l l the space al l ow ed. The ai m i s to convey the
P. 308
topi c or the m essage of your paper accuratel y, com pl etel y, speci f i cal l y, and
unam bi guousl y. If you can dev i se a shor t ti tl e that f ul f i l l s these cr i ter i a, do so.
Revision
Di sposi ti on of Acetam i nophen i n the Sheep Mater nal Pl acental Fetal U ni t
Example 11.26
Al terati ons Induced by Adm i ni strati on of Chl or phenter m i ne i n Phosphol i pi ds and
Pr otei ns i n Al veol ar Sur f actant
Revision A
Al terati ons Induced by Chl or phenter m i ne i n Phosphol i pi ds and Pr otei ns i n
Al veol ar Sur f actant
Revision B
Chl or phenter m i neInduced Al terati ons i n Phosphol i pi ds and Pr otei ns i n Al veol ar
Sur f actant
Example 11.27
Dy nam i cs of Chest Wal l i n Pr eter m Inf ants
Revision
Dy nam i cs of the Chest Wal l i n Pr eter m Inf ants
P. 309
Category Terms
One i m por tant com pacti ng techni que i s to use a categor y ter m i nstead of
detai l s. U si ng a categor y ter m m ay seem to conf l i ct w i th the r ecom m endati on
to use speci f i c w or ds. But as Ex am pl e 11. 28 show s, i t i s possi bl e to be too
speci f i c.
Example 11.28
El ectr on Mi cr oscopi c Dem onstrati on of Ly sosom al Incl usi on Bodi es i n Lung,
Li ver, Ly m ph N odes, and Bl ood Leukocy tes of Pati ents w i th Am i odar oneInduced
Pul m onar y Tox i ci ty
By nam i ng f our speci f i c ti ssues, thi s ti tl e gi ves tr ees but not the f or est. The
tex t of the paper m akes cl ear that l y sosom al i ncl usi on bodi es have al r eady
been r epor ted i n the l ungs and that the new s i n thi s study i s that l y sosom al
i ncl usi on bodi es al so appear i n ex trapul m onar y ti ssues. By substi tuti ng the
categor y ter m “ex trapul m onar y ti ssues” f or l i ver, l y m ph nodes, and bl ood
l eukocy tes and om i tti ng “l ung” w e get the f or est.
Revision
El ectr on Mi cr oscopi c Dem onstrati on of Ly sosom al Incl usi on Bodi es i n
Ex trapul m onar y Ti ssues of Pati ents w i th Am i odar oneInduced Pul m onar y
Tox i ci ty
If no categor y ter m ex i sts, sel ect the m ost i m por tant var i abl e f or the ti tl e (see
“Com pl ete” above).
Noun Clusters
A thi r d com pacti ng techni que i s to use noun cl uster s i nstead of pr eposi ti onal
phrases. Thi s techni que m ust be used car ef ul l y to avoi d cr eati ng an am bi guous
ti tl e (see “U nam bi guous” above).
One way to cr eate noun cl uster s that do not cause ser i ous r eadi ng pr obl em s i s
to use the nam e of the ani m al studi ed as an adjecti ve, rather than at the end of
the ti tl e.
Example 11.29
Renal Mechani sm of Acti on of Rat Atr i al N atr i ur eti c Factor
P. 310
Example 11.30
Hal othane Anesthesi a Im pai r s Pul m onar y Functi on i n N ew bor n Lam bs
Example 11.31
Im pai r ed Pul m onar y Functi on i n N ew bor n Lam bs Anestheti zed w i th Hal othane
Subtitles
A techni que f or putti ng an i m por tant w or d f i r st i s to use a m ai n ti tl e f ol l ow ed
by a subti tl e. The m ai n ti tl e states the general topi c and the subti tl e states the
speci f i c topi c. N ote that a subti tl e i s separated f r om the m ai n ti tl e by a col on
(:).
Hum an Apol i popr otei n B: Str uctur e of the Car box y l Ter m i nal Dom ai ns and Si tes
of Gene Ex pr essi on
Ex a mple 11. 33 Var i abl e Studi ed: Ex per i m ental Appr oach
Pul m oni c Val ve Endocar di ti s: A Ser i al Tw oDi m ensi onal Doppl er
Echocar di ographi c Study
In these ty pes of subti tl e, the col on r epl aces a pr eposi ti on that w oul d appear i n
the standar d f or m of the ti tl e. To r econstr uct the standar d ti tl e, begi n w i th the
subti tl e, add the appr opr i ate pr eposi ti on, and end w i th the m ai n ti tl e. In the
r econstr ucti on of Ex am pl e 11. 33, the pr eposi ti on joi ni ng the tw o par ts of the
ti tl e i s “of ”: “A Ser i al Tw oDi m ensi onal Doppl er Echocar di ographi c Study of
Pul m oni c Val ve Endocar di ti s.”
Angi otensi n II: A Potent Regul ator of Aci di f i cati on i n the Ear l y Pr ox i m al
Convol uted Tubul e of the Rat
In thi s ex am pl e, the col on r epl aces the ver b “i s.” Thus, i f Ex am pl e 11. 34 di d
not use a subti tl e, i t w oul d r ead “Angi otensi n II Is a Potent Regul ator of
Aci di f i cati on i n the Ear l y Pr ox i m al Convol uted Tubul e of the Rat.”
Whatever the r el ati on betw een the m ai n ti tl e and the subti tl e, a cr uci al el em ent
i n the use of subti tl es i s that the r el ati on betw een the subti tl e and the m ai n
ti tl e m ust be obv i ous. That i s, the pr eposi ti on or the ver b that the col on
r epl aces m ust be easy f or the r eader to suppl y.
Mor phol ogy of the Rat Car oti d Si nus N er ve: I. Cour se, Connecti ons,
U l trastr uctur e
Mor phol ogy of the Rat Car oti d Si nus N er ve: II. N um ber and Si ze of Axons
If the paper s ar e publ i shed i n the sam e jour nal (pr ef erabl y i n the sam e i ssue of
the jour nal ) and tr ul y coul d not be com bi ned i nto a si ngl e paper, num ber ed
subti tl es, as i n Ex am pl e 11. 35 above, ar e OK. But i f par t I i s publ i shed al one,
ther e i s al way s the possi bi l i ty that par t II w i l l never be publ i shed. If i t i s
publ i shed, i t shoul d be i n the sam e jour nal as par t I. The saf est pol i cy i s not to
star t a num ber ed ser i es of paper s.
DETAILS
Word Choice
When stati ng the m essage i n a ti tl e, di sti ngui sh betw een adjecti ves that m odi f y
quanti tati ve w or ds and adjecti ves that m odi f y qual i tati ve w or ds. The adjecti ves
“i ncr eased” and “decr eased” or “r educed” shoul d be used to m odi f y quanti tati ve
w or ds such as “m etabol i c rate” (that i s, m etabol i c rate i s m easurabl e), as i n
Ex am pl e 11. 6 above. The adjecti ves “i m pr oved” and “i m pai r ed” shoul d be used
f or qual i tati ve w or ds, that i s, f or w or ds si gni f y i ng concepts that can get better
or w or se, such as f uncti on or per f or m ance. For ex am pl e, “Im pr ov ed Regi onal
Ventr i cul ar Functi on af ter Successf ul Sur gi cal Revascul ar i zati on.” See al so
Ex am pl e 11. 31 above.
RUNNING TITLES
Runni ng ti tl es (or r unni ng heads) ar e shor t phrases that appear at the top or
bottom of ever y page, or ever y other page, i n a jour nal ar ti cl e. The pur pose of
a r unni ng ti tl e i s to i denti f y the ar ti cl e. Som e jour nal s use the author s' nam es
i nstead, or on al ter nate pages.
Because space al ong the top or bottom of the jour nal page i s l i m i ted, the
r unni ng ti tl e i s shor ter than the ti tl e.
P. 312
A r unni ng ti tl e shoul d be r ecogni zabl e as a shor t ver si on of the ti tl e and shoul d
be shor t enough to f i t i n the space al l ow ed.
HypothesisTesting Papers
For hy pothesi stesti ng paper s, usual l y the r unni ng ti tl e nam es the i ndependent
var i abl e (i f any ) and the dependent var i abl e, but not the ani m al .
Example 11.36
It i s not al way s possi bl e to use the begi nni ng of the ti tl e as the r unni ng ti tl e.
Som eti m es you can pi ck a phrase out of the m i ddl e (Ex am pl e 11. 37).
Example 11.37
Title Thr eeDi m ensi onal Reconstr ucti on of Al veol i i n the Rat
Lung f or Pr essur eVol um e Rel ati onshi ps
Example 11.38
Title Cool i ng Di f f er ent Body Sur f aces dur i ng U pper and
Low er Body Exer ci se
Example 11.39
Descriptive Papers
For descr i pti ve paper s, r unni ng ti tl es nam e the str uctur e and a br i ef ver si on of
the f uncti on.
Example 11.40
Methods Papers
For m ethods paper s, the r unni ng ti tl e can nam e the m ethod onl y or the m ethod
and the ani m al or the popul ati on (as i n Ex am pl e 11. 41) or can i ncl ude both the
categor y ter m or the nam e of the m ethod and a shor tened statem ent of i ts
pur pose (as i n Ex am pl e 11. 42).
Example 11.41
Example 11.42
P. 314
To attract r eader s.
Ani m al or popul ati on and m ater i al (Z). (The popul ati on can be
om i tted i f the popul ati on i s al l hum ans. )
Wr i te the f uncti on as
The ani m al or popul ati on the m ethod i s used f or, unl ess the
popul ati on i s al l hum ans or hum ans and other ani m al s.
If the m ethod i s new, the w or d “new ” usual l y does not need to appear i n
the ti tl e.
(m ethods paper ).
P. 315
For com pl eteness, i ncl ude al l the necessar y i nf or m ati on (see
“Content” above).
Avoi d “w i th.”
Do not use abbr ev i ati ons. Ex cepti ons: abbr ev i ati ons that ar e m or e
f am i l i ar than the w or ds they stand f or, chem i cal f or m ul as, and
abbr ev i ati ons i denti f i ed i n the ti tl e.
Om i t unnecessar y w or ds.
DETAILS
U se “i ncr eased” and “decr eased” to m odi f y quanti tati ve w or ds such as
“m etabol i c rate.”
RUNNING TITLES
A r unni ng ti tl e i s a shor t phrase that appear s at the top or bottom of
ever y page or ever y other page of a jour nal ar ti cl e.
Pi ck key ter m s, usual l y the i ndependent and dependent var i abl es, out
of the ti tl e to cr eate a r unni ng ti tl e; the ani m al can usual l y be
om i tted.
P. 316
Put w or ds i n the sam e or der i n the r unni ng ti tl e as i n the ti tl e.
For descr i pti ve paper s, nam e the str uctur e f ol l ow ed by a br i ef statem ent
of the f uncti on.
N am e of the m ethod.
Title : 100 c ha ra c te rs a nd s pa c e s or le s s
Running title : 55 c ha ra c te rs a nd s pa c e s or le s s
Hi de Answ er
Abs tra c t 1
Questi on: B
2 the ef f ect of CPAP on r enal f uncti on i n
new bor ns.
Title :
COMMEN TS
Functi ons
Content
Hal l m ar k s
Both ti tl es accur atel y , com pl etel y , and speci f i cal l y i denti f y the
m essage of the paper .
(Ce ll)
Running Title : 50 c ha ra c te rs a nd s pa c e s or le s s
Hi de Answ er
Abs tra c t 2
Title :
COMMEN TS
Functi ons
Content
Hal l m ar k s
Both ti tl es accur atel y , com pl etel y , and speci f i cal l y i denti f y the
m essage of the paper . The sam e k ey ter m s ar e used i n the ti tl e as i n
the m essage and the i m pl i cati on.
A In mic e , the inha la tion of a irpla ne glue or tolue ne fume s s low s the
s inoa tria l ra te , prolongs the P R inte rva l, a nd s e ns itize s the he a rt to
a s phyx ia induc e d a triove ntric ula r bloc k . B In huma ns w ho s niff glue or
s olve nts , s imila r me c ha nis ms ma y be a c a us e of s udde n de a th.
Sc ie nc e
Title : 100 c ha ra c te rs a nd s pa c e s or le s s
Hi de Answ er
Abstr act 3
COMMEN TS
Chapter 12
The Big Picture
In Chapter s 10 and 11 w e saw that the abstract and the ti tl e of a bi om edi cal r esear ch paper shoul d
pr ov i de a cl ear over v i ew of the m essage and the stor y of the paper. The chal l enge i n the paper (both
i n the tex t and i n the f i gur es and tabl es) i s to m ake the over v i ew cl ear w hi l e si m ul taneousl y
pr esenti ng al l the necessar y detai l s.
The techni ques f or m ak i ng the m essage and the stor y cl ear have al l been pr esented i n the pr ev i ous
chapter s. Her e they ar e gather ed together i n a si ngl e check l i st. Thi s check l i st f ocuses on hy pothesi s
testi ng paper s.
Goal
To state the m essage and tel l the stor y of the paper w hi l e si m ul taneousl y pr esenti ng al l the necessar y
detai l s; that i s, to avoi d l osi ng the f or est f or the tr ees.
The Message
State the m essage of the paper (the answ er to the questi on) i n a si ngl e sentence.
Make the answ er answ er the questi on asked: use the sam e key ter m s, the sam e ver b, and the sam e
poi nt of v i ew.
The Story
Incor porate the stor y i nto the paper. The stor y consi sts of f our m ai n par ts:
In the Introduc tion, the stor y = the f unnel to the questi on (k now n, unk now n), the questi on, and
the ex per i m ental appr oach. The “k now n” i ncl udes how the questi on r el ates to pr ev i ous w or k and
w hy the questi on i s i m por tant.
P. 320
In Ma te ria ls a nd Me thods , the stor y = the ex per i m ents done to answ er the questi on.
For studi es i n w hi ch al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance, the study desi gn subsecti on
gi ves the over v i ew of the ex per i m ents; the study desi gn i ncl udes
al l contr ol s.
For studi es i n w hi ch the r esul ts of one ex per i m ent deter m i ne w hat the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l
be, the Mater i al s and Methods secti on i s pur e cook book . The stor y of the ex per i m ents i s
gi ven i n the Resul ts secti on.
In Mater i al s and Methods secti ons f or both ty pes of study, stati ng the pur pose of each
pr ocedur e i ndi cates how that pr ocedur e hel ps answ er the questi on.
Subheadi ngs si gnal topi cs of subsecti ons v i sual l y. Topi c sentences and transi ti on phrases or
cl auses at the begi nni ng of subsecti ons and paragraphs si gnal topi cs ver bal l y.
In Re s ults , the stor y = the r esul ts f ound that answ er the questi on.
For studi es i n w hi ch al l the ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance, r esul ts stated pr om i nentl y
(at the begi nni ng of the secti on and at the begi nni ng of each paragraph) tel l the stor y.
Topi c sentences and transi ti on phrases or cl auses at the begi nni ng of paragraphs si gnal
subtopi cs.
For studi es i n w hi ch the r esul ts of one ex per i m ent deter m i ne w hat the nex t ex per i m ent w i l l
be, the stor y consi sts of a r epeated f our par t patter n:
The begi nni ng states the answ er to the questi on and gi ves ev i dence that suppor ts the
answ er.
The m i ddl e ex pl ai ns the answ er, thus i ndi cati ng how the answ er f i ts i n w i th pr ev i ous w or k .
The end r estates the answ er or states r ecom m endati ons, appl i cati ons, i m pl i cati ons, or
specul ati ons, thus i ndi cati ng the i m por tance of the answ er, or does both.
Topi c sentences at the begi nni ng of ever y paragraph, ei ther al one or i n com bi nati on w i th
transi ti on w or ds, phrases, or cl auses, r epeated key ter m s, and other techni ques of
conti nui ty, tel l the stor y i n the Di scussi on.
Si gnal s of the answ er i denti f y the answ er at both the begi nni ng and the end of the
Di scussi on.
For the i ndi v i dual stor i es i n each paragraph, suppor ti ng sentences ar e or gani zed to suppor t
the topi c sentence, and the or gani zati on i s i ndi cated by the techni ques of conti nui ty.
Or gani ze f r om m ost to l east i m por tant w hen usef ul (usual l y i n the Di scussi on; w her e
appr opr i ate i n Methods and Resul ts).
Check that r eadi ng the f i r st sentence or tw o of ever y paragraph r eveal s the stor y.
P. 321
Ensur e that the figure s a nd ta ble s together al so tel l the stor y of the paper.
Desi gn each f i gur e and tabl e to be si m pl e and to m ake a cl ear poi nt.
When appr opr i ate, show the m ai n stor y of the paper i n f i gur es and back gr ound i nf or m ati on
i n tabl es.
Correlation of Parts
Have no l oose ends i n the tex t.
Ther e shoul d be
The i ndependent and dependent var i abl es i n the questi on, or i ndi cator s of these var i abl es,
shoul d be the ones w e r ead about i n the Methods, Resul ts, and Di scussi on. If an i ndi cator i s
used, the var i abl e that i t i s an i ndi cator of shoul d be stated.
Ser i es of var i abl es shoul d be i n the sam e or der i n the Intr oducti on, Methods, Resul ts, and
Di scussi on.
If the Intr oducti on begi ns w i th a general pr obl em and the Di scussi on ends w i th an
i m pl i cati on, the i m pl i cati on shoul d r el ate to the pr obl em .
Al l var i abl es i n f i gur es and tabl es shoul d be i n Methods and Resul ts.
Key ter m s nam i ng the var i abl es shoul d be the sam e i n the f i gur es, f i gur e l egends, tabl es,
and tex t.
Val ues r estated i n the tex t shoul d be the sam e as those i n f i gur es and tabl es, and the uni ts
of m easur em ent shoul d be the sam e.
Each f i gur e and tabl e shoul d show w hat the tex t say s i t show s.
For the re fe re nc e s ,
Make the a bs tra c t both r ef l ect the paper accuratel y and be under standabl e by i tsel f.
The questi on i n the abstract shoul d be the sam e as the questi on i n the Intr oducti on.
The answ er i n the abstract shoul d be the sam e as the answ er i n the Di scussi on.
The ex per i m ental appr oach and ex per i m ental detai l s i n the abstract shoul d be the sam e as
those i n the Intr oducti on and Methods.
Resul ts and data i n the abstract shoul d be the sam e as those i n Resul ts, f i gur es, and tabl es.
Si gnal s shoul d be used f or the questi on, the r esul ts, the answ er, and any i m pl i cati ons.
The over v i ew i n the abstract shoul d be the sam e as the over v i ew i n the tex t.
If the ti tl e i ndi cates the topi c of the paper, i t shoul d be the sam e topi c as i n the questi on.
If the ti tl e i ndi cates the answ er to the questi on, i t shoul d be the sam e answ er as i n the
abstract and the Di scussi on.
P. 322
The ti tl e shoul d i ncl ude
the ani m al or popul ati on studi ed, and the m ol ecul e, cel l l i ne, ti ssue, or or gan studi ed
i n the ti tl e.
i n the abstract.
i n the questi on or the ex per i m ental appr oach (Intr oducti on).
i n Methods.
i n Resul ts.
the study desi gn (i n Methods f or studi es i n w hi ch al l ex per i m ents ar e desi gned i n advance;
i n Resul ts f or studi es i n w hi ch the r esul ts of one ex per i m ent deter m i ne w hat the nex t
ex per i m ent w i l l be).
al l r el evant r esul ts, w hether or not they suppor t your answ er (i n Resul ts), and suppor ti ng
data (i n f i gur es, tabl es, or the tex t).
di scussi on of any w eak nesses i n the study desi gn, l i m i tati ons of the m ethods, and the
val i di ty of assum pti ons (i n Methods or the Di scussi on).
suf f i ci ent i nf or m ati on i n f i gur e l egends and i n f ootnotes of tabl es to m ake the f i gur e or tabl e
under standabl e w i thout r ef er ence to the tex t.
Check that al l i nf or m ati on i n the tex t and i n the f i gur es and tabl es r el ates cl osel y to the
questi on and answ er.
Make sentences, paragraphs, and each secti on of the paper conci se.
In Me thods ,
Om i t detai l s of w el l k now n m ethods that have al r eady been r epor ted; ci te a r ef er ence.
For m ethods that have been r epor ted but ar e l ess w el l k now n, i ncl ude a br i ef
descr i pti on i n addi ti on to ci ti ng a r ef er ence.
P. 323
In Re s ults ,
In figure s a nd ta ble s ,
Do not begi n by r epeati ng the Intr oducti on or w r i ti ng a new Intr oducti on.
In the re fe re nc e lis t,
Have a suf f i ci ent num ber of r ef er ences to gi ve cr edi t to other s' w or k and to di r ect
r eader s to sour ces of f ur ther i nf or m ati on.
In the a bs tra c t,
P. 324
3. Introduc tion
4. Me thods
a. Study De s ign
The s tudy de s ign a s now w ritte n inc lude s a lot of c ook book de ta ils of how
proc e dure s w e re done . The s e c ook book de ta ils be long in othe r s ubs e c tions . Y our
re vis e d s tudy de s ign s hould give a brie f ove rvie w of the e x pe rime nt done to
a ns w e r the que s tion (one s hort pa ra gra ph).
a ll c ontrols
b. Cook book
If you ha ve time , w rite the c ook book for the de ta ils you omitte d from the origina l
Study De s ign (= pa ra gra phs 3–8 of the Me thods s e c tion).
c. Ca lc ula tions
Find the be s t orga niza tion.
d. Surgic a l P re pa ra tion
If you ha ve time , c onde ns e the de s c ription of the s urgic a l pre pa ra tion s o tha t it
re a lly is brie f—a bout one third its c urre nt le ngth.
5. Re s ults
a. Find the be s t orga niza tion (by inde pe nde nt va ria ble ? by de pe nde nt va ria ble ? if
de pe nde nt, w ha t orde r?).
b. Conde ns e .
6. Figure s a nd Ta ble s
b. Ma k e Figure 3 c le a r.
P. 325
c. Re de s ign Ta ble 2 to ma k e the tre nds of the da ta e a s ie r to s e e .
d. Alte rna tive ly, de c ide w hic h da ta to s how in figure s a nd w hic h da ta to s how in ta ble s ,
a nd re de s ign the figure s a nd ta ble s a c c ordingly.
7. Dis c us s ion
P a ra . 1
a. Signa l the a ns w e rs .
b. Re vis e the a ns w e rs .
P a ra . 3
P a ra . 5
8. Abs tra c t
b. Conde ns e .
Hi de Answ er
Stre ngths
Ove ra ll
Most key ter m s ar e kept consi stent or ar e shor tened r ecogni zabl y (f or ex am pl e, “um bi l i cal
cor d occl usi on,” “cor d occl usi on”).
Onl y thr ee abbr ev i ati ons ar e used: pO 2 , pCO 2 , SD (par ti al pr essur e of ox ygen, par ti al
pr essur e of car bon di ox i de, standar d dev i ati on).
Introduc tion
What i s k now n (A–D) and the i m por tance (E) ar e cl ear l y stated.
The statem ent of the ex per i m ental appr oach (P) cl ear l y addr esses the pr obl em m enti oned i n
paragraph 2 (J).
Ma te ria ls a nd Me thods
Subheadi ngs cl ear l y i denti f y the subsecti ons of Mater i al s and Methods.
Sur gi cal Pr epar ati on: Topi c sentence (“The sur gi cal pr otocol has been descr i bed
pr ev i ousl y . Br i ef l y , … ”).
For each ex per i m ent, w e k now w hat w as done and w hat the i ndependent and dependent
v ar i abl es and the contr ol s ar e.
The descr i pti on of each ex per i m ent i s or gani zed accor di ng to the i ndependent v ar i abl es
l i sted i n the questi on (v enti l ati on, ox y genati on, um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on).
Pur poses (par as. 4, 5, 7) and r easons (par as. 6, 7, 9, 10, 12) ar e i ncl uded f or speci f i c
pr ocedur es.
Thi nk i ng i s cl ear l y di spl ay ed i n “Cal cul ati ons” and “Anal y si s of Data. ”
Re s ults
The or der of i ndependent var i abl es w i thi n paragraphs 1, 2, and 3 i s consi stent (venti l ati on,
ox ygenati on, um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on).
Thi nk i ng i s cl ear l y di spl ayed i n “Major v s. Mi nor Responder s Dur i ng Venti l ati on Al one” to
ex pl ai n w hy the author i s r epor ti ng som e r esul ts that do not hel p answ er the questi on.
Because the questi on f or these r esul ts coul d not have been desi gned i nto the study, stati ng
the questi on and descr i bi ng the m ethods i n the Resul ts secti on i s appr opr i ate.
Dis c us s ion
The Di scussi on has the thr ee standar d par ts: the answ er to the questi on at the begi nni ng,
ex pl anati on and ex pansi on of the answ er i n the m i ddl e, and a r estatem ent of the answ er
f ol l ow ed by specul ati on at the end.
Topi cs ar e or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant to the questi on and answ er.
Readi ng the topi c sentence at the begi nni ng of each paragraph gi ves an over v i ew of the
stor y.
Cl ear.
Al though the topi c of paragraph 3 i s tangenti al , the author consi der ed i t at l east as
i m por tant as the questi on and answ er, so i t i s i ncl uded i n the Di scussi on.
Cl ear.
The l ast sentence br i ngs the stor y f ul l ci r cl e by m enti oni ng the sy ndr om e of per si stent
pul m onar y hy per tensi on of the new bor n, w hi ch was f i r st m enti oned i n the Intr oducti on (E).
Re fe re nc e s
Figure s a nd Ta ble s
The tabl es ar e cl ear and cl ear l y suppor t the statem ents i n the tex t, and thei r f or m i s
paral l el .
The var i abl es and the val ues i n the f i gur es and tabl es ar e the sam e as those i n the tex t. The
key ter m s and the uni ts of m easur em ent ar e al so the sam e.
In al l f i gur es and tabl es data ar e i denti f i ed as m ean ± SD, and n (the sam pl e si ze) i s gi ven.
Fi gur e l egends and f ootnotes of tabl es gi ve enough i nf or m ati on to m ake the f i gur es and
tabl es under standabl e w i thout r ef er ence to the tex t.
Abs tra c t
The si gnal s of the r esul ts (E) and of the answ er (K) ar e cl ear.
Resul ts and data i n the abstract ar e the sam e as those i n the Resul ts secti on.
The ani m al studi ed i s stated i n the descr i pti on of the ex per i m ent (C).
Data ar e pr esented as per cent change rather than as m ean and standar d dev i ati on.
W e a k ne s s e s
Ove ra ll
Abstr act: “to deter m i ne w hether v enti l ati on and ox y genati on of the f etal l ungs
coul d cause thi s decr ease i n r esi stance” (C).
Intr oducti on: “to deter m i ne w hether the sequenti al ex posur e of the f etus to
gaseous v enti l ati on, ox y genati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on coul d decr ease
pul m onar y v ascul ar r esi stance to l ev el s seen at bi r th” (O).
Abstract: “The changes i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance and bl ood f l ow that occur
at bi r th can be achi eved by i n uter o venti l ati on and ox ygenati on” (K).
Di scussi on: “Venti l ati on and ox ygenati on together can account f or the decr ease i n
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance, and thus f or the l ar ge i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow, that nor m al l y occur at bi r th” (B).
Di scussi on: “The changes i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance and bl ood f l ow that ar e
cr i ti cal to the adaptati on of the f etus to the postnatal env i r onm ent can be
achi eved by i n uter o venti l ati on and ox ygenati on (EE). Mor eover, m uch of the
vasodi l ator y r esponse can be achi eved w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 ” (FF).
The answ er s do not answ er the questi ons as ask ed. The v er bs i n al l the answ er s ar e
di f f er ent f r om the v er bs i n the questi ons. In addi ti on, the end of the Di scussi on (FF)
i ncl udes an answ er f or w hi ch ther e i s no questi on. Thi s i s a m ajor di scr epancy i n the
ov er v i ew .
The over v i ew i n the tex t i s not as cl ear as the over v i ew i n the abstract. Or gani zati on
f r om m ost to l east i m por tant shoul d be used m or e i n the tex t. Al so, m or e techni ques of
conti nui ty need to be used i n the tex t to m ake the over v i ew cl ear : topi c sentences,
ver bal and v i sual si gnal s of topi cs, ex act r epeti ti on of key ter m s. Fi nal l y, l ong
ex pl anati ons shoul d be condensed.
The ter m “venti l ati on” i s not pr eci se. A m or e pr eci se ter m i s “l ung di stensi on,” as
i ndi cated by the def i ni ti on of venti l ati on i n the or i gi nal Intr oducti on (sent. G).
The w r i ti ng coul d be l i v el i er .
Introduc tion
The r ev i ew of the l i teratur e [ev i dence that the pul m onar y vascul ar r esponse to venti l ati on,
ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on m ay be Sal ter ed by the m etabol i c ef f ects of acute
sur ger y and anesthesi a (K–N )] i s unnecessar y. Thi s topi c i s deal t w i th m or e r el evantl y i n the
Di scussi on (para. 2).
The r eason f or study i ng the ef f ect of um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on shoul d be added.
To em phasi ze the r eason f or the cum ul ati ve study desi gn, the r eason can be i ncl uded i n the
Intr oducti on rather than i n the Anal y si s of Data subsecti on of Methods.
The questi on (O) r el ates to the f i r st answ er onl y. One sol uti on i s to add a questi on that
r el ates to the second answ er. Another sol uti on i s to ask onl y the second questi on, as i n the
r ev i si on bel ow.
Ma te ria ls a nd Me thods
Sur gi cal Pr epar ati on: The br i ef descr i pti on does not seem br i ef .
Detai l s of the i nter v enti ons and detai l s of m ethods of m easur em ent shoul d be
m ov ed to separ ate subsecti ons. Par agr aph 8 shoul d be at the end of the
Cal cul ati ons subsecti on.
Or gani zi ng f r om m ost to l east i m por tant w oul d em phasi ze the dependent var i abl e
i n the questi on (pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance) m or e.
Mor e over v i ew w oul d be usef ul , speci f i cal l y, a topi c sentence say i ng that
m i cr ospher es w er e i njected i n tw o way s, a com pani on topi c sentence i n the nex t
paragraph announci ng the second way of i njecti ng m i cr ospher es, and a transi ti on
phrase stati ng the pur pose of i njecti ng m i cr ospher es i nto the l ef t atr i um . In
addi ti on, a br i ef descr i pti on of the m i cr ospher e m ethod coul d be added (para. 10
of the Rev i si on).
Re s ults
Putti ng the r esul ts f or pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n the m i ddl e of the Resul ts secti on
and al so bur y i ng them at the end of the paragraph on pr essur es (para. 3) m ake the
i m por tant r esul ts har d to f i nd. Or gani zi ng f r om m ost to l east i m por tant w oul d em phasi ze the
r esul ts that answ er the questi on both i n the Resul ts secti on and i n the f i gur es (pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance, the m ost i m por tant dependent var i abl e, w oul d be i n Fi g. 1). The
var i abl es on w hi ch the cal cul ati on of pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance was based (pul m onar y
bl ood f l ow and m ean pul m onar y ar ter i al and l ef t atr i al pr essur es) can com e nex t, and bl ood
gases and pH can com e l ast. For thi s or gani zati on, a topi c sentence l i nk i ng pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow to pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance shoul d be added (see para. 2 of Resul ts i n the
Rev i si on).
Al ter nati vel y, r eor gani zi ng the r esul ts accor di ng to the i ndependent var i abl e, the sam e
or gani zati on as i n Methods, rather than accor di ng to the dependent var i abl e w oul d m ake the
Resul ts cor r espond m or e cl ear l y w i th the questi on, the abstract, Methods, and the
cal cul ati on of pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance.
The ani m al studi ed shoul d be m enti oned at the begi nni ng of Resul ts.
The data f or pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and f or pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance do not need to be
m enti oned; ci ti ng the f i gur es i s suf f i ci ent.
In paragraph 2, Fi gur e 1 shoul d be ci ted af ter an ex per i m ental r esul t (the ef f ect of
venti l ati on), not af ter a contr ol r esul t. In paragraph 3, Fi gur e 2 shoul d be ci ted af ter the
r esul t f or venti l ati on al one (the dram ati c decr ease), not at the end of the sentence.
In paragraph 5, the f i r st sentence (m ethods) shoul d be subor di nated to the second sentence
(r esul ts), and Tabl e 4 shoul d be ci ted af ter the r esul t, not af ter the m ethod. The r em ai ni ng
sentences can be om i tted because the detai l s ar e i ncl uded i n the Di scussi on (para. 3).
Dis c us s ion
A str onger si gnal of the answ er i n B and a str onger l i nk betw een B and A w oul d be hel pf ul
(see the r ev i si on).
The ani m al studi ed shoul d be m enti oned i n the si gnal of the answ er.
Instead of stati ng a r esul t, sentence C shoul d state an answ er. The var i abl e shoul d be
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance and the ver b shoul d be i n pr esent tense.
P a ra gra phs 2–4:
Identi f y i ng the gr eat var i abi l i ty i n the r esponse of f etal pul m onar y bl ood f l ow as an
unex pected f i ndi ng (sentence M) w oul d m ake the over v i ew cl ear er.
To m ake the topi c sentence sound l ess negati ve and to f ocus the stor y on the topi c of
paragraph 4, the f i r st poi nt i n sentence Y can be subor di nated to the second poi nt.
“In uter o” bel ongs i n the ex per i m ental appr oach, not i n the answ er (EE).
The answ er shoul d be si gnal ed and the ani m al studi ed shoul d be nam ed i n the si gnal .
Changi ng the key ter m (f r om “venti l ati on” to “w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 ”) m akes the
second answ er (FF) di f f i cul t to under stand.
Pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance shoul d be added to the l ast sentence (II) to r el ate the
specul ati on to the dependent var i abl e i n the answ er bef or e r el ati ng i t to a cl i ni cal pr obl em
based on the dependent var i abl e.
Figure s a nd Ta ble s
In the tabl es, al l sam pl e si zes l ess than 16 shoul d be accounted f or. (The sam pl e si ze of 12
dur i ng um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on i n Tabl e 1 i s accounted f or i n para. 7 of Methods. The sam pl e
si ze of 10 f or l ef t atr i al pr essur e dur i ng venti l ati on and ox ygenati on i s accounted f or i n
para. 3 of Resul ts. )
Tabl es 1–3 coul d be r edesi gned so that the i ndependent var i abl e r uns dow n the f i r st col um n
on the l ef t (see the r ev i si on). In addi ti on, the data i n Tabl es 2–4, w hi ch ar e not nor m al l y
di str i buted, shoul d be m edi ans and i nter quar ti l e ranges.
Fi gur es 1 and 2 shoul d be boxandw hi sker pl ots, because the data ar e not nor m al l y
di str i buted (w hi ch i s w hy the data w er e anal y zed by the MannWhi tney U test).
The data f or the answ er to the questi on shoul d not be spl i t i nto tw o f i gur es and a tabl e
(Fi gs. 1, 2 and Tabl e 3). To m ake the cal cul ati on of pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f r om
pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and the di f f er ence betw een l ef t atr i al pr essur e and sy stem i c ar ter i al
pr essur e cl ear, al l the data can be pr esented i n a tabl e (see the r ev i si on).
In Fi gur e 3, the poi nt that i ndi v i dual changes i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow w er e ex tr em el y
var i abl e i s di f f i cul t to see because the over l ap of cur ves m akes f ol l ow i ng and com par i ng
i ndi v i dual cur ves di f f i cul t. One way to m ake the poi nt i n Fi gur e 3 cl ear i s to r edraw the
graph as tw o separate graphs, one f or m ajor r esponder s and the other f or m i nor r esponder s.
Abs tra c t
The questi on i n the abstract (C) does not r ef l ect the paper accuratel y because the questi on
om i ts one of the i ndependent var i abl es (um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on), thus cr eati ng onl y a
par ti al ex pectati on of the topi cs i n the paper.
The ex per i m ent done shoul d m enti on pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance (D).
Changi ng the key ter m “venti l ati on” to “venti l ati on… w i th a gas m i x tur e that pr oduced no
changes i n ar ter i al bl ood gases” (E) and to “w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 ” (L) i s
conf usi ng.
“U nex pectedl y ” shoul d be added at the begi nni ng of the r esul ts i n sentence I.
In the answ er (K), the poi nt of v i ew shoul d be the sam e as that i n the questi on; the ver b
shoul d al so be the sam e. In addi ti on, “i n uter o” bel ongs onl y i n the descr i pti on of the
ex per i m ent, not i n the answ er.
The abstract i s l onger than necessar y. Sentences B (back gr ound) and M (specul ati on) can be
om i tted. Sentences E–H (r esul ts) can be condensed.
Title
“Pul m onar y Ci r cul ati on” shoul d be changed to “Pul m onar y Vascul ar Resi stance”
(the dependent v ar i abl e).
Instead of “Bi r thRel ated Ev ents, ” the speci f i c i ndependent v ar i abl es that
decr eased pul m onar y v ascul ar r esi stance shoul d be nam ed.
For the m ost speci f i c ti tl e, the m essage can be stated i n a v er b (“decr ease”).
Re vis ion
Abs tra c t
A In thi s study, w e asked w hether di stensi on of the l ungs, ox ygenati on of the l ungs, or
occl usi on of the um bi l i cal cor d i s the m ajor cause of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar
r esi stance that nor m al l y occur s at bi r th. B To answ er thi s questi on, w e assessed the
cum ul ati ve ef f ects of l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on on
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n 16 chr oni cal l y i nstr um ented near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o.
C We cal cul ated pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f r om vascul ar pr essur es and pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow (obtai ned by i njecti ng radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es) dur i ng basel i ne, l ung
di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on. D We f ound that l ung di stensi on al one
decr eased pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance to 34% of basel i ne, because of a 400% i ncr ease i n
pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, no change i n pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e, and a 200% i ncr ease i n l ef t
atr i al pr essur e. E Ox ygenati on decr eased pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f ur ther (to 10% of
basel i ne), because of a m odest f ur ther i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and a decr ease i n
pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e. F U m bi l i cal cor d occl usi on caused no f ur ther change i n any of
the var i abl es. G U ne x pe c te dly,
the f etuses r esponded di f f er entl y to l ung di stensi on: i n ei ght,
pul m onar y bl ood f l ow was m ax i m al dur i ng l ung di stensi on w her eas i n the other ei ght, i t was
onl y 20% of m ax i m al . H We f ound no di f f er ences betw een the tw o gr oups of f etuses to
ex pl ai n thei r di f f er ent r esponses. I We concl ude that l ung di stensi on i s the m ajor cause of
the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that nor m al l y occur s at bi r th.
Introduc tion
1 A At bi r th, as the l ungs r epl ace the pl acenta as the m ai n or gan of gas exchange, pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance m ust decr ease dram ati cal l y, al l ow i ng pul m onar y bl ood f l ow to i ncr ease
and ox ygen exchange to occur i n the l ungs. B If pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance does not
decr ease, the sy ndr om e of per si stent pul m onar y hy per tensi on of the new bor n occur s, of ten
l eadi ng to death.
2 C Whi ch of the m any events that occur at bi r th c a us e the nor m al decr ease i n pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance i s not f ul l y under stood. D Thr ee m ajor events that coul d c a us e thi s
decr ease ar e r hy thm i c gaseous di stensi on of the l ungs, ox ygenati on of the l ungs, and
occl usi on of the um bi l i cal cor d. E Tw o of these events—di stensi on and ox ygenati on—have
been studi ed i n acutel y ex ter i or i zed f etal sheep. F The studi es suggested that ox ygenati on
rather than di stensi on of the f etal l ungs is the ma jor c a us e of the decr ease i n pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance (5–10). G How ever, the m etabol i c ef f ects of acute anesthesi a and sur ger y
used to ex ter i or i ze the f etal sheep m ay have al ter ed the pul m onar y vascul ar r esponse i n
these studi es, because thi s r esponse i s consi der ed to be at l east par tl y m edi ated by
vasoacti ve m etabol i tes (11). H In addi ti on, al though the ef f ect of um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on on
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance has been studi ed onl y i ndi r ectl y, um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on has
been f ound to i ncr ease catechol am i nes gr eatl y (r ef ). I Thi s i ncr ease i n catechol am i nes coul d
al ter pul m onar y vascul ar tone and thus coul d change pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance.
3 J Ther ef or e, i n thi s study, w e asked w hether di stensi on of the l ungs, ox ygenati on of the
l ungs, or occl usi on of the um bi l i cal cor d (D) i s the m ajor c a us e (F) of the decr ease i n
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that nor m al l y occur s at bi r th (A, C). K To answ er thi s
questi on, w e assessed the cum ul ati ve ef f ects of l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal
cor d occl usi on on pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n 16 near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o. L We
studi ed the cum ul ati ve ef f ects rather than the i ndependent ef f ects because the or der of the
ex per i m ents coul d not be random i zed. M One r eason i s that w e w er e concer ned that
ox ygenati on of the f etal l ungs m i ght i nduce num er ous and per haps i r r ever si bl e m etabol i c
and hem ody nam i c consequences, so that subsequent l ung di stensi on i n the absence of
ox ygenati on coul d not be studi ed. N Another r eason i s that the um bi l i cal cor d cannot be
occl uded bef or e ox ygenati on. O Thus, the study i s com posed of f our cum ul ati ve ex per i m ents:
basel i ne, l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on. * P To avoi d the
super i m posed ef f ects of acute anestheti c and sur gi cal str esses and of other com ponents of
the bi r th pr ocess, such as pr enatal hor m onal sur ges, l abor, del i ver y, and col d ex posur e, w e
di d these ex per i m ents i n near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o 2–3 day s af ter sur ger y f or catheter
pl acem ent.
Ma te ria ls a nd Me thods
(Topi c sentences, transi ti on phrases, and key ter m s that si gnal topi cs of paragraphs or
subtopi cs w i thi n paragraphs ar e under l i ned)
Anima ls
1 A Si x teen f etal sheep w er e studi ed at 134. 9 ± 1. 2 (SD) day s of gestati on (ter m i s about
145 day s). B The
f etuses w er e of nor m al w ei ght (3. 6 ± 0. 6 k g) and had nor m al bl ood gases
(see Resul ts) and hem ogl obi n concentrati ons (10. 9 ± 1. 6 g/dl ) at the begi nni ng of the study.
C Ani m al husbandr y and the study desi gn f ol l ow ed the gui del i nes of the N ati onal Insti tutes of
Heal th. The study desi gn w as appr ov ed by the Com m i ttee on Ani m al Resear ch at our
uni v er si ty .
Surgic a l P re pa ra tion
2 D The sur gi cal pr otocol has been descr i bed pr ev i ousl y (4, 12). E Br i ef l y, dur i ng anesthesi a,
f or m easur em ent of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and vascul ar pr essur es, catheter s w er e pl aced i n
the ascendi ng aor ta, the descendi ng aor ta, the i nf er i or vena cava, the l ef t atr i um , the
pul m onar y ar ter y, and the am ni oti c cav i ty (f or zer o pr essur e r ef er ence). F The ascendi ng
aor ti c catheter was al so used to obtai n bl ood sam pl es f or deter m i nati on of pH, pO 2 , pCO 2 ,
hem ogl obi n concentrati on, and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on. G For venti l ati on, an
endotracheal tube was i nser ted. H Attached to the endotracheal tube w er e tw o pi eces of
pol y v i ny l tubi ng. I One pi ece was seal ed. J The other pi ece was pl aced i n the am ni oti c cav i ty
to al l ow f r ee drai nage of tracheal f l ui d postoperati vel y. K In addi ti on, a catheter was pl aced
i n the pl eural cav i ty f or tr eatm ent i n the event of a pneum othorax . L Fi nal l y, a bal l oon
occl uder was pl aced ar ound the um bi l i cal cor d.
Study De s ign
3 M Tw o to thr ee day s af ter sur ger y, w e per f or m ed f our cum ul ati ve ex per i m ents on each of
the 16 f etal sheep i n the f ol l ow i ng sequence: f i r st, basel i ne; then added l ung di stensi on
(i nduced by venti l ati on w i th a gas m i x tur e that pr eser ved nor m al f etal bl ood gas content);
then added ox ygenati on (venti l ati on w i th 100% ox ygen); and l ast added um bi l i cal cor d
occl usi on. N Dur i ng each of the f our ex per i m ents, w e f i r st sam pl ed f etal bl ood f r om the
ascendi ng aor ta f or assessm ent of i ndi cator s of ox ygenati on and aci dbase status (pH, pO 2 ,
pCO 2 , hem ogl obi n concentrati on, and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on). O N ex t, f or the
cal cul ati on of pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance, w e m easur ed m ean pr essur es i n the pul m onar y
ar ter y and the l ef t atr i um and then i njected radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es f or
cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow. P We al so m easur ed sy stem i c ar ter i al pr essur e as a
check of hem ody nam i c stabi l i ty. Q We obtai ned al l data w i thi n 5 m i n and dur i ng hem ody nam i c
stabi l i ty.
4 R Bef or e the f i r st ex per i m ent, w e pl aced the ew e i n a study cage and al l ow ed i t f r ee access
to al f al f a pel l ets and water. S Bef or e begi nni ng the ex per i m ental m easur em ents, w e wai ted
f or at l east 15 m i n af ter the i nter venti on f or pr essur es and bl ood gases to stabi l i ze. T Af ter
tak i ng bl ood sam pl es, w e gave f etal or m ater nal bl ood to r epl ace bl ood l oss.
5 U For l ung di stensi on, w e venti l ated the f etus's l ungs w i th a gas m i x tur e that pr eser ved
nor m al f etal bl ood gas content. V Fi r st, w e opened the tw o pol y v i ny l tubes connected to the
tracheal tube and al l ow ed the tracheal f l ui d to drai n by grav i ty. W Then w e bal anced a
m i x tur e of ni tr ogen, ox ygen, and car bon di ox i de to m atch the f etal bl ood gases obtai ned
dur i ng the basel i ne ex per i m ent. X The gas m i x tur e was about 92% ni tr ogen, 3% ox ygen, and
5% car bon di ox i de. Y Bef or e
begi nni ng venti l ati on, w e al l ow ed thi s gas m i x tur e to f l ow
thr ough the pol y v i ny l tubi ng f or a f ew seconds at a rate of about 10 L/m i n so that the f etus
w oul d not be ex posed to hi gh concentrati ons of ox ygen at the onset of venti l ati on. Z Then w e
connected the tubi ng to a speci al l y desi gned r espi rator and adjusted venti l ati on as descr i bed
pr ev i ousl y (12). AA Venti l ator y setti ngs ar e pr esented i n Tabl e 1.
6 B B For ox ygenati on, w e changed the gas m i x tur e to 100% ox ygen and conti nued venti l ati on.
C C We di d not add car bon di ox i de to the ox ygen because i ts addi ti on i n the f i r st f ew studi es
i ncr eased f etal pCO 2 . D D Thi s i ncr ease pr obabl y occur r ed because pl acental bl ood f l ow f el l
dur i ng ox ygenati on (4), i m pai r i ng car bon di ox i de r em oval .
7 EE For um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, w e f ul l y i nf l ated the bal l oon ar ound the um bi l i cal cor d, thus
abol i shi ng pl acental bl ood f l ow (4). F F In 4 of the 16 f etuses, w e coul d not study cor d
occl usi on, because of a f aul ty bal l oon i n tw o and the devel opm ent of pneum othoraces, w hi ch
l ed to car di ovascul ar decom pensati on, i n tw o.
Ca lc ula tions
9 I I We cal cul ated pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance as the di f f er ence betw een m ean pul m onar y
ar ter i al pr essur e and m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e di v i ded by pul m onar y bl ood f l ow. J J For the
si x f etuses i n w hi ch w e w er e unabl e to m easur e l ef t atr i al pr essur e f or techni cal r easons,
w e used the m ean val ues obtai ned f r om the other ten f etuses dur i ng the sam e ex per i m ent.
10 KK To cal cul ate pul m onar y and other bl ood f l ow s, w e used the radi onucl i del abel ed
m i cr ospher e m ethod (r ef ). L L Br i ef l y, w e i njected radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es (sel ected
f r om 5 7 Co, 5 1 Cr, 1 5 3 Gd, 1 1 4 In, 5 4 Mn, 9 5 N b, 1 1 3 Sn, 8 5 Sr, and 6 5 Zn), 15 µm i n di am eter, i nto
the i nf er i or vena cava or i nto the i nf er i or vena cava and the l ef t atr i um . M M Dur i ng the
i njecti on, w e w i thdr ew r ef er ence bl ood sam pl es f r om vessel s pr ox i m al to each or gan gr oup
(pul m onar y ar ter y f or the l ungs, ascendi ng aor ta f or the upper body, and descendi ng aor ta
f or the l ow er body and pl acenta) at a rate of 4 m l /m i n. N N We used thi s r ef er ence f l ow, al ong
w i th r ef er ence radi oacti v i ty counts and al so or gan w ei ghts and counts, to cal cul ate bl ood
f l ow s.
11 O O For cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, w e i njected m i cr ospher es i n tw o way s.
P P Dur i ng the basel i ne ex per i m ent, because ther e i s no l ef ttor i ght shunt thr ough the ductus
ar ter i osus (14), w e i njected m i cr ospher es i nto the i nf er i or vena cava and w i thdr ew bl ood
sam pl es f r om the pul m onar y ar ter y. Q Q Thi s i njecti on and w i thdrawal techni que excl udes
br onchi al bl ood f l ow. RR To cal cul ate br onchi al bl ood f l ow, i n si x f etal sheep w e al so i njected
m i cr ospher es i nto the l ef t atr i um dur i ng the basel i ne ex per i m ent. SS We f ound that br onchi al
bl ood f l ow was r el ati vel y constant and qui te sm al l , al way s l ess than 3% of com bi ned
ventr i cul ar output. TT We then subtracted thi s val ue f r om the pul m onar y bl ood f l ow val ues i n
the r em ai ni ng ex per i m ents.
12 UU Dur i ng l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, w e i njected
m i cr ospher es f or cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow di f f er entl y. V V The r eason i s that upon
venti l ati on, pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f al l s and bl ood f l ow i ncr eases dram ati cal l y.
W W Thus, a l ef ttor i ght shunt thr ough the ductus ar ter i osus cannot be excl uded. X X To
cal cul ate pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i n the pr esence of a l ef ttor i ght shunt r equi r es a techni que
that deter m i nes the contr i buti ons of l ef t ventr i cul ar output to pul m onar y bl ood f l ow.
Y Y Ther ef or e,
dur i ng l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, w e i njected
m i cr ospher es l abel ed w i th di f f er ent radi onucl i des si m ul taneousl y i nto both the i nf er i or vena
cava and the l ef t atr i um and cal cul ated pul m onar y bl ood f l ow as the di f f er ence betw een
com bi ned ventr i cul ar output and the sum of bl ood f l ow s to the f etal body and pl acenta (4).
ZZ Com bi ned ventr i cul ar output was cal cul ated as the sum of l ef t and r i ght ventr i cul ar
outputs. AAA Bl ood f l ow s to the f etal body and pl acenta w er e cal cul ated f r om the l ef t atr i al
i njecti ons and r ef er ence bl ood w i thdrawal s f r om the ascendi ng and descendi ng aor ta (4).
13 B B B U pon com pl eti on of the l ast ex per i m ent, w e gave the ew e a l ethal dose of sodi um
pentobar bi tal , r em oved the f etus f r om the uter us, and w ei ghed i t. C C C To obtai n radi oacti v i ty
counts f or cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, w e r em oved and w ei ghed al l or gans and
pl aced them i n f or m al i n. D D D Then w e separatel y car boni zed the or gans i n an oven, gr ound
them i nto a coar se pow der, and pl aced them i n pl asti c v i al s to a uni f or m hei ght of 3 cm .
EEE To count the radi oacti v i ty of the or gans and the r ef er ence bl ood sam pl es, w e used a
1000channel m ul ti channel pul sehei ght anal y zer (N or l and, For t Atk i nson, WI). F F F We
cal cul ated the speci f i c acti v i ty of each i sotope w i thi n a sam pl e by the l eastsquar es m ethod
(13). GGG Fr om the r ef er ence f l ow and radi oacti v i ty counts and the or gan w ei ghts and counts,
w e cal cul ated bl ood f l ow s accor di ng to standar d f or m ul as (r ef ).
Ana lys is of Da ta
14 H H H We anal y zed the data f r om each ex per i m ent by the MannWhi tney U test, com par i ng
onl y the data obtai ned dur i ng one ex per i m ent w i th data obtai ned dur i ng the ex per i m ent
i m m edi atel y pr ecedi ng i t. I I I We consi der ed stati sti cal si gni f i cance pr esent w hen the P val ue
was ≤ 0. 001. J J J Al l data ar e pr esented as m ean ± 1 SD.
Re s ults
1 A Pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n the 16 f etal sheep decr eased to 34% of basel i ne val ues
dur i ng l ung di stensi on al one (Fi gur e 1). B It decr eased an addi ti onal 10% dur i ng ox ygenati on.
C It di d not change f ur ther af ter um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on.
2 D These decr eases i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance m ai nl y r ef l ect i ncr eases i n pul m onar y
bl ood f l ow. E Mean pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i ncr eased to f our ti m es the basel i ne val ue dur i ng
l ung di stensi on and to si x ti m es the basel i ne val ue dur i ng ox ygenati on (Tabl e 2). F A doubl i ng
of l ef t atr i al pr essur e al so contr i buted to the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance
dur i ng l ung di stensi on (Tabl e 2). G A s ma ll but s ignific a nt decr ease i n m ean pul m onar y
ar ter i al pr essur e al so contr i buted to the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance dur i ng
ox ygenati on.
3 H The i ndi v i dual changes i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng the ex per i m ents w er e ex tr em el y
var i abl e (Fi g. 2). I In som e f etuses the m ajor i ty of the i ncr ease occur r ed dur i ng l ung
di stensi on, w her eas i n other s ther e was al m ost no i ncr ease unti l ox ygenati on. J To l ook f or
f actor s that m i ght pr edi ct these di f f er ences i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, f i r st w e ar bi trar i l y
di v i ded the f etuses i nto m ajor r esponder s (i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow at l east 50% of
the cum ul ati ve i ncr ease over the f our ex per i m ents) and m i nor r esponder s (i ncr ease l ess
than 50% of the cum ul ati ve i ncr ease). K The ei ght m ajor r esponder s had an i ncr ease i n
pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng l ung di stensi on that was equal to the cum ul ati ve i ncr ease (103
± 52%), w her eas the ei ght m i nor r esponder s had a m uch sm al l er i ncr ease (20 ± 17%).
L Then w e assessed basel i ne var i abl es that m i ght be di f f er ent i n the m ajor and m i nor
r esponder s. M In addi ti on, to see i f the di f f er ence coul d have r esul ted f r om di f f er ences i n the
ul ti m ate vasodi l ati on and pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, w e l ooked at tw o i ndi cator s of vasodi l ati on
and at pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng ox ygenati on. N N one of these var i abl es show ed
s ta tis tic a lly s ignific a nt di f f er ences betw een the tw o gr oups (Tabl e 3) (unchanged f r om
Tabl e 4 i n the or i gi nal v er si on).
4 O Except f or pO 2 and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on, w hi ch i ncr eased appr opr i atel y dur i ng
ox ygenati on, sy stem i c ar ter i al bl ood gases and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on di d not change
s ignific a ntly dur i ng l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, or um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on (Tabl e 4).
Dis c us s ion
1 A Of the thr ee m ajor events that occur at bi r th, r hy thm i c gaseous di stensi on of the l ungs,
ox ygenati on of the l ungs, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, ox ygenati on has been r epor ted to be
the m ajor cause of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that nor m al l y occur s at
bi r th (5–10). B In thi s study i n f etal sheep, w e f ound that di stensi on of the l ungs, not
ox ygenati on, is the ma jor c a us e of thi s decr ease. C In our near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o,
near l y tw othi r ds of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance occur r ed dur i ng l ung
di stensi on and the r em ai ni ng onethi r d occur r ed dur i ng ox ygenati on. DNo f ur ther decr ease
occur r ed dur i ng um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on.
2 E The r eason w e f ound a l ar ger decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance dur i ng l ung
di stensi on than pr ev i ousl y r epor ted m ay be that pr ev i ous studi es w er e per f or m ed on acutel y
ex ter i or i zed f etuses (5, 6, 8–10). F An acute str ess such as that caused by the anesthesi a and
sur ger y used to ex ter i or i ze a f etus can gr eatl y al ter pr oducti on and i nhi bi ti on of var i ous
m etabol i c agents, such as pr ostagl andi ns. G Al ter ed pr oducti on and i nhi bi ti on of
pr ostagl andi ns coul d have sl ow ed the rate of decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n
those studi es. H Ev i dence f or thi s possi bi l i ty i s that the pr ostagl andi n sy nthesi s i nhi bi tor
i ndom ethaci n has been show n to attenuate thi s decr ease (30). I Fur ther ev i dence i s that
pr ostagl andi n I 2 , a potent pul m onar y vasodi l ator, i s pr oduced i n r esponse to ei ther
m echani cal venti l ati on (20, 21) or br eathi ng (19) i n r ecentl y del i ver ed f etal l am bs. J Gr eater
vasodi l ati on w oul d decr ease pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance. K In addi ti on, the pr oducti on of
pr ostagl andi n E 1 , pr ostagl andi n D 2 , and brady k i ni n and the i nhi bi ti on of l eukotr i enes C 4 and
D 4 m ay af f ect pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance (31). L Thus, the var i abl e but general l y l esser
ef f ects of l ung di stensi on i n the pr ev i ous studi es m ay be ascr i bed to the var i abl e ef f ects of
the study pr otocol s on the m etabol i c m i l i eu of the pul m onar y vascul ar bed.
3 M U nex pectedl y, w e al so f ound gr eat var i abi l i ty i n the r esponse of f etal pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow to the ef f ects of l ung di stensi on. N In onehal f of the f etuses, the m ean i ncr ease i n
pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng l ung di stensi on was m ax i m al , w her eas i n the other hal f i t was
onl y about 20% of the cum ul ati ve r esponse. O Inter esti ngl y, Cook et al . (11) f ound si m i l ar
var i abi l i ty i n thei r study of ni tr ogen and ai r venti l ati on: of the si x f etuses studi ed, tw o
show ed no ef f ect of ni tr ogen venti l ati on but a l ar ge ef f ect upon changi ng to ai r, tw o show ed
a sm al l ef f ect of ni tr ogen and a l ar ger r esponse to ai r, and tw o show ed a l ar ge i ncr ease i n
pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng ni tr ogen venti l ati on w i th no f ur ther change upon ex posur e to
ai r. P To ex pl ai n these f i ndi ngs, Cook et al . noted that ni tr ogen had the gr eatest ef f ect on the
sm al l est f etuses. Q How ever, w e w er e unabl e to i denti f y the r easons f or the var i abi l i ty w e
f ound. R It was not on a pur el y ar i thm eti c basi s. S That i s, the m ajor r esponder s di d not begi n
w i th l ow er contr ol f l ow s or have l ow er m ax i m al f l ow s. T In f act, the tw o gr oups had
r em ar k abl y si m i l ar pul m onar y bl ood f l ow s both dur i ng basel i ne m easur em ents and dur i ng
venti l ati on w i th 100% ox ygen. U The gr oups w er e al so not di f f er ent i n thei r overal l m atur i ty,
w i th r espect to ei ther gestati onal age or w ei ght. V In addi ti on, di f f er ences i n pO 2 w er e not
r esponsi bl e f or the di f f er ences betw een m ajor and m i nor r esponder s, si nce both dur i ng
basel i ne m easur em ents and dur i ng l ung di stensi on, the m i nor r esponder s w er e nei ther m or e
hy pox i c nor m or e hy per capni c than the m ajor r esponder s. W Lastl y, adequacy of al veol ar
venti l ati on was pr obabl y not r esponsi bl e f or the di f f er ence betw een the gr oups. X Al though
w e w er e not abl e to deter m i ne the adequacy of al veol ar venti l ati on dur i ng l ung di stensi on,
dur i ng ox ygenati on, pO 2 and pCO 2 val ues w er e si m i l ar i n the tw o gr oups, w i thout the m ethod
of venti l ati on hav i ng been changed i n ei ther gr oup.
4 Y Al though the m ar ked di f f er ence betw een the pul m onar y vasodi l ator y r esponses of the tw o
gr oups of f etuses i s thus unex pl ai ned, thi s di f f er ence m ay have i m por tant i m pl i cati ons.
Z Fi r st, i t m ay be i m por tant i n uncover i ng the m etabol i c pr ocesses r esponsi bl e f or an
i ncom pl ete decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance at bi r th. AA Second, eval uati on of the
concentrati ons and f l uxes of the putati ve m etabol i c agents i nvol ved m ay dem onstrate
di f f er ent f ates of these agents i n m ajor and m i nor r esponder s.
5 B B In sum m ar y, thi s study i n f etal sheep show s that di stensi on of the l ungs, not
ox ygenati on, is the ma jor c a us e of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that
nor m al l y occur s at bi r th. C C How ever, the ef f ect of l ung di stensi on i s var i abl e. D D The
var i abi l i ty i s pr obabl y m edi ated i n par t by al terati ons i n a var i ety of vasoacti ve m etabol i tes.
EE By usi ng an i n uter o pr eparati on to i nvesti gate the m etabol i c di f f er ences betw een f etuses
that do and do not r espond to l ung di stensi on al one, the pr ocesses r esponsi bl e f or an
i ncom pl ete decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance and thus f or the sy ndr om e of
per si stent pul m onar y hy per tensi on of the new bor n m ay be better el uci dated.
deter m i ne w hether venti l ati on and ox ygenati on of the f etal l ungs coul d cause thi s decr ease i n
r esi stance, w e studi ed chr oni cal l y i nstr um ented, near ter m sheep f etuses i n uter o. D In 16 f etuses, w e
m easur ed vascul ar pr essur es and i njected radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es to deter m i ne pul m onar y
bl ood f l ow. E We f ound that venti l ati on of the f etal l ungs w i th a gas m i x tur e that pr oduced no changes
i n ar ter i al bl ood gases caused a l ar ge but var i abl e i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, to 401% of
contr ol , no change i n pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e, and a doubl i ng of l ef t atr i al pr essur e. F Thus,
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f el l dram ati cal l y, to 34% of contr ol . G Ox ygenati on
caused a m odest
f ur ther i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and a decr ease i n m ean pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e, so that
r esi stance f el l to 10% of contr ol . H Cor d occl usi on caused no f ur ther changes i n vascul ar pr essur es or
bl ood f l ow, so r esi stance r em ai ned si m i l ar to ox ygenati on l evel s (11% of contr ol ). I The f etuses
appear ed to f al l i nto 2 gr oups w i th r espect to thei r r esponse to venti l ati on: 8 of the 16 devel oped near
m ax i m al i ncr eases i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng venti l ati on w i thout ox ygenati on, and the other 8
devel oped an average of onl y 20% of the
P. 326
m ax i m al i ncr ease i n bl ood f l ow dur i ng venti l ati on. J We coul d f i nd no di f f er ences i n the 2 gr oups of
f etuses to ex pl ai n thei r di f f er ent r esponses. K We concl ude that the changes i n pul m onar y vascul ar
r esi stance and bl ood f l ow that occur at bi r th can be achi eved by i n uter o venti l ati on and ox ygenati on.
L Mor eover, m uch of the vasodi l ator y r esponse can be achi eved w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 .
M Investi gati ngthe m etabol i c di f f er ences betw een f etuses that do and do not r espond to venti l ati on
al one m ay hel p to def i ne the m etabol i c pr ocesses i nvol ved i n pul m onar y vasodi l ati on at bi r th.
Introduction
A In the ci r cul ati on of both f etuses and new bor ns, the m ai n r ol e of the r i ght ventr i cl e i s to del i ver
bl ood to the gas exchange ci r cul ati on f or uptake of ox ygen and r em oval of car bon di ox i de. B In the
f etus, thi s del i ver y i s achi eved by v i r tue of the pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance bei ng ver y hi gh. C Ri ght
ventr i cul ar output i s thus di ver ted away f r om the l ungs and towar d the pl acenta, thr ough the ductus
ar ter i osus (1–4). D Im m edi atel y at bi r th, as the l ungs becom e the or gan of gas exchange, pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance m ust f al l dram ati cal l y, al l ow i ng pul m onar y bl ood f l ow to i ncr ease and ox ygen
exchange to occur i n the l ungs. E If pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance does not f al l , the sy ndr om e of
per si stent pul m onar y hy per tensi on of the new bor n occur s, of ten l eadi ng to death.
F Whi ch of the m any events that occur at bi r th ar e r esponsi bl e f or the nor m al decr ease i n pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance i s not f ul l y under stood. G Thr ee m ajor events of the bi r th pr ocess that coul d be
r esponsi bl e ar e venti l ati on, or r hy thm i c gaseous di stensi on, of the f etal l ungs, ox ygenati on of the
l ungs, and occl usi on of the um bi l i cal cor d. H Tw o of these events—venti l ati on and ox ygenati on—have
been studi ed i n acutel y ex ter i or i zed f etal sheep. I Most of the studi es suggested that ox ygenati on
rather than venti l ati on of the f etal l ungs i s the m ajor event r esponsi bl e f or the decr ease i n pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance (5–10). J How ever, the m etabol i c ef f ects of acute anesthesi a and sur ger y m ay have
al ter ed the pul m onar y vascul ar r esponse i n these studi es, because thi s r esponse i s consi der ed to be at
l east par tl y m edi ated by vasoacti ve m etabol i tes. K Al though a change i n ox ygen or car bon di ox i de
concentrati on (11) or i nducti on of a gasl i qui d i nter f ace i n the al veol us (12) each m ay di r ectl y af f ect
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance, pr oducti on or i nhi bi ti on of var i ous m etabol i c agents pr obabl y pl ay s a
m ajor r ol e i n the pr of ound decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance at bi r th. L Al terati ons in
concentrati on of
P. 327
brady k i ni ns (10, 13), angi otensi n (14, 15), acety l chol i ne (16), and hi stam i ne (17, 18) have al l been
i nvesti gated, but m etabol i tes of arachi doni c aci d have been m ost ex tensi vel y studi ed and ar e
consi der ed to be the pr i nci pal agents i nvol ved. M Of the pr ostanoi ds, PGI 2 i s the m ost potent pul m onar y
vasodi l ator and i s pr oduced i n r esponse to br eathi ng (19) or m echani cal venti l ati on (20, 21).
N Conver sel y,l eukotr i enes ar e potent pul m onar y vasoconstr i ctor s (22–24), and i nhi bi ti on of l eukotr i ene
sy nthesi s dram ati cal l y augm ents pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i n f etal sheep (25).
O The pur pose of thi s study was to deter m i ne w hether the sequenti al ex posur e of the f etus to gaseous
venti l ati on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on coul d decr ease pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance to
l evel s seen at bi r th. P To r em ove the super i m posed ef f ects of acute anestheti c and sur gi cal str esses
and of other com ponents of the bi r th pr ocess, such as pr enatal hor m onal sur ges, l abor, del i ver y, and
col d ex posur e, w e studi ed near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o 2–3 day s af ter sur ger y.
1 Si x teen f etal sheep w er e studi ed at 134. 9 ± 1. 2 (SD) day s of gestati on (ter m i s about 145
day s). The f etuses w er e of nor m al w ei ght (3. 6 ± 0. 6 k g) and had nor m al bl ood gases (see
Resul ts) and hem ogl obi n concentrati ons (10. 9 ± 1. 6 g/dl ) at the onset of the study.
Surgic a l P re pa ra tion
2 The sur gi cal pr otocol has been descr i bed pr ev i ousl y (4, 26). Br i ef l y, the ew e under w ent a
m i dl i ne l apar otomy under spi nal (1% tetracai ne hydr ochl or i de) and suppl em ental i ntravenous
(ketam i ne hydr ochl or i de) anesthesi a. The f etus al so r ecei ved l ocal anesthesi a (0. 25% l i docai ne
hydr ochl or i de) f or each sk i n i nci si on. Thr ough a sm al l uter i ne i nci si on, the f etal hi nd l i m bs w er e
ex posed i ndi v i dual l y and pol y v i ny l catheter s w er e advanced to the descendi ng aor ta and i nf er i or
vena cava v i a each pedal ar ter y and vei n. Tw o catheter s w er e al so advanced i nto the m ai n
um bi l i cal vei n v i a a per i pheral tr i butar y l ocal i zed f r om the sam e uter i ne i nci si on. Thi s i nci si on
was cl osed af ter pl acem ent of a l ar ge pol y v i ny l catheter i n the am ni oti c cav i ty f or zer o pr essur e
r ef er ence. A second uter i ne i nci si on was then m ade over the l ef t chest. A l ef t l ateral thoracotomy
was per f or m ed and catheter s w er e pl aced i n the ascendi ng aor ta v i a the i nter nal thoraci c ar ter y
and di r ectl y i n the
P. 328
pul m onar y ar ter y and l ef t atr i um usi ng a needl ecannul a assem bl y (27). An 8F m ul ti pl e si dehol e
pol y v i ny l catheter was l ef t i n the pl eural cav i ty f or drai nage. The thoracotomy was cl osed and a
m i dl i ne i nci si on was m ade i n the neck . The trachea was ex posed and l i gated pr ox i m al l y, and an
endotracheal tube (4. 5 m m ID) was i nser ted di r ectl y and advanced to the r egi on of the car i na.
The tube was attached to tw o pi eces of 12F pol y v i ny l tubi ng v i a a Y connector and f i l l ed w i th
0. 9% N aCl sol uti on. One pi ece of tubi ng was seal ed and the other was connected to another pi ece
of 12F tubi ng that was pl aced i n the am ni oti c cav i ty, to al l ow f r ee drai nage of tracheal f l ui d
postoperati vel y. The neck i nci si on was cl osed. The um bi l i cal cor d was then l ocated and a si l i cone
r ubber bal l oon occl uder was pl aced ar ound i t, just di stal to the abdom en. Anti bi oti cs (400 m g of
k anamyci n sul f ate and 1 m i l l i on uni ts of peni ci l l i n G potassi um ) w er e i nsti l l ed i n the am ni oti c
cav i ty and 0. 9% war m ed sal i ne was added to r epl ace l oss of am ni oti c f l ui d. The uter i ne i nci si on
was cl osed. Al l vascul ar catheter s w er e f i l l ed w i th hepar i n sodi um (1000 uni ts/m l ), seal ed, and
ex ter i or i zed al ong w i th the other tubi ng to the l ef t f l ank of the ew e. The abdom i nal i nci si on was
cl osed i n l ayer s and the ew e was r etur ned to the cage f or r ecover y. Anti bi oti cs (400 m g of
k anamyci n sul f ate and 1 m i l l i on uni ts of peni ci l l i n G potassi um ) w er e adm i ni ster ed i ntravenousl y
to the ew e and i nto the am ni oti c cav i ty dai l y.
Study De s ign
3 Four ex per i m ents w er e per f or m ed i n the sequence pr esented bel ow. Each ex per i m ent was
per f or m ed at l east 15 m i nutes af ter pr essur es and bl ood gases had stabi l i zed.
Contr ol
4 The ew e was pl aced i n a study cage and al l ow ed f r ee access to al f al f a pel l ets and water. Dur i ng
al l 4 ex per i m ents, af ter vascul ar catheter s w er e connected to Statham P23Db strai ngauge
transducer s (Statham Instr um ents, Ox nar d, CA), pr essur es w er e r ecor ded conti nuousl y on a
di r ectw r i ti ng pol ygraph (Beck m an Instr um ents, San Jose, CA). For contr ol ex per i m ents, f etal
bl ood sam pl es w er e obtai ned f r om the ascendi ng aor ta f or deter m i nati on of pH, pCO 2 , and pO 2
(Cor ni ng 158 pH/bl ood gas anal y zer, Medf i el d, MA), and of hem ogl obi n concentrati on and
hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on (Radi om eter OSM2 hem ox i m eter, Copenhagen, Denm ar k ).
Radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es (sel ected f r om 5 7 Co, 5 1 Cr, 1 5 3 Gd, 1 1 4 In, 5 4 Mn, 9 5 N b, 1 1 3 Sn,
P. 329
15 µm i n di am eter, w er e then i njected i nto the i nf er i or vena cava w hi l e r ef er ence bl ood sam pl es
w er e w i thdraw n f r om the ascendi ng aor ta, descendi ng aor ta, and pul m onar y ar ter y at a rate of 4
m l /m i n. Fetal or m ater nal bl ood was then gi ven to r epl ace the bl ood l oss.
Venti l ati on
5 The 2 pol y v i ny l tubes connected to the tracheal tube w er e opened and the tracheal f l ui d was
al l ow ed to drai n by grav i ty. A m i x tur e of ni tr ogen, ox ygen, and car bon di ox i de was bal anced to
m atch the f etal bl ood gases obtai ned dur i ng the contr ol ex per i m ent. The gas m i x tur e was
appr ox i m atel y 92% ni tr ogen, 3% ox ygen, and 5% car bon di ox i de. Bef or e venti l ati on was begun,
thi s gas m i x tur e was br i ef l y al l ow ed to f l ow thr ough the pol y v i ny l tubi ng at a rate of about 10
L/m i n so that the f etus w oul d not be ex posed to hi gh concentrati ons of ox ygen at the onset of
venti l ati on. The tubi ng was then connected to a speci al l y desi gned r espi rator, and venti l ati on was
adjusted as descr i bed pr ev i ousl y (26). Venti l ator y setti ngs ar e pr esented i n Tabl e 1. Af ter
var i abl es stabi l i zed, bl ood sam pl es w er e obtai ned as f or the contr ol and tw o sets of radi onucl i de
l abel ed m i cr ospher es w er e i njected, one i nto the i nf er i or vena cava and the other i nto the l ef t
atr i um , dur i ng w i thdrawal of r ef er ence bl ood sam pl es as descr i bed f or the contr ol . Repl acem ent
bl ood was then i nf used i nto the f etus.
aDur i ng venti l ati on, f etuses r ecei ved a m i x tur e of ni tr ogen, ox ygen, and car bon di ox i de
bal anced to m atch thei r bl ood gases dur i ng the contr ol ex per i m ent.
b Data ar e m ean ± 1 SD f or the num ber of f etuses gi ven i n par entheses. Ther e w er e no
stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant di f f er ences betw een ex per i m ents f or any of the var i abl es.
c Pr essur es ar e r ef er enced to am ni oti c cav i ty pr essur e.
Ox y genati on
6 The gas m i x tur e was then changed to 100% ox ygen and venti l ati on was conti nued. Car bon
di ox i de was not added to the ox ygen because i ts addi ti on
P. 330
i n the f i r st f ew studi es i ncr eased f etal pCO 2 . Thi s i ncr ease pr obabl y occur r ed because pl acental
bl ood f l ow f el l dur i ng ox ygenati on (4), i m pai r i ng car bon di ox i de r em oval . Af ter var i abl es
stabi l i zed, m i cr ospher es w er e i njected i nto the i nf er i or vena cava and the l ef t atr i um , bl ood
sam pl es w er e obtai ned, and r epl acem ent bl ood was i nf used.
7 The bal l oon ar ound the um bi l i cal cor d was f ul l y i nf l ated to occl ude the um bi l i cal bl ood vessel s
and thus abol i sh pl acental bl ood f l ow (4). Af ter var i abl es stabi l i zed, the ex per i m ental pr otocol
was r epeated. In 4 of the 16 f etuses, cor d occl usi on coul d not be studi ed, because of a f aul ty
bal l oon i n 2 and the devel opm ent of pneum othoraces, w hi ch l ed to car di ovascul ar
decom pensati on, i n 2.
8 U pon com pl eti on of the l ast ex per i m ent, the ew e was k i l l ed by i njecti on of l ar ge doses of
sodi um pentobar bi tal and the f etus was r em oved f r om the uter us and w ei ghed. The l ungs w er e
r em oved f r om the car cass, and the l ungs and car cass w er e separatel y w ei ghed and pl aced i n
f or m al i n. They w er e then separatel y car boni zed i n an oven, gr ound i nto a coar se pow der, and
pl aced i n pl asti c v i al s to a uni f or m hei ght of 3 cm . Radi oacti v i ty of the l ungs and r ef er ence bl ood
sam pl es was counted i n a 1000channel m ul ti channel pul sehei ght anal y zer (N or l and, For t
Atk i nson, WI). Speci f i c acti v i ty of each i sotope w i thi n a sam pl e was cal cul ated by the l east
squar es m ethod (28).
Ca lc ula tions
9 Dur i ng the contr ol ex per i m ent, because ther e i s no l ef ttor i ght shunt thr ough the ductus
ar ter i osus (29), pul m onar y bl ood f l ow was m easur ed by i njecti ng m i cr ospher es i nto the i nf er i or
vena cava and w i thdraw i ng bl ood sam pl es f r om the pul m onar y ar ter y. Thi s i njecti on and
w i thdrawal techni que excl udes br onchi al f l ow. In 6 f etuses w e al so i njected m i cr ospher es i nto the
l ef t atr i um dur i ng the contr ol ex per i m ent. We f ound that br onchi al f l ow was r el ati vel y constant
and qui te sm al l , al way s l ess than 3% of com bi ned ventr i cul ar output. We then subtracted thi s
val ue f r om the pul m onar y bl ood f l ow m easur em ents i n the r em ai ni ng ex per i m ents.
10 U pon venti l ati on, pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f al l s and bl ood f l ow i ncr eases dram ati cal l y.
Thus, a l ef ttor i ght shunt thr ough the ductus ar ter i osus cannot be excl uded. To m easur e
pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i n the pr esence of a l ef ttor i ght shunt r equi r es a techni que that
deter m i nes the contr i buti on of
P. 331
l ef t ventr i cul ar output to pul m onar y bl ood f l ow. Ther ef or e, dur i ng venti l ati on, ox ygenati on, and
um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, w e i njected m i cr ospher es l abel ed w i th di f f er ent radi onucl i des
si m ul taneousl y i nto both the i nf er i or vena cava and the l ef t atr i um and cal cul ated pul m onar y
bl ood f l ow as the di f f er ence betw een com bi ned ventr i cul ar output and the sum of bl ood f l ow s to
the f etal body and pl acenta (4). Com bi ned ventr i cul ar output was cal cul ated as the sum of l ef t
and r i ght ventr i cul ar outputs. Bl ood f l ow s to f etal body and pl acenta w er e cal cul ated f r om the l ef t
atr i al i njecti ons and r ef er ence bl ood w i thdrawal s f r om the ascendi ng and descendi ng aor ta (4).
11 Pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance was cal cul ated as the di f f er ence betw een m ean pul m onar y
ar ter i al pr essur e and m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e di v i ded by pul m onar y bl ood f l ow. For the 6 f etuses
i n w hi ch w e w er e unabl e to m easur e l ef t atr i al pr essur e f or techni cal r easons, w e used the m ean
val ues obtai ned f r om the other f etuses dur i ng the sam e ex per i m ent.
Ana lys is of Da ta
12 In thi s study, w e assessed the sequenti al ef f ects of venti l ati on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal
cor d occl usi on. Deter m i nati on of thei r i ndependent ef f ects was not possi bl e because the or der of
the ex per i m ents coul d not be random i zed. One r eason i s that w e w er e concer ned that ox ygenati on
of the f etal l ungs m i ght i nduce m ul ti pl e and per haps i r r ever si bl e m etabol i c and hem ody nam i c
consequences, so that subsequent venti l ati on w i thout ox ygenati on coul d not be studi ed. Another
r eason i s that the um bi l i cal cor d cannot be occl uded bef or e ox ygenati on. Thus, the study desi gn
i s com posed of 4 sequenti al ex per i m ents, each ser v i ng as the contr ol f or the nex t. Data f r om
each of these ex per i m ents w er e anal y zed by the MannWhi tney U test, com par i ng onl y the data
obtai ned dur i ng one ex per i m ent w i th data obtai ned dur i ng the ex per i m ent i m m edi atel y pr ecedi ng
i t. Stati sti cal si gni f i cance was consi der ed pr esent w hen the P val ue was ≤ 0. 01. Al l data ar e
pr esented as m ean ± 1 SD.
Results
1 Sy stem i c ar ter i al bl ood gases and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on w er e nor m al i n the contr ol
ex per i m ent, and di d not change dur i ng venti l ati on al one (Tabl e 2). Ox ygenati on caused a l ar ge
i ncr ease i n pO 2 and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on, but di d not change pH or pCO 2 . Cor d occl usi on
di d not change these var i abl es si gni f i cantl y, but ther e was m uch gr eater var i abi l i ty
P. 332
i n pCO 2 and pH, pr obabl y because of the i nabi l i ty of som e f etuses to m ai ntai n adequate CO 2
exchange i n the l ungs, because of pul m onar y i m m atur i ty.
Va ria ble Control Ve ntila tion Ox yge na tion Cord Oc c lus ion
pH 7. 37 ± 0. 06 7. 35 ± 0. 07 7. 34 ± 0. 09 7. 29 ± 0. 15
(15) a (16) (16) (13)
(%)
a Data ar e m ean ± 1 SD f or f our sequenti al ex per i m ents on the num ber of f etal sheep
gi ven i n par entheses.
b Hgb O 2 sat., hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on.
* Si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent f r om the val ue dur i ng the i m m edi atel y pr ecedi ng ex per i m ent, P
≤ 0. 01.
2 Pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i n the contr ol ex per i m ent (33 ± 17 m l /m i n/k g f etal body w ei ght) was
si m i l ar to that pr ev i ousl y m easur ed i n chr oni cal l y i nstr um ented f etuses of si m i l ar gestati onal
ages (2, 3), consti tuti ng 9% of com bi ned ventr i cul ar output (Fi gur e 1). It i ncr eased dram ati cal l y
dur i ng venti l ati on al one, to 401% of contr ol val ues (133 ± 94 m l /m i n/k g f etal body w ei ght). The
var i abi l i ty of thi s i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow was m ar ked, how ever, w hi ch l ed us to
separate the f etuses i nto 2 gr oups, as descr i bed bel ow. Ox ygenati on i ncr eased pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow f ur ther, to a m ean of 623% of contr ol (206 ± 64 m l /m i n/k g f etal body w ei ght). U m bi l i cal
cor d occl usi on di d not cause any f ur ther change i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow (190 ± 69 m l /m i n/k g
f etal body w ei ght).
P. 333
3 Mean pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e was nor m al i n the contr ol ex per i m ent and di d not change
dur i ng venti l ati on (Tabl e 3). Ther e was a sm al l but si gni f i cant decr ease i n pr essur e dur i ng
ox ygenati on. Because thi s decr ease was si m i l ar to that seen i n m ean sy stem i c ar ter i al pr essur e,
i t can not be ex pl ai ned by par ti al cl osur e of the ductus ar ter i osus. Ther e was no f ur ther change i n
m ean pul m onar y or m ean sy stem i c ar ter i al pr essur e af ter um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on. Lef t atr i al
pr essur e coul d be m easur ed i n onl y 10 f etuses f or techni cal r easons. In associ ati on w i th the l ar ge
i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng venti l ati on al one, m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e doubl ed
(Tabl e 3). It di d not change f ur ther dur i ng ox ygenati on or cor d occl usi on. Pul m onar y vascul ar
r esi stance decr eased dram ati cal l y (to 34% of contr ol val ues) dur i ng venti l ati on al one (f r om 1. 93
± 1. 31 to 0. 66 ± 0. 90 m m Hg · m i n · k g/m l ), decr eased f ur ther dur i ng ox ygenati on (to 10% of
contr ol ; 0. 20 ± 0. 77 m m Hg · m i n · k g/m l ), and di d not change f ur ther af ter cor d occl usi on (11%;
0. 22 ± 0. 11 m m Hg · m i n · k g/m l ) (Fi gur e 2).
Sy stem i c ar ter i al
Fi gur e 2.
Pul m onar y
vascul ar
r esi stance
dur i ng
sequenti al
venti l ati on,
ox ygenati on,
and
um bi l i cal
cor d
occl usi on i n
the 16 f etal
sheep. Data
ar e m ean ±
1 SD. *P ≤
0. 001 v s.
the
ex per i m ent
i m m edi atel y
pr ecedi ng i t.
5 We ex am i ned the m easur ed var i abl es that coul d have caused thi s di spar i ty betw een the m ajor
and m i nor r esponder s (Tabl e 4). N one of those var i abl es show ed stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant
di f f er ences betw een the 2 gr oups (Tabl e 4). Indi ces of m atur i ty and postoperati ve stabi l i ty
(gestati onal age, w ei ght, and day s af ter sur ger y ), of i ni ti al pul m onar y vascul ar tone (contr ol pH
and bl ood
P. 335
gases and pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and pr essur e), of ventr i cul ar f uncti on (com bi ned ventr i cul ar
output), and of adequacy of al veol ar venti l ati on dur i ng ox ygenati on (bl ood gases and pul m onar y
bl ood f l ow dur i ng ox ygenati on) w er e r em ar k abl y si m i l ar. Adequacy of al veol ar venti l ati on dur i ng
venti l ati on al one (w i thout ox ygenati on) coul d not be assessed, al though ther e was no change i n
the m ethod of venti l ati on i n ei ther gr oup w hen ox ygenati on was establ i shed. Of those f etuses i n
w hi ch sex was r ecor ded, the m ajor i ty i n both gr oups w er e f em al e (6 of 7 of the m ajor
r esponder s, 4 of 6 of the m i nor r esponder s).
Contr ol
pH 7. 37 ± 0. 07 (8) 7. 39 ± 0. 03 (7)
Ox ygenati on
a Major r esponder s had i ncr eases i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow ≥ 50% of the cum ul ati ve
i ncr ease dur i ng the study. Mi nor r esponder s had i ncr eases < 50%.
b Data ar e m ean ± 1 SD f or the num ber of f etal sheep gi ven i n par entheses. N o
di f f er ence betw een gr oups was stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant.
Discussion
1 A Thr ee m ajor events of the bi r th pr ocess ar e venti l ati on, or r hy thm i c gaseous di stensi on of the
l ungs, ox ygenati on, and l oss of the um bi l i cal –pl acental ci r cul ati on. B We f ound that venti l ati on and
ox ygenati on together can account f or the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance, and thus f or
the l ar ge i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, that nor m al l y occur at bi r th. C Mor eover, on average,
near l y tw othi r ds of the i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow occur r ed dur i ng venti l ati on al one.
P. 336
2 D Our f i ndi ng that about tw othi r ds of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance occur s
dur i ng venti l ati on al one i s m uch l ar ger than the pr ev i ousl y accepted val ue of about onethi r d (6).
E The r eason w e f ound a l ar ger decr ease than pr ev i ousl y accepted m ay be that pr ev i ous studi es
w er e per f or m ed on acutel y ex ter i or i zed f etuses (5, 6, 8–10). F An acute str ess such as that
caused by the anesthesi a and sur ger y used to ex ter i or i ze a f etus can gr eatl y al ter pr oducti on and
i nhi bi ti on of var i ous m etabol i c agents. G Al ter ed m etabol i te pr oducti on and i nhi bi ti on coul d have
sl ow ed the rate of decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance dur i ng the second phase of the
decr ease (30) i n those studi es. H Ev i dence f or thi s possi bi l i ty i s that the pr ostagl andi n sy nthesi s
i nhi bi tor i ndom ethaci n has been show n to attenuate thi s sl ow second phase of the decr ease,
w hi ch l asts f or 10–20 m i nutes af ter the rapi d f i r st phase (30). I (In contrast, the f i r st phase, a
rapi d decr ease that l asts f or onl y 30 seconds, i s not al ter ed by i ndom ethaci n but m ay be al ter ed
by di r ect m echani cal ef f ects of venti l ati on: the establ i shm ent of a gasl i qui d i nter f ace i n the
al veol i m ay decr ease per i vascul ar pr essur es and thus di stend the sm al l ar ter i ol es and decr ease
r esi stance (30). ) J Fur ther ev i dence that pr ostagl andi n m etabol i tes ar e i m por tant i n the decr ease
of pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i s that pr ostagl andi n I 2 , a potent pul m onar y vasodi l ator, i s
pr oduced i n r esponse to ei ther m echani cal venti l ati on (20, 21) or br eathi ng (19) i n r ecentl y
del i ver ed f etal l am bs. K In addi ti on, the pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 1 , pr ostagl andi n D 2 , and
brady k i ni n and the i nhi bi ti on of l eukotr i enes C 4 and D 4 m ay af f ect pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance
(31). L Thus, the var i abl e but general l y l esser ef f ects of venti l ati on al one i n the pr ev i ous studi es
m ay be ascr i bed to the var i abl e ef f ects of the study pr otocol s on the m etabol i c m i l i eu of the
pul m onar y vascul ar bed.
3 M We al so f ound gr eat var i abi l i ty i n the r esponse of f etal pul m onar y bl ood f l ow to the ef f ects of
venti l ati on al one. N In onehal f of the f etuses, the m ean i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng
venti l ati on al one was m ax i m al , w her eas i n the other hal f i t was onl y about 20% of the cum ul ati ve
r esponse. O Inter esti ngl y, Cook et al . (11) f ound si m i l ar var i abi l i ty i n thei r study of ni tr ogen and
ai r venti l ati on: of the 6 f etuses studi ed, 2 show ed no ef f ect of ni tr ogen venti l ati on but a l ar ge
ef f ect upon changi ng to ai r, 2 show ed a sm al l ef f ect of ni tr ogen and a l ar ger r esponse to ai r, and
2 show ed a l ar ge i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng ni tr ogen venti l ati on w i th no f ur ther
change upon ex posur e to ai r. P To ex pl ai n these f i ndi ngs, Cook et al .
P. 337
noted that ni tr ogen had the gr eatest ef f ect on the sm al l est f etuses. Q How ever, w e w er e unabl e to
i denti f y the r easons f or the var i abi l i ty w e f ound. R It was not on a pur el y ar i thm eti c basi s. S That
f act, the 2 gr oups had r em ar k abl y si m i l ar pul m onar y bl ood f l ow s both dur i ng contr ol
m easur em ents and dur i ng venti l ati on w i th 100% ox ygen. U The gr oups w er e al so not di f f er ent i n
thei r overal l m atur i ty, w i th r espect to ei ther gestati onal age or w ei ght. V In addi ti on, di f f er ences
i n pO 2 w er e not r esponsi bl e f or the di f f er ences betw een m ajor and m i nor r esponder s, si nce both
dur i ng contr ol m easur em ents and dur i ng venti l ati on al one, the m i nor r esponder s w er e nei ther
m or e hy pox i c nor m or e hy per capni c than the m ajor r esponder s. W Lastl y, adequacy of al veol ar
venti l ati on was pr obabl y not r esponsi bl e f or the di f f er ence betw een the gr oups. X Al though w e
w er e not abl e to deter m i ne the adequacy of al veol ar venti l ati on dur i ng venti l ati on al one, dur i ng
ox ygenati on, pO 2 and pCO 2 val ues w er e si m i l ar i n the 2 gr oups, w i thout the m ethod of venti l ati on
hav i ng been changed i n ei ther gr oup.
4 Y The m ar ked di f f er ence betw een the pul m onar y vasodi l ator y r esponses of the 2 gr oups of
f etuses i s thus unex pl ai ned, but thi s di f f er ence m ay have i m por tant i m pl i cati ons f or f utur e
studi es. Z Fi r st, i t m ay be i m por tant i n uncover i ng the m etabol i c pr ocesses r esponsi bl e f or an
i ncom pl ete decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance at bi r th. AA Second, eval uati on of the
concentrati ons and f l uxes of the putati ve m etabol i c agents i nvol ved m ay dem onstrate di f f er ent
f ates of these agents i n m ajor and m i nor r esponder s. B B How ever, car ef ul eval uati on of l ung
m echani cs i s cr i ti cal i n f utur e studi es to ensur e that the di f f er ences betw een the r esponses of the
pul m onar y vascul ar bed ar e not caused sol el y by di f f er ences i n pul m onar y f uncti on. C C In thi s
r egar d, i t w oul d be of i nter est to deter m i ne w hether stati c gaseous di stensi on of the l ungs (that
i s, di stensi on w i thout venti l ati on) can i nduce a si m i l ar decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar
r esi stance. D D Stati c di stensi on does i ncr ease l ung com pl i ance i n f etal sheep (32) and has been
show n to decr ease pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance to som e degr ee i n acutel y ex ter i or i zed f etal
sheep (12).
5 EE In sum m ar y, the changes i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance and bl ood f l ow that ar e cr i ti cal to
the adaptati on of the f etus to the postnatal env i r onm ent can be achi eved by i n uter o venti l ati on
and ox ygenati on.
F F Mor eover, m uch of the vasodi l ator y r esponse can be achi eved w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 .
I I By usi ng an i n uter o pr eparati on to i nvesti gate the m etabol i c di f f er ences betw een f etuses that
do and do not r espond to venti l ati on al one, the pr ocesses r esponsi bl e f or the sy ndr om e of
per si stent pul m onar y hy per tensi on of the new bor n m ay be better el uci dated.
References
1. Reuss ML, Rudol ph AM. Di str i buti on and r eci r cul ati on of um bi l i cal and sy stem i c venous bl ood
f l ow i n f etal l am bs dur i ng hy pox i a. J Dev Phy si ol 1980;2:71–84.
2. Ander son DF, Bi ssonnette JM, Faber JJ, Thor nbur g KL. Central shunt f l ow s and pr essur es i n the
m atur e f etal l am b. Am J Phy si ol 1981; 241:H60–6.
3. Hey m ann MA, Cr easy RK, Rudol ph AM. Quanti tati on of bl ood f l ow patter ns i n the f oetal l am b i n
uter o. In: Foetal and neonatal phy si ol ogy : pr oceedi ngs of the Si r Joseph Bar cr of t centenar y
sy m posi um . Cam br i dge: Cam br i dge U ni ver si ty Pr ess, 1973:129–35.
4. Tei tel DF, Iwam oto HS, Rudol ph AM. Ef f ects of bi r thr el ated events on central bl ood f l ow
patter ns. Pedi atr Res 1987;22:557–66.
5. Lauer RM, Evans JA, Aok i H, Ki ttl e CF. Factor s contr ol l i ng pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n f etal
l am bs. J Pedi atr 1965;67:568–77.
6. Daw es GS, Mott JC, Wi ddi com be JG, Wyatt DG. Changes i n the l ungs of the newbor n l am b. J
Phy si ol 1953;121:141–62.
7. Daw es GS. The pul m onar y ci r cul ati on i n the f oetus and new bor n. In: Foetal and neonatal
phy si ol ogy : a com parati ve study of the changes at bi r th. Chi cago: Year book Medi cal Publ i sher s,
1968:79–90.
8. Cassi n S, Daw es GS, Mott JC, Ross BB, Strang LB. The vascul ar r esi stance of the f oetal and
new l y venti l ated l ung of the l am b. J Phy si ol 1964;171: 61–79.
9. Assal i N S, Ki r schbaum TH, Di l ts PV Jr. Ef f ects of hy per bar i c ox ygen on uter opl acental and f etal
ci r cul ati on. Ci r c Res 1968;22:573–88.
10. Hey m ann MA, Rudol ph AM, N i es AS, Mel m on KL. Brady k i ni n pr oducti on associ ated w i th
ox ygenati on of the f etal l am b. Ci r c Res 1969; 25:521–34.
11. Cook CD, Dr i nker PA, Jacobson HN , Lev i son H, Strang LB. Contr ol of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i n
the f oetal and new l y bor n l am b. J Phy si ol 1963;169:10–29.
12. Col ebatch HJH, Daw es GS, Goodw i n JW, N adeau RA. The ner vous contr ol of the ci r cul ati on i n
the f oetal and new l y ex panded l ungs of the l am b. J Phy si ol 1965;178:544–62.
13. Cam pbel l AGM, Cock bur n F, Daw es GS, Mi l l i gan JE. Pul m onar y vasoconstr i cti on i n asphy x i a
dur i ng cr ossci r cul ati on betw een tw i n f oetal l am bs. J Phy si ol 1967;192:111–21.
14. Hy m an A, Hey m ann M, Lev i n D, Rudol ph A. Angi otensi n i s not the m edi ator of hy pox i ai nduced
pul m onar y vasoconstr i cti on i n f etal l am bs [Abstract]. Ci r cul ati on 1975;52 (Suppl II):132.
15. Dav i dson D, Stal cup SA, Mel l i ns RB. Angi otensi nconver ti ng enzy m e acti v i ty and i ts m odul ati on
by ox ygen tensi on i n the gui nea pi g f etal pl acental uni t. Ci r c Res 1981;48:286–91.
P. 339
16. Lew i s AB, Hey m ann MA, Rudol ph AM. Gestati onal changes i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esponses i n
f etal l am bs i n uter o. Ci r c Res 1976; 39:536–41.
17. Cassi n S, Daw es GS, Ross BB. Pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and vascul ar r esi stance i n i m m atur e f oetal
l am bs. J Phy si ol 1964;171:80–9.
18. Goetzm an BW, Mi l stei n JM. Pul m onar y vascul ar hi stam i ne r eceptor s i n new bor n and young
l am bs. J Appl Phy si ol 1980;49:380–85.
19. Lef f l er CW, Hessl er JR, Gr een RS. The onset of br eathi ng at bi r th sti m ul ates pul m onar y
vascul ar pr ostacycl i n sy nthesi s. Pedi atr Res 1984;18: 938–42.
20. Lef f l er CW, Hessl er JR. Per i natal pul m onar y pr ostagl andi n pr oducti on. Am J Phy si ol
1981;241:H756–9.
21. Lef f l er CW, Hessl er JR, Ter ragno N A. Venti l ati oni nduced r el ease of pr ostagl andi nl i ke m ater i al
f r om f etal l ungs. Am J Phy si ol 1980; 238:H282–6.
22. Schr ei ber MD, Hey m ann MA, Soi f er SJ. The di f f er enti al ef f ects of l eukotr i ene C 4 and D 4 on the
pul m onar y and sy stem i c ci r cul ati ons i n new bor n l am bs. Pedi atr Res 1987;21:176–82.
23. Hand JM, Wi l l JA, Buck ner CK. Ef f ects of l eukotr i enes on i sol ated gui neapi g pul m onar y
ar ter i es. Eur J Phar m acol 1981;76:439–42.
24. Mor ganr oth ML, Stenm ar k KR, Zi r r ol l i JA, et al . Leukotr i ene C 4 pr oducti on dur i ng hy pox i c
pul m onar y vasoconstr i cti on i n i sol ated rat l ungs. Pr ostagl andi ns 1984;28:867–75.
25. Lebi doi s J, Soi f er SJ, Cl y m an RI, Hey m ann MA. Pi r i pr ost: a putati ve l eukotr i ene sy nthesi s
i nhi bi tor i ncr eases pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i n f etal l am bs. Pedi atr Res 1987;22:350–4.
26. Iwam oto HS, Tei tel DF, Rudol ph AM. Ef f ects of bi r thr el ated events on bl ood f l ow di str i buti on.
Pedi atr Res 1987;22:634–40.
27. Iwam oto HS, Rudol ph AM. Chr oni c r enal venous catheter i zati on i n f etal sheep. Am J Phy si ol
1983;245:H524–7.
28. Baer RW, Pay ne BD, Ver r i er ED, et al . Incr eased num ber of myocar di al bl ood f l ow
m easur em ents w i th radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es. Am J Phy si ol 1984;246:H418–34.
29. Assal i N S, Sehgal N , Marabl e S. Pul m onar y and ductus ar ter i osus ci r cul ati on i n the f etal l am b
bef or e and af ter bi r th. Am J Phy si ol 1962;202: 536–40.
30. Lef f l er CW, Ty l er TL, Cassi n S. Ef f ect of i ndom ethaci n on pul m onar y vascul ar r esponse to
venti l ati on of f etal goats. Am J Phy si ol 1978;234: H346–51.
31. Hey m ann MA. Contr ol of the pul m onar y ci r cul ati on i n the per i natal per i od. J Dev Phy si ol
1984;6:281–90.
32. Ikegam i M, Jobe A, Ber r y D, El k ady T, Pettenazzo A, Sei dner S. Ef f ects of di stenti on of the
pr eter m f etal l am b l ung on l ung f uncti on w i th venti l ati on. Am Rev Respi r Di s 1987;135:600–
6.
Back
Appendices
P. 340
Thi s book deal s w i th w hat a cl ear l y w r i tten bi om edi cal r esear ch paper l ook s l i ke w hen i t i s done.
Getti ng a paper i nto cl ear f i nal f or m i s another m atter. To hel p you m ove f r om a bl ank pi ece of
paper to a f i ni shed m anuscr i pt based on the pr i nci pl es i n thi s book , her e ar e a f ew suggesti ons.
Sur r ound your sel f w i th ever y thi ng you need to w r i te ef f i ci entl y (al l the data, draf ts of
f i gur es and tabl es, r ef er ences, com puter or paper, cof f ee, … ).
Deci de w hat jour nal you pl an to subm i t your paper to and tai l or the paper to that jour nal
and i ts r eader s, at l east appr ox i m atel y (f or ex am pl e, cl i ni cal jour nal , basi c r esear ch
jour nal , general jour nal ) (see Huth, Chap. 1).
Star ti ng i s the har dest par t. To get star ted, w r i te the easi est secti on f i r st. For m any author s, the
easi est secti on i s Methods. For ex am pl e, you m ay want to w r i te Methods and Resul ts f i r st, then
the Di scussi on, the Intr oducti on, and the r ef er ence l i st, then f i gur e l egends and f ootnotes f or
tabl es, and f i nal l y the abstract and the ti tl e. How ever, i t does not m atter w hat or der you w r i te
the paper i n. Al l that m atter s i s w hat the paper l ook s l i ke w hen i t i s f i ni shed, so do w hat w or k s
f or you.
You m ay not k now ex actl y w hat to say as you begi n. The ex act w or ds and even the ex act
sentences ar e not i m por tant at thi s stage. Say som ethi ng and
P. 341
then keep m ov i ng. As you w r i te, i deas w i l l com e to you. You can al way s cr oss out the f i r st
sentence or tw o or even the f i r st paragraph or tw o.
It i s a good i dea to f or m ul ate your answ er and your questi on bef or e you star t w r i ti ng because the
answ er and questi on ar e the touchstones agai nst w hi ch you deci de w hat i s i n the paper and w hat
i s out, and al so how to or gani ze. How ever, keep i n m i nd that your answ er i s l i kel y to evol ve as
you w r i te your Di scussi on. For ex am pl e, you m ay f i nd that you state the answ er one way at the
begi nni ng of the Di scussi on and another way at the end. That i s i n f act a gr eat benef i t of w r i ti ng
a paper —di scover i ng the pr eci se way to f or m ul ate the answ er. Once you have di scover ed your
answ er, r ew or d the questi on to m atch i t and then w r i te an Intr oducti on that l eads to that
questi on. If you cannot m anage al l thi s m atchi ng on the f i r st draf t, that i s OK. You can w or k on i t
i n the r ev i si ons.
When you w r i te the abstract, l ook at the way you stated the questi on and answ er i n the
Intr oducti on and Di scussi on. The statem ents of the questi on and answ er shoul d be the sam e i n
the abstract, so take the easy path—do not w r i te a new questi on and answ er f or the abstract; just
copy the ones you al r eady w r ote. Si m i l ar l y, w hen you w r i te the ti tl e, l ook at the questi on and
answ er. U se the sam e key ter m s. If you use a ver b i n the ti tl e, m ake i t the sam e ver b as i n the
answ er. But agai n, i f i t i s easi er f or you to w r i te w i thout l ook i ng at the r est of the paper, you can
do thi s m atchi ng dur i ng the r ev i si ons.
If i t hel ps you to w or k f r om an outl i ne, w hether i t i s shor t and si m pl e or l ong and com pl ex , do
so. If you cannot w or k f r om an outl i ne, do not. Do w hatever w or k s f or you. But do have som e
i dea, ei ther m ental or w r i tten, of w hat you ar e goi ng to say f i r st and w hat nex t bef or e you star t
to w r i te, par ti cul ar l y i n the Di scussi on.
To m ake w r i ti ng a paper l ess over w hel m i ng, thi nk of each secti on as a separate task . Once
Methods i s w r i tten, that i s one task done, etc. Al so, w r i te l ess. For ex am pl e, w r i te a one
paragraph Intr oducti on i f possi bl e, just 10 or 12 sentences. Tw enty sentences take l onger to
w r i te, and som e of them (the ones that r ev i ew the l i teratur e, f or ex am pl e) w i l l need to be
om i tted, so tr y to save your sel f the tr oubl e of w r i ti ng them i n the f i r st pl ace. Si m i l ar l y, i n the
Di scussi on, 6 or 7 paragraphs ar e of ten enough, so tr y not to w r i te 10 or 15. One unnecessar y
paragraph i s the paragraph of i ntr oducti on at the begi nni ng of the Di scussi on. For get that. Star t
by answ er i ng the questi on. How ever, i f i t i s easi er f or you to begi n the Di scussi on by r ew r i ti ng
the Intr oducti on, or to begi n the Resul ts by w r i ti ng “Fi gur e 1 show s,” do i t. You can al way s cr oss
them out l ater. The i m por tant thi ng on the f i r st draf t i s to keep goi ng.
Pr obabl y you w i l l need 4 or 5 day s to w r i te the f i r st draf t, so do not be di scouraged i f you cannot
f i ni sh i n one day. When you f i nd your sel f spi nni ng your w heel s af ter 3 or 4 hour s, stop, and star t
agai n the nex t day. If you f i nd your sel f spi nni ng your w heel s constantl y w hi l e w r i ti ng the f i r st
draf t, tr y tal k i ng i nto a cassette r ecor der i nstead of w r i ti ng.
P. 342
Bef or e subm i tti ng a paper, m ake one l ast check of thr ee detai l s that ar e f r equentl y over l ooked:
Does the answ er answ er the questi on, and do al l statem ents of the answ er and al l
statem ents of the questi on say the sam e thi ng?
Is the ani m al or popul ati on studi ed stated i n the ti tl e, the abstract, the questi on or the
ex per i m ental appr oach (Intr oducti on), Methods, Resul ts, the answ er or the si gnal of the
answ er (Di scussi on), and at l east the f i r st f i gur e l egend and the f i r st tabl e ti tl e?
P. 344
P. 345
Revisions of Exercises
CHAPTER 1
Pr eci se.
Si m pl e.
N ecessar y .
(Str unk and Whi te, II. 16, p. 21: U se def i ni te, speci f i c, concr ete l anguage. )
N ote that pr eci se, def i ni te, speci f i c, concr ete w or ds ev ok e a m ental i m age. For ex am pl e,
“dog” ev ok es m uch m or e of a m ental i m age than “ani m al ” does. Si m i l ar l y , “patter n of
di schar ge” ev ok es m uch m or e of a m ental i m age than “r esponse char acter i sti cs” does.
Wor ds that ev ok e m ental i m ages hel p m ak e w r i ti ng easy to r ead. Abstr acti ons (such as
“ani m al ” and “char acter i sti cs”) m ak e r eadi ng di f f i cul t.
2. 5? 7? 9?
POIN T: “Sev er al ” i s i m pr eci se. How l ong i s sev er al hour s? State the m ean or a r ange.
3. i ncr ease.
POIN T: A change coul d be ei ther an i ncr ease or a decr ease. Fr om the f i r st sentence w e
cannot tel l w hether the author m eant i ncr ease or decr ease. But f r om “f ur ther i ncr ease”
i n the nex t sentence w e can see that the change i n the f i r st sentence m ust hav e been
an i ncr ease. It i s cl ear est to w r i te “i ncr ease, ” not “change, ” i n the f i r st sentence.
4. i ncubated i n, gr ow n i n, bathed i n.
POIN T: “Ex posed to” i s i m pr eci se. How w er e the cel l s ex posed? U se a pr eci se ter m .
“Put i n” does not w or k her e because the cel l s pr obabl y w er e not added f or 48 h.
5. l am bs.
POIN T: Keep the nam e of the ani m al i n the r eader 's m i nd.
P. 346
6. pr evented, bl ocked.
7. of f set.
POIN T: “To r escue” m eans to f r ee f r om death or destr ucti on. An appr opr i ate use of
“r escue” i s to say that the phenoty pe i s r escued (f r om death or destr ucti on) by som e
ev ent i n the genoty pe. In Ex am pl e 6, an i nter v enti on pr ev ents a pr ocess (i t does not
r escue the pr ocess). In Ex am pl e 7, one substance of f sets the l ack of another substance
(i t does not r escue the l ack of another substance). “Rescue” i s an ex am pl e of a “buzz
w or d, ” that i s, a w or d that i s i n f ashi on. U si ng a buzz w or d show s that y ou bel ong to
the cl ub. It i s r easonabl e to use cur r ent ter m i nol ogy , i ncl udi ng buzz w or ds, but the
pr obl em w i th buzz w or ds i s that they ar e of ten i m pr eci se. So use buzz w or ds onl y i n
thei r pr eci se m eani ng.
POIN T: “Was associ ated w i th” i s i m pr eci se. It i ndi cates onl y that som e connecti on
ex i sts. If y ou can speci f y w hat the connecti on i s, y ou shoul d do so.
14. pl asm a that contai ned hepar i n, OR hepar i ni zed pl asm a, OR hepar i ncontai ni ng
pl asm a.
POIN T: “Wi th” i s the v aguest, m ost am bi guous w or d i n Engl i sh. Sentences 10–14
i l l ustr ate f i v e di f f er ent m eani ngs of “w i th”: addi ti on, ti m e, cause, suppor ti ng detai l ,
and com ponent, r especti v el y . Because “w i th” can m ean so m any di f f er ent thi ngs, i t i s
cl ear est to use a pr eci se ter m w henev er possi bl e. The r eader shoul d not hav e to guess
w hat y ou m ean. (N ote: “Wi th” does hav e l egi ti m ate uses. Its basi c m eani ng i s “i n the
com pany of , ” as i n “I w ent to the m ov i es w i th m y f r i ends. ” Another standar d m eani ng
of “w i th” i s “by the m eans or agency of , ” as i n “We m easur ed the desk w i th a r ul er . ” A
thi r d m eani ng of “w i th” i s “hav i ng as an attr i bute, ” as i n “pati ents w i th di abetes. ”
Fi nal l y , som e v er bs ar e f ol l ow ed by “w i th, ” f or ex am pl e, “suppl em ented w i th, ”
“com par ed w i th, ” “v enti l ated w i th. ”)
II. Wor ds i n sci enti f i c r esear ch paper s shoul d be SIMPLE. (Str unk and Whi te, V. 14, p. 76:
Avoi d f ancy w or ds. )
U se si m pl e w or ds.
The poi nt i s not that bi g, f ancy w or ds ar e bad and that l i ttl e, si m pl e w or ds ar e good. The
poi nt i s that y ou m ust use techni cal w or ds, and these tend to be bi g, f ancy , and heav y .
Ther ef or e, to k eep y our w r i ti ng f r om bei ng too heav y , choose si m pl e w or ds f or the r est of
the sentence. Si m pl e w or ds usual l y hav e f ew sy l l abl es. They ar e w or ds y ou w oul d say to a
chi l d. For ex am pl e, m ost peopl e w oul d not say “uti l i ze” to a chi l d; they w oul d say “use. ”
POIN T: In Ex am pl es 15–17, the techni cal ter m s (di al y si s, r epl i cati on, chr om osom es,
DNA pol y m er ases, tr ansacti ng f actor , GCr i ch sequences) ar e heav y and m ak e r eadi ng
sl ow . To k eep the sentence l i ght and r eadabl e, m ak e the other w or ds as si m pl e as
possi bl e. (N ote that
P. 347
“f em al e, ” “m al e, ” “f ol l ow i ng, ” “i ni ti ati on, ” “i ni ti ate, ” and “i ni ti al ” ar e not “bad w or ds”;
they ar e just unnecessar i l y f ancy i n these sentences. )
16. star t.
POIN T: If pol y m er ases “r estar t” r epl i cati on el sew her e (end of the sentence), they
pr esum abl y “star t” r epl i cati on her e.
17. a f i r st.
18. bef or e.
POIN T: “Bef or e” segr egati on i s used at the end of the sentence, so “bef or e” f or m ati on
can be used at the begi nni ng of the sentence.
POIN T: If the author i s w i l l i ng to say “r educe pai n” at the end of the sentence, he or
she shoul d be w i l l i ng to say “i ncr ease pai n, ” the si m pl e opposi te, at the begi nni ng of
the sentence. “Enhance” i s a buzz w or d. Its m eani ng i s v ague. Li k e “w i th, ” “enhance” i s
used f or a v ar i ety of m eani ngs and thus has al m ost no m eani ng i tsel f (see Exer ci se
1. 2).
POIN T: Ei ther use a si m pl er w or d than “subm odal i ti es, ” such as “subty pes” or
“f uncti ons, ” or si m pl i f y “som ati c sensor y subm odal i ti es” to “som ati c senses. ” The l i st
of senses poses an i nter esti ng pr obl em : si m pl e w or ds ar e av ai l abl e f or al l but one of
these senses (pr opr i ocepti on). Si m i l ar l y , com pl ex w or ds ar e av ai l abl e f or al l but one of
these senses (touch). It w oul d be best i f al l the senses coul d be nam ed by si m pl e
w or ds, but si nce they cannot, use as m any si m pl e w or ds as y ou can.
POIN T: Ev en though “per i k ar y a” and “hepatopetal l y ” ar e l egi ti m ate techni cal ter m s, the
si m pl er ter m s “cel l bodi es” and “tow ar d the l i v er ” can be used her e. Speci al i sts w i l l
not be i nsul ted by the use of the si m pl er ter m s, and peopl e f r om other f i el ds w i l l
under stand the si m pl er ter m s m or e r eadi l y than they w i l l the f ancy ones.
(Str unk and Whi te, II. 17, p. 23: Om i t needl ess w or ds. )
U se the f ew est w or ds possi bl e. The m or e noi se, the l ess m essage. How ev er , r em em ber that
br ev i ty i s not the f i r st pr i nci pl e of w or d choi ce; i t i s the thi r d pr i nci pl e. The poi nt i s to be as
br i ef as possi bl e consi stent w i th cl ar i ty . If i t tak es m or e w or ds to be cl ear , use m or e w or ds.
(For ex am pl e, see Chap. 2, “Av oi d N oun Cl uster s. ”)
26. Thi s i nhi bi ti on l eads to accum ul ati on of βcateni n i n the cy topl asm . OR Thi s
i nhi bi ti on l eads to a pool of βcateni n i n the cy topl asm .
P. 348
POIN T: A pool i s an accum ul ati on. Si nce “pool ” i s a si m pl er and m or e pi ctur esque w or d
than “accum ul ati on, ” “pool ” i s f i r st choi ce her e.
27. Both of these changes w er e gr eater w hen the per i car di um was cl osed.
POIN T: The r epeti ti on i n thi s sentence i s w or se than unnecessar y : i t i s conf usi ng. We
do not i m m edi atel y r ecogni ze that the under l i ned w or ds i n the or i gi nal second sentence
r ef er to the ef f ects descr i bed i n the pr ev i ous sentence. To i ndi cate to the r eader that
these ar e the sam e ef f ects, i t i s cl ear est to use a categor y ter m that encom passes both
decr eases and i ncr eases. The best categor y ter m her e i s “changes. ” In addi ti on, add
“these” to i ndi cate that y ou m enti oned the changes i n the pr ev i ous sentence.
Abbr ev i ati ons ar e decepti ve. They m ake r eadi ng easi er i f you k now them al r eady. If the
abbr ev i ati ons ar e new to you, they m ake r eadi ng a chor e. Si nce a si zabl e per centage of your
r eader s m ay not r ecogni ze the abbr ev i ati ons (f or ex am pl e, r eader s w hose f i r st l anguage i s not
Engl i sh, or graduate students and other s new to the f i el d), you shoul d keep abbr ev i ati ons to a
m i ni m um . Reader s can usual l y handl e tw o or thr ee abbr ev i ati ons per paragraph (and thr oughout
the paper ). Ten abbr ev i ati ons (as i n Ex am pl e 28) ar e an over l oad. So tr y to avoi d abbr ev i ati ons,
especi al l y nonstandar d ones.
To avoi d “Gr oup A,” tr y to use a character i sti c to nam e the gr oup, f or ex am pl e “the hy potensi ve
gr oup.”
When i nventi ng new w or ds, tr y to i nvent shor t ter m s that do not need to be abbr ev i ated. For
ex am pl e, “endor phi ns,” was a good choi ce—f ar better than “opi ate r eceptor bl ocker s” w oul d have
been.
P. 349
2. concentrati on.
COMMEN T: “Lev el ” i s m or e gener al than “am ount, ” “concentr ati on, ” and “content. ” It i s OK to
use “l ev el ” i nstead of “am ount, ” “concentr ati on, ” or “content” i f y ou hav e onl y one k i nd of
l ev el i n y our paper , but i f y ou hav e, f or ex am pl e, both am ounts and concentr ati ons, or i f
y ou use “l ev el ” to m ean “hor i zontal state or l i ne, ” w r i te the speci f i c ter m s ev er y ti m e.
4. i ncr eases.
5. i m pr oved.
6. speeds.
9. i s.
CHAPTER 2
COMMEN T: N ote that the subject, v er b, and com pl eter i n the r ev i sed sentence gi v e m or e of
the m essage than do the subject, v er b, and com pl eter of the or i gi nal sentence:
“concentr ati on w as al m ost doubl e” v er sus “adul ts ended di al y si s. ” Al so note that the sam e
pr eposi ti on (“i n”) i s used bef or e “adul ts” and “chi l dr en”; “of ” coul d be used i nstead of “i n. ”
Fi nal l y , i f both the adul ts and the chi l dr en under w ent di al y si s, that f act i s cl ear est i f “at the
end of di al y si s” com es at the begi nni ng of the sentence, because a condi ti on hol ds unti l y ou
change i t (see Chap. 3, “The Durati on of a Si gnal ” under “Si gnal i ng the Subtopi cs of a
Paragraph”).
6. Potassi um per chl orate w a s re move d by centr i f ugati on of the super natant l i qui d at 1400 × g
f or 10 m i n. (passi v e)
We re move d potassi um per chl or ate by centr i f ugi ng the super natant l i qui d at 1400 × g f or 10
m i n. (one w ay to use “w e”)
To r em ove potassi um per chl orate, w e c e ntrifuge d the super natant l i qui d at 1400 × g f or 10
m i n. (another w ay to use “w e”)
COMMEN T: “By ” i m pl i es that the m achi ne m ade the m easur em ent unassi sted. “Wi th” i m pl i es
that the i nv esti gator m ani pul ated the m achi ne.
P. 350
8. The l i ves of ur em i c pati ents ha ve be e n prolonge d by i m pr oved conser vati ve tr eatm ent and
hem odi al y si s.
U r em i c pati ents live longe r because of i m pr oved conser vati ve tr eatm ent and hem odi al y si s.
Im pr oved conser vati ve tr eatm ent and hem odi al y si s ha ve prolonge d the l i v es of ur em i c
pati ents.
9. Mi nute venti l ati on and r espi rator y f r equency inc re a s e d abr uptl y i n al l dogs as exer ci se
began.
Exer ci se inc re a s e d m i nute v enti l ati on and r espi r ator y f r equency abr uptl y i n al l dogs.
COMMEN T: N ot “Al l dogs inc re a s e d thei r m i nute v enti l ati on and r espi r ator y f r equency
abr uptl y as ex er ci se began, ” because “dogs” i s not the topi c.
10. COP1 w a s ina c tiva te d by l i ght bef or e i t w a s de ple te d f r om the nucl eus.
11. When a par ti al l y pur i f i ed TFIIH f racti on w a s immunopre c ipita te d w i th AbERCC2 under
m edi um hi gh sal t condi ti ons (0. 5 M KCl ), a tr i pl et…
16. N eur ons f r om hom ozygous p53k nockout m i ce w e re re s is ta nt to neur onal apoptosi s i nduced
by a var i ety of neur onal tox i ns.
18. These agents a c t by inhibiting the sy nthesi s of chol ester ol by the l i ver.
These agents inhibit the sy nthesi s of chol ester ol by the l i ver. (sl i ghtl y di f f er ent m eani ng)
19. Thi s net di f f er ence i n osm ol ar i ty forc e s (OR drive s , s hifts , dra w s ) water i nto the
cer ebr ospi nal f l ui d, thus inc re a s ing pr essur e.
Thi s net di f f er ence i n osm ol ar i ty inc re a s e s pr essur e by dra w ing water i nto the
cer ebr ospi nal f l ui d.
Because of thi s net di f f er ence i n osm ol ar i ty, water flow s i nto the cer ebr ospi nal f l ui d, thus
inc re a s ing pr essur e.
Dr i ven by thi s di f f er ence i n osm ol ar i ty, water flow s i nto the cer ebr ospi nal f l ui d, thus
inc re a s ing pr essur e.
20. Recentl y, ev i dence that l i ght c ontrols the i m por t of a potenti al transcr i pti on f actor i nto the
nucl eus has been pr ov i ded.
Recentl y, l i ght ha s be e n found to c ontrol the i m por t of a potenti al transcr i pti on f actor i nto
the nucl eus.
21. A capsul e of amy l ni tr i te was cr ushed and hel d i n f r ont of the nose f or 20 s w hi l e the pati ent
bre a the d nor m al l y.
COMMEN T: “Whi l e nor m al r espi r ati on w as m ai ntai ned” i s not as good; too abstr act.
22. Cal ci um i s transl ocated acr oss the m em brane as a phosphor y l ated enzy m e i nter m edi ate is
forme d. Then cal ci um i s r el eased i nto the l um en as the phosphor y l ated enzy m e
i nter m edi ate is de c ompos e d i nto the unphosphor y l ated enzy m e and ADP pl us phosphate.
P. 351
Cal ci um i s transl ocated acr oss the m em brane w hen an enzy m e is phos phoryla te d. Then
cal ci um i s r el eased i nto the l um en w hen the enzy m e is de phos phoryla te d.
COMMEN T: The sour ce of the pr obl em i n both sentences 21 and 22 i s the w or d “w i th. ” The
sol uti on i n both sentences i s to add a v er b. For Ex am pl e 22, the second r ev i si on i s best, f or
f our r easons. It puts the r eal acti on i n the v er bs (“phosphor y l ated, ” “dephosphor y l ated”). It
uses par al l el f or m (see Chaps. 2 and 3. ) It puts the contr asti ng v er bs at the end of each
sentence, w hi ch i s a pow er posi ti on (see Em phasi s, Chap. 3). It om i ts unnecessar y w or ds. If
i t i s i m por tant to m enti on ADP, y ou can add “, thus r el easi ng ADP” at the end of the second
sentence.
24. Geneti c w or k i n C. el egans show ed that i ts BCL2 hom ol og re gula te s cel l death.
2. Inter f er ence patter ns i nduced by DN Aase I ni ck i ng cor r espond pr eci sel y to i nter f er ence
patter ns i nduced by ethy l ati on f or both of the 10bp sequences.
3. The pr eci pi tate was f ur ther pur i f i ed by bei ng centr i f uged on sucr ose densi ty gradi ents (OR
on densi ty gradi ents m ade of sucr ose).
COMMEN T: Al though “sucr ose densi ty gr adi ents” i s an accepted techni cal ter m , i t i s cl ear er
to w r i te i t the l ong w ay (“densi ty gr adi ents m ade of sucr ose”) the f i r st ti m e and then to use
the cl uster . The sam e i s tr ue f or “sucr ose densi ty gr adi ent centr i f ugati on. ”
COMMEN T: N ot “pH Regul ati on” because thi s cl uster coul d m ean ei ther r egul ati on of the pH
or r egul ati on by the pH.
OR c rude homoge na te s .
6. T 4 sti m ul ated i ncor porati on of chol i ne i nto prima ry c ulture s of f etal l ung cel l s i n prima ry
c ulture .
COMMEN T: N ot “pr i m ar y cel l cul tur es” because then ei ther the cel l s or the cul tur es coul d be
pr i m ar y . “Fetal l ung cel l s” i s OK because i f the l ungs ar e f etal , the cel l s m ust be f etal , and
v i ce v er sa.
8. Ser um sam pl es f r om heal thy s ubje c ts and f r om pa tie nts w ho had ul cer ati v e col i ti s w er e
studi ed by (OR w i th) paper el ectr ophor esi s.
9. Ther e was no si gni f i cant di f f er ence betw een l actate c onc e ntra tions i n r esti ng s ubje c ts and
i n ex er ci si ng s ubje c ts .
P. 352
COMMEN T: The or i gi nal sentence i s an ex am pl e of str i ngi ng i deas together . The i deas ar e l i nk ed
by “i n addi ti on to” and “w hi ch. ” The r ev i si on, w hi ch i s 4 w or ds l onger than the or i gi nal , star ts
new sentences at these l i nk s.
Example 2
To i denti f y m ast cel l s, an adjacent secti on was stai ned w i th al ci an bl ue. The stai ni ng show s that
several m ast cel l s ar e l ocated i n the m edi a and adventi ti a r egi on of the i ntram ural ar ter i ol e.
How ever, the num ber of al ci anbl uestai ni ng cel l s i s l ow er than the num ber of cel l s that ar e
posi ti ve f or chy m ase m RN A show n i n Fi g. 5B.
COMMEN T: The or i gi nal sentence contai ns an em bedded i dea (“but not the num ber equi v al ent to
the num ber of chy m ase m RN A posi ti v e cel l s i n Fi g. 5B”). In the r ev i si on, the em bedded i dea i s
put i nto a separ ate sentence (l ast sentence) and i s r ew r i tten to cl ar i f y the com par i son. In
addi ti on, the r ev i si on uses a m or e pr eci se w or d (“ar e l ocated”) and untangl es the noun cl uster
(“chy m ase m RN A posi ti v e cel l s”). Thi s r ev i si on, w hi ch i s 10 w or ds l onger than the or i gi nal
sentence, show s that som eti m es i t i s necessar y to add w or ds to be cl ear .
Example 3
A tem poral and spati al r el ati onshi p betw een l i pi d per ox i dati on and ty pe I col l agen ex pr essi on has
been descr i bed i n stel l ate cel l s. Thi s r el ati onshi p has been cor r el ated w i th an i n v i tr o m odel of
cocul tur e betw een stel l ate cel l s and hepatocy tes. In thi s m odel , af ter addi ti on of LCL 4 , col l agen i s
ex pr essed i n stel l ate cel l s l ocated near the stel l ate cel l hepatocy te boundar y but not i n di stant
cel l s or i n stel l ate cel l s cul tur ed al one.
COMMEN T: In the or i gi nal sentence, str i ngi ng i deas together cr eates a near l y i ncom pr ehensi bl e
sentence. The r ev i si on br eak s the sentence i nto thr ee shor ter sentences. It al so shor tens the l ast
sentence by om i tti ng unnecessar y w or ds (“near ” i nstead of “i n the i m m edi ate v i ci ni ty of ”), thus
m ak i ng the r ev i si on 4 w or ds shor ter than the or i gi nal sentence.
P. 353
To decr ease bl ood vol um e by about 10% i n a f ew m i nutes, bl ood was pool ed i n the subjects'
l egs by i nf l ati ng w i de congesti ng cuf f s, pl aced ar ound the thi ghs, to the di astol i c pr essur e of
the brachi al ar ter y.
Thi s sel ecti ve r educti on of apol i popr otei n AI suggests that… .
COMMEN T: These r ev i si ons ar e i n or der of l east to m ost speci f i c. The l ast r ev i si on i s best
because tw o k ey ter m s f r om the pr ev i ous sentence ar e r epeated (“apol i popr otei n AI” and
“r educed”). (See Chap. 3, “Repeati ng Key Ter m s. ”) “These f i ndi ngs suggest that” i s too
v ague to be hel pf ul .
How ever, the si ze of the bol us i s l i m i ted because l ar ge bol uses ar e har der to adm i ni ster and
pati ents do not tol erate them w el l .
COMMEN T: The f i r st r ev i si on i s the one the author i ntended, but any of the r ev i si ons i s
r easonabl e. The l ast r ev i si on i s l i ghter and easi er to r ead than the other s because the acti on
i s ex pr essed by v er bs and an adjecti v e (“ar e har der , ” “tol er ate”).
2. Lef t ventr i cul ar f uncti on was i m pai r ed i n the dogs that r ecei ved endotox i n and i n the contr ol
dogs.
3. Pul sati on of the cel l s or cel l m asses can be qui ck and er rati c or sl ow and r egul ar .
4. Wher eas epi dural adm i ni strati on of f entany l at a rate of 20 µg/h r educed the r equi r em ent f or
pati entcontr ol l ed bupi vacai ne, i ntravenous adm i ni strati on of f entany l (20 µg/h) or pl acebo
di d not.
COMMEN T: U si ng par al l el f or m f or these par al l el i deas al l ow s y ou to av oi d r epeti ti on af ter
“di d not. ”
5. The tubes w er e spun on a Vor tex m i xer f or 10 s, stor ed at 4°C f or 2 h, and then centr i f uged
at 500 × g f or 10 m i n.
6. Tracheal gangl i on cel l s have been cl assi f i ed on the basi s of thei r spontaneous di schar ge
(12), thei r el ectr i cal pr oper ti es (5), and the pr esence or absence of vasoacti ve i ntesti nal
pepti de (8).
Tracheal gangl i on cel l s have been cl assi f i ed on the basi s of thr ee pr oper ti es: spontaneous
di schar ge (12), el ectr i cal character i sti cs (5), and vasoacti ve i ntesti nal pepti de content (8).
7. Pheny l ephr i ne i ncr eased the rate of m ucus secr eti on and the output of nondi al y zabl e 3 5 S; it
al so caused a net transepi thel i al m ovem ent of N a towar ds the m ucosa.
Pheny l ephr i ne i ncr eased the rate of m ucus secr eti on, i ncr eased the output of nondi al y zabl e
3 5 S, and caused a net transepi thel i al m ovem ent of N a towar ds the m ucosa.
8. The f racti ons w er e centr i f uged, the pel l ets w er e r esuspended i n a sm al l vol um e of buf f er,
and a sam pl e of cel l s was counted i n an el ectr oni c cel l counter.
P. 354
9. Even the hi ghest dose of atr opi ne had no ef f ect ei ther on basel i ne pul se rate or on the
vagal l y sti m ul ated pul se rate.
Even the hi ghest dose of atr opi ne had no ef f ect on pul se rate ei ther dur i ng basel i ne or
dur i ng vagal sti m ul ati on.
11. An i m pul se f r om the vagus ner ve to the m uscl e has to travel both thr ough gangl i a and and
thr ough postgangl i oni c pathway s.
COMMEN T: “Thr ough both gangl i a and postgangl i oni c pathw ay s” i s theor eti cal l y OK but
undesi r abl e her e because “thr ough both gangl i a” coul d i m pl y tw o gangl i a.
12. The i nter nal pr essur e m ust depend not onl y on vol um e but al so on the rate of f i l l i ng.
Total m i cr ospher e l osses at 34, 64, and 124 m i n w er e gr eater than those at 4 m i n.
3. We f r equentl y obser ved that m ean cor onar y ar ter i al pr essur e was l ow er than m ean aor ti c
pr essur e af ter car bochr om en i njecti on. (m ay be nei ther decr eased)
We f r equentl y obser ved a decr ease i n m ean cor onar y ar ter i al pr essur e but not i n m ean
aor ti c pr essur e af ter car bochr om en i njecti on. (one decr eased)
We f r equentl y obser ved a gr eater decr ease i n m ean cor onar y ar ter i al pr essur e than i n m ean
aor ti c pr essur e af ter car bochr om en i njecti on. (both decr eased)
4. The l oss of apol i popr otei n AI f r om hi ghdensi ty l i popr otei ns dur i ng ul tracentr i f ugati onal
i sol ati on w a s gre a te r tha n the l osses dur i ng other i sol ati on m ethods.
5. Losses of apol i popr otei n AI dur i ng other i sol ati on m ethods w e re s ma lle r tha n l osses dur i ng
ul tracentr i f ugati on.
6. The pr otei n com posi ti on of heav y m er omyosi n, lik e that of subf ragm ent 1, was
hom ogeneous.
Lik e the pr otei n com posi ti on of subf ragm ent 1, the pr otei n com posi ti on of heav y
m er omyosi n was hom ogeneous.
CHAPTER 3
The topi c sentence i s about the tw o doses. The m essage (tw o doses) i s i n the com pl eter , at
the end of the sentence.
A tr ansi ti on i s added at the begi nni ng of sentence D to back tr ack to the ear l i er steps.
Revision 2
A Tw o di f f er ent doses of capsai ci n w er e i njected i nto each gui nea pi g. B The f i r st dose, 20 m g/k g,
was i njected N m i n af ter pentobar bi tal (30 m g/k g i . p. ) was i njected to i nduce anesthesi a and 10
m i n af ter sal butam ol (0. 6 m g/k g) was i njected to counteract r espi rator y i m pai r m ent caused by
capsai ci n. C The second dose of capsai ci n, 30 m g/k g, was i njected 2 h l ater, af ter addi ti onal
adm i ni strati on of pentobar bi tal (10–20 m g/k g i . p. ) and sal butam ol . D For each dose, capsai ci n was
pr epar ed as a 12. 5% sol uti on i n equal par ts of 95% ethanol and Tw een80, di l uted to 25 m g/m l
w i th sal i ne. E Contr ol gui nea pi gs under w ent the sam e pr ocedur e except that vehi cl e was
substi tuted f or capsai ci n.
The topi c sentence i s about the tw o doses. The m essage (tw o doses) i s i n the subject, at the
begi nni ng of the sentence.
The m essage, not the topi c, i s the subject; the acti on i s i n the v er b.
Detai l s of the sol uti on (l east i m por tant) ar e i n a separ ate sentence near the end of the
par agr aph.
Revision 3
A Capsai ci n was i njected subcutaneousl y i nto each gui nea pi g i n tw o consecuti ve doses. B Bef or e
the f i r st dose, pentobar bi tal (30 m g/k g i . p. ) was gi ven to anestheti ze the gui nea pi g, and then
sal butam ol (0. 6 m g/k g s. c. ) was gi ven to pr event apnea. C Ten m i nutes l ater, 20 m g/k g capsai ci n
was i njected. D Bef or e
the second dose, gi ven 2 h l ater, the sam e pr otocol was f ol l ow ed except
the gui nea pi g r ecei ved a l ow er dose of pentobar bi tal (10–20 m g/k g) and a hi gher dose of
capsai ci n (30 m g/k g). E Contr ol gui nea pi gs under w ent the sam e pr ocedur e w i th vehi cl es.
The topi c sentence i s about the tw o doses. The m essage (tw o doses) i s i n the com pl eter , at
the end of the sentence.
To k eep attenti on on the m ai n poi nt (the tw o doses of capsai ci n), the w or d “dose” i s added
i n a tr ansi ti on at the begi nni ng of sentences B and D.
Shor t sentence C em phasi zes the i m por tant detai l (f i r st dose of capsai ci n).
In sentence D, “a hi gher dose” em phasi zes the di f f er ence betw een the doses of capsai ci n.
P. 356
Revision 1
Revision 2
A The dy nam i c bi ndi ng capaci ty of a pr otei n on chr om atographi c r esi ns depends on l i near vel oci ty ,
bed l ength, bi ndi ng k i neti cs, and the phy si cal and chem i cal pr oper ti es of the r esi n. B Thi s dy nam i c
bi ndi ng capaci ty c a n be me a s ure d by a s s e s s ing the s ha pe of br eak thr ough cur ves at di f f er ent
l i near vel oci ti es and bed l engths. C The shape of the bre a k through c urve f or l ar ge m ol ecul es
such as pr otei ns m ay var y consi derabl y as l i near vel oci ty and bed l ength ar e changed.
COMMEN TS
In Rev i si on 2, the conti nui ty betw een sentences A and B i s str onger than i n Rev i si on 1 because
“dy nam i c bi ndi ng capaci ty ” i s r epeated at the begi nni ng of sentence B, as the subject of the
sentence. In Rev i si on 1, an aspect of “dy nam i c bi ndi ng capaci ty ” (“m ethod of m easur i ng”) i s at
the begi nni ng of the sentence.
For str onger conti nui ty betw een sentences B and C, the k ey ter m “shape” i s added to sentence B
i n both r ev i si ons. In addi ti on, i n the second r ev i si on, the k ey ter m s “shape of the br eak thr ough
cur v e” ar e r epeated at the begi nni ng of sentence C.
P. 357
Because of these tw o changes—r epeati ng the k ey ter m “dy nam i c bi ndi ng capaci ty ” ear l y i n
sentence B and addi ng the k ey ter m “shape” to sentence B—the conti nui ty betw een sentence B
and the sentences bef or e and af ter i t i s cl ear er .
EXAMPLE 2
Revision 1
A Tra ns c ription of the aci d phosphatase PHO5 i n the yeast Sacchar om y ces cer ev i si ae i s acti vated
by a transcr i pti on f actor encoded by the PHO4 gene. B Whether transcr i pti on i s acti vated depends
on ex tracel l ul ar phosphate l evel s. C When yeast cel l s ar e gr ow n i n m edi um contai ni ng hi gh
phosphate l evel s, PHO4 i s i n the cy topl asm and does not acti vate transcr i pti on of PHO5. D When
yeast cel l s ar e star ved f or phosphate, PHO4 enter s and i s re ta ine d i n the nucl eus, w her e, i n
conjuncti on w i th a second transcr i pti on f actor cal l ed PHO2, i t acti vates transcr i pti on of PHO5. E It
i s not k now n how PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus under l ow phosphate condi ti ons. F One
hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus by bi ndi ng to the nucl ear pr otei n PHO2.
G Another hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus by bi ndi ng to DN A. H To test the f i r st
hy pothesi s, w e ar e ex am i ni ng the subcel l ul ar l ocal i zati on of PHO4 i n a strai n f r om w hi ch PHO2
has been del eted. I Pr el i m i nar y r esul ts suggest that binding to P HO2 is not the w a y P HO4 is
re ta ine d in the nuc le us under l ow phosphate condi ti ons. J To test the second hy pothesi s, w e ar e
generati ng a m utant ver si on of PHO4 f r om w hi ch the DN A bi ndi ng dom ai n has been del eted. K Thi s
PHO4 m utant w i l l be i ntr oduced i nto yeast and i ts subcel l ul ar l ocal i zati on w i l l be deter m i ned.
2. The poi nt that acti v ati on of tr anscr i pti on depends on ex tr acel l ul ar phosphate l ev el s
(sentence B) i s pl aced af ter the poi nt about how tr anscr i pti on of PHO5 i s acti v ated (A).
Thus, the suppor ti ng sentences C and D com e r i ght af ter the topi c sentence they suppor t
(B), and the k ey ter m “phosphate l ev el s” i n C r epeats “phosphate l ev el s” i n B.
4. The tw o hy potheses ar e w r i tten one af ter the other , they ar e stated pr eci sel y , and the sam e
k ey ter m s ar e used i n both. In addi ti on, the k ey ter m “hy pothesi s” i s used to i denti f y both.
In sentence F, the k ey ter m “PHO2” i s i denti f i ed as a nucl ear pr otei n to pr ov i de conti nui ty
w i th sentence E. The techni que i s l i nk i ng k ey ter m s (the categor y ter m “nucl ear pr otei n, ”
w hi ch now appear s bef or e “PHO2, ” l i nk s to “nucl eus” i n E).
5. In sentence I, “i nter acti on” i s changed to “bi ndi ng. ” “Local i zati on” i s changed to “r etai ned. ”
(Actual l y , the enti r e subject, v er b, and com pl eter ar e changed. )
6. Or i gi nal sentence J (the second possi bi l i ty ) i s om i tted because the second hy pothesi s i s
stated i n sentence G.
Revision 2
Rev i si on 2 i s the sam e as Rev i si on 1 ex cept that sentence F bel ow r epl aces sentences F and G
(both hy potheses i n one sentence), and the begi nni ng of sentences H and J ar e m ade m or e
speci f i c, as show n bel ow .
F The ex pl anati on m ay be that PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus by bi nd i ng to a nucl ear
com ponent, ei ther PHO2 or DN A. H To test bi ndi ng to PHO2, … . J To test bi ndi ng to DN A, … .
P. 358
Revision 3
A, B In the yeast Sacchar om y ces cer ev i si ae, tra ns c ription of the aci d phosphatase PHO5 i s
r egul ated by ex tracel l ul ar phosphate l evel s thr ough the transcr i pti on f actor PHO4. C When yeast
cel l s ar e gr ow n i n m edi um contai ni ng hi gh phosphate l evel s, PHO4 enter s the cy topl asm and PHO5
i s not transcr i bed. D When yeast cel l s ar e gr ow n i n m edi um w i thout phosphate, PHO4 i s re ta ine d
i n the nucl eus. D' Ther e, i n conjuncti on w i th a second transcr i pti on f actor, PHO2, i t acti vates
transcr i pti on of PHO5. E Ther e ar e tw o hy potheses f or how PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus under
l ow phosphate condi ti ons. F One
hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 bi nds to the nucl ear pr otei n PHO2. H To
test thi s hy pothesi s, w e studi ed nucl ear r etenti on of PHO4 i n a strai n that l ack s PHO2.
I Pr el i m i nar y r esul ts suggest that bi ndi ng of PHO4 to PHO2 i s not r equi r ed f or the nucl ear
r etenti on of PHO4 under l ow phosphate condi ti ons. J The second hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 bi ndi ng to
DN A thr ough i ts DN A bi ndi ng dom ai n i s r esponsi bl e f or r etai ni ng PHO4 i n the nucl eus. K To test
thi s hypothesi s, w e pl an to study the nucl ear r etenti on of a PHO4 m utant f r om w hi ch the DN A
bi ndi ng dom ai n has been del eted.
Revision 4
A Tra ns c ription of the aci d phosphatase PHO5 i n the yeast Sacchar om y ces cer ev i si ae i s r egul ated
by the transcr i pti on f actor s PHO4 a nd P HO2. B The i ntracel l ul ar loc a tion of PHO4, and
consequentl y the transcr i pti on of PHO5, ar e r egul ated by ex tracel l ul ar phosphate l evel s. C When
yeast cel l s ar e gr ow n i n m edi um contai ni ng hi gh phosphate l evel s, PHO4 i s l ocated i n the cy
topl asm and ther ef or e i s unabl e to acti vate transcr i pti on of PHO5. D When yeast cel l s ar e gr ow n i n
m edi um contai ni ng l ow phosphate l evel s, PHO4 i s transl ocated to and r etai ned i n the nucl eus,
w her e, i n conjuncti on w i th PHO2, i t acti vates transcr i pti on. E How PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus
i s unk now n. F One hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the nucl eus by bi ndi ng to the nucl ear
transcr i pti on f actor PHO2. H , I How ever, pr el i m i nar y r esul ts f r om studi es per f or m ed i n yeast
l ack i ng PHO2 suggest that bi ndi ng of PHO4 to PHO2 i s not r esponsi bl e f or r etai ni ng PHO4 i n the
nucl eus under l ow phosphate condi ti ons. JA second hy pothesi s i s that PHO4 i s r etai ned i n the
nucl eus by bi ndi ng to DN A v i a i ts DN Abi ndi ng dom ai n. K To test thi s hy pothesi s, PHO4 l ack i ng the
DN A bi ndi ng dom ai n i s bei ng generated. L Thi s m utant w i l l be i ntr oduced i nto yeast and i ts
subcel l ul ar l ocati on w i l l be deter m i ned.
Revision 2
B Recent ev i dence now i ndi cates that gl ucocor ti coi ds, a ty pe of m edi cati on used occasi onal l y to
tr eat chi l dr en w i th juveni l e r heum atoi d ar thr i ti s, decr ease bone m i neral densi ty and degrade
m uscl e i n these chi l dr en (r ef s);… .
P. 359
Thi s r ev i si on i s l i k e Rev i si on A of Ex am pl e 3. 16: “The v er bB gene, an oncogene of the av i an
er y thr obl astosi s v i r us, … . ”
Revision 3
B Recentev i dence now i ndi cates that gl ucocor ti coi d m edi cati on decr eases bone m i neral densi ty
and degrades m uscl e i n these chi l dr en (r ef s);… .
COMMEN TS
The k ey ter m s “ti m i ng, ” “m ethod, ” and “r api di ty ” ar e r epl aced by the pr eci se ter m “r ate. ”
“Adm i ni str ati on” i s changed to the pr eci se ter m “i nf usi on. ”
In addi ti on, the k ey ter m “si ck pr eter m i nf ants” f r om A i s r epeated i n C r ather than bei ng
changed to “sm al l pr eter m i nf ants”—a v er y di f f er ent popul ati on.
Revision 2
A Bl oodpr oducts ar e used f r equentl y i n the car e of si ck pr eter m i nf ants. B How ever, i f bl ood
pr oducts ar e i nf used rapi dl y, c a us ing s udde n e x pa ns ion of blood volume , the r i sk of
i ntracrani al hem or r hage m ay be i ncr eased. C We suspected that thi s r i sk var i es w i th the rate at
w hi ch bl ood vol um e i s ex panded. D Ther ef or e,
w e studi ed the ef f ects of var i ous rates of ex pandi ng
bl ood vol um e on tw o indic a tors of the ris k of intra c ra nia l he morrha ge , cer ebral bl ood f l ow and
i ntracrani al pr essur e, i n si ck pr eter m i nf ants w i thi n the f i r st 7 day s af ter bi r th.
P. 360
Sentence B of Rev i si on 2 m ak es cl ear the r el ati on betw een bl ood pr oducts and bl ood v ol um e by
addi ng “causi ng sudden ex pansi on of bl ood v ol um e. ” Thi s l i nk i ng of k ey ter m s al l ow s the sw i tch
f r om “bl ood pr oducts” i n the f i r st tw o sentences to “bl ood v ol um e” i n the l ast tw o sentences.
The k ey ter m “r api dl y ” i n sentence B pr epar es f or the categor y ter m “r ate” i n C, but these k ey
ter m s ar e not l i nk ed.
N ote that f r equentl y peopl e use “br i ef l y ” f or “i n br i ef . ” Al so note that i f “br i ef l y ” m eant
“f or a shor t ti m e, ” the sentence w oul d be w r i tten “They w er e suspended br i ef l y i n 1 m l
of dex tr an sol uti on… . ” How ev er , i t i s better to speci f y the dur ati on of the suspensi on:
“They w er e suspended f or 5 s i n 1 m l of dex tr an sol uti on… . ”
Ev en though m ost r eader s m i ght guess r i ght (“i n br i ef ” i s the tr ue r el ati onshi p), the
poi nt i s that the r eader shoul d not be guessi ng. U si ng the appr opr i ate tr ansi ti on w or d
m ak es the l ogi cal r el ati onshi p i ncapabl e of bei ng m i sunder stood.
Exercise 3.6: Transition Phrases
A Hepatocy tes cul tur ed i n ti ssue sl i ces, w her e cel l contacts and ti ssue or gani zati on ar e l ar gel y
r etai ned, conti nue ti ssuespeci f i c transcr i pti on at near l y nor m al l evel s i n cul tur e m edi a.
B How ever, hepatocy tes gr ow n i n cel l cul tur e, w her e cel l contacts and ti ssue or gani zati on ar e
di sr upted, have sever el y al ter ed l evel s of transcr i pti on. C To avoi d al ter ed l evel s of transcr i pti on,
one appr oach has been to com bi ne ex tracel l ul ar m atr i x w i th pur e hepatocy tes i n cul tur e.
A Xenogenei c transpl antati on, or the transpl antati on of or gans betw een speci es, i s a potenti al
sol uti on to the sever e shor tage of donor or gans f or cl i ni cal transpl antati on [1, 2]. B One
limita tion to x e noge ne ic tra ns pla nta tion i s chr oni c i m m unol ogi c r ejecti on, w hic h i s m edi ated
by both cel l ul ar and hum oral pathway s [3]. C How ever, the pr i m ar y l i m i tati on i s hy peracute
r ejecti on, w hi ch i s tr i gger ed by the r eci pi ent's natural anti bodi es di r ected agai nst the donor 's
endothel i al cel l s [4].
The end of sentence B i s condensed. N ote al so that the k ey ter m “x enogenei c” i s r epeated ex actl y
i n sentence B.
OR: B A limita tion of x e noge ne ic tra ns pla nta tion tha t pre ve nts e x te ns ive us e i s
x e noge ne ic tra ns pla nta tion ha s tw o limita tions . C One limita tion is chr oni c i m m unol ogi c
r ejecti on, w hi ch i s m edi ated by both cel l ul ar and hum oral pathway s [3]. D The pr i m ar y l i m i tati on
i s hy peracute r ejecti on, w hi ch i s tr i gger ed by the r eci pi ent's natural anti bodi es di r ected agai nst
the donor 's endothel i al cel l s [4].
Re vis ion (Reor gani zes the suppor ti ng sentences: m ost to l east i m por tant and
3 si m ul taneousl y chr onol ogi cal or der )
A Xenogenei c transpl antati on (the transpl antati on of or gans betw een speci es) i s a potenti al
sol uti on to the sever e shor tage of donor or gans f or cl i ni cal transpl antati on [1, 2]. B P re s e ntly,
the prima ry limita tion to x e noge ne ic tra ns pla nta tion is hype ra c ute re je c tion, w hi ch i s
tr i gger ed by the r eci pi ent's natural anti bodi es di r ected agai nst the donor 's endothel i al cel l s [3].
C In a ddition, in the long te rm, x e noge ne ic tra ns pla nta tion is limite d by c hronic re je c tion,
w hi ch i s m edi ated by both cel l ul ar and hum oral pathway s [4].
EXAMPLE 2
The patter n of or gani zati on of thi s par agr aph i s “pr o. ” So the tr ansi ti on cl ause at the begi nni ng of
sentence B shoul d state that the suppor ti ng sentences gi v e ar gum ents i n f av or of i ncl udi ng
al bum i n i n the cul tur e m edi um .
P. 362
Revision 1
A Another questi on that f r equentl y ar i ses w hen w e tr y to i ncr ease apoB secr eti on by hepatocy tes
gr ow n i n cul tur e i s w hether or not al bum i n shoul d be i ncl uded i n the cul tur e m edi um . B One
a rgume nt in fa vor of inc luding a lbumin is tha t al bum i n appear s to be an ef f ecti ve si nk f or tox i c
pr oducts r el eased i nto the m edi um by dam aged cel l s (r ef ). C Anothe r a rgume nt is tha t al bum i n
sol ubi l i zes water i nsol ubl e l ongchai n f atty aci ds by com pl ex i ng w i th them (r ef ), thus rai si ng the
l i pi d l evel i n the cul tur e m edi um . D Ther ef or e, al bum i n coul d i ncr ease apoB secr eti on, w hi ch
depends on l i pi d l evel s i n the m edi um . E We
ther ef or e tested di f f er ent concentrati ons of f etal
bov i ne ser um al bum i n (f r om 0 to 15%, v /v ) on the l evel of apoB secr eted i n the cul tur e m edi um
and deter m i ned that 6. 5% (v /v ) i s the i deal concentrati on f or our pur poses.
OR: B Evide nc e for inc luding a lbumin is tha t… . C Furthe r e vide nc e is tha t… .
B One a dva nta ge of inc luding a lbumin is tha t… . C Another advantage i s… .
B In s upport of inc luding a lbumin, (Thi s i s a tr ansi ti on phr ase. ) a lbumin a ppe a rs … . C In
a ddition, … .
Revision 2
A Another questi on that f r equentl y ar i ses w hen w e tr y to i ncr ease apoB secr eti on by hepatocy tes
gr ow n i n cul tur e i s w hether or not al bum i n shoul d be i ncl uded i n the cul tur e m edi um . B Tw o
a rgume nts s upport inc luding a lbumin. C One a rgume nt is tha t al bum i n appear s to be an
ef f ecti ve si nk f or tox i c pr oducts r el eased i nto the m edi um by dam aged cel l s (r ef ). D Anothe r
a rgume nt is tha t al bum i n sol ubi l i zes water i nsol ubl e l ongchai n f atty aci ds by com pl ex i ng w i th
them (r ef ), thus rai si ng the l i pi d l evel i n the cul tur e m edi um . E Ther ef or e, al bum i n coul d i ncr ease
apoB secr eti on, w hi ch depends on l i pi d l evel s i n the m edi um . É Si nce
al bum i n appear s l i kel y to
be usef ul i n the cul tur e m edi um , the nex t questi on i s w hat the i deal concentrati on i s f or m ax i m al
secr eti on of apoB. F We ther ef or e tested di f f er ent concentrati ons of f etal bov i ne ser um al bum i n
(f r om 0 to 15%, v /v ) on the l evel of apoB secr eted i n the cul tur e m edi um and deter m i ned that
6. 5% (v /v ) i s the i deal concentrati on f or our pur poses.
OR: B Tw o findings s upport… One finding is tha t… The othe r finding is tha t… ”
Revision 3
A Another questi on that f r equentl y ar i ses w hen w e tr y to i ncr ease apoB secr eti on by hepatocy tes
gr ow n i n cul tur e i s w hether or not al bum i n shoul d be i ncl uded i n the cul tur e m edi um . B In
Sentence B begi ns w i th a tr ansi ti on phr ase and ends w i th a topi c sentence. The tr ansi ti on
phr ase states the l ogi cal r el ati onshi p betw een sentences A and B. The topi c sentence gi v es
an ov er v i ew of sentences C–E by stati ng speci f i c r easons f or i ncl udi ng al bum i n i n the cul tur e
m edi um . In addi ti on to r epeati ng f our k ey ter m s f r om sentence A, the topi c sentence
i ntr oduces another k ey ter m that appear s i n sentence C.
EXAMPLE 3
Revision 1
A We asked w hether l owdensi ty l i popr otei ns (LDL) and hi ghdensi ty l i popr otei ns (HDL) f r om
ser um r egul ate the phosphoi nosi ti de/cal ci um cascade and exocy tosi s. B W e found tha t, i n pr i m ar y
cul tur es of ty pe II cel l s, both LDL and HDL sti m ul ated thre e s te ps in the
phos phoinos itide /c a lc ium c a s c a de : phosphoi nosi ti de catabol i sm , cal ci um m obi l i zati on, and
transl ocati on of pr otei n k i nase C f r om cy tosol i c to m em brane com par tm ents. C In a ddition, LDL
and HDL sti m ul ated e x oc ytos is , a s indic a te d by s e c re tion of phosphati dy l chol i ne (PC), the
m ajor phosphol i pi d com ponent of pul m onar y sur f actant. D The LDLinduc e d e ffe c ts , but not the
HDLinduc e d e ffe c ts , w e re inhibite d by he pa rin, w hic h bloc k s binding of liga nds to the LDL
re c e ptor.
The or der of or i gi nal sentences B and C i s r ever sed, to agr ee w i th the or der i n the topi c
sentence.
Revision 2
A We asked w hether l owdensi ty l i popr otei ns (LDL) and hi ghdensi ty l i popr otei ns (HDL) f r om
ser um r egul ate the phosphoi nosi ti de/cal ci um cascade and exocy tosi s. B W e found tha t, i n pr i m ar y
cul tur es of ty pe II cel l s, both LDL a nd HDL s timula te d the phos phoinos itide /c a lc ium c a s c a de ,
a s indic a te d by the ir a c tiva tion of phosphoi nosi ti de catabol i sm , cal ci um m obi l i zati on, and
transl ocati on of pr otei n k i nase C f r om cy tosol i c to m em brane com par tm ents. C In addi ti on, both
LDL and HDL sti m ul ated e x oc ytos is , a s indic a te d by s e c re tion of phosphati dy l chol i ne (PC), the
m ajor phosphol i pi d com ponent of pul m onar y sur f actant. D The LDLi nduced ef f ects on the
phos phoinos itide /c a lc ium c a s c a de a nd e x oc ytos is , but not the
P. 364
HDLi nduced ef f ects, w er e i nhi bi ted by hepar i n, w hi ch bl ock s bi ndi ng of l i gands to the LDL
r eceptor.
B Transi ti on cl ause; r epeti ti on of key ter m s; transi ti on phrase (“as i ndi cated by ”)
Revision 3
A We asked w hether l owdensi ty l i popr otei ns (LDL) and hi ghdensi ty l i popr otei ns (HDL) f r om
ser um r egul ate the phosphoi nosi ti de/cal ci um cascade and exocy tosi s. B We f ound that, i n pr i m ar y
cul tur es of ty pe II cel l s, both LDL a nd HDL s timula te d this c a s c a de , s inc e both induc e d
phosphoi nosi ti de catabol i sm , cal ci um m obi l i zati on, and transl ocati on of pr otei n k i nase C f r om
cy tosol i c to m em brane com par tm ents. C In addi ti on, LDL and HDL sti m ul ated e x oc ytos is , s inc e
both induc e d c e lls to s e c re te phosphati dy l chol i ne (PC), the m ajor phosphol i pi d com ponent of
pul m onar y sur f actant. D The LDLi nduced ef f ects, but not the HDLi nduced ef f ects, w er e i nhi bi ted
by hepar i n, w hi ch bl ock s bi ndi ng of l i gands to the LDL r eceptor.
B Transi ti on cl ause; r epeti ti on of key ter m s; transi ti on cl ause (“si nce both i nduced…”)
A Mor tal i ty i n thi s ser i es of pati ents was 90%. B General l y, m or tal i ty i n cl i ni cal ser i es has been
gr eater than 80%. C The onl y excepti on i s the m or tal i ty of 46% r epor ted by Bol ey (2).
OR: The m or tal i ty of 46% r epor ted by Bol ey (2) i s the onl y excepti on.
A Mor tal i ty
i n thi s ser i es of pati ents was 90%. B Mor tal i ty i n other cl i ni cal ser i es has been gr eater
than 80%, except f or the m or tal i ty of 46% r epor ted by Bol ey (2).
A Mor tal i ty i n thi s ser i es of pati ents was 90%. B General l y, m or tal i ty i n cl i ni cal ser i es has been
about the sam e (gr eater than 80%). C The onl y excepti on i s the m or tal i ty of 46% r epor ted by
Bol ey (2).
Example 2
In Rev i si on 2, the data f or r el ax ati on ar e om i tted. Ideal l y , data shoul d be gi v en ei ther f or both
dependent v ar i abl es or f or nei ther . Si m i l ar l y , doses shoul d be gi v en ei ther f or both i ndependent
v ar i abl es or f or nei ther .
A Brady k i ni n
al one i nduced a contracti on f ol l ow ed by a l onger l asti ng r el ax ati on. B Addi ng
i ndom ethaci n (2 µg/m l f or 20–30 m i n) al ong w i th brady k i ni n i ncr eased the m agni tude of the
contracti on and r educed the m agni tude of r el ax ati on to 7% of that i nduced by brady k i ni n al one.
Re vis ion 4 (Poi nt of v i ew : cause; over v i ew added; data f or the contracti on added)
EXAMPLE 3
Re vis ion (Poi nt of v i ew : ef f ect)
A Consi derabl e ev i dence i ndi cates that the apoB–contai ni ng l i popr otei ns (such as VLDL, IDL, LDL,
l i popr otei n [a]) ar e ather ogeni c (1). B For ex am pl e, af ter a di et r i ch i n f ats and chol ester ol was
f ed to nonhum an pr i m ates and m i ce, s e rum c onc e ntra tions of a poB–c onta ining lipoprote ins
w e re e le va te d. C In addi ti on, a the ros c le rotic le s ions de ve lope d i n the l ar ge ar ter i es.
In sentence B of the r ev i si on, the poi nt of v i ew (“ser um concentr ati ons”) i s an aspect of the
poi nt of v i ew i n sentence A (“apoB–contai ni ng l i popr otei ns”).
The topi c i n sentence B i s the subject (“ser um concentr ati ons”) and the acti on i s i n the v er bs
(“w er e”).
Si m i l ar l y , i n sentence C, the topi c i s the subject (“ather oscl er oti c l esi ons”) and the acti on i s
i n the v er b (“dev el oped”).
Fi nal l y , a tr ansi ti on w or d i s added at the begi nni ng of sentence B to i ndi cate the l ogi cal
r el ati onshi p of sentence B to sentence A. Instead of a tr ansi ti on w or d, a tr ansi ti on cl ause
that r epeats the k ey ter m “ev i dence, ” such as one of these, coul d be used:
P. 366
“To ov er com e thi s bl ock ” at the begi nni ng of sentence B str engthens the conti nui ty because thi s
tr ansi ti on phr ase i s m or e pr eci se than the tr ansi ti on w or d “ther ef or e. ”
Re vis ion (The ver si on you w oul d ex pect; that i s, the second sentence i s ex actl y
1 paral l el to the f i r st sentence. The contr ol s ar e om i tted. )
In ra t pa pilla ry mus c le , 3 m M caf f ei ne conver ted l oadsensi ti ve r el ax ati on (Fi g. 1A, B) to l oad
i nsensi ti ve r el ax ati on (Fi g. 1C, D). How ever, in c a t pa pilla ry mus c le , caf f ei ne di d not conver t
l oadsensi ti ve r el ax ati on to l oad i nsensi ti ve r el ax ati on at concentrati ons of 3 m M (Fi g. 2), 5 m M
(Fi g. 3), or 10 m M (data not show n).
Rev i si on 1 has tw o par al l el sentences. The sentences begi n w i th par al l el si gnal s of the subtopi cs
(“i n r at papi l l ar y m uscl e, ” “i n cat papi l l ar y m uscl e”) and hav e the sam e sentence patter n: subject
(caf f ei ne), v er b (conv er ted, di d not conv er t), com pl eter . N ote that the v er bs ar e ex act opposi tes.
Other v er bs w oul d be l ess appr opr i ate: “f ai l ed to conv er t” i m pl i es an a pr i or i ex pectati on of
conv er si on, w hi ch m ay not be r easonabl e; “f ai l ed to el i m i nate” (the or i gi nal v er si on) i s not
par al l el .
Or gani zed by the ani m al studi ed; ther ef or e, the si gnal of the subtopi cs nam es the ani m al :
“i n r at papi l l ar y m uscl e, ” “i n cat papi l l ar y m uscl e. ”
In rat papi l l ar y m uscl e, 3 m M caf f ei ne el i m i nated the l oad sensi ti v i ty of r el ax ati on (Fi g.
1A, B, C, D). In contrast, i n cat papi l l ar y m uscl e, not even 10 m M caf f ei ne el i m i nated the l oad
sensi ti v i ty of r el ax ati on (Fi gs. 2, 3).
Re vis ion (A ver si on that i ncl udes the contr ol r esul ts and om i ts the noti on of
3 “conver si on”)
P. 367
U nde r c ontrol c onditions , the r el ax ati on of rat and cat papi l l ar y m uscl es was l oad sensi ti ve
(Fi gs. 1, 2). Afte r 3 mM c a ffe ine , the r el ax ati on of ra t papi l l ar y m uscl e becam e l oad i nsensi ti ve
(Fi g. 1) but the r el ax ati on of c a t papi l l ar y m uscl e was sti l l l oad sensi ti ve (Fi g. 2) and r em ai ned
so even af ter 5 (Fi g. 3) or 10 m M caf f ei ne.
Or gani zed by the i ndependent v ar i abl e; ther ef or e, the si gnal of the subtopi cs nam es the
i ndependent v ar i abl e: “under contr ol condi ti ons, ” “af ter 3 m M caf f ei ne. ”
Re vis ion 4 (A ver si on that has a topi c sentence. The contr ol r esul ts ar e om i tted. )
Caf f ei ne had di f f er ent ef f ects on the l oad sensi ti v i ty of r el ax ati on i n rat and cat papi l l ar y m uscl e.
In ra t pa pilla ry mus c le , 3 m M caf f ei ne conver ted the l oad sensi ti v i ty of r el ax ati on (Fi g. 1A, B)
to l oad i nsensi ti v i ty (Fi g. 1C, D). How ever, in c a t pa pilla ry mus c le , caf f ei ne di d not conver t l oad
sensi ti v i ty to l oad i nsensi ti v i ty at concentrati ons of 3 m M (Fi g. 2), 5 m M (Fi g. 3), or 10 m M (data
not show n).
Re vis ion (A ver si on that has a topi c sentence that i ncl udes, and subor di nates, the
5 contr ol )
Al though papi l l ar y m uscl e r el ax ati on was l oad sensi ti ve under contr ol condi ti ons (no caf f ei ne) i n
both rats (Fi g. 1) and cats (Fi g. 2), r el ax ati on i n these m uscl es r esponded di f f er entl y to caf f ei ne.
In ra t pa pilla ry mus c le , r el ax ati on becam e l oad i nsensi ti ve w hen 3 m M caf f ei ne was added to
the bath (Fi g. 1). In contrast, in c a t pa pilla ry mus c le , r el ax ati on r em ai ned l oad sensi ti ve af ter 3
m M (Fi g. 2), 5 m M (Fi g. 3), or 10 m M caf f ei ne was added to the bath.
Revision 1
E Aral di teem bedded ti ssues w er e secti oned at 1 µm w i th an ul tram i cr otom e (Por ter Bl um MT1).
Revision 2
B . C Tracheal segm ents f i xed i n Boui n's f i x ati ve w er e dehydrated i n graded ethanol sol uti ons,
cl ear ed i n al phater pi neol , em bedded i n paraf f i n, and
P. 368
secti oned at 7 µm w i th a r otar y m i cr otom e (Am er i can Opti cal ). D , E Tracheal segm ents f i xed i n
0. 2% gl utaral dehyde w er e dehydrated i n graded acetone sol uti ons, em bedded i n aral di te
(Pol y sci ences), and secti oned at 1 µm w i th an ul tram i cr otom e (Por ter Bl um MT1).
Revision
Injecti on of nal oxone al ter ed the ar ter i al bl ood gas and pH r esponses of the f etuses but not those
of the m other s. The f etal r esponses depended on the si te of i njecti on. Af ter f etal i njecti on of
nal oxone, f etal ar ter i al bl ood pH and PO 2 both decr eased [f r om 7. 39 ± 0. 01 (SD) to 7. 35 ± 0. 02
and f r om 23. 0 ± 0. 5 to 20. 8 ± 0. 8 m m Hg, r especti vel y ]. Ther e was no change i n f etal ar ter i al
bl ood PCO 2 . Af ter m ater nal i njecti on of nal oxone, onl y f etal ar ter i al bl ood PO 2 decr eased (f r om
24. 4 ± 0. 8 to 22. 2 ± 1. 0 m m Hg). Ther e w er e no si gni f i cant changes i n f etal ar ter i al bl ood pH or
PCO 2 .
(32 w or ds)
B. Acti on i n the v er b.
C. Par al l el f or m used.
At 45 and 60 m i n af ter ex posur e to ozone, ex travasati on of Evans bl ue dye was i ncr eased i n both
the trachea and the m ai n br onchi , al though at 15 and 30 m i n i t was not.
(33 w or ds)
In al l r ev i si ons, the v er b m ust be “w as i ncr eased, ” not “i ncr eased. ” The r eason i s that
“i ncr eased” coul d i m pl y that 45 m i n w as the m om ent w hen the i ncr ease began. How ev er , the
i ncr ease coul d hav e begun at 31 m i n.
P. 369
CHAPTER 4
Exercise 4.1: Introductions
Introduction 1
Strengths
The outstandi ng str ength of thi s Intr oducti on i s i ts Law r ence of Arabi a openi ng. Thi s openi ng
awakens i nter est by usi ng concr ete w or ds that evoke pow er f ul m ental i m ages: cam el s, gazel l es,
hot deser ts, bur r ow, deser t sun.
The Intr oducti on i s ver y r eadabl e, m ai nl y because the sentences ar e shor t (8 of the 10 sentences
have f ew er than 20 w or ds).
Weaknesses
The f unnel l eadi ng to the questi ons i s not r i gor ous.
A. The f i r st sentence (A) does not i denti f y the gener al topi c of the paper . But i f the
Intr oducti on star ts cl oser to the speci f i c topi c (see Rev i si on 2 bel ow ), i t shoul d tr y to k eep
at l east som e of the w onder f ul i m ageev ok i ng w or ds.
C. A step i s m i ssi ng bef or e sentence C. The m i ssi ng step i s “So the questi on ar i ses, how do
ungul ates r egul ate thei r body tem per atur e?”
F. Sentence F i nter r upts the stor y . F does not suppor t E. G suppor ts E. F shoul d be om i tted,
or F can be i ncor por ated i nto sentence G (see Rev i si on 1, sentence D).
H. Sentence H i s ci r cul ar : “bur sts” = “shor t dur ati on. ” The subject of the sentence shoul d be
“these hi gh speeds, ” r ef er r i ng to 70 k m /h, and the new i nf or m ati on, shor t bur sts, bel ongs i n
the v er b and com pl eter (see Rev i si on 1, sentence F).
I. The l ogi cal r el ati on betw een sentences H and I i s not stated. At m i ni m um , H and I shoul d
be i n one sentence begi nni ng w i th “Because. ” For f ul l er di spl ay s of l ogi c, see sentence F of
Rev i si on 1 and sentence E of Rev i si on 2.
A–G. Key ter m s f or ani m al s ar e changed. We hear about antel opes (ti tl e, E, I), or y x es (A),
gazel l es (A, F, G), and el and (F). Actual l y , or y x es, gazel l es, and el and ar e al l ty pes of
antel ope, but som e r eader s m ay not k now that. Onl y the ty pes of antel ope used i n thi s study
need to be nam ed i n the Intr oducti on, and they shoul d be i denti f i ed as ty pes of antel ope
(see Rev i si on 1, sentence D).
The questi ons ar e not com pl ete (questi on 1) or cl ear l y der i v ed (questi on 2).
Inf or m ati on m i ssi ng f r om questi on 1 i s the i ndependent var i abl e (r unni ng), w hat heat
storage pl ay s a r ol e i n (heat bal ance or tem peratur e r egul ati on), and the ani m al .
The di spl ay of thi nk i ng l eadi ng to questi on 2 i s m i ssi ng. Thi s di spl ay of thi nk i ng needs to
m ake cl ear how the subti tl e (“Independence of Brai n and Body Tem peratur es”) r el ates to
questi on 2 (see sentence G of Rev i si on 1 and sentence F of Rev i si on 2).
The ex per i m ental appr oach i s not stated. It shoul d pr obabl y be added.
Revision 1
C How ever, i nter nal heat l oads m ay pose even gr eater pr obl em s of tem peratur e r egul ati on. D For
ex am pl e, a ty pi cal deser t antel ope, the gazel l e, r unni ng at 70 k m /h pr oduces heat at 40 ti m es i ts
basi c m etabol i c rate (2). E How antel ope cope w i th thi s ex tra heat i s unk now n. F Because the hi gh
speeds ar e usual l y of shor t durati on, i t i s possi bl e that antel ope m i ght stor e heat w hi l e r unni ng
and then di ssi pate i t dur i ng per i ods of r el ati ve i nacti v i ty. G Heat storage, though, w oul d r equi r e
phy si ol ogi c m echani sm s f or copi ng w i th hi gh body tem peratur e, such as pr ef er enti al pr otecti on of
nor m al brai n tem peratur e.
H To deter m i ne w hether heat i s stor ed i n r unni ng antel ope, w e m easur ed thei r cor e body
tem peratur e w hi l e they ran ar ound a track i n the deser t. I In addi ti on, to deter m i ne w hether
nor m al brai n tem peratur e i s m ai ntai ned, w e m easur ed brai n tem peratur e.
Comments on Revision 1
The poi nt about speed i s subor di nated to av oi d br eak i ng the conti nui ty (D).
Questi on 1 i s m ade m or e speci f i c, r ef l ecti ng the possi bi l i ty nam ed i n F, thus el i m i nati ng the
need to def i ne w hat heat stor age pl ay s a r ol e i n (H).
The i ndependent v ar i abl e (r unni ng) and the ani m al s studi ed (antel ope) ar e i ncl uded i n
questi on 1 (H).
Questi on 2 i s m ade m or e speci f i c (I), thus f ol l ow i ng cl ear l y f r om (G) and r el ati ng cl ear l y to
the ti tl e.
The ex per i m ental appr oach f or each questi on i s stated (H, I).
Revision 2
P. 371
m ost w or k on the r egul ati on of body tem peratur e i n deser t ungul ates has been concer ned w i th
ex ter nal heat l oads (see r ef. 1 f or a r ev i ew ), i nter nal heat l oads m ay al so pose pr obl em s f or
tem peratur e r egul ati on. C For ex am pl e, one ty pe of deser t antel ope, the gazel l e, r unni ng at hi gh
speed (70 k m /h) pr oduces heat at 40 ti m es i ts basi c m etabol i c rate (2). D It i s not cl ear how
antel ope deal w i th thi s heat l oad. E Because hi ghspeed r unni ng usual l y occur s i n shor t bur sts, and
because di ssi pati on of thi s i nter nal l y pr oduced heat i s l i m i ted by the hi gh am bi ent tem peratur e, i t
seem s possi bl e that the antel ope m i ght al l ow i ts body tem peratur e to r i se rather than di ssi pate
thi s heat. F If body tem peratur e does r i se, m ai ntenance of the brai n at a l ow er tem peratur e than
the r est of the body w oul d be i m por tant si nce the brai n i s k now n to be m or e sensi ti ve to hi gh
tem peratur es than ar e the other or gans. G To deter m i ne w hether body tem peratur e r i ses i n
r unni ng antel opes and, i f so, w hether brai n tem peratur e r i ses equal l y, w e m easur ed both brai n
and body tem peratur es i n antel opes r unni ng at hi gh am bi ent tem peratur es.
COMMENTS ON REVISION 2
In addi ti on to the changes noted f or Rev i si on 1, Rev i si on 2 states the topi c of the paper
(tem per atur e r egul ati on) i n the f i r st sentence r ather than w ai ti ng unti l the thi r d sentence, as i n
the or i gi nal v er si on, and thus av oi ds the pr obl em of the m i ssi ng step. Rev i si on 2 al so pr esents a
detai l ed di spl ay of thi nk i ng l eadi ng to both questi ons (sentences E and F).
Al though both of the r ev i si ons f unnel to the questi ons cl ear l y and state the questi ons and the
ex per i m ental appr oach cl ear l y , nei ther i s as l i v el y as the or i gi nal v er si on, so ther e i s sti l l r oom
f or i m pr ov em ent. Rev i si on 1 has shor t sentences and k eeps som e of the concr ete i m ages of the
or i gi nal v er si on (cam el s, hot deser ts, bur r ow i ng, sun), but om i ts other s (or y x es, gazel l es,
bur sts) and adds som e heav y abstr act w or ds (per i ods of r el ati v e i nacti v i ty , phy si ol ogi c
m echani sm s, pr ef er enti al pr otecti on). Rev i si on 2 cl ear l y di spl ay s the thi nk i ng l eadi ng to the
questi ons but i s dul l because of abstr act w or ds (ungul ates, hi gh am bi ent tem per atur e,
m ai ntenance) and l ong sentences (f our of the si x sentences hav e m or e than 30 w or ds). Thus,
al though the r ev i si ons ar e m or e r i gor ous than the or i gi nal v er si on, they do not r ef l ect the
ex ci tem ent of sci enti sts f asci nated by thei r w or k that i s so appeal i ng i n the or i gi nal v er si on.
Introduction 2
Strengths
The statem ent of w hat i s k now n i s cl ear (A–G).
Weaknesses
The questi on i s not cl ear l y r el ated to the unk now n.
The sentences ar e l ong (m ean 26. 5 w or ds/sentence; 8 of the 11 sentences have about 30 w or ds).
P. 372
Revision
2 D Thr ee com m on i sof or m s of apo E ex i st: apoE2, apoE3, and apoE4. D ´ These i sof or m s ar e the
pr oducts of thr ee al l el es—ε 2, ε 3, and ε 4—at a si ngl e gene l ocus on chr om osom e 19 (11).
E Apol i popr otei n E3, the m ost com m on i sof or m , has cy stei ne and ar gi ni ne at posi ti ons 112 and
158, r especti vel y (1, 12). E´ ApoE2 has cy stei ne at both of these posi ti ons (1, 12). E” ApoE4 has
ar gi ni ne at both (1, 12).
4 H The m echani sm by w hi ch apoE4 m i ght contr i bute to Al zhei m er 's di sease i s unk now n. I How ever,
our r ecent data dem onstrati ng that apoE4 stunts the outgr ow th of neur i tes f r om neur ons of the
dor sal r oot gangl i on (DRG) (19, 20) suggest that apoE4 m i ght contr i bute to Al zhei m er 's di sease
by stunti ng the outgr ow th of these neur i tes. I ´ Our data f ur ther suggest that outgr ow th m i ght be
stunted by r em odel i ng of the cy toskel eton, speci f i cal l y the m i cr otubul e sy stem . J Ther ef or e, as a
step towar d deter m i ni ng the m echani sm of apoE4′ s contr i buti on to Al zhei m er 's di sease, w e asked
w hether apoE4 i nhi bi ts neur i te outgr ow th of N eur o2a cel l s, a m ouse neur obl astom a cel l l i ne, by
r em odel i ng the m i cr otubul e sy stem of these cel l s.
COMMENTS
The m ai n changes i n thi s r ev i si on ar e i n the l ast thr ee sentences: the suggesti ons f r om pr ev i ous
data (I, I') and the questi on (J). Al l ar e m or e pr eci se, and thei r r el ati on to the m echani sm of
Al zhei m er 's di sease i s m ade cl ear . The l ast sentence (K), w hi ch states the answ er to the
questi on, i s om i tted.
Other changes:
B Addi ng “centr al ” bef or e “ner v ous sy stem ” hel ps contr ast w i th the per i pher al ner v ous
sy stem i n sentence C. Addi ng “thus” i ndi cates the tr ue r el ati onshi p.
C U si ng
“i n addi ti on” i nstead of “apar t f r om ” av oi ds m ak i ng the centr al ner v ous sy stem
seem uni m por tant.
D The topi c i s now the subject. Im por tant detai l s ar e tak en out of par entheses.
F The unnecessar y tr ansi ti on phr ase (“accum ul ati ng ev i dence dem onstr ates that”) i s
om i tted. The sentence i s condensed to m ak e one str ong poi nt. “ApoE” i s cor r ected to
“apoE4. ”
P. 373
HA new par agr aph em phasi zes the nex t step i n the stor y (an unk now n).
I The noun cl uster i s untangl ed. “ApoE” i s cor r ected to “apoE4. ” The stor y i s k ept
f ocused on the unk now n—the m echani sm of Al zhei m er 's di sease.
I I 'A speci f i c statem ent of w hat apoE4 m i ght do r epl aces the v ague statem ent.
J The si gnal of the questi on i ndi cates that thi s study tak es a step tow ar d i denti f y i ng the
m echani sm of Al zhei m er 's di sease, w hi ch i s the ul ti m ate questi on. A pr eci se statem ent
of the i m m edi ate questi on addr essed i n thi s study r epl aces the statem ent of w hat
ex per i m ent w as done. The questi on l i nk s r em odel i ng w i th i nhi bi ti ng r ather than m ak i ng
these poi nts par al l el .
Sentence l ength i s shor ter because sentences C and F w er e shor tened and sentences D
and E w er e br ok en i nto tw o or thr ee sentences. The m ean i s now 20 w or ds/sentence;
onl y 5 of the 14 sentences hav e 30 w or ds or m or e.
Introduction 3
Strengths
The f unnel to the questi ons i s cl ear (f unnel , para. 1; questi ons, para. 3).
The general questi on at the begi nni ng of sentence J f ol l ow s cl ear l y f r om paragraph 1 (and
speci f i cal l y f r om sentence E).
The general questi on i ncl udes both the i ndependent var i abl e (al k al osi s) and the dependent
var i abl e (constr i cti on of the pul m onar y ci r cul ati on).
The new ness of the w or k i s ev i dent f r om the statem ent of the unk now n (C–E).
The ani m al (new bor n rabbi ts) and the m ater i al (i sol ated, per f used l ungs) ar e stated i n the
ex per i m ental appr oach (K).
Weaknesses
Thi s Intr oducti on i s too l ong. The detai l s (tr ees) over shadow the stor y (f or est).
In par agr aph 2, G and H say about the sam e thi ng, so G or H can be om i tted.
In par agr aph 3, the f i r st thr ee speci f i c questi ons (J) ar e r eal l y ex per i m ental appr oach (see
K–L) and ther ef or e can be om i tted.
The f our th speci f i c questi on i s not par al l el to the f i r st thr ee speci f i c questi ons, so i t shoul d
be pr esented separ atel y .
The r esul ts (M) ar e unnecessar y . Mor eov er , the r esul ts ar e conf usi ng, par tl y because they
pr ov i de m or e detai l than the r eader can cope w i th at thi s poi nt i n the paper and par tl y
because of a change of k ey ter m s: the dependent v ar i abl e m enti oned i n the f i r st r esul t i s
not pul m onar y v asoconstr i cti on, w hi ch i s w hat w e ex pect, but pul m onar y v ascul ar
r esi stance; how pul m onar y v ascul ar r esi stance r el ates to pul m onar y v asoconstr i cti on i s not
i ndi cated. Fi nal l y , i ncl udi ng r esul ts m ak es the Intr oducti on r ead l i k e an abstr act r ather than
an Intr oducti on.
The answ er (N ) does not answ er the questi on asked. In the answ er, the sequence of ex posur es to
the sti m ul i (al k al osi s and hy pox i a) i s the i ndependent var i abl e, but i n the questi on onl y al k al osi s
i s the i ndependent var i abl e. Al so, the questi on does not m atch the ti tl e, though the answ er does.
Si nce i t i s not cl ear w hat the questi on i s, the Intr oducti on does not pr epar e the r eader adequatel y
to under stand the r est of the paper.
P. 374
The r eason f or usi ng thr ee sequences of sti m ul i (L) i s not stated. It shoul d be.
The statem ent of the i m por tance (para. 2) i nter r upts the f l ow of thought betw een the f unnel
(para. 1) and the questi ons (para. 3).
The w r i ti ng i s heav y because of f ancy, abstract w or ds, a l ow rati o of ver bs to nouns, and som e
l ong sentences.
Revision
EFFECT OF ALKALOSIS ON HYPOXIAINDUCED PULMONARY
VASOCONSTRICTION IN LUNGS FROM NEWBORN RABBITS
1 A Al k al osi s, pr oduced pr i m ar i l y by m echani cal hy per venti l ati on, i s w i del y used i n the tr eatm ent
of new bor ns w ho have the sy ndr om e of per si stent pul m onar y hy per tensi on (15, 16). B Al though
m echani cal hy per venti l ati on i s of ten cl i ni cal l y ef f ecti ve i n the tr eatm ent of these i nf ants, i t i s not
cl ear w hether the cl i ni cal i m pr ovem ents dur i ng m echani cal hy per venti l ati on ar e due to the
al k al osi s r esul ti ng f r om the therapy. C The r esul ts of the f ew studi es of the ef f ect of al k al osi s on
hy pox i ai nduced pul m onar y vasoconstr i cti on i n l ungs of new bor n ani m al s have been var i abl e.
D Al k al osi s has been show n ei ther to r educe (10) or to have no ef f ect (13, 14) on constr i cti on of
the neonatal pul m onar y ci r cul ati on i n r esponse to al veol ar hy pox i a. E These var i abl e r esul ts m ay
have been caused by the di f f er ent sequences i n w hi ch the l ungs w er e ex posed to hy pox i a and
al k al osi s. F If al k al osi s does r educe hy pox i ai nduced pul m onar y vasoconstr i cti on, som e of i ts
har m f ul ef f ects m i ght be avoi ded by usi ng m etabol i c i nstead of m echani cal (r espi rator y )
al k al osi s.
2 G In thi s study, w e asked w hether or not al k al osi s r educes constr i cti on of the neonatal
pul m onar y ci r cul ati on i n r esponse to hy pox i a and w hether m etabol i c al k al osi s i s as ef f ecti ve as
r espi rator y al k al osi s. H To answ er these questi ons, w e m easur ed the vasoconstr i cti ve r esponses of
i sol ated, per f used l ungs f r om new bor n rabbi ts to r espi rator y or m etabol i c al k al osi s and hy pox i a
i n thr ee sequences: al k al osi s bef or e, dur i ng, and af ter al veol ar hy pox i a.
Par agr aph A. Im por tance. B–D. U nk now n l eadi ng to questi on 1. E. Possi bl e r eason
1: f or the conf usi on descr i bed i n C–D, l eadi ng to the ex per i m ental appr oach.
F. Possi bl e sol uti on, l eadi ng to questi on 2.
COMMENTS
The r ev i si on has been gr eatl y shor tened by om i tti ng r epeti ti on, unnecessar y detai l s, r esul ts, and
the answ er .
The r ev i si on has been r eor gani zed to begi n w i th the i m por tance. Thus, the questi ons com e
di r ectl y af ter the f unnel .
The r ev i si on adds a questi on about m etabol i c v s. r espi r ator y al k al osi s (G) and di spl ay s thi nk i ng
l eadi ng to thi s questi on (F).
Thus, the r ev i si on r esol v es m ost of the w eak nesses of the or i gi nal v er si on. How ev er , the w r i ti ng
i s sti l l heav y .
P. 375
CHAPTER 5
Exercise 5.1: A Clearly Written Methods Section
TOP IC + Signa l of the Topic
Te c hnique s of Continuity
Methods
Preparation
Or gani zed chr onol ogi cal l y .
N o topi c sentences.
2 DThe trachea was cannul ated l ow i n the neck , and the l ungs w er e venti l ated w i th 50% ox ygen
i n ai r by a Har var d r espi rator (m odel 613), w hose ex pi rator y outl et was pl aced under 3–5 cm of
water. EPer cent CO 2 i n the r espi r ed gas was m oni tor ed by a Beck m an LB1 gas anal y zer, and end
ex pi rator y CO 2 concentrati on was kept at about 5% by adjusti ng the venti l ator y rate. FAr ter i al
bl ood sam pl es w er e w i thdraw n per i odi cal l y and thei r PO 2 , PCO 2 , and pH w er e deter m i ned by a
bl ood gas/pH anal y zer (Cor ni ng 175). GSodi um bi car bonate (0. 33 m eq/m l ) was i nf used i . v. (1–3
m l /m i n) w hen necessar y to m i ni m i ze a base def i ci t i n the bl ood.
3 HThe chest was opened i n the m i dster nal l i ne and a c a the te r was i nser ted i nto the l ef t atr i um
v i a the l ef t atr i al appendage. ICa the te rs w er e al so i nser ted i nto the r i ght atr i um v i a the r i ght
jugul ar vei n and i nto the abdom i nal aor ta v i a a f em oral ar ter y.
4 JA s e gme nt of the trachea (4–5 cm ) i m m edi atel y caudal to the l ar y nx was i nci sed ventral l y i n
the midline and transver sel y acr oss both ends of the midline i nci si on. K The dor sal wal l was l ef t
i ntact. LEach midline cut edge was r etracted l ateral l y by ny l on thre a ds to ex pose the m ucosal
sur f ace. MThe thre a ds w er e attached to a stati onar y bar on one si de and to a f or cedi spl acem ent
transducer (Grass FT03) on the other. N The s e gme nt was str etched to a basel i ne tensi on of 100–
125 g.
P. 376
Study Design
Or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant (par as. 5–8) and chr onol ogi cal l y (par as. 5–7).
5 OTo deter m i ne w hether sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y Cf i ber s r ef l ex i vel y evokes i ncr eased
secr eti on f r om tracheal subm ucosal gl ands, w e sti m ul ated pul m onar y Cf i ber endi ngs i n each of
the 9 dogs by inje c ting c a ps a ic in (10–20 µg/k g) i nto the r i ght atr i um . PCa ps a ic in was taken
f r om stock sol uti ons pr epar ed as descr i bed el sew her e (4). QAt 10s i nter val s f or 60 s bef or e and
60 s af ter each inje c tion, w e m easur ed s e c re tions f r om tracheal subm ucosal gl ands. RAs a
contr ol , i n the sam e 9 dogs w e m easur ed s e c re tion i n r esponse to inje c tion of vehi cl e (0. 5–1. 0
m l ) i nto the r i ght atr i um . SInje c tions w er e separated by r esti ng per i ods of about 30 m i n.
6 TAl though c a ps a ic in sel ecti vel y sti m ul ates pul m onar y Cf i ber s f r om w i thi n the pul m onar y
ci r cul ati on, i t i s l i kel y to sti m ul ate other af f er ent pathway s, i ncl udi ng br onchi al Cf i ber s, once i t
passes i nto the s ys te mic ci r cul ati on (2, 5). U To ver i f y that secr eti on i n our ex per i m ents was not
caused by s ys te mic ef f ects of c a ps a ic in, w e nex t m easur ed secr eti on af ter i njecti ng c a ps a ic in
(10–20 µg/k g) i nto the l ef t atr i um and agai n, 30 m i n l ater, i nto the r i ght atr i um of al l 9 dogs.
7 VFi nal l y , to ver i f y that sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y Cfibe rs was r esponsi bl e f or the secr eti ons,
w e m easur ed secr eti on i n r esponse to capsai ci n (10–20 µg/k g i nto the r i ght atr i um ) i n the 9 dogs
bef or e and af ter bloc k ing c onduc tion i n both of the cer v i cal va gus ne rve s , w hi ch car r y the
pul m onar y Cf i ber s. WWe bloc k e d c onduc tion ei ther by c ooling the ner ves to 0°C as descr i bed
el sew her e (8) (4 dogs ) or by c utting the ner ves (5 dogs ). XBef or e the f i r st bloc k ing
e x pe rime nt on each dog, w e cut the r ecur r ent and parar ecur r ent ner ves so that the tracheal
segm ent r ecei ved i ts m otor suppl y sol el y f r om the super i or l ar y ngeal ner ves (14). YConsequentl y ,
w hen w e c oole d or c ut the m i dcer v i cal va gus ne rve s dur i ng an e x pe rime nt, w e coul d be cer tai n
P. 377
that the changes i n the tracheal r esponses w er e caused by i nter r upti on of the af f er ent vagal C
fibe rs .
8 ZAs a f ur ther check on the ef f ects of sti m ul ati ng (and bl ock i ng) pul m onar y Cf i ber s, i n each of
these ex per i m ents, w e al so m easur ed hear t rate, m ean ar ter i al pr essur e, and i som etr i c sm ooth
m uscl e tensi on of the tracheal segm ent, w hi ch ar e k now n to be al ter ed r ef l ex i vel y by sti m ul ati on
of pul m onar y Cf i ber s (3).
Methods of Measurement
Or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant.
Par agr aph 10: Fr om a com bi nati on of f our techni ques of conti nui ty . Thi s i s a m odel
par agr aph.
9 AAThe rate of s e c re tion f r om sub muc os a l gla nd duc ts was assessed by c ounting hilloc k s of
muc us per uni t ti m e as descr i bed el sew her e (8). BBBr i ef l y , i m m edi atel y bef or e each ex per i m ent,
the muc os a l sur f ace was gentl y dr i ed and sprayed w i th ta nta lum. CCThe ta nta lum l ayer
pr evented the nor m al ci l i ar y di sper si on of s e c re tions f r om the openi ngs of the gla nd duc ts , so
the accum ul ated s e c re tions el evated the ta nta lum l ayer to f or m hilloc k s . DDHilloc k s w i th a
di am eter of at l east 0. 2 m m w er e c ounte d i n a 1. 2cm 2 f i el d of muc os a . EETo f aci l i tate
c ounting, the muc os a of the r etracted segm ent was v i ew ed thr ough a di ssecti ng m i cr oscope,
and i ts ima ge was pr ojected by a tel ev i si on cam era (Sony AVC 1400) onto a tel ev i si on scr een
together w i th the output f r om a time s igna l generator (3M Datav i si on DT1). FFThe ima ge and
the time s igna l w er e r ecor ded by a v i deotape r ecor der (Sony VO2600) f or subsequent pl ay back
and m easur em ent of the rate of hilloc k f or m ati on.
10 GGHe a rt ra te , m ean a rte ria l pre s s ure , and is ome tric s mooth mus c le te ns ion of the
tracheal segm ent w er e r ecor ded conti nuousl y thr oughout each ex per i m ent by a Grass pol ygraph.
HHHe a rt ra te was m easur ed by a car di otachom eter tr i gger ed by an el ectr ocar di ogram (l ead II).
IIArte ria l pre s s ure was m easur ed by a Statham P25Db strai n gauge connected to the catheter
P. 378
pl aced i n a f em oral ar ter y. JJIs ome tric s mooth mus c le te ns ion i n the segm ent was m easur ed
by a Grass FT03 f or ce di spl acem ent transducer attached to the l ateral edge of the r etracted
segm ent, as descr i bed el sew her e (1, 14).
Statistical Analysis
N o topi c sentences.
11 KK Data ar e r epor ted as m eans ± SD. LLTo deter m i ne i f ther e w er e s ignific a nt diffe re nc e s i n
secr eti on bef or e and af ter sti m ul ati on w i thi n each ex per i m ent, or si gni f i cant di f f er ences i n
secr eti on betw een the ex per i m ents, w e per f or m ed tw oway r epeatedm easur es anal y si s of
var i ance. MMWhen w e f ound a s ignific a nt diffe re nc e betw een ex per i m ents, w e per f or m ed the
Student N eum anKeul s test to i denti f y pai r w i se di f f er ences. N N We consi der ed diffe re nc e s
s ignific a nt a t P < 0. 05.
The ex per i m ent done to answ er the questi on (par a. 5) i ncl udes f i v e contr ol s: basel i ne (sentence
Q) and sham (sentence R), and thr ee v er i f i cati on contr ol s: v er i f i cati on that secr eti on w as not
caused by sy stem i c ef f ects of capsai ci n (par a. 6), v er i f i cati on that sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y C
f i ber s w as r esponsi bl e f or secr eti ons (par a. 7), and v er i f i cati on that sti m ul ati on of pul m onar y C
f i ber s af f ected other v ar i abl es as ex pected (par a. 8). Som e r eader s m i ght not noti ce the basel i ne
contr ol because i t i s not i denti f i ed. To m ak e the basel i ne contr ol m or e noti ceabl e, “(basel i ne)”
coul d be added af ter “f or 60 s bef or e” i n sentence Q.
N ote that the num ber of dogs i s stated f or the ex per i m ent and f or each contr ol (sentences O, R,
U , V).
Thr oughout the Methods secti on, r epeti ti on of k ey ter m s pr ov i des conti nui ty both w i thi n and
betw een par agr aphs. The r epeated k ey ter m s betw een par agr aphs ar e “dog(s), ” “tr achea” or
“tr acheal , ” “segm ent, ” “capsai ci n, ” “Cf i ber (s), ” “secr eti on(s), ” and “subm ucosal gl and(s). ” In
addi ti on, tr ansi ti on w or ds, tr ansi ti on phr ases, consi stent or der , consi stent poi nt of v i ew , par al l el
f or m , and si gnal s of subtopi cs pr ov i de conti nui ty w i thi n par agr aphs.
Poi nt of v i ew i s w el l handl ed. “We” i s used onl y i n the Study Desi gn and stati sti cal anal y si s, the
stor y tel l i ng subsecti ons of Methods. N ote that “w e” appear s
P. 379
onl y i n the sentences that m ov e the stor y f or w ar d: O, Q, R, U , V, W, X, Y, Z i n the Study Desi gn
and LL, MM, N N i n the stati sti cal anal y si s. In addi ti on, “w e” appear s at the begi nni ng of onl y tw o
sentences (W and N N ), so i t i s not obnox i ous.
Thus, w e can see that to k eep the stor y l i ne of the paper goi ng, thi s Methods secti on f ocuses i n
tw o w ay s on the m ethods that answ er the questi on. One w ay i s by the or gani zati on of topi cs f r om
m ost to l east i m por tant: the ex per i m ent done to answ er the questi on com es bef or e the contr ol s,
and the m ethods f or dependent v ar i abl es that answ er the questi on ar e descr i bed bef or e m ethods
f or other dependent v ar i abl es. The other w ay that thi s Methods secti on k eeps the stor y l i ne goi ng
i s by si gnal i ng the or gani zati on so that i t i s appar ent. The v i sual si gnal s used ar e subheadi ngs
and new par agr aphs. The v er bal si gnal s used ar e tr ansi ti on phr ases (par as. 5–8 of the Study
Desi gn and par a. 11 of the Stati sti cal Anal y si s) and topi c sentences (par as. 9 and 10 of Methods
of Measur em ent).
REVISIONS
Materials
A Al l chem i cal s and a pr ostagl andi n E 2 radi oi m m unoassay k i t w er e pur chased f r om Si gm a (St.
Loui s, MO). B 3 Hpr ostagl andi n E 2 (speci f i c acti v i ty, 130 Ci /m m ol ) was pur chased f r om N ew
Engl and N ucl ear (Boston, MA).
C On the day of each ex per i m ent, w e pr epar ed stock sol uti ons of arachi doni c aci d (0. 33 m g/m l )
and i ndom ethaci n (16 m g/m l ) i n ethanol . D To r ul e out any ef f ect of ethanol on pr ostagl andi n E 2
pr oducti on, w e i ncubated N r i ngs of ductus ar ter i osus i n f r esh buf f er contai ni ng the m ax i m um
concentrati on of ethanol . E Af ter a 90m i n i ncubati on at 37°C, w e col l ected the buf f er and
m easur ed pr ostagl andi n E 2 . F Ethanol had no ef f ect on pr ostagl andi n E 2 pr oducti on (data not
show n).
Preparation
Revision 1
A We pr epar ed r i ngs of ductus ar ter i osus f r om 16 f etal l am bs (122–145 day s of gestati on; ter m i s
150 day s) that w er e del i ver ed by cesar ean secti on f r om spi nal l y anestheti zed ew es. B Af ter
ex sangui nati ng a l am b, w e r em oved the enti r e ductus ar ter i osus, di ssected i t f r ee of adventi ti al
ti ssue, and di v i ded i t i nto ei ght 1m m thi ck r i ngs [w et w ei ght, 22. 1 ± 8. 2 (SD) m g]. C Then w e
pl aced the r i ngs i n gl ass v i al s contai ni ng 4 m l of buf f er (50 m M Tr i s HCl , pH 7. 39, contai ni ng 127
m M N aCl , 5 m M KCl , 2. 5 m M CaCl 2 , 1. 3 m M MgCl 2 α 6 H 2 O, and 6 m M gl ucose) at 37°C. D We
bubbl ed al l buf f er sol uti ons w i th ox ygen. E Bef or e begi nni ng the ex per i m ents, w e al l ow ed the
pr eparati on to stabi l i ze f or 45 m i n.
P. 380
Revision 2
A Fr om 16 ex sangui nated 122 to 145day f etal l am bs (ter m i s 150 day s), w e exci sed the ductus
ar ter i osus, di ssected i t f r ee of adventi ti al ti ssue, and sl i ced i t ci r cum f er enti al l y i nto ei ght 1m m
thi ck r i ngs [w et w ei ght, 22. 1 ± 8. 2 (SD) m g]. B We i ncubated these r i ngs i n gl ass v i al s contai ni ng
4 m l of buf f er A (50 m M Tr i s HCl , pH 7. 39, contai ni ng 127 m M N aCl , 5 m M KCl , 2. 5 m M CaCl 2 , 1. 3
m M MgCl 2 · 6 H 2 O, and 6 m M gl ucose) at 37°C f or 45 m i n bef or e al l ex per i m ents.
Study Design
A To deter m i ne w hether exogenous arachi doni c aci d i ncr eases pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 2 i n
the ductus ar ter i osus, w e per f or m ed ei ght ex per i m ents. B In each ex per i m ent, w e m easur ed
pr ostagl andi n E 2 content af ter i ncubati ng ei ght r i ngs of ductus ti ssue f r om one f etal l am b i n each
of thr ee consecuti ve buf f er s w i th or w i thout arachi doni c aci d. C Then w e cal cul ated pr ostagl andi n
E 2 pr oducti on. D The buf f er s w er e used w er e, f i r st, f r esh buf f er (basel i ne), then f r esh buf f er
contai ni ng 0. 2 µg/m l arachi doni c aci d, and f i nal l y f r esh buf f er contai ni ng 0. 2 µg/m l arachi doni c
aci d and 2 µg/m l of the pr ostagl andi n sy nthesi s i nhi bi tor, i ndom ethaci n. E Al l i ncubati ons w er e
done i n buf f er bubbl ed i n ox ygen at 37°C f or 90 m i n. F Betw een i ncubati ons i n the l ast tw o
buf f er s, w e washed the r i ngs i n f r esh buf f er f or 30 m i n. G At the end of the ex per i m ent, w e
bl otted the r i ngs dr y and w ei ghed them (w et w ei ght). H In ei ght contr ol ser i es, w e m easur ed
pr ostagl andi n E 2 content i n ei ght other r i ngs subjected to the sam e sequence of i ncubati ons and
washes, but i n buf f er al one.
II. Both the i ndependent and the dependent v ar i abl es ar e i ncl uded i n the ov er v i ew . The
dependent v ar i abl e (pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 2 ) i s i denti f i ed as a cal cul ated v ar i abl e
(C). The m easur ed dependent v ar i abl e (pr ostagl andi n E 2 content) i s al so i ncl uded i n the
ov er v i ew (B).
III. Both contr ol s ar e i ncl uded i n the study desi gn. The basel i ne contr ol i s m enti oned i n sentence
D, w hi ch nam es the buf f er s. The contr ol ser i es, w hi ch w as i n a separ ate par agr aph i n the
or i gi nal v er si on, i s i n sentence H.
IV. The pur pose of addi ng i ndom ethaci n (to bl ock endogenous pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 2 ) i s
added (sentence D).
V. Bubbl i ng w i th ox y gen, w hi ch w as m enti oned onl y i n the contr ol ser i es i n the or i gi nal
v er si on, i s cl ar i f i ed as hav i ng been done i n al l ex per i m ents (E). How ev er , i f bubbl i ng w i th
ox y gen i s i ncl uded i n the pr epar ati on subsecti on (as i n Rev i si on 1 of Pr epar ati on), change
sentence E i n the Study Desi gn to “Al l i ncubati ons w er e done at 37°C f or 90 m i n. ”
VI. The sam pl e si ze i s not cl ear i n the or i gi nal v er si on. Or i gi nal sentence E say s that ei ght r i ngs
of ductus ar ter i osus w er e i ncubated. Or i gi nal sentence L m enti ons a m ean “per ex per i m ent. ”
It i s not cl ear i f one ex per i m ent equal s one r i ng or i f m or e than one ex per i m ent usi ng ei ght
r i ngs w as done. We can guess that one r i ng cannot be one ex per i m ent, because
pr ostagl andi n E 2 w as
P. 381
m easur ed i n the buf f er sol uti on, to w hi ch al l ei ght r i ngs contr i buted. So one sequence of
i ncubati ons m ust be one ex per i m ent. The num ber of such sequences i s not stated i n the
or i gi nal v er si on. It shoul d be added. The r ev i si on m ak es the sam pl e si ze cl ear : ei ght
ex per i m ents, each done on ei ght r i ngs of ductus ar ter i osus tak en f r om one f etal l am b.
VII. Or i gi nal sentence L, w hi ch tel l s the m ean w ei ght of the r i ngs of ductus ar ter i osus, seem s
l i k e a r esul t, and thus seem s i nappr opr i ate to the Methods secti on. How ev er , the w ei ght of
the r i ngs i s not a r esul t that answ er s the questi on and ther ef or e i s not desi r abl e i n the
Resul ts secti on. Rather , the m ean w et w ei ght i s a v al ue used to ex pr ess pr ostagl andi n E 2
pr oducti on. Ther ef or e, i t i s m or e usef ul i n the Methods secti on than i n the Resul ts. One
opti on i s to i ncl ude the m ean w et w ei ght i n Pr epar ati on (see abov e).
Calculations
A We cal cul ated pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 2 as m easur ed pr ostagl andi n E 2 content nor m al i zed
to ti ssue w ei ght and cor r ected f or per cent r ecover y : pg content per m g ductal ti ssue per m i n
i ncubati on/% r ecover y. B Bef or e m easur i ng pr ostagl andi n E 2 content, w e pur i f i ed the
pr ostagl andi ns f r om each buf f er sol uti on by f i r st aci di f y i ng the sol uti ons to pH 3. 5 w i th 1 N ci tr i c
aci d, then ex tracti ng the pr ostagl andi ns i n a 1:1 m i x tur e of cycl ohex ane and ethy l acetate, and
f i nal l y r unni ng the pr ostagl andi ns thr ough si l i ci c aci d m i cr ocol um ns (4). C To m easur e
pr ostagl andi n E 2 content, w e per f or m ed a radi oi m m unoassay usi ng a speci f i c rabbi t anti ser um
agai nst an al bum i nconjugated pr ostagl andi n E 2 pr eparati on. D To cal cul ate per cent r ecover y (the
am ount of pr ostagl andi n E 2 content r etai ned dur i ng the pur i f i cati on pr ocess), w e added a k now n
am ount of 3 Hpr ostagl andi n E 2 to each buf f er sol uti on bef or e the pur i f i cati on pr ocess and then
com par ed the radi oacti v i ty m easur ed bef or e and af ter pur i f i cati on. E Recover y of pr ostagl andi n E 2
I. The f i r st sentence of the r ev i sed cal cul ati ons subsecti on i s a str onger topi c sentence than i n
the or i gi nal v er si on. Thi s topi c sentence gi v es an ov er v i ew that states how the dependent
v ar i abl e i n the questi on (pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 2 ) w as cal cul ated.
II. The detai l s ar e r eor gani zed i n chr onol ogi cal or der : f i r st a pr el i m i nar y step (pur i f i cati on)
(B); then deter m i nati on of the tw o com ponents of the cal cul ati on: m easur em ent of content
(C) and cal cul ati on of r ecov er y (D), the sam e or der as i n the topi c sentence. The l ast tw o
sentences (per cent r ecov er y of pr ostagl andi n E 2 and how pr ostagl andi n E 2 pr oducti on i s
r epor ted) ar e i n the or i gi nal or der .
III. Per cent r ecov er y i s def i ned i n sentence D. In addi ti on, the detai l s of each step ar e pul l ed
together i nto one sentence, and the step i s i denti f i ed at the begi nni ng of the sentence (B–
D). Fi nal l y , “a k now n am ount” i s added i n sentence D to cl ar i f y the cal cul ati on of r ecov er y .
IV. Tw o pi eces of i nf or m ati on i n the cal cul ati on subsecti on at f i r st seem i nappr opr i ate to the
Methods secti on: or i gi nal sentences S and W. Sentence S tel l s the per cent r ecov er y of
pr ostagl andi n E 2 , w hi ch seem s l i k e a r esul t. How ev er , i t i s not a r esul t that answ er s the
questi on. Rather , i t tel l s som ethi ng
P. 382
about the m ater i al the author i s w or k i ng w i th and thus i s appr opr i ate i n the Methods secti on.
Thus, i nf or m ati on that l ook s l i k e r esul ts but does not hel p answ er the questi on i s m or e
appr opr i ate i n the Methods secti on than i n Resul ts.
Thi s r ev i si on uses “w e” thr oughout ex cept i n the f i r st par agr aph, to av oi d star ti ng the Methods
secti on w i th “w e. ” In the r em ai ni ng par agr aphs, “w e” i s used i n m ost sentences, but appear s at
the begi nni ng of a sentence as i nf r equentl y as possi bl e: ei ther zer o ti m es (second par agr aph of
Mater i al s), once (Rev i si on 2 of Pr epar ati on; Study Desi gn), or tw i ce (Rev i si on 1 of Pr epar ati on;
Cal cul ati ons). The m ai n techni que used to av oi d putti ng “w e” at the begi nni ng of a sentence i s to
put a tr ansi ti on w or d or phr ase i ndi cati ng ti m e sequence or pur pose at the begi nni ng of the
sentence. See, f or ex am pl e, sentences C and D of Mater i al s.
CHAPTER 6
Bl ood and ur i ne ketone aci ds of the seven obese subjects i ncr eased m or e af ter 21 day s of the
pr otei n di et than af ter 21 day s of the m i xed di et (Fi g. 1). Pl asm a i nsul i n l evel s and m ean pl asm a
gl ucose both decr eased m or e af ter the pr otei n di et than af ter the m i xed di et. Pl asm a gl ucagon
di d not change af ter ei ther di et.
(56 w or ds)
Af ter the 21day pr otei n di et, bl ood and ur i ne ketone aci ds i ncr eased m or e and pl asm a i nsul i n
and gl ucose decr eased m or e than af ter the 21day m i xed di et i n the seven obese subjects (Fi g.
1). Pl asm a gl ucagon l evel s w er e no di f f er ent.
(40 w or ds)
Re vis ion 3 (Ef f ects and com par i sons separated; poi nt of v i ew : i ndependent var i abl e)
Both di ets i ncr eased bl ood and ur i ne ketone aci ds i n the seven obese subjects af ter 21 day s, but
the pur e pr otei n di et caused l ar ger i ncr eases than the m i xed di et di d (Fi g. 1). Both di ets
decr eased pl asm a i nsul i n and pl asm a gl ucose; agai n, the pur e pr otei n di et had a gr eater ef f ect.
N ei ther di et changed pl asm a gl ucagon.
(53 w or ds)
Re vis ion 4 (Topi c sentence added)
P. 383
Subs tra te a nd hormone le ve ls in the s e ve n obe s e s ubje c ts w e re a lte re d more by the 21da y
prote in die t tha n by the 21da y mix e d die t. Speci f i cal l y, bl ood and ur i ne ketone aci ds i ncr eased
m or e af ter the pr otei n di et than af ter the m i xed di et (Fi g. 1). Pl asm a i nsul i n concentrati ons and
pl asm a gl ucose concentrati ons decr eased m or e af ter the pr otei n di et than af ter the m i xed di et.
Pl asm a gl ucagon concentrati ons w er e not changed af ter ei ther di et.
(71 w or ds)
Substrate and hor m one l evel s i n the seven obese subjects w er e al ter ed m or e by the 21day
pr otei n di et than by the 21day m i xed di et (Fi g. 1).
(27 w or ds)
N ote: We do not actual l y k now i f gl ucose decr eased—onl y that i t w as l ess af ter the pr otei n di et.
Condensing Techniques
The f i r st thr ee r ev i si ons condense par agr aph 1 f r om 242 w or ds to 40–56 w or ds by
hangi ng the gr aph f or pl asm a i nsul i n to actual v al ues, not changes f r om basel i ne, thus
av oi di ng the need to gi v e basel i ne v al ues i n the tex t.
om i tti ng the f i gur e l egend at the begi nni ng of the par agr aph and ci ti ng the f i gur e at the end
of the f i r st r esul t.
Changes in Continuity
“Pr otei n di et, ” not “w hen car bohy dr ate w as el i m i nated” (or i gi nal sentence E).
“Mi x ed di et, ” not “car bohy dr atecontai ni ng di et” (or i gi nal sentence B). (Si m i l ar l y , i f the data
w er e k ept i n the tex t, the uni t of m easur em ent f or k etone aci ds shoul d be the sam e i n the
tex t and i n the f i gur e, not m m ol i n the tex t and m M i n the f i gur e).
The or der of com par i sons i s consi stent: al l com par i sons ar e f r om the pr otei n di et to the
m i x ed di et. (In the or i gi nal v er si on, the com par i son f or gl ucose i s f r om the m i x ed di et to
the pr otei n di et. Som e r eader s pr obabl y m i sr ead thi s com par i son as say i ng that pl asm a
gl ucose w as gr eater af ter the pr otei n di et than af ter the m i x ed di et. )
BEST PARAGRAPH
Par agr aphs 3 and 4 ar e pr obabl y the best par agr aphs i n thi s Resul ts secti on. How ev er , m ost
r eader s thi nk par agr aphs 4 and 5 ar e the best, pr obabl y because these ar e the onl y tw o
par agr aphs that do not begi n w i th a f i gur e l egend.
Par agr aph 4 has m any str engths. It i s shor t, i t begi ns w i th a r esul t (not a f i gur e l egend), data
and stati sti cal detai l s ar e subor di nated (though the data shoul d be separ ated f r om the r esul ts by
par entheses, not by com m as), and an i dea of the m agni tude of a di f f er ence i s gi v en (“20%
gr eater ”). In addi ti on, k ey ter m s nam i ng the di ets ar e consi stent, the poi nt of v i ew i n the thr ee
sentences i s consi stent, the thr ee sentences ar e appr opr i atel y i n par al l el f or m ,
P. 384
the topi c of each sentence i s si gnal ed by the k ey ter m at the begi nni ng, and tr ansi ti on w or ds ar e
used to i ndi cate the l ogi cal r el ati onshi ps betw een the sentences. How ev er , the l ogi c i s not
r i gor ous. The “how ev er ” at the begi nni ng of the second sentence r eal l y appl i es to the i dea i n the
thi r d sentence. Thus, the l ast tw o sentences shoul d r ead, “How ev er , because the cal cul ated
w ei ght l oss attr i butabl e to f l ui d l osses af ter the pr otei n di et w as al so gr eater than that af ter the
m i x ed di et, the esti m ated nonf l ui d w ei ght l oss af ter the pr otei n di et w as no di f f er ent f r om that
af ter the m i x ed di et. ”
Par agr aph 5 i s not as cl ear as par agr aph 4. Par agr aph 5 has som e of the sam e str engths as
par agr aph 4. It begi ns w i th a r esul t, i t subor di nates data, and i t k eeps the nam es of the di ets
consi stent. How ev er , par agr aph 5 has a conf usi ng l ack of si gnal s of the topi c at the begi nni ng of
the f i r st tw o sentences, w hi ch m ak es the contr ast di f f i cul t to see. In addi ti on, the poi nt of v i ew
i n the tw o sentences i s di f f er ent: sentence U , bl ood pr essur e v al ues; sentence V, f al l i n sy stol i c
bl ood pr essur e. Fi nal l y , “ex agger ated postur al decl i ne” i s unnecessar i l y f ancy and changes the
k ey ter m . Thi s par agr aph can be w r i tten m or e cl ear l y and si m pl y as f ol l ow s:
5 When the subjects w er e supi ne, bl ood pr essur e was not si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent f r om pr edi et
val ues af ter ei ther the pr otei n di et (119 ± 5/72 ± 4 v s. 114 ± 2/69 ± 2 m m Hg) or the m i xed di et
(114 ± 3/71 ± 3 v s. 114 ± 2/69 ± 3 m m Hg). How ever, w hen the subjects stood f or 2, 5, or 10
m i n, bl ood pr essur e decr eased m or e af ter the pr otei n di et than af ter the m i xed di et (by 28 ± 3
v s. 18 ± 3 m m Hg, P < 0. 02). The decr ease i n bl ood pr essur e was accom pani ed by an i ncr ease i n
adver se sy m ptom s i n al l seven subjects af ter the pr otei n di et but i n onl y one of the seven
subjects af ter the m i xed di et.
Reader s r ar el y choose par agr aph 3 as the best par agr aph i n thi s Resul ts secti on, pr obabl y
because i t begi ns w i th a f i gur e l egend and contai ns a l ot of data. How ev er , i f the f i r st sentence
(f i gur e l egend) i s om i tted, par agr aph 3 i s qui te cl ear . The i m por tant r esul t—the m i ner al bal ance
that changed—i s gi v en f i r st (sentence P). Then the m i ner al bal ances that di d not change ar e
gr ouped i n a si ngl e statem ent (sentence Q). Al though the data ar e num er ous, they ar e l i sted at
the end of the par agr aph, so r eader s can stop r eadi ng i f they ar e not i nter ested. A separ ate tabl e
f or these data i s not adv i sabl e because these data do not hel p answ er the questi on.
Par agr aph 2 i s not the best par agr aph because i t contai ns a f ai r am ount of i nf or m ati on that can
be om i tted or condensed. The f i r st sentence i s a f i gur e l egend, w hi ch i s unnecessar y . Sentences
I–K can be condensed by about onethi r d. For ex am pl e, “N ei ther m ean dai l y ni tr ogen bal ance nor
the ni tr ogen bal ance dur i ng the f i r st or l ast w eek of the pr otei n di et w as si gni f i cantl y di f f er ent
f r om the cor r espondi ng v al ues f or the m i x ed di et (m ean, 2. 1 ± 0. 9 v s. 2. 6 ± 0. 4 g per day ; f i r st
w eek , 4. 9 ± 0. 5 v s. 4. 6 ± 0. 3 g per day ; and l ast w eek , 1. 0 ± 0. 6 v s. 1. 6 ± 0. 3 g per day , P >
0. 1). How ev er , ni tr ogen bal ance w as m or e negati v e dur i ng the f i r st w eek than dur i ng the l ast
w eek . ” Sentence L states a m ethod. The m ethod shoul d be subor di nated to the r esul t i n the nex t
sentence. For ex am pl e, “In the subject gi v en each di et f or 5½ w eek s, dai l y ni tr ogen bal ance w as
si m i l ar af ter the tw o di ets (Fi g. 3). ”
Another questi on that can be r ai sed about thi s Resul ts secti on i s w hether the or der of the
par agr aphs i s opti m al . The topi cs i n the questi on ar e ni tr ogen and sodi um bal ance and bl ood
pr essur e and nor epi nephr i ne, so these ar e the topi cs w e w oul d ex pect to see i n the Resul ts
secti on. Why the Resul ts secti on begi ns w i th substr ate and hor m one l ev el s i s not cl ear . Si m i l ar l y ,
w hy w ei ght l oss com es af ter r esul ts f or ni tr ogen and sodi um bal ance and bef or e r esul ts f or bl ood
pr essur e and nor epi nephr i ne i s not cl ear .
P. 385
Paragraph 6
Rev i si on 1 (Poi nt of v i ew : dependent var i abl e)
Pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne concentrati ons, one of our i ndi cator s of sy m patheti c ner vous acti v i ty, f el l
bel ow pr edi et val ues af ter the pr otei n di et but not af ter the m i xed di et. How ever, the l ow er
concentrati ons occur r ed onl y w hen the subjects l ay supi ne or af ter the subjects stood f or 2 m i n
(Fi g. 5). Af ter the subjects stood f or 5 or 10 m i n, the pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne concentrati ons w er e
no di f f er ent f r om those bef or e the di et.
(67 w or ds)
Onl y the pr otei n di et had an ef f ect on pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne. Af ter the pr otei n di et, pl asm a
nor epi nephr i ne concentrati ons, one of our i ndi cator s of sy m patheti c ner vous acti v i ty, w er e l ow er
than bef or e the di et both w hen subjects w er e supi ne and af ter they stood f or 2 m i n (Fi g. 5).
How ever, af ter the subjects stood f or 5 or 10 m i n, the concentrati ons w er e equal to those bef or e
the pr otei n di et.
(65 w or ds)
Changes in Content
Each r ev i si on m ak es the contr ast cl ear i n a topi c sentence. Si nce each topi c sentence
i ndi cates that the m i x ed di et had no ef f ect on nor epi nephr i ne concentr ati ons, i t i s
unnecessar y to gi v e detai l s of r esul ts f or the m i x ed di et. Thus, both r ev i si ons condense the
r esul ts.
Al l r esul ts ar e about concentr ati ons, not som e about concentr ati ons (or i gi nal sentence AA)
and som e about i ncr eases i n the concentr ati ons (or i gi nal sentences Z and BB). Thus, the
contr ast i s cl ear .
In addi ti on, the r ev i si ons condense par agr aph 6 (f r om 104 w or ds to 67 or 65 w or ds) by
om i tti ng the f i gur e l egend and ci ti ng the f i gur e af ter the f i r st speci f i c r esul t, and by
om i tti ng unnecessar y w or ds.
Pl asm a nor epi nephr i ne i s i denti f i ed as an i ndi cator of sy m patheti c ner v ous acti v i ty (by the
techni que of l i nk i ng k ey ter m s), thus m ak i ng the connecti on to the questi on cl ear .
Figure Citation
In both r ev i si ons, the f i gur e coul d be ci ted af ter the topi c sentence, si nce the topi c sentence
gi v es a speci f i c r esul t. But si nce the second sentence r ef i nes the poi nt m ade i n the topi c
sentence, by l i m i ti ng the change to tw o ti m e per i ods, ci ti ng the f i gur e af ter the second sentence
gi v es the r eader a better i dea of w hat to l ook f or i n the f i gur e.
Change in Continuity
The pr otei n di et i s m enti oned bef or e the m i x ed di et, so the or der i n the com par i son i s the sam e
as that i n par agr aphs 1, 3, 4, and 5.
Word Choice
In the or i gi nal v er si on, “w i th” i n “i n r esponse to standi ng w i th the hy pocal or i c m i x ed di et”
(sentence Z) i s not cl ear .
In the or i gi nal v er si on, “obser v ed” (sentence Z) and “i ni ti ati on of ” and “ther apy ” (sentences
Z and AA) ar e unnecessar y .
P. 386
[Ca 2 + ], w her eas PDGF caused a sustai ned i ncr ease (Fi g. 2). EThe di f f er ent ti m e cour ses of the
i ncr eases i nduced by thr om bi n and by P DG F suggest that the si gnal tr ansducti on m echani sm s f or
acti v ati on of phosphol i pase C by these tw o m i togens m i ght be di f f er ent.
2 FOne diffe re nc e be tw e e n the s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis ms might re la te to the
involve me nt of G prote ins . F'To deter m i ne w hether G pr otei ns ar e i nvol ved, w e used per tussi s
tox i n, w hi ch m odi f i es the f uncti on of som e G pr otei ns. GWe f ound that per tussi s tox i n
si gni f i cantl y bl unted the thr om bi ni nduced i ncr eases i n IP 3 (Fi g. 1) and i ntracel l ul ar [Ca 2 + ] (Fi g.
2), i ndi cati ng that a per tussi s tox i n–sensi ti v e G pr otei n i s i nv ol v ed i n the si gnal tr ansducti on
m echani sm f or thr om bi n. HIn contrast, per tussi s tox i n di d not af f ect the PDGFi nduced i ncr eases
i n ei ther the pr oducti on of IP 3 (Fi g. 1) or i ntracel l ul ar [Ca 2 + ] (Fi g. 2), i ndi cati ng that ei ther no G
pr otei n or a per tussi s tox i n–i nsensi ti v e G pr otei n i s i nv ol v ed i n the si gnal tr ansducti on
m echani sm f or PDGF.
3 ITo a s k w he the r the s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis m for a c tiva tion of phos pholipa s e C by
P DG F might involve a pe rtus s is tox in–ins e ns itive G prote in, w e e x a mine d the e ffe c t of
G TP γS, a s ta ble G TP a na log, on IP 3 produc tion in s a poninpe rme a bilize d va s c ula r s mooth
mus c le c e lls . JG TP γS ha s be e n s how n to pote ntia te ma ny G prote inme dia te d re s pons e s by
dire c t a c tiva tion of the G prote in (15–17). KWe f ound that i n per m eabi l i zed vascul ar sm ooth
m uscl e cel l s, GTPγ S i ncr eased IP 3 pr oducti on sy ner gi sti cal l y w i th both thr om bi n and PDGF (Fi g.
3). LThus, unl i k e thr om bi n, PDGF m ay use a per tussi s tox i n–i nsensi ti v e G pr otei n f or acti v ati on of
phosphol i pase C.
4 MTo s upport the notion tha t a pe rtus s is tox in–ins e ns itive G prote in is involve d in the
s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis m for P DG F, w e te s te d gua nos ine 5′ O(2thiodiphos pha te )
(G DP βS), a n a na log of G DP . M'G DP βS blunts G prote inme dia te d c e llula r re s pons e s by
c ompe ting w ith G TP for binding (18). N We f ound that GDPβS bl unted PDGFi nduced IP 3
pr oducti on i n per m eabi l i zed cel l s (Fi g. 4). OThus, w her eas thr om bi n uses a per tussi s tox i n–
sensi ti v e G pr otei n as a si gnal tr ansducer to acti v ate phosphol i pase C i n v ascul ar sm ooth m uscl e
cel l s, PDGF appear s to use a per tussi s tox i n–i nsensi ti v e G pr otei n.
P. 387
5 PAn a dditiona l c ha ra c te ris tic of G prote in–me dia te d a c tiva tion of phos pholipa s e C in s ome
s ys te ms is tha t the y a re ofte n s ubje c t to fe e dba c k re gula tion by prote in k ina s e C.
P'The re fore a s e c ond diffe re nc e be tw e e n the s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis ms for a c tiva tion
of phos pholipa s e C by thrombin a nd P DG F might be tha t the s e me c ha nis ms a re not e qua lly
s e ns itive to fe e dba c k re gula tion by prote in k ina s e C. P”To c he c k this pos s ibility, w e te s te d
the prote in k ina s e C s timula tor, phorbol 12myris ta te 13a c e ta te (P MA), w hic h blunts G
prote in–me dia te d a c tiva tion of phos pholipa s e C in s ome s ys te ms (19). QWe f ound that, i n
vascul ar sm ooth m uscl e cel l s, PMA str ongl y i nhi bi ted thr om bi ni nduced, but not PDGFi nduced, IP 3
pr oducti on (Fi g. 5). RPMA di d not af f ect basal pr oducti on of IP 3 (200 v s. 215 cpm /di sh).
S Consi stent w i th i ts ef f ect on IP 3 pr oducti on, PMA bl unted thr om bi ni nduced, but not PDGF
i nduced, Ca 2 + m obi l i zati on (Fi g. 6). T Thi s ef f ect of PMA r equi r es f uncti onal pr otei n k i nase C,
si nce PMA di d not i nhi bi t thr om bi ni nduced Ca 2 + m obi l i zati on i n cel l s that w er e m ade def i ci ent i n
pr otei n k i nase C acti v i ty (data not show n). T'Thus, w her eas the si gnal transducti on m echani sm
f or thr om bi n i s inhibite d by pr otei n k i nase C, the si gnal tr ansducti on m echani sm f or PDGF i s not.
7 XAnothe r pos s ible ta rge t for P MA a c tion is the G prote in its e lf. YTo inve s tiga te this
pos s ibility, w e e x a mine d the e ffe c t of P MA on G TP γSinduc e d inos itol phos pha te re le a s e .
ZGTPγ S caused a pr ogr essi ve r el ease of i nosi tol phosphate, w hi ch was i nhi bi ted by 55% by PMA
tr eatm ent (Fi g. 8), suggesti ng that PMA i nhi bi ts thr om bi ni nduced cel l ul ar r esponses by af f ecti ng
the f uncti on of the G pr otei n di r ectl y .
3–4 ITo a s k w he the r the s igna l tra ns duc tion me c ha nis m for a c tiva tion of phos pholipa s e C
by P DG F might involve a pe rtus s is tox in–ins e ns itive G prote in, w e e x a mine d the e ffe c t of
G TP γS, a s ta ble G TP a na log, on IP 3 produc tion in s a poninpe rme a bilize d va s c ula r s mooth
mus c le c e lls . JG TP γS ha s be e n s how n to pote ntia te ma ny G prote in–me dia te d re s pons e s by
dire c t a c tiva tion of the G prote in (15–17). KWe f ound that i n per m eabi l i zed vascul ar sm ooth
m uscl e cel l s, GTPγ S i ncr eased IP 3 pr oducti on sy ner gi sti cal l y w i th both thr om bi n and PDGF (Fi g.
3). MTo c onfirm the e ffe c t of G TP γS, w e te s te d gua nos ine 5′ O(2thiodiphos pha te )
(G DP βS), a n a na log of G DP . M'G DP βS blunts G prote in–me dia te d c e llula r re s pons e s by
c ompe ting w ith G TP for binding (18). N We f ound that GDPβS bl unted PDGFi nduced IP 3
pr oducti on i n per m eabi l i zed cel l s (Fi g. 4). OThus, w her eas thr om bi n uses a per tussi s tox i n–
sensi ti v e G pr otei n as a si gnal tr ansducer to acti v ate phosphol i pase C i n v ascul ar sm ooth m uscl e
cel l s, PDGF appear s to use a per tussi s tox i n–i nsensi ti v e G pr otei n.
P. 388
Par a. 1
A, A'. Addi ng the questi on, the r eason, and an ov er v i ew of the ex per i m ent, and l i nk i ng
of the k ey ter m s “IP 3 , IP 2 , and IP” and “phosphol i pase C” at the begi nni ng.
D. Addi ng the r eason and an ov er v i ew of the ex per i m ent f or the cal ci um ex per i m ent.
A”. Addi ng a si gnal of the r esul ts (al so added i n par as. 2 and 4).
Par a. 2
F, F'. Addi ng a topi c sentence to state w hat the di f f er ence m i ght be and m ak i ng the
questi on m or e speci f i c, thus pr epar i ng the r eader to hear about G pr otei ns.
H. Addi ng the m i ssi ng answ er f or PDGF at the end of par agr aph 2, to pr epar e f or
par agr aph 3 (and m ak i ng the answ er f or PDGF par al l el to the answ er f or thr om bi n).
Par a. 3
I. Cal l i ng the m echani sm “the si gnal tr ansducti on m echani sm , ” not the “per tussi s tox i n–
i nsensi ti v e m echani sm , ” to av oi d assum i ng the r esul t bef or e doi ng the ex per i m ent, and
changi ng the questi on to “m i ght i nv ol v e a per tussi s tox i n–i nsensi ti v e G pr otei n, ” to be
consi stent w i th the answ er at the end of par agr aph 2.
L. Changi ng the answ er to state a di f f er ence betw een the tw o m echani sm s r ather than
a si m i l ar i ty , thus answ er i ng the questi on ask ed at the begi nni ng of the par agr aph and
r estati ng the questi on of the paper .
Par a. 4
M. Ei ther m ov i ng the pur pose f r om the second sentence to the begi nni ng or (better )
¶3 and 4. putti ng the contr ol i n the sam e par agr aph as the ex per i m ent.
Par a. 5
P, P', P”. Addi ng a sentence of back gr ound and the m i ssi ng questi on i n par agr aph 5,
f ol l ow ed by a tr ansi ti on phr ase (“To check thi s possi bi l i ty ”) to i denti f y the questi on
(stated as a possi bi l i ty ) i n P'.
A cr uci al poi nt i s that the questi on i n P' i s par al l el to the questi on i n F at the begi nni ng
of par agr aph 2. These tw o questi ons, F and P', connect to the questi on of the paper and
m ak e the ov er al l stor y (“f or est”) cl ear .
T'. Addi ng the m i ssi ng answ er at the end of the par agr aph.
CHAPTER 7
P. 389
Discussion
1 A Contrar y to our ex pectati on, thi s study show s that inc re a s ing c ontra c tility, not inc re a s ing
he a rt ra te , is the mos t e ffe c tive me thod of inc re a s ing c a rdia c output in young la mbs .
B Decr easi ng af ter l oad and i ncr easi ng pr el oad, as ex pected, ar e al so not ef f ecti ve. C We f ound that
i ncr easi ng contracti l i ty by i nf usi ng i sopr oter enol w hi l e hear t rate was f i xed i ncr eased car di ac
output by 37% i n the younger l am bs (5–13 day s) and by 62% i n the ol der l am bs (15–36 day s).
D Incontrast, i ncr easi ng hear t rate above basel i ne di d not si gni f i cantl y i ncr ease car di ac output i n
the younger l am bs (4%) and i ncr eased car di ac output onl y m oderatel y i n the ol der l am bs (11%).
E Decr easi ng af ter l oad by i nf usi ng ni tr opr ussi de at a f i xed hear t rate had the sam e ef f ects as
i ncr easi ng hear t rate di d (2 and 11%). F Incr easi ng pr el oad by i nf usi ng bl ood or 0. 9% N aCl
i ncr eased car di ac output m oderatel y (by 20 and 16%, though the 16% i ncr ease was not
stati sti cal l y si gni f i cant).
2 G The r eason w e had not ex pected i ncr easi ng contracti l i ty to i ncr ease car di ac output
substanti al l y i s that in ne w borns c ontra c tility is ne a rly ma x ima l s o tha t the infa nt c a n
s urvive inde pe nde ntly of the mothe r. H N ever thel ess, the i ncr eases i n car di ac output r esul ti ng
f r om i ncr easi ng contracti l i ty, though sm al l by adul t standar ds (37 and 62% v s. about 800%),
w er e m uch gr eater than the i ncr eases r esul ti ng f r om i ncr easi ng hear t rate, decr easi ng af ter l oad,
and i ncr easi ng pr el oad.
3 I The re a s on for the une x pe c te dly s ma ll e ffe c t of inc re a s ing he a rt ra te is unc e rta in. J One
pos s ibility is tha t it w a s due to the pa c ing ra te . K Al though the basel i ne paci ng rate w e used,
200 beats/m i n, appr ox i m ates the r esti ng hear t rate of 1 to 2w eekol d l am bs, i t i s f aster than
the r esti ng hear t rate of 170 beats/m i n of 3 to 4w eekol d l am bs. L Ther ef or e, one coul d ar gue
that i f the basel i ne paci ng rate had been l ow er, l ar ger i ncr eases i n car di ac output coul d have
been attai ned by i ncr easi ng hear t rate above basel i ne. M How ever, our data show that the
m ax i m al per centage i ncr ease i n car di ac output that w oul d have been attai ned i f 170 beats/m i n
had been used as a basel i ne paci ng rate w oul d have been onl y 17. 5% i n the younger l am bs and
21. 0% i n the ol der l am bs. N These i ncr eases ar e f ar l ess than those w e f ound af ter i ncr easi ng
contracti l i ty (37% and 62%, r especti vel y ). O The re fore , the s ma ll e ffe c t tha t inc re a s ing he a rt
ra te ha d on inc re a s ing c a rdia c output is proba bly not due to the pa c ing ra te w e us e d.
4 P Anothe r pos s ibility is tha t the me thod w e us e d for c ontrolling he a rt ra te —ve ntric ula r
pa c ing—ma y ha ve c a us e d s ma lle r inc re a s e s in c a rdia c output tha n w ould re s ult from
s e que ntia l a triove ntric ula r pa c ing. Q Indeed, i t i s w el l k now n that atr i al sy stol e pl ay s an
i m por tant r ol e i n deter m i ni ng ef f ecti ve ventr i cul ar str oke vol um e (9). R How ever, i t i s unl i kel y
that i ncr eases i n car di ac output r esul ti ng f r om sequenti al atr i oventr i cul ar paci ng w oul d have been
gr eater than those r esul ti ng f r om i ncr easi ng contracti l i ty by i nf usi ng i sopr oter enol because at the
hear t rate at w hi ch w e w er e paci ng, atr i al contr i buti ons to car di ac output ar e m i ni m al (6). S Thus ,
he a rt ra te a ppe a rs to be le s s importa nt tha n c ontra c tility for inc re a s ing c a rdia c output in
young la mbs . T N ever thel ess, hear t rate i s i m por tant f or m ai ntai ni ng car di ac output, si nce w e
f ound that decr easi ng hear t rate bel ow basel i ne gr eatl y decr eased car di ac output.
6 AA The la s t me thod of inc re a s ing c a rdia c output tha t w e te s te d, inc re a s ing pre loa d by
infus ing blood or 0. 9% Na Cl, yie lde d a s ma lle r pe rc e nta ge inc re a s e in c a rdia c output tha n
pre vious ly re porte d (1). B B The re a s ons for the s ma lle r pe rc e nta ge inc re a s e a re pa rtly tha t
w e infus e d s ma lle r volume s a nd pa rtly tha t the ba s e line pre loa ds w e re s ome w ha t highe r in
our la mbs be c a us e of ve ntric ula r pa c ing. C C Si nce the pr el oads of the l am bs i n our study w er e
hi gher than nor m al , the per centage i ncr ease attai nabl e by i ncr easi ng pr el oad was l ess. D D It i s
possi bl e, ther ef or e, that l ar ger i ncr eases i n car di ac output ar e attai nabl e by i nf usi ng l ar ger
am ounts of f l ui d i nto young l am bs that have nor m al atr i oventr i cul ar node conducti on.
7 EE Anothe r re a s on for our s ma lle r pe rc e nta ge inc re a s e s in c a rdia c output a fte r inc re a s ing
pre loa d c ould be tha t our indic a tor of pre loa d w a s ina c c ura te . F F The indic a tor w e us e d,
me a n le ft a tria l pre s s ure , ma y not be a s e ns itive indic a tor of pre loa d in the pre s e nc e of
a triove ntric ula r bloc k a de . GG To obtai n a m or e accurate assessm ent of pr el oad, w e m easur ed
l ef t ventr i cul ar enddi astol i c pr essur e i n tw o l am bs. H H How ever, l ef t ventr i cul ar enddi astol i c
pr essur e was di f f i cul t to i nter pr et because of w i de var i ati ons i n pr essur e at the sam e hear t rate.
I I These var i ati ons r esul ted ei ther f r om al terati ons i n the tem poral r el ati onshi p betw een atr i al and
ventr i cul ar contracti ons or f r om m ovem ent of the ventr i cul ar septum i nto the l ef t ventr i cl e dur i ng
r i ght ventr i cul ar paci ng. J J Ther ef or e, w e used m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e to m easur e pr el oad.
KK W e be lie ve tha t a lthough me a n le ft a tria l pre s s ure ma y not re fle c t ra pid va ria tions in
pre loa d in the pre s e nc e of a triove ntric ula r bloc k a de , it a c c ura te ly me a s ure s ge ne ra l
pre loa d s ta te a nd c ha nge s in pre loa d s ta te .
8 L L In c ontra s t to pre vious re ports , w e found tha t is oprote re nol did not c ons is te ntly ha ve
hypote ns ive e ffe c ts . M M Mean aor ti c pr essur e decr eased i n the younger l am bs dur i ng
i sopr oter enol i nf usi on (Fi g. 4A), as i t di d i n pr ev i ous studi es (11–13). N N How ever, m ean aor ti c
pr essur e i ncr eased i n the ol der l am bs, and sy stol i c aor ti c pr essur e i ncr eased i n both gr oups of
l am bs dur i ng i sopr oter enol i nf usi on. O O These i ncr eases ar e i n contrast to pr ev i ous r epor ts of
decr eases i n m ean and sy stol i c aor ti c pr essur es dur i ng i sopr oter enol i nf usi on (12, 14). P P Si nce
the m ajor di f f er ence betw een our study and these other studi es was that the hear t rate was f i xed
i n our l am bs, i t i s possi bl e that som e of the hy potensi ve ef f ects of i sopr oter enol ar e due to i ts
str ong ef f ects on hear t rate.
9 O O In sum m ar y , thi s study show s that inc re a s ing c ontra c tility, a nd not inc re a s ing he a rt ra te ,
is the mos t e ffe c tive me thod of inc re a s ing
P . 391
c a rdia c output in young la mbs . RR Al though the i ncr ease i n car di ac output i n r esponse to
i ncr easi ng contracti l i ty i s l ess i n younger than i n ol der l am bs, i t i s sti l l gr eater than that
attai nabl e by changes i n hear t rate, af ter l oad, or pr el oad. SS N ever thel ess, i ncr easi ng car di ac
output i s of l i m i ted benef i t to the new bor n, m uch l ess than i ts benef i t to the adul t. TT Ther ef or e,
w hen tr eati ng the str essed new bor n, the cl i ni ci an m ust not onl y attem pt to i ncr ease car di ac
output i n or der to i ncr ease ox ygen suppl y, but m ust aggr essi vel y attem pt to m i ni m i ze ox ygen
dem and.
COMMENTS
1. In par agr aph 1, the si gnal of the answ er (sentence A) i s “thi s study show s that. ”
The statem ent of the answ er (sentences A, B) i s “i ncr easi ng contr acti l i ty , not
i ncr easi ng hear t r ate, i s the m ost ef f ecti v e m ethod of i ncr easi ng car di ac output i n
y oung l am bs. Decr easi ng af ter l oad and i ncr easi ng pr el oad, as ex pected, ar e al so not
ef f ecti v e. ”
The ani m al i s i ncl uded i n the answ er (sentence A), just as i t i s i n the questi on, and i s
r epeated i n the r esul ts (C, D).
2. The answ er (sentence A) answ er s the questi on: the k ey ter m s and the v er b ar e the sam e;
the v er b i s i n pr esent tense. How ev er , the or der of the v ar i abl es i s changed to put the
unex pected answ er f i r st.
3. The stor y l i ne i s cl ear , ex cept that ther e i s no conti nui ty f r om par agr aph 7 to par agr aph 8.
The Di scussi on i s or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant.
Par agr aph 1 states the answ er and the suppor ti ng r esul ts.
Par agr aphs 2–5 ex pl ai n the answ er : f i r st the answ er the author s got (par a. 2), then the
answ er they ex pected but di d not get (par as. 3 and 4), and then an answ er they di d not
ex pect and di d not get (par a. 5).
Par agr aphs 6–8 ex pl ai n di scr epanci es w i th the l i ter atur e: f i r st a di scr epancy f or one of
the i ndependent v ar i abl es (par as. 6 and 7) and then a di scr epancy f or a v ar i abl e not i n
the questi on (par a. 8).
The topi c sentences i n each par agr aph ar e i n bol df ace. Par agr aphs 3 and 6 begi n w i th
secti on topi c sentences, w hi ch cov er tw o par agr aphs (par as. 3 and 4 and par as. 6 and
7, r especti v el y ). Each secti on topi c sentence i s f ol l ow ed by a par agr aph topi c sentence.
The par agr aph topi c sentence at the begi nni ng of par agr aph 3 (sentence J) states the
topi c of the par agr aph. The par agr aph topi c sentence at the end of par agr aph 3
(sentence O) states the m essage of the par agr aph.
Par agr aph 5 al so has thr ee topi c sentences. U states the topi c of the par agr aph. V
states the m essage of the par agr aph. Z states the m essage m or e speci f i cal l y , based on
the suppor ti ng sentences (W–Y).
Tr ansi ti on w or ds, phr ases, and cl auses ar e i n i tal i cs. Repeated k ey ter m s ar e
under l i ned. The conti nui ty i n thi s Di scussi on depends heav i l y on r epeated k ey ter m s.
Conti nui ty betw een par agr aphs 3 and 4 i s al so assi sted by the par al l el tr ansi ti on
cl auses. In par agr aph 6, l i nk i ng k ey ter m s at the begi nni ng of AA f uncti ons as a
tr ansi ti on phr ase.
4. The si gnal of the endi ng (par agr aph 9) i s “i n sum m ar y . ” The si gnal of the answ er i s “thi s
study show s that. ”
The endi ng r estates the answ er and i ndi cates the i m por tance of the w or k by stati ng a
cl i ni cal i m pl i cati on (SS) f ol l ow ed by a r ecom m endati on (TT).
5. The answ er at the end m atches the answ er at the begi nni ng.
P. 392
Discussion 2
Questi on: To deter m i ne w hether the β 3 (118–131) sequence of the β 3 subuni t of i ntegr i n α IIb β 3
bi nds l i gand and al so bi nds cati on.
Discussion
1 A When pl atel ets ar e acti vated by agoni sts such as ADP or epi nephr i ne, i ntegr i n α IIb β 3 under goes
conf or m ati onal changes to becom e com petent to bi nd f i br i nogen and other l i gands (35, 37). B In
thi s study , w e pr ov i de f uncti onal ev i dence that the β 3 (118–131) s e que nc e of the β 3 s ubunit of
inte grin α I I b β 3 binds the liga nd fibronoge n and that it a ls o binds c a tion. C Cati on bi ndi ng i s
sur pr i si ng because i t occur s even though β 3 (118–131), w hi ch par ti al l y conf or m s to an EF handl i ke
m oti f that bi nds Ca 2 + i n m any pr otei ns (3, 54), l ack s the usual Gl y [but i n β 3 (118–131), i t i s Met
126] at the m i dposi ti on and gl u [but i n β 3 (118–131), i t i s Ser 130] as the l ast ox ygenated
coor di nati on si te.
2 D Thre e inde pe nde nt line s of inve s tiga tion provide func tiona l e vide nc e tha t the β 3 (118–
131) s e que nc e of α I I b β 3 binds the liga nd fibrinoge n. E Fi r st, m onocl onal anti body (MAb) 454,
w hi ch i s di r ected agai nst β 3 (118–131), bl ocked pl atel et aggr egati on and pl atel et adhesi on to
f i br i nogen, tw o f uncti onal r esponses that depend upon bi ndi ng of f i br i nogen to α IIb β 3 . F MAb 454
al so bl ocked bi ndi ng of f i br i nogen to pur i f i ed α IIb β 3 . G Second, the bl ock i ng ef f ects of the β 3 (118–
128) pepti de r ecapi tul ated those of the MAb. H Speci f i cal l y, thi s pepti de bl ocked pl atel et
aggr egati on and pl atel et adhesi on to f i br i nogen and bl ocked the bi ndi ng of f i br i nogen to pur i f i ed
α IIb β 3 . I Thi r d, m ass spectr oscopy dem onstrated that a com pl ex f or m ed betw een the β 3 (118–131)
pepti de and RGD l i gand pepti des. J The speci f i ci ty of thi s com pl ex i ng was i ndi cated by the pr eci se
stoi chi om etr y, 1:1, w i th w hi ch the com pl ex f or m ed, by the saturati on of com pl ex f or m ati on as a
f uncti on of i ncr easi ng RGD pepti de concentrati on, and by the f ai l ur e of num er ous other pepti des
to com pl ex w i th β 3 (118–131). K How e ve r, this c omple x ing, though s pe c ific , ma y not be
s e le c tive . Lβ
3 (118–131) m ay al so f or m com pl exes w i th the f i br i nogen γ chai n dodecapepti de.
M Al though
our m ass spectr oscopy ex per i m ents di d not detect com pl exes of thi s γ chai n
dodecapepti de w i th β 3 (118–131), thi s l ack of detecti on does not necessar i l y m ean that these
com pl exes do not occur. N The r eason these com pl exes w er e not detected m ay be that the af f i ni ty
betw een the γ chai n dodecapepti de and β 3 (118–131) i s l ow. O Al ter nati vel y, speci f i c env i r onm ental
r equi r em ents m ay have r educed the stabi l i ty of the com pl exes or m ay have pr evented detecti on
of the com pl exes, or both. P Thus , our da ta indic a te tha t β 3 (118–131) binds liga nd
s pe c ific a lly, but not tha t β 3 (118–131) ha s s e le c tive s pe c ific ity for the RG D liga nd pe ptide .
3 Q In a ddition to our finding tha t β 3 (118–131) binds liga nd, tw o inde pe nde nt a pproa c he s
provide c le a r e vide nc e tha t β 3 (118–131) binds c a tion. R One appr oach, f l uor escence ener gy
transf er f r om pr ox i m al Tr p and Ty r r esi dues, show ed that β 3 (118–131) bound Tb 3 + . S Thi s bi ndi ng
was i nhi bi ted by Ca 2 + , Mg 2 + , and Mn 2 + , i ndi cati ng the di val ent cati on bi ndi ng capabi l i ti es of
β 3 (118–131). T CAM m utant β 3 (118–131), i n w hi ch Asp119 i s r epl aced by Ty r, bound Tb 3 + to a
m uch l esser degr ee than di d w i l dty pe β 3 (118–131). U Thi s f i ndi ng str esses the i m por tance of the
am i noter m i nal coor di nati on si te, Asp119, f or cati on bi ndi ng f uncti on. V The other appr oach
show i ng that β 3 (118–131) bi nds cati on, m ass spectr oscopy, al so dem onstrated f or m ati on of a
com pl ex betw een β 3 (118–131) and Tb 3 + . W How ever, unl i ke the f l uor escence data, w hi ch show ed a
the importa nc e of As p119 in providing one of the c oordina tion s ite s for Tb 3+ binding.
4 Y Our finding tha t the β 3 (118–131) s e que nc e of the β 3 s ubunit of inte grin a lpha ; I I b β 3 binds
not only liga nd but a ls o c a tion s ugge s ts a ne w mode l for the me c ha nis m of liga nd binding to
inte grins . Z The m odel , w hi ch w e cal l the “cati on di spl acem ent m odel ,” pr oposes that, as a f i r st
step, cati on i s bound to a l i gandbi ndi ng si te on the i ntegi n r eceptor (Fi gur e 7). AA N ex t, an
unstabl e ter nar y i nter m edi ate com pl ex i s f or m ed betw een the r eceptor, the cati on, and the
l i gand. B B Eventual l y, as the com pl ex betw een the l i gand and the r eceptor stabi l i zes, the cati on i s
di spl aced f r om thi s com pl ex , l eav i ng the l i gand bound to the r eceptor. C C The m ost l i kel y r eason
that cati ons ar e transi entl y bound to the r eceptor i s to pr esent the l i gandbi ndi ng si tes w i thi n the
r eceptor i n a conf or m ati on that can captur e a l i gand. D D Af ter a l i gand i s captur ed, the cati on i s
no l onger r equi r ed at the l i gandbi ndi ng si te and can be di spl aced by the l i gand. EE In this mode l,
the s ta bility of the te rna ry inte rme dia te c omple x ma y va ry de pe nding upon the pa rtic ula r
inte grin, the pa rtic ula r c a tion, a nd the pa rtic ula r liga nd involve d. F F For i ntegr i n α IIb β 3 ,
ev i dence that the ter nar y i nter m edi ate com pl ex that f or m s i s unstabl e i s our f i ndi ng that RGD
l i gands di spl aced cati on f r om β 3 (118–131). GG Thi s f i ndi ng al so i ndi cates that l i gand and cati on
bi ndi ng to β 3 (118–131) ar e m utual l y excl usi ve. H H Str ong suppor t f or the i nstabi l i ty of thi s ter nar y
i nter m edi ate com pl ex i s that l i gandi nduced bi ndi ng si te (LIBS) epi topes w i thi n α IIb β 3 ar e ex posed
both w hen l i gand bi nds to the r eceptor and w hen cati ons f r om the r eceptor ar e chel ated i n the
absence of l i gand (13, 17). I I Thus , in our c a tion dis pla c e me nt mode l, the liga ndbinding s ite
w ithin the inte grin ma y be vie w e d a s a re a c tive c e nte r, in w hic h the c a tion, liga nd, a nd
s pe c ific liga ndbinding s ite s w ithin the re c e ptor form a n uns ta ble te rna ry inte rme dia te
c omple x .
5 J J The dis pla c e me nt of c a tions tha t w e propos e in our mode l of liga nd binding to inte grins
ma y a c tua lly oc c ur a t tw o liga ndbinding s ite s in the re c e ptor. KK The possi bi l i ty of
di spl acem ent at tw o si tes i s i ndi cated by our equi l i br i um gel f i l trati on ex per i m ents, w hi ch
detected the di spl acem ent of appr ox i m atel y tw o cati ons (Mn 2 + ) f r om i ntact α IIb β 3 af ter addi ti on
of ei ther m acr om ol ecul ar or pepti de l i gands. L L Our data ar e consi stent w i th β 3 (118–131) bei ng
one of these si tes. M M It i s tem pti ng to specul ate that α IIb (296–306) m ay be the second si te.
N N The re a s on is tha t, in ma ny w a ys , α I I b (296–306) is s imila r to β 3 (118–131). O O Li ke
β 3 (118–131), α IIb (296–306) contai ns the second EF handl i ke m oti f f ound w i thi n α IIb , and l i ke
β 3 (118–131) pepti des, pepti des f r om w i thi n α IIb (296–306) i nhi bi t l i gand bi ndi ng by the r eceptor
(11, 53). P P In addi ti on, di r ect com par i son suggests that β 3 (118–131) and α IIb (296–306) ar e
si m i l ar l y potent i n i nhi bi ti ng l i gand occupancy on the r eceptor. Q Q Fi nal l y, both β 3 (118–131) and
α IIb (296–306) ar e hi ghl y conser ved am ong the i ntegr i n β and α subuni ts (9, 10). RR Thus , β 3 (118–
131) a nd α I I b (296–306) c ould both be liga ndbinding s ite s . SSBecause several such bi ndi ng
si tes m ay be necessar y to achi eve hi ghaf f i ni ty l i gand bi ndi ng (38), i t i s possi bl e that β 3 (118–
131) and α IIb (296–306) m ay contr i bute l i gand bi ndi ng, cati on bi ndi ng, or both to i ntegr i n f uncti on.
TT If so, conf or m ati onal l i nk age betw een these tw o cati onbi ndi ng si tes, such as obser ved f or
m any EF handl i ke Ca 2 + bi ndi ng l oops (51), m ay ex pl ai n w hy tw o cati ons ar e di spl aced by a si ngl e
l i gandbi ndi ng event. UU How ever, an al ter nati ve possi bi l i ty, that tw o RGD l i gand pepti des can bi nd
per r eceptor, cannot be enti r el y excl uded. V V Stei ner et al . (50) detected onl y one RGDbi ndi ng
P. 394
si te on α IIb βb 3 , but thei r study used a r el ati vel y m i nor subpopul ati on of i sol ated r eceptor s.
6 W W An importa nt pre dic tion of our c a tion dis pla c e me nt mode l is tha t diva le nt c a tions
c ould drive the liga ndbinding e ve nt in re ve rs e , the re by s uppre s s ing a n inte grin's liga nd
binding func tion. X X In f act, ther e i s ev i dence that thi s suppr essi on does occur. Y Y Speci f i c
di val ent cati ons can i nter f er e w i th the l i gandbi ndi ng f uncti on of α L β 2 (8, 55) α 2 β 1 (20, 49), and
α v β 3 (25). ZZ Our f i ndi ng that di val ent cati ons and l i gands can com pete f or the sam e si te on an
i ntegr i n pr ov i des a str uctural basi s f or these obser vati ons. AAA This mode l ma y a ls o ha ve
implic a tions for inte grin a c tiva tion (18). B B B Speci f i cal l y, acti vati on of i ntegr i n m ay i nvol ve
conf or m ati onal changes i n the i ntegr i n that f avor l i gandr eceptor com pl exes rather than ter nar y
com pl exes or cati onr eceptor com pl exes. C C C Fina lly, a n in vivo c ons e que nc e of our c a tion
dis pla c e me nt mode l ma y re la te to bone re s orption. D D D Integr i n α v β 3 i s the r eceptor on
osteocl asts essenti al f or adhesi on to the bone sur f ace (7, 28). EEE Li berati on
of Ca 2 + f r om
m i neral i zed bone coul d di ssoci ate α v β 3 f r om i ts bone l i gands, com pr om i si ng the i ntegr i ty of
osteocl ast adhesi on.
COMMENTS
1. In par agr aph 1, the si gnal of the answ er (i n sentence B) i s “i n thi s study , w e pr ov i de
f uncti onal ev i dence that… and that. ”
The statem ent of the answ er (sentence B) i s “the β 3 (118–131) sequence of the β 3
subuni t of i ntegr i n αIIbβ 3 bi nds the l i gand f i br i nogen and… i t al so bi nds cati on. ”
The tr ansi ti ons to the suppor ti ng r esul ts (par a. 2, sentence D, and par a. 3, sentence Q)
ar e “Thr ee i ndependent l i nes of i nv esti gati on pr ov i de f uncti onal ev i dence that the
β 3 (118–131) sequence of αIIbβ 3 bi nds the l i gand f i br i nogen” and “In addi ti on to our
f i ndi ng that β 3 (118–131) bi nds l i gand, tw o i ndependent appr oaches pr ov i de cl ear
ev i dence that β 3 (118–131) bi nds cati on. ”
The r esul ts ar e stated i n the suppor ti ng sentences of par agr aph 2 (E–P) and par agr aph
3 (R–X).
The ani m al i s not m enti oned any w her e i n the Di scussi on. It shoul d be added.
2. The answ er (sentence B) answ er s the questi on: the k ey ter m s, the v er b, and the or der ar e
the sam e; the v er b i s i n pr esent tense.
Par agr aph 1 states the answ er af ter a sentence of back gr ound and bef or e a com m ent
on the sur pr i se.
Par agr aphs 2 and 3 ar e the r esul ts that suppor t the answ er , f i r st f or l i gand (par a. 2)
and then f or cati on (par a. 3).
Par agr aphs 4 and 5 pr opose a m odel f or l i gand bi ndi ng, based on the answ er .
Par agr aph 4 descr i bes the m odel . Par agr aph 5 i denti f i es tw o l oci of cati on di spl acem ent
i n the m odel .
The f i r st sentences of par agr aphs 2–5 ar e al l par agr aph topi c sentences.
In par agr aph 2, sentence D i s the topi c sentence stati ng the m essage of the par agr aph.
Sentence K i s a topi c sentence f or a subtopi c. Sentence P i s a topi c sentence r estati ng
the m essage i n m or e detai l .
In par agr aph 3, the topi c sentence at the begi nni ng (Q) begi ns w i th a tr ansi ti on phr ase,
w hi ch r epeats the m essage of par agr aph 2 and thus l i nk s par agr aph 3 to par agr aph 2.
The m ai n subject, v er b, and com pl eter i n sentence Q, w hi ch ar e par al l el to those i n
sentence D, state the m essage.
P. 395
Sentence X i s a topi c sentence at the end of the par agr aph r estati ng and ex pandi ng the
m essage.
In par agr aph 4, the subject of the topi c sentence (Y) r estates the answ er , thus l i nk i ng
par agr aph 4 to par agr aphs 1–3. The v er b and com pl eter state the topi c of par agr aph 4
(the new m odel ). Thi s par agr aph has thr ee subtopi cs: Z–BB descr i be the m odel
(si gnal ed by the k ey ter m “m odel ” i n the subject of sentence Z); CC–DD state the
r eason f or tr ansi ent bi ndi ng of cati on (the m ai n f eatur e of the m odel ) (si gnal ed by a
tr ansi ti on cl ause: “The m ost l i k el y r eason that cati ons ar e tr ansi entl y bound to the
r eceptor i s… ”); EE–HH di scuss the (i n)stabi l i ty of the m odel (si gnal ed by a tr ansi ti on
phr ase, “i n thi s m odel , ” f ol l ow ed by the k ey ter m “stabi l i ty ” as the subject of sentence
EE). At the end of the par agr aph, sentence II sum m ar i zes the m odel , thus stati ng the
m essage of the par agr aph.
In par agr aph 5, topi c sentence JJ states the m essage. N N i s a subtopi c sentence. RR i s
a topi c sentence that r estates the m essage of the par agr aph m or e speci f i cal l y than JJ.
In par agr aph 6, WW i s not a topi c sentence f or the par agr aph. The tr ansi ti on cl ause at
the begi nni ng of WW si gnal s the f i r st subtopi c, w hi ch i s al so the topi c of the par agr aph
—i m pl i cati ons. The r est of sentence WW i s a subtopi c sentence f or the f i r st of thr ee
i m pl i cati ons. Sentences AAA and CCC ar e subtopi c sentences f or the second and thi r d
i m pl i cati ons.
Tr ansi ti on w or ds and cl auses ar e i n i tal i cs. Repeated k ey ter m s ar e under l i ned. The
conti nui ty i n thi s Di scussi on depends heav i l y on r epeated k ey ter m s. Conti nui ty
betw een par agr aphs 2 and 3 i s al so assi sted by par al l el f or m and by a tr ansi ti on
phr ase at the begi nni ng of the par agr aph.
The endi ng i ndi cates the i m por tance of the w or k by stati ng thr ee i m pl i cati ons.
For som e r eader s, usi ng i m pl i cati ons as an endi ng m ay not seem concl usi v e. To sati sf y
these r eader s, the f ol l ow i ng par agr aph coul d be added, sum m ar i zi ng the answ er , the
m odel , and the i m pl i cati ons:
7 Thus, i n thi s study , w e pr ov i de f uncti onal ev i dence that the β 3 (118–131) sequence of the β 3
subuni t of i ntegr i n α IIb β 3 bi nds the l i gand f i br i nogen and that i t al so bi nds cati on. Thi s bi ndi ng
suggests a new cati on di spl acem ent m odel f or the m echani sm of l i gand bi ndi ng to i ntegr i ns. If
tr ue, thi s m odel has i m por tant i m pl i cati ons about suppr essi on of l i gand bi ndi ng by i ntegr i ns,
about i ntegr i n acti vati on, and about bone r esor pti on.
In par agr aph 7, “thus” si gnal s the end, “i n thi s study , w e pr ov i de f uncti onal ev i dence that… and
that” si gnal s the answ er , and the answ er m atches the answ er stated at the begi nni ng.
Topics of Paragraphs
Paragraphs 1–3: Intr oducti on
P. 396
The answ er to questi on 2 i s not stated. The r esul ts f or questi on 2 ar e pr esented i n par agr aph 5.
N ote that “absent” shoul d be added af ter “decr eased” i n sentence W (com par e sentence N i n par a.
4 and sentence II i n par a. 8). The answ er i s hi nted at i n sentence Y, the l ast sentence of
par agr aph 5. How ev er , say i ng that y our r esul ts suppor t a pr ev i ous concl usi on m ak es y our w or k
sound unor i gi nal . In f act, the r esul ts go bey ond the pr ev i ous f i ndi ngs and thus ar e new , not
conf i r m ator y . Sentence Y can be om i tted. The r el ati on to a pr ev i ous concl usi on can be deal t w i th
ei ther as a di scr epancy (see par a. 2 of Rev i si ons 1 and 2) or as an ex tensi on of pr ev i ous w or k
(see sentences A and B of Rev i si on 3). The f i r st sentence of par agr aph 5 shoul d be r ev i sed to
state the answ er to questi on 2. The v er b m ust be i n pr esent tense, and the popul ati on m ust be
ex panded to al l pr eter m i nf ants w ho hav e a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent ductus ar ter i osus.
To em phasi ze the answ er s to the questi on m or e, they shoul d be stated at the begi nni ng of the
Di scussi on (par a. 1).
In par agr aph 7, the f i r st sentence shoul d be a topi c sentence i ndi cati ng that thi s par agr aph i s
specul ati on about a tangenti al topi c—other si tes of steal . In the or i gi nal v er si on, i t i s near l y
i m possi bl e to see how par agr aph 7 f i ts i nto the ov er al l stor y . Par agr aph 7 shoul d al so be r ev i sed
to cl ar i f y w hat the other si tes of steal ar e (see par a. 4 of Rev i si ons 1 and 2).
P. 397
REVISIONS
Revision 1
Questions
1. To deter m i ne i f di astol i c bl ood f l ow c a n be r etr ogr ade i n the cer ebr al ar ter i es of pr eter m
i nf ants w ho hav e a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent ductus ar ter i osus.
2. To deter m i ne how al ter ati ons i n cer ebr al bl ood f l ow a re r el ated to al ter ati ons i n aor ti c bl ood
f l ow .
Discussion
1 A In thi s study w e have show n that di astol i c bl ood f l ow c a n be r etr ograde i n the cer ebral
ar ter i es of pr eter m i nf ants w ho have a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent ductus ar ter i osus. BWe al so
have ev i dence that these al terati ons i n cer ebral bl ood f l ow cl osel y pa ra lle l al terati ons i n aor ti c
bl ood f l ow. CWe f ound that i n al l i nf ants w i th a l ar ge ductal shunt, w ho had r etr ograde di astol i c
bl ood f l ow i n the descendi ng aor ta, the cer ebral bl ood f l ow was gr eatl y decr eased, absent, or
r etr ograde. DMor eover, af ter cl osur e of the patent ductus ar ter i osus i n these i nf ants, so that they
no l onger had r etr ograde bl ood f l ow i n the descendi ng aor ta, the di astol i c bl ood f l ow was al so
f or war d i n the cer ebral ar ter i es.
2 EOur obser vati ons ex tend beyond those of Per l m an et al . (6), w ho w er e abl e to f i nd onl y a
decr ease i n cer ebral bl ood f l ow dur i ng di astol e and di d not r epor t any r etr ograde or absent bl ood
f l ow. FTw o f actor s m ay ex pl ai n our m or e sever e f i ndi ngs. G Fi r st, the i nf ants i n our ser i es m ay
have had l ar ger l ef ttor i ght ductal shunts and ther ef or e gr eater changes i n cer ebral bl ood f l ow.
HSecond, the di f f er ent m ethods of detecti on m ay have l ed to di f f er ent f i ndi ngs. I Wher eas
Per l m an et al . (6) used a conti nuouswave Doppl er vel oci tom eter, w e m easur ed cer ebral bl ood
f l ow w i th a rangegated pul sedDoppl er sy stem . JCom par ed to the pul sedDoppl er sy stem ,
conti nuouswave anal y si s i s l i m i ted by l ow r esol uti on and a potenti al f or si gnal l oss (15, 16),
ei ther of w hi ch coul d r esul t i n under m easur ed cer ebral bl ood f l ow.
3 KThe paral l el al terati ons i n aor ti c and cer ebral bl ood f l ow s that w e obser ved m ay be ex pl ai ned
by the di f f er ence i n r esi stance betw een the pul m onar y and the sy stem i c vascul atur e. L In i nf ants
w ho have a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent ductus ar ter i osus, the pul m onar y vascul ar bed, w hi ch
has l ow r esi stance to bl ood f l ow, f r eel y com m uni cates w i th the sy stem i c vascul ar bed, w hi ch has
hi gher r esi stance. M Ther ef or e, the pr esence of a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent ductus ar ter i osus
r esul ts i n di astol i c steal of bl ood f r om the aor ta thr ough the patent ductus ar ter i osus and i nto the
pul m onar y vascul atur e. N Concom i tantl y, di astol i c bl ood f l ow i n the cer ebral ar ter i es decr eases.
O Eventual l y, the cer ebral bl ood f l ow r ever ses and m ay l ead to di astol i c steal of bl ood f r om the
cer ebral ci r cul ati on.
4 PAs opposed to di astol i c steal i n the cer ebral ar ter i es and the descendi ng aor ta, w e f ound no
di astol i c steal f r om the cor onar y ar ter i es i n pr eter m i nf ants w ho have a l ar ge shunt thr ough a
patent ductus ar ter i osus. Q In Doppl er traci ngs taken f r om the ascendi ng aor ta just above the
aor ti c val ve, no di f f er ences i n di astol i c bl ood f l ow w er e appar ent betw een contr ol i nf ants and
i nf ants w ho had a l ar ge ductal shunt. R How ever, r etr ograde bl ood f l ow f r om the cor onar y ar ter i es
m ay have been too sm al l to be detected by our techni que.
P. 398
5 SIn sum m ar y, thi s study show s that di astol i c bl ood f l ow can be r etr ograde i n the cer ebral
ar ter i es, as w el l as i n the descendi ng aor ta, of pr eter m i nf ants w ho have a l ar ge shunt thr ough a
patent ductus ar ter i osus. TIn addi ti on, the r etr ograde bl ood f l ow i n the cer ebral ar ter i es cl osel y
paral l el s the r etr ograde aor ti c bl ood f l ow. U Thi s r etr ograde cer ebral bl ood f l ow m ay l ead to
com pl i cati ons such as i schem i a or hem or r hagi c brai n i njur y.
COMMENTS ON REVISION 1
Beginning
Par agr aph 1 of Rev i si on 1 states the answ er s to both questi ons at the begi nni ng and then states
the r esul ts that suppor t the answ er s. The sam e r esul ts happen to suppor t both answ er s, so thi s
pr esentati on i s v er y ef f i ci ent. In addi ti on, r esul ts f or aor ti c bl ood f l ow ar e subor di nated at the
begi nni ng of each sentence (C, D), thus f ocusi ng the sentences on the i m por tant r esul ts—those
f or cer ebr al bl ood f l ow . Resul ts f or the contr ol i nf ants, w hi ch ar e not necessar y i n the Di scussi on,
hav e been om i tted.
The answ er s m atch the questi ons. The answ er to questi on 1 uses the sam e k ey ter m s and the
sam e v er b as i n the questi on. The answ er to questi on 2 al so uses the sam e k ey ter m s as i n the
questi on but i nstead of usi ng the v er b “i s” pl us “r el ated to, ” speci f i es the r el ati onshi p:
“par al l el s. ” N ote that thi s speci f i c v er b (“par al l el s”) cr eates a pi ctur e i n the r eader 's m i nd,
w her eas “i s di r ectl y r el ated to, ” though al so a v al i d answ er , does not.
Middle
Par agr aphs 2 and 3 pr esent tw o i m por tant topi cs: the ex pl anati on of the di scr epancy and the
specul ati on on steal . In par agr aph 2, the begi nni ng of the com par i son cl ear l y speci f i es the
di f f er ence betw een the tw o studi es (“Our obser v ati ons ex tend bey ond”) (sentence E). In addi ti on,
the ex pl anati on of the l i m i tati ons of the pr ev i ous m ethod i s ni cel y condensed by stati ng onl y the
essenti al f eatur e of each l i m i tati on (sentence J). Al so note that the author s of the pr ev i ous paper
ar e al w ay s r ef er r ed to appr opr i atel y as “Per l m an et al . , ” nev er just “Per l m an, ” as i n the or i gi nal
v er si on.
In par agr aph 3 (= or i gi nal par a. 6), a topi c sentence i s added. The ex pl anati on i s al so cl ar i f i ed.
Par agr aph 4 uses a v er y cl ear tr ansi ti on phr ase topi c sentence to i ntr oduce a secondar y poi nt
(w hether steal al so occur s i n the cor onar y ar ter i es) and ex pl ai ns the poi nt cl ear l y . Thi s topi c w as
not cl ear l y si gnal ed or ex pl ai ned i n the or i gi nal v er si on (par a. 7, sentences GG and HH).
Thus, the m i ddl e of thi s Di scussi on uses tw o k ey ter m topi c sentences and one tr ansi ti on phr ase
topi c sentence to cr eate the ov er al l stor y . (In the topi c sentence i n par a. 2, a categor y ter m ,
“obser v ati ons, ” r ather than a k ey ter m i s used to r ef er to the changes i n bl ood f l ow m enti oned i n
par a. 1. ) You can see the ov er al l stor y of the Di scussi on by r eadi ng the f i r st sentence of each
par agr aph.
End
Par agr aph 5 (endi ng) pr esents a str ai ghtf or w ar d r estatem ent of the answ er s f ol l ow ed by a cl i ni cal
i m pl i cati on. The answ er s at the end m atch the answ er s at the begi nni ng. Si nce cl i ni cal
i m pl i cati ons ar e al so m enti oned at the end of the f i r st par agr aph of the Intr oducti on, the stor y
com es f ul l ci r cl e.
P. 399
Revision 2
1 A 1 Al though r etr ograde bl ood f l ow i n the descendi ng aor ta dur i ng di astol e i s a com m on f i ndi ng i n
pr eter m i nf ants w ho have a patent ductus ar ter i osus (4, 5, 9–14), A 2 i t has onl y r ecentl y been
suggested that bl ood f l ow i n the cer ebral ar ter i es m ay be si m i l ar l y al ter ed (6). BThe r esul ts of
our study i ndi cate 1 that di astol i c bl ood f l ow can be r etr ograde i n the cer ebral ar ter i es of pr eter m
i nf ants w ho have a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent ductus ar ter i osus and 2 that al terati ons i n
cer ebral bl ood f l ow cl osel y paral l el al terati ons i n aor ti c bl ood f l ow. CThe paral l el r el ati onshi p
betw een cer ebral and aor ti c bl ood f l ow s, and the i m por tance of shunt si ze, ar e appar ent f r om our
f i ndi ngs. DThus, i n contr ol i nf ants and i nf ants w ho had a sm al l ductal shunt, ther e was no
ev i dence of abnor m al di astol i c bl ood f l ow i n the cer ebral ar ter i es or i n the descendi ng aor ta.
EHow ever, i n i nf ants w ho had a l ar ge ductal shunt, di astol i c bl ood f l ow was r educed, absent, or
r etr ograde i n the cer ebral ar ter i es, and r etr ograde i n the descendi ng aor ta. FMor eover, af ter
cl osur e of the ductus, nor m al di astol i c bl ood f l ow was r eestabl i shed at both si tes.
2 GIn contrast to our r esul ts, Per l m an et al . (6) r epor ted onl y r educed di astol i c bl ood f l ow i n the
cer ebral ar ter i es of pr eter m i nf ants w ho have a l ar ge ductal shunt. HTw o f actor s m i ght ex pl ai n
the m or e sever e al terati ons i n cer ebral bl ood f l ow that w e obser ved (absent and r etr ograde
f l ow ): the si ze of the shunt and the techni que used. I Fi r st, the i nf ants i n our study m ay have had
a l ar ger ductal shunt, and consequentl y gr eater changes i n cer ebral bl ood f l ow, than the i nf ants
i n Per l m an et al . 's study. J Second, w her eas Per l m an et al . used a conti nuouswave Doppl er
vel oci tom eter, w e m easur ed cer ebral bl ood f l ow w i th a rangegated pul sedDoppl er sy stem .
K Com par ed to the pul sedDoppl er sy stem , conti nuouswave anal y si s i s l i m i ted by l ow er r esol uti on
and a potenti al f or si gnal l oss (15, 16), ei ther of w hi ch coul d r esul t i n under m easur ed cer ebral
bl ood f l ow.
3 LA l i kel y ex pl anati on f or our r esul ts i s that, i n the pr esence of a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent
ductus ar ter i osus, the sy stem i c ci r cul ati on, w hi ch has hi gh r esi stance to bl ood f l ow,
com m uni cates w i th the pul m onar y ci r cul ati on, w hi ch has l ow er r esi stance. As a r esul t, bl ood i s
di ver ted away f r om the aor ta i nto the pul m onar y ci r cul ati on v i a the patent ductus ar ter i osus, and
di astol i c bl ood pr essur e f al l s. M As the di astol i c bl ood pr essur e i n the aor ta f al l s, di astol i c bl ood
f l ow i n the cer ebral ar ter i es decr eases and eventual l y r ever ses, ther eby di ver ti ng bl ood away
f r om the cer ebral ar ter i es as w el l . N The f ai l ur e of the cer ebral ar ter i es to decr ease r esi stance
and m ai ntai n f or war d di astol i c f l ow i s pr obabl y due to m ax i m um vasodi l ati on or i m pai r ed
autor egul ati on, both of w hi ch ar e bel i eved to occur i n pr eter m i nf ants w ho have a l ar ge ductal
shunt (6, 17, 28).
4 OOur r esul ts suggest that bl ood f l ow m ay al so be di ver ted f r om other ar ter i es dur i ng di astol e.
P We f ound f or war d bl ood f l ow i n the transver se aor ta pr ox i m al to the ductus ar ter i osus dur i ng
di astol e, w hen ther e i s nor m al l y no bl ood f l ow . Q We bel i eve that thi s bl ood f l ow r ef l ects bl ood
di ver ted f r om the car oti d and subcl av i an ar ter i es towar d the ductus ar ter i osus v i a the transver se
aor ta. R Si m i l ar f i ndi ngs have been r epor ted pr ev i ousl y (5, 10, 11). S How ever, i n m easur em ents
taken f r om the ascendi ng aor ta just above the aor ti c val ve, w e f ound no di f f er ences i n bl ood f l ow
betw een contr ol i nf ants and i nf ants w ho had a l ar ge ductal shunt. T Thus, i f bl ood i s al so di ver ted
f r om the cor onar y ar ter i es dur i ng di astol e, i t was too l i ttl e to be detected by our techni que.
P. 400
5 U Som e of the cl i ni cal com pl i cati ons of a patent ductus ar ter i osus, such as cer ebral i schem i a,
m ay be ex pl ai ned by our f i ndi ngs that cer ebral bl ood f l ow dur i ng di astol e can be decr eased,
absent, or r etr ograde. VThe ex tent of these changes i n bl ood f l ow appear s to be r el ated to the
si ze of the ductal shunt, and thus a l ar ge shunt m ay pr edi spose i nf ants to ser i ous com pl i cati ons.
WIt i s ther ef or e i m por tant to r ecogni ze these changes i n bl ood f l ow w i thi n a vessel . XBecause
rangegated pul sedDoppl er echocar di ography i s a saf e, noni nvasi ve m eans of assessi ng not onl y
the patency of the ductus ar ter i osus but al so al terati ons i n bl ood f l ow w i thi n a vessel , thi s
echocar di ographi c techni que can be used to i m pr ove the di agnosi s and m anagem ent of
com pl i cati ons of a patent ductus ar ter i osus.
Beginning
Par agr aph 1 of Rev i si on 2 begi ns w i th contex t (A) and then states the answ er s (B) and the
suppor ti ng r esul ts (C–F). A subtopi c sentence (C) i s used to i ntr oduce the suppor ti ng r esul ts. The
statem ent of the r esul ts has been ni cel y condensed.
Middle
Par agr aph 2 ex pl ai ns the di scr epancy essenti al l y as i n Rev i si on 1 but adds the topi c of each
ex pl anati on to the subtopi c sentence (H), thus pr ov i di ng a cl ear ov er v i ew .
Par agr aph 3 pr esents the specul ati on on steal but changes the ter m “steal ” to “di v er ti ng. ” Thi s
r ev i si on i ncl udes the sentence on m ax i m um v asodi l ati on and i m pai r ed autor egul ati on, w hi ch i s
om i tted i n Rev i si on 1.
Par agr aph 4 uses a tr ansi ti on w or d + k ey ter m topi c sentence to i ntr oduce a secondar y poi nt—
w hether bl ood f l ow i s al so di v er ted f r om other ar ter i es. Thi s topi c sentence cl ear l y i denti f i es the
topi c of the par agr aph because the topi c sentence m ak es a poi nt, r ather than stati ng a r esul t, as
i n the or i gi nal v er si on (par a. 7). The par agr aph i ncl udes al l of the ar ter i es m enti oned i n the
or i gi nal v er si on, not just the cor onar y ar ter i es, as i n Rev i si on 2. Detai l s hav e been added
(under l i ned) to m ak e the ex pl anati on cl ear er .
Wher eas Rev i si on 1 uses tw o k ey ter m topi c sentences and one tr ansi ti on phr ase topi c sentence,
Rev i si on 2 uses tw o tr ansi ti on topi c sentences and onl y one k ey ter m topi c sentence to tel l the
ov er al l stor y .
End
Par agr aph 5 (endi ng) pr esents cl i ni cal i m pl i cati ons and an appl i cati on of the m ethod. The f i r st
answ er i s i ncor por ated i nto the f i r st sentence descr i bi ng cl i ni cal i m pl i cati ons (U ). Thi s
pr esentati on of the answ er i s l ess obv i ous than a str ai ghtf or w ar d r estatem ent of the answ er s.
Al so note the sm ooth connecti on betw een the cl i ni cal i m pl i cati ons and the appl i cati on of the
m ethod (W). Thus the m ethod, w hi ch seem ed i r r el ev ant i n the or i gi nal v er si on (par a. 9, sentence
PP), i s now m ade r el ev ant.
P. 401
Revision 3
AIn thi s study, w e have ex tended pr ev i ous w or k show i ng decr eased bl ood f l ow i n the cer ebral
ar ter i es of pr eter m i nf ants w ho have a l ar ge shunt thr ough a patent ductus ar ter i osus (6). BOur
r esul ts dem onstrate that, i n these i nf ants, cer ebral bl ood f l ow can be not onl y decr eased but al so
absent or even r etr ograde and that these al terati ons i n cer ebral bl ood f l ow cl osel y paral l el
al terati ons i n aor ti c bl ood f l ow.
Rev i si on 3 show s another w ay to begi n thi s Di scussi on: by pr esenti ng the answ er s to the
questi ons as an ex tensi on of pr ev i ousl y publ i shed w or k on the topi c of abnor m al cer ebr al bl ood
f l ow i n pr eter m i nf ants. Thi s i s a v er y str ai ghtf or w ar d pr esentati on.
Discussion 2
1 I In thi s study, w e show that m per 2 i s a m am m al i an c irc a dia n cl ock gene. H The ev i dence i s that
i t was ex pr essed i n a c irc a dia n patter n i n the suprachi asm ati c nucl eus (SCN ), i n m i ce, i t
m ai ntai ned ex pr essi on under f r eer unni ng condi ti ons (constant dar k ness), and i t was abl e to be
sy nchr oni zed to the cycl e of an ex ter nal l i ght sour ce (entrai nm ent). M We al so show that m per 2,
unl i ke m per 1, i s not di r ectl y light induc ible . L In our m i ce, m per 1 ex pr essi on began w i thi n 7–15
m i n Re sul t s of ex posur e to a 15m i n l i ght pul se at CT22 and conti nued f or 2h. Re sul t s How ever,
m per 2 was not ex pr essed at any ti m e dur i ng the 2h obser vati on per i od or even at 4 h af ter the
l i ght pul se. M ' Thus, m per 2 behaves m or e l i ke the Dr osophi l a per gene than does m per 1, si nce the
Dr osophi l a per gene i s al so not induc ible by light (20, 44).
2 TS Our f i ndi ng that mpe r1 i s light induc ible but that mpe r2 i s not suggests that mpe r1 and
mpe r2 m ay have som e inte rde pe nde nt func tions and that mpe r1 m ay be the pa c e ma k e r.
N Al though m per 2 ex pr essi on l agged behi nd m per 1 ex pr essi on by about 4 h, O inte rde pe nde nt
func tioning i s possi bl e because m per 2 was ex pr essed at ZT/CT6, N w hen m per 1 ex pr essi on was
m ax i m al . O Thus, the neur ons of the SCN m ay contai n transcr i pts f r om both genes. P Assum i ng
that the sequenti al ex pr essi on of m per 1 and m per 2 m i r r or s the sequenti al ex pr essi on of thei r
transcr i pts, then m per 1 and m per 2 m ay i nteract. Q Interacti on coul d occur because the m per
pr otei ns have hi ghl y hom ol ogous PAS dom ai ns (61% i denti ty ); these dom ai ns have been show n to
m edi ate the i nteracti on of di f f er ent PASdom ai ncontai ni ng pr otei ns (19, 25, 43). R m per 1 and
m per 2 m ay al so i nteract w i th other pr otei ns i n thi s pathway , Q ” si nce PAS dom ai ns al so m edi ate
the i nteracti on of PASdom ai ncontai ni ng pr otei ns w i th other transacti ng f actor s (19, 25, 43).
S One such pr otei n coul d be cl ock , w hi ch i s w i del y ex pr essed i n the brai n, i ncl udi ng the SCN (22).
TS Thus, i t i s possi bl e that mpe r1 and mpe r2 func tion inte rde pe nde ntly. T In contrast, i n other
ti ssues such as skel etal m uscl e that ex pr ess m per 1 but not m per 2, U m per 1
m ay func tion
inde pe nde ntly of m per 2, possi bl y i n conjuncti on w i th other PASdom ai ncontai ni ng pr otei ns.
3 V The pr esum ed inte rde pe nde nt func tions of mpe r1 and mpe r2 can be f i tted i nto our gr ow i ng
under standi ng of the m ol ecul ar m echani sm by w hi ch the m am m al i an ci r cadi an cl ock r esponds to
l i ght. W It has pr ev i ousl y been establ i shed that acti vati on of photor eceptor s i n the r eti na
generates s igna ls that ar e tra ns duc e d to the SCN thr ough the r eti nohy pothal am i c tract (RHT)
(r ev i ew ed by Moor e, 27). X In the r eti nor eci pi ent ar ea of the
P. 402
SCN , the r egi on i nto w hi ch the RHT pr ojects (18, 21, 28), thi s s igna l tra ns duc tion r esul ts i n
gl utam ate r el ease, evok i ng cal ci um i nf l ux , w hi ch m ay acti vate the ni tr i c ox i de si gnal i ng cascade
(11, 17, 36). Y The m ol ecul ar ta rge ts of thi s s igna l tra ns duc tion pr ocess ar e one or m or e
pr otei ns of the ci r cadi an cl ock . Z Si nce our f i ndi ngs qual i f y the per pr otei ns as ci r cadi an cl ock
com ponents, they ar e potenti al ta rge ts of the s igna l m edi ated thr ough the RHT. AA In par ti cul ar,
mpe r1 i s l i kel y to be a ta rge t because mpe r1 was i nduced by a pul se of l i ght w i thi n 15 m i n
af ter the l i ght sour ce was tur ned on. B B Inducti on of m per 1 by l i ght i ni ti al l y occur r ed i n a sm al l
num ber of ventral l y l ocated cel l s, and by 30 m i n, m per 1 transcr i pts w er e f ound i n a br oader, but
sti l l ventral , r egi on of the SCN . C C Thi s i s the r eti nor eci pi ent ar ea (18, 21, 28), w hi ch i s al so
character i zed by the ex pr essi on of several neur opepti des (r ev i ew ed i n Car d and Moor e, 7).
D D Betw een 60 and 120 m i n, m or e dor sal neur ons i ni ti ated m per 1 transcr i pti on. EE Thi s br oadeni ng
of ex pr essi on eventual l y l ed to uni f or m ex pr essi on encom passi ng the w hol e SCN .
TSIf mpe r1 i s the ta rge t of s igna l tra ns duc tion, then mpe r1 m ay be the pa c e ma k e r, and both
mpe r1 and mpe r2 m ay be i nvol ved w hen the endogenous cl ock i s e ntra ine d to a new day /ni ght
cycl e. NNA possi bl e m odel i s that l i ght evokes a s igna l i n the r eti na, w hi ch i s transduced thr ough
the RHT to the ventral por ti on of the SCN , the r egi on w her e m per 1 i s f i r st transcr i bed. O O Thi s
s igna l sets up a posi ti ve autor egul ator y l oop of m per 1 ex pr essi on. P P Thi s i ni ti al ex pr essi on
establ i shes a condi ti on i n w hi ch l i ght i s no l onger r equi r ed to m ai ntai n m per 1 ex pr essi on. Q Q Our
data show that m per 1 ex pr essi on conti nues hour s af ter the l i ght pul se i s ter m i nated. RR m per 1
w oul d then acti vate the m per 2 gene, w hi ch i s not i tsel f l i ghti nduci bl e. SS The 4h ti m e del ay
betw een m per 1 and m per 2 ex pr essi on coul d be ex pl ai ned by the r equi r em ent of a thr eshol d
concentrati on of m per 1 pr otei n to tur n on m per 2. TS If thi s m odel i s cor r ect, then mpe r1 i s the
pa c e ma k e r that r esponds to l i ght and m per 1 m edi ates e ntra inme nt, w hi ch i nvol ves m per 2.
TTOther than e ntra inme nt, w hat coul d be the benef i t of hav i ng both m per 1 and m per 2 genes?
UU These tw o genes ar e cl ear l y not r edundant: they ar e m ax i m al l y ex pr essed at di f f er ent ti m es of
the ci r cadi an cycl e, they di f f er w i th r egar d to thei r r esponse to l i ght, and thei r ti ssue ex pr essi on
pr of i l es di f f er gr eatl y . V V Thus, these tw o genes m ust have di f f er ent r egul ator y r egi ons, a
di ver si ty that w oul d al l ow r esponse to a br oader spectr um of i nput cues or per haps i nteracti on
w i th di f f er ent dow nstr eam com ponents. W W The m per 1 r egul ator y r egi on m ay r espond pr i m ar i l y to
l i ght, w her eas the r egul ator y r egi on of m per 2 m i ght r espond to hor m onal or other si gnal s.
X X Thus,
di ver se i nput si gnal s coul d r esul t i n the bi osy nthesi s of tw o si m i l ar pr otei ns, w hi ch,
because of thei r r el atedness, can dr i ve the sam e si gnal i ng pathway s.
P. 403
Techniques of Continuity
Topi c Sentences: Par a. 1: I, M, M'; Par a. 2: TS × 2; Par a. 3: V; Par a. 5: TS × 2; Par a. 6: TT.
Transi ti on Wor ds: Para. 1: Resul ts, M'; Para. 2: O, TS, T; Para. 3: AA; Para. 6: VV, XX.
CHAPTER 8
Exercise 8.1: Design of Figures and Tables and Their Relation
to the Text
COMMENTS
In thi s Resul ts secti on, the f i gur e and tabl e ar e not cl ear l y desi gned and do not r el ate w el l to the
tex t.
Figure 2
Type of G ra ph. A bar gr aph w oul d show the i ncr eases i n ai r f l ow r esi stance and the bef or e
and af ter v al ues m or e cl ear l y than a l i ne gr aph does.
Mor e ti ck m ar k s coul d be added to m ak e the tw of ol d and ei ghtf ol d i ncr eases easi er to see.
U si ng the sam e k ey ter m s i n the tex t, f i gur e l egend, and ax i s l abel w oul d m ak e the r el ati on
betw een the f i gur e and the tex t cl ear er . The i ndi cator (“ai r f l ow r esi stance”) shoul d be used
i n the f i gur e l egend, not the v ar i abl e (“br onchoconstr i cti on”), because ai r f l ow r esi stance i s
w hat w as m easur ed. The k ey ter m “ai r f l ow r esi stance” shoul d al so be used i n the ax i s l abel .
If the abbr ev i ati on (Rr s) i s used, i t shoul d be def i ned i n the f i gur e l egend. Si m i l ar l y “dose
of sm ok e i nhal ed” i n the tex t does not cor r el ate w el l w i th “num ber of sm ok e i nhal ati ons” i n
the f i gur e.
Figure Le ge nd. To state the poi nt, “i ncr eases i n ai r f l ow r esi stance” shoul d be used i nstead
of “br onchoconstr i cti on. ”
The f i gur e l egend coul d be r ev i sed to gi v e m ost ex per i m ental detai l s bef or e the stati sti cal
detai l s. In addi ti on, the ti m es of m easur em ent coul d be added.
P. 404
To show the v ar i abi l i ty of the data, r ather than how cl ose the m easur ed m ean i s to the tr ue
m ean, SD coul d be show n (as i n Tabl e 1) i nstead of SE.
Table I
Type of Illustration.
A l i ne gr aph show s ti m e cour se m or e cl ear l y than a tabl e does.
In the ti tl e, “br onchoconstr i cti on” shoul d be changed to “ai r f l ow r esi stance. ”
Revision
Results
Inhal ati on of ci gar ette sm oke i nto the l ungs of anestheti zed dogs caused tw o to sevenf ol d
i ncr eases i n ai r f l ow r esi stance of the total r espi rator y sy stem dependi ng on the num ber of ti dal
vol um es of sm oke i nhal ed (Fi g. 2). Ai r f l ow r esi stance i ncr eased rapi dl y af ter the star t of sm oke
i nhal ati on; on average, the m ax i m um was r eached w i thi n ½ m i n (Fi g. 3). Ai r f l ow r esi stance
r em ai ned i ncr eased transi entl y, decr eased to onehal f the m ax i m al val ue w i thi n 2 m i n (Fi g. 3),
and r etur ned to basel i ne bef or e the nex t dose 20 m i n l ater [f i gur e ci tati on om i tted].
P. 405
P la s ma Apoprote in (mg/dl)
Apo A
Apo AI/Apo B Tre a tme nt Apo AI II Apo B Apo D Apo E
Val ues ar e m eans ± SD f r om 10 contr ol subjects, 6 per i toneal di al y si s pati ents, and 15
hem odi al y si s pati ents.
* P < 0. 0005, † P < 0. 01 v s. contr ol .
COMMENTS
The or i gi nal tabl e i s gener al l y cl ear , but i t can be m ade cl ear er .
In addi ti on, the col um n headi ng “Pl asm a Apopr otei n” has been added, cor r el ati ng w i th that ter m
i n the ti tl e, and the uni t of m easur em ent (m g/dl ) i s i ncl uded af ter thi s gener al headi ng r ather
than bei ng stated af ter each i ndi v i dual apopr otei n.
P. 406
Pl asm a Apopr otei ns Af ter Per i toneal Di al y si s or Hem odi al y si s i n Pati ents Who Hav e EndStage
Renal Di sease
Changes i n Pl asm a Apopr otei ns Af ter Per i toneal Di al y si s or Hem odi al y si s i n Pati ents Who Hav e
EndStage Renal Di sease
Gr eater Changes i n Pl asm a Apopr otei ns Af ter Hem odi al y si s than Af ter Per i toneal Di al y si s i n
Pati ents Who Hav e EndStage Renal Di sease.
In addi ti on, the pati ents ar e descr i bed f ul l y i n the ti tl e, as i n the questi on (“pati ents w ho hav e
endstage r enal di sease”).
Presentation of Numbers.
To m ak e the num ber s al i gn neatl y on the deci m al poi nt and on the ± , the col um ns and r ow s of
the tabl e hav e been sw i tched: i ndependent v ar i abl e i n the f i r st col um n on the l ef t, dependent
v ar i abl es acr oss the col um ns on the r i ght.
Once the data ar e al i gned i n col um ns, i t i s easi er to see that data f or apo AII and f or apo A
I/apo B hav e di f f er ent num ber s of deci m al pl aces. In the r ev i sed tabl e, al l v al ues i n each col um n
hav e the sam e num ber of deci m al pl aces.
CHAPTER 10
Grade: C
Stre ngths : shor t abstr act, shor t sentences, cl ear r esul ts
Biggest Problems:
The answ er shoul d be l i m i ted to the ani m al studi ed and the gene studi ed (H).
“Hi stone acety l tr ansf er ase acti v i ty ” i s not m enti oned ear l i er i n the abstr act.
“A coacti v ator endow ed w i th hi stone acety l tr ansf er ase acti v i ty ” shoul d be r epl aced by
“p300. ”
Other Problems:
State the unex pected answ er af ter stati ng the answ er to the questi on.
P. 407
U se si m pl e w or ds, m ak e the topi c the subject, and put the acti on i n the v er b (E, F: di ed).
Revision
AThe transcr i pti onal coacti vator and i ntegrator p300 and i ts cl osel y r el ated f am i l y m em ber CBP
ar e bel i eved to m edi ate num er ous si gnal dependent transcr i pti onal events, i ncl udi ng those
i nvol ved i n em br yo devel opm ent.
B
1 To deter m i ne w hether the p300 gene i s necessar y f or m ouse em br yo devel opm ent and cel l
pr ol i f erati on,
B
2w e assessed these var i abl es i n m i ce w e generated l ack i ng a f uncti onal p300 gene.
CWe f ound that m ouse em br yos nul l i zygous f or p300 di ed betw een day s 9 and 11. 5 of gestati on,
ex hi bi ti ng def ects i n neur ul ati on, cel l pr ol i f erati on, and hear t devel opm ent.
DCel l s der i ved f r om p300def i ci ent em br yos di spl ayed speci f i c transcr i pti onal def ects and
pr ol i f erated poor l y.
FMor eover, al l em br yos doubl y heter ozygous f or p300 and cbp di ed.
HThus, the p300 gene i s essenti al f or m ouse em br yo devel opm ent and cel l pr ol i f erati on.
GOur f i ndi ngs al so show that nor m al m ouse em br yo devel opm ent i s ex qui si tel y sensi ti ve to
under dosage and over dosage of p300 and cbp genes.
Abstract 2
Grade: D
Stre ngths : shor t abstr act, usef ul back gr ound stated
Biggest Problems:
“r epr esses” (ti tl e, E, F); “posi ti v el y r egul ate” (A), “posi ti v e and negati v e f actor s” (G).
“tr anscr i pti on” (ti tl e, F, G), “ex pr essi on” (E)
The v er b i n the si gnal of the answ er i s too w eak ; i t sounds l i k e the si gnal of an i m pl i cati on,
not of an answ er .
Other Problems:
The end of the l ast sentence sounds l i k e the pur pose of the i nter acti on (“to account f or ”).
Pr obabl y thi s par t of the sentence i s a specul ati on (“and thus m ay account f or ”).
P. 408
Revision
AAWe asked w hether fa c tors that re pre s s tra ns c ription c a n bind to the sam e G Cric h
s e que nc e re pe a t as fa c tors that a c tiva te tra ns c ription.
BTo answ er thi s questi on, w e character i zed a hum an cDN A that encodes a fa c tor that binds to a
G Cric h s e que nc e re pe a t pr esent i n pr om oter s of the epi der m al gr ow th f actor r eceptor (EGFR),
βacti n, and cal ci um dependent pr otease (CAN P).
DDel eti on anal y ses i ndi cated that thi s basi c r egi on f uncti ons as the DN A bi ndi ng dom ai n.
EWhen w e ex pr essed thi s fa c tor i n CV1 cel l s, w e f ound that i t re pre s s e d tra ns c ription
or i gi nati ng both f r om the EGFR and βacti n pr om oter s and f r om chi m er i c pr om oter s contai ni ng the
CAN P gene.
GThese r esul ts i ndi cate that fa c tors that re pre s s tra ns c ription c a n bind to the sam e G Cric h
s e que nc e re pe a t as f actor s that a c tiva te transcr i pti on.
Abstract 3
Grade: C
Strengths
Easy to r ead.
Problems
The ov er v i ew of the ex per i m ent (A) i s not cl ear : How w as one l ung ex posed—sur gi cal l y ?
What w as i t ex posed to?
The ov er v i ew of the ex per i m ent i s i ncom pl ete: What happened to the other l ung i s not
descr i bed unti l sentence C; i t shoul d be i n sentence A.
The l ast sentence (E) si gnal s an answ er , but i t states an i m pl i cati on, as i ndi cated by
the v er b “coul d be” and by the f acts that i n thi s study bacter i a w er e not gi v en and
m or tal i ty w as not assessed. The answ er shoul d pr obabl y be about the ef f ect of ozone
on the def ense m echani sm of the l ungs (see the ti tl e), though i t i s questi onabl e
w hether the r esul ts of br onchoal v eol ar l av age shoul d be ex tended to the l ungs as a
w hol e. The i ntended answ er seem s to be that ozone i m pai r s the def ense m echani sm
P. 409
of the l ungs, though an i ncr eased num ber of pol y m or phonucl ear l euk ocy tes m ay be a
good thi ng f or l ung def ense.
Sentence D has an uncl ear si gnal (“w er e f ound to be”): i t coul d be ei ther r esul ts or the
answ er .
It i s al so possi bl e that ther e ar e tw o questi ons and tw o answ er s, one about the ef f ect
of ozone on the def ense m echani sm and the other about di r ect tox i ci ty (sentence D)
(see Rev i si on 2).
The w r i ti ng i s gener al l y cl ear but contai ns som e jar gon (“uni l ater al l ung ex posur e
techni que, ” “bacter i al chal l enge”) and uncl ear w or d choi ce (w hat does “depr ess v ar i ous
i ntr acel l ul ar hy dr ol y ti c enzy m es” m ean: decr ease the num ber s of enzy m es? decr ease
enzy m e acti v i ty ?). Al so the si gnal of the r esul ts w oul d be cl ear er i f i t w er e at the
begi nni ng of the sentence. In the ti tl e, “def ensi v e m echani sm ” shoul d be “def ense
m echani sm . ”
A
2 We venti l ated one l ung w i th ozone and the other l ung w i th ai r dur i ng l i ght anesthesi a.
BWe f ound that ozone (0. 5–3. 0 ppm f or 3 h) decr eased the v i abi l i ty of al veol ar m acr ophages and
the acti v i ty of i ntracel l ul ar hydr ol y ti c enzy m es (l y sozy m e, betagl ucur oni dase, and aci d
phosphatase. It al so i ncr eased the absol ute num ber and per centage of pol y m or phonucl ear
l eukocy tes i n pul m onar y l avage f l ui d.
CAl l these ef f ects w er e dose r el ated, appear ed onl y i n the l ung venti l ated w i th ozone, and
r esul ted f r om di r ect tox i ci ty of ozone and not f r om a general i zed sy stem i c r esponse.
DWe concl ude that ozone suppr esses the def ense m echani sm of rabbi ts' l ungs.
EWe suggest that thi s suppr essi on m ay be r esponsi bl e f or the hi gh death rate of rabbi ts i nf ected
w i th bacter i a af ter thei r l ungs ar e venti l ated w i th ozone.
COMMENTS
In Rev i si on 1, the i ndependent var i abl e i s added to the questi on (A 1 ), and the ani m al (A 1 ),
m ethods detai l s (A 2 B), and the answ er (D) ar e al so added. In A 2 the over v i ew of the ex per i m ent
i s now com pl ete, and pr eci se w or d choi ce m akes cl ear how the l ungs w er e ex posed and w hat
each l ung was ex posed to. In A 2 and B, the f ol l ow i ng detai l s of m ethods ar e now i ncl uded: the
condi ti on of the rabbi ts (l i ghtl y anestheti zed), the concentrati on of ozone (0. 5–3. 0 ppm ), the
durati on of ex posur e to ozone (3 h), and the ty pe of cel l s studi ed (al veol ar m acr ophages). The
answ er (D) answ er s the questi on asked: the key ter m s f or the i ndependent and dependent
var i abl es ar e the sam e i n the questi on and the answ er, and the poi nt of v i ew i s the sam e. Al so,
the si gnal of the r esul ts (“We f ound that”) i s m oved to the begi nni ng of the sentence (B), and the
r esul t f or hydr ol y ti c enzy m es i s descr i bed m or e pr eci sel y (“decr eased the acti v i ty of i ntracel l ul ar
hydr ol y ti c enzy m es”). Fi nal l y, i n the i m pl i cati on (E), w or d choi ce i s si m pl i f i ed (“hi gh death rate”
i nstead of “i ncr eased m or tal i ty ”), jar gon i s avoi ded (“i nf ected w i th bacter i a” i nstead of “gi ven a
bacter i al chal l enge”), and an appr opr i ate si gnal i s used (“We suggest that”).
P. 410
BThe i ncr eased m or tal i ty m ay r esul t f r om ozonei nduced i m pai r m ent of the l ungs' def ense
m echani sm s.
C
1 We ther ef or e asked w hether ozone ex posur e i m pai r s endogenous def ense m echani sm s i n
rabbi ts' l ungs and,
C
2i f so, w hether the i m pai r m ent i s caused by di r ect tox i ci ty of ozone or by a general i zed
sy stem i c r esponse.
D
1 For thi s study, w e assessed com ponents of the l ungs' def ense m echani sm s i n l avage f l ui d f r om
both l ungs of l i ghtl y anestheti zed rabbi ts
D
2 af ter venti l ati ng one l ung w i th ozone (0. 5–3. 0 ppm f or 3 h) and the other l ung w i th ai r.
EWe f ound that l ow concentrati ons of ozone decr eased the v i abi l i ty of al veol ar m acr ophages and
the acti v i ty of var i ous i ntracel l ul ar hydr ol y ti c enzy m es (l y sozy m e, betagl ucur oni dase, and aci d
phosphatase). Ozone al so i ncr eased the absol ute num ber and per cent of pol y m or phonucl ear
l eukocy tes w i thi n pul m onar y l avage f l ui d.
FAl l these ef f ects w er e dose r el ated and w er e f ound onl y i n the l ung ex posed to ozone.
GThese r esul ts i ndi cate that ozone ex posur e i m pai r s endogenous def ense m echani sm s i n rabbi ts'
l ungs and that thi s i m pai r m ent i s caused by di r ect tox i ci ty .
AWe specul ate that these i m pai r ed l ung def enses m ay be r esponsi bl e f or the i ncr eased m or tal i ty
of rabbi ts i nf ected w i th bacter i a af ter ex posur e to ozone.
COMMENTS
Rev i si on 2 ask s tw o questi ons (C 1 , C 2 ) and gi v es tw o answ er s (G). In Rev i si on 2, questi on 1 i s
stated m or e speci f i cal l y than the sam e questi on i n Rev i si on 1 and thus anti ci pates the answ er
m or e cl ear l y . The r eason the questi on i n Rev i si on 2 i s m or e speci f i c i s that i t uses the sam e v er b
(“i m pai r s”) as the answ er r ather than the gener al v er b “af f ect. ”
Al so i n Rev i si on 2, back gr ound i nf or m ati on i s added (A, B) to pr epar e f or the specul ati on at the
end of the abstr act (H). N ote that sentence B states the ul ti m ate questi on the author i s i nter ested
i n and sentence H specul ates on a possi bl e answ er to the ul ti m ate questi on.
Abstract 4
Grade: F
Problems
Too m uch detai l . You cannot see the f or est f or the tr ees.
In the descr i pti on of the ex per i m ent (A), gi v e the gener al appr oach, not ev er y
v ar i abl e, and i ndi cate the r el ati onshi p betw een v ar i abl es.
In the statem ent of the r esul ts (B–F), gi v e data f or onl y the m ost i m por tant f i ndi ngs,
gi v e per centages i nstead of m eans and SE, or om i t data al together . Om i t P v al ues.
Om i t al l “si gni f i cantl y 's. ” State “m ean ± SE” (i f used) onl y once.
Too m any abbr ev i ati ons. [Q w i th dot abov e]s/[Q w i th dot abov e]t can be r epl aced by “shunt
f r acti on. ” [V w i th dot abov e]/[Q w i th dot abov e] and C ai r ar e nev er m enti oned agai n, and
Pst(L) and TLC ar e used onl y once each, so they ar e unnecessar y . S ai r and SO 2 ar e bi zar r e.
The l ast sentence i s uncl ear : i s i t the i m pl i cati on of thi s study or of other studi es? If other
studi es, i t does not bel ong i n the abstr act.
P. 411
Revision
B
1 To deter m i ne w hether thi s i ncr eased pr essur e i s due to atel ectasi s,
B
1w e m easur ed el asti c r ecoi l pr essur e and the r i ghttol ef t i ntrapul m onar y shunt f racti on (an
i ndex of atel ectasi s) bef or e and dur i ng chest strappi ng (a condi ti on that decr eases l ung capaci ty )
i n heal thy m en.
CEx per i m ents w er e done w hi l e the m en br eathed r oom ai r (basel i ne) or 100% ox ygen (to i nduce
atel ectasi s).
DWe f ound that al though el asti c r ecoi l pr essur e i ncr eased by 50% dur i ng chest strappi ng, shunt
f racti on was unchanged w hi l e the m en br eathed r oom ai r and i ncr eased m i ni m al l y w hi l e they
br eathed 100% ox ygen.
EWe concl ude that i ncr eased el asti c r ecoi l pr essur e i n the l ungs dur i ng condi ti ons of decr eased
total l ung capaci ty i s not due to atel ectasi s.
COMMENTS
The r ev i si on i s m uch easi er to r ead because the questi on i s stated (B 1 ), the ex per i m ental
appr oach gi v es an ov er v i ew (B 2 , C), i ndi cator s ar e i denti f i ed (B 2 , C), and unnecessar y detai l s
(l ess i m por tant v ar i abl es, data, stati sti cal i nf or m ati on, the i m pl i cati on at the end) and al l
abbr ev i ati ons ar e om i tted.
CHAPTER 11
Questi on: B
2 the ef f ect of CPAP on r enal f uncti on i n new bor ns.
Title :
COMMENTS
The ti tl e f or Abstr act 1 shoul d be f ai r l y easy to w r i te because the abstr act i s cl ear l y w r i tten.
Functions
Both ti tl es ai m to attr act appr opr i ate r eader s by putti ng an i m por tant w or d f i r st.
Putti ng “conti nuous posi ti v e ai r w ay pr essur e” f i r st shoul d attr act neonatol ogi sts.
Putti ng “i m pai r ed r enal f uncti on” f i r st shoul d attr act nephr ol ogi sts.
P. 412
Content
The second ti tl e i s a phr ase and ex pr esses the poi nt i n an adjecti v e (“i m pai r ed”).
Hallmarks
Both ti tl es accur atel y , com pl etel y , and speci f i cal l y i denti f y the m essage of the paper .
The sam e k ey ter m s ar e used i n the ti tl e as i n the questi on and the answ er .
The ani m al and the condi ti on ar e tak en f r om the ex per i m ent done (sentence C). The
condi ti on i s i ncl uded i n the ti tl e because anesthesi a can af f ect the v ar i abl es m easur ed.
How ev er , som e author s m i ght pr ef er to om i t “anestheti zed. ”
In contr ast to the ti tl es gi v en abov e, the ti tl e “Im pai r m ent of Renal Functi on Induced by
Conti nuous Posi ti v e Ai r w ay Pr essur e” i s am bi guous. In thi s ti tl e, i t i s not cl ear w hat
w as i nduced by conti nuous posi ti v e ai r w ay pr essur e—the i m pai r m ent or the r enal
f uncti on.
They com pact the necessar y w or ds by usi ng a categor y ter m (“r enal f uncti on”) i nstead
of nam i ng al l the dependent v ar i abl es (ur i ne f l ow , sodi um ex cr eti on, gl om er ul ar
f i l tr ati on r ate).
In addi ti on, the second ti tl e uses the shor test possi bl e ter m s: “i m pai r ed” r ather than
“i m pai r m ent of ” (8 v s. 13 char acter s and spaces) and “f r om ” r ather than “i nduced by ”
(4 v s. 10).
Message: We descr i be a new gene, f r i nge, w hi ch i s ex pr essed i n dor sal cel l s and
encodes f or a novel pr otei n that i s pr edi cted to be secr eted.
Im pl i cati on: These obser vati ons suggest that f r i nge encodes a boundar y speci f i c
cel l si gnal i ng m ol ecul e that i s r esponsi bl e f or dor sal cel l –ventral cel l
i nteracti ons dur i ng w i ng devel opm ent.
Title :
1. f r i nge, a Boundar ySpeci f i c Si gnal i ng Mol ecul e, Medi ates Interacti ons Betw een
Dor sal and Ventral Cel l s Dur i ng Dr osophi l a Wi ng Devel opm ent
2. f r i nge, a N ew Gene Responsi bl e f or Dor sal Cel l –Ventral Cel l Interacti ons Dur i ng
Dr osophi l a Wi ng Devel opm ent (107)
P. 413
COMMENTS
Functions
Both ti tl es i denti f y the m essage of the paper .
Content
Both ti tl es i ncl ude the str uctur e and i ts f uncti on.
The f i r st ti tl e w r i tes the f uncti on as the v er b and com pl eter of a sentence. It uses an apposi ti v e
bef or e the v er b to pl ace f r i nge i n i ts categor y (“a boundar y speci f i c si gnal i ng m ol ecul e”).
The second ti tl e w r i tes the categor y and the f uncti on as an apposi ti ve (af ter a com m a).
Hallmarks
Both ti tl es accur atel y , com pl etel y , and speci f i cal l y i denti f y the m essage of the paper . The sam e
k ey ter m s ar e used i n the ti tl e as i n the m essage and the i m pl i cati on.
The f i r st ti tl e (w hi ch i s the publ i shed ti tl e) i s too l ong. The second ti tl e i s m or e conci se because
i t uses a br i ef categor y ter m (“new gene”) to i denti f y f r i nge.
Abstract 3
Abstract 3, w hi ch i s f r om Sci ence, does not f ol l ow the usual f or m at (questi on, ex per i m ent done,
r esul ts f ound, answ er ). Instead i t states onl y the r esul ts (A) and an i m pl i cati on (B).
COMMENTS
Thi s r ev i sed ti tl e i l l ustr ates thr ee poi nts:
N ote that i t i s i m possi bl e to f i t al l thr ee r esul ts f r om the abstr act i nto the ti tl e. The sol uti on
i s ei ther to choose one of the r esul ts, as done i n the ti tl e abov e (causes hear t bl ock ), or to
use a categor y ter m , f or ex am pl e, “i m pai r ed car di ac conducti on, ” “car di ac conducti on
abnor m al i ti es, ” or “car di ac r hy thm di stur bances. ” How ev er , because these ter m s ar e al l
m or e abstr act than “hear t bl ock , ” they ar e not as catchy . Si m i l ar l y , i t i s di f f i cul t to i ncl ude
both of the i ndependent v ar i abl es i n the ti tl e. But si nce tol uene i s the sol v ent i n ai r pl ane
gl ue, ei ther “tol uene” or “ai r pl ane gl ue” can be om i tted f r om the ti tl e. “Ai r pl ane gl ue” i s
catchi er than the l ess f am i l i ar “tol uene. ”
P. 414
N ote al so the car ef ul com pacti ng of w or ds i n thi s ti tl e. “Gl ue sni f f i ng” i s not onl y catchy but
al so condenses the l onger ter m “i nhal ati on of ai r pl ane gl ue. ” “Causes” i s a condensed w ay of
say i ng “sensi ti zes the hear t to. ” For som e r eader s “causes” m ay seem l i k e ov er statem ent,
especi al l y si nce “asphy x i ai nduced” i s om i tted. These r eader s m ay pr ef er “l eads to, ” w hi ch
i s l ess di r ect than “causes. ” Fi nal l y , “hear t bl ock ” i s a condensed w ay of say i ng
“atr i ov entr i cul ar bl ock ” w i thout usi ng an abbr ev i ati on (“AV bl ock ”).
Ev en though thi s ti tl e i s catchy and thus shoul d attr act r eader s, i t al so f ol l ow s the gui del i nes
f or the content and hal l m ar k s of a good ti tl e. Al l the necessar y i nf or m ati on i s i ncl uded:
“gl ue” i s the i ndependent v ar i abl e, “sni f f i ng” i s the ex per i m ental appr oach, “causes” i s the
m essage, “hear t bl ock ” i s the dependent v ar i abl e, and “m i ce” ar e the ani m al s studi ed. In
addi ti on, al though som e r eader s w i l l di spute the accur acy of the ti tl e and per haps al so the
com pl eteness, the ti tl e speci f i cal l y i denti f i es the m essage of the paper , i s unam bi guous, i s
conci se, and begi ns w i th an i m por tant ter m .
CHAPTER 12
Overall
The paper i s f ai r l y shor t, m eaty, and cl ear.
Most key ter m s ar e kept consi stent or ar e shor tened r ecogni zabl y (f or ex am pl e, “um bi l i cal cor d
occl usi on,” “cor d occl usi on”).
Onl y thr ee abbr ev i ati ons ar e used: pO 2 , pCO 2 , SD (par ti al pr essur e of ox ygen, par ti al pr essur e of
car bon di ox i de, standar d dev i ati on).
Introduction
What i s k now n (A–D) and the i m por tance (E) ar e cl ear l y stated.
The statem ent of the ex per i m ental appr oach (P) cl ear l y addr esses the pr obl em m enti oned i n
paragraph 2 (J).
Sur gi cal Pr epar ati on: Topi c sentence (“The sur gi cal pr otocol has been descr i bed
pr ev i ousl y . Br i ef l y , … ”).
Study Desi gn: A topi c sentence that gi v es a br i ef ov er v i ew (“Four ex per i m ents w er e
per f or m ed i n the sequence pr esented bel ow . ”).
For each ex per i m ent, w e k now w hat w as done and w hat the i ndependent and dependent
v ar i abl es and the contr ol s ar e.
The descr i pti on of each ex per i m ent i s or gani zed accor di ng to the i ndependent v ar i abl es
l i sted i n the questi on (v enti l ati on, ox y genati on, um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on).
P. 415
Pur poses (par as. 4, 5, 7) and r easons (par as. 6, 7, 9, 10, 12) ar e i ncl uded f or speci f i c
pr ocedur es.
Thi nk i ng i s cl ear l y di spl ay ed i n “Cal cul ati ons” and “Anal y si s of Data. ”
Results
The or der of i ndependent var i abl es w i thi n paragraphs 1, 2, and 3 i s consi stent (venti l ati on,
ox ygenati on, um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on).
Thi nk i ng i s cl ear l y di spl ayed i n “Major v s. Mi nor Responder s Dur i ng Venti l ati on Al one” to ex pl ai n
w hy the author i s r epor ti ng som e r esul ts that do not hel p answ er the questi on. Because the
questi on f or these r esul ts coul d not have been desi gned i nto the study, stati ng the questi on and
descr i bi ng the m ethods i n the Resul ts secti on i s appr opr i ate.
Discussion
The Di scussi on has the thr ee standar d par ts: the answ er to the questi on at the begi nni ng,
ex pl anati on and ex pansi on of the answ er i n the m i ddl e, and a r estatem ent of the answ er f ol l ow ed
by specul ati on at the end.
Topi cs ar e or gani zed f r om m ost to l east i m por tant to the questi on and answ er.
Readi ng the topi c sentence at the begi nni ng of each paragraph gi ves an over v i ew of the stor y.
Paragraph 1:
Cl ear statem ent of the contex t (A).
Paragraph 2:
Cl ear topi c sentence (D).
Paragraph 3:
Cl ear.
Al though the topi c of paragraph 3 i s tangenti al , the author consi der ed i t at l east as i m por tant as
the questi on and answ er, so i t i s i ncl uded i n the Di scussi on.
Paragraph 4:
Cl ear.
Paragraph 5:
The l ast sentence br i ngs the stor y f ul l ci r cl e by m enti oni ng the sy ndr om e of per si stent pul m onar y
hy per tensi on of the new bor n, w hi ch was f i r st m enti oned i n the Intr oducti on (E).
References
Al l r ef er ences i n the l i st ar e i n the tex t, and v i ce ver sa.
The tabl es ar e cl ear and cl ear l y suppor t the statem ents i n the tex t, and thei r f or m i s paral l el .
The var i abl es and the val ues i n the f i gur es and tabl es ar e the sam e as those i n the tex t. The key
ter m s and the uni ts of m easur em ent ar e al so the sam e.
In al l f i gur es and tabl es data ar e i denti f i ed as m ean ± SD, and n (the sam pl e si ze) i s gi ven.
P. 416
Fi gur e l egends and f ootnotes of tabl es gi ve enough i nf or m ati on to m ake the f i gur es and tabl es
under standabl e w i thout r ef er ence to the tex t.
Abstract
The si gnal s of the r esul ts (E) and of the answ er (K) ar e cl ear.
Resul ts and data i n the abstract ar e the sam e as those i n the Resul ts secti on.
The ani m al studi ed i s stated i n the descr i pti on of the ex per i m ent (C).
Data ar e pr esented as per cent change rather than as m ean and standar d dev i ati on.
Weaknesses
Overall
The statem ents of the questi on ar e not al l the sam e.
Abstr act: “to deter m i ne w hether v enti l ati on and ox y genati on of the f etal l ungs coul d
cause thi s decr ease i n r esi stance” (C).
Intr oducti on: “to deter m i ne w hether the sequenti al ex posur e of the f etus to gaseous
v enti l ati on, ox y genati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on coul d decr ease pul m onar y
v ascul ar r esi stance to l ev el s seen at bi r th” (O).
Abstract: “The changes i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance and bl ood f l ow that occur at
bi r th can be achi eved by i n uter o venti l ati on and ox ygenati on” (K).
Di scussi on: “Venti l ati on and ox ygenati on together can account f or the decr ease i n
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance, and thus f or the l ar ge i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow, that nor m al l y occur at bi r th” (B).
Di scussi on: “The changes i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance and bl ood f l ow that ar e
cr i ti cal to the adaptati on of the f etus to the postnatal env i r onm ent can be achi eved by
i n uter o venti l ati on and ox ygenati on (EE). Mor eover, m uch of the vasodi l ator y r esponse
can be achi eved w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 ” (FF).
The answ er s do not answ er the questi ons as ask ed. The v er bs i n al l the answ er s ar e
di f f er ent f r om the v er bs i n the questi ons. In addi ti on, the end of the Di scussi on (FF) i ncl udes
an answ er f or w hi ch ther e i s no questi on. Thi s i s a m ajor di scr epancy i n the ov er v i ew .
The over v i ew i n the tex t i s not as cl ear as the over v i ew i n the abstract. Or gani zati on f r om
m ost to l east i m por tant shoul d be used m or e i n the tex t. Al so, m or e techni ques of conti nui ty
need to be used i n the tex t to m ake the over v i ew cl ear : topi c sentences, ver bal and v i sual
si gnal s of topi cs, ex act r epeti ti on of key ter m s. Fi nal l y, l ong ex pl anati ons shoul d be
condensed.
The ter m “venti l ati on” i s not pr eci se. A m or e pr eci se ter m i s “l ung di stensi on,” as i ndi cated
by the def i ni ti on of venti l ati on i n the or i gi nal Intr oducti on (sent. G).
The w r i ti ng coul d be l i v el i er .
Introduction
The r ev i ew of the l i teratur e [ev i dence that the pul m onar y vascul ar r esponse to venti l ati on,
ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on m ay be
P. 417
Sal ter ed by the m etabol i c ef f ects of acute sur ger y and anesthesi a (K–N )] i s unnecessar y. Thi s
topi c i s deal t w i th m or e r el evantl y i n the Di scussi on (para. 2).
The r eason f or study i ng the ef f ect of um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on shoul d be added.
To em phasi ze the r eason f or the cum ul ati ve study desi gn, the r eason can be i ncl uded i n the
Intr oducti on rather than i n the Anal y si s of Data subsecti on of Methods.
The questi on (O) r el ates to the f i r st answ er onl y. One sol uti on i s to add a questi on that r el ates to
the second answ er. Another sol uti on i s to ask onl y the second questi on, as i n the r ev i si on bel ow.
Detai l s of the i nter v enti ons and detai l s of m ethods of m easur em ent shoul d be m ov ed to
separ ate subsecti ons. Par agr aph 8 shoul d be at the end of the Cal cul ati ons subsecti on.
Or gani zi ng f r om m ost to l east i m por tant w oul d em phasi ze the dependent var i abl e i n the
questi on (pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance) m or e.
Mor e over v i ew w oul d be usef ul , speci f i cal l y, a topi c sentence say i ng that m i cr ospher es
w er e i njected i n tw o way s, a com pani on topi c sentence i n the nex t paragraph
announci ng the second way of i njecti ng m i cr ospher es, and a transi ti on phrase stati ng
the pur pose of i njecti ng m i cr ospher es i nto the l ef t atr i um . In addi ti on, a br i ef
descr i pti on of the m i cr ospher e m ethod coul d be added (para. 10 of the Rev i si on).
Results
Putti ng the r esul ts f or pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n the m i ddl e of the Resul ts secti on and al so
bur y i ng them at the end of the paragraph on pr essur es (para. 3) m ake the i m por tant r esul ts har d
to f i nd. Or gani zi ng f r om m ost to l east i m por tant w oul d em phasi ze the r esul ts that answ er the
questi on both i n the Resul ts secti on and i n the f i gur es (pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance, the m ost
i m por tant dependent var i abl e, w oul d be i n Fi g. 1). The var i abl es on w hi ch the cal cul ati on of
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance was based (pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and m ean pul m onar y ar ter i al
and l ef t atr i al pr essur es) can com e nex t, and bl ood gases and pH can com e l ast. For thi s
or gani zati on, a topi c sentence l i nk i ng pul m onar y bl ood f l ow to pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance
shoul d be added (see para. 2 of Resul ts i n the Rev i si on).
Al ter nati vel y, r eor gani zi ng the r esul ts accor di ng to the i ndependent var i abl e, the sam e
or gani zati on as i n Methods, rather than accor di ng to the dependent var i abl e w oul d m ake the
Resul ts cor r espond m or e cl ear l y w i th the questi on, the abstract, Methods, and the cal cul ati on of
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance.
The ani m al studi ed shoul d be m enti oned at the begi nni ng of Resul ts.
The data f or pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and f or pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance do not need to be
m enti oned; ci ti ng the f i gur es i s suf f i ci ent.
P. 418
In paragraph 2, Fi gur e 1 shoul d be ci ted af ter an ex per i m ental r esul t (the ef f ect of venti l ati on),
not af ter a contr ol r esul t. In paragraph 3, Fi gur e 2 shoul d be ci ted af ter the r esul t f or venti l ati on
al one (the dram ati c decr ease), not at the end of the sentence.
In paragraph 5, the f i r st sentence (m ethods) shoul d be subor di nated to the second sentence
(r esul ts), and Tabl e 4 shoul d be ci ted af ter the r esul t, not af ter the m ethod. The r em ai ni ng
sentences can be om i tted because the detai l s ar e i ncl uded i n the Di scussi on (para. 3).
Discussion
Paragraph 1:
A str onger si gnal of the answ er i n B and a str onger l i nk betw een B and A w oul d be hel pf ul (see
the r ev i si on).
The ani m al studi ed shoul d be m enti oned i n the si gnal of the answ er.
Instead of stati ng a r esul t, sentence C shoul d state an answ er. The var i abl e shoul d be pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance and the ver b shoul d be i n pr esent tense.
Paragraphs 2–4:
Condensi ng w oul d m ake these paragraphs cl ear er.
Paragraph 3:
Identi f y i ng the gr eat var i abi l i ty i n the r esponse of f etal pul m onar y bl ood f l ow as an unex pected
f i ndi ng (sentence M) w oul d m ake the over v i ew cl ear er.
Paragraph 4:
To m ake the topi c sentence sound l ess negati ve and to f ocus the stor y on the topi c of paragraph
4, the f i r st poi nt i n sentence Y can be subor di nated to the second poi nt.
Paragraph 5:
“In uter o” bel ongs i n the ex per i m ental appr oach, not i n the answ er (EE).
The answ er shoul d be si gnal ed and the ani m al studi ed shoul d be nam ed i n the si gnal .
Changi ng the key ter m (f r om “venti l ati on” to “w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 ”) m akes the
second answ er (FF) di f f i cul t to under stand.
Pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance shoul d be added to the l ast sentence (II) to r el ate the specul ati on
to the dependent var i abl e i n the answ er bef or e r el ati ng i t to a cl i ni cal pr obl em based on the
dependent var i abl e.
Tabl es 1–3 coul d be r edesi gned so that the i ndependent var i abl e r uns dow n the f i r st col um n on
the l ef t (see the r ev i si on). In addi ti on, the data i n Tabl es 2–4, w hi ch ar e not nor m al l y di str i buted,
shoul d be m edi ans and i nter quar ti l e ranges.
Fi gur es 1 and 2 shoul d be boxandw hi sker pl ots, because the data ar e not nor m al l y di str i buted
(w hi ch i s w hy the data w er e anal y zed by the MannWhi tney U test).
The data f or the answ er to the questi on shoul d not be spl i t i nto tw o f i gur es and a tabl e (Fi gs. 1, 2
and Tabl e 3). To m ake the cal cul ati on of pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f r om pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow and the di f f er ence betw een l ef t atr i al pr essur e and sy stem i c ar ter i al pr essur e cl ear, al l the
data can be pr esented i n a tabl e (see the r ev i si on).
P. 419
In Fi gur e 3, the poi nt that i ndi v i dual changes i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow w er e ex tr em el y var i abl e i s
di f f i cul t to see because the over l ap of cur ves m akes f ol l ow i ng and com par i ng i ndi v i dual cur ves
di f f i cul t. One way to m ake the poi nt i n Fi gur e 3 cl ear i s to r edraw the graph as tw o separate
graphs, one f or m ajor r esponder s and the other f or m i nor r esponder s.
Abstract
The questi on i n the abstract (C) does not r ef l ect the paper accuratel y because the questi on om i ts
one of the i ndependent var i abl es (um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on), thus cr eati ng onl y a par ti al
ex pectati on of the topi cs i n the paper.
The ex per i m ent done shoul d m enti on pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance (D).
Changi ng the key ter m “venti l ati on” to “venti l ati on… w i th a gas m i x tur e that pr oduced no changes
i n ar ter i al bl ood gases” (E) and to “w i thout an i ncr ease i n f etal pO 2 ” (L) i s conf usi ng.
“U nex pectedl y ” shoul d be added at the begi nni ng of the r esul ts i n sentence I.
In the answ er (K), the poi nt of v i ew shoul d be the sam e as that i n the questi on; the ver b shoul d
al so be the sam e. In addi ti on, “i n uter o” bel ongs onl y i n the descr i pti on of the ex per i m ent, not i n
the answ er.
The abstract i s l onger than necessar y. Sentences B (back gr ound) and M (specul ati on) can be
om i tted. Sentences E–H (r esul ts) can be condensed.
Title
The ti tl e i ndi cates the topi c of the paper onl y v aguel y .
“Pul m onar y Ci r cul ati on” shoul d be changed to “Pul m onar y Vascul ar Resi stance” (the
dependent v ar i abl e).
Instead of “Bi r thRel ated Ev ents, ” the speci f i c i ndependent v ar i abl es that decr eased
pul m onar y v ascul ar r esi stance shoul d be nam ed.
For the m ost speci f i c ti tl e, the m essage can be stated i n a v er b (“decr ease”).
Revision
Abstract
A Inthi s study, w e asked w hether di stensi on of the l ungs, ox ygenati on of the l ungs, or occl usi on
of the um bi l i cal cor d i s the m ajor cause of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that
nor m al l y occur s at bi r th. B To answ er thi s questi on, w e assessed the cum ul ati ve ef f ects of l ung
di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on on pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n 16
chr oni cal l y i nstr um ented near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o. C We cal cul ated pul m onar y vascul ar
r esi stance f r om vascul ar pr essur es and pul m onar y bl ood f l ow (obtai ned by i njecti ng radi onucl i de
l abel ed m i cr ospher es) dur i ng basel i ne, l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d
occl usi on. D We f ound that l ung di stensi on al one decr eased pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance to 34%
of basel i ne, because of a 400% i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, no change i n pul m onar y
ar ter i al pr essur e, and a 200% i ncr ease i n l ef t atr i al pr essur e. E Ox ygenati on
P. 420
decr eased pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f ur ther (to 10% of basel i ne), because of a m odest
f ur ther i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and a decr ease i n pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e.
F U m bi l i cal
cor d occl usi on caused no f ur ther change i n any of the var i abl es. G U ne x pe c te dly, the
f etuses r esponded di f f er entl y to l ung di stensi on: i n ei ght, pul m onar y bl ood f l ow was m ax i m al
dur i ng l ung di stensi on w her eas i n the other ei ght, i t was onl y 20% of m ax i m al . H We f ound no
di f f er ences betw een the tw o gr oups of f etuses to ex pl ai n thei r di f f er ent r esponses. I We concl ude
that l ung di stensi on i s the m ajor cause of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that
nor m al l y occur s at bi r th.
Introduction
1 A At bi r th, as the l ungs r epl ace the pl acenta as the m ai n or gan of gas exchange, pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance m ust decr ease dram ati cal l y, al l ow i ng pul m onar y bl ood f l ow to i ncr ease and
ox ygen exchange to occur i n the l ungs. B If pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance does not decr ease, the
sy ndr om e of per si stent pul m onar y hy per tensi on of the new bor n occur s, of ten l eadi ng to death.
2 C Whi ch of the m any events that occur at bi r th c a us e the nor m al decr ease i n pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance i s not f ul l y under stood. D Thr ee m ajor events that coul d c a us e thi s decr ease
ar e r hy thm i c gaseous di stensi on of the l ungs, ox ygenati on of the l ungs, and occl usi on of the
um bi l i cal cor d. E Tw o of these events—di stensi on and ox ygenati on—have been studi ed i n acutel y
ex ter i or i zed f etal sheep. F The studi es suggested that ox ygenati on rather than di stensi on of the
f etal l ungs is the ma jor c a us e of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance (5–10).
G How ever, the m etabol i c ef f ects of acute anesthesi a and sur ger y used to ex ter i or i ze the f etal
sheep m ay have al ter ed the pul m onar y vascul ar r esponse i n these studi es, because thi s r esponse
i s consi der ed to be at l east par tl y m edi ated by vasoacti ve m etabol i tes (11). H In addi ti on,
al though the ef f ect of um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on on pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance has been studi ed
onl y i ndi r ectl y, um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on has been f ound to i ncr ease catechol am i nes gr eatl y (r ef ).
I Thi si ncr ease i n catechol am i nes coul d al ter pul m onar y vascul ar tone and thus coul d change
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance.
3 J Ther ef or e, i n thi s study, w e asked w hether di stensi on of the l ungs, ox ygenati on of the l ungs,
or occl usi on of the um bi l i cal cor d (D) i s the m ajor c a us e (F) of the decr ease i n pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance that nor m al l y occur s at bi r th (A, C). K To answ er thi s questi on, w e assessed
the cum ul ati ve ef f ects of l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on on pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance i n 16 near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o. L We studi ed the cum ul ati ve ef f ects
rather than the i ndependent ef f ects because the or der of the ex per i m ents coul d not be
random i zed. M One r eason i s that w e w er e concer ned that ox ygenati on of the f etal l ungs m i ght
i nduce num er ous and per haps i r r ever si bl e m etabol i c and hem ody nam i c consequences, so that
subsequent l ung di stensi on i n the absence of ox ygenati on coul d not be studi ed. N Another r eason
i s that the um bi l i cal cor d cannot be occl uded bef or e ox ygenati on. O Thus,
the study i s com posed
of f our cum ul ati ve ex per i m ents: basel i ne, l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d
occl usi on. * P To avoi d the super i m posed ef f ects of acute anestheti c and sur gi cal str esses and of
other com ponents of the bi r th pr ocess, such as pr enatal hor m onal sur ges, l abor, del i ver y, and
col d ex posur e, w e di d these ex per i m ents i n near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o 2–3 day s af ter sur ger y
f or catheter pl acem ent.
P. 421
Animals
1 A Si x teen f etal sheep w er e studi ed at 134. 9 ± 1. 2 (SD) day s of gestati on (ter m i s about 145
day s). B The f etuses w er e of nor m al w ei ght (3. 6 ± 0. 6 k g) and had nor m al bl ood gases (see
Resul ts) and hem ogl obi n concentrati ons (10. 9 ± 1. 6 g/dl ) at the begi nni ng of the study. C Ani m al
husbandr y and the study desi gn f ol l ow ed the gui del i nes of the N ati onal Insti tutes of Heal th. The
study desi gn w as appr ov ed by the Com m i ttee on Ani m al Resear ch at our uni v er si ty .
Surgical Preparation
2 D The sur gi cal pr otocol has been descr i bed pr ev i ousl y (4, 12). E Br i ef l y, dur i ng anesthesi a, f or
m easur em ent of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow and vascul ar pr essur es, catheter s w er e pl aced i n the
ascendi ng aor ta, the descendi ng aor ta, the i nf er i or vena cava, the l ef t atr i um , the pul m onar y
ar ter y, and the am ni oti c cav i ty (f or zer o pr essur e r ef er ence). F The ascendi ng aor ti c catheter was
al so used to obtai n bl ood sam pl es f or deter m i nati on of pH, pO 2 , pCO 2 , hem ogl obi n concentrati on,
and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on. G For venti l ati on, an endotracheal tube was i nser ted. H Attached
to the endotracheal tube w er e tw o pi eces of pol y v i ny l tubi ng. I One pi ece was seal ed. J The other
pi ece was pl aced i n the am ni oti c cav i ty to al l ow f r ee drai nage of tracheal f l ui d postoperati vel y.
K In addi ti on, a catheter was pl aced i n the pl eural cav i ty f or tr eatm ent i n the event of a
pneum othorax . L Fi nal l y, a bal l oon occl uder was pl aced ar ound the um bi l i cal cor d.
Study Design
3 M Tw o to thr ee day s af ter sur ger y, w e per f or m ed f our cum ul ati ve ex per i m ents on each of the 16
f etal sheep i n the f ol l ow i ng sequence: f i r st, basel i ne; then added l ung di stensi on (i nduced by
venti l ati on w i th a gas m i x tur e that pr eser ved nor m al f etal bl ood gas content); then added
ox ygenati on (venti l ati on w i th 100% ox ygen); and l ast added um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on. N Dur i ng
each of the f our ex per i m ents, w e f i r st sam pl ed f etal bl ood f r om the ascendi ng aor ta f or
assessm ent of i ndi cator s of ox ygenati on and aci dbase status (pH, pO 2 , pCO 2 , hem ogl obi n
concentrati on, and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on). O N ex t, f or the cal cul ati on of pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance, w e m easur ed m ean pr essur es i n the pul m onar y ar ter y and the l ef t atr i um
and then i njected radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es f or cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow. P We
al so m easur ed sy stem i c ar ter i al pr essur e as a check of hem ody nam i c stabi l i ty. Q We obtai ned al l
data w i thi n 5 m i n and dur i ng hem ody nam i c stabi l i ty.
4 R Bef or e the f i r st ex per i m ent, w e pl aced the ew e i n a study cage and al l ow ed i t f r ee access to
al f al f a pel l ets and water. S Bef or e begi nni ng the ex per i m ental m easur em ents, w e wai ted f or at
l east 15 m i n af ter the i nter venti on f or pr essur es and bl ood gases to stabi l i ze. T Af ter tak i ng bl ood
sam pl es, w e gave f etal or m ater nal bl ood to r epl ace bl ood l oss.
P. 422
6 B B For ox ygenati on, w e changed the gas m i x tur e to 100% ox ygen and conti nued venti l ati on.
C C We di d not add car bon di ox i de to the ox ygen because i ts addi ti on i n the f i r st f ew studi es
i ncr eased f etal pCO 2 . D D Thi s i ncr ease pr obabl y occur r ed because pl acental bl ood f l ow f el l dur i ng
ox ygenati on (4), i m pai r i ng car bon di ox i de r em oval .
7 EE For um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, w e f ul l y i nf l ated the bal l oon ar ound the um bi l i cal cor d, thus
abol i shi ng pl acental bl ood f l ow (4). F F In 4 of the 16 f etuses, w e coul d not study cor d occl usi on,
because of a f aul ty bal l oon i n tw o and the devel opm ent of pneum othoraces, w hi ch l ed to
car di ovascul ar decom pensati on, i n tw o.
P. 423
Calculations
9 I I We cal cul ated pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance as the di f f er ence betw een m ean pul m onar y
ar ter i al pr essur e and m ean l ef t atr i al pr essur e di v i ded by pul m onar y bl ood f l ow . J J For the si x
f etuses i n w hi ch w e w er e unabl e to m easur e l ef t atr i al pr essur e f or techni cal r easons, w e used
the m ean val ues obtai ned f r om the other ten f etuses dur i ng the sam e ex per i m ent.
10 KK To cal cul ate pul m onar y and other bl ood f l ow s, w e used the radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher e
m ethod (r ef ). L L Br i ef l y, w e i njected radi onucl i del abel ed m i cr ospher es (sel ected f r om 5 7 Co, 5 1 Cr,
1 5 3 Gd, 1 1 4 In, 5 4 Mn, 9 5 N b, 1 1 3 Sn, 8 5 Sr, and 6 5 Zn), 15 µm i n di am eter, i nto the i nf er i or vena cava
or i nto the i nf er i or vena cava and the l ef t atr i um . M M Dur i ng the i njecti on, w e w i thdr ew r ef er ence
bl ood sam pl es f r om vessel s pr ox i m al to each or gan gr oup (pul m onar y ar ter y f or the l ungs,
ascendi ng aor ta f or the upper body, and descendi ng aor ta f or the l ow er body and pl acenta) at a
rate of 4 m l /m i n. N N We used thi s r ef er ence f l ow, al ong w i th r ef er ence radi oacti v i ty counts and
al so or gan w ei ghts and counts, to cal cul ate bl ood f l ow s.
11 O O For cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, w e i njected m i cr ospher es i n tw o way s. P P Dur i ng
the basel i ne ex per i m ent, because ther e i s no l ef ttor i ght shunt thr ough the ductus ar ter i osus
(14), w e i njected m i cr ospher es i nto the i nf er i or vena cava and w i thdr ew bl ood sam pl es f r om the
pul m onar y ar ter y. Q Q Thi s i njecti on and w i thdrawal techni que excl udes br onchi al bl ood f l ow. RR To
cal cul ate br onchi al bl ood f l ow , i n si x f etal sheep w e al so i njected m i cr ospher es i nto the l ef t
atr i um dur i ng the basel i ne ex per i m ent. SS We f ound that br onchi al bl ood f l ow was r el ati vel y
constant and qui te sm al l , al way s l ess than 3% of com bi ned ventr i cul ar output. TT We then
subtracted thi s val ue f r om the pul m onar y bl ood f l ow val ues i n the r em ai ni ng ex per i m ents.
12 UU Dur i ng l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, w e i njected m i cr ospher es
f or cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow di f f er entl y . V V The r eason i s that upon venti l ati on,
pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance f al l s and bl ood f l ow i ncr eases dram ati cal l y. W W Thus, a l ef tto
r i ght shunt thr ough the ductus ar ter i osus cannot be excl uded. X X To
cal cul ate pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow i n the pr esence of a l ef ttor i ght shunt r equi r es a techni que that deter m i nes the
contr i buti ons of l ef t ventr i cul ar output to pul m onar y bl ood f l ow. Y Y Ther ef or e, dur i ng l ung
di stensi on, ox ygenati on, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, w e i njected m i cr ospher es l abel ed w i th
di f f er ent radi onucl i des si m ul taneousl y i nto both the i nf er i or vena cava and the l ef t atr i um and
cal cul ated pul m onar y bl ood f l ow as the di f f er ence betw een com bi ned ventr i cul ar output and the
sum of bl ood f l ow s to the f etal body and pl acenta (4). ZZ Com bi ned ventr i cul ar output was
cal cul ated as the sum of l ef t and r i ght ventr i cul ar outputs. AAA Bl ood
f l ow s to the f etal body and
pl acenta w er e cal cul ated f r om the l ef t atr i al i njecti ons and r ef er ence bl ood w i thdrawal s f r om the
ascendi ng and descendi ng aor ta (4).
13 B B B U pon com pl eti on of the l ast ex per i m ent, w e gave the ew e a l ethal dose of sodi um
pentobar bi tal , r em oved the f etus f r om the uter us, and w ei ghed i t. C C C To obtai n radi oacti v i ty
counts f or cal cul ati on of pul m onar y bl ood f l ow , w e r em oved and w ei ghed al l or gans and pl aced
them i n f or m al i n. D D D Then w e separatel y car boni zed the or gans i n an oven, gr ound them i nto a
coar se pow der, and pl aced them i n pl asti c v i al s to a uni f or m hei ght of 3 cm . EEE To count the
radi oacti v i ty of the or gans and the r ef er ence bl ood sam pl es, w e used a 1000channel
m ul ti channel pul sehei ght anal y zer (N or l and, For t Atk i nson, WI). F F F We cal cul ated the speci f i c
acti v i ty of each i sotope w i thi n a
P. 424
sam pl e by the l eastsquar es m ethod (13). GGG Fr om
the r ef er ence f l ow and radi oacti v i ty counts
and the or gan w ei ghts and counts, w e cal cul ated bl ood f l ow s accor di ng to standar d f or m ul as
(r ef ).
Analysis of Data
14 H H H We anal y zed the data f r om each ex per i m ent by the MannWhi tney U test, com par i ng onl y
the data obtai ned dur i ng one ex per i m ent w i th data obtai ned dur i ng the ex per i m ent i m m edi atel y
pr ecedi ng i t. I I I We consi der ed stati sti cal si gni f i cance pr esent w hen the P val ue was ≤ 0. 001.
J J J Al l data ar e pr esented as m ean ± 1 SD.
Results
1 A Pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n the 16 f etal sheep decr eased to 34% of basel i ne val ues
dur i ng l ung di stensi on al one (Fi gur e 1). B It decr eased an addi ti onal 10% dur i ng ox ygenati on. C It
2 D These decr eases i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance m ai nl y r ef l ect i ncr eases i n pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow. E Mean pul m onar y bl ood f l ow i ncr eased to f our ti m es the basel i ne val ue dur i ng l ung
di stensi on and to si x ti m es the basel i ne val ue dur i ng ox ygenati on (Tabl e 2). F A doubl i ng of l ef t
atr i al pr essur e al so contr i buted to the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance dur i ng l ung
di stensi on (Tabl e 2). G A s ma ll but s ignific a nt decr ease i n m ean pul m onar y ar ter i al pr essur e al so
contr i buted to the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance dur i ng ox ygenati on.
P ulmona ry
Sys te mic P ulmona ry Le ft Va s c ula r
Arte ria l Arte ria l Atria l P ulmona ry Re s is ta nc e
P re s s ure a P re s s ure a P re s s ure a Blood Flow (mmHg ·
Ex pe rime nt (mmHg) (mmHg) (mmHg) ((ml/min)/k g) min · k g/ml)
Basel i ne 52 ± 6 53 ± 8 4 ± 5 33 ± 17 (16) 1. 93 ± 1. 31
(15) b (15) (12) (16)
P. 425
3 H The i ndi v i dual changes i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng the ex per i m ents w er e ex tr em el y
var i abl e (Fi g. 2). I In som e f etuses the m ajor i ty of the i ncr ease occur r ed dur i ng l ung di stensi on,
w her eas i n other s ther e was al m ost no i ncr ease unti l ox ygenati on. J To l ook f or f actor s that m i ght
pr edi ct these di f f er ences i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, f i r st w e ar bi trar i l y di v i ded the f etuses i nto
m ajor r esponder s (i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow at l east 50% of the cum ul ati ve i ncr ease over
the f our ex per i m ents) and m i nor r esponder s (i ncr ease l ess than 50% of the cum ul ati ve i ncr ease).
K Theei ght m ajor r esponder s had an i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng l ung di stensi on that
was equal to the cum ul ati ve i ncr ease (103 ± 52%), w her eas the ei ght m i nor r esponder s had a
m uch sm al l er i ncr ease (20 ± 17%). L Then w e assessed basel i ne var i abl es that m i ght be di f f er ent
i n the m ajor and m i nor r esponder s. M Inaddi ti on, to see i f the di f f er ence coul d have r esul ted
f r om di f f er ences i n the ul ti m ate vasodi l ati on and pul m onar y bl ood f l ow, w e l ooked at tw o
i ndi cator s of vasodi l ati on and at pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng ox ygenati on. N N one of these
var i abl es show ed s ta tis tic a lly s ignific a nt di f f er ences betw een the tw o gr oups (Tabl e 3)
(unchanged f r om Tabl e 4 i n the or i gi nal v er si on).
Fi gur e 2.
Indi v i dual
changes i n
pul m onar y
bl ood f l ow
i n each of
the 8 ma jor
re s ponde rs
a nd the 8
minor
re s ponde rs
dur i ng
cum ul ati ve
l ung
di stensi on,
ox ygenati on,
and
um bi l i cal
cor d
occl usi on.
P. 426
4 O Except f or pO 2 and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on, w hi ch i ncr eased appr opr i atel y dur i ng
ox ygenati on, sy stem i c ar ter i al bl ood gases and hem ogl obi n ox ygen saturati on di d not change
s ignific a ntly dur i ng l ung di stensi on, ox ygenati on, or um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on (Tabl e 4).
(% ) (mmHg)
Discussion
1 A Of the thr ee m ajor events that occur at bi r th, r hy thm i c gaseous di stensi on of the l ungs,
ox ygenati on of the l ungs, and um bi l i cal cor d occl usi on, ox ygenati on has been r epor ted to be the
m ajor cause of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that nor m al l y occur s at bi r th (5–
10). B In thi s study i n f etal sheep, w e f ound that di stensi on of the l ungs, not ox ygenati on, is the
ma jor c a us e of thi s decr ease. C In our near ter m f etal sheep i n uter o, near l y tw othi r ds of the
decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance occur r ed dur i ng l ung di stensi on and the r em ai ni ng
onethi r d occur r ed dur i ng ox ygenati on. DNo f ur ther decr ease occur r ed dur i ng um bi l i cal cor d
occl usi on.
2 E The r eason w e f ound a l ar ger decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance dur i ng l ung
di stensi on than pr ev i ousl y r epor ted m ay be that pr ev i ous studi es w er e per f or m ed on acutel y
ex ter i or i zed f etuses (5, 6, 8–10). F An acute str ess such as that caused by the anesthesi a and
sur ger y used to ex ter i or i ze a f etus can gr eatl y al ter pr oducti on and i nhi bi ti on of var i ous
m etabol i c agents, such as pr ostagl andi ns. G Al ter ed pr oducti on and i nhi bi ti on of pr ostagl andi ns
coul d have sl ow ed the rate of decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance i n those studi es.
H Ev i dence f or thi s possi bi l i ty i s that the pr ostagl andi n sy nthesi s i nhi bi tor i ndom ethaci n has been
show n to attenuate thi s decr ease (30). I Fur ther ev i dence i s that pr ostagl andi n I 2 , a potent
pul m onar y vasodi l ator, i s pr oduced i n r esponse to ei ther m echani cal venti l ati on (20, 21) or
br eathi ng (19) i n r ecentl y del i ver ed f etal l am bs. J Gr eater vasodi l ati on w oul d decr ease pul m onar y
vascul ar r esi stance. K In addi ti on, the pr oducti on of pr ostagl andi n E 1 , pr ostagl andi n D 2 , and
brady k i ni n and the i nhi bi ti on of l eukotr i enes C 4 and D 4 m ay af f ect pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance
(31). L Thus, the var i abl e but general l y l esser ef f ects of l ung di stensi on i n the pr ev i ous studi es
m ay be ascr i bed to the var i abl e ef f ects of the study pr otocol s on the m etabol i c m i l i eu of the
pul m onar y vascul ar bed.
3 M U nex pectedl y , w e al so f ound gr eat var i abi l i ty i n the r esponse of f etal pul m onar y bl ood f l ow to
the ef f ects of l ung di stensi on. N In onehal f of the f etuses, the m ean i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood
f l ow dur i ng l ung di stensi on was
P. 427
m ax i m al , w her eas i n the other hal f i t was onl y about 20% of the cum ul ati ve r esponse.
O Inter esti ngl y, Cook et al . (11) f ound si m i l ar var i abi l i ty i n thei r study of ni tr ogen and ai r
venti l ati on: of the si x f etuses studi ed, tw o show ed no ef f ect of ni tr ogen venti l ati on but a l ar ge
ef f ect upon changi ng to ai r, tw o show ed a sm al l ef f ect of ni tr ogen and a l ar ger r esponse to ai r,
and tw o show ed a l ar ge i ncr ease i n pul m onar y bl ood f l ow dur i ng ni tr ogen venti l ati on w i th no
f ur ther change upon ex posur e to ai r. P To ex pl ai n these f i ndi ngs, Cook et al . noted that ni tr ogen
had the gr eatest ef f ect on the sm al l est f etuses. Q How ever, w e w er e unabl e to i denti f y the
r easons f or the var i abi l i ty w e f ound. R It was not on a pur el y ar i thm eti c basi s. S That i s, the m ajor
r esponder s di d not begi n w i th l ow er contr ol f l ow s or have l ow er m ax i m al f l ow s. T In f act, the tw o
gr oups had r em ar k abl y si m i l ar pul m onar y bl ood f l ow s both dur i ng basel i ne m easur em ents and
dur i ng venti l ati on w i th 100% ox ygen. U The gr oups w er e al so not di f f er ent i n thei r overal l
m atur i ty, w i th r espect to ei ther gestati onal age or w ei ght. V In addi ti on, di f f er ences i n pO 2 w er e
not r esponsi bl e f or the di f f er ences betw een m ajor and m i nor r esponder s, si nce both dur i ng
basel i ne m easur em ents and dur i ng l ung di stensi on, the m i nor r esponder s w er e nei ther m or e
hy pox i c nor m or e hy per capni c than the m ajor r esponder s. W Lastl y, adequacy of al veol ar
venti l ati on was pr obabl y not r esponsi bl e f or the di f f er ence betw een the gr oups. X Al though w e
w er e not abl e to deter m i ne the adequacy of al veol ar venti l ati on dur i ng l ung di stensi on, dur i ng
ox ygenati on, pO 2 and pCO 2 val ues w er e si m i l ar i n the tw o gr oups, w i thout the m ethod of
venti l ati on hav i ng been changed i n ei ther gr oup.
4 Y Al though the m ar ked di f f er ence betw een the pul m onar y vasodi l ator y r esponses of the tw o
gr oups of f etuses i s thus unex pl ai ned, thi s di f f er ence m ay have i m por tant i m pl i cati ons. Z Fi r st, i t
m ay be i m por tant i n uncover i ng the m etabol i c pr ocesses r esponsi bl e f or an i ncom pl ete decr ease
i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance at bi r th. AA Second, eval uati on of the concentrati ons and f l uxes
of the putati ve m etabol i c agents i nvol ved m ay dem onstrate di f f er ent f ates of these agents i n
m ajor and m i nor r esponder s.
5 B B In sum m ar y, thi s study i n f etal sheep show s that di stensi on of the l ungs, not ox ygenati on, is
the ma jor c a us e of the decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar r esi stance that nor m al l y occur s at bi r th.
C C How ever, the ef f ect of l ung di stensi on i s var i abl e. D D The var i abi l i ty i s pr obabl y m edi ated i n
par t by al terati ons i n a var i ety of vasoacti ve m etabol i tes. EE By
usi ng an i n uter o pr eparati on to
i nvesti gate the m etabol i c di f f er ences betw een f etuses that do and do not r espond to l ung
di stensi on al one, the pr ocesses r esponsi bl e f or an i ncom pl ete decr ease i n pul m onar y vascul ar
r esi stance and thus f or the sy ndr om e of per si stent pul m onar y hy per tensi on of the new bor n m ay
be better el uci dated.
FOOTNOTES
* Sentences K–O w er e or i gi nal l y i n the Anal y si s of Data subsecti on of Methods.
P. 428
P. 429
Literature Cited
References
Str unk W Jr, Whi te EB. The el em ents of sty l e. 3r d ed. N ew Yor k : Macm i l l an, 1979. Succi nctl y
states and i l l ustr ates r ul es f or cl ear , gr acef ul w r i ti ng. Al though f i r st publ i shed i n 1918, thi s
book i s sti l l ex tr em el y usef ul .
P. 430
Gar dner MJ, Al tm an DG. Conf i dence i nter val s rather than P val ues: esti m ati on rather than
hy pothesi s testi ng. Br Med J 15 Mar ch 1986;292:746–50. A cl ear ex pl anati on of w hy and how
to use conf i dence i nter v al s.
CBE Sty l e Manual Com m i ttee. CBE sty l e m anual : a gui de f or author s, edi tor s, and publ i sher s
i n the bi ol ogi cal sci ences. 5th ed. Bethesda, Mar y l and: Counci l of Bi ol ogy Edi tor s, 1983.
Incl udes num er ous tabl es on uni ts of m easur em ent, nom encl atur e, abbr ev i ati ons, and
pr oof r eader s' sy m bol s.
Young DS. Im pl em entati on of SI uni ts f or cl i ni cal l aborator y data: sty l e speci f i cati ons and
conver si on tabl es. Ann Inter n Med 1987;106:114–29. Ex pl ai ns w hat SI uni ts (Sy stém e
Inter nati onal d'U ni tés) ar e and w hy and how to use them .
Chapter 6: RESULTS
Gl antz. See Chapter 5.
P. 431
Br i scoe MH. Pr epar i ng sci enti f i c i l l ustrati ons: a gui de to better poster s, pr esentati ons, and
publ i cati ons. 2nd ed. N ew Yor k : Spr i nger Ver l ag, 1996. Gi v es cl ear , speci f i c ex pl anati ons f or
ef f ecti v e pr esentati on of al l ty pes of i l l ustr ati ons used i n bi om edi cal r esear ch paper s.
Incl udes cl ear ex am pl es of each ty pe of i l l ustr ati on. Al so i ncl udes a secti on on tabl es.
Chapter 9: REFERENCES
Lock S. A di f f i cul t bal ance: edi tor i al peer r ev i ew i n m edi ci ne. Phi l adel phi a: ISI Pr ess, 1986.
Studi es peer r ev i ew i n m edi cal jour nal s to deter m i ne w hether peer r ev i ew v al i dates publ i shed
ar ti cl es and w hether v al i dati on i s w or th the pr i ce. Concl udes that onl y ti m e v al i dates ar ti cl es
but that peer r ev i ew i s the best m eans av ai l abl e f or sel ecti ng ar ti cl es to publ i sh and f or
i m pr ov i ng the sci ence and w r i ti ng i n jour nal ar ti cl es.
Inter nati onal Com m i ttee of Medi cal Jour nal Edi tor s. U ni f or m r equi r em ents f or m anuscr i pts
subm i tted to bi om edi cal jour nal s. Ann Inter n Med 1997;126:36–47. Al so avai l abl e at
http://w w w. acponl i ne. or g/jour nal s/r esour ce/uni f r eqr. htm . Pr esents sty l i sti c r equi r em ents,
i ncl udi ng r ef er ence sty l e, f or the pr epar ati on of m anuscr i pts to be subm i tted to m or e than
300 Engl i shl anguage bi om edi cal jour nal s w or l dw i de. Al so i ncl udes statem ents on pr i or and
dupl i cate publ i cati on, author shi p, and ack now l edgm ents. See al so Bai l ar JC III, Mostel l er F.
Gui del i nes f or stati sti cal r epor ti ng i n ar ti cl es f or m edi cal jour nal s: am pl i f i cati ons and
ex pl anati ons. Ann Inter n Med 1988;108:266–73.
P. 432
P. 433
Abi l i ty, 17
Accuracy, 17
Af f ect, 17
Al ter natel y, 17
Am ong, 17
Am ount, 18
And
i n the ti tl e, 306
Augm ent, 19
Be, 21
Betw een, 18
Br i ef l y, 360
Can, 18
Capaci ty, 17
Com pose, 19
Com pr i se, 19
Concentrati on, 18
Consi st of, 19
Constant, 20
Content, 18
Conti nual , 18
Conti nuous, 18
Ef f ect, 17
Enhance, 19
et al ., 262–263
Gr oup, 140
If so, 116
Im pl y, 197
Im pr ove, 19
Inci dence, 18
Incl ude, 19
Incr ease, 19
Inter val , 19
Local i ze, 19
Locate, 19
May, 18
Mi l l i m ol al , 20
Mi l l i m ol ar, 20
Mi l l i m ol e, 20
Mucous, 20
Mucus, 20
Opti m al , 20
Opti m um , 20
Param eter, 20
Per i od, 19
Pr eci si on, 17
Pr eval ence, 18
Pr one, 21
Repr esent, 21
Show, 177
Speed, 19
P. 434
Study, 139
Suggest, 197
Supi ne, 21
The, om i ssi on of
i n the ti tl e, 308
Thi s, 37